κ 
 
 ■ 
 
+± Ϋ = 
 
 
 
 ν > 
 
 % 
 
 ν Ο 
 
 
 
 •ν 
 
 
 
 
 ''' \ Λ 
 
AN 
 
 ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 
 
 THE GREEK LANGUAGE 
 
 CONTAINING A SEEIES OF 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH EXERCISES 
 
 FOR TRANSLATION, 
 
 WITH THE REQUISITE VOCABULARIES, 
 
 AND AN 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 ON THE HOMERIC VERSE AND DIALECT. 
 
 DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER, 
 
 CORRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER. 
 
 FROM THE GERMAN BT 
 
 SAMUEL H. TAYLOR, 
 
 PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER, MASS 
 
 THIRTEENTH EDITIOW. 
 
 NEW YORK : 
 IVISON & PHINNEY, 321 BROADWAY 
 
 CHICAGO : S. C. GRIGGS & CO., Ill LAKE ST. 
 
 BUFFALO : PHINNEY & CO. CINCINNATI : MOORE, WrLSTACH, KEYS & CO. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA : SOWER & BARNES. NEWBtJRO : T. S. QUACKENBUSH. 
 
 SCHENECTADY : G-. Y. VAN DEBOGERT, W. F. BOLLE9. 
 
 AUBURN : SEYMOUR & ALWARD. 
 
 1857. 
 
•Iff 
 
 18-5"? 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, bj 
 
 ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARD WELL, 
 in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 Raphael Kuhner, the author of the following Grammar, was 
 born at Gotha, in 1802. Among his early classical teachers were 
 Doring, Rost, and Wustemann. At the University of Gottingen, 
 he enjoyed the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen, and Ottfried 
 Miiller, men of great distinction in classical philology. For more 
 than twenty years, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum at Hano- 
 ver, one of the principal German gymnasia, and has consequently 
 had the most favorable opportunities, as a practical teacher, to un- 
 derstand the wants of students and to be able to meet them. 
 
 In addition to several other important works, Dr. Kuhner has 
 published three Greek Grammars : 
 
 1. A Copious Greek Grammar, containing 1150 octavo pages, 
 
 which has been translated by W. E. Jelf, Μ. Α., of the 
 University of Oxford. 
 
 2. A School Greek Grammar, which has been translated and 
 
 published in this country. 
 
 3. An Elementary Greek Grammar, the original of the present 
 
 work, from the second edition of which a very faithful trans- 
 lation was made by John H. Millard, St. John's College, 
 Cambridge, the Greek and English exercises and the accom- 
 panying Vocabularies, however, having been omitted. 
 The grammatical principles of the present work, so far as they 
 extend, are the same as those contained in the Larger Grammar 
 already published in this country, the latter being designed to carry 
 forward the student in the same course which he had commenced in 
 the former. The work enjoys the highest reputation among classi- 
 cal scholars both in Europe and America. It is based on a thor- 
 
IV PREFACE, 
 
 ough acquaintance with the laws and usages of the language. The 
 author has evidently studied the genius of the Greek, and has thus 
 prepared himself to exhibit its forms and changes, and general phe- 
 nomena, in an easy and natural manner. His rules and statements 
 are comprehensive, embracing under one general principle a variety 
 of details. The analysis of the forms can hardly be improved. The 
 prefixes and suffixes, the strengthening and euphonic letters, are 
 readily distinguished from the root of the word. The explanation 
 of the Verb in particular, is so clear and satisfactory, that, after a 
 little practice, the student can take the root of any verb, and put it 
 into any given form, or take any given form and resolve it into its 
 elements. The rules of Syntax, too, are illustrated by so full a col- 
 lection of examples, that the attentive student cannot fail to under- 
 stand their application. 
 
 The work is designed to be sufficiently simple for beginners, and 
 also to embrace all the more general principles of the language. 
 The plan is admirably adapted to carry the student forward under- 
 standingly, step by step, in the acquisition of grammatical knowl- 
 edge. As soon as the letters and a few introductory principles, to* 
 gether with one or two forms of the verb, have been learned (the 
 sections marked with a [f] being omitted), the student begins to 
 translate the simple Greek sentences into English, and the English 
 into Greek. As he advances to new forms or grammatical princi- 
 ples, he finds exercises appropriate to them, so that whatever he 
 commits, whether forms or rules, is put in immediate practice. The 
 advantage of this mode of study is evident. The practical applica- 
 tion of what is learned is at once understood ; the knowledge ac- 
 quired is made definite ; the forms and rules are permanently fixed 
 in the mind, and there is a facility in the use of them whenever 
 they may. be needed. The student, who attempts to commit any 
 considerable portion of the Grammar without illustrative examples, 
 finds it difficult to retain in his memory what he has learned. There 
 is a confusion and indistinctness about it. One form often runs into 
 another, and one rule is confounded with another. But if each suc- 
 cessive principle is carefully studied, and then immediately put in 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 practice, in translating the Greek and English exercises, and is af- 
 terwards frequently reviewed, there will, in the end, be an immense 
 saving of time, the student will be prepared to advance with plea- 
 sure from the less to the more difficult principles, and in the subse- 
 quent part of his course, he will experience no difficulty in regard 
 to grammatical forms and rules. One of the most serious hin- 
 drances to the rapid and profitable advancement in the Greek and 
 Latin Languages, is a want of an intimate acquaintance with their 
 elementary principles. 
 
 The plan of the author proposes that the vocabularies accompa- 
 nying the exercises, be committed to memory. In doing this, the 
 student should be made to understand the value of the ear, as well 
 as of the eye, the advantage to be derived from the former being 
 altogether too much neglected in the acquisition of a foreign lan- 
 guage. When the student first sees a new word, let him fix the 
 form distinctly in his mind, and associate with it its meaning, so 
 that the meaning may afterwards readily recall the word, or the 
 word the meaning. Then, too, let him pronounce the word, and 
 associate its meaning with its sound, so that when the word is again 
 heard, the meaning may at once suggest itself. The child acquires 
 its knowledge of language almost wholly by the ear ; and if the 
 student in his efforts to learn a new language, would imitate the 
 child in this respect, his progress would undoubtedly be much more 
 rapid. This method would require that the words be often pro- 
 nounced, their definitions being at the same time carefully associa- 
 ted with them. This will in no way be so successfully accomplished 
 as by requiring the vocabularies to be committed to memory. If 
 the student knows that, when the Greek words are pronounced by 
 his teacher, he must give the definition, or that, when the definition 
 is given him, the corresponding Greek will be required, his atten 
 tion will be more carefully and perseveringly directed to the forms 
 and sounds of the words in his exercises ; he will soon have at his 
 command an extensive vocabulary of the words in more common 
 use, and will save much time, which is so often lost in turning 
 again and again to the same word in the lexicon. Such a process, 
 
 A* 
 
VI PEEFACE. 
 
 too, will be of great service in cultivating the habit of fixed and 
 close attention. In addition to the exercises contained in the 
 book, it will awaken new interest in the class, if the teacher give 
 exercises of his own, either in Greek or English, and require these 
 to be translated at once by the members of the class. It will be 
 profitable, also, for any one of the class to propose exercises for the 
 others to translate. On this subject generally, however, the expe- 
 rienced teacher will be able to point out the best course to his pupils. 
 
 In preparing the present work, it has been the aim of the trans- 
 lator to adapt it to the wants of students in this country. He has 
 occasionally, therefore, made slight changes in the original, where it 
 seemed desirable. Occasionally, too, he has given explanations of 
 his own in the body of the book, where he supposed the wants of 
 the younger pupils might require them. But all the principles of 
 the Grammar and nearly all the arrangement are retained as they 
 were given by the author. The translator has endeavored to make 
 such a book as the author himself would have done, under similar 
 circumstances. 
 
 The English exercises in the Etymological Part of the Grammar, 
 were taken from the Greek Delectus of the late Dr. Alexander Al- 
 len, London, as they had been translated by him from the Elemen- 
 tary Grammar of Kiihner. The exercises in the Syntax were trans- 
 lated by Mr. John N. Putnam, of the Theological Seminary, An- 
 dover. 
 
 In conclusion, the translator would acknowledge his special obli- 
 gations to Mr. R. D. C. Bobbins, Librarian, Theological Seminary, 
 Andover, and to Mr. A. J. Phipps, Instructor in Phillips Academy, 
 for the highly valuable assistance they have rendered in correcting 
 the proofs. 
 
 Andover, Mat 1, 1846. 
 
TABLE OP CONTENTS. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAP. I. — The Letters and their Sounds. 
 
 1. Alphabet . . . Page 1 § 
 
 2. Pronunciation of particular Let- 
 
 ters .... 2 
 
 3. Division of the Vowels.— Diph- 
 
 thongs ... 2 
 
 4. Division of the Consonants 3 
 
 5. Breathings . . Page 4 
 
 6. Marks of Crasis and Elision 5 
 
 7. Movable Consonants at the end 
 of a word ... 5 
 
 8. Change of Consonants in Inflec- 
 tion and Derivation . 6 
 
 9. Quantity of Syllables . 9 
 
 10. Accentuation ... 9 
 
 11. Change and Removal of the Ac- 
 
 cent by Inflection and Con- 
 traction ... 10 
 
 12. Change and Removal of the Ac- 
 
 cent in connected Discourse 12 
 
 CHAP. Π.— Syllables. 
 
 13. Atonies or Proclitics . 12 
 
 14. Enclitics ... 13 
 
 15. Inclination of the Accent 13 
 
 16. Enclitics accented . . 14 
 
 17. Division of Syllables . 14 
 
 18. Punctuation-marks . . 15 
 
 CHAP. HI.— 19. Some General Views of the Verb, Page 15. 
 
 CHAP. IV. — Substantive and Adjective. 
 
 20. Nature and Division of the Sub- 
 
 stantive . . .17 
 
 21. Gender of Substantives . 17 
 
 22. Number, Case and Declension 18 
 
 23. Nature and Gender of the Adjec- 
 
 tive .... 19 
 
 24. General View of the Preposi- 
 
 tions .... 19 
 
 25. Eirst Declension . . 20 
 
 25. Endings of the first Declension 20 
 
 26. Eeminine Nouns of the first De- 
 
 clension ... 20 
 
 27. Masculine Nouns of the first De- 
 
 clension ... 24 
 
 28. Second Declension . . 25 
 
 29. Contraction of the second De- 
 
 clension ... 28 
 
 30. Attic second Declension . 30 
 
 31. Third Declension . . 32 
 
 32. Remarks on the Case-endings of 
 
 the third Declension . 32 
 
 33. Gender, Quantity and Accentua- 
 
 tion of the third Declension 33 
 
 A. Words which in the Genitive 
 have a Consonant beeore the 
 ending -ος, i. e. Words 
 Stem ends in a Consonant. 
 
vm 
 
 TABLE OP CONTENTS. 
 
 § 34. I. The Nominative exhibits the 
 pure Stem ... 34 
 
 35. II. The Nominative lengthens the 
 
 short final vowel of the Stem 35 
 
 36. Syncopated nouns, e. g. πατήρ, 
 
 etc. . . . . 37 
 
 37. The Nominative appends σ to 
 
 the Stem ... 38 
 
 38. The Stem ends in a Tau-mute 39 
 
 39. Neuters ending in r and κτ 40 
 
 40. The Stem ends in ν or ντ 42 
 T3. Words which in the Genitive 
 
 have a Vowel before the end- 
 ing -ος .... 43 
 
 41. I. Substantives in -ενς, -ανς, 
 
 -ους .... 43 
 
 § 42. Π. Words in -ης, -ες . 45 
 
 43. Words in -ως (Gen. -ωος), and in 
 
 -ως and -ω (Gen. -οος) 46 
 
 44. Words in -ας (Gen. -αος), and in 
 
 -ος (Gen. -εος) . . 47 
 
 45. III. Words in -ις, -ν ς . 49 
 
 46. Words in -ϊς, -Ι, -υς, -υ . 49 
 
 47. Irregular Nouns of the third De- 
 
 clension . . .51 
 
 48. Irregular Adjectives . 52 
 
 49. Comparison of Adjectives 54 
 
 50. A. First form of Comparison 54 
 
 51. Β . Second form of Comparison 58 
 
 52. Anomalous forms of Compari- 
 
 son 58 
 
 53. Nature, Division and Formation 
 of the Adverb . . 60 
 
 CHAP. V.— Adverb. 
 
 54. Comparison of Adverbs 
 
 61 
 
 CHAP. VI.— Pronoun 
 Division of 
 
 55. Nature and Division of Pro- 
 
 nouns .... 62 
 
 56. Personal Pronouns . . 62 
 
 57. Reflexive Pronouns . . 63 
 
 58. Reciprocal Pronoun . 64 
 
 59. Possessive Pronouns . 65 
 
 60. Demonstrative Pronouns . 66 
 
 61. Relative Pronouns . . 66 
 
 62. Indefinite and Interrogative Pro- 
 
 nouns . .67 
 
 63. Correlative Pronouns . 68 
 
 64. Lengthening of Pronouns 69 
 
 65. Nature and Division of the Nu- 
 
 merals .... 69 
 
 66. Numeral Signs . . 70 
 
 67. Summary of the Cardinals and 
 
 Ordinals ... 70 
 
 CHAP. Vn.— Numerals. 
 
 68. Declension of the first four Nu- 
 
 69. 
 
 merals . 
 Numeral Adverbs 
 
 72 
 73 
 
 CHAP. VHT.— The Verb. 
 
 70. Nature of the Verb . 
 
 . 73 
 
 71. Classes of Verbs 
 
 . 73 
 
 72. Tenses 
 
 . 74 
 
 73. Modes 
 
 . 74 
 
 74. Participials. — Infinitive and Par- 
 
 ticiple .... 75 
 
 75. Numbers and Persons of the 
 
 Verb .... 75 
 
 76. Conjugation of the Verb . 75 
 
 77. Stem, Augment and Reduplica- 
 
 tion. — Verb-characteristic 75 
 
 78. Inflection-endings . . 76 
 
 79. (a) Tense-characteristic and 
 
 Tense-endings . . 76 
 79. (b) Personal-endings and Mode- 
 vowels . . 77 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 IX 
 
 $80. 
 
 81 
 
 82 
 83 
 
 84. 
 85. 
 
 85. 
 86. 
 87. 
 88. 
 89. 
 90. 
 
 91. 
 
 92. 
 
 94. 
 
 95. 
 
 98 
 
 Remarks on the Personal-endings 
 and Mode- vowels . 77 
 
 Conjugation of the regular Verb 
 in -ω . . .79 
 
 Remarks on the Paradigm 84 
 Remarks on the Formation of the 
 Attic Future . . 84 
 
 Accentuation of the Verb 85 
 
 More particular view of the Aug- 
 ment and Reduplication 91 
 Syllabic Augment . . 91 
 Temporal Augment . 92 
 
 Remarks on the Augment 92 
 Reduplication . 93 
 
 Attic Reduplication . 94 
 
 Augment and Reduplication in 
 Compound "Words . 95 
 
 Remarks on Augment and Redu- 
 plication ... 96 
 Division of Verbs in -ω according 
 to the Characteristic, together 
 with Remarks on the Forma- 
 tion of the Tenses . 96 
 Formation of the Tenses of Pure 
 Verbs .... 97 
 Verbs which retain the short 
 Characteristic Vowel in Form- 
 ing the Tenses . . 98 
 Formation of the Aor. and Fut. 
 Pass, and Perf. and Plup. Mid. 
 or Pass, with σ . . 99 
 Contract Pure Verbs . 100 
 Remarks on the Conjugation of 
 Contract Verbs . . 104 
 Contract Verbs which retain the 
 short Characteristic-vowel in 
 
 
 Forming the Tenses . 110 
 
 99. 
 
 Paradigms of the above . 110 
 
 100. 
 
 Impure Verbs . .114 
 
 101. 
 
 Strengthening of the Stem 114 
 
 102. 
 
 Change or Variation of the 
 
 
 Stem-vowel . .115 
 
 103. 
 
 Remarks on the Secondary 
 
 
 Tenses . . .116 
 
 A. Mute Veebs 
 104. Introduction to Mute Verbs 117 
 
 105. Remarks on the Characteristic 
 
 117 
 
 106. Formation of the Tenses of 
 
 Mute Verbs . .118 
 
 Paradigms of Mute Verbs. 
 
 107. Verbs whose Characteristic is a 
 
 Pi-mute . . .119 
 
 107. Pure Characteristic β, π, <ρ π 9 
 
 108. Impure Characteristic, τττ in 
 
 Pres. and Impf. . .120 
 
 109. Verbs whose Characteristic is a 
 
 Kappa-mute . . 121 
 
 1 10. Verbs whose Characteristic is a 
 
 Tau-mute . . . 121 
 
 B. Liquid Verbs. 
 
 111. Formation of the Tenses 124 
 
 112. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 126 
 
 113. Shorter Paradigms arranged ac- 
 
 cording to the Stem-vowel of 
 the Future . . .128 
 
 113. With α in the Future . 128 
 
 114. With ε in the Future . 129 
 
 115. With ί and ϋ in the Future 129 
 
 116. Special Peculiarities in the For- 
 
 mation of Single Verbs, both 
 Pure and Impure . 132 
 
 117. Syncope and Metathesis 134 
 
 118. Verbs in -ω with the Stem of 
 
 the Pres. strengthened 134 
 
 119. Verbs whose Pure Stem is 
 
 strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by inserting ν before the 
 ending . . .134 
 
 120. Verbs whose Pure Stem is 
 
 strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by inserting νε before 
 the ending . . 135 
 
 121. Verbs whose Pure Stem is 
 
 strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by inserting uv, more 
 rarely αιν, before the end- 
 ing . . . . 137 
 
 121. (a) av or aiv is inserted without 
 any change . . 137 
 
 121. (b) av is inserted before the 
 Tense-ending and ν is inser- 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ted before the Characteristic- 
 consonant of the Pure Stem 
 137 
 4122. Verbs whose Pure Stem is 
 strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by annexing the two 
 Consonants σκ or the syllable 
 ισκ 139 
 
 123. Verbs whose Pure Stem is 
 
 strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by prefixing the Eedu- 
 plication . . .141 
 
 124. Verbs to whose Pure Stem ε is 
 
 added in the Pres. and Impf. 
 142 
 
 125. Verbs whose Stem is Pure in 
 
 the Pres. and Impf., but which 
 in other Tenses assume a Stem 
 with the Characteristic ε 143 
 
 126. Verbs whose Tenses are formed 
 
 from different Eoots, and 
 which are classed together only 
 in respect to signification 146 
 
 Verbs in -μι. 
 
 127. Conjugation of Verbs in -μι 148 
 
 128. Division of Verbs in -μι 148 
 
 129. Mode-vowels . . .149 
 
 130. Personal-endings . . 149 
 
 Formation op the Tenses. 
 
 131. Pirst Class of Verbs in -μι 151 
 
 132. Second Class of Verbs in -ui 153 
 
 133. Paradigms of Verbs in -μι 153 
 
 134. Eemarks on the Paradigms 156 
 
 Summary op Verbs in -μι. 
 
 135. Verbs in -μι which annex the 
 
 Personal-endings to the Stem- 
 vowel .... 163 
 
 135. Verbs in -a . . 163 
 
 136. Verbs in -ε . . .166 
 ΈΙμί, to be, and ειμί, to go 166 
 Verbs in -μι which annex the 
 
 syllable vvv or vv to the Stem- 
 vowel and append to this the 
 Personal-endings . .169 
 
 Verbs whose Stem ends in a 
 Vowel and assumes vvv 170 
 
 Verbs whose Stem ends in a 
 Consonant and assumes vv 171 
 
 Inflection οΐκεϊμαι and ημαι 172 
 
 142. Verbs in -ω which follow the 
 
 analogy of Verbs in -μι, in 
 forming the second Aor. Act. 
 and Mid. . . .173 
 
 143. Οιδα, I know . . .175 
 
 144. Deponents, and Active Verbs 
 
 whose Put. has a Mid. form 176 
 
 137. 
 
 138. 
 
 139. 
 
 140. 
 
 141. 
 
 SYNTAX, 
 
 CHAP. I 
 
 145. Nature of a Sentence.— Subject. 
 
 —Predicate . .179 
 
 146. Agreement . . .180 
 
 147. Exceptions to the General Eules 
 
 of Agreement . .182 
 147b. Agreement when there are seve- 
 ral Subjects . .184 
 
 148. The Article . . .185 
 
 149. Classes of Verbs . . 193 
 
 Elements of a Simple Sentence. 
 
 150. Eemarks on the Classes of 
 Verbs . . . .193 
 
 151. Tenses and Modes . .198 
 
 152. More Particular View of the 
 Tenses . . .198 
 
 153. More Particular View' of the 
 Modes . . .203 
 
 153. Eemarks on the Modal Adverb 
 av . . . .205 
 
 CHAP. II.— 154. Attributives, Page 207. 
 CHAP. ΠΙ— 155. The Objective Construction, Page 209. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Cases. 
 § 156. Genitive . . .209 
 
 157. Local Relation. — Genitive of 
 
 Separation . . .209 
 
 158. Causal Relation of the Genitive 
 
 210 
 
 158. Active Genitive . . 210 
 
 15S. Genitive as the expression of 
 
 Cause . . .215 
 
 158. Genitive denoting certain Mu- 
 
 tual Relations . .217 
 
 159. Accusative . . .220 
 159. Accusative of Effect . 220 
 
 159. Accusative of the Object on 
 
 which the action is perform- 
 ed . . . .221 
 
 160. Double Accusative . 224 
 
 161. Dative . . . .226 
 
 162. Prepositions . . .230 
 
 A. Prepositions with one Case. 
 
 163. Prepositions with the Gen. only, 
 
 αντί, προ, από, έκ, ένεκα 231 
 
 1 64. Prepositions with the Dat. only, 
 
 εν, συν ... 233 
 
 165. Prepositions with the Ace. only. 
 
 ανά, εις, ως . . 233 
 
 166. Prepositions with the Gen. and 
 
 Ace, διά, κατά, υπέρ . 235 
 
 167. Prepositions with the Gen., Dat. 
 
 and Ace, άμφί, περί, έπί, με- 
 τά, παρά, προς, νπό . 237 
 
 168. Remarks on the Construction of 
 
 Verbal Adjectives in -τέος, 
 -τέα, -τέον, and on the Con- 
 struction of the Comparative 
 243 
 
 169. Remarks on the Use of Pro- 
 
 nouns . . . 244 
 
 170. The Infinitive . . 248 
 
 171. Infinitive without the Article 249 
 
 172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. with 
 
 the Infinitive . . 249 
 
 173. Infinitive with the Article 251 
 
 174. The Participle . . 252 
 
 175. The Participle as the Comple- 
 
 ment of the Verb . 253 
 
 176. The Participle used to express 
 
 Adverbial Relations and Sub- 
 ordinate Explanatory Circum- 
 stances . . . 257 
 
 177. The Adverb . . .259 
 
 Syntax of Compound Sentences. 
 CHAP. I.— 178. Coordination. Page 263. 
 
 CHAP. H.— Subordination 
 
 179. Principal and Subordinate 
 
 Clause . . .265 
 
 180. Substantive-Sentences . 266 
 
 181. Pinal Substantive-Sentences in- 
 
 troduced by ώς, lva y etc. 268 
 
 182. Adjective-Sentences . 270 
 
 183. Adverbial Sentences . 275 
 183. Adverbial Sentences of Place 
 
 and Time . .275 
 
 184. 
 185. 
 
 186. 
 
 187. 
 188. 
 
 Causal Adverbial Sentences 278 
 Conditional Adverbial Senten- 
 ces ... . 278 
 Adverbial Sentences denoting 
 Consequence or Effect 281 
 Interrogative Sentences . 283 
 Oblique or Indirect Discourse 285 
 
xu 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Homeric Dialect. 
 
 $ 189. Remarks on the Hexameter 287 
 
 190. Quantity . . .289 
 
 191. Hiatus . . . 290 
 
 192. The Homeric Dialect . 290 
 
 193. Digamma . . .291 
 
 194. Contraction. — Diaeresis. — Oa- 
 
 sis. — Synizesis. — Apocope 291 
 
 195. Change of Consonants . 292 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 196. Suffix φι(ν) . . .293 
 
 197. First Declension . . 293 
 
 198. Second Declension . 294 
 
 199. Third Declension . . 294 
 
 200. Anomalous Words . 296 
 
 201. Adjectives . . . 297 
 
 202. Comparison . . .297 
 
 203. Pronouns . . 297 
 
 204. Numerals . . . 298 
 
 The Verb. 
 § 205. Augment. — Reduplication 298 
 206. Personal-endings and Mode- 
 vowels . . . 29<» 
 Contraction and Resolution in 
 
 207. 
 
 208. 
 209. 
 210. 
 
 300 
 301 
 302 
 302 
 303 
 
 Verbs 
 Formation of the Tenses 
 Conjugation in -μι . 
 Έίμί, to be 
 
 211. Έίμι, to go 
 Verbs in -ω which in the second 
 
 Aor. Act. and Mid., in the Perf. 
 and Pltjp. Act., and Pres. akd 
 Impf., follow the analogy of 
 Verbs in -μι. 
 
 212. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 303 
 
 213. Perf. and Plup. Act. . 304 
 
 214. Pres. and Impf. . . 304 
 
ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 THE LETTERS AM) THEIR SOUNDS. 
 
 § 1 . Alphabet. 
 The Greek language has twenty-four letters, viz. 
 
 Form. 
 
 SOT7ND. 
 
 Nasie. 
 
 
 A 
 
 α 
 
 a 
 
 Άλφα 
 
 Alpha 
 
 Β 
 
 β 
 
 b 
 
 Βήτα 
 
 Beta 
 
 Γ 
 
 7 
 
 g 
 
 Γάμμα 
 
 Gamma 
 
 Δ 
 
 δ 
 
 d 
 
 Λέλτα 
 
 Delta 
 
 Ε 
 
 ε 
 
 e short 
 
 *Ε -ψϊλόν 
 
 Epsiloc 
 
 Ζ 
 
 ζ 
 
 ζ 
 
 Ζήτα 
 
 Zeta 
 
 Η 
 
 V 
 
 e long 
 
 Ήτα 
 
 Eta 
 
 Θ 
 
 θ- 
 
 th 
 
 Θητα 
 
 Theta 
 
 Ι 
 
 ι 
 
 i 
 
 'Ιώτα 
 
 Iota * 
 
 Κ 
 
 κ 
 
 k 
 
 Κάππα 
 
 Xappa 
 
 Λ 
 
 λ 
 
 1 
 
 Λάμβδα 
 
 Lambda 
 
 Μ 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 Μΰ 
 
 Mu 
 
 Ν 
 
 ν 
 
 η 
 
 Νυ 
 
 Nu 
 
 W 
 
 ϊ 
 
 X 
 
 ΑΪ 
 
 Xi 
 
 
 
 
 
 ο short 
 
 U μικρόν 
 
 Omicron 
 
 Π 
 
 η 
 
 Ρ 
 
 m 
 
 Pi 
 
 Ρ 
 
 Q 
 
 r 
 
 <Ρω 
 
 Rho 
 
 Σ 
 
 σς 
 
 s 
 
 Σίγμα 
 
 Sigma 
 
 Τ 
 
 χ 
 
 t 
 
 Ταϋ 
 
 Tau 
 
 Τ 
 
 Ό 
 
 u 
 
 7 Τ ψιλόν 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 Φ 
 
 Ψ 
 
 ph 
 
 Φι' 
 
 Phi 
 
 Χ 
 
 Χ 
 
 ch 
 
 Χι 
 
 Chi 
 
 Ψ 
 
 ψ 
 
 ps 
 
 Ψΐ 
 
 Psi 
 
 U 
 
 ω 
 
 ο long 
 
 1 
 
 "Ό. μέγα 
 
 Om^ga. 
 
2 PRONUNCIATION. DIVISION OF VOWELS. [§§ 2, O, 
 
 Remark. Sigma (σ) takes the form ς at the end of a word ; e. g. σεισμός. 
 This small ς may be used also in the middle of compound words, when the 
 first part of the compound ends with Sigma ; e. g. προςφέρω, όυςγενής. 
 
 § 2 . Pr onunciation* of particular Letters. 
 
 a has the sound of σ in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same 
 syllable, e. g. χαλ-κός ; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single 
 consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is ε or ι, e. g. ανα- 
 στάσεως, στρατιώτης ; also when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a syllable 
 not final, e. g. άγ-α-ΰ-ά, κα-τά ; it has the sound of a in father, when it is followed 
 by a single p, if in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word, except when 
 the word is a monosyllable, in which case it has the sound of α in fate, e. g. 
 Έάρ-βα-ρος, yap, άγα-&ά, τά. 
 
 γ before γ, κ, χ and ξ has the sound of ng in angle, e. g. άγγελος, ang-gelos, 
 Άγχίσης, Anchises, σνγκόπη, syncope, λάρυγξ, larynx ; γ before vowels always has 
 the hard sound, like g in get. 
 
 ε has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
 same syllable, e. g. μέγ-ας, μετ-ά ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a 
 word, or a syllable followed by another vowel, or when it forms a syllable by it- 
 self, e. g. γε, ΰέ-ω, προς-έ-ϋηκε. 
 
 η has the sound of e in me, e. g. μονή. 
 
 l has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, e. g. έλπί-σι, δτι ; 
 the sound of i in pin, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, 
 e. g. ττρίν, κίν-δννος. 
 
 ξ in the middle of a word has the sound of x, e. g. πράξις ; at the beginning 
 of a word, the sound of ζ, e. g. ξένος. 
 
 ο has the sound of short ο in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
 same syllable, e. g. λόγ-ος, κϋ-ρος ; the sound of long ο in go, when it ends a 
 word, or a syllable followed by another vowel, e. g. τό, νπό, -&ο-ός. 
 
 σ has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before μ, in the middle of 
 a word, or at the end of a word after η or ω, where it has the sound of ζ, e. g. 
 σκηνή, νόμισμα, γης, κάλως. 
 
 τ followed by ι never has the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g. Ταλατία= Galatia, 
 not Galashia. 
 
 ν has the sound of μ in tulip, e. g. τύχη. 
 
 X has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. ταχνς. 
 
 ο) has the sound of long ο in note, e. g. άγω. 
 
 §3. Division of the Vowels. — Diphthongs, 
 ε and ο are always short 7? w el s ; η and ω always long ; α, ι an<J 
 ν either long or short. 
 
 ^ The short vowels are indicated by (~;, * ne lon g h J (")> e • g• 
 a, a. The mark (*) sno ws that the vowel may ^ e either lon S or 
 short, e. g. «. 
 
 * For rules on the division of syllables, see § 17. 
 
£L 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 01 
 
 
 
 ίί 
 
 VI 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 αν 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 €V 
 
 and 
 
 ην 
 
 u 
 
 OV 
 
 and 
 
 ων 
 
 ίί 
 
 § 4.] DIPHTHONGS. — DIVISION OP CONSONANTS. 8 
 
 The diphthong's are : 
 ae pronounced like ai in aisle, e. g. αΐξ 
 
 " ei " sleight, " δεινός 
 " oi " oil, M κοινός 
 " Mil» " whine, " νιος 
 " aw " /awe?, " i>ftv£ 
 " ezi " feudal, " επλενσα, ηνξον 
 " oii " sound,* " ουρανός, ωντός ; 
 also «, ?/ and φ, i. e. α, η and ω with an Iota subscript. -These 
 three diphthongs, which are called improper diphthongs, we pro- 
 nounce like α, η and ω without an Iota subscript. 
 
 Rem. 1. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded these 
 diphthongs, and how they are represented in English ; at is expressed by the 
 diphthong ae, el by I and t, ν by y, ot by oe, ov by u^-%. g. 
 
 Φαϊδρος, Phaedrus, Ένρος, Eurus, θράκες, Thraces, 
 
 Τλαϋκος, Glaucus, Βοιωτία, Boeotia, θρήσσα, Thressa, 
 
 Νείλος, Nilus, Ήίονσα, Musa, τραγωδός, tragoedus. 
 
 Αυκεΐον, Lyceum, Έίλε'ϊ&υια, Ilithyia, 
 
 Rem. 2. With the capital letters, the Iota subscript of α, η and ω is placed in 
 a line with the vowel; e. g. Ai=a, Kt=y, Ωι=ω. 
 
 Rem. 3. When two vowels, which regularly form a diphthong, are to be pro- 
 nounced separately, it is indicated by two points called diaeresis, placed over the 
 second vowel (t, v) ; e.g. ει, o'i, αϋ. 
 
 § 4 . Division of the Consonants . 
 
 1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the organs by 
 which they are formed, into : 
 
 Palatals, γ κ χ 
 Linguals, d t & ν λ ρ a 
 Labials, β π φ μ. ν^ 
 
 Exercise for Reading, γε. γη. και. χι. χει. — δε. δαι. δη. τα. τε. 
 το. τω. τορ. τον. ταν. τψ Φι. &ει. λω. γάλα. νν. νει. νειν. νη. ρω. 
 ρα. ρεν. ρειν. σα. σον. σενω. — βον. βονν. βήτα. βάλλω. πι. τζον. 
 πω. παν. φι. φέρω. φεν. φνγη. μν. μη. μοι. 
 
 2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater or less 
 influence of the organs of speech in their formation, into : 
 
 (a) Semi-vowels, viz. λ μ ν ρ, which are called Liquids, and the 
 sibilant a ; 
 
 (b) Mutes^viz. βγδπκτφχϋ'. These nine mutes are divided : 
 
 * By some, however, pronounced like ou in group. 
 
BREATHINGS, 
 
 §5 
 
 (a) According to the organ of speech, into three Palatals, three 
 Linguals and three Labials ; 
 
 (b) According to their names, into three Kappa-mutes, three Tau- 
 mutes, and three Pi-mutes ; 
 
 (c) According to the stress of articulation, into three smooth Mutes, 
 three medial Mutes, and three rough Mutes. 
 
 
 SMOOTH. 
 
 MEDIAL. 
 
 ROUGH. 
 
 
 Palatals 
 
 κ 
 
 7 
 
 ι 
 
 Kappa-mutes 
 
 Linguals 
 
 τ 
 
 δ 
 
 & 
 
 Tau-mutes 
 
 Labials 
 
 π 
 
 β 
 
 φ 
 
 Pi-mutes. 
 
 3. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the sibilant σ, three 
 double consonants originate, — 
 
 \p from πσ βσ φσ 
 ξ from κσ γσ χσ 
 ζ from δσ. 
 
 Exercise for Reading, λαμβδα. λαμβάνω, μυ. μέλος, μαλα. νν. 
 ννκτες. ννσσω. ρενσις. ρίπτω, σίγμα. σενω. καππα. καινά, κοινον. 
 γαρ. γραν. χ&ων. — τον. την. τοιν. τέμνω, τρανμα. δέλτα, δεινοτης. 
 &εα. ϋ-ητα. &ανμα. Ό-ανμασια. — πάντα, πρώτα. ποιώ. ηανομεν. 
 βήτα. βαίνω, βάλλω, βλαπτομεν. φεύγω, φονενω. φείδομαι. — ipi. 
 ■φάνω. 'ψάλλω, ιραλτηρ. *ψνχη. ξι. ξένος, ξαν&ος. ξαινω. ζήτα. 
 ζητησις. 
 
 § 5 . Breathings. 
 
 1. Every vowel is pronounced with a Breathing ; this is either a 
 smooth or rough Breathing. The smooth is indicated by the mark 
 ('), the rough by ('). One of these marks is placed over every 
 vowel which begins a word ; e. g. ώον, Ιστορία. The rough breath- 
 ing corresponds to the English and Latin h. The smooth breathing 
 is connected with every vowel, which has not the rough. 
 
 2. In diphthongs, the mark of the breathing is placed over the 
 second vowel ; e. g. νιος, ευ&νς, αντίκα.. But when the improper 
 diphthongs a, % φ, are capital letters, the breathing is placed over 
 the first vowel ; e. g. Άιδης, pronounced like άδης, Hades. 
 
 3. The liquid ρ is pronounced with the rough breathing, and 
 hence has the mark of the breathing at the beginning of the word ; 
 e. g. ράβδος. When two @'s occur in the middle of a word, the first 
 
§§ 6, 7.] CRASIS AND ELISION. — MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 5 
 
 is pronounced with the smooth breathing, the last with the rough. 
 The first has the mark of the smooth, the last that of the rough 
 e. g. Πυρρός. 
 
 Exercise for Reading, άλφα. αυξάνω. αιΌ-ηρ. αίμα. εμον. eW> 
 είτα. ε'ιμα. ευρει. ευρίσκω, ολίγον, οίνου. οίον. οίον. ήτα. ηύξον. 
 ήχων. ίωτα. ίνα. Ιπποι. νπο. νιοι. ίωκη. άδω. Ώιδη. 
 
 § 6. Mark of Or a sis and Elision (Coronis — 
 Apostrophe.) 
 
 1. The mark of Crasis and Elision is the same as the smooth 
 breathing. 
 
 2. When two words come together, the one ending, and the other 
 beginning, with a vowel, these two vowels frequently coalesce and 
 form one long syllable. This coalescence is called Crasis, and the 
 mark by which it is indicated, Coronis. The Coronis is placed 
 over the syllable formed by Crasis, and when this syllable is a diph- 
 thong, over the second vowel. But the Coronis is omitted, when a 
 word begins with a vowel or diphthong formed by crasis ; e. g. το 
 όνομα = τουνομα, το έπος — τουπος, τά άγα&ά = τάγα&ά, 6 οίνος 
 = φνος. 
 
 Rem. In Crasis the Iota subscript (§ 3) is written only when the ι belongs to 
 the last of the coalescing vowels ; e. g. και εϊτα=κ<ϊτα ; but καϊ επειτα=κάπειτα. 
 
 3. Elision is to be distinguished from Crasis. It consists in the 
 omission of a vowel before a word beginning with a vowel. The 
 mark by which Elision is indicated, is called Apostrophe ; e. g. άπο 
 οΐκου = άπ οικον. The Apostrophe is omitted in compound words ; 
 e. g. άπεαρερον from άπο-εφερον. 
 
 t § 7 . Mo vable Consonants at the end of a word. 
 1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels in 
 two successive words, is by appending a ν (called ν εφελκνστικόν, 
 suffixed) to certain final syllables, viz. 
 
 (a) to the Dat. PL in σι, to the two adverbs, πέρυσι, the last year, 
 παντάπασι, universally, and all adverbs of place in σι ; e. g. 
 πάσιν ελεζα ; ή Πλαταιάσιν ηγεμονία ; 
 (β) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in σι ; e. g. τνπτονσιν εμέ, 
 
 τί&ησιν εν τη τραπεζη; so also to εστί; 
 (γ) to the third Pers. Sing, in ε ; e. g. ετυπτεν εμε; 
 (δ) to the numeral είκοσι, although even before vowels the ν is 
 often omitted ; e. g. εΐκοσιν άνδρες and είκοσι άνδρες ; 
 ι* 
 
CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 [§8. 
 
 Rem. In Attic prose, ν εφε?ικνστικόν regularly stands at the end of complete 
 sections, and sometimes before the longer punctuation-marks, where no vowel 
 follows. 
 
 2. The word όντως (thus) always retains its full form before a 
 vowel, but drops its final β before another consonant; e. g. ο ν t ω ς 
 εποίησεν, but ο ν τ ω ποιώ. So also άχρις and μέχρις. 
 
 3. In like manner the Prep, εξ (ex) retains its full form before 
 vowels and at the end of a sentence, but before consonants takes the 
 form εκ ; e. g. εξ ειρήνης, ειρήνης εξ, but εκ της ειρήνης ; so also in 
 composition ; e. g. εξελαννειν, but εκτελεϊν. 
 
 4. So the negative ονκ (not) becomes ov before a consonant ; e. g. 
 ουκ αισχρός, but ov καλός ; and before a rough breathing it becomes 
 ονχ ; e. g. ονχ ήδνς ; yet not before the aspirate ρ ; e. g. ov ρίπτω. 
 
 f § 8 . Ch ange of Consonants in Infl ection and 
 Derivation. 
 
 1. A Tau-mute (τ δ &) before another Tau-mute is changed 
 into o" ; e. g. 
 
 έπεί-&--&ην from πεί-&ω becomes έπείσ&ην 
 πεϊ&-τέος " πεί-&ω " πειστέος 
 
 ηρείδ-ΰην " ερείδω " ήρείσΰ-ην. 
 
 2. A Pi-mute (π β φ) before μ is changed into μ, 
 
 a Kappa-mute (κ γ χ) 
 
 α 
 
 μ 
 
 " 1, 
 
 a Tau-mute (τ δ #) 
 
 u 
 
 μ " " σ;β. 
 
 (α) Pi-mute : λέλειπ-μαι 
 
 from 
 
 λείπω becomes λέλειμμαι 
 
 τέτρφ-μα,ί 
 
 α 
 
 τρίβω " τέτριμμαι 
 
 γέγραφ-μαι 
 
 α 
 
 γράφω " γέγραμμαι 
 
 (β) Kappa-mute : πέπλεκ-μαι 
 
 " 
 
 πλέκω " πέπλεγμαι 
 
 λέλεγ-μαι 
 
 " 
 
 λέγω remains λέλεγμαί 
 
 βέβρεχ-μαι 
 
 " 
 
 βρέχω becomes βέβρεγμαι 
 
 (γ) Tau-mute : ΐ/νυτ-μαι. 
 
 " 
 
 άνύτω " ηννσμαι 
 
 ηρείδ-μαί 
 
 α 
 
 ερείδω " ηρειαμαι 
 
 πέπε^-μαι 
 
 n 
 
 πεί-&ω " πέπεοσμαί 
 
 κεκόμίδ-μαί 
 
 " 
 
 κομίζω " κεκόμισμαι 
 
 . A Pi-mute (τι β φ) 
 
 with 
 
 σ is changed into ψ, 
 
 a Kappa-mute (κ γ χ) 
 
 with 
 
 σ is changed into J, 
 
 a Tau-mute (τ δ &) disappears before a ; e. g. 
 
 . (α) Pi-mute: λείπσω 
 
 from 
 
 λείπω becomes λείψω 
 
 τρίβσω 
 
 " 
 
 τρίβω 
 
 ' τρίψω 
 
 γράφσω 
 
 " 
 
 γράφω 
 
 ' γράψω 
 
 {β) Kappa-mute : πλέκσω 
 
 a 
 
 πλέκω 
 
 1 πλέξω 
 
 λέγσω 
 
 " 
 
 λέγω 
 
 * λέξω 
 
 βρέχσω 
 
 α 
 
 βρέχω * 
 
 1 βρέξω 
 
 (γ) Tau-mute: άνντσω 
 
 " 
 
 άνντω 
 
 1 άννσα 
 
 έρείδσω 
 
 α 
 
 ερείδω 
 
 ' έρείσο 
 
 πεί&σω 
 
 Ιί 
 
 πεί&ω 
 
 ' πείσω 
 
 έλπίδσω 
 
 α 
 
 ελπίζω 
 
 " ελπίσω. 
 
18•] 
 
 CIIANGE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 Remake 1. The Prep, εκ before σ is an exception ; e. g. έκσώζω, not Ιξώζω. 
 
 4. Ν before a Pi-mute (π β φ xp) is changed into μ, 
 
 Ν before a Kappa-mute (κ γ χ £) is changed into γ, 
 
 Ν before a Tau-mute (τ δ &) is not changed ; e. g. 
 
 kv -πειρία becomes εμπειρία συν-καλέω becomes συγκαλέω 
 
 έν-βάλλω " εμβάλλω σνν-γιγνώσκω " συγγιγνώσκω 
 
 εν-φρων " έμφρων σύν-χρονος " σύγχρονος 
 
 έν-ψϋχος " έμψυχος συν-ξέω " συγξέω ; 
 
 but συντείνω, συνδέω, συν&έω. 
 
 Rem. 2. The enclitics form an exception ; e. g. δι/περ, τόνγε, not δμπερ, τόγγε 
 
 5. JV before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid ; e. g. 
 
 συν-λογίζω becomes συλλογίζω συν-μετρία becomes συμμετρία 
 έν-μένω " εμμένω συν-ρίπτω " συβρίπτω. 
 
 Rem. 3. The preposition έν before ρ is an exception ; e. g. ένρίπτω, not έρ- 
 
 6. iV is dropped before σ and ζ" ; the preceding vowel, short by 
 nature, remains short after the omission of ν before o" ; e.g. 
 
 συν-ζυγία becomes συζυγία, δαίμον-σι becomes δαίμοσι. 
 
 Rem. 4. Exceptions : Έ v, e. g. ενσπείρω, ενζεύγνυμι ; πάλιν, e.g. πάλίν- 
 σκιος ; some forms of inflection and derivation in -σαι and -σις ; e. g. πέφανσαι 
 from φαίνω, and some few substantives in -ινς and -υνς. The ν of συν in com- 
 position, is changed into σ before another σ followed by a vowel ; e. g. συσσώζω, 
 instead of συνσώζω ; but when σ is followed by a consonant, ν is dropped ; e. g. 
 σύν-στημα becomes σύστημα. 
 
 7. But when ν is joined with a Tau-mute, both letters disappear 
 before σ, and, as a compensation, the short vowel is lengthened be- 
 fore o", namely, e into ει, ο into οι>, «, ?, ν into a, i, ν ; e. g. 
 
 τυφ-&έντ-σι becomes τυφ-&εϊσι 7Λοντ-σι becomes λέουσι 
 
 σπένδ-σω " σπείσω ελμινδ-σι " ελμ'ισι 
 
 πάντ-σι " ττασί δεικνύντ-σι " δεικνϋσι 
 
 τύψαντ-σι " τύψΰσι Εενοόώντ-σι " αενοφώσι. 
 
 8. A Pi-mute (π β φ) or a Kappa-mute (κ y χ) before a Tau- 
 mute, must be of the same order as the Tau-mute, i. e. smooth, mid- 
 dle or rough. Hence only a smooth Mute (n κ) can stand before 
 the smooth Mute r ; only a medial (β γ) before the medial δ ; only 
 an aspirate (φ χ) before the aspirate # ; consequently, πτ and κ? ; 
 §δ and yo" ; cp& and χβ- ; e. g. 
 
 β before r becomes π as : from τρί/3ω 
 
 ψ " - τ • " 77 " " γράφω 
 
 γ " τ " /c " " λέγω 
 
 χ " τ " ac " " βοέ^ω 
 
 7Γ " d " /? " « /οί>7Γτω 
 
 " δ " /? " « ypa^cj 
 
 κ " d " ν " " πλέκω 
 
 τέτριβ-ται 
 
 = τέτριπται 
 
 γέγραφ-ται 
 
 = γέγραπται 
 
 λέλεγ-ται 
 
 = λέλεκται 
 
 βέβρεχ-ται 
 
 = βέβρεκται 
 
 κύπ-δα 
 
 = κύβδα 
 
 γράφ-δην 
 
 = γράβδην 
 
 πλέκ-δην 
 
 = πλέγδην 
 
8 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [§ 8 
 
 χ oefore δ becomes γ as : from βρέχω βρέχ-δην = βρέγδην 
 
 τ? " & " φ " " πέμπω έπέμπ-ΰην — έπέμφ-&ην 
 
 β " ■& " φ " " τρίβω έτρίβ-ϋ-ην = έτρίφ&ην 
 
 κ " # " ^ " " πλέκω έπλέκ--&ην = έπλέχ&ην 
 
 γ " ί9• " # " " λέ/ω έλέγ-Ό-ην = έλέ^ι9-??ν. 
 
 Εεμ. 5. The preposition έ /c does not undergo this change ; e. g. έκδοϋναι, έκ- 
 •6 είναι, etc., not by δούναι, εχ& είναι. 
 
 9. The smooth mutes {n χ τ) before a rough breathing, are chan- 
 ged into the cognate aspirates (φ χ &), not only in inflection and 
 derivation, but also in two separate words. The medials (β γ δ), 
 however, are thus changed only in the inflection of the verb; in 
 other cases they remain unchanged ; hence : 
 
 α,π' ov = αφ' ov, έπη μέρος (from έπί, ημέρα) = εφήμερος 
 
 έπνφαίνω (from έπί, ίφαίνω) — έφνφαίνω, τέτνπ-ά = τέτυφα 
 
 ουκ δσίως = ονχ όσίως, δεκήμερος (from δέκα, ήμερα) = δεχήμερος 
 
 άντ' ων = άν& ών (from αντί), άντέλκω (from αντί, έλκω) = άν&έλκω 
 
 είλογ-ά =ε'ίλοχα, but λέγ' έτέραν, not λέχ έτέραν 
 
 τέτριβ-ά = τέτριφα, but τρΐβ' ούτως, not τρϊφ' ούτως. 
 
 Rem. 6. This change also takes place in Crasis ; e. g. ΰάτερα from τα. έτερα 
 ($ 6. 2). When two smooth mutes precede an aspirate, they must both be chan- 
 ged into aspirates (No. 8) ; e. g. έφΰ-ήμερος, instead of έπτή μέρος (from επτά, 
 ήμερα), νύχο^ δλην, instead of νύκτ' όλην. 
 
 10. If, in the reduplication of verbs, whose stem begins with an 
 
 aspirate, this aspirate is to be repeated, then the first aspirate is 
 
 changed into the corresponding smooth Mute ; thus, 
 
 φε-φίληκα from φιλέω is changed into πεφίληκα 
 χέ-χνκα 
 
 ΰέ-Φϋκα 
 ΰί-ΰημι 
 
 The two verbs, &νειν, to sacrifice, and ti&ivai (stem ΘΕ), to place, 
 also follow this rule, in the passive endings which begin with & ; e. g. 
 
 έτν-•&ην, τυ-Φήσομαι, έτέ-ΰην, τε--&ήσομαι, instead of έΰυ-ΰην, έΰέ-ΰην. 
 
 11. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an aspirate,* 
 the aspiration is transferred to the smooth r, when the aspirate be- 
 fore the final syllables beginning with o~, t and μ, must be changed 
 into an unaspirated consonant (according to No. 3. 8. 2.) ; by this 
 transfer, τ is changed into the aspirate &. Thus : 
 
 τρέφ-ω is changed into {ΰρέπ-σω) ΰρέψω, ϋ-ρεπ-τήρ, [ΰρέπμα) d -ρέμμα 
 ταφή, ΤΑΦ-ω into ϋάψω, ΰ-άπ-τω, (τέΰαπ-μαι) τέΰαμμαι 
 τρνφος, ΤΡΥΦ-ω into ΰρύψω, ϋ-ρύπ-τω (τέϋ-ρυπ^-μαι) τέ-βρυμμαι 
 
 * Some other Grammarians regard the words to which this principle applies, 
 as having two aspirates in the root ; but as it is not euphonic for two successive 
 syllables to begin with an aspirated letter, the first must be smooth, as long as 
 the second remains, and when the second disappears, the first becomes rough 
 again ; hence έχω (properly έχω), but Fut. έξω.— Tit. 
 
 " χεω i 
 
 κεχυκα 
 
 " •&ύω ' 
 
 τέϋ-υκα 
 
 stem ΘΕ * 
 
 τίΰημι. 
 
§§ 9, 10.] QUANTITY OP SYLLABLES. ACCENTUATION. 9 
 
 τρέχ-ω into (ΰρέχ-σομαή ΰρέξομαι ; — τριχ-ός into ΰρίξ, ϋ-ριξίν. 
 ταχίς has ΰάσσων in the Comparative. (But τεύξω from τενχω, τρνξω 
 from τρνχω, remain unchanged). 
 Rem. 7. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, τρέψω, ϋύπτα (stem 
 ΤΑΦ), ΰρυπτω (stem ΤΡΥΦ), begin with ■&, the aspiration of the two final con- 
 sonants φΰ; changes r, the initial consonant of the stem, into # ; e. g. 
 
 έΰρέφ-ΰηι^ ϋρεφ-ϋϊ/ναι, ■&ρεφ--&ήσεσ&αί 
 έ&άφ--&ην, -&αφ--&είς, •&αφ-ϋ-ήσομαι, τεϋάφ--&αύ. 
 
 Rem. 8. In the imperative-ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both syllables 
 would begin with •#, viz. -ϋ-η&ι, not the first, but the last aspirate is changed into 
 the corresponding smooth mute, thus : -ΰητι ; e. g. τύφ&ητι, not τνφ&ηϋι. 
 
 12. Ρ is doubled, — (a) when the augment is prefixed ; e. g. t§- 
 qeov ; (b) in composition, when ρ is preceded by a short vowel ; e. g. 
 άρρηκτος, βα&νρροος ; but εν-ρωστος (from εν and ρωνννμι). 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 §9. Quantity of Syllables. 
 
 1. A syllable is short by nature, when its vowel is short, viz. ε } 
 ο, a, t, v, and when a vowel or single consonant follows a short vow- 
 el ; e. g. 'ενοαϊσά, 'επν&ετό. 
 
 2. A syllable is long by nature, when the vowel is a simple, long 
 vowel, viz. 77, ω, α, Γ, v, or a diphthong ; e. g. "ήρώς, κρινώ, γε'φνρα, 
 ίαχνρονς, παιδευής; hence contracted syllables are always long; 
 e. g. "άκων (from άεκων), βότρϋς (from βότρνας). 
 
 3. A syllable with a short vowel is made long by position, when 
 two or more consonants or a double consonant (ζ ξ ψ) follow the 
 short vowel ; e. g. 'εκστελλω, τνιράντες, κόράξ (κόρακος), τράπεζα. 
 
 Remaek. But when a short vowel stands before a mute and liquid, it regu- 
 larly remains short : e. g. ατεκνος, άπέττλος, ''ακμή, βοτρνς, δίδράχμος. In two 
 cases, however, a short vowel before a mute and liquid is made long, — (a) in 
 composition ; e. g. 'έκνέμω ; (b) when one of the medials (β γ δ) stands before 
 one of the three liquids, λ μ ν ; e. g. βίβλος, ενόδμος, πέπλεγααι. 
 
 § 10. Accentuation. 
 1. The accentuation of a word of two or more syllables, consists 
 in pronouncing one syllable with a stronger* or clearer tone than 
 
 * In our pronunciation of the Greek, however, we do not observe the written 
 accent; but the Greeks undoubtedly distinguished the syllable on which tho 
 written accent stands, by a greater stress of voice. — Tr. 
 
10 CHANGE OF ACCENT BY INFLECTION, ETC. [§ 11. 
 
 the other ; e. g. destructible, immortal. A monosyllabic word also, 
 must be accented, so as to form, in connected discourse, an indepen < 
 dent sound. The Greek language has the following marks of ac- 
 centuation : 
 
 (a) The acute ( ' ), to denote the sharp tone ; e. g. λόγος ; 
 
 (b) The circumflex (~), to denote the protracted tone; e.g. 
 σώμα; 
 
 (c) The grave (* ), to denote a softened acute on the final sylla- 
 bles of words in connected discourse (§ 12, 1.). The grave 
 is also used instead of the acute to distinguish certain words ; 
 e. g. τις, any one, and τις, who ? 
 
 Kem. 1. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs ; and, at the 
 beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand after 
 the breathing, but the circumflex over it ; e. g. άπαξ, ανλειος, αν εϊπ?]ς, εύρος, αίμα. 
 But with capital letters, the accent is placed after the breathing, over the first vowel 
 of the diphthongs a, y, ω; e. g. "Αιδης. With the diaeresis (§ 3. Eem. 3.), the 
 acute stands between, and the circumflex over, the points ; e. g. άΐδης, κληϊδι. 
 
 2. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether 
 this is long or short ; e. g. καλός, άν&ρώπον, πόλεμος ; yet upon the 
 antepenult, only when the last is short, and is not long by position ; 
 e. g. αν&ρωπος, but άν&ρώπον. 
 
 3. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two syllables, 
 but that syllable must always be long by nature ; e. g. τον, σώμα ; 
 it stands upon the penult, however, only when the ultimate is short, 
 or long by position only ; e. g. τείχος, χρήμα, πράξις, ανλαξ (Gen. 
 -άκος), καλανροψ, κατηλιψ, Λημώναξ. 
 
 Εβμ. 2. According to the accentuation of the last syllable, words have the 
 following names: 
 
 (a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute ; e. g. τετνφώς, κακός, •&ήρ ; 
 
 (b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute ; e. g. τύπτω ; 
 
 (c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute; e. g. άν&ρωπος, τυ- 
 πτόμενος, άν&ρωποί, τνπτόμενοί ; 
 
 (d) Perispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex; e. g. κακώς; 
 
 (e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex; e. g. πράγμα, φι- 
 λούσα ; 
 
 (f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented; e. g. πράγματα, πράγμα. 
 
 t §11. Change and Removal of the Accent by In- 
 flection and Contraction. 
 
 1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quantity 
 of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, then, according 
 
§ 11.] CHANGE OF THE ACCENT BY INFLECTION, ETC. 11 
 
 to the preceding rules, there is generally also a change or removal 
 of the accent. 
 
 (a) By lengthening the final syllable, 
 
 (a) A Proparoxytone, as πόλεμος, becomes a Paroxytone ; 
 e. g. πολέμου ; 
 
 (β) A Properispomenon, as τείχος, a Paroxytone ; e. g. τεί- 
 χους; 
 
 (γ) An Oxytone, as ϋ-εός, a Perispomenon ; e. g. &εου. Yet 
 this change is limited to particular instances. See § 26, 
 5, (a). 
 
 (b) By shortening the final syllable, 
 
 (a) A dissyllabic Paroxytone with long penult, as φεύγω, 
 
 becomes a Properispomenon ; e. g. φεύγε, but τ&ττω, 
 
 ταττε ; 
 (β) A polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 
 
 or short, becomes a Proparoxytone ; e. g. βουλεύω, βον~ 
 
 λένε. 
 
 (c) By the accession of a syllable or syllables at the beginning of 
 
 a word, the accent is commonly removed towards the beginning of 
 
 the word ; e. g. φεύγω, εφευγον. By the accession of syllables at 
 
 the end of a word, on the contrary, the accent is removed towards 
 
 the end of the word ; e. g. τύπτω, τυπτόμε&α, τυφ&ησόμε&α. 
 
 Rem. 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and the 
 exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below under the accen- 
 tuation of the several parts of speech. 
 
 2. In respect to contraction, the following principles apply : 
 
 (1) When neither of two syllables to be contracted is accented, 
 the contracted syllable also is unaccented, and the syllable which, 
 previous to contraction, had the accent, retains it also after the con- 
 traction ; e. g. φίλεε = φίλει, but φιλεει = φιλεΐ, γενεί '== γένει, γε- 
 νεών = γενών. 
 
 (2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is accent- 
 ed, the contracted syllable also is accented : 
 
 (?) The contracted syllable when composed of the antepenult and 
 penult, takes the accent which the general rules require ; e. g. 
 
 άγαπάομαι = άγαιτώμαι, φίλεόμενος = φιλονμενος 
 
 έσταότος = έστώτος όρ&όουσι = όρ&οϋσι 
 
 ΰληεσσα = νλήσσα τιμαόντων = τιμώντων ; 
 
 Jb) The contracted syllable, when it is the ultimate, takes : 
 
 (a) The acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted 
 has the acute ; e. g. εσταώς = εστώς ; 
 
12 CHANGE OF ACCENT. — ATONICS. [§§ 12, 13. 
 
 (β) The circumflex, when the first of the syllables to be con ■■ 
 
 tracted, is accented; e. g. 9 ηχόϊ=?= ήχοι. 
 
 Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below under the 
 contracted declensions and conjugations. 
 
 t § 12. Change and Removal of the Accent in 
 connected Discourse. 
 
 1. In connected discourse, the Oxy tones receive the mark of the grave, i. e. 
 by the close connection of the words with each other, the sharp tone is weaken- 
 ed or depi'essed 5 e. g. Ει μη μητρυιη περικαλλης 'Ή.ερίβοία ην. But the acute 
 must stand before every punctuation-mark, by which an actual division is made 
 in the thought ; e. g. Ό μ£ι> Κϋρος έπέρασε τον ποταμόν, οι δε πολέμιοι απέ- 
 φνγον. 
 
 Exceptions. The interrogatives τις , τι, quis ? quid ? always remain oxytoned. 
 
 2. In Oasis (§ 6. 2), the accent of the first word is omitted, and the word formed 
 from the two s has the accent of the second word ; e. g. τά άγαϋά = τάγαϋ-ά, τον 
 ονρανοϋ = τούρανοϋ, τη ημέρα = ΰήμέρα, τό όνομα = τοννομα ; yet, according 
 to the general rule (§ 10. 3), the long vowel formed by Crasis takes the circum- 
 flex instead of the acute, when the second word was a dissyllabic paroxytone, 
 with a short final syllable ; e. g. rd έπος = τούπος, τά άλλα = τάλλα, το έργον 
 = τονργον, τά 'όπλα — -&ωπλα. 
 
 3. In Elision (§ 6, 3), the accent of the elided vowel goes back as an acute upon 
 the preceding syllable ; yet, when the word, from which a vowel has been elided, 
 is a preposition or one of the particles, αλλά, ονδέ, μηδέ, or one of the enclitics, 
 τινά and ποτέ, the accent of the elided vowel wholly disappears, and also when 
 the lUJcented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided; e. g. 
 
 πολλά έπαΰον = πδλλ' έπα•&ον παρά έμον = παρ' έμοϋ 
 
 δεινά έοωτας = δείν' έρωτφς από έαυτοϋ = άφ' έαντοϋ 
 
 φημί έγώ = φήμ' έγώ άλλα έγώ = αλλ' έγώ 
 
 αισχρά έλεξας = αϊσχρ' έ?*,εξας ονδξ έγώ = ούδ' έγώ 
 
 επτά ήσαν = 'έπτ' ήσαν τινά έλεγε = τιν' έλεγε. 
 
 t § 13. Atonies or Proclitics. 
 
 Some small words are termed Atonies or Proclitics, which, in 
 connected discourse, are so closely united to the following word, 
 that they, as it were, coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They 
 are: 
 
 (a) the forms of the article, ό, ή , οι, ai ; 
 
 (b) the prepositions, iv, in, εις (ig), into, ix (if), ex, ως, ad; 
 
 (c) the conjunctions, ως, as, that, so that, when, ει, if; 
 
 (d) ου (ουκ, ονχ), not; but at the end of a sentence and with the 
 meaning No, it has the accent ; e. g. ου (ουκ). 
 
§§ 14, 15.] ENCLITICS. — INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 13 
 
 t § 14. Enclitics. 
 
 Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in 
 
 connected discourse, are so closely joined, in certain cases, to the 
 
 preceding word, that they either lose their tone, or throw it back 
 
 upon the preceding word ; e. g. φίλος τις, πόλεμος τις. They are : 
 
 (a) The verbs ειμί, to be, and φημί, to say, in the Pres. Indie, except the 
 second Pers. Sing, ει, ίΛοω art, and φής, thou say est ; 
 
 (b) The following forms of the three personal pronouns : 
 
 III. P. S. οϊ) Dual, σφωΐν PL σφίσι(ν) 
 ol 
 i 
 
 I. P. S. μον Η. P. S. σοΰ 
 
 μοί σοί 
 
 με σε 
 
 (c) The indefinite pronoun, τϊς, τι, through all the cases and numbers, to- 
 gether with the abridged forms του and τω, and the indefinite adverbs πώς, 
 πω, πη, πού, πο&ί, ποϋέν, ποί, ποτέ ; the corresponding interrogative words, 
 on the contrary, are always accented ; e. g. τίς, τι, πώς, etc. ; 
 
 (d) The particles, τέ, τοί, γέ, vvv, πέρ, ϋήν, and the inseparable particle, όέ, 
 both when it expresses the direction whither ; e. g. "Ερεβόςδε, to Erebus, and also 
 when it serves to strengthen a word ; e. g. τοσόςόε. 
 
 t§15. Inclination of the Accent. 
 
 1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the ac- 
 cent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence (§ 12. 1), 
 again becomes acute ; e. g. 
 
 ■Θήρ τις for ϋήρ τις καλός εστίν for καλός εστίν 
 
 καί τίνες " καϊ τ ίνες ποταμός γ ε " ποταμός γέ 
 
 κα?οός τε " καλός τέ ποταμοί τίνες " ποταμοί τινές. 
 
 2. A Perispomenon unites with the following enclitic without 
 
 further change of the accent ; e. g. 
 
 φώς τι for φώς τϊ ψιλεϊ τις for φιλεΐ τις 
 
 φώς εστίν " φώς εστίν καλού τίνος " καλού τινός. 
 
 Remark. Long syllables in enclitics are considered in respect to the accen- 
 tuation as shori ; hence οίντινοιν, ώντινων are viewed as separate or compound 
 words, like καλών τίνων. 
 
 3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic enclitic 
 
 without further change of the accent ; but there is no inclination 
 
 when the enclitic is a dissyllable ; e. g. 
 
 φίλος μον for φί?ιθς μοΰ, but φίλος εστίν, φίλοι φασίν, 
 άλλος πως " άλλος πώς, " άλλος ποτέ, άλλων τινών. 
 
 4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the fol- 
 lowing enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last syllable. 
 
 άνϋρωπός. τις for άν&ρωπος τις σώμα τι for σώμα τϊ 
 
 άν&ρωποί τίνες " άν&ρωποι -ινές σώμα έστιν " σώμα εστίν. 
 
 2 
 
14 ENCLITICS ACCENTED. DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. |_§§ 16, 17. 
 
 Remark. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back its accent 
 on the preceding ; e. g. ει πέρ τις σε μοι ώησί ποτέ. 
 
 t § 16. ^Enclitics Accented. 
 
 1. The enclitics at the beginning of a sentence, retain their accent; e. g. Φτ? 
 μ\ εγώ τοϋτο. — Ύινες λέγουσιν. — ΕΊσι -&εοί. — But instead of εστί[ν) at the be 
 ginning of a sentence, the form έστι(ν) is used; also, if it stands in connection 
 with an Inf. for έξεστι(ν), and after the particles αλλ, ει, ουκ, μη, ώς, καί, μέν^ 
 'ότι, ποϋ, also after the pronoun τοϋτ' ; e. g. "Εστί -&εός. — "Εστί σοφός άνήρ.•— 
 "Εστίν ούτως. — "Εστίν Ιδεϊν, ϊδεϊν εστίν, licet videre. — ΕΙ εστίν, ουκ εστίν, τοϋτ' 
 εστίν. 
 
 2. Φημί and the other persons of the Ind., retain the accent, if they are sepa- 
 rated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark ; e. g. "Εστίν άνήρ άγα- 
 ■&ός, φημί. 
 
 3. The enclitic personal pronouns, σον, σοι, σε, ol, σφίσι{ν), retain their ac- 
 cent: 
 
 (a) When an accented Prep, precedes ; e. g. παρά σον, μετά σε, προς σοι. In 
 this case, instead of the enclitic forms of the Pron. of the first Pers., the 
 longer, regularly accented forms are chosen ; e. g. 
 
 παρ' έμοϋ not παρά μου, προς έμοί not προς μοι, 
 
 κατ' έμέ " κατά με, περί έμοϋ " περί μου. 
 
 Remark. The unaccented prepositions are united to the enclitic forms ; e. g. 
 εκ μου, εν μοι, ες σε, ες με, εκ σου, εν σοι. 
 
 (b) After copulative or disjunctive conjunctions ; e. g. έμ£ καί σε, εμε ή σε, 
 as generally, when the pronouns are emphatic, e. g. in antitheses. 
 
 (c) The forms ου, ol, i, are accented only when they are used as reflexive 
 pronouns. 
 
 4. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the en- 
 clitic rests, disappears by Elision ; e. g. καλός δ' εστίν, but καλός δε εστίν — 
 πολλοί δ' είσίν, but πολλοί δε είσιν. 
 
 t § 17. Division of Syllables. 
 
 Preliminary Remark. The division of syllables, according to our mode of 
 pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent.* 
 
 The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in 
 polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult 
 is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there 
 is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word. 
 
 1. In dissyllables, a single consonant following a or ι in the penult, is joined 
 to the final syllable ; e. g. ά-γω, πα-ρά, μά-λα, ΐ-να, l -τός, ϊ-χωρ. 
 
 2. In dissyllables, a single consonant following ε or o, is joined to the first 
 syllable ; e. g. λόγ-ος, τέλ-ος. 
 
 * ΤΙιφ term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference 
 to our pronunciation cf the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek 
 words. 
 
§§ 18, 19.] PUNCTUATION-MARKS. VIEWS OF THE VERB. 15 
 
 3. The double consonants ξ and ψ are joined to the vowel preceding them ; 
 e. g. τάξ-ω, δίψ-ος, πράξ-ις, άντιταξ-άμενος. But ζ is joined to the vowel fol- 
 lowing it, except when it stands after ε or o, or after an accented vowel in the an- 
 tepenult, — in which case it is joined with these vowels ; e. g. νομί-ζω, νόμι-ζε, 
 άρπά-ζω ; but τράπεζ-α, όζ-ος, νομίζ-ομεν, άρπάζ-ομεν. 
 
 4. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and 
 ι having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after ε and ο having 
 the accent, is joined to these vowels ; e. g. άγ-αΰός, ποτ-αμός, βα-σιλ-έα, υ-πολ- 
 αβών, ό-πότ-ερος, τίΰ--ομεν. 
 
 Exception. A single consonant after an accented syllable, and followed by two 
 vowels, the first of which is ε or ι, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. στρα-τιά. 
 άναστά-σεως, στρα-τίώτης. 
 
 5. A single consonant after a long vowel or υ is joined to the vowel follow- 
 ing ; e. g. φω-νή, χρη-μα, η-κω, ομί-λος, όπά-δός ; άργϋ-ρος, μν-ρίας, άΰΰ-μία, 
 φν-γόντες, φν-γομεν. 
 
 Exception. A single consonant following long a or ι in the antepenult, and 
 having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding ; e. g. άποκρΐν-ατο, έση 
 μαν-αμεν. 
 
 6. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, are sepa 
 rated ; e. g. πολ-λά, ίσ-τάναι, τέΰ-νηκα, ΰ-αρ-βαλέως, κλυτοτέχ-νης. 
 
 Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel , 
 C. g. έτί-τρωσκον. 
 
 7. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last 
 two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel, if not, the last only ; 
 e. g. άν-ΰ-ρωττος, άν-δρία, but ετέρφ-&ην. 
 
 8. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part 
 ends with a consonant ; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a 
 ihoft syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e. g. εκ-βαίνω, συν 
 ■κ-φώνησίς, πρόΰ-εσις, άνάβ-ασις, \>\λίνπο-φήτης, not νποφ-ήτης ; so παρα-βαίνω 
 
 t § 18. Punctuation- marks. 
 The colon and semicolon are indicated by a period at the top of the line j 
 e. g. εύ έλεξας • πάντες γαρ ομολόγησαν. The interrogation-point is like cur 
 semicolon ; e. g. τίς ταϋτα έποίησεν ; The period, comma and exclamation- 
 point are like ours. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 § 19. Some general views of the Verb. 
 1. The verb expresses action; e. g. to bloom, to strike. In 
 Greek there are three classes of verbs, viz. active, passive and mid- 
 dle. The middle has a reflexive signification, i. e. it expresses an 
 action which proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, i. e. 
 an action which the subject performs on itself; e. g. τνπτομαι, I 
 
16 
 
 SOME GENERAL VIEWS OF THE VERB. 
 
 [§19. 
 
 strike myself, βουλεύομαι, I advise myself, αμύνομαι, I defend myself. 
 In most of the tenses, the middle and passive forms are the same ; 
 e. g. τνπτομαι, I strike myself "amd lam struck. 
 
 2. At present only those forms of the verb are given which are 
 necessary for translating the exercises that occur before the entire 
 verb is presented. 
 
 
 Num- 
 
 
 Num- 
 
 
 Mode. 
 
 ber and 
 Person. 
 
 Present Active. 
 
 ber and 
 Person. 
 
 Present Middle or Passive. 
 
 Indica- 
 
 s. 
 
 1. 
 
 βουλεύ-ω, I advise. 
 
 s. 
 
 1. 
 
 βονλεύ-ομαι, I advise my- 
 
 tive. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 self, or am advised. 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 βουλεύ-εις, thou ad- 
 visest. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 βουλεν-ΐ], thou advisest thy- 
 self, or art advised. 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βουλεύ-εί, he, she, or 
 it advises. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βουλεύ-εται^ advises him- 
 self, or is advised. 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1. 
 
 βονλεύ-ομεν, we ad- 
 vise. 
 
 P. 
 
 1. 
 
 βουλευ-όμεΰα, we advise 
 ourselves, or are advised. 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 βουλεύ-ετε, ye advise. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 βουλεύ-εσϋ-ε,γβ advise your- 
 selves, or are advised. 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βονλεύ-ουσι(ν), they 
 advise. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βουλεν-ονται, they advise 
 themselves, or are advised. 
 
 Impera- 
 
 s. 
 
 2. 
 
 βούλεν-ε, advise thou. 
 
 s. 
 
 2. 
 
 βονλεν-ου, advise thyself, 
 
 tive. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 or he advised. 
 
 
 P. 
 
 2. 
 
 βονλέύ-ετε, advise ye. 
 
 P. 
 
 2. 
 
 βονλεύ-εσβ-ε, advise your- 
 selves, or he advised. 
 
 Infikit. 
 
 
 
 βονλεύ-ειν, to advise. 
 
 
 
 βουλεν-εσϋ-αΐ, to advise one- 
 self, or be advised. 
 
 Remark. On the ν έφελκνστικόν in βουλεύουσιν, see § 7, 1. (b). 
 3. Also the following forms of the irregular verb ειμί, to be, may 
 be learned : 
 
 έστί(ν), he, she, or it is 
 
 εισί(ν), they are 
 
 Icr&i, be, έστω, let him, her, or it be 
 
 ην, he, she, or it was 
 ήσαν, they were 
 έστε, be ye. 
 
 I. Vocabulary* and Exercises for 
 
 Άεί, always. εΐ, if. 
 
 άλη&εύω, to speak the 'έπομαι, w. dat. to follow, 
 
 truth. [ly. accompany. 
 
 ανδρείως, manfully, brave- εσΰίω, w. gen. and ace. to 
 αριστεύω, to be the best, eat, corrode. 
 
 excel. έχει, it has itself, it is. 
 
 βωτεύω, to live. 
 βλακεύω, to be lazy. 
 γράφω, to write, enact. 
 διώκω, to pursue, strive af- 
 ter. 
 
 ηδέως, pleasantly, cheer- 
 fully, with pleasure. 
 
 ■d -ανμάζω, to wonder, ad- 
 mire. 
 
 μετρίως, moderately. 
 
 Translation. 
 
 καί, and, even. 
 
 κακώς, badly, cowardly. 
 
 κα?ίώς, well. 
 
 κολακεύω, to flatter. 
 
 μάχομαι, w. dat. to fight, 
 contend. 
 
 μη, not, always placed be- 
 fore the Imperative and 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 οδύρομαι, to mourn, la- 
 ment. 
 
 * All the vocabularies are designed to be committed to memory before trans- 
 lating the exercises. 
 
§§ 20, 21.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. GENDER. 17 
 
 ου (ουκ, ονχ), not. [cate. πιστεύομαι, to be believed, χαίρω, w. dat, to rejoice, to 
 
 παιδεύω, to bring up, edu- σπεύδω, to basten, exert rejoice at, or over, dc- 
 
 7rai'Cw,toplay,joke,playat. oneself. light in. 
 
 πίνω(ΐ), u\ gen. and ace, to φεύγω, to flee, flee from, "φέγω, to blame, 
 
 drial- shun. *. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. The verb agrees with its subject-nominative, 
 in number and person. In Greek, as in Latin, the subject of the 
 first and second person of the verb, need not be expressed except 
 for emphasis, it being sufficiently indicated by the ending of the verb. 
 
 Άεί αλήθευε. Χαίρε. "Έπου. Μη ΰδύρεσθε. Ήδέως βιοτεύω. Καλώς 
 παιδεύομαι. Καλώς γράψεις. Ει κακώς γράφεις, ψεγη. Ει κολακεύει, ουκ αλη- 
 θεύει. Εί κολακεύει, ου πιστεύεται. Φεύγομεν. Ει φεύγομεν, διωκόμενα. 
 Κακώς φεύγετε. Εί β?,ακεύετε, ψέγεσθε. Έί ανδρείως μάχεσθε, θαυμάζεστε. 
 Ει κό?Μκεύουσιν, ουκ ά?.ηθεύουσιν. Ού καλώς έχει φεύγειν. Καλώς έχει αν- 
 δρείως μάχεσθαι. Εί διώκτ/, μη φεύγε. Ανδρείως μάχου. Ει βλακεύουσι, ρέ- 
 γονται. Εί αληθεύεις, πιστεύη. Άει αριστεύετε. Μετρίως εσθιε καϊ πίνε 
 και παίζε. 
 
 I speak the truth. If I speak the truth, I am believed. Rejoice (pi). Mourn 
 thou not. Thou livest pleasantly. He writes well. It is (has itself) well, to 
 speak the truth. Always speak (pi) the truth. Eollow (pi). He is well brought 
 up. Flatter thou not. If thou flatterest, thou art not believed. To be believed, 
 is (has itself) well. If we^ are lazy, we are blamed. If ye speak the truth, ye 
 are believed. If they fight bravely, they are admired. If they flee, they are 
 pursued. Be thou always the best. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 
 
 § 20. Nature and division of the Substantive. 
 
 A substantive is used to express a thing or object. There are 
 two classes of substantives: (a) the names of persons, as man, 
 woman ; (b) the names of things, as earth, garden, 
 
 §21. Gender of Substantives. 
 
 The gender of substantives, which is three-fold, as in Latin, is 
 determined partly by their signification, and partly by their ending. 
 The last mode of determining the gender will be treated under the 
 several declensions. With respect to the signification, the follow- 
 ing general rules apply : 
 
 2* 
 
18 NUMBER, CASE AND DECLENSION. [§22, 
 
 1. Names of males, of nations, winds, months, mountains, and 
 most rivers, are masculine. 
 
 2. Names of females, of countries, islands, most cities, most trees, 
 and plants, are feminine. 
 
 3. The names of the letters and fruits, infinitives, diminutives in 
 -ov, except the proper names of females, e. g. ή Λεόντων, all indecli- 
 nable words, and finally, every word used as the mere symbol of a 
 sound, e. g. το μήτηρ, the word mother, are neuter. 
 
 4. The names of persons, which have only ohe form for the 
 Masc. and Fern., are of common gender ; e. g. ό ή Φεός, god and 
 goddess. 
 
 § 22. Number , Case and Declension. 
 
 1. The Greek has three numbers, the Singular, the Plural, 
 and the Dual, which denotes two. 
 
 2. It has five Cases, namely : 
 
 (1) Nominative, the case of the subject ; 
 
 (2) Genitive, the whence-case ;* 
 
 (3) Dative, the where-case ; 
 
 (i) Accusative, the whither-case ; 
 
 (5) Vocative, the case of direct address. 
 
 Rem. 1. The Nom. and Voc. are called direct cases, the others, oblique cases. 
 Substantives and adjectives of the Neuter gender have the same form in the 
 Nom., Ace. and Voc. of the three numbers. The Dual has only two forms for 
 cases, one for the Nom., Ace. and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
 
 3. There are in Greek three different ways of inflecting sub- 
 stantives and adjectives, distinguished as the First, Second and 
 Third Declensions. 
 
 Rem. 2. In parsing• a substantive, the beginner may accustom himself to an- 
 swer the following questions: what case 1 ? what number 1 ? what declension? wlvat 
 gender ? from what nominative, e. g. is άν&ρώποίς % 
 
 QUESTIONS : ANSWERS : 
 
 What case ? Dative case ; 
 
 What number ? Plural number ; 
 
 WJiat declension ? Second declension ; 
 
 What gender ? Masculine gender ; 
 
 From what nominative ? From the Nom. άν&ρωπος ; 
 e. g. σώματος is the Gen. Sing, of the third declension, neuter gender, from the 
 nominative σώμα, body. 
 
 * See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 156 seq. — Tr. 
 
§§ 23, 24.] 
 
 ADJECTIVE. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 19 
 
 § 23. Nature and Gender of the Adjective. 
 
 1. The adjective expresses a quality, which is considered either 
 as already belonging to an object, e. g. the red rose, or one which 
 is merely attributed to an object, e. g. the rose is red. In both in- 
 stances, in Greek, as in Latin, the adjective agrees with its sub- 
 stantive in Gender, Number and Case ; e. g. 6 ά γ α&ος άν&ρωπος, 
 bonus homo, 6 άνϋ-ρωπος άγ α&ός εστίν, homo bonus est ; η καλή 
 Μονσα, pulchra Musa, ή Μονσα καλή εστίν, Musa pulchra est; 
 το καλόν εαο, pidchrum ver, το εαρ καλόν εστίν, ver pidchrum 
 est. 
 
 2. Hence the adjective, like the substantive, has three genders. 
 Yet all adjectives do not have separate forms for the three genders ; 
 many have but two separate endings, viz. one for the masculine and 
 feminine gender, the other for the neuter ; e. g. ό ησνχος άνήρ, a 
 quiet man, ή ησνχος γννή, a quiet woman, το η σνχον τε'κνον, a 
 quiet child; several, indeed, have only one ending, which commonly 
 indicates only the masculine and feminine genders, seldom the neuter 
 gender ; e. g. ό φ ν γ ά ς άνήρ, an exiled man, ή φ ν γ ά ς γννή, an 
 exiled woman. 
 
 3. The declension of adjectives, with few exceptions, is like that 
 of substantives. 
 
 §24. General view of the Prepositions. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks Before proceeding to the declensions, a general 
 view of the prepositions will be given 3 as a knowledge of these is indispensable 
 in translating•. 
 
 I. Prepositions with one case. 
 (a) With the Genitive : 
 αντί, ante, before, for, instead of 
 πρό, pro, before, for, 
 από, ah, from, by, 
 
 έκ (εξ before a vowel), ex, out of, from, 
 ένεκα, for the sake of, on account of 
 
 Here belong several adverbs which, 
 like prepositions, govern the Gen., viz. 
 πρόο~&εν and έμπροσ&εν, before, 
 δττισΰ-εν, behind, 
 άνεν and χωρίς, without, 
 πλην, except. 
 
 (b) With the Dative: 
 hv, Lat. in with AbL in, upon, 
 
 συν, cum, with, and the adverb 
 άμα, together with. 
 
 (c) With the Accusative : 
 ανά, on, upon, xip, through, 
 είς, Lat. in with Ace, into, to, 
 ως, to, ad. 
 
 Π. Prepositions with Genitive ana 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 δίά, through, by ; with Ace. often, on ac 
 
 count of, 
 κατά, de, down, with Ace. often, through, 
 υπέρ, super, over, above; with Gen. often, 
 for. 
 
20 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. — FEMININE NOUNS. [§§ 25, 26. 
 
 ΙΠ. Prepositions with Gen., Dat. and παρά, by, near; with Gen. from (prA- 
 
 Accusative. perly from being near some one) ■ 
 
 άμφί and περί, around, about ; with Gen. with Ace. to (properly into the pres- 
 
 often, for, ence of some one), 
 
 επί, upon, at ; with Ace. often, towards, προς, before ; with Ace. often, to, 
 
 against, ύπό, sub, under. 
 μετά, with; with Ace. often, after, 
 
 § 25. First Declension. 
 
 The first declension has four endings, ά, η (or ά), ας and ης; a 
 and η are feminine, ας and ης masculine gender. 
 
 
 
 
 Ε 
 
 NDINGS. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ά 
 
 ά or η 
 
 ας or ης 
 
 at 
 
 ύ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 νς 
 
 ας 
 
 ης 
 
 ον 
 
 0)V 
 
 atv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 9- V 
 
 αις 
 
 αιν 
 
 Ace. 
 
 αν 
 
 αν 
 
 ην 
 
 αν ην 
 
 ας 
 
 α 
 
 - Voc. 
 
 a 
 
 ά 
 
 V- 
 
 α η, ά. 
 
 α, 
 
 α. 
 
 §26. I. Feminine Nouns. 
 
 1. (a) The-Nom. ends in -a or -a, and the a remains in all the 
 cases, if it is preceded by ρ, ε or ι (a pure) ; e. g. χωρά, land, ίδεα, 
 form, σοφία, wisdom, χρεία, utility, έννοια, good-will: These make 
 the Gen. in -ας, Dat. in -a. Here belong also some substantives 
 in -a ; e. g. άλαλα, and some proper names ; e. g. Ανδρομέδα, 
 Λήδα, Φιλομήλα, Gen. -ας, Dat. -a. 
 
 (b) The Nom. ends in -a, which remains only in the Ace. and 
 Voc. ; in the Gen. and Dat., the -a is changed into -η, if it is pre- 
 ceded by λ, λλ, 6, οβ (ζτ), ζ, ξ, ι//, ν. 
 
 (c) In other instances, the Nom. ends in -η, which remains through 
 all the cases of the Sing. 
 
 2. When -a is preceded by ε or a, in some words -εα is con- 
 tracted into -η, and -άα into -a. Then the final syllable remains 
 circumilexed in all the cases. 
 
§26.] 
 
 FIRS! DECLENSION. — FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 21 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 a. η through all tlie cases. 
 
 
 
 Justice. 
 
 Honor. 
 
 Opinion. 
 
 Tig-tree. 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 V 
 
 δίκ-η 
 
 τιμή 
 
 γνώμη 
 
 συκ-(έα)ή 
 
 Gen. 
 
 της 
 
 όίκ-ης 
 
 τιμής 
 
 γνώμης 
 
 σνκ-ης 
 
 Dat, 
 
 T7, 
 
 δίκ-η 
 
 τιμή 
 
 γνώμη 
 
 σνκ-η 
 
 Ace. 
 
 την 
 
 όίκ-ην 
 
 τιμήν 
 
 γνωμην 
 
 σνκ-ην 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ω 
 
 όίκ-η 
 
 τιμή 
 
 γνώμη 
 
 σνκ-η 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 αϊ 
 
 δίκ-αι 
 
 τιμαί 
 
 γνώμαι 
 
 σνκ-αΐ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 των 
 
 δικ-ών 
 
 τιμών 
 
 γνωμών 
 
 σνκ-ων 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ταις 
 
 δίκ-αις 
 
 τιμαις 
 
 γνωμαις 
 
 σνκ-αις 
 
 Ace. 
 
 τας 
 
 δίκ-ύς 
 
 τιμάς 
 
 γνώμάς 
 
 σνκ-ας 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ω 
 
 δίκ-αι 
 
 τιμαι 
 
 γνωμαι 
 
 συκ-αι 
 
 Dual.N. A. V. 
 
 TU 
 
 δίκ-ΰ 
 
 τιμά 
 
 γνώμά 
 
 σνκ-ά 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 ταιν 
 
 δίκ-αιν 
 
 τιμαιν 
 
 γνωμαιν 
 
 σνκ-αιν. 
 
 
 b. a through 
 
 all the cases. 
 
 C. 
 
 a G. ης. 
 
 
 
 
 (a) long α. 
 
 
 
 (b) short a. 
 
 
 Shadow. 
 
 Country. 
 
 Mina. 
 
 Hammer 
 
 . Muse. 
 
 Lioness. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 V 
 
 σκι-ά 
 
 χώρα 
 
 μν-(άα)ά 
 
 σφνρά 
 
 Μονσά 
 
 λέαινα 
 
 α 
 
 της 
 
 σκι-ας 
 
 χωράς 
 
 μν-ας 
 
 σφύρας 
 
 Μούσης 
 
 λεαίνης 
 
 D. 
 
 τη 
 
 σκι-α 
 
 Χ"Ρ9 
 
 μν-α 
 
 σφύρφ 
 
 Μούση 
 
 λκαίνη 
 
 Α. 
 
 την 
 
 σκι-αν 
 
 χωράν 
 
 μν-αν 
 
 σφνράν 
 
 Μονσάν 
 
 λέαινάν 
 
 ν. 
 
 ω 
 
 σκι-α 
 
 χωρά 
 
 μν-α 
 
 σφνρά 
 
 Μοΰσά 
 
 λέαινα 
 
 Ρ. Ν. 
 
 αϊ 
 
 σκι-αί 
 
 χώραι 
 
 μν-αι 
 
 σφνραι 
 
 Μονσαι 
 
 λέαιναι 
 
 G. 
 
 των 
 
 σκι-ων 
 
 χωρών 
 
 μν-ων 
 
 σφνρών 
 
 Μουσών 
 
 λεαίνων 
 
 D. 
 
 ταϊς 
 
 σκι-αϊς 
 
 χωραις 
 
 μν-αις 
 
 σφύραις 
 
 Μούσαις 
 
 λεαίναις 
 
 Α. 
 
 τάς 
 
 σκι-άς 
 
 χωράς 
 
 μν-ας 
 
 σφύρας 
 
 Μούσας 
 
 λέαινας 
 
 V. 
 
 ω 
 
 σκι-αι 
 
 χωραι 
 
 μν-αι 
 
 σφϋραι 
 
 Μονσαι 
 
 λέαιναι 
 
 Dual. 
 
 τά 
 
 σκι-ά 
 
 χώρα 
 
 μν-α 
 
 σφύρα 
 
 Μούσα 
 
 λέαινα 
 
 
 ταϊν 
 
 σκι-αιν 
 
 χωραιν 
 
 μν-αιν 
 
 σψύραιν 
 
 Μούσαιν 
 
 λεαίναιν. 
 
 Remark. The feminine of all adjectives of three endings, is like the declen- 
 sion of the above paradigms ; e. g. η κ α?, η τιμή, the glorious honor; η χρνσϊ) 
 (contracted from χρυσέΰ, as σνκη from σνκέα) στολή, the golden robe, της χρυ- 
 σής στολής; η δικαία γνώμη, the just opinion, της δικαίας γνώμης; ή 
 έ χ ■& ρ ά χώρα, the hostile land, της ε χ ■& ρ ά ς χώρας. 
 
 3. The quantity of the endings is given in § 25. The feminine ending -a, is 
 always long in adjectives ; e. g. έλεύΰ-ερος έλεν&έρα ελεύθερον, free. 
 
 4. "With regard to the accentuation, it is to be observed that : 
 
 (a) The plural ending -a ι, is considered short in respect to the accent; hence 
 λέαιναι (not ?ιεαίναι), Μονσαι (not Μονσαι) ; 
 
 (b) The accent remains on the accented syllable of the Nom., as long as the 
 laws of accentuation permit. 
 
 Exceptions, (a) The vocative δέσποτα from δεσπότης, lord; 
 
 (β) In adjectives in -ος, -η (-ά), -ov, the feminine is accented on the same syl- 
 lable as the masculine, through all the cases, where the nature of the final sylla- 
 ble permits. Hence the nominative plural feminine of βέβαιος, έλΓΑ^ερος, άν• 
 
22 FIKST DECLENSION.— FEMININE NOUNS. [§ 26. 
 
 ■&ρώπινος, is accented on the antepenult, viz. βέβαιοι, 3 έ β αιαι, ελενϋεοοι, 
 Ιλεύΰεραι, ανθρώπινοι, ανθρώπινα ι, although the feminine Sing., on ac- 
 count of the long ending -η and -a, is a paroxytone, τίζ. βεβαία, ελευθέρα, αν- 
 θρωπινή ; 
 
 (y) In the Gen. PI. of the first Dec, the final syllable -ων is circumflexed ; e. g. 
 λεαίνων from λέαινα, νεανιων from νεανίας. But to this there are the following 
 exceptions: (1) Feminine adjectives and participles in -ος, -η (-ά), -ov, are ac- 
 cented like the Gen. of masculines ; e. g. των καλλίστων Μουσών, from κάλλισ- 
 τος, καλλίστη, κάλλιστον ; hut other feminine adjectives and participles, are cir- 
 cumflexed in the Gen. PI. ; e. g. βαρύς, βαρεϊα, βαρύ, Gen. PL βαρέων, βαρειών) 
 — (2) The substantives χρήστης, usurer, άφύη, anchovy, ετησίαι, monsoons, -χαάχλού- 
 νης, wild-boar, which in the Gen. PI. remain Paroxytones, thus χρηστών, άφύων. 
 
 5. The accent of the Nom. is changed according to the quantity of the final 
 syllable, as follows : 
 
 (a) Oxytones become Perispomena, in the Gen. and Dat. of all three numbers 
 e. g. τιμής, -y, -ών, -αϊς, -αϊν ; this is true also of the second declension. 
 
 (b) Paroxytones with a short penult, remain paroxytones through all the 
 cases, except the Gen. PL, which is always circumflexed on the final syllable ; 
 on the contrary, paroxytones with a long penult, become properispomena, when 
 the ultimate is short, which is the case in the Nom. PL ; e. g. γνώμη, γνώμαι, but 
 γνωμών ; Άτρείδης, Ά τρεΐδαι, but 'Ατρειδών ; on the contrary, δίκη, δίκαι, but 
 δικών ; 
 
 (c) Properispomena become paroxytones, if the ultimate becomes long ; e. g. 
 Μοϋσά, Μ,ονσης; 
 
 (ά) Proparoxytones become paroxytones, if the ultimate becomes long; e. g. 
 λέαινα, λεαίνης. 
 
 II. Vocabulary. 
 
 Αδικία, Gen. -ας, η, injus- επαγγέλλομαι, to promise, πενία, -ας, ή, poverty. 
 
 tice. επάγω, to bring on. πλεονεξία, -ας, η, avarice. 
 
 άδολεσχία, -ας, η, loqua- ηδονή, -ης, η, pleasure. πολ?Μκις, often. 
 
 ciousness, prating. θεραπεύω, to esteem, hon- συνήθεια, -ας, η, inter- 
 άληθινή, -ης, vera, true. or, worship. course, society. 
 
 άπέχομαι, w. gen., to ab- κακία, -ας, η, vice. τείρω, tero, to wear out, 
 
 stain from, keep oneself καρδία, -ας, ή, the heart. weaken, tire, plague. 
 
 from. καταφυγή, -ης, ή, a refuge, τίκτω, to beget. 
 
 αρετή, -ης, η, virtue. λύμη, -ης, ή, disgrace. τρϋφή, -ης, ή, excess, luxu- 
 
 βία, -ας, η, violence. λύπη, -ης, ή, sorrow. rious indulgence, effem- 
 
 βοήθεια, -ας, η, help. λύρα, -ας, ή, a lyre. inacy. 
 
 γίγνομαι, to become, arise, λύω, to loose, free, dispel, φιλία, -ας, η, friendship. 
 
 be. violate (a treaty), abol- χαλεπή, -ης, molesta, bur- 
 
 διαβολή, -ης, ή, calumny. ish. densome, troublesome, 
 
 δίκη, -ης, η, justice, αέριμνα, -ης, ή, care. oppressive. 
 
 right, a judicial sen- μούσα, -ης, ή, a muse. χρεία, -cc, η, need, inter- 
 
 tence. ό, ή, τό, the. course. 
 
 έίκω, w. dat, to give way πείθομαι, w. dat, to be- ως, as. 
 
 to, to yield to. lieve, trust, obey. 
 
§ 26.] FIKST DECLENSION. — FEMININE NOUNS. 23 
 
 Rules of Syntax. 1. Transitive verbs govern the Accusative. 
 2. Verbs and adjectives expressing the relation of to or for in 
 English, govern the Dative. 
 
 Έϊκε τη βία. Ή ?<,ύρα τάς μέριμνας λύει. Άπέχου της κακίας. 1 Ή φιλία 
 επαγγέλλεται καταφυγήν και βοήϋ-ειαν. Άπέχου των ηδονών. Ή μέριμνα την 
 καρδίαν έσ&ίει. θεραπεύετε τάς Μούσας. Μ.ή πεί&ου διάβολους* Ή δίκη 
 πολλάκις ττ} αδικία είκει. ΤΙολλάκις χαλεπή πενία 3 τειρόμεΰ-α. Την άδολεσ- 
 χίαν φεύγετε. Ή κακία λύπην επάγει. Ύρυψή άδικίαν καϊ πλεονεξίαν τίκτει. 
 Φεϋγε την τρυφήν ώς λύμην. Αι' αρετής και συνήθειας και χρείας ά?»η-&ινή φιλία 
 γίγνεται. 
 
 Abstain ye from violence. Flee thou from vice. Cares corrode the heart. 
 Flee thou from pleasures. Trust ye not to calumny. The Muses are honored. 
 Do not give way (pi.) to pleasure. Virtue begets true friendship. The heart 
 is corroded by cares (dat.). Sorrow is brought on by vice. 
 
 III. Vocabulary. 
 
 A.}cj, to lead, bring, con- δόξα, -ης, η, report, fame, πάσα, -ης, every, all. 
 
 duct. reputation. πίπτω, to fall. 
 
 απλή, -ης, simple. εσ&λή, -ης, good, noble, πολλή, -ης, much, many. 
 
 άργνρέα, αργυρά, -άς, argen• splendid. πορφυρέα, πορφυρά, -άς, 
 
 tea, silver (adj.). εύΰύνω, to make straight, purple (adj.). 
 
 αστραπή, -ής, ή, lightning. rectify. ρ"αδίως, easily. 
 
 ατιμία, -ας, ή, dishonor. ευκόλως, quickly. σκολιά, -άς, crooked, per- 
 
 βάσ'Λεια, -ας, ή, a queen, ευνομία, -ας, ή, good ad- verted. 
 
 βασιλεία, -ας, ή, king- ministration. στολή, -ής, ή, a robe. 
 
 dom. έχω,ϊο have, hold, contain, τύχη, -ης, η, fortune, pi. 
 
 βλάβη, -ης, ή, injury. κατέχω, to hold back, re- (generally) misfortunes. 
 
 βροντή, -ής, ή, thunder. strain. [liant. φέρω, ferro, to bear, bring. 
 
 γλώττα, -ης, ή, the tongue, λαμπρά,-άς, splendid, bril- χρυσέα, χρυσή, -ής, awea, 
 
 a language. [life. μεγά?.η, -ης, magna, great. golden. 
 δίαιτα, -ης, ή, a mode of μεταβολή, -ής, ή, change. 
 
 Ύή κακία? πάσα ατιμία 'έπεται. Ύαδίως φέρε τήν πενίαν. Βροντή εκ λαμ- 
 πράς αστραπής γίγνεται. Ή αρετή έσ^ήν δόξαν έχει. Ευνομία ευ-&ύνει δίκας 
 σκόλιας. Αίκη δίκην τίκτει και βλάβη β?ιάβ?/ν. Άπ/ιήν δίαιταν άγε. Κάτεχι 
 τήν γλώτταν. Ή τύχη πο?.λάς μεταβο?Μς έχει. Τίενίαν φέρετε. Αί λαμπραΐ 
 τύχαι εύκό/.ως πίπτουσιν. Φέρε τάς τύχας. Ή αρετή ουκ είκει ταις τύχαις. 
 Άπέχεσ&ε χα7,επών μερίμνων. ΤΙ βασίλεια μεγάλην βασιλείαν έχει. Ή στολή 
 έστι πορφυρά. Χρυσάς και αργυράς στο7Λς έχομεν. 
 
 Flee from cares. Vice begets dishonor. Good reputation follows virtue. 
 The perverted sentence is rectified by good administration. The lightning is 
 brilliant. Good reputation arises from virtue. Yield not to misfortunes. From 
 splendid fortunes often arise splendid cares. 
 
 157. 2 § 161, 2. (a), (δ) 
 
24 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 [§27 
 
 § 27. II. Masculine Nouns. 
 The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in -ov ; those in -ας retain the 
 a in the Dat., Ace. and Voc., and those in -ης retain the η in 
 the Ace. and Dat. Sing. The Voc. of nouns in -ης ends in a, 
 
 (1) all in -της ; e. g. τοξότης, Voc. τοξότά, προφήτης, Voc. προφήτά ; 
 
 (2) all substantives in -ης composed of a substantive and a verb ; 
 e. g. γεωμετρης, Voc. γεωμε'τρά, μνροπώλης, a salve-seller, Voc. μν- 
 ροπώλα ; (3) national names in -ης ; e. g. Πέρσης, a Persian, Voc. 
 Περσά. — All other nouns in -ης have the Voc. in -η ; e. g. Πέρσης, 
 Perses, Voc. Πέρση. — The plural of masculine nouns does not differ 
 from that of feminine. 
 
 Rem. 1. Several masculine nouns in -άς have the Doric Gen. in d, namely, 
 πατραλοίας, μητραλοίας, patricide, matneide, δρνϊ&ο&ήρας, fowler; also several 
 proper names ; e. g. 'Αννίβας, -α, Σνλλας, -d ; finally, contracts in -ας ; e. g. 
 βοββας, from βορέας. 
 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Citizen. 
 
 πολίτης 
 
 πολίτου 
 
 πολίτη 
 
 πολίτη ν 
 
 πολϊτά 
 
 Mercuiy. 
 Έρμ(έας)ης 
 'Έρμου 
 'Ερμή 
 'Έρμην 
 'Έρμη 
 
 Youth. 
 
 νεανΐάς 
 
 νεανίον 
 
 νεανίά 
 
 νεανίΰν 
 
 νεανίά 
 
 Fowler. 
 δρνι-&ο-&ηράς 
 δρνιΰο&ήρά 
 όρνι-&οΰήρά 
 δρνιΰο-&ήράν 
 όρνιβ-οϋ-ήρά 
 
 Boreas. 
 
 βοββάς 
 
 βοββα 
 
 βοββα 
 
 βοββαν 
 
 βοββα. 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 πολϊται 
 
 πολιτών 
 
 πολίταις 
 
 πολίτάς 
 
 πολϊται 
 
 'Έρμαΐ 
 
 'Έρμων 
 
 'Έρμαϊς 
 
 'Έρμας 
 
 'Έρμαΐ 
 
 νεανίαι 
 
 νεανιών 
 
 νεανίαις 
 
 νεανίάς 
 
 νεανίαι 
 
 όρνιΰ-οΰήραι 
 
 όρνι&οΰ-ηρών 
 
 ορνιΰοβ-ήραις 
 
 όρνι-&ο&ήράς 
 
 ορνι-&ο-&ηραι 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 πολίτά 
 πολίταιν 
 
 'Έρμα 
 'Έρμαΐν 
 
 νεανίά 
 νεανίαιν 
 
 δρνι-&οΰ-ήρά 
 δρνϊ&οΰήραιν 
 
 
 Rem. 2. Adjectives of one ending in -ης and -ας, are declined in the same 
 manner ; e. g. εθελοντής πολίτης, a trilling citizen, ε& ελοντοϋ πολίτου, 
 ε-& ελοντ αϊ πολϊται ; μονίας νεανίας, a lonely youth, uoviov νεανίου, μο- 
 νία νεανίά. 
 
 Άδολέσχης, -ου, δ, a pra- 
 ter. 
 
 ακούω, to hear. 
 
 ακροατής, -ου, δ, an audi- 
 tor. 
 
 βλάπτω, w. ace, to injure. 
 
 δεσπότης, -ου, δ, a master. 
 
 ευκοσμία, -ας, η, good or- 
 der, decorum. 
 
 ησυχία, -ας, ή, quiet, still- 
 
 IV. Vocabulary. 
 
 ness ; with άγειν, to be 
 
 quiet. 
 ■&άλαττα, -ης, η, the sea. 
 ■&εάτής, -οϋ, δ, a spectator. 
 μαν&ανω, to learn, study. 
 μέλει, w. dat. of the person 
 
 and gen. of the thing, it 
 
 concerns. 
 ναύτης, •ον, δ, nauta, a 
 
 sailor. 
 
 ορέγομαι, w. gen., to strive 
 after. 
 
 πρέπει, w. dat, it is be• 
 coming, it becomes. 
 
 προσήκει, w. dat., it is be- 
 coming, it becomes. 
 
 σοφία, -ας, ή, wisdom. 
 
 τέχνη, -ης, η, art. 
 
 τρυψητής,-ον, δ, luxurious, 
 riotous, voluptuous. 
 
§ 28 J SECOND DECLENSION. 25 
 
 Rule of Syntax. One substantive governs another in the Geni- 
 tive, when the latter signifies a different thing from the former. 
 The substantive in the Gen. defines or explains more particularly 
 the one by which it is governed. 
 
 Μάνΰανε, ω νεανία, την σοφίαν. Πολίτη πρέπει ενκοσμΐα. Νεανίου σοφίαν 
 ϋανμάζω. Φενγε, ώ πολΐτα, την άδικίαν. Την όρνιΰοΰήρα τέχνην ΰαυμάζομεν. 
 Άκροαταϊς και ϋεαταΐς προςήκει ήσυχίαν άγειν. Φεύγετε, ώ νανται, βορβάν. 
 Βοβόάς ναντας πολλάκις βλάπτει. Όμέγεσ&ε, ώ πολϊται, της αρετής. 1 Σνβα- 
 ρϊται τρνφηται ήσαν. 'Νανταις μέλει της ΰαλάττης. 2 Φενγε, ώ Τίέρση. Σπαρ- 
 τιάται μεγάλην δόξαν έχονσιν. Φεύγω νεανίαν τρνφητήν. Άδολεσχών άπέχον. 
 "Ακουε, ώ δέσποτα. 
 
 Learn. Ο youths, ΤΛ -isdom ! Good order becomes citizens. YVe admire tha 
 •wisdom of youths. Shun, Ο citizens, injustice ! To the Spartans there wa* 
 great fame (?'. e. they had great fame). Keep yourself from voluptuous youths 
 Elee from praters. Keep yourself from a prater. It becomes an auditor and a 
 spectator to observe {άγω} stillness. Flee from a voluptuous youth. 
 
 V. Vocabulary. 
 
 Δικαιοσύνη, -ης, η, justice, κλέπτης, -ov, δ, a thief. στρατιώτης, -ov, δ, a sol 
 
 έπιμέλομαι, w. gen., to care κριτής, -ov, δ, a judge. dier, a warrior. 
 
 for, take care of, take ναυάγια, -ας, ή, shipwreck, τεχνίτης, -ου, δ, an ar 
 
 care. ο'ικέτης, -ου, δ, a servant. tist 
 
 εραστής, -ov, δ, a lover, a πιστεύω, w. dot., to trust, τρέφω, to nourish, support^ 
 
 friend. rely upon. keep, bring up. 
 
 θαυμαστή, -ής, admiranda, πιστεύομαι, to be trusted, ψεύστης, -ου, δ, a liar. 
 
 wonderful. be believed. 
 
 Ή των Σπαρτιατών αρετή ΰ-αυμαστή έστιν. Φενγε, ώ ΤΙέρσα. Κριταϊς πρέ- 
 πει δικαιοσύνη. "Έστι τών στρατιωτών 3 περί τών πολιτών μάχεσΰαι. Φενγε 
 ψεύστας. "Έστι δεσπότου επιμέλε<τ&αι Α τών οίκετών. Μη πίστευε ψεύστη. 
 Ύεχνίτην τρέφει ή τέχνη. Έκ ψενστών γιγνόνται κλέπται. Στταρτιάται δόξης 
 καϊ τιμής ερασταϊ ήσαν. 'Έκ βοββά πολλάκις γίγνεται ναυάγια, θαυμάζομεν 
 την 'Έρμου τέχνην. 
 
 The Persians flee. Justice becomes the judge. It is the duty of a soldier to 
 fight for the citizens. Flee from a liar. Trust not Bars. Art supports artists. 
 We admire Hermes. Soldiers fight. Liars are not believed. 
 
 §28. Second Declension, 
 The second declension has two endings, -og and -ov ; nouns in -og 
 are mostly masculine, but often feminine ; nouns in -ov are neuter. 
 Feminine diminutive proper names in -ov are an exception ; e. g. 
 η Γλνκέριον. 
 
 Μ 158, 3. (b). 2 § 158,6.1. (b). 3 εστί with the Gen., it is the duty of any 
 one, see § 158, 2. 4 § 158, 6. 1, (b). 
 
 3 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Γ§28. 
 
 Endings 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ος ov 
 
 01 
 
 
 ά 
 
 O) 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ου 
 
 
 ων 
 
 
 OIV 
 
 Dat 
 
 9 
 
 
 οις 
 
 
 OLV 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ov 
 
 ους 
 
 
 ά 
 
 ω 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ος and ε ov. 
 
 01 
 
 
 ά. 
 
 0). 
 
 Paradigms, 
 
 
 Word. 
 
 Island. 
 
 God. 
 
 Messenger. 
 
 Pig. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 b λόγ-ος 
 
 η νήσος 
 
 δ ΰ-εός 
 
 ό άγγελος 
 
 το σϋκον 
 
 G. 
 
 του λόγ-ου 
 
 της νήσου 
 
 τοϋ •&εοϋ 
 
 αγγέλου 
 
 τον σύκου 
 
 D. 
 
 τω λόγ-φ 
 
 τη νήσω 
 
 τω -&εω 
 
 άγγέλω 
 
 τω συκω 
 
 A. 
 
 τον λόγ-ον 
 
 την νησον 
 
 τον •&εόν 
 
 άγγελον 
 
 τό σϋκον 
 
 V. 
 
 ω λόγ-ε 
 
 ω νησε 
 
 ώ •&εός 
 
 άγγελε 
 
 ω συκον 
 
 P.N. 
 
 οι λόγ-οι 
 
 αϊ νήσοι 
 
 οι -&εοί 
 
 άγγελοι 
 
 τά σϋκα 
 
 G. 
 
 των λόγ-ων 
 
 των νήσων 
 
 των -&εών 
 
 αγγέλων 
 
 των σύκων 
 
 D. 
 
 τοις λόγ-οις 
 
 ταις νησοις 
 
 τοις •&εοϊς 
 
 άγγέλοις 
 
 τοις συκοις 
 
 A. 
 
 τους λόγ-ους 
 
 τάς νήσους 
 
 τους ϋεούς 
 
 αγγέλους 
 
 τά σϋκα 
 
 V. 
 
 ώ λόγ-οι 
 
 ω νήσοι 
 
 ώ •&εοί 
 
 άγγελοι 
 
 ω σύκα 
 
 D. 
 
 τώ λόγ-ω 
 
 τα νήσω 
 
 τώ $εώ 
 
 άγγέλω 
 
 τώ συκω 
 
 
 τοϊν λόγ -otv 
 
 ταιν νησοιν 
 
 τοϊν ΰεοϊν 
 
 άγγελο ιν 
 
 τοιν συκοιν. 
 
 Rem. 1. The Voc. of words in -ος commonly ends in ε, though often in -ος ; 
 e. g. ώ φίλε and ώ φίλος ; always ώ -&εός. 
 
 Rem. 2. On the accentuation, the following observations are to he noted : The 
 accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quantity of the 
 final syllable permits ; the Voc. αδελφέ from αδελφός, brother, is an exception. 
 — The plural ending -οι, like -ai in the first declension [§ 26, 4. (a)], with re- 
 spect to the accent, is considered short. The change of the accent is the same 
 as in the first declension (§ 26, 5.), except in the Gen. PL, where the accent re- 
 tains the place, which it has in the Nominative. See the paradigms. 
 
 Rem. 3. Adjectives in -ος, -η (a), -ov, in the masculine and neuter, and those 
 of two endings in -ος (Masc. and Pem.), -ov (Neut), are declined like the pre- 
 ceding paradigms ; e. g. ά γ a ■& ό ς, άγα-&ή, άγαΰόν, good, ό άγα&ός λόγος, 
 a good speech, το άγαϋ -bv τέκνον, a good child, π α γ κάλος, πάγκαλο ν, 
 very beautiful, ό πάγκαλος λόγος, a very beautiful speech, ή πάγκαλος μορ- 
 φή, a very beautiful form, το πάγ καλόν τέκνον, a very beautiful child. Adjec- 
 tives of two endings in -ος, -ov are almost all compounds. Adjectives of three 
 endings in -ος preceded by ε, ι or ρ, and those in -οος preceded by p, like nouns 
 of the first declension, in -a pure and -pa, have the Nom. Pem. in -a ; e. g. χρυσ- 
 εος, χρνσ-έά, χρυσ-εον, έχΰρός, -ά, -όν, δικρόος, -όα, -όον. 
 
 Rem. 4. It will be seen by the following paradigms, that, in adjectives in -ος, 
 -η (-a), -ov, the masculine and neuter are declined like the second declension, 
 and the feminine like the first 
 
§28.1 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 27 
 
 Paradigms of Adjectives 
 
 S.N. 
 
 ά) αΰ-ός αγαΰ-ή άγαΰ-όν, good 
 
 φί?υΐ-ος 
 
 φιλί-ά 
 
 φίλι-ον, lovely 
 
 G. 
 
 &) αΰ-οϋ άγαΰ-ης αγαϋ-ον 
 
 φίλί-ου 
 
 φιλί-άς 
 
 φιλί-ον 
 
 D. 
 
 άγαΰ-ώ άγαΰ-?] ά 1 ) αι9--ώ 
 
 φιλί-ω 
 
 φιλί-α 
 
 φιλί-ω 
 
 A. 
 
 άγαΰ-όν άγαΰ-ήν άγαΰ-όν 
 
 φί?Λ-ον 
 
 φι)1-άν 
 
 φί /U-OV 
 
 V. 
 
 άγαΰ-έ άγαΰ-ή άγαΰ--όν 
 
 φίλι-ε 
 
 φιλί-ά 
 
 φίλι-ον 
 
 P.N. 
 
 άγαΰ-οί άγαΰ-αί άγαΰ-ά 
 
 φί?Λ-Οί 
 
 φίλι-αι 
 
 φίλι-α 
 
 G. 
 
 άγα&-ών άγαΰ-ών αγα&-ών 
 
 φιλί-ων 
 
 φιΚι-ων 
 
 φι7ά-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 αγαϋ-οϊς άγαΰ-αΐς άγαΰ-οΐς 
 
 φιλί-οις 
 
 φιλί-αις 
 
 φιλί-οις 
 
 A. 
 
 άγαΰ-ούς άγαΰ-άς άγαΰ-ά 
 
 φιλί-ονς 
 
 φιλί-άς 
 
 φίλι-α 
 
 V. 
 
 άγαΰ-οί άγαΰ-αί άγα&-ά 
 
 φίλί -OL 
 
 φίλι-αι 
 
 φίλι-α 
 
 Dual. 
 
 άγαΰ-ώ άγαΰ-ά άγαΰ-ώ 
 
 φι?ύ-ω 
 
 φιλί-ά 
 
 φιλί-ω 
 
 
 άγαϋ-οΐν άγαΰ-αϊν άγα&-οϊν. 
 
 φιλί-οιν. 
 
 φιλί-αιν 
 
 φύά-οιν. 
 
 Αγαϋόν, -ον, τό, a good 
 thing, an advantage. 
 
 άγγελος, -ov, b, a mes- 
 senger. 
 
 ύν&ρωπος, -ov, b, a man. 
 
 διδάσκαλος, -ov, b, a tea- 
 cher. 
 
 δοί/,ος, -ov, b, a slave. 
 
 Εργον, -ov, τό, an action, 
 a work, a business. 
 
 έσΰ/ώς, -η, -όν, good, no- 
 ble, splendid. 
 
 έταϊρος, -ov, b, a compan- 
 ion, a friend. [tune. 
 
 ευτυχία, -ας, η, good for- 
 
 VI. Vocabulary. 
 
 έχ&ρός, -ov, b, an enemy. 
 
 ΰ-εός, -ov, b, God, a god. 
 
 κακός, -η, -όν, bad, wicked. 
 
 κακόν, -ov, τό, an evil. 
 
 κάλος, -ή, -όν, beautiful, 
 good; το καλόν, good- 
 ness,beauty,or the beau- 
 tiful. 
 
 κίνδυνος, -ov, b, danger. 
 
 λόγος, -ov, b, a word, a 
 report, reason. 
 
 μετέχω, w. gen., to take 
 part in. 
 
 μίσγω, misceo, w. dat., to 
 mix. 
 
 οίνος, -ov, o, wine. 
 παρέχω, to grant, afford, 
 
 offer. 
 πιστός, -ή, -όν, faithful, 
 
 trustworthy. 
 πολλοί, -αί, -a, many. 
 φίλος, -ov, b, a friend, φΐ- 
 
 λοο, -η, -ov, dear. 
 φροντίζω, w. gen., to care 
 
 for, trouble oneself a- 
 
 bout : w. ace., to reflect 
 
 on, think about. 
 χαίρω, to rejoice. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. A subject in the neuter plural usually takes 
 a singular verb. 
 
 Αίωκε κα/Λ έργα. ΤΙείΰον τοις του διδασκάλον λόγοις. 1 ΤΙαρ' εσϋ/Μν έσ~&?Λ 
 μαν&ανεις. ΤΙιστός εταίρος των άγαΰ-ών καΐ των κακών μετέχει. 2 Οί ΰεοϊ των 
 άν&ρώπων φροντίζονσίν. 3 Οί άν&ρωποι τονς ΰεονς ΰεραπενονσιν. Τίολλοϊς έρ- 
 γοις έπεται κίνδυνος. Μίσγεται* εσ&λα κακοΐς. Ό κακός τοϊς ϋ-εοις καϊ τοϊς 
 άν&ρώποις έχ&ρός έστιν. Οί άν&ρωποί τοις έ(Γ&λοϊς χαίρονσιν. 5 ΤΙάρεχε, ώ 
 ΰεός, τοΐς φί/.οις εντνχίαν. Φέρε, ω δούλε, τον οϊνον τω νεανία. Ό οίνος λύει 
 τάς μέριμνας. Χαλεπώ έργω δόξα έπ-εται. 
 
 Follow the words of your (the) teachers. God cares for men. Men worship 
 God. Dangers accompany many actions. Grant, Ο God, happiness to my (the) 
 friend ! Keep yourself from the bad man. I rejoice over the noble youth. 
 Trust not the word of a liar, my (0) dear young man. 
 
 Μ 161, 2. (a), (δ). 
 * §161, 2. (a), (α). 
 
 2 § 158, 3. (b). 
 5 § 161, 2. (c). 
 
 § 158 6. I. (b). 
 
28 
 
 CONTRACTION OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [§29. 
 
 VII. Vocabulary. 
 
 νέος, -a, -ov, young, δ νέος, 
 -ov,th.e youth, the young 
 man. 
 
 νόσος, -ου, ή, a disease, an 
 illness. 
 
 οϋχ (before an aspirate in- 
 stead of ουκ), not. 
 
 πόνος, -ου, 6, trouble, toil, 
 hardship. 
 
 σιγή, -ης, ή, silence. 
 
 χρόνος, -ου, ό, time. 
 
 χρυσός, -οϋ, δ, gold. 
 
 Αξιος, -ια, -ων, w. gen., θάνατος, -ου, δ, death. 
 
 worthy, worth. •&εϊον, -ου, τό, the Deity. 
 
 άπο-λύω, w. ace. of the per- -&ϋμός, -οϋ, δ the mind, 
 
 son and gen. of the thing, courage. 
 
 to free from, release. -&ϋρά, -ας, ή, a door. 
 άργυρος, -ου, δ, silver. κλείω, to shut, fasten. 
 βίος, -ου, ό, life, a liveli- μαθητής, -οϋ, ό, a pupil, a 
 
 hood. learner. 
 
 βουλή, -ης, ή, counsel, ad- μέτρον, -ου, τό, a measure, 
 
 vice. [rel. moderation. 
 
 διχοστασία, -ας, ή, a quar- μοχλός, -οϋ, δ, a bolt, a 
 ευφραίνω, to rejoice, glad- lever. [ble. 
 
 den, cheer. μϋρίος,-ίά, -ίον, innumera- 
 
 To καλόν εστί μέτρον τοϋ βίου, ουχ δ χρόνος. Ό θάνατος τους άν&ρώπους 
 απολύει πόνων 1 καϊ κακών. Ό οίνος ευφραίνει τους των άν&ρώπων •&υμούς. 
 Σύν μυρίοις πόνοις τά καλά γίγνεται. Τό ΰέΐον τους κακούς άγει προς την δί- 
 κην. Π^στόο φίλος χρυσού και αργύρου άξιος 2 εστίν εν χαλεπή διχοστασία. Τίολ- 
 λαϊ νόσοι εν άν&ρώποις είσίν. Βουλή εις άγαΰ-όν άγει. Σιγή νέφ τιμήν φέρει. 
 Ή ■θ-ύρα μοχλοϊς* κλείεται. Ή τέχνη τους αν&ρώπους τρέφει. Τ Ω φίλοι μαΰη- 
 ταί, της σοφίας καϊ της αρετής όρέγεσΰε. 4 
 
 By death (dot.) men are freed from troubles and evils. By (ύπό, w. gen.) the 
 Deity the bad man is brought to justice. The bolt fastens the door. Art sup- 
 ports the man. My (0) dear pupil, strive after wisdom and virtue. Diseases 
 weaken men. My friends, follow the words of the judges. 
 
 §29. Contraction of the Second Declension. 
 1. A small number of substantives, where ο or s precedes the 
 case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect. 
 
 Paradigms 
 
 
 Navigation. 
 
 Circumnavigation. 
 
 Bone. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 ό πλόος πλους 
 
 ό περίπλοος 
 
 περίπλους 
 
 το δστέον 
 
 οστονν 
 
 G. 
 
 πλόου πλου 
 
 περιπλόου 
 
 περίπ?ιον 
 
 δστέου 
 
 οστού 
 
 D. 
 
 πλόω πλω 
 
 περιπλόω 
 
 περίπλω 
 
 οστεω 
 
 οστω 
 
 A. 
 
 πλόον πλουν 
 
 περίπλοον 
 
 περίπλουν 
 
 οστεον 
 
 δστοϋν 
 
 V. 
 
 π7ώε πλου 
 
 περίπλοε 
 
 περίπλου 
 
 οστεον 
 
 οστουν 
 
 P.N. 
 
 πλόοι πλοι 
 
 περίπλοοι 
 
 περίπλοι 
 
 δστέα 
 
 δστά 
 
 G. 
 
 πλόων πλών 
 
 περιπλόων 
 
 περίπλων 
 
 οστεων 
 
 οστών 
 
 D. 
 
 πλόοις πλοίς 
 
 περιπλόοις 
 
 περίπλοις 
 
 οστεοις 
 
 οστοις 
 
 A. 
 
 πλόους πλους 
 
 περιπλόους 
 
 περίπλους 
 
 οστεα 
 
 οστά 
 
 V. 
 
 πλόοι πλοϊ 
 
 περίπλοοι 
 
 περίπλοι 
 
 δστέα 
 
 οστά 
 
 Dual. 
 
 πλόω πλω 
 
 περιπλόω 
 
 περίπλω 
 
 δστέω 
 
 δστώ 
 
 
 πλόοιν πλοϊν 
 
 περιπλόοιν 
 
 περίπλοιν 
 
 δστέοιν 
 
 οστοιν. 
 
 1 §157. 
 
 158, 7. (γ). 
 
 3 § 161, 3. 
 
 § 158, 3, (b). 
 
§ 29.] 
 
 CONTRACTION OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 29 
 
 Rejiakk. Here belong, (a) Multiplicative adjectives in -δ ο ς (-οϋς), -όη (-ή), 
 -όον (-οϋν) ; e. g. άπ/^ονς, -ή, -οϋν, simple; — (b) Adjectives of two endings in 
 -oo ς (-ους) Masc. and Fern., and -oov (-ovv) Neut. ; e.g. δ ή εννους, τό εννουν, 
 well disposed, which differ from the declension of substantives, only in not con- 
 tracting the neuter plural in -oa ; e. g. τα εΰνοα τέκνα ; — (c) Adjectives in 
 -εος (-ούς), -έά (-,7), -ε ο ν (-οϋν), which denote a material; e. g. χρύσεος 
 χρυσούς, χρυσέά χρυσή, χρύσεον χρνσούν, golden. AVhen a vowel or ρ precedes 
 the feminine ending -έα, -ε a is not contracted into -ή, but into -a, ($ 26, 1)5 
 e.g. 
 
 ερέ-εος έρεούς, έρε-έά έρεα, έρέ-εον έρεοϋν, woollen. 
 
 άργνρ-εος αργυρούς, άργυ ρ-έά αργυρά, άργίφ-εον άργνροϋν, silver. 
 
 Paradigms . 
 
 
 
 Golden. 
 
 
 
 Simple. 
 
 
 S. Ν. 
 
 χρυσε-ος 
 
 χρυσέ- α 
 
 χρυσε-ον 
 
 άπλό-ος 
 
 άπλό-η 
 
 άπλό-ον 
 
 
 χρνσονς 
 
 χρνση 
 
 χρνσονν 
 
 απλούς 
 
 απλή 
 
 άπ7*ούν 
 
 G. 
 
 χρυσού 
 
 χρυσής 
 
 χρυσού 
 
 άπλοΰ 
 
 άπ?,ής 
 
 άπ?ωύ 
 
 D. 
 
 χρυσω 
 
 χρνση 
 
 χρυσω 
 
 άπ?ιώ 
 
 απλή 
 
 άπ?Μ 
 
 Α. 
 
 χρνσονν 
 
 χρυσην 
 
 χρυσονν 
 
 άπ?.οϋν 
 
 άπ?.ήν 
 
 άπ/ί,οϋν 
 
 V. 
 
 χρνσονς 
 
 χρνση 
 
 χρνσονν 
 
 απλούς 
 
 απλή 
 
 απλούν 
 
 P. Ν. 
 
 χρυσοί 
 
 χρυσαΐ 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 απλοί 
 
 άπλαΐ 
 
 άπ/Μ 
 
 G. 
 
 χρνσων 
 
 χρνσων 
 
 χρυσών 
 
 απλών 
 
 άπ?Μν 
 
 άπ?.ών 
 
 D. 
 
 χρυσό ις 
 
 χρνσαις 
 
 χρυσό ίς 
 
 άπλοϊς 
 
 άπλαϊς 
 
 άπλοϊς 
 
 A. 
 
 χρυσονς 
 
 χρνσας 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 απλούς 
 
 άπλας 
 
 άπ?Λ 
 
 V. 
 
 χρυσοί 
 
 χρυσαί 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 απλοί 
 
 άπλαΐ 
 
 άπλα 
 
 Dual. 
 
 χρνσώ 
 
 χρυσά 
 
 χρνσώ 
 
 άπλώ 
 
 άπλα 
 
 άπ?Μ 
 
 
 χρυσοον 
 
 χρυσαιν 
 
 χρυσοιν. 
 
 άπλοΐν 
 
 άπ?ΜΪν 
 
 άπλοΐν. 
 
 Accentuation. The following are to be noticed as exceptions to the rules in 
 §11,2: (a) πλόω = πλω, δστέω = δστώ, instead of πλω, δστώ ; (b) compounds 
 and polysyllabic proper names, which retain the accent on the penult, even 
 when as a circumflex, it should be removed upon the contracted syllable ; e. g. 
 περιπλόου = περίπλου, instead of περίπ?.ού ; εύνόω = εύνω, instead οίεΰνώ ; (c) 
 τό κάνεον = κανούν, instead of κάνουν, basket, and also adjectives in -εος, -έά, 
 -εον ; e. g. χρύσεος = χρυσούς, χρυσέά = χρυσή, χρύσεον — χρυσού ν, 
 instead of χρνσους, χρύσουν ; finally, substantives in -εος == -ούς ; e. g. άδελ'φι- 
 όεός = άδελόίδονς, instead of αδέλφι δονς, nephew. 
 
 Άδηλος, -ον, uncertain, 
 
 unknown. 
 α7ά}$εια, -ας, ή, truth. 
 υ,νοος = -ους,-οον = -ουν, 
 
 imprudent, irrational. 
 άργύρεος = -ούς, -έά =-ά, 
 
 -εον = ούν, silver, i. e. 
 
 made of silver. 
 άρτος, -ου, δ, bread. 
 
 VIII. Vocabulary. 
 
 έκ-καλνπτω, to disclose. 
 
 επι-κονφίζω, to alleviate. 
 
 ερίζω, w. dot., to contend 
 with. 
 
 εύνοος = -ους,-οον =-ουν, 
 well-wishing, well-dis- 
 posed, kind. 
 
 ΰεράπαινα,-ης, ή, a female 
 servant. 
 3* 
 
 καί — και, both — and. 
 κάνεον = -ούν,-έου = -ού. 
 
 τό, a basket. [ror. 
 
 κάτοπτρον, -ου, τό, a mir- 
 κνπελλον,-ου, τό, a goblet, 
 λέχω, to say, call or name. 
 νόος = νους, -όον = -ον, 
 
 δ, the understanding, 
 
 the mind. 
 
30 
 
 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [§30. 
 
 δλίγοι, -αι, -a, few. ό^λος, -ου, ό, plebs, the χαλινός, -οϋ, 6, a bridle. 
 
 οργή, -ης, η, anger. common people. [to. χάλκεος = -ους, -έα = -% 
 
 'Ορέστης, -ου, ό, Orestes, προς-φέρω, to bear or bring -εον = -οϋν, brazen. 
 
 όστέον =j=, -οϋν, -έου = οϋ, ύπνος, -ου, ό, sleep, slum- -ψυχή, -ης, ή, the soul. 
 
 τό, a bone. ber. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. One substantive following another to explain 
 it, and referring to the same person or thing, is put in the same 
 case. This construction is called Apposition. 
 
 Ό λόγος εστί το τοϋ νου κάτοπτρον. Ύόν νουν εχουσιν οι άν&ρωποι όιδάσ- 
 καλον. Τον εύνουν φίλον θεράπευε. 'Ολίγοι, πιστόν νουν εχουσιν. Ό πλους 
 εστίν αόηλος. Συν νφ τον βίον άγε. Ό όχλος ουκ έχει νουν. Μη έριζε τοις 
 ανοις} Οι άγα-&οι τοΐς αγαΰοίς εύνοί 2 ε'ισιν. Όρέγου φίλων εύνων. Τα τοϋ 
 Όρέστου οστά εν Ύεγέα ην. Αι -&εράπαιναι εν κανοίς τον αρτον προςφέρουσιν. 
 Οι ΰεοϊ και καλόν και κακόν πλουν τοΐς ναύταις 3 παρέχουσιν. "Ψυχής χαλινός 
 άν&ρώποις Ζ ό νους εστίν. ΤΙολλάκις οργή άν&ρώπων νουν εκκαλνπτει. *Απλοϋς 
 εστίν ό της άληϋ-είας λόγος, λόγος εύνους έπικουφίζει λύπην. Ύό κύπελλόν 
 εστίν άργυροϋν. Ό θάνατος λέγεται χαλκούς ύπνος. 
 
 The understanding is a teacher to men. The well-disposed friend is honored. 
 Keep yourself from the irrational. Strive after a well-disposed friend. Bring 
 bread in a basket. Honor, Ο young man, a simple mind ! Flee from impru- 
 dent youths. Trust, Ο friend, well-disposed men ! Young men are often im- 
 prudent. The goblet is golden. 
 
 § 30. The Attic Second Declension, 
 Several words (substantives and adjectives) have the endings -ως, 
 (Masc. and Fern.) and -ων (Neut.), instead of -ος and -ov, and re- 
 tain the -ω through all the cases instead of the common vowels and 
 diphthongs of the second Dec., and place under the -co an Iota sub- 
 script, where the regular form has -φ or -οι ; thus, -ov and -a be- 
 come -ω ; -ος, -ov and -ονς become -ως, -ων and -ως ; -οι, -οις and 
 -οιν become -φ, -φς and -φν ; — ω, -φ and -ων remain unchanged. 
 The Voc. is the same as the Nominative. 
 
 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 People. 
 
 Cable. 
 
 Hare. 
 
 , ,Hall. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ό λε-ώς 
 
 ό κάλ-ως 
 
 ό λαγ-ώς 
 
 το άνώγε-ων 
 
 G. 
 
 λε-ώ 
 
 κάλ-ω 
 
 λαγ-ώ 
 
 άνώγε-ω 
 
 D. 
 
 λε-ώ 
 
 κάλ-ω 
 
 λαγ-ώ 
 
 άνώγε-ω 
 
 A. 
 
 λε-ών 
 
 κάλ-ων 
 
 λαγ-ών 
 
 άνώγε-ων 
 
 V. 
 
 λε-ώς 
 
 κάλ-ως 
 
 λαγ-ώς 
 
 άνώγε-ων 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 λε-ώ 
 
 κάλ-ω 
 
 λαγ-ώ 
 
 άνώγε-ω 
 
 G. 
 
 λε-ών 
 
 κάλ-ων 
 
 λαγ-ών 
 
 άνώγε-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 λε-φς 
 
 κάλ-ως 
 
 λαγ-ώς 
 
 άνώγε-ως 
 
 A. 
 
 λε-ώς 
 
 κάλ-ως 
 
 λαγ-ώς 
 
 άνώγε-ω 
 
 V. 
 
 λε-ώ 
 
 κάλ-ω 
 
 λαγ-ώ 
 
 άνώγε-ω 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 
 λε-ώ 
 
 κάλ-ω 
 
 λαγ-ώ 
 
 άνώγε-ω 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 λε-ών 
 
 κάλ-ων 
 
 λαγ-ών 
 
 άνώγε-ων 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (a), (γ). 
 
 § 161, 5. (a). 
 
 § 161, 5. 
 
§ CO.] 
 
 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 31 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. 
 
 ό η ίλεως, το ιλέων 
 
 οι α'ι Ιλεω, τα Ιλεω 
 
 τώ τα τω ίλεω 
 
 G. 
 
 του της του ίλεω 
 
 των Ιλεων 
 
 τοϊν ταϊν τοϊν ιλεων 
 
 D. 
 
 τφ τη τω ίλεω 
 
 τοϊς ταΐς τοϊς Ιλεως 
 
 τοίν ταϊν τοϊν ίλεων 
 
 A. 
 
 τον την το ίλεων 
 
 τονς τάς ϊλεως,τά ίλεω 
 
 τώ τά τώ Ιλεω 
 
 V. 
 
 ίλεως-, ίλεων 
 
 ϊλεω, ϊλεω 
 
 'ίλεω. 
 
 Εεμ. 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fern, gender reject the ν in the Ace. 
 Sing., namely, ό λαγώς, the hare, τον λαγών and λαγώ, and commonly η εως, tlie 
 dawn, η ά?,ώς, a threshing-floor, ή Κέως, ή Κως, ό "Α&ως, η Τέως, and the adjec- 
 tives άγηρως, not old, επίπλεως, full, νπέρχρεως, guilty. 
 
 Εεμ. 2. Accentuation. Proparoxytones retain the acute on the antepenult in 
 all the cases of all numbers, the two syllables -εως and -εων, etc. being considered, 
 as it were, but one ; yet those with a long penult, as άγηρως, are paroxytones 
 in the Dat. Sing, and PL, and also in the Gen. and Dat. Dual ; e. g. άγηρω, άγη- 
 ρως, άγήρων. Oxytones in -ως, retain this accent even in the Gen.; e. g. λεώ 
 instead of λεώ. 
 
 Άγήρως, -ων, not getting 
 old, unfading. 
 
 'αετός, -ov, ό, an eagle. 
 
 αΙχμάλωτος, -ov, captured. 
 
 ανδρείος, -d, -ov, manly, 
 brave. 
 
 άνώγεων, -ω, τό, a hall, a 
 room. 
 
 απάγω, to lead away. 
 
 βαίνω, to walk, go, pro- 
 ceed. 
 
 IX. Vocabulary. 
 
 ενεδρεύω, w. dat, to Lie in 
 wait for. 
 
 έπαινος, -ου, ό, praise. 
 
 εύχομαι, to pray, beg. 
 
 ■&ηρεντης, -ov, ό, a hunts- 
 man, a sportsman. 
 
 ■&ηρεύω, to hunt, catch. 
 
 ίλεως•, -ων, merciful. 
 
 κάλως, -ω, ό, a rope. 
 
 κτίζω, to found, build. 
 
 λαγώς , -ώ, ό, a hare. 
 
 λαμβάνω, to take, receive 
 
 gain. 
 νεώς, -ώ, ό, a temple. 
 πλείστος, -η, -ov, most 
 βάδιος, -id, -ων, easy. 
 σέβομαι, to honor, rever 
 
 ence. 
 τάώς, -ώ, ό, a peacock. 
 νίός, -ov, ό, a son. 
 ώσπερ, as, just as. 
 
 Ύοϊς ΰεοΐς 1 νεώ κτίζονται. Ov βάδιόν εστίν επί κάλων βαίνειν. Αιώκομεν 
 τους ?Μγώς. Άνδρόγεως ην ό του Ήίίνω νίός. Οί ?^αγω -β-ηρενονται νπό των 
 ■&ηρεντών. Έύχον τω ίλεω #εω. Οί αετοί τοις λαγώς ένεδρενονσιν. Σέβεσϋ-ε 
 τονς ίλεως -θ-εονς. Οί ανδρείοι άγηρων έπαινον λαμβάνονσιν. Ένχου τόν &εόν 
 ίλεω έχειν. ΟΊ &εοί τοϊς άγαΰοΐς 2 ίλεω είσιν. Αί ηδοναί άπάγονσι τον πλείστον 
 λεών ώςπερ αιχμά?ΜΤον. Οί Σάμιοι τη Ήρα 1 καλονς ταώς τρέφονσιν. 
 
 We build beautiful temples to the gods. To walk on a rope is not easy. 
 The huntsmen hunt hares. God is merciful. Worship the merciful God. By 
 the Samians beautiful peacocks are kept in honor of Hera (say, to Hera). Keep 
 yourselves, Ο citizens, from the irrational multitude ! Get out of the way of 
 (είκω, w gen.) the irrational multitude. The huntsman strives after (pursues) 
 hares. 
 
 X. Vocabulary. 
 
 'Απαγορεύω, to call. άρετη, -ης, η, bravery, vir- βασίλεια, -ων, τά, a royal 
 
 αρέσκω, ιο. dot., to please. tue. palace. 
 
 1 § 161, 5. 
 
 § 161, 5. (a). 
 
32 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 [§§ 31, 32. 
 
 ίως, -ω, ή, the dawn. ποιητής, ov, 6, a poet. 
 
 ΰ-ηρίον, -ου, to, a wild βοδοδάκτυ7ιος, -ov, rosy- 
 beast, an animal. fingered. 
 
 Ιερός, -a, -ov, w. gen., sa- στήλη, -ης, ή, a pillar, 
 cred to. 
 
 γαμέτη, -ης, η, a wife. 
 
 δειλός,-ή,•όν,ύνα.ΐά, worth- 
 less, bad. 
 
 ίκ-φέρω, to bring forth, 
 produce. [ous. 
 
 επικίνδυνος, -ov, danger- 
 
 01 ταώ της 'Ήρας ίεροι ήσαν. θαυμάζομεν Μ,ενέλεων επί τή αρετή. Οι ποιη• 
 τάΐ την "Εω βοδοδάκτυλον απαγορευουσιν. Ή αλήθεια πο?\.λάκις ουκ αρέσκει 
 τω λεω. 'Έ?ένη ην η Μενέλεω γαμέτη. Ή Βαβυλωνία εκφέρει πολ?.ούς ταως. 
 *Έν τοις των ΰεών νεως πολ?Μΐ στηλαι ήσαν. Οι λαγω δειλά ϋ-ηρία είσίν. Ό 
 περί τον Άΰω πλους ην επικίνδυνος. Τα βασίλεια καλά άνώγεω έχει. 
 
 Menelaus is admired for his bravery. In the royal palace are splendid rooms. 
 Huntsmen catch peacocks. Peacocks are beautiful. Trust not the speech of 
 the people, Ο citizens ! The huntsman lies in wait for peacocks. Good citi- 
 zens flee from the irrational multitude. Youths lie in wait for hares. The pil- 
 lars of the temples are beautiful. 
 
 §31. Third Declension. 
 The third declension has the following Case-endings : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 f 
 
 
 Neut. — 
 
 ες ; Neut. a 
 
 ε 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ος 
 
 
 
 ων 
 
 οιν 
 
 Dat. 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 σϊ(ν) 
 
 οιν 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ν and a 
 
 
 Neut. — 
 
 ας ; — a 
 
 ε 
 
 Voc. 
 
 mostly as 
 
 the Nom. ; 
 
 Neut. — 
 
 ες; —α. 
 
 ε. 
 
 These endings are appended to the unchanged stem of the word ; e.g. ό ϋήρ 
 an animal, Gen. ϋ-ηρ-ός. 
 
 §32. R em arks on the Case-endings. 
 
 1. The pure stem is frequently changed in the Nom. of masculines and femi- 
 nines. But this is found again by omitting the genitive ending -ος ; e. g. ό κ&- 
 ραξ, a raven, Gen. κό pa κ -ος. 
 
 2. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nominative. Yet the euphony of the 
 Greek language does not permit a word to end with r. Hence, in this case, r 
 is either wholly rejected or is changed into its cognate σ ; e. g. 
 
 {πεπερϊ ( το πέπερϊ ( πεπέρι-ος or ε-ος 
 
 σέλας g J το σέλας ό Ι (σέλασ-ος) σέλα-ος 
 
 σωματ & j το (σώματ) σώμα Ο 1 σώματ-ος 
 
 τερατ Ι το (τέρατ) τέρας [ τέρατ-ος 
 
 3. The Accusative singular has the form in ν with masculines and feminine» 
 in -ις, -υς, -αυς and -ους, whose stem ends in -ι, -ν, -av and -ου ; e. g. 
 
 Stem πολι Nom. π'ολις Ace. πολιν Stem βοτρυ Nom. βδτρυς Ace. βότρνν. 
 ναυ νανς vavv βον βοϋς βοΰν. 
 
 But the Ace. lias the form in -a, when the stem ends in a consonant ; e. g. φλεβ, 
 Φλέψς, φλέβα — κορακ, κόραξ, κδρακ-α — λαμπαδ, λαμπάς, λάμπάδ-α. 
 
§ 33.] THIRD DEC. GENDER, QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. 33 
 
 Yet barytoned substantives in -ις and -νς, of two or more syllables, whose 
 stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose, have only the form in -v ; e. g. 
 
 Stem kpi 5 Nom. έρις Ace. εριν 
 όρνιΰ- όρνις bpviv 
 
 κορυϋ- κόρυς κόρυν 
 
 χαριτ χάρις χάριν. 
 
 4. The Voc. is either like the Nom. or the stem. See the Paradigms. 
 
 5. On ν έφελκυστικόν, see § 7, 1, (a). 
 
 §33. Gender, Quantity and Accentuation of the 
 Th ird Declension. 
 
 I. Gender. The gender of the third declension will be best learned by obser- 
 vation. The following rules, however, may be observed : 
 
 (a) Masculine; (a) Substantives in -αν, -υν, -ας (Gen. -ανος, -αντος), -ενς, -ην, 
 εφ (except ή χειρ, hand), -νρ (except το πυρ, fire), -όνς (except το ους, ear) ; — 
 
 (β) those in -ων, -ηρ, -ωρ, -ης (Gen. -ητος), -ως (Gen. -ωτος), -ψ, with several 
 exceptions. 
 
 (b) Feminine; (a) Substantives in -άς (Gen. -άδος), -αυς, -ινς, -ννς, -ώ and 
 -ως (Gen. -οϋς) ; -ότης, -ύτης ; -εις (except ό κτείς, comb) ; — (β) those in -ις, -ιν, 
 -νς, -ων (Gen. -όνος), with several exceptions. Those in -ξ vary between the 
 Masc. and Fern, gender. 
 
 (c) Neuter; All substantives in -α, -η, -op, -ωρ, -ος, -ι, -ap, (except ό ψάρ, α 
 starling), -ας (Gen. -ατός, -αος, except ό λάς, a stone), and contracts in -ηρ. 
 
 Π. Quantity. Words whose Nom. ends in -αξ, -ιξ, -νξ, -αψ, -ιψ, -νψ, -ις and 
 -νς, have the penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according 
 as the vowel of the above endings is short or long by nature ; e. g. ό ϋώράξ, 
 coat of mail, -ΰ,κος, η ρ*ΐψ, reed, βϊπός, η άκτΐς, ray, -Ινος, but η βώλάξ, clod, -άκος, 
 ή έλπ'ίς, hope, -ίδος. 
 
 ΠΙ. Accentuation, (a) The accent remains, through the several Cases, on the 
 accented syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws of accentuation permit ; e. g. 
 το πράγμα, deed, πράγματος, but πραγμάτων, το όνομα, name, ονόματος, but ι' νο- 
 μάτων, ό η χελιδών, swallow, χελιδόνος, Ξενοφών, -ώντος, -ώντες, -ώντων. The 
 particular exceptions will be noticed in the paradigms, (b) Words of one syl- 
 lable are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, on the final syllable, 
 the short syllables -ος, -ι and -σι, taking the acute, and the long syllables -ων 
 and oiv, the circumflex; e. g. <5 μην, μηνός, μηνί, μηνοϊν, μηνών μησί{ν). 
 
 Exceptions. The following monosyllabic substantives are paroxytoned in the 
 Gen. PI. and in the Gen. and Dat. Dual : η δάς, torch, ό δμώς, slave, ό η •&ώς, 
 jackal, το ους, Gen. ώτός, ear, ό η παις, child, ό σης, moth, ό η Τρως, Trojan, ή 
 φως, Gen. φωδός, a burning, το φως, Gen. φωτός, light ; e. g. διόδων, δάδοιν, ΰώων, 
 ωτων, ωτοιν, παίδων, παίδοιν, σέων, Ύρώων, φφδων, φώτων. Moreover, notice 
 should also be taken of πάς, all, every, Gen. παντός, Dat. παντί, but πάντων, 
 πάσι(ν), ό ΤΙάν, Gen. ΤΙανός, but τοις ΤΙάσι(ν). 
 
34 
 
 THIRD DEC.— STEMS ENDING IN A CONSONANT. 
 
 [§34 
 
 A. Words which in the Genitive have a consonant be- 
 fore THE ENDING -0£, i. e. WORDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A 
 CONSONANT. 
 
 §34. I. The Nominative exhibits the pure stem. 
 
 The case endings are appended to the unchanged Nominative. 
 Stems which end in -vt (Ξενοφώντ) and -ρτ (ή δάμαρτ), must drop 
 the r according to § 32, 2 ; hence Ξενοφών, Gen. -ώντ-ος, δάμαρ, 
 Gen. -αρτ-ος. 
 
 
 o, Paean. 
 
 ό, Age. 
 
 ό, Xenophon. 
 
 ό, Month. 
 
 τό, Nectar. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 -RdlUV 
 
 αιών 
 
 Εενοφών 
 
 μην 
 
 νέκταρ 
 
 G. 
 
 παιαν-ος 
 
 αιων-ος 
 
 Έενοφώντ-ος 
 
 μην-ος 
 
 νεκταρ-ος 
 
 P. 
 
 παιαν -L 
 
 αιων-ι 
 
 Εενοφώντ -t 
 
 μην-ι 
 
 νεκταρ-ι 
 
 A. 
 
 παιαν-α 
 
 αιων-α 
 
 Έενοφώντ-α 
 
 μην-α 
 
 νέκταρ 
 
 V. 
 
 παιαν 
 
 αιών 
 
 Ξενοφών 
 
 μην 
 
 νέκταρ 
 
 P.N. 
 
 παιάν-ες 
 
 αίών-ες 
 
 Λενοφώντ-ες 
 
 μην-ες 
 
 νέκταρ-α 
 
 G. 
 
 παιαν-ων 
 
 αιων-ων 
 
 Άενοφώντ-ων 
 
 μην-ων 
 
 νεκταρ-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 παιά-σι(ν)% 
 
 α'ιώ-σι(ν)* 
 
 ^,ενοφώ•σι(ν)^ 
 
 μη-σί(ν)* 
 
 νέκταρ-σι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 παιαν-ας 
 
 αιων-ας 
 
 Εεύ'οφώντ-ας 
 
 μην-ας 
 
 νεκταρ-α 
 
 V. 
 
 παιαν-ες 
 
 αιων-ες 
 
 Έενοφώντ-ες 
 
 μην-ες 
 
 νεκταρ-α 
 
 Dual. 
 
 παιάν-ε 
 
 αίών-ε 
 
 Εενοφώντ-ε 
 
 μην-ε 
 
 νέκταρ-ε 
 
 
 παιαν -otv 
 
 atwv-oiv 
 
 Έενοφώντ-οιν 
 
 μην-οιν 
 
 νεκταρ-οιν. 
 
 Rem. 1. The three words in -ων, Gen. -ωνος, viz. Απόλλων, ΊΙοσειδών, η 
 άλων, threshing-floor, can be contracted in the Ace. Sing, after dropping v, thus, 
 Άπόλλω, ΤΙοσειδώ, άλω. The three substantives, 'Απόλλων, Τίοσειδών and σω• 
 τηρ, preserver, contrary to the rule [§ 33, III. (a)], have in the Voc. ώ "Απολλον, 
 Τίόσειδον, σώτερ. 
 
 Rem. 2. The neuters belonging to this class all end in -p [-ap, -op, -ωρ, -υ ο) ; 
 το πϋρ (Gen. πϋρ-ός), fire, has ν long, contrary to § 32, 2. 
 
 XI. Vocabulary. 
 
 Αδω, to sing, celebrate in ϋ-άλλω, to bloom, be ver- πϋρ, πυρός, τό, fire. 
 
 song. dant. σπουδαϊος,-αία,-αϊον, zeal 
 
 άνα-γιγνώσκω, to read. -&ήρ, &ηρός, δ, a wild beast. ous, diligent, earnest, 
 
 αιών, -ώνος, ό, aevurn, an κΐΰ-άρα, -ας, η, a lyre. serious. 
 
 age, a space of time, κράτήρ, -ηρος, ό, a mixing τέρπω, to delight. 
 
 time, lifetime. bowl, goblet. τέρπομαι, w.dat.,to delight 
 
 βφλίον, -ου, τό, a book, λειμών -ώνος,δ, a meadow. in, or be delighted at. 
 
 γιγνώσκω, to know, think, νίπτω, to wash. χεψ> Χ ε ψός, η, the hand. 
 
 judge, try, perceive. παιάν, -άνος, ό, a war- χορός, -οϋ, ό, a dance. 
 
 ϋ-άλία, -ας, η, a feast. song, a song of victory, ψήν, ψηνός, ό, a wasp. 
 
 Φεϋγε τους -d -ηρας. Χειρ χείρα νίπτει. Άπέχου του ψηνός. Οι λειμώνες 
 &άλλονσιν. Οί στρατιώταί άδουσι παιάνα. 'Έν πυρί χρυσδν καϊ άργνρον γιγ- 
 
 * Instead of παιάνσι, αιώνσι, Εενοφώντσι, μηνσΐ, § 8, 6 and 7. 
 
§35.] 
 
 THIRD DEC. — STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE ΝΟΜ. 
 
 SO 
 
 νώσκοαεν. Ho?J.oi παρά κρατήρι γίγνονται φίλοι έταϊροι. Οί ύν&ρωποι τέρ- 
 πονται κι&άρα} καϊ ϋαλία και χοροϊς και παιάσιν. Οί 'Έλληνες τον Άπόλλω 
 και τον Τίοσειδώ σέβονται. Οί σπουδαίοι μαΰηται τα. τοϋ Ξενοφώντος βιβλία 
 ήδέως άναγιγνώσκουσιν. 
 
 Flee from the wild beast Wash your (the) hands. Keep yourself from 
 wasps. The meadow is verdant. Soldiers delight in war-songs. War-songs 
 are sung by (ίπό, w. gen.) the soldiers. We delight in beautiful meadowe. 
 Flee from vile (κακός) wasps. Many are friends of the bowl. Poets pray to 
 Poseidon. 
 
 §35. II. The Nominative lengthens the short final 
 vowel of the stem, ε or ο into η οτ ω. 
 According to § 32, 2. stems in vz must drop τ in the Nom. ; e. g. 
 λέων, instead of λεωνζ. 
 
 
 ύ, Shepherd. 
 
 ο, A Divinity. 
 
 ό, Lion. 
 
 ό, Air. 
 
 ύ, Orator. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 ποιμην 
 
 δαίμων 
 
 λέων 
 
 α'ιϋ-ήρ 
 
 βήτωρ 
 
 G. 
 
 ποιμεν-ος 
 
 δαίμον-ος 
 
 7άοντ-ος 
 
 αί&έρ-ος 
 
 ρήτορ-ος 
 
 D. 
 
 ποιμεν-ι 
 
 δαίμον-ι 
 
 λέοντ-ι 
 
 αί&έρ-ι 
 
 (yfjTop-t 
 
 A. 
 
 ποιμεν-α 
 
 δαίμον-α 
 
 λέοντ-α 
 
 αίΰέρ-α 
 
 βητορ-α 
 
 V. 
 
 ποιμην 
 
 δαίμον 
 
 λέον 
 
 α'ι-&ηρ 
 
 (τητορ 
 
 P.N. 
 
 ποιμέν-ες 
 
 δαίμον-ες 
 
 λέοντ-ες 
 
 αίΰ-έρ-ες 
 
 ρΊ/τορ-ες 
 
 G. 
 
 ποιμεν-ων 
 
 οαιμον-ων 
 
 λεόντ-ων 
 
 αί&έρ-ων 
 
 βητόρ-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 ποιμέ-σι(ν)* 
 
 δαίμο-σι(ν)* 
 
 λέουσι(ν)^ 
 
 α'ι•&έρ-σι(ν) 
 
 /ήτορ-σι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 ποιμεν-ας . 
 
 δαίμον-ας 
 
 ?ιέοντ-ας 
 
 αίΰ-έρ-ας 
 
 βητορ-ας 
 
 V. 
 
 ποιμεν-ες 
 
 δαίμον-ες 
 
 λέοντ-ες 
 
 αί&έρ-ες 
 
 (ήτορ-ες 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ποιμέν-ε 
 
 δαίμον- ε 
 
 7άοντ-ε 
 
 αι&έρ-ε 
 
 ρΊιτορ-ε 
 
 
 ποιμεν-οιν 
 
 δαιαόν-οιν 
 
 λεόντ -ocv 
 
 αί-&έρ-οιν 
 
 βητόρ-οιν. 
 
 
 Rem. 1. Oxytoned substantives of this class retain in the Voc. the long vowel 
 (η, ω) ; thus, ώ ποιμήν. The Voc. δάερ from δαήρ, brother-in-law, is an excep- 
 tion; its accent also differs from the fundamental rule [§ 33, ΓΠ. (a)]. This 
 difference occurs also in the Voc. of 'Αμφίων, -ίονος } 'Αγαμέμνων, -όνος, viz. 
 Άμφιον, Άγάμεμνον. Comp. § 34, Rem. 1. 
 
 Rem. 2. Ή χειρ, hand, Gen. χειρ-ός, etc. has in the Dat PI. and Dual χέρ- 
 σων) and χεροίν. , 
 
 Rem. 3. The following in -ων, Gen. -όνος, reject the ν in particular Cases, 
 and suffer contraction : η είκών, image, Gen. εικόνος and είκονς, Dat. είκόνι, Ace. 
 είκόνα/ζ,ηά είκώ, Ace. PL εικόνας and είκούς, — the irregular accentuation of είκώ 
 and είκονς should be noted : ή αηδών, nightingale, Gen. άηδόνος and αηδούς, Dat 
 άηδοΐ ; ή χελιδών, swallow, Gen. χέλι δόνος, Dat. χέλι δοϊ. 
 
 Rem. 4. Here belong: (a) the two adjectives ό η άπάτωρ, το άπατορ, father- 
 less, and άμήτωρ, αμητορ, motherless, Gen. -ορός ; — (b) the adjective ό ή άββην, 
 το αββεν, male, Gen. άββενος ; — (c) adjectives in -ων (Masc. and Fern.), -ov 
 (Neut) ; e. g. ό η ευδαίμων, το ενδαιμον, fortunate, and comparatives in -ων, -ov, 
 or -ίων, -iov. These comparatives, after dropping ν admit contraction in the 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (c). * Instead of ποιμένσι, δαίμονσι, λεόντσι, see § 8, 6 and 7 
 
36 
 
 THIRD DEC. — STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE ΝΟΜ. 
 
 [§ 35. 
 
 Ace. Sing, and in the Nom., Ace. and Voc. PL In the Voc. the accent differs 
 from the rule [§ 33, III. (a)]. But compounds in -φοων follow the rule; e. g. 
 κρατερόφρων, Voc. κρατερόφρον. 
 
 S.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Fortunate. 
 ευδαίμων ενδαίμον 
 
 ενδαίμονος 
 
 ενδαιμονι 
 ενδαίμονα ενδαίμον 
 
 ενδαίμον 
 
 More hostile. 
 εχΰ-ΐων έχϋίον 
 έχ-&ίονος 
 εχϋ-ίονι 
 έχΰίονα and 
 εχΰίω εχϋ-ιον 
 έχΰ-ιον 
 
 Greater. 
 
 μείζων μείζον 
 
 μείζονος 
 
 μείζονι 
 μείζονα and 
 μείζω μείζον 
 
 μείζον 
 
 P.N. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 ενδαίμονες ενδαίμονα 
 
 ενδαιμόνων 
 
 ενδαίμοσι(ν) 
 
 ενδαίμονας ενδαίμονα 
 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 έχΰίονες εχϋίονα 
 εχ&ίονς εχΰίω 
 
 εχ&ιόνων 
 
 έχ&ίοσι(ν) 
 έχΰ-ίονας έχϋίονα 
 έχΰ-ίονς εχΰίω 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 μείζονες μείζονα 
 μείζονς μείζω 
 
 μειζόνων 
 
 μείζοσι(ν) 
 μείζονας μείζονα 
 μείζονς μείζω 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ενδαίμονε 
 ενδαιμόνοιν. 
 
 εχ&ίονε 
 εχϋιόνοιν. 
 
 μείζονε 
 μειζόνοιν. 
 
 ΧΠ. Vocabulary. 
 
 "Αγαν, too much, too. 
 
 αγέλη, -η ς, η, β, herd, a flock 
 
 άδικος, -ov, unjust. 
 
 α,Ι&ήρ, -ερος, δ, η, odker, λίμήν, -ένος, δ, a harbour. 
 
 the heavens. ναίω, to dwell. 
 
 γέρων, -οντος, ό, an old οδός, -ov, ή, a way; with 
 
 ηγεμών, -όνος, ό, a leader, πράττω, to do, act; w. adv., 
 κολαστής, -ov, δ, a pun- to fare. 
 
 isher. σώφρων, -ov, sound-mind- 
 
 ed, wise, sensible. 
 νπέρφρων, -ov, high-mind- 
 ed, haughty. 
 
 man. [nity. 
 
 δαίμων, -όνος, δ, ή, a divi- 
 δήμος, -ου, ό, the people, 
 
 the mob. 
 ευ, well, ευ πράττω, w.acc, 
 
 to do well to. 
 
 εϊκω, to retire from the φρήν, -ενός, ή, pi. φρένες, 
 
 way. 
 
 όλβιος, -ίά, -ιον, and όλ- 
 βιος, -ov, happy. 
 
 ποιμήν, -ένος, ό, a herds- 
 man, a shepherd. 
 
 the understanding, the 
 mind or spirit. 
 φνλάττω, to guard, look 
 after, defend. 
 
 Tbv γέροντα ευ πράττε. Σέβου τους δαίμονας. Οι ποιμένες τάς άγέλας φν- 
 λάττουσιν. Ύόν κακόν φεΰγε, ως κακόν λιμένα. Άνευ δαίμονος ό άν&ρωπος 
 ουκ όλβιος εστίν. Ό ΰεός εν αίΰ-έρι ναίει. Άεϊ χαλεποί μέριμναι τείρονσι τάς 
 'των άν&ρώπων φρένας. "Έπου άγαΰοϊς ηγεμόσιν. ΈΙκε, ώ νεανία, τοις γέρουσι 
 της όδοϋ. Τίολλάκις δήμος ηγεμόνα έχει άδικον νουν. Ό •&εός κολαστής εστί 
 των άγαν νπερφρόνων. "Έχε νουν σώφρονα. Τ Ω δαϊμον, πάρεχε τοις γέρουσι 
 μεγάλην ευτνχίαν. ΟΙ ϋ-ηρευταΐ τοις λέουσιν ενεδρενουσιν. 
 
 Do well (pi.) to old men. Beverence (pi) the Deity. The flocks are guard- 
 ed by the shepherd. Follow a good leader. Go, youth, out of the old man's 
 way. The mob often follows bad leaders. The spirit (pi) of man is worn out 
 by (dot.) oppressive cares. Keep yourself from the bad man, as from a bad 
 harbour. The flocks follow the shepherds. Ye (0) gods, guard the good old 
 men. 
 
§36.] 
 
 THIRD DEC. STEMS LENGTHENED IN THE ΝΟΜ. 
 
 § 36. The following substantives in -?]q belong to the preceding 
 paradigms, viz. 6 πατήρ, father, ή μητηρ, mother, ή ΰυγάτηο, daugh- 
 ter, η γ αστήρ, belly, ή Αημητηρ, Demeter (Ceres) and υ άνηρ, man, 
 which differ from those of the above paradigms only in rejecting ε 
 in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in the Dat. PI., and in inserting an 
 a in the Dat. PI. before the ending -at, so as to soften the pronun- 
 ciation. The word άνηρ (stem άνερ), rejects ε in all Cases and 
 Numbers, except the Voc. Sing., but inserts a δ, to soften the pro- 
 nunciation. » 
 
 
 ό, Father. 
 
 η, Mother. 
 
 η, Daughter. 
 
 ό, Man. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 πατήρ 
 
 μητηρ 
 
 ■&υγάτηρ 
 
 ανηρ 
 
 G. 
 
 πατρ-ος 
 
 μητρός 
 
 ΰυγατρός 
 
 άν-ό-ρός 
 
 D. 
 
 πατρ-ι 
 
 μητρι 
 
 ϋνγατρΊ 
 
 άν-ό-ρί 
 
 A. 
 
 πατερ-α 
 
 μητέρα 
 
 θυγατέρα 
 
 άν-δ-ρα 
 
 V. 
 
 πάτερ 
 
 μητερ 
 
 ■&νγατερ 
 
 ανερ 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 πατέρ-ες 
 
 μητέρες 
 
 θυγατέρες 
 
 άν-δ-ρες 
 
 G. 
 
 πατερ-ων 
 
 μητέρων 
 
 θυγατέρων 
 
 άν-δ-ρών 
 
 D. 
 
 πατρ-ά-σι(ν) 
 
 μητράσι(ν) 
 
 ■&υγατρασι(ν) 
 
 άν-δ-ρ-ά-σι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 πατερ-ας 
 
 μητέρας 
 
 d -νγατέρας 
 
 άν-δ-ρας 
 
 V. 
 
 πατερ-ες 
 
 μητέρες 
 
 ϋνγατέρες 
 
 άν-δ-ρες 
 
 D.N.A.V. 
 
 πατέρ-ε 
 
 μητέρε 
 
 ■&υγατέρε 
 
 άν-δ-ρε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 πατερ-οιν 
 
 μητεροιν 
 
 ΰυγατέροιν 
 
 άν-δ-ροΐν. 
 
 Remark. Also the word ό αστήρ, -έρος, a star, which has no syncopated 
 form, belongs to this class on account of the form of the Dat. PI. άστράσι. The 
 word ή Δημήτηρ has a varying accent, via. Α ή αητ ρ ο ς. Α ν α η τ ρ ι, Voc. Αή- 
 μητερ, but Ace. Αημητέρα. 
 
 τ Α#λον, -ου, τό, a prize, a 
 
 reward. 
 γαστήρ, -τρός, ή, the belly. 
 δουλεύω, w. dat., to be a 
 
 ΧΠΙ. Vocabulary. 
 
 slave to, serve, work στέργω, to love, to be con 
 
 for. tented with. 
 
 έχϋ-αίρω, to hate. χαρίζομαι, w. dat, to com 
 
 σοφός, -ή, -όν, wise. ply with, oblige, gratify 
 
 Στέργετε τον πατέρα καϊ την μητέρα. Ήίη δοϋ?*,ενε γαστρί. 1 Χαΐρε, ω φίλι 
 νεανία, τω άγαϋώ πατρι 2 καϊ τη αγαϋή μητρί. Μη κακω συν άνδρΐ βουλεύον 
 Τ?? Αήμητρι 3 πολλοί καϊ καλοί νεω ήσαν. Ή άγαϋή ϋυγάτι/ρ ήδέως πείθεται, 
 τη φίλη μητρί* Οί άγα&οΐ άνδρες θαυμάζονται. ΤΙολλάκις εξ άγαϋοϋ πατρός 
 γίγνεται κακός υιός. 'Έχ&αίρω τόν κακόν άνδρα. Τοις άγαΰοϊς άνδράσι μεγά- 
 λη δόξα έπεται. Ή της Αήμητρος •&υγάτηρ ήν Τίερσεφόνη. Τ Ω φίλη ΰύγατερ, 
 στέργε την μητέρα. Ή άρετη καλόν ά-&λόν εστίν άνδρι 6 σοφώ. Οί άγα&οϊ viol 
 τάς μητέρας στέργουσιν. Οί "Έλληνες Αημητέρα σέβονται. Πεί&εσϋε, ω φί?„θ{ 
 νεανίαι, τοις πατράσι καϊ ταϊς μητράσιν. Χαρίζου, ώ πάτερ, ττ} -&νγατρι. 
 
 Μ 161, 
 Μ 161, 
 
 2. (a), (ό). 
 2. (a), (δ). 
 
 2 § 161, 2. (c). 
 6 §161, 5. 
 
 §161 2. (d). 
 
38 
 
 THIRD DEC. — ΝΟΜ. APPENDS 6 TO THE STEM. 
 
 Γ§37. 
 
 Love, Ο youths, your (the) fathers and mothers! Consult not with had 
 men. Good daughters cheerfully follow their (the) mothers. We admire a 
 good man. Obey, my dear youth, your (the) father and mother. Gratify, dear 
 father, thy (the) good son. Pray to Demeter. Strive, Ο son, after the reputa- 
 tion of thy (the) father. The prize of wise men is virtue. 
 
 § 37. The Nominative appends σ to the stem. 
 (a) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute — β, τι, φ ; γ, γγ, κ, χ. 
 On the coalescence of these with σ so as to form ψ and ?, see § 8, 3. 
 
 
 η, Storm. 
 
 δ, Raven. 
 
 δ, Throat. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 λαϊλάψ 
 
 κόράξ 
 
 λάρυγξ 
 
 G. 
 
 λαίλάπ-ος 
 
 κορακ-ος 
 
 λάρνγγ-ος 
 
 D. 
 
 λαίλάπ -L 
 
 κορακ-ι 
 
 λάρυγγ-ι 
 
 A. 
 
 λαίλάπ-α 
 
 κορακ-α 
 
 λάρυγγ-α 
 
 V. 
 
 λαϊλάψ 
 
 κόράξ 
 
 λάρνγξ 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 λαίλάπ-ες 
 
 κόράκ-ες 
 
 λάρυγγ-ες 
 
 G. 
 
 λαιλαπ-ων 
 
 κορακ-ων 
 
 λαρύγγ•ων 
 
 D. 
 
 λαίλάψι(ν) 
 
 κδράξι(ν) 
 
 λάρυγξι[ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 λαίλάπ-ας 
 
 κορακ-ας 
 
 λάρυγγ-ας 
 
 V. 
 
 λαίλάπ-ες 
 
 κορακ-ες 
 
 λάρυγγ-ες 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 
 λαίλάπ-ε 
 
 κόράκ-ε 
 
 λάρνγγ-ε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 λαιλαπ-οιν 
 
 KOpUK-OLV 
 
 λαρύγγ-οιν. 
 
 Remark. Here belong adjectives in -ξ (Gen. -γος, -κος, -χος) and -ψ (Gen. 
 -πος) ; e. g. ό η αρπάξ, Gen. -άγος, rapax, ό η ηλϊξ, Gen. -ϊκος, aequalis, ό η 
 μωνϋξ, Gen. -νχος, one-horned; δ η α'ιγίλϊψ, Gen. -ϊπος, high. 
 
 XIV. Vocabulary. 
 
 raven, 
 a κρώζω, to croak. 
 
 μάστιξ, -Ιγος, η, a scourge, 
 
 a whip. 
 μεν — δε, truly — but; on 
 
 the one hand, — on the 
 
 other : used in antithe- 
 
 Αγών, -ώνος, δ, a contest, κόραξ, -άκος, δ, a crow, a ορτυξ, -ϋγος, δ, a quail. 
 
 δρχη-Θ-μός, -ov, δ, a dance. 
 δ-ψ, δπός, ή, the voice. 
 πολύπονος, -ov, laborious. 
 σϋριγξ, -ιγγος, ή, a flute. 
 τέττιξ, -Ιγος, δ, a grass-' 
 hopper. [tor 
 
 φέναξ, -άκος, δ, an impos- 
 ses ; μεν, seldom to be φόρμιγξ, -ιγγος, η, a harp, 
 translated. ωψ, ώπός, η, the counte- 
 
 κδλαξ, -άκος, δ, a flatterer, μνρμηξ, -ηκος, °> an ant. nance. 
 
 Ο/ κόρακες κρώζονσιν. Ύοϋς κόλακας φενγε. Άπέχου του φένάκος. 1 01 άν 
 ϋρωποι τέρπονται φόρμιγγι 2 καϊ δρχη-&μώ και ώδτ}. Οι ίπποι μάστιξιν έλαννοι- 
 ται. ΑΊ φόριιιγγες τους των άν&ρώπων ΰνμονς τέρπουσιν. Ύέττιξ μεν τέττϊγι 
 φίλος εστί, μυρμηκι δε μνρμνξ. 01 ποιμένες προς τάς σύριγγας άδονσιν. ΤΙαοά 
 τοις Άϋηναίοις καϊ δρτύγων καϊ άλεκτρνόνων αγώνες ήσαν. Οι ποιυ,ένες Tac 
 
 αΐξ, -γός, δ, η, a goat. 
 άλεκτρνών, -όνος, ό, η 
 
 cock. 
 άοιδη, -ης, η, a song. 
 δέ, but. 
 
 έλαννω, to drive. 
 Ιππος, -ου, δ, a horse. 
 και — και, both — and, 
 
 well as. 
 
 §157. 
 
 161, 2. (c). 
 
§38.J 
 
 THIKD DEC- ΝΟΜ. APPENDS o" TO THE STEM. 
 
 39 
 
 των αιγών ίγέλας εις τους ?.ειμώνας έλαύνουσιν. Μνρμήκων καΐ δρτύγων βίος 
 πολύποικις εστίν. ΤΙολλοϊ άγαΰην μεν ώπα, κακήν δε δπα εχουσιν. 
 
 The raven croaks. Flee from the flatterer. Keep yourselves from impos 
 tors. Men are delighted by the harp. The horee is driven with the whip. The 
 shepherd sings to the flute. The life of the ant and of the quail is laborious. 
 The shepherd guards the goats. Flutes delight shepherds. 
 
 § 38. (b) The stem ends in a Tau-mute — d, τ, xt, &, v&. 
 the Ace. Sing, in -a and -v, see § 32, 3. 
 
 On 
 
 S.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ή, Torch. ή 
 
 λαμπάς* 
 
 λαμπάδ-ος 
 
 λαμπάδ-ι 
 
 λαμπάδ-α 
 
 λαμττάς 
 
 , Helmet 
 κόρνς* 
 κόρν&-ος 
 κόρυΰ-ι 
 κόρνν 
 κόρνς 
 
 b, ή, Bird. 
 δρνίς* 
 όρνί&-ος 
 δρνίΰ-ι 
 δρνίν 
 δρνίς 
 
 ό, King. y, 
 άναξ* 
 άνακτ-ος 
 άνακτ-ι 
 άνακτ-α 
 άναξ 
 
 Tape-worm. 
 ελμινς* 
 ελμιν&-ος 
 'έλμιν^-ι 
 ελμιν&-α 
 ϊλμινς 
 
 P.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 λαμπάδ-ες 
 
 λαμττάδ-ων 
 
 λαμπά-σι(ν)* 
 
 ?<,αμπάδ-ας 
 
 ?\,αμ~άδ-ες 
 
 κόρν&-ες 
 
 κορύ&-ων 
 
 κόρυ-σι(ν)* 
 
 κόρνϋ--ας 
 
 κόρν&-ες 
 
 δρνίΰ-ες 
 
 δρνΐ-&-ων 
 
 όρνϊ-σι{ν)* 
 
 όρνί-θ-ας 
 
 όρνίΰ-ες 
 
 άνακτ-ες 
 
 άνάκτ-ων 
 
 άναξι(ν)* 
 
 άνακτ-ας 
 
 άνακτ-ες 
 
 έλμιν&-ες 
 
 ε?ψίνΰ-ων 
 
 ελμϊ-σι(ν)* 
 
 ελμιν&-ας 
 
 ε?ψιν&-ες 
 
 Dual. 
 
 λαμπάδ-ε 
 λαμπάδ-οιν 
 
 κόρν&-ε 
 κορύ-&-οιν 
 
 δρνΐΰ--ε 
 δρνΐ&-οιν 
 
 άνακτ-ε 
 άνάκτ-οιν 
 
 έλμιν&-ε 
 ελμίνΟτ-οιν. 
 
 Rem. 1. The word ό η παις, child, Gen. παιδός, has παϊ in the Vocative. 
 
 Eem. 2. Here belong adjectives in -ις and -ι, Gen. -ιδος, -ιτος ; e. g. ό η εύ- 
 χαρις, ro εύχαρι; Gen. -ίτος, pleasing ; those in -άς, Gen. -άδος ; e. g. ό ή φυγάς, 
 Gen. -άδος, exiled; those in -ης, Gen. -ητος; e. g. ό τ) αργής, Gen. -ητος, white; 
 those in -ως, Gen. -ώτος ; e. g. δ η άγνως, Gen. -ωτος, unknown ; those in -ις, 
 Gen. -ιδος ; e. g. δ η άνάλκις, Gen. -ιδος, weak, η πατρίς, Gen. -ίδος, native land; 
 those in -νς, Gen. -ϋδος ; e. g. ό ή νέηλνς, Gen. -νδος, lately come. 
 
 Κπαλλάττω, w. gen. of the 
 thing, to set free from. 
 
 άπάσα, -ης, every. 
 
 γέλως -ωτος, ό, laughter. 
 
 εγείρω, to awaken, excite. 
 
 ελμινς, -ivS -ος, η, a worm. 
 
 ελπίς. -ίδος, η, hope. 
 
 έρις, -Ιδος, η, contention, 
 strife. 
 
 έρως, -ωτος, δ, love. 
 
 κακότης, -ητος, ή, wicked- 
 ness, vice. 
 
 XV. Vocabulary. 
 
 κατα-κρύπτω, to conceal. 
 
 κολάζω, to punish. 
 
 κουφός, -η, -ov, light, vain. 
 
 μακαρίζω,ίο esteem happy. 
 
 νεότης, -ητος, ή, youth. 
 
 ννξ, νυκτός, ή, night, νυκ- 
 τός, by night, in the 
 night. 
 
 δμοιότης, -ητος, η, like- 
 ness. 
 
 παις, παιδός, δ, η, a child, 
 a boy. 
 
 πένης, -ητος, ο, ή, poor. 
 
 πλούσιος, -ια, -ιον, rich. 
 
 π?ιθΰτος, δ, riches, wealth. 
 
 φροντίς, -ίδος, η, care, con- 
 cern. 
 
 φιλοχρημοσύνη,-ης, τ), ava- 
 rice. 
 
 χάρις, -ϊτος, η, favor, kind- 
 ness,gratitude,elegance. 
 
 χρησμοσύνη, -ης, ή, need- 
 inese, poverty. 
 
 * Instead of 7,αμπάδς, κόρν&ς, όρνιΰς, άνακτς, ελμιν&ς ; Dat. PL λαμπάδσι» 
 etc., see § 8, 3. 
 
40 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — NEUTERS. 
 
 [§39 
 
 ΟΙ όρνιθες άδουσιν. Χάρις χάριν τίκτει, έρις έριν. Ή,ακαρ'ζομεν την νεό- 
 τητα. Χρησμοσύνη τίκτει έριδας. ΤΙλουσιοι πολλάκις την κακότητα πλουτφ 
 κατακρνπτονσιν. Τ Ω κάλε παϊ, ευ πράττε τους άν&ρώπους. Ή φιλοχρηαοσύνη 
 αήτηρ κακότητος άπάσης εστίν. Οι πένητες πολλάκις είσιν ευδαίμονες. Ή σο- 
 φία εν τοις των ανθρώπων ΰυμοϊς -Θαυμαστούς των καλών έρωτας ένεγείρει. Ό 
 •Θάνατος τους άν&ρώπους φροντίδων άπαλλάττει. Ή φιλία δι' όμοιότητος γίγ- 
 νεται. Οίνος εγείρει γέλωτα. Έν νυκτϊ βουλή τοΐς σοφοϊς γίγνεται. Οι σο- 
 φοι κο?*άζουσι την κακότητα. Οί άν&ρωποι πολλάκις κούφαις έλπίσι τέρπονται. 
 
 The bird sings. From favor arises favor ; from contention, contention. By 
 (dat.) wisdom a wonderful love (pi.) of the beautiful is awakened in tbe minds 
 of men. By (dat.) the song of birds we are delighted. Wine dispels the cares 
 of men. Flee, my (0) boy, from vice. From (dat.) likeness arises friendship. 
 We delight in birds (dat.). 
 
 § 39. The stems of neuters belonging to this class, end in t and 
 κ?. But as the laws of euphony admit neither r nor γ.τ at the end 
 of a word, τ and also κτ, are either omitted, or r is changed into a. 
 Comp. § 33, 2. In the words, το yovv, knee, and το δόρυ, spear, 
 from the stems γονατ and δορατ, a, the final vowel of the stem, is 
 changed into v, in the Nominative. 
 
 
 to, Body. 
 
 το, Knee. 
 
 το, Milk. 
 
 το, Wonder. 
 
 τό, Ear. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 σώμα 
 
 γονυ 
 
 γάλα 
 
 τέρας 
 
 ους\ 
 
 G. 
 
 σωματ-ος 
 
 γονατ-ος 
 
 γάλακτ-ος 
 
 τερατ-ος 
 
 ωτ-ος 
 
 D. 
 
 σωματ-ι 
 
 γονατ- 1 
 
 γάλακτ-ι 
 
 τερατ-ι. 
 
 ωτ-ι 
 
 A. 
 
 σώμα 
 
 γονυ 
 
 γάλα 
 
 τέρας 
 
 ους 
 
 P. N. 
 
 σώματ-α 
 
 γόνατ-α 
 
 γάλακτ-α 
 
 τέρατ-α 
 
 ώτα 
 
 G. 
 
 σωματ-ων 
 
 γονατ-ων 
 
 γαλάκτ-ων 
 
 τερατ-ων 
 
 ωτ-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 σωμα-σι(ν)* 
 
 γόνα-σι(ν)* 
 
 γάλαξι(ν)* 
 
 τέρα-σι(ν)* 
 
 ώ-σί(ν)* 
 
 A. 
 
 σωματ-α 
 
 γονατ-α 
 
 γάλακτ-α 
 
 τερατ-α 
 
 ώτ-α 
 
 Dual. 
 
 σ ω ματ- ε 
 
 γόνατ-ε 
 
 γάλακτ-ε 
 
 τέρατ-ε 
 
 ώτ-ε 
 
 
 σωματ-οιν 
 
 γονατ-οιν 
 
 γαλάκτ-οιν 
 
 τερατ-οιν 
 
 ωτ-οιν. 
 
 Αμάρτημα, -άτος, τό, an 
 
 error, an offence. 
 άπτομαι, w. gen., to attach 
 
 oneself to, touch. 
 βαστάζω, to carry. 
 βοήθημα, -άτος, τό, help. 
 γάλα, -ακτος, τό, milk. 
 γεύομαι, w. gen., to taste, 
 
 enjoy. 
 γυμνάζω, to exercise. 
 διαμείβομαι, to exchange. 
 
 XVI. Vocabulary. 
 
 δόρυ, δόρατος, τό, a spear. 
 
 εϋ-ίζω, to accustom. 
 
 ■d -εράπεία, -ας, η, care, ser- 
 vice. 
 
 ίδρώς, -ώτος, 6, sweat. 
 
 Ικέτης, -ου, 6, a suppliant. 
 
 μικρός, -ά, -όν, small. 
 
 μύΘος, -ου, ό, a speech, a 
 word, an account. 
 
 ποικίλος, -η, -ov, various, 
 variegated. 
 
 πράγμα, -άτος, τό, an ac- 
 tion, a business, a thing, 
 an exploit. 
 
 βήμα, -άτος, τό, a word. 
 
 σπένδω, to pour libations, 
 pour out. 
 
 ταυτολογία, -ας, fj, tau- 
 tology, a repetition of 
 what has been said be- 
 fore. 
 
 φαύλος, -η, -ov, bad. 
 
 * Instead σώματσι, γόνατσι, γά?ί.ακτσι, etc., see § 8, 3. t Instead of ως. 
 
§39.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. NEUTERS. 
 
 ■11 
 
 χρήμα, -ΰτος, τό, a thing ; χρηστός, -ή, -όν, useful, χωρισμός, -ov, ό, separa- 
 pL property, money, good, brave. tion. 
 
 treasures. 
 
 'Έν χαλεποϊς πράγμασιν ό?ύγοι έταϊροι πιστοί ε'ισιν. Της αρετής πλοντον ον 
 διαμειβόμε&α τοις χρήμασιν. Οί ίκέται των γονάτων 1 άπτονται. Ό •&άνατός 
 εστί χωρισμός της ψυχής και τοϋ σώματος. Ό πλούτος παρέχει τοις άν&ρώποις* 
 ποικίλα βοηθήματα. Μη πεί&ου κακών άνΰρώπων βήμασιν. 2 Μη δούλευε, ώ 
 παϊ, τ?) τοϋ σώματος ΰ-εραπεία. Οί °Έ?.ληνες ταϊς Νύμφαις 2 κρατήρας γάλακτος 
 σ-ένδονσιν. Έ&ιζε και γύμναζε το σώμα συν πόνοις και ίδρώτι. Οί άύολέσχαι 
 τείρονσι τα ώτα ταϊς ταντο?.ογίαις. 4 ¥νχήν έ&ιζε, ώ παϊ, προς τά χρηστά πράγ- 
 υατα. ΟΊ Φαύλοι μνΰοι των ώτων ουχ άπτονται. Ύοϊς ώσϊν 4 άκονομεν. Μ?) 
 έχ&αιρε §Ί7.ον μικρόν αμαρτήματος ένεκα. Τενον, ώ παϊ, τοϋ γά/ιάκτος. 6 Οί 
 στρατιώται δόρατα βαστάζουσιν. 
 
 In a difficult business there are few faithful friends. Exercise, Ο youths, 
 yonr (the) body with labor and sweat! Strive, Ο boy, after noble actions. 
 Many men delight in money. From a noble action arises reputation. We ad- 
 mire noble actions. Boys taste milk with pleasure. Soldiers fight with spears. 
 
 Remark. The word το τέρας usually admits contraction in the plural, after 
 r is dropped ; e. g. τέρά, τερών ; το γέρας, reicard of honor, το γήρας, old age, τό 
 κρέας, flesh, and το κέρας, horn, reject the τ in all numbers, and then suffer con 
 traction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and PI., except 
 the Dat, PI. ; besides these forms, however, κέρας has also the regular forms 
 with r. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 το κέρας 
 κέρατ-ος 
 κέρατ-ι 
 κέρας 
 
 and (κέρα-ος) κέρως 
 and (κέρα-ϊ) κέρα 
 
 τό κρέας 
 
 (κρέα-ος) κρέως 
 (κρέα-ϊ) κρέα 
 κρέας 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 κέρατ-α 
 κεράτ-ων 
 κέρα-σι(ν) 
 κέρατ-α 
 
 and (κέρα-α) κέρα 
 and (κερά-ων) κερών 
 
 and (κέρα-α) κέρα 
 
 (κρέα-α) κρέα 
 (κρεά-ων) κρεών 
 κρέα-σι(ν) 
 (κρέα-α) κρέα 
 
 Ώ. N. A. V. 
 G. and D. 
 
 κέρατ-ε 
 κεράτ-οιν 
 
 and (κέρα-ε) κέρα 
 and (κερά-οιν) κερών 
 
 (κρέα-ε) κρέα 
 (κρεά-οιν) κρεών. 
 
 'λ,νδρία, -ας ή, bravery. 
 
 γέρας, τό, a reward, a gift 
 of honor. 
 
 γήρας, τό, old age. 
 
 διατροφή, -ής, ή, nourish- 
 ment 
 
 δύσκο?*ος, -ov, difficult, 
 troublesome. 
 
 &Λ$ος, -ov, ό, ή, a stag. 
 
 XVII. Vocabulary. 
 
 ευεξία, good condition. 
 
 ■8-εμέλιον, -ov, τό, a foun- 
 dation. 
 
 κέρας, τό, a horn. 
 
 κρέας, -έαος = -έως, τό, 
 flesh, meat. 
 
 πέμπω, to send. 
 
 προ-τρέπω, to turn to, im- 
 pel, [pet. 
 
 σάλπιγξ, -ιγγος, ή, a trum- 
 
 σημαίνω, to give a sign, 
 or signal. 
 
 υπάρχω, to be at hand, or 
 to be had, be. 
 πρόβάτον, -ov, τό, a sheep. φάρμακον,-ον,τό,Ά remedy. 
 
 §158,3. (b). «§161,5. 
 
 3 § 161, 2. (a), (<*). 
 4* 
 
 4 §161 3. 6 § 158, δ, (a) 
 
42 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.— STEMS IN V OR Vt. 
 
 [§40. 
 
 ΟΙ #εοί τοις άν&ρώποις τέρα πέμπουσιν. Ύών ίν γηρα κακών φάρμακον δ 
 ΰάνατός εστίν. Τα -γέρα τους στρατιώτας είς άνόρείαν προτρέπει. 'Έξ αιγών 
 καΐ προβάτων γάλα καϊ κρέα προς διατροφην υπάρχει. Κεράσι 1 καϊ σάλπιγξιν 
 ol στρατιώται σημαίνουσιν. Τίοικίλων κρεων 2 γενόμενα. Καλοΰ γήρως &εμέ- 
 λιον εν παισ'ιν εστίν ή του σώματος ευεξία. Αϊ ελαφοι κέρα έχουσιν. Αύςκολός 
 *στιν δ εν γήρα βίος. 
 
 By (ΰπδ, w. gen.) the gods, prodigies are sent to men. Death abolishes the 
 evils of old age. By {dot.) rewards, soldiers are impelled to bravery. Rejoice, 
 Ο youth, at the reward. We admire the beautiful horns of the stag. Many 
 evils accompany old age. Bear the troubles of old age. 
 
 § 40. (c) 
 
 The stem ends in ν or vt. 
 
 
 
 
 η, Nose. 
 
 δ, Dolphin. 
 
 δ, Giant. 
 
 δ, Tooth. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 $r* 
 
 δελφΐς* 
 
 γίγας* 
 
 δδούς* 
 
 G. 
 
 δϊν-δς 
 
 δελφίν-ος 
 
 γιγαντ-ος 
 
 δδδντ-ος 
 
 D. 
 
 ρΊν-ί 
 
 δελφϊν-ι 
 
 γιγαντ-ι 
 
 δδόντ-ι 
 
 A. 
 
 βϊν-α 
 
 δε7^φϊν-α 
 
 γιγαντ-α 
 
 δδδντ-α 
 
 V. 
 
 βιν 
 
 δελφίς(ΐν) 
 
 γιγαν 
 
 δδούς 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 ρΊν-ες 
 
 δελφίν-ες 
 
 γίγαντ-ες 
 
 δδδντ-ες 
 
 G. 
 
 ρΊν-ών 
 
 δελφΐν-ων 
 
 γιγαντ-ων 
 
 δδδντ-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 βϊ-σί(ν)* 
 
 δελφΐ-σι(ν)* 
 
 γίγά-σι{ν)* 
 
 δδον-σι{ν)* 
 
 A. 
 
 βϊν-ας 
 
 δελφϊν-ας 
 
 γιγαντ-ας 
 
 δδόντ-ας 
 
 V. 
 
 βΐν-ες 
 
 δελφϊν-ες 
 
 γιγαντ-ες 
 
 δδδντ-ες 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 
 ρΊν-ε 
 
 δελφΐν-ε 
 
 γίγαντ-ε 
 
 δδόντ-ε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 βϊν-οΐν 
 
 δελφΐν-οιν 
 
 γιγαντ-οιν 
 
 δδόντ-οιν. 
 
 Rem. 1. Here belong: (a) the two adjectives in -ας, -αινα, -av, viz. μέλας, 
 -α ιν a, -av, Mack, and τ άλας, -αινα, -αν, wretched; — (b) πάς, πάσα, 
 παν, all, every, and its compounds; e. g. άπας, απάσα, άπαν; — (c) εκών, 
 ό ν σα, •όν, willing, -δντος, -ούσης, -δντος, and άκων, άκουσα, άκον, unwilling ;— 
 (d) adjectives in - ε ι ς, -ε σσα, -εν, which are peculiar, inasmuch as the Dat> 
 PL, masculine and neuter, ends in -εσι instead of - ε ι σ ι ; e. g. 
 
 
 
 Black. 
 
 
 
 All. 
 
 
 Sing. Ν- 
 
 μέλας 
 
 μέλαινα 
 
 μέλαν 
 
 πάς 
 
 πάσα 
 
 πάν 
 
 G. 
 
 μέλανος 
 
 μέλαινης 
 
 μέλανος 
 
 παντός 
 
 πάσης 
 
 παντός 
 
 D. 
 
 μέλανι 
 
 μελαίνη 
 
 μέλανι 
 
 παντι 
 
 πάση 
 
 παντι 
 
 A. 
 
 μέλανα 
 
 μέλαιναν 
 
 μέ?.αν 
 
 πάντα 
 
 πασαν 
 
 παν 
 
 V. 
 
 μέλαν 
 
 μέλαινα 
 
 μέλαν 
 
 πάς 
 
 πάσα 
 
 πάν 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 μέλανες 
 
 μέλαιναι 
 
 μέλανα 
 
 πάντες 
 
 πάσαι 
 
 πάντα 
 
 G. 
 
 μελάνων 
 
 μελαίνων 
 
 μελάνων 
 
 πάντων 
 
 πασών 
 
 πάντων 
 
 D. 
 
 μέλασι 
 
 μελαίναις 
 
 μέλασι 
 
 πάσι 
 
 πασαις 
 
 πάσι 
 
 A. 
 
 μέλανας 
 
 μέλαινας 
 
 μέλανα 
 
 παντας 
 
 πάσας 
 
 πάντα 
 
 V. 
 
 μέλανες 
 
 μέλαιναι 
 
 μέλανα 
 
 πάντες 
 
 πασαι 
 
 πάντα 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 
 μέλανε 
 
 μέλαινα 
 
 μέλανε 
 
 π άντε 
 
 πάσα 
 
 πάντε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 μελάνοιν 
 
 μελαίναιν 
 
 μελάνοιν. 
 
 π αν το ιν 
 
 πασαιν 
 
 παντοιν. 
 
 Μ 161, 3. 2 § £ 158, 5. (a). 
 
 * Instead of ρΊ,νς, δελφΐνς, γίγαντς, δδδντς, ρΊνσί, etc., see § 8, 6 and 7. 
 
§ 41.] THIRD DECLENSION.— STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL. 
 
 43 
 
 Singular. Graceful. Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 χαρίεις* χαριεσσα χαριεν 
 
 JN. 
 
 χαριεντες χαριεσσαι χαρίεντα 
 
 G. 
 
 χαρίεντυς χαριέσσΐ]ς χαρίεντος 
 
 G. 
 
 χαριέντων χαριεσσών χαριέντων 
 
 D. 
 
 χιριεντι χαριεσστ) χαριεντι 
 
 υ. 
 
 χαρίεσι(ν) χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαριεν 
 
 Α. 
 
 χαριεντας χαριεσσας χαρίεντα 
 
 V. 
 
 χαριεν χαριεσσα χαριεν 
 
 V. 
 
 χαριεντες χαριεσσαι χαρίεντα 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 χαρίεντε χαριεσσα χαρίεντε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν. 
 
 Κελί. 2. Adjectives compounded with οδούς, are declined like οδούς ; e. g. δ 
 ή μονόδονς, το μονόδον, one-toothed, Gen. μονόδοντος ; adjectives in -ας, Gen 
 -αντος, like γίγας ; e. g. ό ή άκάμας, untiring, Gen. -αντος. 
 
 
 XVIII. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άκτίς, -ϊνος, η, a beam, a 
 
 εκών, -ονσα, -όν, willing. 
 
 ray. 
 
 έλέψάς, -αντος, ό, an ele- 
 
 'άκων -ούσα, -ον, unwill- 
 
 phant, ivory. 
 
 ing. 
 
 εύπορος, -ov,w.gen.,ViOQuna.- 
 
 άπας, -άσα, -άν, all to- 
 
 ing m. 
 
 gether, every. 
 
 f /λιος, -ον, δ, the sun. 
 
 οδονς, -δντος, δ, a tooth. 
 οσώραίνομαι, to smell. 
 πάς, πάσα, πάν, every, all. 
 ποτέ, once, sometimes. 
 βις, βινός, ή, the nostril, 
 the nose. 
 αντος, -η, •ό, ipse, δ αυτός, κωτί?>ος,-η,-ον, loquacious, τάλάς,-αινα,-άν, wretched. 
 
 φιλάνΰ-ρωπος, -ον, man- 
 loving, philanthropic. 
 
 χαρίεις -εσσα, -εν, grace- 
 ful. 
 
 the same. λεαίνω, to make smooth, 
 
 βρώμα, -ατός, τό, food, vie- grind. 
 
 tuals. μάχη, -ης, η, a battle. 
 
 γίγας, -αντος, δ, a giant, μέλας, -αινα, -άν, Mack, 
 
 δελφις, -ϊνος, δ, a dolphin. dark. 
 
 Ον πάσιν άν&ρώποις δ αντδς νονς εστίν. Ύοΐς δδονσι 1 τα βρώματα λεαίνομεν. 
 Οι δε7^ϊνες φιλάνΰρωποί είσιν. "Έστιν ανδρός 2 άγα•&ον πάντα κακά φέρειν. 
 Πολλαί Λιβύης χώραι εύποροι ε'ισιν ελέφαντας. Τίάντες κωτ'ώον άν&ρωπον εχ- 
 ■&αίρονσιν. Ύοΐς γίγάσί 3 ποτέ τ]ν μάχη προς τονς ΰεούς. Ύαϊς τον ηλίον άκτι- 
 σι χαίρομεν. 'Ρινών έργον έστιν οσφραίνεσΰαι. 
 
 The teeth grind the food. We smell with the nose (dat.). The gods once 
 had a battle with the giants (To the gods there was once a battle against the 
 giants). "We admire the beautiful ivory. Trust not all men. The business of 
 the teeth is, to grind the food. It is proper for (it is, w. gen.) every man to wor- 
 ship the Deity. 
 
 B. "Words which in the Genitive have a vowel before 
 the ending -og. 
 
 §41. I. Suhstantiv es in -εν ς, -αν ς, -ο ν ς. 
 The stem of substantives in -ενς, -avg, -ovg ends in v. The ν 
 remains at the end of a word and before consonants, but is omitted 
 
 * The dropping the ν before σ lengthens ε into ει. 
 Μ 161, 3. 2 § 158 2. 3 U61,2. (d). 
 
 § 161,2. (c\ 
 
44 THIRD DECLENSION. — STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL. [§41. 
 
 in the middle between vowels. Those in -svg have -da in the Ace, 
 Sing, and -dag in the Ace. PL ; in the Gen. Sing., they take the 
 Attic Gen. -έως instead of -dog, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom • 
 PL, admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. Plural. Those 
 in -avg and -ovg admit contraction only in the Ace. Plural. 
 
 
 6, King. 
 
 ό, A measure. 
 
 ό, ή, Οχ. η, 
 
 An old woman. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 βασιλεύς 
 
 χοευς 
 
 βονς, bos for bovs 
 
 γραϋς 
 
 G. 
 
 βασιλέ-ως 
 
 χο(έω)ώς 
 
 βο-ός 
 
 ypu -ος 
 
 D. 
 
 βασιλεϊ 
 
 χοει 
 
 βο -t 
 
 γρα•ι 
 
 A. 
 
 βασιλέ a 
 
 χο(έα)ά 
 
 βοΰν 
 
 γρανν 
 
 V. 
 
 βασιλεΰ 
 
 χοευ 
 
 βον 
 
 γραυ 
 
 P.N. 
 
 βασιλείς 
 
 χοεΐς 
 
 βό-ες 
 
 γρά-ες 
 
 G. 
 
 βασιλέ-ων 
 
 χο(έω)ών 
 
 βο-ών 
 
 γρα-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 βασιλεϋσι(ν) 
 
 χοενσι(ν) 
 
 βονσί(ν) 
 
 γρανσί(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 βασιλέ-άς 
 
 χο(έα)άς 
 
 (βό-ας) βονς 
 
 (γρά-ας) γραϋς 
 
 V. 
 
 βασιλείς 
 
 χοεις 
 
 βό-ες 
 
 γρα-ες 
 
 Dual. 
 
 βασιλε-ε 
 
 χοέε 
 
 βό-ε 
 
 γρά•ε 
 
 
 βασιλέ-οιν 
 
 χοεοιν 
 
 βο-οιν 
 
 γρα-οιν. 
 
 Eemark. Among the older Attic writers, the Nom. and Voc. PL of those in 
 ■εύς, end also in -ης ; e. g. βασιλης, instead of βασιλείς. 
 
 XIX. Vocabulary. 
 
 "Αρχω, w. gen., to begin, to εικάζω, w. "dat., to liken, όφ&αλμός, -οΰ, ό, an eye. 
 
 command, rule. 
 
 ατιμάζω, not to honor, de- 
 spise. 
 
 αχάριστος, -ov, unthank- 
 ful, ungrateful. 
 
 πολνλόγος r ov, loquacious. 
 
 προ, w. gen., before. 
 
 τέ — /caLboth — and, as well 
 
 φονεύω, to murder, kill. 
 
 χοενς, χοως, ό, a measure 
 for liquids, a pouring- 
 vessel. 
 
 compare. 
 
 επιμέλεια, -ας, η, care. 
 
 ■&νω, to sacrifice. 
 
 Ιερεύς, -έως, ό, a priest. 
 
 ληρος, -ov, ό, loquacity. 
 Άχιλλενς, Achilles, [ing. νομεύς, -έως, ό, pastor, a 
 βούλομαι, to wish, be will- herdsman, a shepherd. 
 γονεύς, -έως, δ, a parent, νομή, -ης, η, pasture. 
 pi. parents. 
 
 Οι βασιλείς έπιμέλειαν έχονσι των πολιτών. Ή αγέλη τω νομεϊ έπεται. 1 
 Ό "Έκτωρ υπό τον Άχιλλέως φονεύεται. Οι ιερείς τοις -Θ-εοϊς 2 βονς ΰύονσιν. 
 Κνρος παις ην άγαΰών γονέων. Οι αχάριστοι τονς γονέας άτιμάζονσιν. ΤΙεί- 
 ■&ον, ώ παϊ, τοις γονεΰσιν. 1 Τηλέμαχος ην Όδνσσέως υιός. Βούλου τους γονέας 
 προ παντός εν τιμαϊς εχειν. Οι των γραών ληροι τά ώτα τείρουσιν. Καλώς 
 άρχεις, ώ βασιλεΰ. Αϊ γράες πολυλόγοι είσίν. Οι νομείς την βοών άγέλην εις 
 νομην αγουσιν. "Ομηρος τους της 'Ήρας όφΰ-αλμοϋς τοις τών βοών εικάζει 
 Τίάτροκλος φίλος ην Άχιλλέως. Κϋρον, τον τών ΐίερσών βασιλέα, έπί τε τι) 
 αρετή και τη σοφία -&αυμάζομεν. 
 
 The king cares for the citizens. The herds follow the herdsman. Oxen are 
 sacrificed by (ύπό, w. gen.) the priests to the gods. The old women by (their) 
 
 161, 2. (a), (ό). 
 
 § 161, 5. 
 
§ 42.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. WORDS IN -ης AND -ες. 
 
 45 
 
 prating (dot.) plague our (the) ears. Ye rule well, Ο kings! Ο priests, sacri- 
 fice an ox to the god ! It is proper for (it is, w. gen.) a good herdsman to take 
 care of the oxen. Children love their (the) parents. 
 
 § 42. II. Words in -ης, -ες ; -ως ( Gen. -ωος) and -ως and -ω ( Gen. 
 -οος) ; -ας (Gen. -αος), -ος (Gen. -εος). 
 
 1. The stem of words of this class ends in o\ In respect to the 
 remaining or omission of o% the same rule is observed, as in regard 
 to ν in the preceding class of substantives, viz. the σ remains at the 
 end of a word and before consonants, but is omitted in the middle 
 between vowels. In the Dat. PL a σ is omitted; e. g. ό &ώς, 
 jackal, τοις ϋ-ω-σί(ν). 
 
 (1) Words in -ης and - ες . 
 
 2. The endings -ης, -ες, belong only to adjectives (the ending -ης 
 being masculine and feminine, and -ες neuter), and to proper names 
 in -φάνης, -μενης, -γε'νης, -κράτης, -μηδης, -πεί&ης, -β&ε'νης and 
 (-κλεης) -κλης, having the termination of adjectives. The neuter 
 exhibits the pure stem. 
 
 3. The words of this class suffer contraction, after the omission 
 of a, in all Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing, and the Dat. PI. ; 
 and those in -κλεης, which are already contracted in the Nom. Sing, 
 into -κλης, suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Singular. 
 
 Singular, 
 σαφής, clear. 
 
 (σαφέ-ος) 
 (σαφέ-ϊ) 
 (σαφέ-α) 
 σαφές 
 
 σαφές 
 
 Plural. 
 
 σαφείς 
 σαφών 
 
 (σαφέ-ες) 
 σαφονς (σαψέ-ων) 
 
 σαφεί σαφέ-σι(ν) 
 
 σαφή σαφές (σαφέ-ας) σαφείς 
 
 σαφές (σαφέ-ες) σαφείς 
 
 Dual Ν. Α. V. 1 σαφέ-ε σαφή 
 
 G. and D. | σαφέ-οιν σαφοϊν. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 ή τριήρης, trireme. (τριήρε-ες) τριήρεις 
 (τριήρε-ος) τριήρους τριηρέ-ων and τριηρών 
 (τριήρε-'ί) τριήρει τριήρε-σι(ν) 
 (τριήρε-α τριήρη (τριήρε-ας) τριήρεις 
 τρίηρες (τριήρε-ες) τριήρεις 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Σωκράτης (ΤΙερικ/,έης) ΤΙερικλής 
 
 Σωκράτους (Τίερικ?.έε-ος) ΤΙερικλέονς 
 
 Σωκράτει (Ιίερικλέε-Ϊ) (Τίερικλέει) 
 
 Σωκράτη (Τίερικλέε-α) ΤΙερικλέά 
 
 Σώκρατες (Τίερίκ?;εες) ΊΙερίκ?.εις. 
 
 (σαφέ-α) σαφή 
 
 (σαφέ-α) 
 (σαφέ-α) 
 
 σαφή 
 σαφή 
 
 Dual. 
 
 (τριήρε-ε) ■ 
 (τριηρέ-οιν) 
 
 τριήρη 
 τριηροιν 
 
 Κ 
 G. 
 D. 
 Α. 
 V. 
 
 ΤΙερικλεΐ 
 
 Εεμ. 1. The contraction in the Dual, viz. τριήρεε — τριήρη is worthy of no- 
 tice, since here -εε is contracted into -η, and not as elsewhere, into -ει. 
 Pvzm. 2. In adjectives in -ης, -ες, preceded by a vowel, -εα is commonly not 
 
46 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION.• — WORDS IN -ως. 
 
 [§43. 
 
 contracted into -η (as in σαφέα — σαφή), but into -a (as in ΤΙερικλέε-α == -λέά) 
 G g. άκλεής, without fame, Masc. and Fern. Ace. Sing., and Neut. Nom. Ace. and 
 Voc. PL άκλεέα = άκλεά, υγιής, healthy, ΰγιέα = υγιά. 
 
 Rem. 3. Proper names with the above endings, and also "Αρης, form the Ace. 
 Sing, both according to the first and third declensions, and are therefore called 
 Heteroclites ; e. g Σωκράτεα = Σωκράτη, and Σωκράτην according to the firs* 
 declension. Yet with those in -κλης the Ace. in -κλήν is not usual in good At- 
 tic prose. 
 
 Rem. 4. The Voc. of paroxytones differs, m its accentuation, from the rule 
 in § 33, ΙΠ. (a). In the contracted Gen. PL, τριήρης, αυτάρκης, contented, and 
 compounds of ήϋος, are paroxytones, contrary to the rule [§ 11, 2. (2) (b) (β)]. 
 
 XX. Vocabulary, 
 
 Ata#poc,-a,-ov,disgraceful. δουλεία, -ας, ή, slavery. 
 
 ακρατής, -ες, immoderate, έλεαίρω, to pity, 
 incontinent, intemper- έλώδης, -ες, marshy, 
 ate. wanting in self- 
 command. 
 
 αληθής, -ες, true. 
 
 άτυχης, -ες, unfortunate, 
 
 'Αστυάγης, Astyages. 
 
 αφανής, -ες, unknown, ob- 
 scure. 
 
 ποταμός, -οΰ, δ, a river. 
 
 σοφιστής, -οϋ, δ, a teacher 
 of eloquence, a sophist. 
 
 σωτηρία, -ας, ή, safety, 
 welfare. 
 
 τόπος, -ου, δ, a place. 
 
 τραγωδία, -ας, ή, a trag- 
 edy. 
 
 Ινδική, ή, India. 
 
 κάλαμος, -ου, δ, a reed. 
 
 λέγω, to say. 
 
 Μανδάνη, Mandane. 
 
 δμιλία, -ας, ή, w. dat. : 
 intercourse (with any 
 one). 
 
 Α.Ί τοϋ Σοφοκλέους τραγφδίαι καλαί εϊσιν. Τον Τίερικλέά έπϊ τή σοφία -&αυ- 
 μάζομεν. Ύώ Σωκράτει 1 πολλοί μαΰηταϊ ήσαν. Ή Ινδική παρά τε τους ποτά' 
 μούς και τους έλώδεις τόπους φέρει καλάμους πολλούς. Αέγε άεϊ τα άληϋ-ή. 
 'Αναξαγόρας, δ σοφιστής, διδάσκαλος ην τοϋ Τίερικλέους. Τ Ω 'Ήράκλεις, τοις 
 άτυχέσι σωτηρίαν πάρεχε. Επαμεινώνδας πατρός 2 ην άφανοϋς. Έλέαιρε τον 
 άτυχη αν&ρωπον. Μανδάνη ην •&υγάτηρ 'Αστυάγους, τοϋ Μήδων βασιλέως. 
 Όρέγεσΰ-ε, ω νεανίαι, άλη&ών λόγων. ΟΙ ακρατείς αίσχράν δουλείαν 3 δουλεύου- 
 σιν. Ήίή όμιλίαν έχε άκρατεΐ άν&ρώπω. 4 
 
 Pericles had great wisdom (to Pericles there was great wisdom). Pity un- 
 fortunate men. Many young men were pupils of Socrates. The intemperate 
 (man) serves a disgraceful slavery. We admire Sophocles for his (the) splen- 
 did tragedies. True words are believed. "We pity the life of unfortunate men. 
 Do not have intercourse with intemperate men. 
 
 § 43. (2) Words in -ως {Gen. -ωος), and in -ως and -ω (Gen. -οος). 
 (a) -ως, Gen. -ωος . 
 
 S.N. 
 
 δ, ή •&ώς, Jackal. PL •&ώ-ες 
 
 S. δ ήρως, Hero. PL ήρω-ες 
 
 G. 
 
 ΰω-ός -&ώ-ων 
 
 ηρω-ος ηρω.-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 ■&ω-ί -&ω-σί{ν) 
 
 ήρω-ι ήρω-σι[ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 ϋώ-α -&ώ-ας 
 
 ήρω-α and ήρω ήρω-ας and ήρως 
 
 V. 
 
 ■&ώς -Θ-ώ-ες 
 
 ηρως ηρω-ες 
 
 D. Ν. Α. V. &ώ ε, G. and D. ΰώ-οιν. 
 
 D. ηρω-ε, ήρώ-οιν. 
 
 Μ 161, 2. (d). 
 
 2 § 158, 1. 
 
 3 $ 159. 2. 
 
 « § 161, 2. (a) (α). 
 
§44.] 
 
 TIIIIID DECLENSION. WORDS IN -CO*, -ω AND -CL£. 
 
 47 
 
 (b) -ως and -ω, Gen. -οος = -ους . 
 Substantives of these ending* are always feminine. The ending 
 -ως is retained in the common language only in the substantive αι- 
 δώς. The Dual and PI. are formed like substantives in -ος of the 
 second declension, thus, αιδοί, ήχοι, etc. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ή αιδώς (stem 
 
 αίδος), Shame. 
 
 ή ηχώ (stem ήχος), Echo. 
 
 G. 
 
 (αίδό-ος) 
 
 αίδονς 
 
 (νχό-ος) ήχους 
 
 D. 
 
 (αίδό-ϊ) 
 
 αίδοϊ 
 
 (hxo -ϊ) νχοϊ 
 
 A. 
 
 (αίδό-α) 
 
 αιδώ 
 
 (ήχό-α) ηχώ 
 
 V. 
 
 (αίδό-ϊ) 
 
 αίδοϊ. 
 
 (ήχό-ϊ) ήχοι. 
 
 Άγαϋός, -ή, -όν, good. 
 αιδώς, ή, shame, modesty, 
 
 reverence. 
 δμώς, δμωός, ό, a slave. 
 ενεστώ, -όος = -ους, ή, 
 
 well-being, prosperity. 
 Ιστοριογράφος, -ου, ό, an 
 
 historian. 
 κήπος, -ου, ό, a garden. 
 
 προσ-βλεπω, to look at. 
 
 πρόσ-ειμι, adsum, to be 
 present, be joined to. 
 
 σέβας, τό, (only in Norn, 
 and Ace.) respect, es- 
 teem. 
 
 XXI. Vocabulary. 
 
 λυπηρός, -α, -όν, sad, trou- 
 blesome. 
 Αυσίας, Lysias. 
 ?ιϋρ'ικός, -ή, -όν, lyric. 
 σψις, -εως, ή, the counte- 
 nance, the visage. 
 πάτρως, -ωος, ό, an uncle ψεύδω, to beHe, deceive ; 
 
 (by the father's side). Mid. to He. 
 
 πειϋώ, -όος = -ους, ή, per- 
 suasiveness. 
 Όμηρος άδει -κοίλους ήρωας. Ύήν των ηρώων άρετήν ϋαυμάζομεν. Οι δμώες 
 3ίον λυπηρόν άγουσιν. Ό τοϋ πατρώος κήπος κα?,ός έστιν. Όρέγου, ω παΐ, 
 αίδοϋς. Αιδώς άγαϋοϊς άνδράσιν έπεται. Τον Αυσίαν επί ttj πει&οϊ κάΙ χάριτι 
 ΰαυμάζομεν. Trj αίδοϊ πρόςεστι το σέβας. Μ?) πρόςβλεπε την Τοργοϋς όψιν. 
 Ώ 'Ή,χοϊ, -ψευδείς πο?.?Λκις τους άν&ρώπους. ΤΙάντες ορέγονται ευεστονς. Ήρέ- 
 πει νεανία αΙδώ έχειν. Κλείώ καϊ 'Ερατώ Μοΰσαί είσιν. Ύήν μεν Κ?.ειώ ϋ-ερα- 
 πενουσιν οι ιστοριογράφοι, την δε 'Ερατώ οι λυρικοί ποιηταί. 
 
 Homer celebrates the hero Achilles in song. The bravery of the hero is 
 wonderful. Slaves lead (to slaves there is) a troublesome life. The uncle has 
 (to the uncle there is) a beautiful garden. All delight in prosperity. Admire, 
 Ο young man, with reverence, the actions of good men ! "We admire the per 
 «uasiveness and elegance of Lysias. "We are often deceived by Echo. 
 
 § 44. (3) Words in -ας (Gen. -αος), and in -ος (Gen. -sog). 
 (a) -ας , Gen. -αος. 
 Only the neuters το σέλας, light, and το δέπας, gollet, belong to 
 this class. 
 
 j Sins:. N. 
 
 το σέλας, light. 
 
 PI. σέλα-α and σέλα 
 
 Dual. σέ?.α-ε 
 
 G. 
 
 σέ?«α-ος 
 
 σε/.α-ων 
 
 σελά-οιν. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 σέλα-ϊ and σέλα 
 
 σέλα-σι(ν) 
 
 
 σέλας 
 
 σέλα-α and σελά 
 
 
48 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. WOEDS IN -0£. 
 
 [§44 
 
 (b) -of, Gen. -εος = -ους . 
 Substantives of this class are likewise neuter. In the Nom., 
 f, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 το γένος for γένες, genus. 
 (γένε-ος) γένους 
 (γένε-ϊ) γένει 
 γένος 
 
 το κλέος for κλέες, glory. 
 (κλέε-ος) κλέους 
 (κλέε-ϊ) κλέει 
 κλέος 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 (γένε-α) γένη 
 γενέ-ων and γενών 
 γένε-σί(ν) 
 (γένε-α) γένη 
 
 (κλέε-α) κλέα 
 (κλεέ-ων) κλεών 
 κλέε-σι(ν) 
 (κλέε-α) κλέΰ, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 (γένε-ε) γένη 
 (γενέ-οιν) γενοϊν 
 
 (κλέε-ε) κ7άη 
 (κλεέ-οιν) κλεοϊν. 
 
 Remark. On the contraction in the Dual of -εε into -η instead of -ει, see § 42, 
 Hem. 1 ; •εα in the plural preceded by a vowel, is contracted into -a, not into -η ; 
 e. g. κλέεα = κλέα. Comp. Τϊερικλέα (§ 42, Kern. 2). 
 
 Άλλα, sed, but. 
 άνεμος, -ου, δ, the wind. 
 άν&ος, -εος = -ους, τό, a 
 flower. [safe. 
 
 XXII. Vocabulary. 
 
 είδος, -εος = -ους, τό, the 
 
 figure, the form. 
 έπος, -εος = -ους, τό, a 
 
 word. 
 
 κρίνω, cerno, to separate, 
 judge, discern, choose 
 
 μήκος, -εος = -ους, τό, 
 length. 
 
 ασφαλής, -ές, firm, secure, ζημία, -ας, ή, injury, pun- πονηρός, -a, -ον, dishonest, 
 
 wicked. 
 σέλας, -αος, τό, splendor. 
 ϋψος,-εος— -ον ς, τό, height, 
 
 elevation. 
 χαλκός, -οΰ, δ, brass. 
 ψεύδος, -εος = -ους, το, 
 
 a lie. [cold. 
 
 -εος = -ους, τό, 
 
 γένος,-εος — -ους, τό, race, ishment, loss. 
 
 descent. •&άλπος, -εος == -ους, τό, 
 
 /V, yvc> ν> the earth. heat. 
 
 5ειλός, -ή, -όν, cowardly, ΰνητός, -ή, -όν, mortal. 
 
 worthless. κέρδος, -εος — -ους, τό, 
 
 ειρίνός, -ή, -όν, spring, ι. e. gain. 
 
 belonging to the spring, κλέος, -έεος = -έους, τό, 
 
 (tap) vernal. _, fame, ^/.famous actions, ψύχος, 
 
 Ή γη άν&εσιν εαρινοϊς ϋ- άλλε ι. Ύών κακών δειλά Ιπη φέρουσιν άνεμοι. Μ.ή 
 άπέχου ψύχους καϊ ϋάλπους. Τό καλόν οΰ μήκει χρόνου κρίνοιιεν, αλλά αρετή. 
 Ουκ ασφαλές εστί πάν νψος εν -&νητώ γενεί. Μη ψεύδη λέγε. Άπέχου πονη- 
 ρών κερδών. Κέρδη πονηρά ζημίαν άεϊ φέρει} Κάτοπτρον είδους χαλκός εστίν, 
 οίνος δε νου. Οι άν&ρωποι κλέους ορέγονται. Οί άνδρες κλέει χαίρονσιν. Οι 
 ανδρείοι κλεών ορέγονται, θανμάζομεν τά τών ανδρών κλέα. 
 
 Abstain from dishonest gain. We delight in spring flowers. Keep not 
 yourself, Ο youth, from cold (pi) and heat! (pi.). Flee from dishonest gains. 
 Punishment follows the lie. TVe admire the Hellenes for (επί, w. dot.) their 
 (the) famous actions. Soldiers are impelled to noble actions by (dat.) the love 
 for (gen.) fame. The famous actions of soldiers are admired. 
 
 1 See rule of Syntax, p. 27. 
 
§§ 45, 46.] THIRD DECLENSION. — WORDS IN -Iff, -t/£, -i, -V. 
 
 4^ 
 
 § 45. III. Words in -ig, -vg, -t, -v. 
 
 
 (1) W 
 
 ords in -Ις, -ϋς. 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ό κΐς, corn-worm. 
 
 ό, ή σϋς, a boar, a sow. 
 
 ό Ιχ&ύς, fish. 
 
 G. 
 
 κί-ος 
 
 συ-ος 
 
 ίχ&υ-ος 
 
 D. 
 
 Kl-l 
 
 συ-ι 
 
 Ιχ&ΰ-Ϊ 
 
 A. 
 
 KCV 
 
 συν 
 
 ίχϋϋν 
 
 V. 
 
 KL 
 
 σϋ 
 
 Ιχ&ύ 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 ιά- ες 
 
 συ- ες 
 
 ίχ&υ-ες 
 
 G. 
 
 κϊ-ών 
 
 συ- ων 
 
 ίχ&ύ-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 κϊ-σί(ν) 
 
 σϋ-σί(ν) 
 
 1χΰ-ύ-σι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 κί-ας 
 
 σϋ-ας and συς 
 
 ιχ&ύ-ας, rarer Ιχ&ΰς 
 
 V. 
 
 κί-ες 
 
 συ- ες 
 
 ίχ&ύ-ες 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 
 kt -ε 
 
 συ- ε 
 
 Ιχ&υ-ε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 κϊ-οΐν 
 
 συ -ocv 
 
 ίχΰύ-οιν. 
 
 ΧΧΤΤΤ. Vocabulary. 
 
 Α7Λίστρον,-οϋ, ro, ahook. βάτραχος, -ου, δ, a frog, νέκΰς, -ϋος, δ, a corpse, α 
 βότρϋς, -ϋος, ό, a cluster dead body. 
 
 of grapes. παγΐς, -ίδος, η, a trap, a 
 
 snare. 
 
 ay ρεύω, to catch. 
 
 άμπελος, -ου, η, a vine 
 
 άνα-κύπτω, to peep up or Ισος, -η, -ov, like, equal. 
 
 out, emerge. μυς, -ϋος, ο, mus, muris, a σταχϋς, -ϋος, ό, an ear 
 
 βασιλεύω, w. gen., to be mouse. of corn, 
 
 king, rale. 
 
 Οι ίχϋύες Ικ του πόταμου άνακύπτουσιν. Οι "&ηρευταΙ τάς σύας άγρεύουσιν. 
 Τίάντες loot νέκυες ■ ψυχών δε •&εος βασιλεύει. 1 Ή άμπελος φέρει βότρυς. Ή 
 γη φέρει στάχυας καϊ βότρυας. ΟΙ μύες παγίσιν άγρεύονται. Οι Σύροι σέβον- 
 ται τους Ιχ•&ΰς ως ■&εύύς. Τοις μνσϊ 2 μάχη ποτέ ην προς τους βατράχους. Άγ- 
 κίστροις ένεόρεύομεν τοις ίχϋύσιν. 
 
 We catch fishes with hooks. The huntsman lies in wait for the boars. The 
 clusters (of grapes) and ears (of corn) are beautiful. The vine is abounding 
 (εύπορος, w. gen.) in clusters of grapes. The frogs once had a battle with the 
 mice (To the frogs was once a battle against the mice). 
 
 § 46. (2) Words in -ig, ϊ, vg, v. 
 
 The stem-vowels ι and ν remain only in the Ace. and Yoc. Sing. ; 
 in the other Cases they are changed into ε. In the Gen. Sing, and 
 PI., masculine or feminine substantives end in -ως and -ων, — in 
 which case ω has no influence on the place of the accent. Comp, 
 § 30, Rem. 2. 
 
 * § 158, 7. (a) 
 
 *§ 161,2. (d). 
 
50 
 
 THIKD DECLENSION. — WORDS IN -iff, -I -V$, -V. 
 
 .[§ 46. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 η πόλϊς, city. 
 
 ό πηχυς, cubit, rd σιναπι, mustard. 
 
 τδ άστυ, city. 
 
 G. 
 
 πόλε-ωο 
 
 πηχε-ως 
 
 σιναπε-ος 
 
 άστε-ος 
 
 D 
 
 πόλεί 
 
 πηχει 
 
 σιναπει 
 
 αστει 
 
 A. 
 
 πόλιν 
 
 πηχνν 
 
 σιναπι 
 
 άστυ 
 
 V. 
 
 πόλι 
 
 πήχυ 
 
 σιναπι 
 
 άστυ 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 πόλεις 
 
 πήχεις 
 
 σιναπη 
 
 άστη 
 
 G. 
 
 πόλε-ων 
 
 πηχε-ων 
 
 σιναπε-ων 
 
 άστέ-ων 
 
 D. 
 
 πόλε-σι(ν) 
 
 πηχε-σι{ν) 
 
 σινάπε-σι(ν) 
 
 άστε-σι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 πόλεις 
 
 πήχεις 
 
 σιναπη 
 
 άστη 
 
 v. 
 
 πόλεις 
 
 πήχεις 
 
 σιναπη 
 
 άστη 
 
 Dual. 
 
 πόλε- ε 
 
 πηχε-ε 
 
 σινάπε-ε 
 
 άστε- ε 
 
 
 πολέ-οιν 
 
 πηχε-οιν 
 
 σιναπε-οιν 
 
 αστε-οιν. 
 
 Rem. 1. Here belong adjectives in ΰς, -εια, -ϋ, the declension of which does 
 not differ from that of substantives, except that the Gen. of the masculine sin- 
 gular has the common form -έος (not -εως), and that the neuter plural is always 
 uncontracted. Thus : 
 
 Singular. Sweet. Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 γλυκύς γλυκεία γλυκύ 
 
 Ν. 
 
 γλυκείς γλυκεϊαι γλυκέα 
 
 G. 
 
 γλυκέ-ος γλυκείας γλνκέ-ος 
 
 G. 
 
 γλυκέων γλυκειών γλυκέων 
 
 D. 
 
 γλυκεΐ γλυκεία γλυκεϊ 
 
 D. 
 
 γλυκέσι{ν) γλυκείαις γλυκέσι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 γλυκύν γλυκεϊαν γλυκύ 
 
 Α. 
 
 γλυκείς γλυκείας γλυκέα 
 
 V. 
 
 γλυκύ γλυκεία γλυκύ 
 
 V. 
 
 γλυκείς γλυκεϊαι γλυκέα 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 γλυκέε γλυκεία γλυκέε 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 γλυκέοιν γλυκείαιν γλυκέοιν. 
 
 Here also belong adjectives in -ϋς, -υ, Gen. -εος, which are declined like 
 γλυκύς, -ύ, except that the neuter plural in -εα is coDtracted into -η (as άστη) ; 
 e. g. b η δίπηχυς, το δίπηχυ, two cubits long, τά διπηχη. 
 
 Rem. 2. Some substantives in -ϊς, and also adjectives in -ις, -ι, e. g. ϊόριζ, 
 ιδρι, skilled in, have a regular inflection ; so also the word η έγχελνς, eel, in tho 
 singular. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ό, ή πόρτις, calf. η έγχελυς, eel. 
 
 ο, η οις, sheep. 
 
 G. 
 
 πορτι-ος 
 
 έγχέλυ-ος 
 
 οίος 
 
 D. 
 
 πόρτι-ι πόρτί 
 
 έγχέλυ-ϊ 
 
 οΐί 
 
 A. 
 
 πορτιν 
 
 έγχελυν 
 
 δϊν 
 
 V. 
 
 πορτι 
 
 έγχελυ 
 
 οις 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 πόρτι-ες πόρτίς 
 
 έγχέλεις 
 
 οίες 
 
 G. 
 
 πορτι-ων 
 
 έγχέλε-ων 
 
 οίων 
 
 D. 
 
 πόρτι-σι(ν) 
 
 έγχέλε-σι(ν) 
 
 οισί(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 πόρτι-ας πόρτίς 
 
 έγχέλεις 
 
 οίας, rarer οις 
 
 V. 
 
 πόρτι-ες πόρτίς 
 
 έγχέλεις 
 
 οίες 
 
 Dual. 
 
 πάρτι- ε 
 
 εγχέλε-ε 
 
 oh 
 
 
 πορτι-οιν 
 
 ίγχελέ-οιν 
 
 οιοΐν. 
 
 XXIV. Vocabulary. 
 
 *Ap;^>-fa>^> a beginning, trates, authorities, of- ασέλγεια, -ας, ή, excess, 
 command, pi. magis- fices of command. /3e/?aiOf,-fi,-ov,firm,secure. 
 
§ 47.] IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 51 
 
 βροτός, -η, -όν, mortal. μόνος, -η, -ον, alone. πύργος, -ον, ό, a tower. 
 
 βρώσις, -εως, ή, eating. νόμος, -ον, ό, a law. σπάνις, -εως, ή, neediness, 
 
 διάφορος, -ον, different όνησις, -εως, η, advantage. want 
 
 δώρον, -ον, τό, a gift πήχνς, -εως, ό, the elbow, στάσις, -εως, ή, a faction, 
 
 ένδεια, -ας, η, want a cubit sedition. 
 
 έπιχτνμία, -ας, η, desire, πόλεμος, -ον, ό, war. σύνεσις, -εως, η, under- 
 
 καρττός, -ον, ό, fruit. πόλις, -εως, η, a town, a standing. 
 
 κόσμος, -ον, δ, an oma- state, a city. ύβρις, -εως, ή, insolence, 
 
 ment, order, the world, πόρτις, -ως, ό, η, a heifer. haughtiness. 
 
 κτήμα, -ατός, τό, a pos- πόσις, -εως, ή, drinking, φύλαξ, -κος, ό, a guard, a 
 
 session. [session. drink. guardian. 
 
 κτήσις, -εως, η, gain, pos- πράξις, -εως, η, an action, φνσις, -εως, η, nature. 
 
 Άσέ?ϊ,γεια τίκτει νβριν. 'Έν πόσει καϊ βρώσει πολλοί είσιν εταίροι, εν δε 
 σπονδαίω πράγματι ολίγοι. Ό πλοντος σπάνεως 1 και ένδειας τονς άν&ρώπονς 
 λύει. Έπου τη φύσει.* Αί άπο τον σώματος επιϋνμίαι πολέμονς και στάσεις 
 και μάχας παρέχονσιν. Έν ταϊς πόλεσιν α'ι άρχαί νόμων φυλακές είσιν. Άπέ ■ 
 χεσΰ-ε, ω πολϊται, στάσεων} Όρέγεσ&ε καλών πράξεων. 3 Αιάφοροί είσιν αί 
 τών βροτών φύσεις. 'Έξ ύβρεως πολλά κακά γίγνεται. Κακόν άνδρος δώρα 
 όνησιν ονκ έχει. Αόξα καϊ πλοντος άνεν σννέσεως ονκ ασφαλή κτήματα είσιν. 
 Οί καρποί γλνκεΐς είσιν. 'Αρετής βέβαιαί είσιν αί κτήσεις μόναι. Πολλά άστη 
 τείχη έχει. Οί τον άστεος πύργοι καλοί είσινί Οί πύργοι τω αστει* κόσμος είσιν. 
 
 Riches free from neediness and want. In the state the magistrates are the 
 guardians of the laws. Strive, Ο young man, after a noble action ! The pos- 
 session of virtue is alone secure. Good laws bring order to states. Soldiers 
 fight for the safety of cities. Flee, Ο citizens, from factions ! 
 
 § 47. Irregular No uns of the Th ird Declension. 
 
 1. Ανήρ, see § 36 ; γάλα, γόνν, δόρν, ους, § 39 ; χειρ, § 35, Rem. 2. 
 
 2. Γννη (ή, woman), Gen. γυναικ-ός, Dat. γυναικ-ί, Ace. γυ- 
 ναΐκ-α, Voc. γύναι; Ρ1. γυναίκες, γυναικών, γυναιξί(ν), γυναίκας. 
 
 3. Ζευς, Gen, Α ιός, Dat. Ad, Ace. Αία, Voc. Ζ ευ. 
 
 4. Θ ρίξ (η, hair), Gen. τριχ-ός, Dat. PL >&ριξί(ν), see § 8, 11. 
 
 5. Κλείς (ή, key), Gen. κλειδ-ός, Dat. κλειδ-ί, Ace. κλεϊδ-α 
 and (commonly) κλεϊν, PI. Nom. and Ace. κλεΐς, also κλάδες, 
 κλείδας. 
 
 6. Κυων (ο, η, dog), Gen. κυν-ός, Dat. κυνί, Ace. κυνα, Voc. 
 κύον; PI. κύνες, κυνών, κυσί(ν), κύνας. 
 
 7. Α α ς (ο, stone), Gen. λάος, Dat. λάϊ, Ace. λαν, seldom λαα ; 
 PL λάες, λάων, λάεσσι(ν). 
 
 8. Μ ά ρ τ υ ς (6, ή, witness), Gen. μάρτυρος, Dat. μάρτυρι, Ace. 
 μάρτυρα, more seldom μάρτυν; Dat. PL μάρτϋσι(ν). 
 
 9. Ναΰς (ή, navis), Gen. νεώς, Dat. νψ, Ace. ναΰν, Dual: 
 
 1 § 157. 2 § 161, 2. (a) (δ). 3 -§ 158, 3. (b). 4 § 161, 5. 
 
52 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 LH8. 
 
 Gen. and Dat νεοΐν (Nom. and Ace. are not in use) ; PL νήες, 
 vmv, νανσί(ν), νανς. Comp. γρανς, § 41. 
 10. "Τδωρ (το, water), Gen. νδατος, etc. 
 
 XXV. Vocabulary. 
 
 Αϋηναΐος, -ου, 6, an Athe- ίϋΰνω, to set right, guide, μαρτυρία,-ας, #, testimony. 
 
 man. ιστός, -οϋ, ό, a loom. 
 
 'Αδης, -ου, 6, Hades, the κεφαλή, -ης, ή, the head, 
 god of the lower world κίστη, -ης, ή, a chest, 
 (Pluto). coffer. 
 
 άπιστος, -ov, unfaithful, κοιλαίνω, to hollow out. 
 incredible. [treaty. 
 
 δέησις, -εως, η, an en- 
 
 δέχομαι, to receive. 
 
 εκκλησία, -ας, η, an as- 
 sembly. 
 
 ■&ρ'ιξ , τριχός, η, the hair. 
 
 οικία, -ας, η, a house. 
 οίκος, -ου, ό, a house. 
 περίδρομος, -ov, running 
 
 round, gad- about. 
 πέτρα, -ας, ή, a rock. 
 στάγών, -όνος, ή, a drop, 
 
 or dropping. 
 σώζω, to save, preserve. 
 σωτήρ, -ηρος, ό, a saver, 
 
 a preserver. 
 ώφέλεια,-ας, η, advantage 
 
 κομίζω, to bring. 
 κτείς, -ενός, ό, a comb. 
 κτενίζω, to comb. 
 κύβος, -ου, ό, a die. 
 κϋβερνητης,-ου,ό, a steers- 
 man, a pilot. 
 
 Ai γυναίκες τω κόσμω χαίρουσιν. Οι "Έλληνες σέβονται Αία. Ταΐς γυναιξιν 
 η αιδώς πρέπει. Οι κύνες τον οίκον φυλάττουσιν. Ό κυβερνήτης την ναϋν 
 ί&ύνει. Αϊ σταγόνες του ύδατος πέτραν κοιλαίνουσιν. Έχϋαίρω γυναίκα πε- 
 ρίδρομον. Της γυναικός* έστι τον οίκον φυλάττειν. Υυναικος 1 έσϋ?<.ής εστί σώ- 
 ζειν οίκίαν. Άεϊ ευ πίπτουσιν ο'ι Αώς κύβοι. Οι κύνες τοις άνΰ-ρώποις ώφέ 
 λειαν καϊ ήδονην παρέχουσιν. Αϊ τών μαρτύρων μαρτυρίαι πολλάκις άπιστοι 
 είσιν. Ίστοϊ γυναικών έργα, και ουκ έκκλησίαι. Κόμιζε, ώ παΐ, την της κίσ- 
 της κλεΐν. Τ Ω Ζεϋ, δέχου την τοϋ άτυχους δέησιν. Κάστωρ καϊ ΐίολυδεύκης 
 τών νεών σωτήρες ήσαν. Τυναικι* πάση κόσμον η σιγή φέρει. Οι γέροντες 
 ολίγας τρίχας εν τή κεφαλή έχουσιν. Τ Ω γύναι, σώζε την οίκίαν. Ύω κτένι 3 τάς 
 τρίχας κτενίζομεν. Ό Αιακός τάς του "Αδου κλεΐς φυλάττει. 
 
 The woman delights in ornament. It is the duty (it is, w. gen.) of women to 
 look after the house. Bring, Ο boy, the key of the house ! Women delight in 
 beautiful hair. The Athenians had (To the Athenians were) many ships. 
 Trust not all witnesses. It is the business (it is, to. gen.) of dogs to guard the 
 house. Zeus had (To Zeus were) many temples. The fishes peep up from the 
 water. The steersmen guide the ships. Modesty becomes a woman. 
 
 
 § 48. Irregular 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 P. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 πράος 
 πράου 
 πράω 
 πράον 
 πράος, πράε 
 
 π ραεΐ α 
 π ρ αείας 
 π ραεία 
 π ραεΐαν 
 π ραεϊα 
 
 πράον, mild. 
 
 πράου 
 
 πράω 
 
 πράον 
 
 πράον 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 πράοι and π ραεΐ ς 
 π ρ αέ ων 
 
 πράοις and π ρ α έ σ ι (ν) 
 πρέιους and π ρ α εις 
 πράοι and π ραεΐς 
 
 π ραεΐαι 
 πράε ιών 
 πραείαις 
 π ραείάς 
 π ρ αεΐ α ι 
 
 πραέα 
 π ραέων 
 π ρ α έ σ ι (ν) 
 πραέα 
 πραέα 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 G.andD. . 
 
 πράω 
 πράοιν 
 
 π ρα είά 
 π ραείαιν 
 
 πράω 
 πράοιν. 
 
 1 § 158, 2. 
 
 § 161,5. 
 
 3 U61,3. 
 
48„] 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 π ο λ ί' ς πολλή ττ ολ ύ, much. 
 
 μέγας μεγά7.η μ έ γ a, great. 
 
 G. 
 
 ττολλον πο7,λης πο7.λοΰ 
 
 μεγάλου μεγά7*ης μεγάλου 
 
 D. 
 
 πολ/.ώ Tco7J)\.y πολλώ 
 
 μεγά?Μ μεγάλη μεγάλω 
 
 A. 
 
 π ο7Λν πολλην πολύ 
 
 μ έ γ α ν μεγάλην μέγα 
 
 V. 
 
 πολύ πο7,λή πο/ώ 
 
 μέγα μεγά7.η μέγα 
 
 Piur. N. 
 
 πολλοί πολλαί πυ/,/Λ 
 
 μεγάλοι μέγά?.αι μεγάλα 
 
 G. 
 
 πολλών πολλών πολ?Μν 
 
 μεγά7.ων μεγά/Μν μεγάλων 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. regular. 
 
 etc. regular. 
 
 
 Declension of Participles . 
 
 S. Κ 
 
 στας στάσα 
 
 στάν 
 
 ζ.ιπών /απούσα ?απόν 
 
 G. 
 
 σταντος στάσης 
 
 σταντος 
 
 λιπόντος /απούσης ?απόντος 
 
 D. 
 
 σταντί στάση 
 
 σταντι 
 
 7απόντι 7απονση λιποντι 
 
 Α. 
 
 σταντα στασαν 
 
 σταν 
 
 /,ιττόντα 7αποϋσαν λιπόν 
 
 V. 
 
 στας στασα 
 
 σταν 
 
 ?απών 7αποϋσα λιπόν 
 
 P.N. 
 
 στάντες στάσαι 
 
 στάντα 
 
 λιπόντες 7αποϋσαι λιπόντα 
 
 G. 
 
 στάντων στασών 
 
 σταντων 
 
 λιπόντων 7απονσών λιπόντων 
 
 D. 
 
 &τάσι(ν) στάσαις 
 
 στάσι(ν) 
 
 λιτϊθϋσι(ν) λιπονσαις /απονσι(ν) 
 
 A. 
 
 σταντας στασας 
 
 σταντα 
 
 λιπόντας 7απονσάς 7απόντα 
 
 V. 
 
 σταντες βτασαι 
 
 σταντα 
 
 λιπόντες λιπονσαι λιπόντα 
 
 Dual. 
 
 στάντε στάσά 
 
 στάντε 
 
 7απόντε 7απονσά λιπόντε 
 
 
 σταντοιν στασαιν 
 
 σταντοιν. 
 
 7απόντοιν λιπονσαιν 7απόντοιν. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 /διφυείς -εϊσα 
 
 -έν 
 
 αγγέλων -ονσα -οϋν 
 
 G. 
 
 7*.ειφ-&έντος -είσης 
 
 -εντός 
 
 άγγε7*ονντος -ούσης -οϋντος 
 
 D. 
 
 λειφΰέντι -είση 
 
 -εντι 
 
 άγγε7,οϋντι -ούση -οϋννι 
 
 A. 
 
 ?ιείό-&έντα -εϊσαν 
 
 -εν 
 
 άγγελοϋντα -οΰσαν -οϋν 
 
 V. 
 
 λείφ&είς -εϊσα 
 
 -εν 
 
 άγγε7.ών -ονσα -οϋν 
 
 P.N. 
 
 λειοΰέντες -είσαι 
 
 -έντα 
 
 άγγε7„ονντες -οϋσαι -οϋντα 
 
 G. 
 
 7*ειφΰέντων -εισών 
 
 -εντων 
 
 άγγελούντων -ονσών -ούντων 
 
 D. 
 
 ?νειψϋ-εϊσ/(ν) -είσαις 
 
 -εΐσι(ν) 
 
 άγγελοϋσι -ούσαις -ονσι 
 
 A. 
 
 7»ειφ-&έντας -είσας 
 
 -εντα 
 
 αγγελοϋντας -ούσας -οϋντα 
 
 V. 
 
 7,ειφ•ο χ έντες -είσαι 
 
 -εντα 
 
 άγγε7,ονντες -ονσαι -οϋντα 
 
 Dual. 
 
 7*ειφ-&έντε -είσά 
 
 -έντε 
 
 άγγε7,ονντε -ονσα -οϋντε 
 
 
 /.ειόϋ-έντοιν -είσαιν 
 
 -εντοιν. 
 
 άγγε7,ούντοιν -ονσαιν -ούντοιν. 
 
 Eemark. All participles in -ας are declined like στάς, and all present, second 
 Aor. and first Eut. participles in -ων, like λιπών, and first and second Aor. pas- 
 sive participles, like λειό-8-είς, and all second Put. Act. participles, like αγγέλων. 
 
 Αίγυπτος, -ου, η, Egypt. 
 
 άλγος, -εος = -ονς, τό, 
 pain. 
 
 άφϋονία, -ας, η, absence 
 of envy, abundance. 
 
 έΰος, -εος = -ονς, τό, cus- 
 tom, manner. 
 
 Ιλιάς, -άδος, η, the Iliad, 
 
 XXVI. Vocabulary. 
 
 κακών Ίλιάς, a multi- 
 tude of evils. 
 
 'Μακεδών, -όνος, ό, Mace- 
 donian. 
 
 μέγα, greatly. 
 
 ολίγος, -η, -ον, little, small. 
 
 οφέ7Χω, to nourish, in- 
 crease. 
 
 δ* 
 
 πάΰ-ος, -εος = -ονς, το, 
 
 suffering, a passion. 
 πολύς, πολλή, πολί\ much, 
 
 many, great. 
 πράος, πραεΐα, πράον, soft, 
 
 mild. 
 προσ-αγορεύω, to call, 
 
 name 
 
54 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [§§ 49, 50 
 
 πρόσ-οδος, -ου, η, an ap- σίτος, -ov, δ, corn. be connected or attend 
 
 preach, an income, rev- φόβος, -ov, δ, fear ; φόβον ed with fear, 
 enue, reditus. έχειν, to have fear, to 
 
 ΤΙολύν olvov πίνειν κακόν εστίν. Οι βασιλείς μεγάλας προςόδους έχουσιν. 
 'Έν Αίγύπτω πολίτη σίτου άφ&ονία ην. Ή ΰάλαττα μεγάλη εστίν. Μέγα πά• 
 ■&ος προςαγορεύομεν Ίλιάδα κακών. Κροίσω 1 ην πολύς πλούτος. ΤΙολλάκις εξ 
 δλίγης ηδονής μέγα γίγνεται άλγος, ΐΐραέσι (πράοις) λόγοις ηδέως εϊκοαεν. 
 Ύά μεγά?Μ δώρα της τύχης έχει φόβον. Τίολλών άν&ρώπων έΰη 'εστί πραέα. 
 ΤΙόνος άρετην μέγα δφέλλει. Οί παίδες τους πραεϊς [πράους) πατέρας και τάς 
 πραείας μητέρας στέργουσιν. Όμιλίαν έχε τοϊς πραέσιν {πράοις) άν&ρώποις} 
 At γυναίκες πραεϊαί εϊσιν. Άλέξανδρον, τον τών Μακεδόνων βασι?Λα, μέγαν 
 άπαγορεΰονσιν. 
 
 Abstain from much wine. Kings have (to kings are) great revenues. Egypt 
 has (in Egypt is) great abundance of corn. Croesus has (to CroesuB are) 
 great riches. Strive after mild manners. Women have (to women is) a mild 
 nature (φύσις). Alexander, king of the Macedonians, is called the Great. 
 
 §49. Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 The Greek language has two forms to indicate the two degrees 
 of comparison (Comparative and Superlative) ; much the most 
 common form is - t ε ρ ο ς, -r ε ρ ά, -t ερον, for the Comparative, 
 and -t at ο ς, - τ ά τ η, -t at ο ν, for the Superlative ; a much 
 more rare form is - ι ων, - ϊ ov, or -ων, - ο ν, for the Compara- 
 tive, and -ιστός, -iGtrj, - ιστον, for the Superlative. 
 
 Rem. 1. The Superlative expresses a quality in the highest degree, or only 
 in a very high degree. 
 
 Rem. 2. Instead of the simple forms of the Comparative and Superlative, the 
 Greek, like the Latin, can prefix μάλλον (magis) and μάλι-στα (maxime) to the 
 Positive. 
 
 §50. A. First Form of Comparison. 
 
 Comparative, -τερος, -τ ε' ρ ά, -τ ερον. 
 Superlative, -rat ο ς, -τ at η, -tat ο ν. 
 The following adjectives annex these forms in the following man- 
 ner: 
 
 I. Adjectives in - ο ς, - η (- a), - ov. 
 
 (a) Most adjectives of this class, after dropping σ, annex th 
 above endings to the pure stem, and retain the o, when a syllabL 
 long by nature or by position, § 9, 3, precedes, (a mute and liquid 
 always make the syllable long here) ; but, in order to prevent the 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (d 2 § 161, 2. (a), (a). 
 
§ 50.] ADJECTIVES. — FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 55 
 
 concurrence of too many short syllables, ο is lengthened into ω, when 
 a short syllable precedes; e. g. 
 
 κονφ-ος, light, Com. κονφ-ό-τερος Sup. κονφ-ό-τατος, -η. -ov, 
 
 Ισχνρ-ός, strong, " Ίσχϋρ-ό-τερος, " Ισχνρ-ό-τατος, 
 
 λεπτ-ός, thin, " λεπτ-υ-τερος, " λεπτ-ό-τατος 
 
 σφοδρ-ός, vehement, " σφοδρ-υ-τερος, " σφοδρ-ό-τατος, 
 
 πίκρ-ός, bitter, " πικρ-ό-τερος, " πικρ-ό-τατος, 
 
 σοφ-ός, wise, " σοφ-ώ-τερος, " σοφ-ώ-τατος, 
 
 ίχνρ-ός, firm, " έχϋρ-ώ-τερος, " έ^ϋρ-ώ-τατοο, 
 
 αξί-ος, worthy, " αξΙ-ό)-τερος, " άξί-ώ-τατος. 
 
 (b) Contracts in -«ο? = -οι» ? and -oo? == -ov?, suffer contraction 
 in the Comparative and Superlative also, since « of the former is ab- 
 sorbed by ω, but the latter, after dropping o?, insert the syllable e?, 
 which is contracted with the preceding ο ; e. g. 
 
 πορφνρ-εος = πορφνρ-ονς άπλ-όος = άπλ-οΰο 
 
 πορφνρ-εώτερος = πορφνρ-ώ-τερος άπλο-έσ-τερος = άπνΙ-ούο-τεροΓ 
 πορφυρ-εωτατος = πορφνρ-ω-τατος άπλο-έσ-τατος — άπλ-ονσ-τατος 
 
 Here belong also contracts of two endings in - ο ν c and -ovv; e.g. εύν-οος 
 = ενν-ονς, Neut. ενν-οον = εύν-ονν, Com. εννο-έσ-τερος = ενν-ονσ-τερος, Sup. 
 είνο-έσ-τατος = ευν-ούσ-τατος. 
 
 (c) The following adjectives in - αιος, viz. γεραιός, old, π α- 
 λά ι 6 ς, ancient, π εραΐος, on the other side, σχολαΐος, at lei' 
 sure, drop -ος and append - 1 ε ρ ο ς and -τ ατός to the root ; e. g. 
 
 γεραι-ός, Com. γεραί-τερος, Sup. γεραί-τατος, 
 παλαι-ός, " παλαί-τερος, * " παλαί -raroc. 
 
 (d) The following adjectives in - ο £, viz. ευ διος, calm, ήσυ- 
 χος, quiet, ϊδιος, own, ίσος, equal, μέσο ς, middle, ορ&ριος, 
 early, 6 ψ ι ο ς, late, and π ρ ω ϊο ς, in the morning, after dropping 
 -ος, insert the syllable at, so that the Comparative and Superlative 
 of these adjectives are like the preceding in -αιος ; e. g. 
 
 μέσ-ος, Com. μεσ-αί-τερος, Sup. μεσ-αί-τατος, 
 Ιδί-ος " ίδι-αί-τερος, " Ιδι-αί-τατος. 
 
 Rem. 1. Φί /lof, beloved, dear, has three different forms: φιλώτερος, ώιλώ- 
 τατος ; φίλτερος, φίλτατος ; φιλαίτερος, φιλαίτατος. 
 
 (e) Two adjectives in -ο?, viz. εξρωμενος, strong, and 
 άκρατος, unmixed, after dropping -o£, insert the syllable «£ ; e. g. 
 ερρωμεν-έσ-τερος, ερρωμεν-εσ-τατος, άκραζ-εσ-τερος, άκρατ-ε'σ-τατος. 
 So also αίδοΐος, modest, has αιδοιε'σταζος in the Superlative. 
 
 (f) The following adjectives in -ος, viz. λάλο?, talkative, 
 μονοφάγος, eating alone, όψοφάγος, dainty, and τττωχός, 
 poor, after dropping ος, insert the syllable t£ ; e. g. λάλ•ος, Com. 
 λαλ-ισ-τερο?, Sup. λαλ-ίσ-τατος. 
 
56 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [§ 50 
 
 II. Adjectives in -ης, Gen. -ov, and -ψευδής, ες, false, Gen 
 -ε'ος, shorten the ending -ης into -ι ς ; e. g. κλεπτ-ης, Gen. -ov, thiev- 
 ish, Com. κλεπτ-ίσ-τερος, Sup. κλεπτ-ίσ-τατος ; ιμενδίατερος, ψεν- 
 
 XXVII. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άγάλλω, to adorn ; Mid. ε-&νος, -εος = -ους, τό, a πτωχός, -ή, -όν, begging, 
 
 w. dot., to pride oneself nation, a people. very poor. 
 
 in, be proud of, delight Αακεδαψόνιος, -ου, 6, a σιωπή, -ης, ή, silence. 
 
 in. Lacedaemonian. τίμιος, -a, -ov, honored, 
 
 άίρετός, -ή, -όν, choice, νομίζω, to think, deem. esteemed, valuable. 
 
 eligible ; Comparative, ουδείς, ουδεμία, no one ; χελιδών, -όνος, ή, a swal- 
 
 preferable to. ουδέν, nothing. low. 
 
 βίαιος, -a, -ov, violent. πατρίς, -ίδος, ή, native χρήσιμος, -η, -ov, useful, 
 δίκαιος, -a, -ov, Attic δί- country. advantageous. 
 
 καιος, -ov, just. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. The expression denoting comparison, which 
 in English is subjoined to the Comparative by than, is subjoined 
 in Greek, by η, than (quam), or, what is more usual, by the Gen. 
 without η, when that expression must have stood in the Nom. or 
 Ace. after η if expressed. Hence the rule : The Comparative gov 
 ems the Gen. when η is omitted. 
 
 'Αριστείδης πτωχότατος ήν, αλλά δικαιότατος. Οι Κύκλωπες βιαιότατοι ήσαν. 
 Καλλίας πλονσιώτατος ήν Άΰηναίων. Ονδεν σιωπής εστί χρησιμωτερον. Σιγή 
 ποτ' εστίν αίρετωτέρα λόγον. Ονκ εστί σοφίας τιμιώτερον. Σοφία πλούτου 
 κτήμα τιμιώτερον εστίν. Ή Λακεδαιμονίων δίαιτα ήν απλούστατη. Οι γεραί- 
 τεροι ταΐς των νέων τιμαΐς 1 αγάλλονται. Ονδεν πατρίδος τοις άν&ρώποις 2 φΐλ- 
 τερον. ΟΙ ΊνδοΙ παλαίτατον ε&νος 3 νομίζονται. Τ Ω νεανίαι, έστε ήσυχαίτατοΐ. 
 ΟΙ Σπαρτιάτικοι νεανίαι έββωμενέστεροι ήσαν των Ά&ηναίων. Πολλοί των χε- 
 λιδόνων είσΐ λαλίστεροι. Οί δούλοι πολλάκις ψενδίστατοι και κλεπτίστατοί 
 ε'ισιν. 
 
 The father is wiser than the son. The most valuable possession is that of 
 virtue. The life of Socrates was very simple. No one of the Athenians was 
 more just than Aristides. The eldest are not always the wisest. Men are 
 quieter than boys. The Lacedaemonians were very strong. Old women are 
 often very loquacious. The raven is very thievish. 
 
 III. Adjectives of the third Declension : 
 
 Those in - ν ς, -ει α, -ν, η ς, -ες (Gen. - δ ο ς), ας, -αν, 
 
 and the word μάκαρ, happy, append - 1 ε ρ ο ς and -rat ο ς im- 
 mediately to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter form ; e. g> 
 
 γλυκύς, Neut. -ύ — γλνκύ-τερος γλυκύ-τατος 
 
 άλη&ής, Neut •ές — αληΰέσ-τερος άλη&έσ-τατος 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (c). 2 § 161, 5. (a). 3 § 146, 2. 
 
§ 50.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 57 
 
 πένης, Neut -ες — πενέσ-τερος πενέσ-τατος 
 
 μέλας, Neut. -αν — με?.άν-τερος μελάν-τατος 
 
 τάλας, Neut. -αν — τα?*άν-τερος ταλάν-τατος 
 
 μάκαρ, Neat, -αρ — μακάρ-τερος μακάρ-τατος. 
 
 Εεμ. 2. The adjectives ν δ ν ς, τ αχ ν ς and πολύς are compared in -Ιων 
 and -ων. See § 51, 1, and § 52, 9. 
 
 IV. -τερος and -τ ατός are appended to the pure stem, after 
 the insertion of a single letter or of a whole syllable : 
 
 (a) Compounds of χάρις insert ω ; e. g. 
 
 έπίχαρις, -ι, Gen. έπιχάριτ-ος, pleasant, 
 
 Com. έπιχαριτ-ώ-τερος, Sup. έπιχαριτ-ώ-τατος. 
 
 (b) Adjectives in -ω ν, -ο ν (Gen. -όνος), insert ες; e. g. 
 
 ευδαίμων, Xeut. εΰδαιμον, happy, 
 
 Com. ενδαιμον-έσ-τεοος, ενδαιμον-έσ-τατος. 
 
 (c) Adjectives in -J sometimes insert £?, sometimes iff; e. g. 
 
 άφήλϊξ, Gen. άφήλικ-ος, growing old, άρπαξ, Gen. άρπαγ-ος, rapax, 
 Com. άώη?.ικ-έσ-τερος, Com. άρπαγ-ίσ-τερος, 
 
 Sup. άψη?Λκ-έσ-τατος, Sup. άρπαγ-ίσ-τατος. 
 
 V. Adjectives in -ε t g, -s i>, insert σ, the r of the stem being 
 
 dropped, § 8, 6 ; e. g. 
 
 χαρίεις, Neut. χαρίεν, pleasant, 
 
 Com. χαριέ-στερος, Sup. χαριέ-στατος. 
 
 XXV 111. Vocabulary, 
 
 Αίθίοψ, -οπός, 6, an iE- y^pao, -αος, τό, old age. όρμ#, -ης, ή, impulse, zeal, 
 
 thiopian. εγκρατής, -ές, continent, desire, rushing. 
 
 Αίτνη, -ης, η, JEtna, abstinent, moderate. ουδέ, and not, neither, not 
 
 αϊψα, quickly. ευσεβής, -ές, pious. even. 
 
 άρπας, -άγος, rapacious, εύχαρις, -ιτος, attractive, παραπλήσιος, -a, -ov, and 
 
 rapax. [weak, ήβη, -ης, η, youth. παραπλήσιος, -ov, like. 
 
 ασθενής, •ές, powerless, μεσάτης, -τητος, η, me- παρέρχοιιαι, to pass by. 
 ατυχία, -ας, η, misfortune. diocrity, moderation. πρέσβνς, -εϊα, -υ, and 
 βαθύς, -εϊα, -ύ, deep, pro- νόημα,-ατος,τό, a thought, πρέσβυς, -υος, and -εωο 
 
 found. a conception. old. 
 
 βαρύς, -εϊα, -ν, heavy, bur- δρυός, -ή, -όν, straight, ώκύς, -εϊα, -ν, quick. 
 
 densome. correct, upright. 
 
 Αϊψα, ως νόημα, παρέρχεται ήβη, ουδ' Ιππων ορμή γίγνεται ώκντέρα. Τό γη 
 ρας βαρντερόν εστίν Αιτνης. Ό θάνατος τω βαθυτάτω νπνω 1 παραπ?*ήσιός έσ 
 τιν. Οι νέοι τοϊς των πρεσβυτέρων έπαΐνοις 2 χαίρουσιν. Φιλίας δικαίας κτήσίς 
 ϊστιν ασφαλέστατη. Ή μεσάτης εν πασιν άσφα?,εστέρα εστίν. Οι γέροντες ασ- 
 θενέστεροι ε'ισι των νέων. Βου/.ης ορθής ουδέν εστίν άσώα?,έστερον. Οί κόρα- 
 κες μελάντατοί είσιν. Ή 'Αφροδίτη ην εύχαριτωτάτη. ΟΊ ευσεβέστατοι ενδαι- 
 μον έστ ατοί είσιν. Σωκράτης εγκρατέστατος ην και σωώρονέστατος. Έν ταϊς 
 άτνχίαις πολλάκις οί άνθρωποι σωώρονέστεροι είσιν, η εν ταϊς εντυχίαις. Κρι 
 τίας ην άρπαγίστατος. Ή 'Αφροδίτη ην χαριεστάτη πασών θεών. 
 
 Μ 161, 2. (b). 2 § 161, 2. (c). 
 
58 ADJECTIVES. SECOND FORM OF COMPARISON. [§51 
 
 Age is very burdensome. Nothing is quicker than thought. Moderation is 
 the safest. No bird is (there is not a bird) blacker than the raven. The 
 ./Ethiopians are very dark. Nothing is more attractive than youth. No one ot 
 the Athenians was more moderate or more sensible than Socrates. No one was 
 more rapacious than Critias. Nothing is more graceful than a beautiful flower. 
 
 §51. B. Second Form of Comparison. 
 Comparative, -ι ω ν, Neut. -Γ ο ν, or -ω ν, Neut. -ο ν. 
 Superlative, -ιστό ς, -ίστη, -ιστό ν. 
 Rem. 1. On the declension of the Comparative, see § 35, Rem. 4. 
 This form of comparison includes, 
 
 I. Some adjectives in -ν ς, which drop -vg and append -ίων, etc. ; 
 
 this usually applies only to η δ ν ς, sweet, and τ α χ ν ς, swift. Τ α 
 
 χύς has in the Comparative &άσσων (Att. &άττων, § 8, 11), Neut. 
 
 ϋ-άσσον (&άττον). Thus: 
 
 ήδ-ύς, Com. ήδ-ΐων, Neut. ήδ -lov, Sup. ήδ-ιστος, -η, -ον : 
 
 ταχ-ύς, " ΰάσσων, Att. -&άττων, Neut. -&άσσον, Att. ΰάττον, Sup. τάχιστος. 
 
 Rem. 2. The others in -ύς, as β a ■& ύ ς, deep, β α ρ ν ς, heavy, βραδύς, slow, 
 βραχύς, short, γλυ κύς, sweet, δασύς, thick, ευρύς, wide, οξύς, sharp, 
 πρέσβ ν ς, old, ώκύς, swift, have the form in -ύτερος, -ύτατος, § 50, III. 
 
 II. The following adjectives in -ρος, viz. a i σχρός, base, εχ- 
 &ρός, hostile, κ ν δ ρ ό g, honorable, and οικτρός, wretched (but 
 always in the Comparative, οικτρότερος), the ending -ρος here also 
 being dropped; e. g. αισχρός, Com. αίσχ-ιων, Neut. αίσχ-ϊον, Sup. 
 αίσχ-ιστος. 
 
 XXIX. Vocabulary. 
 Άλλος, -η, -ο, alius, -a, ud, καιρός, -ov, 6, the right οίκτρός, -a, -όν, pitiable, 
 
 another, τά άλλα = time, an opportunity ; miserable. 
 
 ταλλα, the rest, every- time (in general). οσμή, -ης, ή, a smell. 
 
 thing else. [imical. λοιπός, -ή, -όν, remaining όφις, -εως, ό, -η, a snake. 
 
 έχΰρός, -α, -όν, hostile, in- μετα-φέρω, to remove, παρέχομαι, to afford, bring 
 ζώον, -ου, τό, a living be- change. forth. 
 
 ing, an animal. 
 
 Ό βαθύτατος ύπνος ήδιστός εστίν. Πολλά άν&η ήδίστην δσμήν παρέχεται. 
 Ούδεν ΰάττόν εστί της ήβης. Την αίσχίστην δουλείαν 1 οι ακρατείς δουλεύουσιν. 
 Τίάντων ήδιστον εστίν ή φιλία. Ούδεν αισχών εστίν, η άλλα μεν έν νώ έχειν, 
 άλλα δε λέγειν. Οι όφεις τοις λοιποίς ζώοις 2 έχ&ιστοί ε'ισιν. Ό των πλουσίων 
 βίος πολλάκις οικτρότερος εστίν, ή ό των πενήτων. Τάχιστα 3 ό καιρός μεταφέρει 
 τά πράγματα. 
 
 Nothing is more pleasant than a very deep sleep. Nothing is more disgrace' 
 ful than slavery. The horses are very quick. There is nothing more inimical 
 than bad advice. The old man has for {dot.) the old man the most pleasant 
 
 Μ 159, 2. Μ 161, 5. (a). 3 Adverbially. 
 
§ 52.] ADJECTIVES. — ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. 
 
 59 
 
 speech, the boy for the boy. The poor have always a very miserable life. 
 Nothing is more miserable than poverty. 
 
 §52. Anomalous Forms of 
 
 Go mp arison. 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 1. άγαΰός, good, 
 
 άμείνων, Neut. άμεινον 
 
 άριστος 
 
 
 βελτίων 
 
 βέλτιστος 
 
 
 κρείσσων, Att. κρείττων 
 
 κράτιστος 
 
 
 λώων 
 
 λωστος 
 
 2. κακός, bad, 
 
 κακίων 
 
 κάκιστος 
 
 
 χειρών 
 
 χείριστος 
 
 
 ησσων, Att. ήττων (inferior) 
 
 3. κα?ώς, beautiful, 
 
 καλλίων 
 
 κάλ?αστος 
 
 4. αλγεινός, painful, 
 
 άλγεινότερος 
 
 άλγεινότατος 
 
 
 άλγίων 
 
 άλγιοτος 
 
 5. μακρός, long, 
 
 μακρότερος 
 
 μακρότατος and μήκιστος 
 
 6. μικρός, small. 
 
 μικρότερος 
 
 μικρότατος 
 
 
 έλάσσων, Att. έλάττων 
 
 ελάχιστος 
 
 7. ολίγος, few, 
 
 μείων 
 
 ολίγιστος 
 
 8. μέγας, great, 
 
 μείζων 
 
 μέγιστος 
 
 9. πολύς, much, 
 
 π?*είων or πλέων 
 
 πλείστος 
 
 10. βάδιος, easy, 
 
 ράων 
 
 ρ"αστος 
 
 11. πέπων, ripe, 
 
 πεπαίτερος 
 
 πεπαίτατος 
 
 12. πίων,βιί, 
 
 πιότερος 
 
 πώτατος. 
 
 Αναγκαίος, -ά, -ον, and αν- 
 αγκαίος, -ον, necessary. 
 
 ανάγκη, -ης, η, necessity, 
 compulsion. 
 
 αναρχία, -ας, ή, want of 
 government, anarchy. 
 
 βλάβη, -ης, η, injury. 
 
 γείτων, -όνος, ό, η, a 
 neighbor. 
 
 γνώμη, opinion, view. 
 
 έλεν&ερος, -α, -ον, and 
 ελεν&ερος, -ον, free- 
 born, free. 
 
 XXX. Vocabulary. 
 έμφυτος, -ον, implanted. 
 ενίοτε, sometimes. 
 έπι&υμία, -ας, η, desire. 
 ευτυχής, -ές, fortunate. 
 
 μαλακός, -η, •όν, soft 
 πόλεμος, -ον, ό, war. 
 σκώπτω, to joke, jest (Eng. 
 scoff). 
 
 η, or; η—η, 
 aut — out. 
 
 Ιβηρία, -ας, η, Spain. 
 
 ισχύω, to be strong or 
 able, have power, avail. 
 
 κελεύω, to order, bid. 
 
 κολακεία, -ας, η, flattery. 
 
 κροκόδειλος, -ον, ό, & croc- 
 odile. 
 
 either — or, στέργω, to love, to be sat- 
 isfied, contented with. 
 
 σύμβουλος, -ον, ό, an ad 
 viser. 
 
 σωφροσύνη, -ης, ij, sound• 
 mindedness, modesty, 
 wisdom, chastity. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. Ώς with the Superlative strengthens it, as 
 quam in Lat. ; e. g. ώς τάχιστα, quam celerrime, as quick as possible. 
 
 Ουχ b μακρότατος βίος άριστος εστίν, αλλά ό σπουδαιότατος. Μέτρον επί 
 πάσιν άριστον. Υνώμαι των γεραιτέρων άμείνους ε'ισίν. Σύμβουλος ουδείς έστι 
 βελτίων χρόνου. Ή λέ/ε σιγής κρείττονα, τ) σιγην έχε. Άεί κράτιστόν εστί 
 Tb ασφαλέστατον. Σκάπτεις, ω λώστε. 'Έσ&λών κακίονς ένιότε ευτυχέστερου 
 είσιν. Ουκ εστί λύπης χείρον άν&ρώπω 1 κακόν. Κολακεία των άλλων απάντων 
 κακών χείριστόν εστίν. 'Ανηρ μαλακός την ψυχήν* έστι και 3 χρημάτων ηττωνΛ 
 
 1 § 161, 5. 2 The Ace. means, in regard to, see $ 159, 7. 
 
 4 is a slave to money. 
 
 8 also. 
 
60 ADVERB. NATURE, DIVISION AND FORMATION. [§ 53. 
 
 Ύαΐς γνναιξϊν 1 η σωφροσύνη καλλίστη αρετή εστίν. Ουκ εστί κτήμα καλλών 
 φίλον. Ή δουλεία τψ ελευ&έρω άλγίστη εστίν. Ή όδος μηκίστη εστίν. Ό 
 κροκόδειλος εξ ελαχίστου γίγνεται μέγιστος. Ή γη έλάττων εστί του ηλίου. 
 Στέργε και 2 τά μείω. Όλίγιστοι άν&ρωποι ευδαίμονές εισιν. Ουδείς νόμος Ισ- 
 χύει μείζον της ανάγκης. Μικρά κέρδη πολλάκις μείζονας βλάβας φέρει. 'Αναρ- 
 χίας μείζον ουκ εστί κακόν. Ό πόλεμος πλείστα κακά φέρει. "Έμφυτος εστί 
 τοϊς άν&ρώποίς η τοϋ πλείονος έπιΰυμία. Τννη έσΰλή πλείστα άγαΰά τω οίκω 
 φέρει. Ύά αναγκαία τοϋ βίου 3 φέρε ώς βαστά. Τό κελεύειν βαόν εστί του πράτ 
 τειν. 01 καρποί πεπαίτατοί εισιν. 'Έν τω τοϋ πατρός κήπω οι βότρυες πεπαί 
 τεροί εισιν, τ} εν τφ τοϋ γείτονος. Ιβηρία τρέφει πιότατα πρόβατα. 
 
 There is nothing better than a very diligent life. The opinion of the old is 
 the best. The best adviser is time. Nothing is better than that which is most 
 safe (than the safest). The worst (persons) are often very fortunate. Sadness 
 is the worst evil to man. Nothing is worse than flattery. The immoderate 
 man is a slave to pleasures. In women nothing is better than modesty. To a 
 free man nothing is more painful than slavery. The crocodile is very long. 
 The son is smaller than the father. The good often have more property than 
 the bad. The poor are often in greater honor than the rich. Avarice is a very 
 great evil. Nothing brings more evils than war. To order is very easy. It is 
 easier to bear poverty than sadness. We taste the ripest fruits with great plea- 
 sure. 4 The sheep of the father are fatter than those of the neighbor. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE ADVERB. 
 
 §53. Nature, Divi sion and Formation of the 
 Adverb. 
 
 1. Adverbs are indeclinable words, denoting a relation of place, 
 time or manner ; e. g. εκεί, there, vvv, now, καλώς, beautifully, in a 
 beautiful manner. 
 
 2. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives by assuming the 
 
 ending -ως. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the 
 
 adjective ; and since the stem of adjectives of the third declension 
 
 appears in the genitive, and adjectives in the Gen. PI. are accented 
 
 like adverbs, the following rule may be given for the formation of 
 
 adverbs from adjectives : viz. - ω ν the ending of the adjective in 
 
 the Gen. PL, is changed into -ως; e. g. 
 
 φίλ-ος, lovdy, Gen. PI. φίλ-ων Adv. φίλ-ως 
 
 καλ-ός, fair, " καλ-ών καλ-ώς 
 
 καίρι-ος, timdy, " καιρί-ων καιρί-ως 
 
 1 § 1 61, 5. s also. 3 § 158, 3. 4 Neuter plural of the superlative of ηδύς t 
 
§ 54.] COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 61 
 
 ά-λ(ό-ος)ονς, simple. Gen. PI. άττ/.(ό-ων)ών Adv. άττλ(ό-ως)ώς 
 
 εϊι>(ο-ος)ονς, benevolent, " (εννό-ων) εννων (εννό-ως) εϊινως 
 
 πάς, all, παντός, " πάντ-ων πάντ-ως 
 
 σώφρων, prudent, " σωφρόν-ων σωφρόν-ως 
 
 χαρίεις, pleasant, " χαριέντ-ων χαριέντ-ως 
 
 ταχίς, sivift, " ταχέ-ων ταχέ-ως 
 
 ΐίέγας, great, Η μεγάλ-ων μεγά?,-ως 
 
 α?.η•&ής, true, " άληΰ(έ-ων)ών αληΰ(έ-ως)ώς 
 
 σννή-&ης, accustomed, " (συνηΰέ-ων) σννηΰων (σννη-&έ-ως) σννήϋως. 
 
 Rem. 1. On the accentuation of compounds in -ή&ως and of the compound 
 αίτάρκως, comp. § 42, Rem. 4 j also on the accentuation of εύνως, instead of ev- 
 νώς, § 29, p. 29. 
 
 Rem. 2. By appending the three endings -ΰεν, -#£ and -δε (-σε), to substan- 
 tives, pronouns and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the three relations of 
 place, whence (-&εν), where (-#i) and whither (-δε or -σε) ; e. g. ονρανό-ϋεν, from 
 Heaven, οί•ρανό-ϋι, in Heaven, οίρανόν-δε, into or to Heaven. 
 
 Rem. 3. The ending -δε is commonly appended to the Ace. of substantives 
 only. To pronouns and primitive adverbs, -σε is appended instead of -δε ; e. g. 
 έκεΐ-σε, thither, αλλο-σε, to another place. In plural substantives in -ας, -σδε be- 
 comes -ζε ; e. g. Ά,ΰήναζε, to Athens. 
 
 3. Besides adverbs with the ending -ως, there are many which 
 evidently have a case-inflection; e. g. εξαπίνης, suddenly, αντσυ, 
 there, etc. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of adjectives is very frequently 
 used adverbially ; e. g. μέγα yXaUiv, to weep much. 
 
 §54. Comparison of Adverbs. 
 
 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, have commonly no indepen- 
 dent adverbial ending for the different forms of comparison, but, in 
 the Comparative, use the neuter singular, and in the Superlative, 
 the neuter plural of the corresponding adjective ; e. g. 
 
 σοφώς from σοφ<γ 
 
 Com 
 
 . σοφώτερον 
 
 Sup 
 
 . σοφώτατα 
 
 σαφώς " σαφής 
 
 
 σαφέστερον 
 
 
 σαφέστατα 
 
 χαριέντως " χαρίεις 
 ενδαιμόνως " ευδαίμων 
 
 
 χαράστερον 
 ενδαιμονέστερον 
 
 
 χαριέστατα 
 ενδαιμονεστατα 
 
 αίσχρώς " αισχρός 
 ηδέως " ήδνς 
 ταχέως " ταχνς 
 
 
 αισχίον 
 ηδίον 
 ΰ-ασσον, -ττον 
 
 
 α'ισχιστα 
 
 ήδιστα 
 τάχιστα. 
 
 2. All primitive adverbs in -ω, e. g. άνω, κάτω, «|ω, ίσω, etc., 
 retain this ending regularly in the Comparative, and for the mos* 
 part in the Superlative ; e. g. 
 
 άνω, above Com. ανωτέρω Sup. άνωτάτω 
 
 κάτω, below, κατωτέρω κατωτάτω. 
 
 In like manner, most other primitive adverbs have the ending -ω in 
 the Comparative and Superlative ; e. g. 
 6 
 
62 
 
 THE PRONOUNS 8}Ό0, CSV, OV. 
 
 [§ 55, 56. 
 
 άγχοΰ, near, 
 πέρα, beyond, 
 τηΧον,βχτ 
 έκάς, /ar, 
 εγγύς, near. 
 
 Com. άγχοτέρω 
 περαιτέρω 
 τηλοτέρω 
 έκαστέρω 
 έγγντέρω 
 εγγύτερον 
 
 Sup. άγχοτάτω 
 Sup. wanting 
 τηλοτάτω 
 έκαστάτω 
 έγγντάτω and 
 εγγύτατα 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 55. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 
 
 Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea of an object, 
 but only the relation of an object to the speaker, since they show 
 whether the object is the speaker himself (the first person), or the 
 person or thing addressed (the second person), or the person or 
 thing spoken of (the third person) ; e. g. I (the teacher) give to you 
 (the scholar) it (the book). Pronouns are divided into five princi- 
 pal classes, viz. personal, demonstrative, relative, indefinite and 
 interrogative pronouns. 
 
 § 56. I. Personal Pronouns 
 
 A. Substantive personal pronouns. 
 
 (a) The simple ίγώ, ego, σν, tu, ov, sui. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. Jy£>, I 
 
 
 συ, thou 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 μου (μου), έμοϋ 
 
 of me 
 
 σου (σου), of thee 
 
 ού (οί>), of himself, etc. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 μοί (μοι), έμοί, 
 
 to me 
 
 σοί (σοι), to thee 
 
 ol (ol), to himself, etc. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 μέ (με), έμέ, me 
 
 
 σέ (σε), thee 
 
 2 (έ), himself, etc. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A. 
 
 νώ, we both, us both 
 
 σφώ, you both 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 νών, of us both 
 
 , to us 
 
 σφφν, of you both, 
 
 σφω'ίν (σφωϊν), of them 
 both, to them both 
 
 
 both 
 
 
 to you both 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ήμεΐς, we 
 
 ύμεΐς, ye (v) 
 
 σφεϊς, Neut. σφέα, they 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ημών, of us 
 
 νμων, of you (ΰ) 
 
 σφών, oftliem 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ημϊν, to us 
 
 νμΐν, to you (v) 
 
 σφΐσί(ν) (σφισι), to them 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ημάς, us 
 
 υμάς, you (v) 
 
 σφάς, Neut. σφέα (σφεα), them. 
 
 Rem. 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, with- 
 out any mark of accentuation. Comp. § 14, (b). On the signification and use 
 of the third person of the pronoun, see § 169, Rem. 2. 
 
§ 57.J the reflexive pronouns εμαυτοϋ, σεαυτοϋ, εαυτού. 63 
 
 XXXL Vocabulary. 
 
 Βλέπω, to look at, see. δια-φέρω, w. gen., to be σπουδαίος, zealously, dili- 
 
 γάρ, for. different from, differ gently. 
 
 γράμμα, -ατός, τό, that from. συγχαίρω, w. dot., to re- 
 
 which is written, an al- δια-φ&είρω, to destroy, lay joice with. 
 
 phabetical letter, pi. let- waste. χαριέντως, gracefully. 
 
 ters, literature. 
 
 Έγώ μεν γράφω, σϋ δε παίζεις. Σέβομαι σε, ώ μέγα Ζεϋ. Ώ παϊ, άκουε 1 
 ιιου. Ό πατήρ μοι φίλτατός έστιν. Ό ΰεος άεί σε β?Λπει. ΕΓ με βλάπτεις, 
 ουκ. εχ&ρών* διαφέρεις. 'Έγώ έββωμενέστερός ειμί σου. Ήδέως πείθομαι σοι,* 
 ώ πάτερ. 'Ήμεϊς υμ& συγχαίρομεν. Ή λύρα υμάς ευφραίνει. Ό θεός ημϊν 
 ττολλα αγαθά παρέχει. Ό πατήρ υμάς στέργει. 'Ανδρείως μάχεσ&ε, ώ στρα- 
 τιώται • ημών* γάρ εστί την π3λιν φυλάττειν ■ ει γαρ νμεις φεύγετε, πάσα η πό- 
 ?.ις διαφθείρεται. Ημών* εστίν, ώ παϊδες, τά γράμματα σπουδαίως μανθάνειν. 
 Ή μήτηρ νώ στέργει. Νώι• ην κακή νόσος. Σφώ έχετε φίλον πιστότατον. 
 Σφών δ πατήρ χαρίζεται ■ σφώ γάρ σπουδαίως τά γράμματα μανθάνετε. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. The Nom. of personal pronouns is expressed, 
 only when they are emphatic, particularly, therefore, in antitheses. 
 
 Κελί. 2. In the following examples, the italicized pronouns must be express 
 ed in Greek. 
 
 We write, but you play. We both are writing, but you both are playing. I 
 reverence you, Ο gods ! Ο boy, hear us! God sees you always. If you injure 
 us, you do not differ from enemies. We are stronger than you. You rejoice 
 with us. I obey you cheerfully, Ο parents. Our (the) father loves me and 
 thee. Our (the) mother loves us both. It is my duty (it is of me) to guard the 
 house ; for I am the guardian of the house. It is thy duty, Ο boy, to learn dili- 
 gently ; for thou art a pupil. The lyre affords (to) me and thee pleasure. Both 
 of you had (to you both was) a very bad illness. Both of you have (to you 
 both is) a very faithful friend. Our (the) father gratifies both of us (us both) 
 cheerfully; for both of us study literature diligently. 
 
 § 57. (b) The reflexive pronouns εμαυτοϋ, σεαυτοϋ, εαυτόν. 
 
 1. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second person decline 
 separately, in the plural, both pronouns of which they are composed ; 
 e. g. ημών αυτών ; that of the third person is either simply εαυτών, 
 αυτών, etc., or σφών αυτών, etc. 
 
 1 § 158, 5. (b). s § 157. 3 $ 161, 2. (a), (δ). 4 § 158, 2, 
 
64 
 
 THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 
 
 L§58. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ' 
 
 G. 
 
 έμαυτον, -ης, of 
 
 σεαυτού, -ης, or 
 
 έαυτοϋ, -ης, or [self 
 
 
 myself 
 
 σαυτοϋ, -ης, of thyself 
 
 αυτού, -ης, oftemselj, of lier- 
 
 D. 
 
 έμαυτώ, -y, to 
 
 σεαυτώ, -η, or 
 
 έαυτώ, -rj, or [to itself 
 
 
 myself 
 
 σαυτώ, -ή, to thyself 
 
 αντώ, -y, to himself to herself 
 
 A. 
 
 έμαντόν, -ην, 
 
 σεαυτόν, -ην, or 
 
 εαυτόν, -ην, -ό, or [itself 
 
 
 myself 
 
 σαυτόν, -ην, thyself 
 
 αυτόν, -ην, -ό, himself herself 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 •ημών αυτών, of 
 
 υμών αυτών, of your- 
 
 εαυτών or αυτών, or 
 
 
 ourselves 
 
 selves 
 
 σφών αυτών, of themselves 
 
 D. 
 
 ημίν αύτοϊς, -αϊς, 
 
 ΰμϊν αύτοϊς, -αϊς, to 
 
 έαυτοϊς -αΐς, or αυτοϊς -αϊς,οτ 
 
 
 to ourselves 
 
 yourselves 
 
 σφίσιν αυτοΐς -αϊς,ίο tlieynselves 
 
 A. 
 
 ημάς αυτούς, -άς, 
 
 υμάς αυτούς, -άς, your- 
 
 εαυτούς, -άς, -ά, or αυτούς, 
 
 
 ourselves 
 
 selves 
 
 -άς, -ά, or 
 σφάς αυτούς, -άς, σφέα αυ- 
 τά, themselves. 
 
 §58. (c) The reciprocal pronoun. 
 The reciprocal pronoun expresses a mutual action of several 
 persons to each other. 
 
 Plur. G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 αλλήλων, of one another, 
 άλλήλοις, -αις, -οις 
 άλ?*ήλονς, -ας, -α 
 
 Dual, άλλήλοιν, -αιν, -οιν 
 άλλήλοιν, -αιν, -οιν 
 άλλήλω, -ά, -ω. 
 
 Άφΰ-ονος, -ον, not grudg- 
 ing, unenvious. 
 
 βλαβερός,-ά,-όν, injurious. 
 
 κακούργος, -ον, injurious, 
 wicked. [doer. 
 
 κακούργος, -ου, ό, an evil- 
 
 κατά, w. ace, according to. 
 
 ΧΧΧΠ. Vocabulary, 
 
 μάλλον, ( == μάλίον com- ουσία, -ας, η, being ; pro 
 parative of μάλα) more, perty, possession, 
 
 rather, sooner. περι-φέρω, to carry about. 
 
 μόνον, adv., only, alone. πλεονέκτης, -ον, avari- 
 Ούρανίδαι, -ων, οι, the in- cious. [rich, 
 
 habitants of Ouranos, πλουτίζω, to enrich, make 
 
 the gods. ωφέλιμος, -ον, useful. 
 
 Ό βίος πολλά λυπηρά εν έαυτώ (αϋτώ) φέρει. Τίγνωσκε σεαυτόν (σαυτόν). 
 Βούλου άρέσκειν πάσι, 1 μη σαυτώ μόνον. Ό σοφός έν έαυτώ περιφέρει την ού- 
 σίαν. Φίλων έπαινον μάλλον rj σαυτοϋ λέγε. Άρετη καΰ' έαυτήν έστι καλή. 
 ΟΙ πλεονεκται εαυτούς μεν πλουτίζουσιν, άλλους δε βλάπτουσιν. Ονχ οί ακρα- 
 τείς τοϊς μεν άλλοις βλαβεροί, έαντοϊς (σφίσιν αύτοϊς) δε ωφέλιμοι ε'ισιν, άλλα 
 κακούργοι μεν τών άλλων, εαυτών (σφών αυτών) δε πολύ κακουργότεροι. 'Ήμεΐς 
 ήμϊν 1 αύτοϊς ήδιστα χαριζόμε&α. "λφϋονοι Ούρανίδαι καΐ έν άλλήλοις εισίν. 
 ΟΙ κακοί αλλήλους βλάπτουσιν. 
 
 The wise carry about their (the) possessions with them. The avaricious man 
 makes himself rich, but he injures others. Ye please yourselves. The immode 
 rate man is not injurious to others and useful to himself, but he is an evil-doer 
 to others and much more injurious to himself. Good children love one another. 
 
 § 161, 2. (c). 
 
§ 59.] ADJECTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 65 
 
 § 59. B. Adjective personal pronouns, or possessive pronouns. 
 
 Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of substantive 
 personal pronouns : 
 
 έμός, -ή, -όν, mens, -a, -urn., from έμοϋ ; ημέτερος, -τέρά, -τερον, noster, -tra, 
 -trum, from ημών ; 
 
 σός, -η, -όν, tuus, -a, -urn, from σοϋ ; υμέτερος, -τέρά, -τερον, vester, -tra, -trum, 
 from υμών ; 
 
 5ς, η, δν, suus, from ov, instead of which, however, the Attic writers use the 
 Gen. έαντοϋ, -ης, -ών, in the reflexive signification, and αντον, -ης, -ων, 
 in the signification of the personal pronoun of the third person ; e. g. τυπτει 
 τόν έαντοϋ νίόν or τον vibv τόν έαντοϋ, he sti-ikes his own son, rtorrei αντον 
 τόν νίόν or τον vibv αΰτον, Tie strikes his son, (i. e. the son of him, ejus). The 
 position of the Greek article should he observed. 
 
 ΧΧΧΠΙ. Vocabulary. 
 
 Μ.ε$ήμων, -ov, negligent, μεταχειρίζομαι, to uphold, σώμα, -ατός, τό, the body, 
 dilatory. lead. τέκνον, -ov, τό, a child. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. The possessive pronouns are expressed in 
 Greek, only when they are particularly emphatic, especially, there- 
 fore, in antitheses. When not emphatic, they are omitted, and their 
 place is supplied by the article, which stands before the substantive ; 
 e. g. ή μητηρ ατε'ργει την Φυγατέρα, the mother loves her daughter. 
 Instead of the adjective personal pronouns εμός, αός, etc., the Greek 
 uses, with the same signification, the Gen. of substantive personal 
 pronouns, both the simple forms (in the singular the enclitics μον, 
 σον) and the reflexives (εμαντον). The position of the article may 
 be learned from the following examples. 
 
 Ό έμος πατήρ άγαϋός εστίν or ό πατήρ μον or μον ό πατήρ άγαντός εστίν ; 
 or ό έμαντοϋ πατήρ or ό πατήρ ό έμαντοϋ άγα&ός εστίν. Οι υμέτεροι, παϊδες 
 σπονδαίως τά γράμματα μαν&άνονσιν. Οι παίδες υμών καλοί είσιν. 'Υμών οι 
 παίδες σπουδαίοι είσιν. Τά ημών αυτών τέκνα or τά τέκνα τά ημών αυτών ψέ- 
 γομεν. Ό σεαντοϋ φίλος or ό φίλος b σεαυτοϋ πιστός εστίν, ό έμαυτοϋ φίλος or 
 ό φίλος ό έμαυτοϋ άπιστος έστιν. Ό σος νους το συν σώμα μεταχειρίζεται. Ό 
 μεν ίμος παις σπουδαίος έστιν, ό δε σbς με&ήμων. 
 
 Thy father is good. My slave is had. Our children learn diligently. Many 
 (persons) love the children of others, but not their own. He admires his own 
 actions, but not -hose of the others. 
 6* 
 
66 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. [§§ 60, 61. 
 
 § 60. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 this. 
 
 this. 
 
 
 self, or he, she, it. 
 
 N. 
 
 δδε ηδε τόδε 
 
 ούτος αύτη 
 
 τούτο 
 
 αυτός αύτη αυτό 
 
 G. 
 
 τοϋδε τηςδε τούδε 
 
 τούτου ταύτης 
 
 τούτου 
 
 αυτού αύτη ς αύτοϋ 
 
 D 
 
 τώδε τηδε τώδε 
 
 τούτω ταύτη 
 
 τούτω 
 
 αύτώ αύτη αύτφ 
 
 A. 
 
 τόνδε τήνδε τόδε 
 
 τούτον ταυτην 
 Plural. 
 
 τούτο 
 
 αυτόν αυτήν αυτό 
 
 N. 
 
 οΐδε αϊδε τάδε 
 
 ovtol avTat 
 
 ταύτα 
 
 αυτοί αύται αυτά 
 
 G. 
 
 τώνδε τώνδε τώνδε 
 
 τούτων τούτων 
 
 τούτων 
 
 αυτών αυτών αυτών 
 
 D. 
 
 τοϊςδε ταΐςδε τοϊςδε 
 
 τούτοις τανταις 
 
 τούτοις 
 
 αύτοϊς αύταϊς αύτοίς 
 
 A. 
 
 τούςδε τάςδε τάδε 
 
 τούτους ταύτας 
 Dual. 
 
 ταύτα 
 
 αυτούς αύτάς αυτά 
 
 N.A. 
 
 τώδε τάδε τώδε 
 
 τούτω ταύτα 
 
 τούτω 
 
 αύτώ αυτά αύτώ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 τοϊνδε ταϊνδε τοίνδε 
 
 τουτοιν ταυτανν 
 
 τούτοιν 
 
 αύτοϊν αύταΐν αύτοϊν. 
 
 Like ούτος are declined τοσούτος, τοσαύτη, τοσούτο(ν), tardus, -a, -um, τοιούτος, 
 τοιαύτη, τοιούτο(ν), talis, -e, τηλικούτος, τηλικαύτη, τηλικούτο(ν), so great, so 
 old; it is to he noted, (a) that the Neuter Sing., besides the form in o, has 
 also the common form in ov ; (b) that in all forms of ούτος, which begin 
 with r, the r is dropped. 
 
 Like αυτός are declined εκείνος, εκείνη, εκείνο, he, she, it, άλλος, άλλη, άλλο, 
 alias, alia, aliud. The article ό, ή, τό is declined like δδε, the δε being omit- 
 ted. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 τοσούτος 
 
 τοσαυτη 
 
 τοσούτο(ν) 
 
 τοσούτοι 
 
 τοσανται 
 
 το σ αυτά 
 
 G. 
 
 τοσούτου 
 
 τοσαυτης 
 
 τοσούτου 
 
 τοσούτων 
 
 τοσούτων 
 
 τοσούτων 
 
 D. 
 
 τοσουτω 
 
 τοσαυτη 
 
 τοσουτω 
 
 τοσουτοις 
 
 τοσαυταις 
 
 τοσουτοις 
 
 A 
 
 τοσούτον 
 
 τοσαυτην 
 
 τοσοΰτο(ν) 
 
 τοσούτους 
 
 τοσαυτας 
 
 τοσαντα 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ν. Α. Ι τοσούτω τοσαύτα τοσουτω 
 
 
 
 
 G. D. Ι τοσούτοιν τοσαύταιν τοσούτοιν. 
 
 
 Eemark. The pronoun αυτός, -ή, -ό, signifies either self, ipse, ipsa, ipsum, 
 or is used for the oblique Cases of the personal pronoun of the third person, he, 
 she, it ; is, ea, id. With the article, viz. ό αυτό ς, ή αύτη, τό αυτό, it sig- 
 nifies the same (idem, eadem, idem). The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 6, 
 2) with αυτός and forms one word, viz. αυτός, instead of ό αυτός, αύτη, ταύτό, 
 usually ταύτόν, ταύτού, ταύτώ, ταύτη, etc. 
 
 § 61. III. Relative Pronoun, 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Ν. 
 G. 
 
 δς, qui η, quae 
 ού ης 
 
 δ, quod 
 
 ού 
 
 οι 
 ών 
 
 αϊ ά 
 ών ών 
 
 ω 
 olv 
 
 α 
 
 άίν 
 
 ω 
 olv 
 
 D. 
 
 ώ rj 
 
 ώ 
 
 οις 
 
 αίς οίς 
 
 olv 
 
 alv 
 
 olv 
 
 A. 
 
 δν ην 
 
 δ 
 
 ους 
 
 ας α 
 
 ώ 
 
 α 
 
 ω. 
 
§§ 64, 65.] LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUNS. — NUMERALS. 69 
 
 Kemjlrk. The forms which are wanting in the Common language to denote 
 here, t/iere (hie, ibi), are expressed by ένταϋ&α, and those to denote hence (hinc t 
 vide), by έν&ένδε, έντεντ&εν. 
 
 § 64. Lengthening of the Pronouns. 
 
 1 . The enclitic γ έ is joined to the personal pronouns of the first and second 
 person, in order to make the person emphatic. The pronoun έγώ then draws 
 back its accent in the Norn, and Dat. ; e. g. έ γ ω γ ε, εμονγε, έ μοιγ ε, έμέγε ; 
 -σνγε. Moreover γέ can be joined with any other word, and also with any other 
 pronoun, but does not form one word with it ; e. g. ούτος ye. 
 
 2. The particles δ ?/, most commonly δήποτε, and ου v, are appended to rela- 
 tives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to όσος, in order to 
 make the relative relation general, i. e. to extend it to everything embraced in 
 the object denoted by the pronoun ; e. g. δςτιςδή, δςτιςδήττοτε, όςτιςονν, ητιςονν, 
 ότιονν, quicunque (Gen. οντινοςονν or δτονονν, ήςπνοςονν, Dat. φτινιοϋν or 
 ότωονν, etc.) j — όττοσοςδή, όποσοςονν, δσοςδηττοτε, quantuscunque ; — όπηλικοςονν, 
 however great, how old soever. 
 
 3. The suffix δ ε is appended to some demonstratives for the purpose of 
 strengthening their demonstrative relation ; e. g. δδε, ηδε, τάδε ; τοώςδε ; το- 
 σόςδε ; τηλίκόςδε, from τοΐος, τόσος, τηλίκος, which change their accent after 
 δ ε is appended 
 
 4. The enclitic ττέρ is appended to all relatives, in order to make the rela- 
 tive relation still more emphatic ; hence it denotes, even who, which ; e. g. δςπερ, 
 ηπερ, δπερ (Gen. ονπερ, etc.); δσοςττερ, οΐόςπερ (Gen. δσονττερ, οϊονπερ, etc.); 
 δϋιπερ, δΰενπερ. 
 
 5. The inseparable demonstrative ΐ, is appended to demonstrative pronouns 
 and some demonstrative adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative 
 sense. It takes the acute accent and absorbs every short vowel immediately 
 preceding it, and also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : 
 
 οντοσΐ, this here (hicce, celui-ci), αύτήΐ, τοντί, 
 
 Gen. τοντονί, ταντησΐ, Dat. τοντψΐ, ταντψ, PI. οντοϊΐ, αυτάίΐ, ταντί ; 
 δδΐ, ηδΐ, τοδΐ from δδε ; ώδΐ from ώδε ; οντωσΐ from όντως ; 
 έντενΰενΐ from έντενϋεν ; έν&αδί from εν&άδε ; νννΐ from ννν ; δενρί from 
 δενρο. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 THE NUMEKALS. 
 
 § 65., Nature and Division of the Numerals. 
 The numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
 They are divided into the following classes, according to their sig- 
 nification : 
 
70 NUMERAL SIGNS.— NUMERALS. [§ 66, 67. 
 
 (a) Cardinals, which answer the question, "How many?" The first four nu- 
 merals and the round numbers from 200 (διακόσιοι) to 10,000 (μύριοι), as well 
 as the compounds of μύριοι, are declined ; all the others are indeclinable. The 
 thousands are expressed by adverbial numerals ; e. g. τριςχίλιοι, 3000. 
 
 (b) Ordinals, which answer the question, "Which one in the series?" They all 
 have the three endings of adjectives -or, -η, -ov, except δεύτερος, which has -or, 
 -α, -ov. 
 
 (c) Multiplicatives, which answer the question, "How many fold?" They are 
 all compounded of πλοίο, and are adjectives of three endings, -ονς, -ή, -ovv. 
 For the declension of these, see § 29. Numeral adjectives in -αιας, answer the 
 question, "How many times ?" 
 
 (d) Proportionals, which answer the question, "How many times more?" They 
 are all compounds of -πλασιος, -ία, -ων ; e. g. διπλάσιος, two-fold, double. 
 
 (e) Substantive-numerals, which express the abstract idea of the number; e. g, 
 η δνάς, -άδος, duality. 
 
 § 66. Numeral Signs. 
 
 1. The numeral signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to 
 which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after ε, Βαν or the digamma F or 
 Στΐ, ς, as the sign for 6 ; — Κόππα, 5, as the sign for 90; — Σαμπί, Qf^, as the 
 sign for 900. 
 
 2. The first eight letters, i. e. from a to ■& with the Βαν or Στΐ, denote the 
 units ; the following eight, i. e. from ι to π with the Κόππα, the tens ; the last 
 eight, i. e. from ρ to ω with the Σαμπί, the hundreds. 
 
 3. Up to 999, the letters, as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark 
 placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral signs, 
 only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but the let- 
 ters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a'— 1, a = 1000, i'= 
 10, ι = 10,000, ,εψμβ'= 5742, αωμβ'= 1842, p'= 100, jp = 100,000. 
 
 § 67. Summary of the Cardinals and Ordinals. 
 
 Ordinals. 
 πρώτος, -η, -ov, primus, -a, -um 
 δεύτερος, -a, -ov, secundus, -a, -um 
 τρίτος, -η, -ov, tertius, -a, -um 
 τέταρτος, -η, -ov 
 πέμπτος, -η, -ov 
 ίκτος, -η, -ov 
 έβδομος, -η, -ov 
 δγδοος, -η, -ον 
 ένατος, -η, -ον 
 δέκατος, -η, -ον 
 ενδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 δωδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 τριςκαιδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 14 ιδ' τετταρεςκαίδεκα or τεσσαρεςκαίδεκα τετταρακαιδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 1 α 
 
 εϊς, μία, 'έν, one 
 
 2/3' 
 
 δύο or δύω, turn 
 
 3 / 
 
 τρεις, τρία, three 
 
 4 (Τ 
 
 τέτταρες, -a, or τέσσαρες 
 
 5 ε' 
 
 πέντε 
 
 6 ς 
 
 U 
 
 7 Γ 
 
 επτά 
 
 8 if 
 
 οκτώ 
 
 9 #' 
 
 εννέα 
 
 10 ι' 
 
 δέκα 
 
 11 ια' 
 
 ένδεκα 
 
 12 ιβ' 
 
 δώδεκα 
 
 13 ί/ 
 
 τριςκαίδεκα 
 
71 
 
 πεντεκαιδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 έκκαιόέκατος, -η, -ον 
 έπτακαιδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 οκτωκαιδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 έννεακαιδέκατος, -η, -ον 
 εικοστός, -ή, -όν 
 
 εικοστός, -η, -όν, πρώτος, -η, -ο* 
 τριακοστός, -ή, -όν 
 τετταρακοστός, -ή, -όν 
 πεντηκοστός, -ή, -όν 
 εξηκοστός, -η, -όν 
 εβδομηκοστός, -η, -όν 
 όγδοηκοστός, -η, -όν 
 ένενηκοστός, -ή, -όν 
 εκατοστός, -ή, -όν 
 διάκοσιοστός, -ή, -όν 
 τριάκοσιοστός, -η, -όν 
 τετρακοσιοστός, -ή, -όν 
 πεντακοσιοστός, -η, -όν 
 έξακοσιοστός, -ή, -όν 
 έπτακοσιοστός, -η, -όν 
 όκτακοσιοστός, -η, -όν 
 έννακοσιοστός, -ή, -όν 
 χιλιοστός, -ή, -όν 
 διςχιλιοστός, -η, -όν 
 τριςχιλιοστός, -η, -όν 
 τετρακιςχιλιοστός, -η, -όν 
 πεντακιςχιλιοστός, -η, -όν 
 έξακιςχιλιοστός, -η, -όν 
 έπτακιςχιλιοστός, -ή, -όν 
 6κτακιςχι?αοστός, -η, -όν 
 έννακιςχιλιοστός, -η, -όν 
 μνριοστός, -η, -όν 
 διςμνριοστός, -η, -όν 
 δεκακιςμνριοστός, -ή, -όν. 
 
 Εελιακκ. In compound numerals, the smaller number with και is usually 
 placed before the larger, often also the larger without και is p-aced first, some- 
 limes with και ; e. g. 
 
 25 : πέντε και είκοσι, or είκοσι πέντε, 
 345 . πέντε καΐ τετταράκοντα και τριακόσιοι, or τριακ. τετ . πέντε. 
 The same holds of the ordinals ; e. g. 
 
 πίμπτος και εικοστός, or εικοστός πέμπτος. 
 
 67.] 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 15 ιε 
 
 πεντεκαίδεκα 
 
 16 ις 
 
 έκκαίδεκα 
 
 17 ι? 
 
 έπτακαίδεκα 
 
 18 ΐη' 
 
 όκτωκαίδεκα 
 
 19 ιΦ 
 
 εννεακάίδεκα 
 
 20 *' 
 
 εϊκοσι(ν) 
 
 21 κα' 
 
 είκοσιν, εις, μία, έν 
 
 30 λ' 
 
 τριάκοντα 
 
 40 μ" 
 
 τετταράκοντα or τεσσαράκοντα 
 
 50 ν' 
 
 πεντήκοντα 
 
 60 ξ' 
 
 έξήκοντα 
 
 70 ο' 
 
 έβδομήκοντα 
 
 80 π 
 
 όγδοήκοντα 
 
 90 5' 
 
 ενενήκοντα 
 
 100 ρ' 
 
 εκατόν 
 
 200 <f 
 
 διακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 300 τ' 
 
 τριακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 400 ν' 
 
 τετρακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 500 ρ' 
 
 πεντακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 600 χ 
 
 εξακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 700 V' 
 
 επτακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 800 ω' 
 
 οκτακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 900 Cfo 
 
 ' εννακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 1000 ,α 
 
 χίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 2000 β 
 
 διςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 3000 // 
 
 τριςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 4000 δ 
 
 τετρακιςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 5000 ,ε 
 
 πεντακιςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 6000 ,ff 
 
 έξακιςχ'ιϊαοι, -αι, -α 
 
 7000 Χ 
 
 έπτακιςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 8000 ,η 
 
 όκτακιςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 9000 β 
 
 εννακιςχίλιοι, -αι, -α 
 
 10,000 / 
 
 μνριοι, -αι, -α 
 
 20,000 ,* 
 
 διςμύριοι, -αι, -α 
 
 100,000 ,ρ 
 
 δεκακιςμνριοι, -αι -α, 
 
72 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 [§68. 
 
 § 68. Declension of the fir st fo u r Nu merals. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 εϊς μία εν 
 
 δύο and δύω 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ενός μιας ενός 
 
 όυοϊν, Attic also όνεΐν 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ένί μια ένί 
 
 δυοίν, more rarely δνσί(ν) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ένα μίαν εν 
 
 δυο 
 
 Nom. 
 
 τρεις Neut. τρία 
 
 τέτταρες or τέσσαρες Neut. τέτταρα 
 
 Gen. 
 
 τριών 
 
 τεττάρων 
 
 Dat. 
 
 τρισί(ν) 
 
 τέτταρσι(ν) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 τρεις Neut. τρία 
 
 τέτταρας Neut. τέτταρα. 
 
 Rem. 1. The Gen. and Dat. of μία, viz. μιας, μια, have the accentuation of 
 monosyllabic substantives of the third declension. See § 33, ΠΙ. (b). Like εϊς 
 are also declined ουδείς and μηδείς, no one, which have the same irregular ac- 
 centuation, thus : 
 
 ουδείς, ουδεμία, ουδέν, Gen. ουδενός, ουδεμίας, Dat. ούδενί, ούδεμιφ, etc., but 
 in PI. ουδένες (μηδένες) -ένων, -έσι, -ένας. 
 
 Rem. 2. Δύο is often used indeclinably for all the Cases. The numeral αμφω, 
 both, like δύο, has -olv in the Gen. and Dat. (άμφοιν) ; the Ace. is like the Nom. 
 Like δύο, it is also sometimes used indeclinably. 
 
 XXXV. Vocabulary. 
 
 bearing, furnished with π?\,η-&ος, -εος = -ους, 
 
 scythes. 
 ένιαυτός, -ου, δ, a year. 
 εύρος, -εος = -ους, τό 
 
 breadth. 
 κατά-βασις, -εος, η, a go 
 
 a multitude, extent. 
 ους, ποδός, ό, a foot, 
 
 pes, pedis, 
 στα&μός, -pv, ό, a station, a 
 day's journey, a march. 
 
 ing down (from inland στράτευμα, -ατός, τό, an 
 
 Άμφί, about. 
 
 άνά-βασις, -εως, η, a go- 
 ing up, an expedition 
 (from the sea inland). 
 
 άριϋ-μός, -οϋ, ό, number, 
 extent, length. 
 
 άρμα, -ατός, τό, a chariot. 
 
 ασύνετος, -ov, senseless, 
 stupid. 
 
 βάρβαρος,-ου, ό, barbarian, 
 
 (every one not a Greek). 
 
 3ημα, -ατός, τό, a step, a 
 pace. 
 
 δρεπανηφόρος, -ov, scythe- 
 
 Έύφράτης ποταμός εστί το εύρος τεττάρων σταδίων 
 -ε και είκοσι καϊ εκατόν βήματα η πέντε καϊ είκοσι και εξακόσιους πόδας. Κύρω 
 παρησαν αί εκ ΐΙε?ιοποννήσου νηες τριάκοντα πέντε. Ύοϋ Σάρσ -J Κιλικίας ποτα- 
 «οϋ τό εύρος ην τρία πλέΰρα. Το δε π?ιέΰρον έχει τέτταρας και εκατόν πόδας. 
 Κύδνος Κιλικίας ποταμός εύρος έστι δύο (δυεϊν) πλέΰρων. Τοϋ Μαιάνδρου 
 Φρυγίας ποταμού τό εύρος έστιν είκοσι πέντε ποδών. Ό παρασάγγης, Τίερσικόν 
 αέτρον, έχει τριάκοντα στάδια η πεντήκοντα καϊ επτακόσιους καϊ όκτακιςχιλίους 
 καϊ αυρίους πόδας. Άρΐ'&μός συμπάσης της όδοΰ της αναβάσεως και καταβάσεως, 
 η υπό Ξενοφώντος συγγράφεται, σταθμοί διακόσιοι δέκα πέντε, παρασάγγαι χί- 
 λιοι εκατόν πεντήκοντα πέντε, στάδια τριςμύρια τετρακιςχίλια εξακόσια πεντή- 
 κοντα, χρόνου πλή'&ος της αναβάσεως καϊ καταβάσεως ένιαυτός και τρεις μήνες. 
 
 to the sea), retreat. 
 
 οπλίτης, -ου, ό, a heavy- 
 armed man. 
 
 πάρειμι, to be present. 
 
 πελταστής,-οϋ,ό, a shields- 
 man. 
 
 army, an armament. 
 
 συγγράφω, conscribo, to en • 
 list, to describe. 
 
 συμπάς, -ασα, -αν, all to- 
 gether, in a body, whole. 
 
 συνετός, -ή, -όν, sensible, 
 intelligent. 
 
 To δε στάδιον έχει πέν- 
 
§§ 69—71.] 
 
 NUMERAL ADVERBS. THE VERB. 
 
 73 
 
 Ενός φιλία συνετού κρείττων εστίν ασύνετων άττάντων. Ύοϋ Κίφον ατρατεν- 
 ιιατος ην άριϋμός των μεν Ελλήνων όπλϊται μύριοι, και τετρακόσιοι ττελτασταί 
 δε διςχίλιοι καϊ πεντακόσιοι, των δε μετά Κνρου βαρβάρων δέκα μυριάδες καΐ 
 άρματα δρεπανηφόρα άμφι τά ε'ικοσιν. 
 
 It is better to ha\-e one sensible friend, than all senseless ones. Seventy 
 years afford about 25,555 days. The extent (number) of the way from the bat- 
 tle at (εν) Babylon to (εις) Cotj-ora on the retreat (gen.) which is described by 
 Xenophon, amounts to (is) 122 days' journeys, 620 parasangs, 18,600 stadia; 
 the length (multitude) of the time eight months. The number of the armament 
 is 12,639,850. The generals of the armament are four, each of 300,000 (gat.). 
 In the battle were present 96,650 soldiers and 150 scythe-bearing chariots. 
 
 § 69. Numeral Adverbs. 
 
 18 όκτωκαιδεκάκις 
 
 1 άπαξ, once 
 
 2 δις, twice 
 
 3 τρις 
 
 4 τετράκις 
 
 5 πεντάκις 
 
 6 έξάκις 
 
 7 έπτάκις 
 
 8 υκτάκις 
 
 9 εννεάκις, ίννάκις 
 
 10 δεκάκις 
 
 11 ένδεκάκις 
 
 12 δωδεκάκις 
 
 13 τριςκαιδεκάκις 
 
 14 τετταρεςκαιδεκάκις or τεσσαρ 
 
 15 πεντεκαιδεκάκις 
 
 16 έκκαιδεκάκις 
 
 17 έπτακαιδεκάκις 
 
 19 έννεακαιδεκάκις 
 
 20 είκοσάκις 
 
 30 τριακοντάκις 
 40 τετταρακοντάκις or τζσσαρ. 
 50 πεντηκοντάκις 
 60 έξηκοντάκις 
 70 έβδομη κοντάιιις 
 80 όγδοηκοντάκις 
 90 ένενηκοντάκις 
 100 έκατοντάκις 
 200 διακοσιάκις 
 300 τριακοσιάκις 
 1000 χιλιάκις 
 2000 δ-ιςχιλιάκις 
 10,000 μυριάκις 
 20,000 διςμυριάκις 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 THE VEEB. 
 
 § 70. Nature of the Verb. 
 The verb expresses something which is affirmed of a subject ; e. g. 
 the father writes, the rose blooms, the boy sleeps, God is loved. 
 
 § 71. Classes of Verbs. 
 Verbs are divided, in relation to their meaning and form, into the 
 following classes : 
 
74 CLASSES OP VERBS. —THE TENSES AND MODES. [§§ 72, 73 
 
 1. Active verbs, i. e. such as express an action, that the subject 
 itself performs or manifests ; e. g. γράφω, I write, &άλλω, I bloom; 
 
 2. Middle or Reflexive verbs, i. e. such as express an action, 
 that proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, i. e. an- ac- 
 tion which the subject performs on itself; e. g. βουλεύομαι, I ad- 
 vise myself, I deliberate; 
 
 3. Passive verbs, i. e. such as express an action that the subject 
 receives from another subject; e. g. τυπτομαι υπό τίνος, I am smiU 
 ten by some one. 
 
 §72. The Tenses. 
 
 1. The Greek language has the following Tenses :. 
 I. (1) Present, βονλενω, I advise, 
 
 (2) Perfect, βεβονλενκα, I have advised; 
 II. (3) Imperfect, εβονλευον, I was advising, 
 
 (4) Pluperfect, εβεβονλενκειν, I had advised, 
 
 (5) Aorist, εβονλευσα, I advised, (indefinite) ; 
 III. (6) Future, βονλενσω, I shall or will advise, 
 
 (7) Future Perfect (only in the Middle form), βεβονλενσομαι, 
 I shall have advised myself, or / shall have been advised. 
 
 2. All the Tenses may be divided into, 
 
 a. Principal tenses, viz. Present, Perfect and Future ; 
 
 b. Historical tenses, viz. Imperfect, Pluperfect and Aorist. 
 
 Remark. The Greek language has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., 
 two for the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass, and Mid. Aor. ; 
 these two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses. 
 Still, few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the above tenses with 
 one or the other form. No verb has all the tenses. Pure verbs form, with very 
 few exceptions, only the primary tenses. Mute and liquid verbs may form both 
 the primary and secondary tenses. The Eut. Perf., which is found in but few 
 verbs, is almost entirely wanting in liquid verbs. 
 
 §73. The Modes. 
 
 The Greek has the following Modes : 
 
 I. The Indicative, which expresses what is actual or real ; e. g. 
 the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom. 
 
 Π. The Subjunctive, which denotes merely a representation or 
 conception of the mind. The Subjunctive of the historical tenses, 
 is called the Optative ; comp. γράφοιμι, with scriberem. 
 
 Remabk. How the Aor. can have both forms of the Subjunctive (i. e. Subj. 
 and Opt.), and the Future an Optative, will be seen in the Syntax ($ 152). 
 
§§ 74 77.] VERBS. — PARTICIPIALS, ETC. 75 
 
 III. The Imperative, which denotes a direct expression of one's 
 will ; e. g βονλενε, advise. 
 
 § 74. Participials . — Infinitive and Participle . 
 In addition to the modes, the verb has two forms, which, from 
 their partaking both of the nature of the verb, and also of that of 
 the substantive and adjective, are called Participials, namely, 
 
 (a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive-participial ; e. g. 
 i&ekes β ο ν λ ε ν ε ι ν, I ivish to advise, and το β ου λ εν ε ι ν, the 
 advising. 
 
 (b) The Participle, which is the adjective-participial ; e. g. β ο v- 
 λεν ων άνήο, an advising man, i. e. a counsellor. 
 
 1\fmaek. These two participials may be called verbum infinitum; the re- 
 maining forms of the verb, verbum fimium. 
 
 § 75. Numb ers and Persons of the Verb . 
 The personal-endings of the verb show whether the subject of 
 the verb be the speaker himself (I, first person) ; or a person or 
 thing addressed (thou, second person) ; or a person or thing spoken 
 of (he, she, it, third person). They also show the relation of num- 
 ber, viz. Singular, Dual and Plural ; e. g. βονλενω, I, the speaker, 
 advise ; βονλενεις, thou, the person addressed, advisest ; βονλενει, he, 
 she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; βονλενετον, ye two, 
 the persons addressed, advise ; βονλενονσι, they, the persons spoken 
 of, advise. 
 
 Remark. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual in the active 
 voice, and in the Pass. Aorists ; hence it is expressed by the form of the first Pers. 
 Plural.' 
 
 §76. The Conjugation of the Verb. 
 The Greek has two forms for conjugation, that in -ω, which in- 
 cludes much the larger number of verbs, e. g. βουλεύ-ω, to advise, 
 and the older conjugation in -μι, e. g. ΐστη-μι, to station. 
 
 §77. Stem, Augment and Reduplication. — Verb- 
 characteristic. 
 1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the ground- 
 form of the verb, and into the syllable of formation, by which the 
 relations of the action expressed by the verb, are denoted. See 
 §§ 71 — 75. The stem is found in most verbs in -ω by cutting off 
 the ending of the first Pers. Ind. Pres. ; e. g. βονλεν-ω, λέγ-ω, τρίβ-ω- 
 
76 
 
 VERBS. INFLECTION-ENDINGS. TENSE-ENDINGS, [§§ 78, 79. 
 
 2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings to 
 the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. βονλεν-ω, βον 
 λεν-σω, βονλευ-σομαι; or are prefixed to the stem, and are then 
 called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. ε-βονλενον, I was advis- 
 ing, βε-βονλενκα, I have advised. 
 
 3. The Augment, which belongs to the Indicative of all the his- 
 torical tenses, i. e. the Imperfect, the Aorist and the Pluperfect, is 
 £ prefixed to the stem of verbs which begin with a consonant ; e. g. 
 ε-βούλενσα, I advised ; but in verbs, which begin with a vowel, it 
 consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel, a and ε being changed 
 into η (and in some cases ε into ει), ι and ν into Γ and ν, and ο into ω. 
 
 4. Reduplication, which belongs to the Perfect, Pluperfect and 
 Future Perfect, consists in repeating the first stem-consonant to- 
 gether with ε, in those verbs whose stem begins with a consonant ; 
 but in verbs whose stem begins with a vowel, it is the same as the 
 Augment ; e. g. βε-βονλενκα, I have advised, 'ϊκετενκα, I have sup- 
 plicated, from 'ϊκετεν-ω. For a more full definition of the Aug- 
 ment and Reduplication, see § 85. 
 
 5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -ω is cut off, is 
 called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, because 
 according to this, verbs in -ω are divided into different classes ; ac- 
 cording as the characteristic is a vowel, or a mute, or a liquid, verbs 
 are divided into pure, mute and liquid verbs ; e. g. βονλεν-ω, to ad- 
 vise, τιμά-ω, to honor, τρίβ-ω, to rub, ψαίν-ω, to show. 
 
 § 78. In fie ction -en dings. 
 In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation ot 
 tense, mode and person, there are three different elements, namely, 
 the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal-ending ; 
 e. g. βονλεν-σ-ο-μαι. According to the three classes of verbs, they 
 are divided into the Active, Middle and Passive endings. 
 
 §79. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. 
 1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands next 
 after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark of the 
 tense. In pure verbs, κ is the tense-characteristic of the Pen. and 
 Plup. Ind. Act. ; e. g. 
 
 βε-βουλευ-κ-α ε-βε-βονλεν-κ-ειν ; 
 
 that of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. and the Fut. Perf. is 
 σ; e.g. 
 
§§ 79, 80.] VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 77 
 
 βον?,εν-σ-ω βονλεύ-σ-ομαι βε-βουλεν-σ-ομαι 
 
 k -βοΰλεν-σ-α έ-βον?<.ευ-σ-άμην ; 
 
 that of the first Aor. Pass, is # ; in addition to the tense-character 
 istic σ, the first Fut. Pass, has the ending -&η of the first Aor. 
 Pass , thus, 
 
 ε-βον7•,εν-ΰ-ην βονλεν-ΰ-ησ-ομαί. 
 
 The primary tenses only, see § 72, Rem., have a tense-character- 
 istic. 
 
 2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending following, 
 is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form βονλενσω, ο" is 
 the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable σω, the tense- 
 ending of the Future. The stem of the verb, together with the 
 tense-characteristic and the augment or reduplication, is called the 
 tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in εβούλενσ-α, εβονλενσ is the tense-stem of 
 the first Aor. Active. 
 
 § 79 (b) Persona l-endings and Mode-vow el s. 
 
 The personal-ending takes a different form according to the dif- 
 ferent persons and numbers ; and the mode-vowel takes a different 
 form according to the different modes ; e. g. 
 
 1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. Μ. βουλεύ-ο-μαι, Subj. βονλεύ-ν-μαί 
 
 3 " " " Put. " βουλεν-σ-ε-ταί Opt. βονλεύ-σ -oc-ro 
 
 1 « PI. " Pres. " βονλεν-ό-μεΰα Subj. βουλεν-ώ-μεϋα 
 
 2 " " " " " βον/>εύ-ε-σϋ-ε " βουλεύ-η-αϋε 
 
 1 " Sing. " Α. I. " έβου?ί,εν-σ-ά-μην " βονλεύ-σ-ω-μαί 
 
 3 " u " " " έβον?.εν-σ-α-το Opt. βουλεν-σ-αι-το. 
 
 Remark. In the above forms, βονλευ is the verb-stem, and βουλεν, βουλενσ 
 and εβονλενσ are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Fut. and first Aor. Mid. ; 
 the endings -μαι, -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels ο, ω, ε, oc, 
 η, a, ac, are the mode-vowels. 
 
 § 80. Remarks on the Personal-endings and Mode- 
 vowels. 
 
 1. The personal-endings are appended directly to the mode- vowel, 
 and are often so closely united with it, that the two do not appear 
 as separate parts, but are united in one ; e. g. βουλενα-ης, instead of 
 βονλενσ-η-ις, βονλεν -r}, instead of βονλεν-ε-αι., — the ε and a coalescing 
 and forming η, and ι being subscribed. 
 
 2. The difference between the principal and historical tenses is 
 here important. The principal tenses, viz. Pres., Perf. and Fut., 
 form the second and third person Dual with the same ending, -ov; 
 e. g. βονλεν-ε-τον βονλεν-ε-τον, βονλενε-σ&ον βονλεύ-ε-σ&ον ; but 
 
 7* 
 
78 VERBS. — PERSOXAL-ENDINGS ΑΝΏ MODE-VOWELS. [§ 80. 
 
 the historical tenses form the second person Dual with the ending -o v, 
 the third with the ending -η ν ; e. g. 
 
 έβονλεύ-ε-τ ο ν έβονλευ-έ-τ η ν, έβουλεύ-ε-σ ■& ο ν έβουλευ-έ-σ -&ην. 
 
 3. The principal tenses form the third person plural active with 
 
 the ending -α ι (ν) [arising from -ν τι, -ν α t], the third person plu 
 
 ral middle with -ν τ a t, the historical active with -v, and the mid 
 
 die with -ντο; e. g. 
 
 βονλεν-ο-νσι = βουλεν-ονσί(ν) έβούλευ-ο-ν 
 βου?»εν-ο-νταί έ-βονλεν-ο-ντο. 
 
 4. The principal tenses in the singular middle end in ~μαι, -σαι, 
 ται ; the historical, in -μψ, -σο, -το ; e. g. 
 
 βονλεν-ο-μ a t έβουλεν-ό- μην 
 
 βουλεν-ε-σ a t = βονλεν-η έβουλεύ-ε-σ ο = έβουλεύ-ου 
 
 βονλεν-ε-τ a t εβουλεν-ε-τ ο. 
 
 5. The personal endings of the subjunctive of the principal tenses, 
 
 are the same as those of the indicative of the same tenses ; and the 
 
 endings of the optative are the same as those of the indicative of 
 
 the historical tenses ; e. g. 
 
 2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pr. βουλενε-τ ο ν Subj. βονλενη-τ ο ν 
 
 βουλεύε-σ&ον " βουλεύη-σ & ο ν 
 
 3 Ρ1. " " βονλεύου-σ ι (ν) " βουλεύω-σ t (ν) 
 
 βουλεύο-ν rat " βονλεύω-ν τ α ι 
 
 1 S. " " βουλενο-μ at " βουλεύω-μ α ι 
 
 2 " " " βονλεν -y " βονλεύ -y 
 
 3 " " " βονλεύε-ται " βουλευη-ταί 
 
 2 and 3 Du. " Impf. έβόνλενε-τ ο ν, -έ-τ η ν Opt. βουλεύοι -r ο ν, -οί-τ η ν 
 
 εβουλεύε-σΰ-ον,-έ-σϋ-ην " βουλεύοί-σΰ-ον,-οί-σ'&ην 
 
 3 Ρ1. " " έβονλευο-ν " βονλενοί-εν 
 
 έβουλεύο-ντο " βονλενοι-ν τ ο 
 
 \ S. " " εβυυλενό-μ ην " βονλευοί-μ η ν 
 
 2 " " " (εβουλεύε-σ ο) έβουλεύ-ου " (βουλεύοι-σ ο) βονλεύοι-ο 
 
 3 " tL " έβουλεύε-τ ο " βουλεύοι-το. 
 
 Remark. On ν έφελκυστικόν, see § 7, 1. (b). 
 
 6. The mode-vowel of the subjunctive of the principal tenses dif- 
 fers from that of the indicative, merely in being lengthened, viz. ο 
 into ω, ε and a into η, and ει into η ; e. g. 
 
 "nd. βουλεύ-ο-μεν Subj. βουλεύ-ω-μεν ; Ind. βουλεύ-ε-σ&ε Subj. βονλεν-η-σϋε. 
 nd. βουλεύ-εις Subj. βουλεύ-ης. 
 
 7. The mode-vowel of the optative is ι in connection with the 
 preceding mode-vowel of the first person singular indicative. (The 
 pluperfect is an exception, the optative of this taking the mode- 
 vowel of the present). Thus : 
 
 1. Sing. Ind. Imperf. Act. ο Opt. ol έ8ούλευ-ο-ν βουλευ-οι-μί 
 
 " Plur. " Aor. I. Act. a " at έβονλενσ-α-μεν βουλενσ-αι-ιιεν 
 
§ 81.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -ω. 79 
 
 §81. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -ω, ex- 
 hibited in the Pure Verb (§ 77, 5) β ο ν λ ε ν ω . 
 
 Preliminary Remarks. As pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses 
 (§ 72, Rem.), these tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs 
 and a liquid verb (τρίβ-ω, λείπ-ω, stem ΛΙΓΓ, ψαΐν-ω, stem ΦΑΝ), so as to ex- 
 hibit a full conjugation. 
 
 In learning the table of conjugation, it is to be noted : 
 
 (1) That the meaning in English is opposite the Greek forms. All the par- 
 ticular shades of meaning, however, which belong to the different Modes and 
 Tenses in connected discourse, cannot be given in the table. 
 
 (2) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into their constituent 
 parts, viz. (a) Personal-ending, (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) 
 Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) Augment or Reduplication. 
 
 (3) The spaced forms, e. g. βουλεύ-ε τ ο ν, βονλεϋ-ητον, 3d Pers.Du.Ind. 
 and Subj. Pres., may call the attention of the learner to the difference between 
 the historical tenses in the Ind. and Opt. and the principal tenses. 
 
 (4) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are dis- 
 tinguished by a star {*). The learner should search these out and compare 
 them together; e. g. βονλενσω, 1. S. Ind. Put. Act, or 1. S. Subj. Aor. I. Act.: 
 βονλενσαι, 2. S. Imp. Aor. I. Mid., βονλενσαι, 3. S. Opt. Aor. I. Act, βονλεϋ- 
 cat, Inf. Aor. I. Act. 
 
 (5) The accentuation should be learned with the form. The following gene- 
 ral rule will suffice for beginners : The accent of the verb is as far from the end as 
 the final syllable ivitt permit. Those forms, whose accentuation deviates from this 
 rule, are indicated by a cross (f ). 
 
 (6) When the following paradigm has been thoroughly learned in this way, 
 the pupil may first resolve the verbs occurring in the Greek exercises into their 
 elements, i. e. into the personal ending, mode-vowel, etc., observing the follow- 
 ing order, viz. βονλενσω, is (1) of the first Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Put., 
 (5) Act., (6) from the verb βονλενω, to advise; then he may so translate into 
 Greek the verbs in the English exercises, as to exhibit the elements of which 
 the form of the Greek verb must be composed ; these elements may be arranged 
 in the following order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment or Reduplication, (3) 
 Tense-characteristic, (4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with 
 Mode-vowel, (7) Personal-ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode- vowel and Perso- 
 nal-ending. E. g. What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised 
 himself using the Aor. of the Pres., βονλεν-ω, to advise ? Answer : The verb- 
 stem is βον?.εν-, augment έ, thus εβονλεν ; the tense-characteristic of the first 
 Aor. Mid. is σ, thus tense-stem is ε-βονλεν-σ ; the mode- vowel of the first Aor. 
 lad. Mid. is a, thus έ-βον?>εν-σ-β, ; the personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing, 
 of an historical tense of the Mid. is το, thus έ-βονλεν-σ-α-το. 
 
 (7) In order that the memory of the pupil may not be tasked by too many 
 forms at once, it is best to commit the verb in parts, and in the order in which 
 the exercises in § 84 follow each other. He may at the same time translate the 
 exercises from Greek into English, and from English into Greek. After all the 
 forms have been thoroughly committed in this way, he may turn back to the 
 tables and repeat all the forms together. 
 
80 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -ω. 
 
 [§81. 
 ACT 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 The 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 Tense- 
 stem: 
 
 βον?,εν- 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Tense- 
 stem : 
 
 ε-βονλεν- 
 
 D.2. 
 
 βονλεν-ω* I advise, 
 βουλεί'-είς, thou advisest, 
 βονλεν-ει, he, she, it advises, 
 βονλεν-ετον, ye two advise, 
 βονλεύ-ε τον, they two advise, 
 βουλεν-ομεν, we advise, 
 βονλεύ-ετε* you advise, 
 βουλευ-ον σ l (ν), they advise, 
 
 βονλεν-ω* I may advise, 
 βονλεί)-ης, thou mayest advise, 
 βον/ιεν-η* he, she, it may adv. , 
 βονλεύ-η τ ο ν, ye two may ad. 
 βονλεύ-η τον, they two may a. 
 βον?,εν-ωμεν, we may advise, 
 βουλεί'-ητε, you may advise, 
 βονλεί'-ωσι(ν), they may adv. 
 
 Perfect I. 
 Tense- 
 stern : 
 βε- 
 
 βΰνλεν-κ 
 
 ε- βονλεν-ον * I was advising, 
 εβονλεν-ες, thou wast advising, 
 έ-βούλευ-ε{ν), he, she, it was ad. 
 έ-βονλεύ-ετον, ye two were ado. 
 έ-βονλεν-έ την, they two were a. 
 έ-βονλευ-ομεν, we were advising, 
 έ-βον?<,εύ-ετε, you were advising, 
 ε-βονλεν -ov^they we?*e advising, 
 
 βέ-βούλεν-κ-α, I have advised, 
 βε-βούλεν-κ-ας, thou hast advd, 
 βε-βουλεν-Ά-ε{ν)*}ιβ,8ιΐΒ,ύ has a 
 βε-βονλεν-κ-ατον ,ye two have a. 
 βε-βουλεν-κ-α τον , they two 
 
 liave advised, 
 | βε-βονλεύ-κ-αμεν, we haveadv. 
 βε-βουλεύ-κ-ατε, you have adv. 
 βε-βουλεν-κ-α σ c (ν), they have a 
 
 βε-βουλεν•κ•ω, Ivuxy have ad. 
 
 βε-βονλευ-κ-γς, thou mayest 
 have advised, etc., declined 
 like the Subj. Pres. 
 
 Pluper- 
 \ feet I. 
 1 Tense- 
 stem : 
 
 | έ-βε- 
 \ 3ονλεν-κ-\ 
 
 ειν,Ιη^αάαάν'ά, 
 εις, thou hadst a. 
 ει^βΙ^,ίίΙισΛαά. 
 ειτον, ye two had 
 
 έ-βε-βονλεν-κ- 
 έ-βε-βουλεν-κ- 
 έ-βε-βουλεν-κ- 
 ε-βε-βουλεύ-κ- 
 
 advised, 
 ε-βε-βον7\εν-κ-ε ίτην, they two 
 
 had advised, 
 έ-βε-βονλεν-κ- 
 ε-βε-βουλεν-κ- 
 k -βε-βονλεν-κ• 
 
 ειμεv,wehadad. 
 είτε, you had ad. 
 ε σ av.theyhada. 
 
 S Perf. II. 
 Mpf. II. 
 
 τζέ-Φην-α, 1 I 
 έ-πε-φήν-είν, 2 
 
 appear, 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Tense- 
 stem: 
 
 i- 
 
 \8ον?.ευ-σ- 
 
 S. 1. 1 ε-βονλευ-σ- 
 
 2. Ι ε-βουλευ-σ- 
 
 3. 1 έ-βονλεν-σ- 
 Ό. 2. j! ε-βου?,εΰ-σ- 
 
 3. 1 ε-βονλεν-σ- 
 Έ.Ι.ίε-βονλεν-σ- 
 
 2. 1 έ-βονλεύ-σ- 
 
 3. f ε-βον?ιεν-σ-α ν, they advised, 
 
 ά, I advised, (indef.) 
 ■ας, thou advisedst, 
 ■ε(ν), he, she, it adv. 
 ■ατον, ye two actVif, 
 ■ά τ ην, they two ad. 
 αμεν, we advised, 
 ατε, you advised, 
 
 Aor. Π. 
 
 h -λιπ- 
 
 S.i 
 
 ο 
 
 jj ί-λϊπ-ον, I left, 
 . ■ ϊ-λιτν-ες, etc., 
 j Impf. Ind. 
 
 declined like 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 . Ι βον?*.εύ-σ-ω* I shall advise, 
 | declined like the Indie. Pres. 
 The declension of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, 
 
 Future. 
 
 βον?„εν-σ-\ 
 
 Subjunctive 
 of the Principal tenses. 
 
 πε-ψήν-ω, I may appear^ 
 
 βουλεν-σ-ω* I may advise, 
 βονλευ-σ-•ης, thou mayest ad- 
 vise, etc., declined like the 
 Subj. Pres. 
 
 λίπ-ω, etc., declined like the 
 Subj. Pres. 
 
 like that of the 1st Perf. 
 
}81.] 
 IVE 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -ω. 
 
 81 
 
 Μ O D Ε S . 
 
 Participials. 
 
 Optative 
 i. e. Subj. of Historical tenses. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 βούλεν-ε, advise thou, 
 βουλεν-έτω, let him a, 
 βον?<.εν-ετον, ye two a. 
 βονλεν-έτων, let them 
 
 both advise, 
 βονλεν-ετε* do ye ad. 
 
 3ουλεύ- 
 
 ειν, 
 
 to 
 
 advise, 
 
 βον?-εν•ων 
 βονλεν-ονσα 
 βονλεϋ -ovf 
 G. βονλεν-οντος 
 
 βονλευ-ονσης, 
 
 advising, 
 
 βονλεν-έτωσαν,Μ5\\ηΧ\γβονλεν•όντων*, let them a. 
 
 βονλεν-οιμι, I might advise, 
 βον?^εν-οίς, thou miglitest advise, 
 βου?*εν-οί, he, she, it might adv. 
 βον?^εν-οίτον, ye ttco might ad. 
 βονλεν-ο ίτην, they two mig. a. 
 βου?^εν•οιμεν, we might advise, 
 βονλεύ-οιτε, you might advise, 
 βονλεν-ο i ε ν, they miglit advise, 
 
 
 
 
 
 [βε-βονλεν-κ-ε*] etc. 
 declined like the 
 Imp. Pres. ; yet 
 only a few Per- 
 fects, and such as 
 have the meaning 
 of the Pres., fonn 
 an Imperative. 
 
 βε-βον- 
 λεν- 
 
 to have 
 advised, 
 
 βε-βονλεν-κ-ώς\ 
 
 βε-βουλεν-κ-νία\ 
 
 βε-βονλεν-κ-ός\ 
 
 G. -κ-ότος, -κ- 
 
 νίας, having 
 
 advised, 
 
 βε-βονλεν-κ-οιμι, Σ mig. have a. 
 βε•βον?ιεν-κ•οις, thou mightest 
 
 have advised, etc., declined 
 
 like the Opt. Impf. 
 
 
 
 
 πε-ώην-οιμί, I might appear, 
 
 πέ-φην-ε, appear thou, 
 
 πε-φη- 
 νέ-ναι,•\ 
 
 πε-φην-ώςϊ 
 
 βονλεν-σ-αιιιι, I might advise, 
 βονλεν-σ-αις or -ειας 
 βονλεν-σ•αί*•\ or -ειε(ν) 
 βονλεν-σ-αιτον 
 βουλεν-σ-α ίτην 
 βονλεν-σ-αιμεν 
 βον?.εν-σ-αίτε 
 βονλεν-σ-α ι εν or -ε Lav 
 
 βούλεν-σ-ον, advise, 
 βονλεν-σ-άτω 
 βονλεν-σ•ατον 
 βονλεν-σ-άτων 
 
 βον?ιεν-σ•ατε 
 
 βον- 
 λεν- 
 
 σαι,*ϊ 
 
 to 
 advise, 
 
 βονλεύ-σ-άς 
 βονλεν-σ-άσα 
 βονλεν-σ -av'f 
 Ο.βονλεν-σ-αντος 
 βονλεν-σ-ασης, 
 having advised, 
 
 βονλεν-σ-άτωσαν, us 
 
 ually -σάντων* 
 
 λίπ-οψι, etc., declined like the 
 Opt. Impf. 
 
 λίττ-ε, etc., declined 
 like the Imp. Pres. 
 
 ?απ- 
 εΐν,ϊ 
 
 λιπ-ων, ονσα, όν\ 
 G. όντος, ούσης, 
 
 βονλεί'-σΌΐμχ, I would advise, 
 declined like the Opt. Impf. 
 
 
 βονλεν- 
 σ-ειν, 
 
 βονλ•εν-σ•ων, 
 etc., like Pr. Pt. 
 
 9 The declension of the 2d Pluperf. 
 
 s like that of the 1st Pluri 
 
 erf., both 
 
 in the ind. and Opt. 
 
CONJUGATION OP THE REGULAR VERB IN -ω. 
 
 [§81. 
 MID 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 1 » 
 
 in 
 
 The 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subj unctive 
 of the Principal tenses. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Tense-stem : 
 
 βουλευ- 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 βουλεύ-ο μ α ι, I deliberate, or 
 
 βουλεν -y* [am advised, 
 
 βουλεύ-ε τ a t 
 
 βουλευ-όμεΰον 
 
 βουλεύ-εσΰον 
 
 βουλεύ-ε σ ΰ ο ν 
 
 βουλευ-όμεΰα 
 
 βουλεύ-εσΰε* 
 
 βουλεύ-ο ντ α ι 
 
 βονλεύ-ω μ at, I may 
 βουλεύ-η* [deliberate, 
 βουλεύ-η rat 
 βουλευ-ώμεΰον 
 βονλεύ-ησΰον 
 βουλεύ-η σΰον 
 βουλευ-ώμεΰα 
 βουλεύ-ησΰε 
 βουλεύ-ω ν τ at 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Tense-stem : 
 έ-βουλευ- 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 έ-βουλευ-ό μην, I was delibe- 
 έ-βουλεύ-ο υ [rating, 
 έ-βουλεύ-ε τ ο 
 έ-βουλευ-όμεΰον 
 έ-βουλεύ-εσΰον 
 έ-βουλευ-έ σΰην 
 έ-βουλευ-όμεΰα 
 έ-βουλεύ-εσϋ-ε 
 έ-βουλεύ-ο ντο 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Tense-stem : 
 
 βε-βουλευ- 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 βε-βούλευ -u α ι, I have delibe- 
 βεφούλευ-σ α ι [rated, 
 βε-βούλευ-τ α ι 
 βε-βουλεύ-μεΰον 
 βε-βούλευ-σΰον 
 βε-βούλευ-σ ΰον 
 βε-βου?„εύ-με&α 
 βε-βουλεν-σΰε* 
 βε-βούλευ-ν rat 
 
 βε-βουλευ-μένος ώ, Ι 
 may have deliberated, 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Tense-stem : 
 
 έ-βε-βουλευ- 
 
 έ-βε-βουλεύ-μην, I had de- 
 έ-βε-βούλευ-σο [liberated. 
 έ-βε-βούλευ•τ ο 
 έ-βε-βουλεύ-μεΰον 
 έ-βε-βούλευ-σΰον 
 έ-βε-βουλεύ-σ ΰην 
 έ-βε-βουλεύ-μεΰα 
 έ-βε-βούλευ-σΰε 
 έ-βε-βούλευ-ν τ ο 
 
 
 
 Aorist I. 
 
 Tense-stem : 
 έ-βουλευ-σ- 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 S.l. 
 
 έ-βουλευ-σ-ά μην, I delibera- 
 έ-βουλεύ-σ-ω [fee?, (indefinite) 
 
 έ-βουλεύ-σ-α τ ο 
 
 έ-βον?»ευ-σ-άμε-&ον 
 
 έ-βουλεύ-σ-ασΰ-ον 
 
 έ-βουλευ-σ-ά σΰ-ην 
 
 έ-βουλευ-σ-άμεΰα 
 
 έ-βουλεύ-σ-ασΰε 
 
 έ-βουλεύ-σ-α ντο 
 
 βουλεύ-σ-ωμ α ι, I may 
 βουλεύ-σ-η* [deliberate, 
 
 etc., declined like 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 
 Aorist II. 
 
 έ-λΐ'κ-ομην, I remained, decli- 
 ned like Ind. Imperf. 
 
 λίπ-ωμαι, Imay remain, 
 declined likePres.Subj. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 βουλεύ-σ-ομαι, I. shall delibe- 
 rate, declined like Pres. Ind. 
 
 
 
 Fut.Perf. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 βε-βουλεύ-σ-ομαι, I shall delib- 
 erate, declined like Pres. Ind. 
 
 
 
181.] 
 DLE. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -ω. 
 
 83 
 
 Participials. 
 
 Optative 
 i.e.Subj. of tho Hist, tenses. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 βον?<,εν-ον, deliberate thou, 
 βονλεν-έσΰω 
 
 βονλεν-εσϋον 
 βονλεν-έσϋων* 
 
 βονλεν-ο ίμην, I might 
 βονλεν-ο ι ο [deliberate, 
 βονλεύ-ο ιτο 
 βονλεν-οίμεϋ-ον 
 βονλεν-ο icr&ov 
 βονλεν-ο ίσ&ην 
 βονλεν-οίμεΰ-α 
 βονλεν-οισΰε 
 
 ιουΛεν-ο ιντο 
 
 βε-βονλεν-μένος εΐην, Ι 
 might have deliberated. 
 
 βονλεν-εσΰ-έ* 
 
 βονλευ-έσΰ-ωσαν, usually βονλεν-έσ&ων* 
 
 βονλεν- 
 εσ&αί, 
 to delibe- 
 rate, 
 
 βονλεν-όμενος 
 βονλεν-ομένη 
 βονλεν-όμενον, 
 deliberating, 
 
 βε-βονλεν-σο, 
 βε-βονλεν-σϋω 
 
 βε βούλεν-σ&ον 
 βε-βονλευ-σ&ων* 
 
 βε-βονλεν-σϋε* 
 
 βε-βονλεν- 
 a&airf to 
 have de- 
 liberated. 
 
 βεβουλενμένος^ 
 βεβονλεν-μένη 
 βεβον2.εν-μέ- 
 vovfi having 
 
 βε-βονλεν-σ&ωσαν, usually βε-βονλεν-σ&ων 
 
 βονλεν-σ-α ί μ η v,Imi(ft 
 βονλεν-σ-α ι ο [delibe- 
 βονλεν-σ-α ιτο [rate, 
 βονλεν-σ-αίμεϋον 
 βονλεν-σ-αισΰον 
 βον?\.εν-σ-α ίσϋ-ην 
 βονλεν-σ-αΐμε'&α 
 βονλεν-σ-ακτ&ε 
 βονλεν-σ-α ιντο 
 
 βονλεν-σ-αί* deliberate thou 
 
 βον?>εν-σ-άσ&ω 
 
 βον?»εν-σ-ασΰ-ον 
 βονλεν-σ-ύσ&ίον* 
 
 βονλεν-σ-ασ&ε 
 
 βονλεν- 
 σ-ασ--&αί, 
 to deliber- 
 ate, 
 
 βονλενσ-άμενος 
 
 βονλεν-σ-αμένη 
 
 βονλενσ-άμενον 
 
 having delib- 
 
 βον?,εν-σ-άσ-&ωσαν, usually βονλεν-σ-άσ$ων* 
 
 λιπ-οίμην,ΙηύαΗ remain 
 like Opt. Impf. 
 
 λίπ-οϋ,ί -έσ&ω, declined 
 like Pres. Imp. 
 
 βovλεv-σ-oίμηv,Im. have 
 cie/z6eraiec?,likeOpt.Impf. 
 
 βε-βονλεν-σ-οίμην,ΙέΚά 
 deliberate.lUke Opt. Impf. 
 
 λιπ-έσ&αή 
 
 βονλεν- 
 σ-εσΰαο 
 
 βε-βονλεν- 
 σ-εσϋ-αι 
 
 λιπ-ομενος, -ο- 
 μένη, -όμενον 
 
 β Όνλεν-σ-ό μέ- 
 νος, -η, -ον 
 
 βε-βονλεν-σ-ό- 
 μένος, -η, -ον. 
 
84 REMARKS ON THE PARADIGM. — ATTIC FUTURE. [§§ 82, 83. 
 
 PAS 
 
 The 
 
 Tensos. ι £ S S2 1 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 of the Principal tenses. 
 
 S.i. 
 
 Aorist I. | 
 
 Tense - bo 
 
 stem : I ' "' 
 
 έ " Ρ t 
 
 βουλευ-&-\ r ' *' 
 
 Future I. 
 
 Aonst U. 
 
 S. l. 
 
 2. 
 
 ε-βουλεν-ν-ην, I mas advised, 
 
 ε-βουλεν--&-ης 
 ε-βου%εύ-&-η 
 
 έ-βονλεν-ΰ-ητον 
 έ-βουλεν-•&-ή την 
 ε-βουλεν-ΰ-ημεν 
 έ-βουλεύ--&-ητε 
 έ-βονλεύ--&-η σαν 
 
 βονλεν-ϋ-η-σ-ομαι,Ι shall be adv. 
 βονλεν-ϋή-σ-η, etc., declined 
 like the Ind. Pres. Mid. 
 
 S.I. 
 
 έ-τρίβ-ην, I was rubbed, 
 ετρίβ-ης, etc., declined like the 
 first Aor. Ind. Pass. 
 
 Fut. II. I 
 
 S.I. 
 
 τριβ-η-σ-ομαι, I shall be rubbed, 
 τριβ-ή-σ-η, etc., declined like 
 the first Fut. Ind. Pass. 
 
 βου'λευ-•&-ώ, I might have 
 βονΑεν-ΰ-ής [been advised, 
 βονλευ-ΰ--^ 
 βου?\,ευ-ϋ--ήτον 
 βονλευ-ϋ-ή τον 
 βουλεν--&-ώμεν 
 βουλευ-ϋ--ήτε* 
 βονλεν-•&-ώ σ ι [ν) 
 
 τριβ-ώ, I may have been ruVd, 
 τριβ-γς ,etc.,declined like the 
 first Aor. Sudj. Pass. 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : βονλεν-τός, -ή, -όν, advised, 
 
 §82. Remarks on the Paradigm. 
 
 1. In the first person Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use besides the form m 
 -ειν, a form in -η ; e. g. έβεβον?ιεύκ-η, instead of -κ-ειν. The mode-vowel ει 
 in the third Pers. PI. is commonly shortened into ε ; έβεβονλεύ-κ-ε-σαν, instead 
 of έβεβον?,εν-κ-ει-σαν. 
 
 2. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Fut. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers 
 besides the form in -y, use another in -ει ; e. g. βονλεν-τι and βονλεν-ει, βο\>- 
 λενσ-7] and -ει, βεβονλενσ-η and -ει, βουλεν&ησ-τ) and -ει, τριβησ -y and -ει. 
 This last form in -ει is exclusively used in the following forms of the three 
 verbs, viz. 
 
 βονλομαι, I ivish, β ονλει, thou wishest (but Subj. βούλη) 
 
 οίομαι, I think, οιει, thou thinhest (but Subj. olrj) 
 
 όψομαι, I ' sluatt see, όψει, thou ivilt see. 
 
 3. The abbreviated forms of the third Pers. PI. Imp. Act. have in all tenses 
 except the Perf., the same form as the Gen. PI. of participles of the respective 
 tenses. The pupil should seek out these forms. 
 
 §83. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic Future. 
 
 1. When in the Fut. Act. and Mid. of verbs in -σω, -σομαι, from stems of two 
 or more syllables, the short vowels ά, ε, I, precede σ, certain verbs, instead of 
 the regular form, have another, which, after dropping a, takes the circumflexed 
 ending -ω, -ονμαι, and because it was frequently used by the Attic writers, it is 
 called the Attic Future; e. g. ελάω (usually έλαύνω), to drive, έλά-σ-ω, Fut. Att 
 £λώ, -$ς, -ψ, -ατον, -ωμεν, -άτε, -ώσι(ν) ; τελέω, to finis} , τελέ-σ-ω, Fut Att 
 
81.] 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. 
 
 60 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 Modes. Partlcipials. 
 
 
 Optative 
 i. e. Subj. of the Hist, tenses. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 βονλεν-ΰ-είην, I might be 
 βονλευ-ΰ-είης [advised, 
 βονλεν-τ9--είη 
 βον?.ευ--&-είητον 
 3ονΆευ-β--ε ιητην 
 3ονλεν--&-είημεν and -εΐμεν 
 βον/,εν-ΰ-εΐητε and -εϊτε 
 βονλευ-ΰ-ε Ϊ εν 
 
 βον?,εν--&-7]τι, be thou ad- 
 βονλεν-ΰ-ητω [vised, 
 βονλεν--&-ητον 
 βονλεν--&-ητων 
 
 βονλευ-ΰ--ητε* 
 βον7*εν-•&-7]τωσαν 
 
 βονλεν- 
 d-7~/vat, 
 to be ad- 
 vised, 
 
 βονλεν-ϋ--είς•\ 
 βονλεν-ϋ--εΙσα\ 
 βονλεν-$-έν\ 
 Genitive : 
 βον7,ευ-"&-έντος 
 βονλεν-•&-είατις, 
 
 having been 
 
 advised, 
 
 
 βονλεν-•&?]-σ-οΐμ7/ν, I should 
 be advised, etc., declined 
 like the Impf. Opt. Mid. 
 
 
 Ίον?ιεν- 
 &ή-σε- 
 σ&αι 
 
 βονλεν-ΰ-η-σ-ό- 
 μενος, -η, -ον 
 
 
 τριβ-είην, I might be rubbed, 
 
 τριβ-είης, etc.. declined like 
 
 the first Aor. Opt. Pass. 
 
 τρφ-η&ι,-ήτω&Ο.,άβεΥά 
 like first Aor.Imp.Pass. 
 
 'τρφ- 
 ηναι 
 
 τρφ-είς,ϊ etc., 
 declined like I. 
 Aor.Part.Pass. 
 
 
 τρφ-η-σ-οίμην, I should be 
 nibbed, etc., declined like 
 the first Fut Opt. Pass. 
 
 
 τριβη- 
 σεσΰαι 
 
 τρφ-η-σ-όμενος 
 -η, -ον ' 
 
 βον?<.ευ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον, to be advised. 
 
 >τελώ, -εϊς, -εϊ, -εϊτον, -ονμεν, -είτε, -ονσι(ν) ; τελέ-σ-ομαι (τελέομαι), τελούμαι, 
 -ει, -εϊται, etc. ; κομίζω, to carry, Put. κομίσω, Put. Att. κομιώ, -ιεϊς, -ιεΐ, -ίεϊτον, 
 -ιονμεν, -ιείτε, -ιονσι(ν) ; κομιονμαι, -ιεϊ, -ιειται, -ωνμεΰον, etc. 
 
 2. This form of the Put. is found only in the Ind., Inf. and Part., never in the 
 Opt, thus τελώ, τελεϊν, τελών ; but τε7^έσοιμι. The verbs which have this 
 form are the following : (a) έ λ ά ω (ελαννω), to dnve, τ ελέω, to finish, κ αλ έ ω, 
 to call, and, though seldom, άλέω, to griyid; — (b) all polysyllables in -ί ζ ω ; — 
 (c) a few verbs in -ά ζ ω, very generally βφάζω ; — (d) of verbs in -μι, all in 
 -άννϋμι and άμφιέννΰμι, to clothe (άμφιέσω, άμφιώ, -ιεϊς, etc.). Excep- 
 tions to this form of the Put. are found but seldom in the Attic dialect 
 
 § 84. Accentuation of the Verb. 
 
 1. Primary law. The acce7it is draum back from the end of the ivord toioards 
 the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits / e. g. βούλενε, βον- 
 λενοααι, παϋε, τύπτε, βονλενσον, παϋσον, τνψον, but βονλευεις, βουλενειν. 
 
 Rem. ] . The diphthong -αι at the end of a word, is considered short in re • 
 spect to accent ; e. g. βονλενομαι. The Opt. ending -ai, however, is considered 
 long ; e. g. βονλενσαι, third Pers. Sing. Opt first Aor. Active. The Opt end- 
 ing -οι is also long ; e. g. έκλείποί. 
 
 2. The same law holds good in composition, yet with this limitation, that the 
 accent cannot go back beyond that syllable of the word prefixed, which before composi- 
 tion had the accent; nor beyond the first two words forming the compound, neit/ier be- 
 yond an existing augment ; e. g. 
 
 φέρ* ττρόςώερε λείπε απολείπε όώμεν ενδωμεν 
 
 φενγε ίκώενγε οϊδα σννοιδα ημαι κάϋημαι ; 
 
 8 
 
86 ACCENTUATION OF THE VERB. [§ 84. 
 
 but προςεϊχον like ειχον, παρέσχον like έσχον, εξηγον like ψ/ον, προςηκον like 
 ηκον, άπεϊργον like είργον (not πρόςειχον, παρέσχον, etc.), but Imp. άπειργε. 
 
 Exceptions to the Primary Law. 
 
 3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : 
 
 (a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. 
 Sing of the Part, of the same tense as acute ; e. g. λιπεϊν, λιπών, -όν, and in 
 the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the fire verbs, είπε, έλΰ-έ, είρέ, 
 λαβε and Ίδέ (but in composition, απειπε, απόλαβε, άπελ&ε, ε'ίςιδε). 
 
 (b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex ; e. g. λαβον, ϋον, from 
 τίϋ-ημι. 
 
 Rem. 2. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. Act. 
 draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law ; e. g. έκβαλε, 
 έξελ&ε, εκδος, έκδοτε, απόδος, άπόδοτε, μετάδος, μετάδοτε (but not άποδος, μέ- 
 ταδος, see No. 2), but εκβαλείν, εκβαλών, έκλιπεΐν, εξελΰών, etc. But in the 
 Imp. Sing, second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -ω, the circumflex remains on the ulti- 
 mate in compounds also ; e. g. έκβαλον, άφικον, εκλιπόν, επιλα&οϋ, άφελον, 
 ένενεγκοϋ ; so in verbs in -μι, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- 
 bic preposition ; e. g. προδον, εν&ον, άφον ; yet the accent is drawn back, when 
 the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition ; e. g. άπόδου, κατά&ον, 
 άπό&ου ; but in the Dual and PI. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all 
 cases drawn back ; e. g. έκβάλεσ&ε, άπολάβεσΰ-ε, πρόδοσΰ-ε, εν&εσ&ε, άφεσ&ε, 
 κατάΰεσΰ-ε. 
 
 (c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -ς (Gen. -τος), con- 
 sequently in all active participles of verbs in -μι, as well as in those of the first 
 and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs ; e. g. βεβον- 
 λευκώς, Gen. -ότος, πεφηνώς, Gen. -δτος, βονλεν&εΐς, Gen. -έντος, τυπείς, Gen. 
 -έντος, Ίστάς, Gen. -άντος, τιΰείς, Gen. -έντος, διδονς, Gen. -όντος, δεικννς, Gen. 
 ■ νντος, διαστάς, έκΰείς, προδονς, Gen. διαστάντος, έκΰέντος, προδόντος. 
 
 Rem. 3. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- 
 tion ; e. g. παιδεϋσας, Gen. παιδενσαντος. 
 
 (d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex ; e. g. 
 βονλεν&ώ, τριβώ. 
 
 4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : 
 
 (a) In the Inf. Perf. Mid. or Pass., first Aor. Act. and second Aor. Mid.; also 
 in all infinitives in -ναι, hence in all active infinitives of verbs in -μι, as well as 
 in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and of the Perf. Act. of all verbs ; e. g. 
 τετύΦ&αι, βεβουλεϋσΰ-αι, τετιμησϋ-αι, πεΦιλησϋ-αι, μεμισΰ-ώσϋ-αι ; — φνλάξαι, 
 βονλενσαι, τιμησαι, φιλησαι, μισΰ-ώσαι ; — λιπέσΰαι, εκΰέσ&αι, διαδόσΰ -at ; — Ισ- 
 τάναι, τν&έναι, διδόναι, δεικννναι, στηναι, εκστηναι, Φεΐναι, εκΰεϊναι, δούναι, 
 μεταδοϋναι : — βουλενϋηναι, τριβηναι ; — βεβονλενκέναι, λελοιπέναι. 
 
 (b) In all Optatives in -ο ι and -α ι, see Rem. 1. 
 
 Rem. 4. The three similar forms, viz. the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. first Aor. 
 Mid. and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist of three 
 or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished from one 
 another by the accent, in the following manner: 
 
§ 84.] CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 87 
 
 Inf. first Aor. Act. βονλενσαι, Imp. first Aor. Mid. βούλευσαι, 
 
 ποιησαι ποίησαι 
 
 Opt. first Aor. Act. βονλενσαι 
 ποιησαι. 
 
 But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. first 
 Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act. ; e. g. φν- 
 λάξαι ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. φύλαξαι. 
 
 (c) In the Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; e. g. βεβονλενμένος, -μένη, -μένον, -τε- 
 τιμημένος, πεθυμημένος. 
 
 XXXVI. Vocabulary. 
 
 (a) Present and Imperfect Active 
 
 'Αγορεύω, to say. έτερος, -a, -ov, alter, the δτε, when. 
 
 άπειρος, -ov, (adv. άπεί- other (of two), opposite, ούτως, (bef. cons, ούτω,) so, 
 
 ρως), w. gen., unac- different. thus, 
 
 quainted with, unskill- ίνα, in order that. παιδεία, -ας, ή, education, 
 
 ed in. κάλλος, -εος == -ους, τδ, instruction. 
 
 άπο-τρέπω, to turn away, beauty. πλησιάζω, to approach, 
 
 avert. κεύϋω, to conceal. πρόνοια, -ας, η, foresight, 
 
 άπο-φεύγω, to flee away, μονσική (τέχνη understood) precaution. 
 
 άροτρον,-ον, τό, a plough. -ης, ή, every art under προς-πίπτω, (in third pers. 
 
 γενναίως, nobly, bravely. the patronage of the sing.), it falls out, it oc- 
 
 δεινδς, -η, -όν, fearful, ter- Muses,especially music. curs, it presents itself, 
 
 rible, dangerous ; τό όταν, to. subj., when, when- στασιάζω, to live at va 
 
 δεινόν, the danger. ever. riance with. 
 
 Αύο όδοι προς την πόλιν άγετον. Βόε το αροτρον αγετον. Χαΐρωμεν, ω παΐ 
 δες. Ώς ηδύ κάλλος, όταν έχτ\ νονν σώφρονα. ΟΊ πολϊται τους νόμους φνλατ- 
 τόντων. 'Εταίρος εταίρου φροντιζέτω. ΤΙατήρ τε καϊ μητηρ πρόνοιαν εχέτων 
 της των τέκνων παιδείας. Ό γραμμάτων άπειρος ου βλέπει βλέπων. Ύάς προς- 
 πιπτούσας τύχας γενναίως φέρε. Ό παις τω πατρϊ ρ'όδον φέρει, Ινα χαίρτ). Ό 
 παΐς τω πατρι ρ'όδον έφερεν, Ινα χαίροι. Σωκράτης ώςπερ εγίγνωσκεν, ούτως 
 ελεγεν. "Οτε οι "Έλληνες επλησίαζον, οι βάρβαροι άπέφευγον. Οεμιστοκ?*,ής 
 καϊ Αριστείδης ποτέ έστασιαζέτην. Αακεδαιμόνιοι μουσικής απείρως είχον. 
 Άποτρέποιτε, ω -&εοί, το δεινον αφ' ημών. Μη έτερον κεύϋ-οις καρδία νονν, 
 άλλα αγορεύων. 
 
 Two horses drawing (driving) the chariot, hasten. Two women sing. Let 
 us flee from vice. The boys study literature diligently, that their parents may 
 rejoice. The boys studied literature very diligently, that their parents might 
 rejoice. Let the citizen defend the laws. Let friends care for friends. Two 
 horses, drawing the chariot, hastened. Two women sang. Those who are un- 
 acquainted with literature do not see, when they see. Bear nobly the danger 
 which presents itself (part.), Ο citizens! You speak (so) as you think. We 
 were unacquainted with music. May the gods avert the danger from us ! 
 
88 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. [§ 84. 
 
 XXXVII. Vocabulary. 
 
 (b) First Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 
 Γυναικείος, -a, -ov, be- κατα-λύω, to loosen, de- about to do, delay; rb 
 longing to women, wo- stroy, dissolve. μέλλον, the future, 
 
 manly. κυριεύω, w. gen., to be or πολέμιος, -α, -ov, hostile, b 
 
 εν-δύω, to go into, put on. become master of, con- πολέμιος, the enemy. 
 ίπι-διώκω, to pursue. quer, obtain. προφητεύω, to prophesy. 
 
 κατα-δύω, to dip, go down, μάντις, -εως, ό, a seer, a φύω, to bring forth. Per/. 
 set, conceal oneself. prophet. to have become, be. 
 
 μέλλω, to intend or be 
 
 Ο'ι πολέμιοι έκατον πολίτας πεφονεύκάσιν. Φερεκύδης έλεγε, μηδενΐ -&εώ τε- 
 ■&υκέναι. Νέος πεφνκώς πολλά χρηστά μάνΰανε. Ό μάντις τα μέλλοντα κα- 
 λώς πεπροφήτενκεν. Ύά τέκνα εν πεπαίδευκας. Μήδεια τά τέκνα πεφονενκνΐα 
 εχαιρεν. Οι Αακεδαιμόνιοι Τίλαταιάς κατελελύκεσαν. Σαρδανάπάλος στολήν 
 γνναικείαν ενεδεδύκει. "Οτε ήλιος κατεδεδύκει, οι πολέμιοι έπλησίαζον. 'Αλέ- 
 ξανδρος επιδιώκων Ααρεΐον, τόν των ΤΙερσών βασιλέα, πολ?Μν χρημάτων έκεκν- 
 ριεύκει. 
 
 The sun has gone down (is set). The Lacedaemonians have destroyed Pla- 
 taea. "VVe admired the woman, who had put on (having put on) a purple robe 
 Diodorus (Αιόδωρος) says that Alexander (ace. w. inf.), pursuing Darius, ob- 
 tained many treasures. The enemies had killed 400 soldiers. Thy friend 
 had brought up his (the) children well. 
 
 XXXVIII. Vocabulary. 
 
 (c) First Future and Aorist Active. 
 "Άβλάβεια, -ας, η, inno- έκγονος, -ov, descendant, κινδυνεύω, to incur dan• 
 
 cence. descended from. ger, run a risk. 
 
 άμφω, both, ambo. ελπίζω, to hope, expect. μετά, w.gen., with ; w. acc. % 
 
 άννω, to complete, finish, έπαγγέλλω, to announce. after. 
 δάκρνον, -ov, τό, a tear. επι-βονλεύω, w. clat, to μηνίω', w. dot., to be angry 
 όια-λνω, to dissolve, sepa- plot against. with. 
 
 rate. έσχατος, -η, -ov (superl. of δτι, that, because. 
 
 δικάζω, to judge. εξ), outermost, utmost, πριν αν, w. subj., before, 
 
 δικαστής, -ov, b, a judge, last. ere, until. 
 
 a magistrate. ικετεύω, to ask, suppli- φντεύω, to plant. 
 
 είθε, w. opt, Ο that. cate, entreat. 
 
 Qi στρατιώται την πάλιν άπο των πολεμίων άπολύσονσιν. Ό χρηστός άν- 
 θρωπος και 1 τοις έκγάνοις φντεύσει. Έλπίζομεν πάντα εν άννσειν. Ό άγγε- 
 λος έπήγγελλε τοϊς πολίταις, δτι οι πολέμιοι τω στρατεύματι επιβονλεύσοιεν. 
 Άχιλλεϋς Άγαμέμνονι έμήνισεν. Οι "Ελληνες ανδρεία πο?\,λά Ισχυσαν. Ό Ύ>ω- 
 κοάτνς ονχ ίκέτενσε τονς δικαστάς μετά πολλών δακρύων, άλλα πιστενσαο τη 
 έαυτον άβλαβεία έκινΰννενσε τόν έσχατον κίνδννον. Τάς των φανλων σι νη&είας 
 
§ 84.] CONJUGATION OP THE VERB. 89 
 
 ολίγος χρόνος διέλνσεν. Uplv αν άμφοϊν μϋ&ον άκουσας, 1 μη δίκαζε. Οί Αακε- 
 δαιμόνιοι ΐίλαταιάς κατέλυσαν. Ύίς αν πιστεύσαι (πιστεύσειε) ψεύστη ; Ειϋε 
 πάντα καλώς άνύσαιμι. Άκονσαις (άκούσειάς) μον, 1 ω φίλε. Ό άγγελος έπήγ- 
 γε?Λεν, δτι ol πολέμιοι ττ} στρατιςί έπιβονλεύσαιεν (επιβουλενσειαν). "Ακου- 
 σον μου, ω φίλε. Έταϊρος έταίρφ πιστενσάτω. Την πόλιν λέγονσι αέγαν κίν- 
 δννον κινδυνενσαι. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. The particle αν denotes a condition either 
 expressed or to be supplied. 
 
 You will free the town from the enemies. Good men will plant also for 
 their descendants. He said, that the town would incur great danger. Achil- 
 les and Agamemnon were angry with (dual) one another. We entreated the 
 magistrates with many tears. Achilles killed Hector ("Εκτωρ, -ορός). Judge 
 not {pi.) before you have heard the account of both. Thou canst not trust (opt. 
 to. uv) a liar. May we complete (merely the opt.) everything well. Ο that you 
 would hear me, Ο friends ! May the soldiers free us from the enemies. Hear 
 me, Ο friends ! Friends should trust (imp.) friends. To command (aor.) is 
 easier than to do. Medea rejoiced in having murdered (aor. part.) her children. 
 
 XXXIX. Vocabulary, 
 
 (d) Present and Imperfect Middle or Passive. 
 Άδε/ψός, -ov, b, a brother, εργάζομαι, to work. πένομαι, to be poor. 
 
 άπο-δέχομαι, to receive, έρχομαι, to go, come. πράττω, to do, to act ; to. 
 
 admit, approve of. ήσυχος, quiet, quietly. adv., to fare. 
 
 αυλός, -ov, b, a flute. λαν&άνω, w. ace, to be στρατεύω, to make an ex- 
 
 kav = ην, or av, if, w. subj. concealed from, escape pedition ; Mid. to make 
 εγχώριος, -ov, and έγχώ- the notice of ; lateo, Md., war, march (in a hos 
 
 ριος, -a, -ov, native, of to forget. [die. tile manner). 
 
 the country. μέσος, middle, in the mid- ψεύδομαι, to lie. 
 
 Δύο άνδρε μάχεσϋ-ον. Τενναίως μαχώμε-&α 2 περί της πατρίδος. Άναγκαϊόν 
 έστι τόν νίον πείϋ-εσ-&αι τω πατρί. Πολλοί άγαϋοϊ πένονται. Νόμοις τοις έγ- 
 χωρίοις έπεσ&αι κα?ών εστίν. Μη άποδέχου των φίλων τους προς τα φαΰ?Λ σοι 
 χαριζομένονς. "Έκαστος ήσυχος μέσην την όδον ερχέσϋ-ω. Οί πολίται τοίς 
 νόμ'οις πεϊ&έσΰων. Τω αδελφώ μοι ίπεσΰον. Εί β ούλε ι κα?νώς πράττειν, 
 έργάζον. 'Εάν β ούλη καλώς πράττειν, έργάζου. Ψευδόμενος ουδείς ?Μν&ά- 
 νει πολνν χρόνον. ΟΊ Αακεδαιμόνιοι μετ* αΰ?,ών έστρατεύοντο. Eld -ε πάντες 
 ανεν οργής βονλεύοιντο. Αύο καλώ Ιππω εις την πόλιν ηλαννέσ&ην. 'Εάν 
 πένη, ολίγοι φίλοι. 
 
 The magistrate should consult without anger. He who goes (part.) the mid- 
 dle path, goes safest. Two beautiful horses are driven to the town. If (εάν) 
 warriors fight courageously, they are admired. We will not lie, but always 
 speak the truth. Sons should obey their fathers. With God and fate (αϊσα) 
 it is terrible to contend. Two men contended. The soldiers fought courage- 
 ously. Ο that every one would consult without anger ! Ο that thou wouldst 
 always worship the Deity ! 
 
 Μ 158, 5. (b). «§153, (a), (1). 
 
 8* 
 
90 CONJUGATION OP THE VERB. [§ 84. 
 
 XL. Vocabulary. 
 
 (e) Perfect and Pluperfect Middle or Passive. 
 
 Ακρα, -ας, ή, a summit, εμφυτεύω, to implant. λέγομαι, dicor, to be said, 
 
 a castle. ιδρύω, to build, found. ληστής, -ov, b, a robber. 
 
 ύτονομία, -ας, ή, freedom, κατα-κλείω, to shut, lock συν&ήκη, -ης, ή, a treaty 
 
 independent legislation. up. 
 
 Οι λησταϊ πεφόνεννται. Αύο άδελφω υπό τον αυτού διδασκάλου πεπαίδεν- 
 σ&ον. Ή βασίλεια υπό του δήμου λέλυται. Ύοΐς ΰεοΐς υπό των "'Αθηναίων 
 πολλοί νεω ΐδρυνται. Ή •&ύρα κεκλείσ&ω. ΊΙρο τον έργου ευ βεβούλευσο. 
 Πάσιν άν&ρώποις έμπεφυτευμένη εστίν επιθυμία της αυτονομίας. Οι λησταϊ 
 πεφονεύσ-&ων. Οί πολέμιοι εις την άκραν κατακεκλεΐσΰ-αι λέγονται. Ξενοφών- 
 τος υίώ, Τρύλλος καϊ Αιόδωρος, έπεπαιδεύσΰ-ην εν Σπάρτη. Αϊ συν&ηκαι υπό 
 των βαρβάρων ελέλυντο. 
 
 The robber has been murdered. The children of the friend have been well 
 brought up. The doors are said to have been shut. Before the work, you have 
 deliberated well. Good and bad desires have been implanted in men. The 
 treaties are said to have been violated by the barbarians. The two children 
 have been brought up by the same teacher. The royal authority had been abol- 
 ished by the people. 
 
 XLI. Vocabulary. 
 (f) Future and first Aor. Mid., and Put. Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Άνα-παύω, to cause to έπιτηδεύω, to manage, πορεύω, to lead forward; 
 
 rest ; Mid. to rest, re- transact with diligence, Mid. to go, march, set 
 
 cover oneself. practise. out (w. pass, aorist). 
 
 γεύω (τινά τίνος), to give πολιτεία, -ας, ή, the state, πύλη, -ης, ή, a gate (usu- 
 
 any one a taste of any- the administration. ally in the plural). 
 
 thing ; mid. w. gen., to 
 
 taste, enjoy. 
 
 Ο/ πολέμιοι επί την ήμετέραν πάλιν στρατεύσονται. ΤίερΙ της των πο?ατών 
 σωτηρίας βουλευσόμεΰ-α. Ό πατήρ μοι έλεγεν, 'ότι πορεύσοιτο. Οί "Έλληνες 
 έπϊ τους Τίέρσας έστρατεύσαντο. Άναπαυσωμε'&α,' 1 ω φίλοι. Tlpd τον έργον 
 ευ βούλευσαι. ΤΙάντες τιμής 2 γεύσασϋ-αι βούλονται. Ό πατήρ άναπανσάμενος 
 πορεύσεται. Αϊ πνλαι της νυκτός 3 κεκλείσονται. Έάν τοιούτος άνήρ την πο- 
 λιτείαν επιτηδεύη, αυτή ευ βεβονλεύσεται. 
 
 You will deliberate about the safety of the citizens. The messenger an- 
 ounced (έπαγγέλλω), that the enemies would march against our town. The 
 general enjoyed a great honor. If (εάν, w. subj.) the enemies shall have been 
 led (πορεύω, subj. aor.) against us, the gates of the town will remain (have been) 
 closed. Before the work, deliberate well (pi.). In (εν) such a danger it is not 
 easy to deliberate (aor.). If you have deliberated, (aor. particip.) begin the work. 
 
 1 §153, (a), (I). 2 § 158, 5. (a). 3 §158, 4. 
 
§ 85.] VERBS. — AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 91 
 
 XLII. Vocabulary. 
 (g) First .Aorist and first Future Passive. 
 
 Δτιαοκρατία, -ας, ?), the μη after verbs of fear, w. iu ne, to be translated 
 
 rule of the people, de- subj., if a pres., perf. or by ' that ' or ' lest.' 
 
 mocracy. fut. goes before ; w. opt., πολέμιος, -ΰ, -ov, hostile 
 
 έπι-φέρω, to bring upon ; if an historical tense of the enemy. 
 
 πόλεμόν τινι, helium in- goes before ; as the Lat- τίφαννος -ov, b, a sove- 
 fero. reign, a tyrant. 
 
 Ό "Έκτωρ υπό τον 'λ,χιλλέως έφονενΰη. Τώ άδελφώ νπό τον αντον διδασκά- 
 λου έπαιδεν&?)την. Πολλαϊ δημοκρατίαι νπό των τυράννων κατε/άΰησαν. Μέ- 
 γας φόβος τους πολίτας έχει, μη αϊ συν&ηκαι νπό των πο7,εμιων λ,υΰώσιν. Εί#ε 
 πάντες νεανίαΐ καλώς παιδενϋεΐεν. Φονεύΰητι, ω κακούργε. Οι στρατιώται 
 εις την πολεμίαν γην πορευϋ-ηναι λέγονται. ΟΙ πολέμιοι, των συνθηκών λυ- 
 ΰεισων? ήμϊν πό?.εμον έπιψέρονσιν. Ό ληστής φονεν&ήσεται. 
 
 You were both educated by the same teacher. We were freed [άπολνω) from 
 a great danger. I fear much (a great fear holds me), that the friend, who set 
 off [paiticip.) six days ago, has been murdered bv robbers. I feared much, that 
 you had been murdered by robbers. The two robbers are said to be killed. 
 The youth is said to be well brought up. The treaties are said to have been 
 violated by the enemies. Well brought up youths arc esteemed by all. The 
 robbers will be killed. 
 
 §85. Λ more particular view of the Augment and 
 Red up lication. 
 
 After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication (§ 77, 
 3 and 4), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 
 
 As has been already seen, all the historical tenses, viz. the Impf., 
 Plup. and Aor., take the augment, but retain it only in the Indica- 
 tive. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal. 
 
 (a) Syllabic Augment. 
 
 1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem be- 
 gins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing ε to the stem, in the 
 Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication, in the Pluperfect. In 
 this way, the verb is increased by one syllable ; e. g. βονλεύω, Impf. 
 ε-βονλενον, Aor. ε-βονλενσα, Plup. ε-βε-βονλενχειν. 
 
 2. If the stem begins with ρ, this letter is doubled when the aug- 
 ment is prefixed (§8, 12); e. g. ρίπτω, to throw, Impf. εοοιπτον, 
 Aor, ερριψα. 
 
 Gen. absolute, like the Abl. absolute in Latin. 
 
92 VERBS. — TEMPORAL AUGMENT. [§§ 86, 87. 
 
 Rem. 1. The three verbs βονλομαι, to will, δύναμαι, to be able, and 
 μέλ?*ω, to be about to do, among the Attic writers take η, instead of ε, for the 
 augment ; still this is found more with the later Attic writers, than with the 
 earlier ; e. g. Aor. εβονλήϋ-ην and ηβονλη-&ην ; Impf. έδννάμην and ήδννάμην, 
 Aor. εδυνηϋ-ην and ηδννη-Θ-ην (but always έδννάσ&ην) ; Impf. ε/ζελλον and 
 ήμελ?^ον (the Aor. is very seldom ημέλλησα). 
 
 Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers the augment ε is often omitted in the Plup. 
 of compounds, for example, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- 
 ples, when a ^ 
 δεδραμήκεσαν. 
 
 §86. (b) Te?nporal Augment. 
 The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 
 with a vowel, and consists in lengthening the first stem- vowel ; in 
 this way the quantity of the syllable is increased ; 
 
 a becomes 
 ε " 
 
 η, e. g. "α/ω 
 η, " ελπίζω 
 
 Impf. ^yov 
 " ηλπιζον 
 
 Perf 
 
 %'α Plup 
 ήλττικα " 
 
 ήλττίκειν 
 
 I 
 
 I, " Ικετεύω 
 
 α 
 
 Ίκετενον 
 
 " 
 
 Ίκέτενκα " 
 
 Ίκετενκειν 
 
 
 
 ν " 
 
 ω, " όμιλέω 
 ν, " 'υβρίζω 
 
 << 
 (( 
 
 ώμίλονν 
 
 "νβριζον 
 
 (« 
 
 ώμίληκα " 
 "ϋβρίκα " 
 
 ώμίληκειν 
 'νβρίκειν 
 
 ai " 
 
 av " 
 
 η, " αίρέω 
 ην, " ανλέω 
 
 
 jjpovv 
 ηνλουν 
 
 « 
 
 φρηκα " 
 ηνληκα "■ 
 
 ήρήκειν 
 ηϋληκειν 
 
 OL « 
 
 ω, " οίκτίζω 
 
 » 
 
 ώκτιζον 
 
 " 
 
 φκτικα " 
 
 φκτίκειν. 
 
 Remark. Verbs which begin with ??, ί, t>, ω, ot> and εί, do not admit the aug- 
 ment ; e.g.ήττάoμaί,tobe overcome, Impf. ηττώμην, Perf. ήττημαι, Plup. ^Trj7- 
 ^τ?ν ; Ίτϊόω, to press, Aor. "ίπωσα ; '£> π ν ό ω, ίο ZmS to sfep, Aor. "ύπνωσα ; ώ ε- 
 λέω, #ο benefit, Impf. ώόέλονν ; ο ν τάζω, to wound, Impf. ονταζον ; ει κ ω, ίο 
 yield, Impf. εΖ /cov, Aor. ε?£ α ; εικάζω, to liken, is an exception, which among 
 the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented ; e. g. είκαζον, seldom γκαζόν, 
 είκασα, seldom ήκασα, είκασμαι, seldom ψιασμαι. Also those verbs whose stem 
 begins with ευ, usually take no augment ; e. g. εύχομαι, to supplicate, εύχόμην, 
 more rarely r /νχόμην, but Perf. ηνγμαι, not ευγμαι ; ευρίσκω, to find, in good 
 prose, always omits the augment. 
 
 §87. Remarks on the Augment. 
 
 1. Verbs beginning with a followed by a vowel, have a instead of η ; but 
 those beginning with a, av and οι followed by a vowel, do not admit the aug- 
 ment; e. g. 'at ω, to perceive (poetic), Impf. *αϊον ; 'άηδίζο μ α ι, to be dis- 
 gusted with, Impf. 'αηδίζόμην ; αναίνω, to dry, Impf. αναινον ; ο'ιακίζω, to 
 steer, Impf. οίάκιζον ; also αναλίσκω, to destroy, although no vowel follows a, has 
 ανάλωσα, άνάλωκα, as well as ανηλωσα, άνήλωκα. But οϊομαι, to believe, always 
 takes the augment ; e. g. ώόμην. 
 
 2. Some verbs, also, beginning with οι followed by a consonant, do not take 
 the augment ; e. g. ο i κ ο υ ρ ε ω, to guard the house, Aor. οίκον ρη σα. 
 
 8, The eleven following verbs, beginning with ε, have εί instead of η, for the 
 augment, viz. ε ά ω, to permit, Impf. είων, Aor. ειασα ; έΰίζω, to accustom, (to 
 which belongs also εϊωΰ-α, to be accustomed) ; είσάμην A.or. (stem ΈΔ). Its• 
 
§ 88.J VERBS. REDUPLICATION. 93 
 
 tablished, founded ; ελίσσω, to wind; έλκω, to draw; Aor. εΐ?.κϋσα (stem 
 ΈΛΚΥ); είλον, to take, Aor. (stem ΈΛ) of αίρέω ; έπομαι, to follow; ερ- 
 γάζομαι, to work; Ι ρ πω, έρπυζω, to creep, to go; έστιάω, to entertain; 
 έχω, to have. 
 
 4. The following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, augment : 
 ά γ ν ν μ ι, to break, Aor. εαξα, etc. 
 
 άλίσκομαι, capior, Peif. έάλωκα and ηλωκα. 
 
 ώΰ-έω, to push, εώϋονν, etc. 
 
 ων ε ο μα ι, to buy, Impf. εωνονμην, Perf. έώνημαι. 
 
 5. The verb εορτάζω, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second 
 syllable, Impf. έώρταζυν. The same is true of the following forms of the Plu- 
 perfect : 
 
 ΕΙΚΩ, second Perf. lorna, I am like, Plup. έφκειν. 
 ελπομαι, to hope, second Perf. έο?,πα, I hope, Plup. έ ω λ π ε ι ν. 
 ΕΡΓΪ2, to do, second Perf. έοργα, Plup. έώργειν. 
 
 6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the 
 earn e time: 
 
 όράω, to see, Impf. έώρων, Perf. έώρακα, έώραμαι. 
 
 ανοίγω, to open, Impf. άνέωγον, Aor. άνέωξα (Inf. άνοϊξαι), etc. 
 
 άλίσκομαι, to be taken, Aor. έάλων (Inf. ά?*ώναι, a) and ήλων. 
 
 §88. Reduplication. 
 
 1. Reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
 stem with ε. It denotes a completed action, and hence is prefixed 
 to the Perf., e. g. λε-λνκα, I have loosed; to the Fut. Perf., e. g. 
 κε-κοσμήοομαι, I shall he adorned, from κοσμε'ω ; and to the Plup., 
 which as a historical tense, takes also the augment ε before the re- 
 duplication ; e. g. ε-βε-βονλενκειν. It remains in all the modes, as 
 well as in the Inf. and Part. 
 
 2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem begins 
 with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; verbs beginning 
 with q, γν, γλ, βλ,* (except βε'βλαφα, βεβλαμμαι from βλάπτω, to 
 injure, βεβλασφημηκα from βλααψημέω, to blaspheme, βεβλάστηκα 
 and εβλάστηκα from βλαστάνω, to sprout,) are exceptions, inasmuch 
 as they take only the simple augment ; e. g. 
 
 λνω, to loose, 
 
 Perf. λε-λνιμζ 
 
 Plup. k -λε-λνκειν 
 
 ■&ί•ω, to sacrifice, 
 
 " τέ-ϋνκα (§ 8, 10.) 
 
 " ε-τε-'&νχειν 
 
 φυτεύω, to plant, 
 
 " πε-ψντενκα (§ 8, 10.) 
 
 " έ-πε-φυτεύκειν 
 
 χορεύω, to dance, 
 
 " κε-χόρενκα (§ 8, 10.) 
 
 " ε-κε-χορεύκειν 
 
 γράφω, to write, 
 
 " γε-γραφα 
 
 μ έ-γε-γράφειν 
 
 κλίνω, to bend, 
 
 " κε- κλίκα 
 
 " ί-κε-κλίκειν 
 
 κρίνω, to judge, 
 
 " κε-κρικα 
 
 " έ-κε-κρίκειν 
 
 * Such verbs are excepted on account of the difficulty of repeating these 
 letters.— Tr. 
 
ζη'λόω, to emulate, 
 
 Perf. ε-ζηλωκα 
 
 ξενόω, to entertain, 
 
 " ε-ξένωκα 
 
 ψάλλω, to sing, 
 
 " έ-ψαλκα 
 
 σπείρω, to soiv, 
 
 " έ-σπαρκα 
 
 κτίζω, to build, 
 
 u έ-κτικα 
 
 πτύσσω, to fold, 
 
 " έ-πτνχα 
 
 94 VERBS. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [§ 89. 
 
 πνέω, to breathe, Perf. πέ-πνευκα Plup. ε-πε-πνεύκειν 
 ■&λάω, to bruise, " τέ-ΰλακα (§ 8, 10.) " ε-τε-ΰλάκειν 
 
 ρ"ίπτω, to throw, " έρρΊψα " έββίφειν 
 
 γνωρίζω, to make knoum, " έ-γνώρικα " έ-γνωρίκειν 
 
 βλακεύω, to be slothful, " έ-βλάκενκα " ε-βλακεύκειν 
 
 γλύψω, to carve, " έ-γλνφα " ε-γλύφειν. 
 
 3. The reduplication is not used (beside the above cases of verbs 
 beginning with ρ, y*•, βλ, /λ), when the stem of the verb begins 
 with a double consonant or two single consonants, which are not a 
 mute and liquid ; e. g. 
 
 Plup. έ-ζηλώκειν 
 " έ-ξενώκειν 
 " έ-ψάλκειν 
 " έ-σπάρκειν 
 " έ-κτίκείν 
 " έ^τύχειν. 
 
 Rem. 1. The two verbs μιμνήσ κ ω (stem ΜΝΑ), to remind, and κτάομαι, 
 to acquire, take the reduplication, although their stem begins with two conso- 
 nants, which are not a mute and a liquid : μέ-μνημαι, κέ-κτημαι, ε-με-μνημην, 
 k -κε-κτήμην. 
 
 4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this letter, 
 
 but take ει for the augment : 
 
 λαμβάνω, to take, Perf. εϊληφα Plup. ειληώειν 
 
 λαγχάνω, to obtain, " εϊληχα " είληχειν 
 
 λέγω, σν?,λέγω, to collect, " σννείλοχα " συνειλόχειν 
 
 'ΡΕΩ, to say, " είρηκα " είρήκειν 
 
 μείρομαι, to obtain^ " ειμ,αρται (with rough Breathing), it is fated. 
 
 Rem. 2. Διαλέγομαι, to converse, has Perf. διεί?\,εγμαι, though the 
 simple λέγω in the sense of to say, always takes the regular reduplication, λέλεγ- 
 μαι, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting). 
 
 §89. Attic Beduplication. 
 Several verbs, beginning with α, ε or o, repeat, in the Perf. 
 and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of the 
 stem. This augmentation is called the Attic Reduplication. The 
 Plup. then very rarely takes an additional augment; ψ/,ηκόειν has 
 the regular Attic reduplication. 
 
 (a) Verbs whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : 
 
 άρόω, -ω, to plough, έλάω (έλαύνω), to drive, 
 
 άρ-ήροκα άρ-ήρομαι ελ-ήλακα έλ-ηλαμαι 
 
 άρ-ηρόκειν άρ-ηρόμην έλ-ηλάκειν ελ-ηλάαην 
 
 ελέγχω, to convince, όρύττω, to dig, 
 
 έλ-ήλεγχα ελ-ηλεγμαι δρ-ώρνχα ορ-ωρυγμαι 
 
 ίλ-ηλέγχειν έλ-ηλέγμην δρ-ωρύχειν όρ-ωρνγμην 
 
 (b) Verbs which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel long 
 
§ 90.] VERBS. AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 00 
 
 by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication (except 
 ερείδω, to prop, ερήρειχα, ερήρεισμαι) : 
 
 αλείφω, to anoint, ακούω, to hear, 
 
 άλ-ήλιφα άλ-ήλιμμαί ακ-ηκοα ήκουσμαί 
 
 άλ-ηλίφείν αλ-ηλίμμην ηκ-ηκόειν ηκονσμην 
 
 άγείρω, to collect, εγείρω, to awaken, 
 
 αγ-ηγερκα άγ-ήγερμαι ky -ηγερκα εγ-ηγ ερμαι 
 
 άγ-ηγέρκειν αγ-ηγέρμην έγ-ηγέρκειν 'εγ-ηγ ε ρ μην. 
 
 Remark. The verb άγω, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
 φέρω, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication, with this difference, 
 however, that the vowel of the reduplication takes the temporal augment only 
 in the Ind., and the vowel of the stem remains pure : 
 
 ά γ ω, to lead, Aor. II. ήγ-αγον, Inf. άγαγεΐν, Aor. II. Mid. ηγαγδμην. 
 
 φέρω, to carry (stem ΈΓΚ), Aor. Π. ην-ε^/κον, Inf. εν-εγκεϊν, Αοτ.Ι,ήν- 
 εγκα, Inf. έν-έγκαι, Aor. Pass, ην-έχ&ην, Inf. εν-εχ&ήναι. 
 
 §90. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 
 
 Words. 
 
 1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the aug- 
 ment and reduplication between the preposition and the verb ; then 
 prepositions which end with a vowel, except περί and προ, suffer 
 Elision (§ 6, 3) ; ττρό frequently combines with the augment by 
 means of Crasis (§ 6, 2), and becomes προν, and εν and avv resume 
 their ν which had been assimilated, or dropped, or changed ; e. g. 
 
 άπο-βάλ?Μ, to throw from, ΊχαΛπ-έβαλλον ~Ρί.άτ:ο-βέβληκα ΈΊρ.άττ-εβεβλήκείν 
 
 περι,-βάλλω, to throw around, περι-έβαλλον περι-βέβ?«ηκα περί-εβεβλήκειν 
 
 -ρο-βάλ?.ω, to throw before, ττρο-έβα?>,?ων ττρο-βέβ/.ηκα προ-εβεβλήκει,ν 
 
 προνβα?>.λον προύβεβλήκειν 
 
 ίμ-βάλλω, to throw in, εν-έβαλλον έμ-βέβληκα εν-εβεβ?*ήκειν 
 
 εγ-γίγνομαι, to be in, εν-εγιγνόμην έγ-γέγονα έν-εγεγόνειν 
 
 συ-σκενάζω, to pack up, συν-εσκεναζον συν-εσκενακα σνν-εσκενάκειν 
 
 σνβ-βίπτω, to throw together, συν-έβρ'ίπτον σνν-έβρΊφα συν-εβρΊφείν 
 
 σνλ-λέγω, to collect together, σνν-έλεγον σνν-είλοχα ανν-ειλόχειν 
 
 2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with δνς take the augment 
 and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem of the sim- 
 ple verb begins with a consonant or a vowel which does not admit 
 the temporal augment ; (b) but in the middle, when the stem of the 
 simple verb begins with a vowel which admits the temporal aug- 
 ment ; e. g. 
 
 δνς-τνχέω, to be vrforiunate, ε-δνςτίχονν δε-δνςτνχηκα ε-δε-δνςτνχήκείν 
 
 δυς-ωπέω, to make ashamed, ε-δυςώπονν 
 
 ι'νς-αρεστέω, to be displeased, δνς-'ηρέστονν δνς-ηρέστηκα. 
 
 Verbs compounded with tv may take the augment and reduplica- 
 tion at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit 
 them at the beginning, and ενεργετέοι usually in the middle ; e. g. 
 
96 VERBS. — AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. [§§ 91, 92» 
 
 εν-τνχέω, to be fortunate, ηϋ-τύχουν, commonly εύ-τΰχουν 
 
 εν-ωχέομαι, to feast well, εύ-ωχονμην 
 
 εν-εργετέω, to do good, εύ-ηργέτουν, Perf. εν-ηργέτηκα, commonly ευ- 
 
 εργετούν, εϋ-εργέτηκα. 
 
 3. Third rule. All other compounds take the augment and re- 
 duplication at the beginning ; e. g. 
 
 μν&ολογέω, to relate, εμν&ολόγονν μεμν&ολόγηκα 
 
 οίκοδομέω, to build, ώκοδόμουν ώκοδόμηκα. 
 
 § 91. Remarks. 
 
 1. The six following words compounded with prepositions, take the augment 
 in hoth places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- 
 tion: 
 άμπέχομαι, to clothe oneself, Impf. ήμπειχόμην or άμπειχ. Aor. ημπεσχόμην 
 
 ηνειχομην " ηνεσχομην 
 
 ημφεγνόονν and ημφιγν. 
 
 ηνώρϋ-ονν Perf. ΐ/νώρΰωκα " ήνώρ&ωσα 
 
 ηνώχλουν " ηνώχληκα " ηνωχλησα 
 
 έπαρωνονν " πεπαρώνηκα " έπαρώνησα. 
 
 ανέχομαι, to endure, 
 αμφιγνοέω, to be uncertain, 
 άνορ-&όω, to raise up, 
 ενοχλέω, to molest, 
 παροινέω, to not, 
 
 2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not com- 
 pounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, viz. 
 
 διαιτάω (from δίαιτα, food), (a) to feed, (b) to be a judge, Impf. εδιήτων and 
 
 διήτων, Perf. δεδιήτηκα. 
 διακονέω, to serve (from διάκονος, servant), Impf. εδιηκόνουν and διηκόνουν, 
 
 Perf. δεδιηκόνηκα. 
 άμφισβητέω (from ΑΜΦΙΣΒΗΤΗΣ, to dispute), Impf. ημφεσβητονν and ημ- 
 
 φισβητονν. 
 
 3. Exceptions to the first rule (§ 90, 1). There are several verbs compound- 
 ed with prepositions, which take the augment before the preposition, since they 
 have nearly the same signification as the simple verbs ; e. g. 
 
 αμφιγνοέω (νοεω), to be uncertain, Impf. ημφιγνόουν or ημφεγνόονν (No. 1) 
 
 άμφιέννυμι, to clothe, Aor. ημφίεσα, Perf. ήμφίεσμαι 
 
 έπίσταμαι, to know, - Impf. ήπιστάμην 
 
 καΰίζω, to cause to sit, " έκάΰιζον, Perf. κεκάϋ-ικα 
 
 καθίζομαι, to sit, " έκαΰεζόμην and καϋ-εζ. (without Aug.) 
 
 κάϋημαι, to sit, " εκαϋήμην arid κα&ημην (without Aug.) 
 
 καϋ-εύδω, ίο sleep, " έκά&ευδον, seldom κα&ηνδον. 
 
 4. Those verbs form an apparent exception to the first rule (§ 90, 1), which 
 are not formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by 
 derivation from a word already compounded (Comp. No. 2) ; e. g. 
 
 εναντιοϋμαι, to oppose oneself to, from ενάντιος Impf. ήναντιούμην 
 
 άντιδικέω, to defend at law, " αντίδικος " ηντιδίκουν 
 
 έμπεδόω, to establish, " εμπεδος " ημπέδουν. 
 
 § 92. Division of Verbs in -ω according to the Characteristic, to- 
 gether with Remarks on the Formation of the Tenses. 
 Verbs in -ω are divided into two principal classes, according to 
 the different nature of the characteristic (§ 77, 5) : 
 
93.] 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 
 
 97 
 
 I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these are again 
 divided into two classes : 
 
 A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, except 
 α, ε, o; e. g. παιδεν-ω, to educate, λν-ω, to loose ; 
 
 B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is either α, ε or ο ; e. g. 
 τψά-ω, to honor, φιλε-ω, to love, μισ&ό-ω, to let. 
 
 II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant ; these are 
 again divided into two classes : 
 
 A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine mutes ; 
 e. g. λείττ-ω, to leave, τζλε'κ-ω, to twine, πείϋ--ω, to persuade; 
 
 B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four liquids, 
 λ, μ, ν, ρ ; e. g. άγγέλλ-ω, to announce? νέμ-ω, to divide, 
 <ραίν-ω, to show? φ&είρ-ω, to destroy. 
 
 Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., all 
 verbs are divided into, 
 
 (a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not ac- 
 cented ; e. g. λν-ω, ηλέκ-ίύ, etc. ; 
 
 (b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumfiexed in the first Pers. ; 
 are consequently contract verbs ; e. g. τιμώ, ψίλώ, μοσϋ-ω. 
 
 §93. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs. 
 
 1. In pure verbs, both Barytones and Perispomena, the tense- 
 endings are commonly appended to the unchanged characteristic ; 
 e. g. βονλεν -eoj, βεβονλεν-κα. Pure verbs do not form the Second- 
 ary tenses, but only the Primary tenses ; the Perf. with κ (κα), the 
 Fut. and Aor. with σ (σω, σα). Pure verbs, however, are subject 
 to the following regular change in the stem : 
 
 2. The short characteristic-vowel of the Pres. and Impf., both in 
 Barytones and Perispomena, is lengthened in the other tenses. The 
 Barytones will first be considered, thus : 
 
 ϊ into I, e. g. μ?]ν-ίω, μηνΐ-σω, ε-μήνΐ-σα, etc. ; 
 ν into ν, e. g. κωλν-ω, κω?.ν-σω, κε-κώλν-μαί. 
 
 κωλνω, to hinder. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Ind. κω?^ν-ω Subj. κωλν-ω Imp. κώλϋ-ε Inf. κωλν -etv Part, κωλν-ων 
 Ind. ε-κώλν-ον Opt, κωλν-οψί 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plup. 
 
 Ind. κε-κωΓκν-κα Inf. κε-κωλν-κεναι Part, κε-κωλϋ-κώ 
 Ind. ε-κε-κωλν-κειν 
 
 :ως 
 
 Put. 
 Aor. 
 
 Ind. κω/ιύ-σω Opt. κωλν-σοιμι Inf. κωλν-σειν Part, κωλν-σων 
 
 Ind. ε-κωλν-σα Subj. κωλν-σω Opt. κωλν-σαιμι 
 
 Imp. κ.ω?„ν-σον Inf. κωλν-σαι Part, κωλν-σας. 
 
 _ — 
 
98 
 
 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 
 
 [§94. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Ind. κωλύ-ομαι Subj. κωλύ-ωμαι Imp. κωλύ-ου Inf. κωλύ-εσ$αι 
 
 
 Part, κωλϋ-όμενος 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. έ-κωλϋ-όμην Opt. κω7ώ-οίμην 
 
 Perf. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 Ind. κε-κώλϋ-μαι 
 
 Imperative 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 
 2. 
 
 κε-κώλΰ-σαι 
 
 κε-κώλΰ-σο 
 
 κε-κωλΰ-σιίαί 
 
 
 3. 
 
 κε-κώλϋ -rac 
 
 κε-κω/Ιύ-σΦω 
 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 κε-κωλύ-με&ον 
 
 
 Participle 
 
 
 2. 
 
 κε-κώλυ-σ&ον 
 
 /£ε-/ίώλυ-σ^ον 
 
 κε-κωλϋ-μένος 
 
 
 3. 
 
 κε-κώλυ-σ&ον 
 
 κε-κωλ/ύ-σι^ω^ 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 κε-κωλύ-μεΰα 
 
 
 κε-κωλΰ- μένος ω 
 
 
 2. 
 
 κε-κώλυ-σϋ-ε 
 
 /ίε-ζοώλν-σΦε 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 κε-κώλυ-νται 
 
 κε-κω7ώ-σ-&ωσαν or κε-Λ:ω/Ιί>-σ#ων] 
 
 Plup. 
 
 S. 1. έ-κε-κωλύ-μην D. έ-κε-κωλύ-^μεΰ-ον P. έ-κε-κωλύ-μεΰ-α Opt. /ce- 
 
 Ind. 
 
 2. έ-κε-κώλΰ-σο έ-κε-κώλυ-σ&ον έ-κε-κώλυ-σΦε [κωλν-μέ 
 
 3. έ-κε-κώλΰ-το έ-κε-κωλύ-σΰην k -κε-κώλυ-ντο [νος εϊην 
 
 
 Put. 
 
 Ind. κωλύ-σομαι Opt. κωλϋσοίμην Inf. κωλύ-σεσ&αι Part, κωλΰ- 
 
 
 σομενοο 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Ind. ε-κωλϋ-σάμην Subj. κωλύ-σωμαι Opt. κωλϋ-σαίμην Imp. 
 
 
 κωλϋ-σαι Inf. κωλύ-σασΰ-αι Part, κωλϋ-σάμενος. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Ind. έ-κωλν-ϋ-ην Subj. κωλϋ-ϋ-ώ Opt. κωλϋ--&είην 
 
 
 Imp. κωλύ-ΰ-ητι Inf. κωλϋ-ΰήναι Part. κωλϋ-ΰείς 
 
 Put. 
 
 Ind. κωλϋ-ΰήσομαι Opt. κωλϋ-ΰησοίμην Inf. κωλϋ--&ήσεσ-&αι 
 
 
 Part, κωλϋ-ΰησόμενος. 
 
 § 94. Ferfo which, contrary to the rule, retain the short Character- 
 istic-vowel in forming the Tenses. 
 
 1. Several pure verbs, contrary to the rule (§ 93, 2), retain the short charac- 
 teristic-vowel, either in all the tenses, or at least in some tenses. Most of these 
 verbs take a σ in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and in the first Aor. Pass. This is 
 indicated by the phrase, Pass, with σ (see § 95). Thus: 
 
 Χρΐω, to pick, Fut. χρίσω, Aor. έχρϊσα, Inf. χρίσαι. Pass, with σ ; (but χρίω, 
 to anoint, Put. χρίσω, Aor. έχρισα, Inf. χρϊσαι, Aor. Mid. εχρ'ισάμην ; Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass, κέχρισμαι, κεχρϊσΰ-αι ; Aor. Pass, έχρίσΰ-ην). 
 
 Άνύω, to complete, Put. άνϋσω ; Aor. ηννσα. Pass, with σ. 
 
 apt ω, to draw water, Put. άρϋσω ; Aor. ήρνσα. Pass, with <r. 
 
 « # ω, <o c?ose, e. g. ifte e?/es, Put. μΰσω, Aor. έμΰσα ; but Perf. μέμϋκα, I am shut, 
 am silent. 
 
 π τΰ ω, to spit, Put. πτύσω ; Aor. έπτυσα. Pass, with σ. 
 
 Ι δρυ ω, to cause to sit, Put. Ιδρύσω ; Aor. Ιδρυσα (later ιδρύσω, Ιδρυσα)', Aor. 
 Pass. ΊδρύΦην. 
 
 2. The following dissyllables in -ΰω lengthen the short characteristic-vowel 
 in the Put. and Aor. Act. and Mid., and δύω also in the Perf. and Plup. Act., 
 but they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plup. Act. (except δύω), also 
 in the Mid. or Pass., and in the Aor. and Put. Pass. : 
 
 δύω, to wrap up, Put. δύσω Aor. έδυσα Perf. δέδνκα δέδΰμαι, Aor. Pass, έδύ&ην 
 ■&ύ ω, to sacrifice, " -&ύσω " έ&ϋσα " τέ&ϋκα τέϋύμαι " " έτύ&ην 
 λύω, to loose, " λύσω " έλυσα " λέλϋκα λέ?,ϋμαι " " έλύ&ην 
 
δ 95.] 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE Λ ERBS. 
 
 99 
 
 Re»laek. When the vowel in the Fut. Act. is long, and short in the Peif. 
 Mid. or Pass., the Put. Perf. resumes the long vowel, both in uncontracted verbs 
 and in contract pure verbs ; e. g. λύω, λελνσομαι. 
 
 § 95. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and Perf. and Plup. 
 Mid. or Pass, with a. 
 
 1. Pure verbs which retain the short characteristic- vowel of the stem in form- 
 ing the tenses, insert σ (Comp. § 94) before the tense-ending -&ην, -μαι, etc. in 
 the Aor. and Put. Pass., and in the Perf. a»d Plup. Mid. or Pass. ; this σ con- 
 nects the endings to the tense-stem ; e. g. 
 
 τελέ-ω έ-τελέ-σ-ϋ-ην τε-τέλε-σ-μαι 
 
 τελε-σ-ϋ-ήσομαί h -τε-τελέ-σ-μην. 
 
 2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have a long character- 
 istic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen it in forming the tenses, take the same forma- 
 tion ; e. g. ακούω, to hear, Aor. ήκού-σ-ΰ-ην, Fut. ΰκον-σ-ΰήσομαι, Perf. ηκου-σ• 
 μαι, Plup. ηκού-σ•μην ; εν αν ω, to kindle; κελεύω, to command; κν?αω, to roll; 
 λεύω, to stone; ξύω, to scrape; πρίω, to saw; σείω, to shake; χρίω, to anoint (§ 94) ; 
 ψαύω, to touch, etc. 
 
 κελενω, to command. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Pres. κελεύ-ω 
 Impf. h -κέλεν-ον 
 
 Perf. κε-κέλεν-κα 
 Plup. ε-κε-κελεύ-κειν 
 
 Put. κελεύ-σω 
 Aor. έ-κέλευ-σα. 
 
 MIDDLE 
 
 Present 
 
 Perf. S. 1. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 D 
 
 κε?ι,εύ-ομαί 
 
 Impf. ε-κελεν-όμην 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σ-μαο 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σαο 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σ -rat 
 
 κε-κελεύ-σ-μεϋον 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σ&ον 
 
 κε-κέλευ-σΰον 
 
 κε-κελεύ-σ-με&α 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σ&ε 
 
 κε-κελευ-σ-μένοί είσί 
 
 Imperative 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σο 
 κε-κελεύ-σΰ-ω 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σ&ον 
 κε-κελεύ-σΰων 
 
 κε-κέλεν-σΰε 
 
 Infinitive 
 κε-κελεν-σ&αί 
 
 Participle 
 κε-κελεν-σ-μένος 
 
 Subjunctive 
 κε-κελεν-σ-μένος ω 
 
 κε-κελεύ-σϋ-ωσαν or κε-κελεύ-σβ-ων\ 
 
 Plup. S. 1. 
 
 Ind. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 έ-κε-κελεύ-σ-μην D. ε-κε-κελεύ-σ-μεϋον Ρ. ε-κε-κελεύ-σ-μεΰα 
 έ-κε-κέλεν-σο έ-κε-κέλευ-σΰον έ-κε-κέλεν•σΰε 
 
 έ-κε-κελεύ-σΰην κε-κελευ-σ-μένοι ήσαν 
 
 ε-κε-κεΑευ-σ-το 
 
 Opt. 
 
 κε-κελεν-σ-μένος είην 
 
 Future 
 
 κελενσομαί Fut. Perf. κε-κελεύ-σομαι Aor. ε-κελεν-σάμην. 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 Aorist 
 
 k -κελεύ-σ-ΰην Future κελεν-σ-ΰ-ήσομαί. 
 
 Rem. 1. Some vary between the regular formation and that with σ. 
 ■d -ραύ ω, to break in pieces, τέ&ρανσμαί and τέΰρανμαι, έ-&ραύσ-&ην 
 κλείω, to shut, κέκλεισμαι and Att. κέκλημαι ; Aor. έκ?ιείσΰ-ην. 
 κρούω, to strike upon, κέκρονμαι and κέκρονσμαι ; Aor. έκρούσ&ην. 
 Rem. 2. Some contrary to the rule, do not take σ, although they retain the 
 short characteristic-vowel ; thus, e. g. δύω, ΰ-ύω, 7,ύω, mentioned § 94, 2. 
 
100 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 96 
 
 XLIII. Vocabulary. 
 
 Αισθάνομαι, w. gen. ox ace, δρόμος, -ου, ό, a course, κατα-παύω, to put a stop 
 to perceive, observe. running. to. 
 
 ασπίς, -ίδος, ή, a shield. δύναμις, -εως, ή, strength, κρούω, to knock, beat. 
 
 δεινώς, terribly, violently, power, might. σεισμός, -οϋ, ό, an earth- 
 
 extraordinarily, θραύω, to break, shatter, quake. 
 
 crush. σείω, to shake. 
 
 Οί στρατιώται προς τους πολεμίους πορεύεσ&αι έκελεύσΰησαν. Σπάρτη ποτέ 
 
 νπο σεισμού δεινώς έσείσΰη. Ή των Περσών δύναμις νπο των 'Ελλήνων τέ&- 
 
 ραυσται. Οί πολέμιοι εις την άκραν κατεκλείσ&ησαν. "Οτε οί βάρβαροι των 
 
 ασπίδων προς τα δόρατα νπο των 'Ελλήνων κεκρουσμενων ήσΰάνοντο, δρόμω 
 
 εφενγον. Ό πόλεμος κατεπαύσΰη. 
 
 The soldiers are ordered to march against the enemies. Our town has been 
 violently shaken by an earthquake. The might of the Persians was crushed by 
 the Hellenes. The enemies have been shut up in (into) the castle. The shields 
 were beaten by the enemies against their spears. The war is ended, i. e. has 
 been put a stop to. 
 
 § 96. Contract Pure Verbs. 
 
 1. Contract pure verbs, as has been seen § 92, are such as have 
 for their characteristic α, ε or o, which are contracted with the mode- 
 vowel following. Contraction takes place only in the Pres. and 
 Impf. Act. and Mid. or Pass., because, in these two tenses only, is 
 the characteristic-vowel followed by another vowel. 
 
 2. The following are the contractions which occur here : 
 
 a -f- ε becomes d ε -{- ε = ει ο -{- ε = ου 
 
 α -\- η = ά ε -\- η = η ο -}- η = ω 
 
 α -\- η = α ε -η- η = η ο -j- η = οι 
 
 α -\- ο = ω ε -{- ο = ου ο -f- ο = ου 
 
 α -\- ω = ω ε -f- ω = ω ο -f- ω = ω 
 
 a -jr bl ' = α ε 4~ ει == ει ο -f- ει = οι (ου in Inf.) 
 
 a 4" οι = ω ε + οι = οι ο + οι = οι 
 
 α "τ* ου = ω ε -j- ου = ου ο τ ου = ου. 
 
 3. The tenses of contract verbs, as has been seen § 93, are form- 
 ed like those of uncontracted pure verbs, i. e. the short characteris- 
 tic-vowel is usually lengthened, in forming the tenses, viz. 
 
 ε into η, e. g. φιλέ-ω, to love, φιλψσοο, πε-φίλψκα, etc. 
 ο into ω, e. g. μισ&ό-ω, to let out, μισ&ώ-σω, με-μίσϋ-ω-χα, etc. 
 a into ή, e. g. ημά-ω, to honor, τιμή-σω, τε-τίμη-κα, etc. 
 a into a, e. g. εά-ω, to permit, Fut. εά-σω. This lengthening 
 into a occurs, when ε, ι or ρ precedes (Comp. § 26, 1) ; e. g. 
 ia-co, εά-σω; μειδι$-ω, to laugh, μειδιά-σομαι; φωρα-ω, to catch 
 
§ 96.] CONTRACT PUKE VERBS. 101 
 
 a thief, φωρά-σω (but έγγνα-ω, to give as a pledge, εγγνήσω; 
 βοά-ω, to erg out, βοη-σομαι, like ογδόη). To these verbs be- 
 long the following: 
 
 άλοά-ω, to thresh, άλοά-αω, 
 
 άχροά-ομαι, to hear, άκροά-σομαι. 
 
 Kem ark. The verbs χράω,ίο give an oracle, χράομαι, to use, and τιτ ρ ά ω, 
 to bore, although a ρ precedes, lengthen a into η ; e. g. χρήσομαι, τμησω. The 
 exceptions to rule No. 3. will be stated in § 98. 
 
102 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 [§96. 
 
 Paradigms op 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 m "3 
 
 ra 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Mode 
 
 and 
 
 Participi 
 
 ■2-2 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 a> 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic ε. 
 
 Characteristic ο. 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ω)ώ, to honor, 
 
 φίλ(έ-ω)ώ, to love, 
 
 μισ-&(ό-ω)ώ, to let, 
 
 
 2. 
 
 τιμ-(ά-είς)ας 
 
 φίλ(έ-είς)εΐο 
 φιλ(έ-εί)εί 
 
 μίσϋ(ό•εις)οϊς 
 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-£ί)α 
 
 μι,σϋ(ό-εί)οϊ 
 
 Indic- 
 ative, 
 
 D.l. 
 2. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)α-τον 
 
 φιλ(έ-ε)εΐ-τον 
 
 μίσ&(ό-ε)οϋ-τοι• 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)ΰ-τον 
 
 φίλ(έ-ε)εΐ-τον 
 
 μίσν(ό-ε)οϋ-τον 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 πμ(ά-ο)ώ~μεν 
 
 φίλ(έ-ο)οΰ-μεν 
 
 μίσΰ(ό-ο)οϋ-μεν 
 
 
 2. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)ά-τε 
 
 φίλ(έ-ε)εϊ-τε 
 
 μίσ&(ό-ε)οϋ-τε 
 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ου)ώ-σί(ν) 
 
 φίλ(έ-ον)οϋ-σι(ν) 
 
 μίσΰ(ό-ον)οϋ-σι(ν) 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 τιμ{ά•ω)ώ 
 
 ο 
 
 φίλ(έ-ω)ώ 
 
 μισ$(ό-ω)ώ 
 
 
 2. 
 
 τιμ\ά-ης)φς 
 
 CD 
 
 φιλ(έ-7)ς)τ}ς 
 
 μισ${ό-τις)οϊς 
 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-τι)φ 
 
 CO 
 
 φίλ(έ-τι)^ 
 
 μισ&(ό-τι)οϊ 
 
 Sub- 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 i 3 S 
 ft β. 
 
 
 
 junc- 
 
 2. 
 
 τιμ(ά-η)ά•τον 
 
 -■|'B" 
 
 φίλ(ε-η)η-τον 
 
 μισ$(ό-η)ω-τον 
 
 tive, 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ή)α-τον 
 
 Tl 
 
 φίλ(έ-η)η-τον 
 
 μισ•&(ό-η)ο)-τον 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ω)ώ-μεν 
 
 ? < 
 
 φιλ(έ•ω)ώ•μεν 
 
 μισΰ(ό•ω)ώ-μεν 
 
 
 2. 
 
 τιμ(ά-η)α-τε 
 
 Β 
 
 φιλ{ε-η)η-τε 
 
 μισ•&(6-η)ώ-τε 
 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ω)ώ-σι(ν) 3 
 
 t5 
 
 φιλ(έ-ω)ώ•σι(ν) 
 
 μισ-&(6-ω)ώ-σι(ν) 
 
 
 S.2. 
 
 τίμ(α-ε)α 
 
 φίλ(ε-ε)ει 
 
 μίθ"&{ο-ε)ου 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Τίμ\α•ε)ά-τω 
 
 φιλ(ε-έ)εί-τω 
 
 μισϋ(ο-έ)ον-τω 
 
 Imper- 
 ative, 
 
 D.2. 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)ά-τον 
 τιμ(α-έ)ά-των 
 
 φίλ(έ•ε)εϊ-τον 
 φίλ(ε-έ)εί-των 
 
 μισΰ(ό-ε)οϋ-τον 
 μισ•&(ο-έ)ού-των 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 πμ(ά-ε)ά-τε 
 
 φιλ(ε-ε)εΙ-τε 
 
 μισ•&(ό•ε)οϋ-τε 
 
 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(α-έ)ά-τωσαν οι* 
 
 φιλ( ε-έ)εί-τωσαν οι* 
 
 μίσϋ\ο-έ)οϋ-τωσαν 
 
 
 
 τιμ(α-ό)ό)-ντων 
 
 φίλ{ε-6)ον-ντων 
 
 or μισ-&(ο•6)ον-ντ(ύν 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 τ ■ ιμ{α-ειν)αν 
 
 φίλ(έ-ειν)εΐν 
 
 μισ-&{ό-ειν)ονν 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ων)ών 
 
 φίλ(έ-ων)ών 
 
 μι,σΰ(ό-ων)ών 
 
 Parti- 
 ciple, 
 
 
 τίμ(ά-ου)ύ-σα 
 
 φίλ(έ-ου)ον•σα 
 
 μισΰ-\ό-ον)ον-σα 
 
 
 τιμ(ά-ον)ών 
 
 φιλ(έ-ον)ονν 
 
 μίσ&(ό-ον)οϋν 
 
 Gen. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ο)ώ-ντος 
 
 φίλ(έ-ο)ον-ντος 
 
 μίσΰ-(ό-ο) ον-ντος 
 
 
 
 τιμ(α-ού)ώ-σης 
 
 φίλ(ε-ον)ον-σης 
 
 μίσΰ-(ο-ον)ον-σης. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 S.l. 
 
 έτίμ(α-ον)ων 
 
 έφίλ(ε-ον)ονν 
 
 εμίσ•&(ο•ον)ονν 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ετίμ\α-ες)ας 
 
 εφί'λ{ε-ες)εις 
 
 εμίσ$(ο-ες)ους 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ετίμ[α-ε)α 
 
 έφίλ(ε-ε)ει 
 
 έμίσ-&(ο-ε)ον 
 
 Indic- 
 ative. 
 
 D.l. 
 2. 
 
 ετιμ(ά-ε)ά-τον 
 
 έφιλ(έ-ε)εΐ-τον 
 
 εμίσ-&{ό•ε)ον-τον 
 
 3. 
 
 έτιμ(α-έ)ά-την 
 
 έφίλ(ε-έ)εί-την 
 
 έμίσ•&\ο-έ)ού-την 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 ετίμ(ά-ο)ώ-μεν 
 
 έφίλ(έ-ο)οϋ-μεν 
 
 έμιση(ό-ο)οΰ-μεν 
 
 
 2. 
 
 επμ(ά-ε)ά-τε 
 
 έφίλ(έ-ε)εϊ-τε 
 
 έμισϋ-(ό-ε)ον-τε 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ετίμ(α-ον)ων 
 
 
 έφίλ(ε-ον)ονν 
 
 έμίσ-&\ο-ον)ουν 
 
§96.] 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 103 
 
 Contract Verbs. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 Present . 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic ε. 
 
 Characteristic ο. 
 
 τιμ(ά-ο)ύ-μαί 
 
 φίλ(έ-ο)οϋ-μαί 
 
 μίσ-&{ό•ο)ον-μαί 
 
 τίμ(ά- ν )φ 
 
 φίλ(έ•7ΐ)% 
 
 μισ&(ό-%)οΐ 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)ά•ται 
 
 φιλ{έ-ε)εϊ•ταί 
 
 μίσ-&(ό-ε)οϋ-ταί 
 
 τίμ{α-ο)ω-με&ον 
 
 φιλ(ε-ό)ον-μεΰον 
 
 μι<τ&(ο-6)ου-με$ον 
 
 τιμ(ίι-ε)ά-σ•&ον 
 
 φίλ(έ-ε)εϊ-σ-&ον 
 
 μίσϋ-(ό•ε)οϋ-σΰ-ον 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)ά-σ&ον 
 
 φίλ(έ-ε)εΐ-σϋον 
 
 μισΰ-(ό-ε)ον-σ&ον 
 
 τίμ\α-ό)ώ-με$α 
 
 φίλ(ε-ό)ού-με•&α 
 
 μισΰ-(ο-ό)ον-με•&α 
 
 τιμ(ά-ε)ά-(τ&ε 
 
 φίλ(έ-ε)εϊ~σΰε 
 
 μισΰ(ό-ε)οϋ-σ'&ε 
 
 τίμ(ά-ο)ώ-νται 
 
 φιλ(έ-ο)οϋ-νταΰ 
 
 μισ•&(ό•ο)οϋ•νται 
 
 Τίμ(ά-ω)ώ-μαι 
 
 
 φιλ(έ-ω)ώ-μαι 
 
 μισ-&(ό~ω)ώ-μαι 
 
 τιμ(ά-τ))α 
 
 £ 
 
 φιλίέ-τ))-?} 
 
 μίσΰ(ό-τι)οϊ 
 
 τιμ(ά-η)ά-ταί 
 
 ο 
 
 φιλ(ί-ή)η-ται 
 
 μίσ-&(6•η)ώ-ταί 
 
 τιμ{α-ώ)ω-με-&ον 
 
 
 φίλ(ε-ώ)ώ-μεΰ-ον 
 
 μίσ / &(ο-ώ)ώ-με , &ον 
 
 τίμ(ά-η)ά-σϋον 
 
 r* 
 
 φύλ(έ-η)ή-σ-&ον 
 
 μίσϋ-(ό-η)ω-σ-&ον 
 
 τίμ{ά•η)α-σ•&ον 
 
 & 
 
 <ριλ(έ-η)ή-σ , &ον 
 
 μισΰ-(6-η)ώ-σ-&ον 
 
 πμ{α-ώ)ώ•με&α 
 
 Ε 
 
 φιλ(ε-ώ)ώ-με$-α 
 
 μισ-&(ο-ω)ώ-με•&α 
 
 τψ(ά•η)α-σϋε 
 
 < 
 
 φίλ(έ-η)ή•σϋ-ε 
 
 μίσν(ό•η)ω-σ-&ε 
 
 τιμ(ά-ω)ώ-νται 
 
 
 φίλ(έ-ω)ώ-νται 
 
 μισΰ(ό-ω)ώ-νται 
 
 τψ(ά-ου)ώ 
 
 φιλ(έ-ου)οϋ 
 
 μισϋ(ό-ου)όν 
 
 τιμ(α•έ)ύ-σ&<Λ) 
 
 φίλ(ε-έ)εί-σΰ-ω 
 
 μίσΰ(ο-έ)ού-σϋω 
 
 τιιι(ά-ε)α-σβ-ον 
 
 φιλ(έ-ε)εΐ-σ•&ον 
 
 μίσ-&(6-ε)ον-(τ&ον 
 
 τψ(α-έ)ά-σ&θ)ν 
 
 φίλ(ε•ί)εί-σ•&ων 
 
 μίσ-&(ο-έ)ον-σϋ-ων 
 
 τιμ(ά•ε)ά•σϋε 
 
 φιλ(έ•ε)εΐ-σ-&ε 
 
 μισ•&(ό-ε)οϋ-σ-&ε 
 
 τιμ(α-έ)ά-<τ&ωσαν or 
 
 φιλ{ε-έ)εί-σϋ-ωσαν or 
 
 μισ-&(ο•έ)ού-σ , &ο)σαν or 
 
 τίμ(α•έ)ά-(Τ&ων 
 
 φίλ(ε-έ)εί-σ-&ων 
 
 μκτ&(ο-έ) ον-σΰ-ων 
 
 τψ{ά-ε)ά-σϋ-αι. 
 
 φιλ(έ-ε)εΐ-σ•&αί 
 
 μισΰ(ό-ε)ον-σΰ-αι 
 
 τιμ(α-6)ύ)-μενος 
 
 φιλ(ε-ό)ού-μενος 
 
 μισΰ(ο-ό)ον-μενος 
 
 ημ(α-ο)ω-μένη 
 
 φίλ(ε•ο)ου-μένη 
 
 μίσ-&(ο-ο)ου-μένη 
 
 τιμ(α-ο)ώ-μενον 
 
 φίλ(ε•6)ον-μενον 
 
 μίσΰ-(ο-ο) ού-μενον 
 
 τιμ{α-ο)ω-μένου 
 
 φιλ(ε-ο)ον-μένον 
 
 μίσ•&(ο-ό)ου•μένον 
 
 τιμ(α-ο)ω-μένης 
 
 φίλ(ε-6)ον-μενης 
 
 μίσΰ-(ο-ο)ον-μένης. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 έτιμ(α-ό)ώ-μην 
 
 εφίλ(ε-ό)ον-μην 
 
 έμίσΰ-(ο-ό)ού-μην 
 
 έτιμ(ά-ου)ώ 
 
 έφιλ(έ-ον)ον 
 
 έμισ•&(ό-ου)ον 
 
 ετιμ(ά-ε)ά-τυ 
 
 εφιλ{έ-ε)εϊ-το 
 
 έμισ-&(ό-ε)οϋ-το 
 
 έτιμ(α-ό)ώ-με•&ον 
 
 έφιλ(ε-ό)ον•με-&ον 
 
 έμισ-&(ο-ό)ού-με-&ον 
 
 έτίμ(ά-ε)ά-σ&ον 
 
 εφώ(έ-ε)εϊ-σ-&ον 
 
 έμίσ•&(ό-ε)οϋ~σΰ-ον 
 
 έτιμ{α-έ)ά•σ&ην 
 
 εφιλ(ε-έ)εί•σ'&ην 
 
 εμισΰ-(ο•έ) ου-σ&ην 
 
 έτίμ(α-ό)ώ•με•&α 
 
 έφιλ(ε•ό)ον-μεΰ-α 
 
 εμισ&(ο-6) ον-με&α 
 
 έτιμ(ά-ε)α•σΰ-ε 
 
 έφίλ(έ-ε)εϊ-σ•&ε 
 
 έμισΰ-(ό-ε)οΰ-σ•&ε 
 
 ετιμ(ά-ο)ω-ντο 
 
 
 έφιλ(έ-ο)οϋ-ντο 
 
 εμίσΘ-\ό•ο)ον•ντο 
 
104 
 
 CONTRACT PURE YERBS. 
 
 [§97. 
 
 c S Si 
 
 2 » 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic ε. 
 
 Characteristic ο. 
 
 
 Opta- 
 tive, 
 
 8.1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.'l. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 τιμ(ά-οί)ώ-μι 
 
 τίμ(ά-οις)ώζ 
 
 τιμ(ά-οι)φ 
 
 τιμ(ά•οι)ω-τον 
 
 τίμ(α-οί)φ-την 
 
 τίμ(ά-οι)ώ-μεν 
 
 πμ{ά-θί)ω-τε 
 
 τιμ(ά-οί)ώ-εν 
 
 φίλ(έ-οί)οϊ-μί 
 
 φι?ι(έ-οις)οΐς 
 
 φί?ι(έ-θί)οϊ 
 
 φι?^(έ-θί)οϊ-τον 
 
 φίλ(ε-οί)οί-την 
 
 φιλ(έ-οι)οϊ-μεν 
 
 φίλ(έ-οήοϊ-τε 
 
 φιλ{έ-οι)οϊ-εν 
 
 μίσ&(ό-οι)οϊ-μί 
 μισ-&{ό-οις)οϊς 
 μίσ&(ό-θί)οϊ 
 
 μίσ$(ό-οήοΐ-τον 
 
 μίσϋ-(ο-οί)οί-την 
 
 μισΰ-(ό-οι)οΐ-μεν 
 
 μισ-&(ό-οί)οΙ•τε 
 
 μισ-&{ό-θί)οϊ-εν 
 
 
 Attic 
 Opta- 
 tive, 
 
 s.r. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 πμ{α-οΐ)ώ-ην 
 
 τίμ(α-οί)φ-ης 
 
 τιμ{α-Όΐ)ά-τ] 
 
 τιμ(α-οί)ώ-ητον 
 
 Τίμ(α-οι)ω-ητην 
 
 τιμ{α-οί)φ-ημεν 
 
 Τίμ(α-οί)φ-ητε 
 
 τιμ(ά-οί)ώ•εν 
 
 φιλ(ε-οί)οί-ην 
 
 φί?^(ε-οί)οί-ης 
 
 φίλ(ε-οί)οί-η 
 
 φίλ(ε-οί)οί-ητον 
 
 φίλ{ε-οί)οί-ήτην 
 
 φίλ{ε-οί)οί-ημεν 
 
 φιλ(ε-οί)οί-ητε 
 
 φίλ(έ-οί)οΐ-εν 
 
 μίσϋ-(ο.οΐ)οί-ην 
 
 μιο~&(ο-οί)οί-ης 
 
 μίσΰ(ο-οί)οί-η 
 
 μίσ-&\ο-οί)οί-ητον 
 
 μίσΰ(ο-οι)οι-ήτην 
 
 μίσΰ (ο•οί)οΐ-ημεν 
 
 μίσ-&(ο.οΐ)οί-ητε 
 
 μίσ-&(ό-οήοϊ-εν 
 
 
 Indi- 
 cative, 
 
 Perf. 
 
 τετίμηκα 
 πεφώρΰκα 
 
 πεφίληκα 
 
 μεμίσ&ωκα 
 
 
 Plup. 
 
 ετετιμήκειν 
 επεφωράκειν 
 
 επεφίλήκευν 
 
 έμεμίσΦώκειν 
 
 
 Put. 
 
 πμήσω φωράσω 
 
 φιλήσω 
 
 μίσ&ώσω 
 
 
 Aor. 
 
 έτ'ιμησα εφώράσα 
 
 εφίλησα 
 
 έμίσ-&ωσα 
 
 
 F.Pf. 
 
 
 
 
 
 PAS 
 
 Aorist, | έτιμη-Θην έφωράΰην \ εφίλή&ην | εμισΰωΰην 
 
 Verbal adjectives : τιμη-τέος, -τέα, -τέον, φωρύ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον, 
 
 §97. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 1. Verbs in ~έω with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. πλέω, to sail, πνέω, to breathe, 
 ■&£ti y to run, are contracted only in ευ (arising from έει or εε), but in all the 
 Other forms, they are uncontracted ; e. g. 
 
 Act. Pr. Ind. πλέω, πλεϊς, πλεϊ, πλέο μεν, πλεΐτε, πλέον σ ι (ν). 
 
 Subj. πλέω, πλέη ς, π λ έτι, πλέω μεν, πλέητ ε, πλέω σ ι (ν). 
 
 Imp. πλεϊ. Inf. πλεΐν. Part, πλέων, πλέον σα, πλέον. 
 Impf. Ind. έ πλέον, έπλεις, έπλει, έπλέομεν, έπλείτε, έπλε ον. 
 
 Opt. πλέο l μ ι, πλέο l ς, etc. 
 Mid. Pr. Ind. πλέο μ α ι, πλέη, πλεϊται, πλεόμεΰον, π2.εΐσ•&ον, etc. 
 
 Inf. πλεϊσ-&αι. Part, πλεόμενος. Impf. έπλεόμην. 
 
 2. The verb δέω,ΐο bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- 
 larly in compounds ; e. g. rb δονν, τον δονντος, διαδονμαι, κατέδονν. 
 
 3. Several verbs deviate from the general rules of contraction ; e. g. 
 
 (a) -αε and -αει are contracted into -η and -y, instead of into -a and -a ; e. g. 
 
§97.] 
 
 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 
 
 105 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic ε. 
 
 Characteristic ο. 
 
 
 τιμ(α-οί)ω-μην 
 
 τιμ(ά-οί)ω-ο 
 
 τψ(ά-οί)ω-το 
 
 τιμ(α-οί)ω-μεΰον 
 
 τιμ(ά-θί)φ-σΰον 
 
 τιμ(α-οί)ω-(Τ&ην 
 
 τιμ(α-οί)ω-μεϋα 
 
 τιμ(ά-θί)ώ-<τ&ε 
 
 τίμ(ά-οι)ω-ντο 
 
 φιλ(ε-οί)οί-μην 
 
 φιλ(έ-οι)οϊ-ο 
 
 φίλ{έ-θί)οϊ-το 
 
 φίλ(ε-οΐ)οί-μεΰ-ον 
 
 φίλ[έ-θί)οΐ-(τ&ον 
 
 φίλ(ε-οί)οί-σ&ην 
 
 φίλ(ε-οί)οί-μεΰα 
 
 φίλ(έ-οί)οΐ-(τ&ε 
 
 φι?\έ-οί)οί-ντο 
 
 μισΰ(ο-οί)οί-μην 
 
 μισ$(ό-θί)οϊ-ο 
 
 μισ-&\ό-οί)οϊ-το 
 
 μισ-&\ο-οί)οί-με-&ον 
 
 μίσν(ό-οί)οΐ-σ&ον 
 
 μίσν(ο-οΐ)οί-σ-&ην 
 
 μισ&(ο-οί)οί-με&α 
 
 μίσν(ό-οι)οΙ-(τ&ε 
 
 μισΰ(ό-οι)οϊ-ντο 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 τετιμημαι, 
 πεφώράμαι 
 
 πεφίλημαί 
 
 μεμίσϋωμαι 
 
 
 έτετιμήμην 
 εττεφωράμην 
 
 έπεφιλήμην 
 
 έμεμισϋώμην 
 
 
 τιμησομαι ψωρασομαί 
 
 φίλήσομαι 
 
 μισ&ώσομαι. 
 
 
 έτιμησάμην έφωράσάμην 
 
 έφιλησάμην 
 
 έμίσ&ωσάμην 
 
 
 τετιμησομαι πεφωράσομαι 
 
 πεφιλήσομαι 
 
 μεμισ&ώσομαι 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 | Future, j τιμη&ήσομαί φωρΰΰ-ησομαί \ φύιηΰησομαι | μίσΰωΰ-ήσομαι 
 
 φιλη-τέος, -~έα, -τέον, μισ&ω-τέος, -τέα, -τέον. 
 
 ζ( ά-ω ) ώ, to live, ζης, -y, -ητον, -ητε, Inf. ζην, Imp. ζη, Impf. έζων, -ης, 
 -η, -ητον, -ήτην, -ητε ; — π ειν(ά-ω)ώ, to hunger, Inf. πεινήν, etc ; — 
 διψ(ά-ω)ώ, to thirst, διψής, etc., Inf. διψην ; — κ ν (ά-ω) ώ, to scrape, 
 Inf. Kvyv ; — σ μ (ά-ω) ω, to smear, Inf. σμήν ; — -ψ (ά-ω)ώ, to rub, Inf. 
 ψην ; — χ ρ(ά-ο)ώ-μαι, to use, χρη, χρηται, χρήσ&αι ; so άποχρωμαι, 
 to have enough, to abuse, άποχρήσϋαι ; — ά ττόχρη (abridged from άποχρη), 
 it suffices, Inf. άποχρψ, Impf. άπέχρη ; — χ ρ (ά-ω) ω, to give an oracle, to 
 prophesy, χρής, χρή, Inf. χρψ. 
 (b) -oo and -οε are contracted into -ω, instead of into -ov, and -6η into -ω, in- 
 stead of into -οϊ, in /5 l γ ( ό - ω ) ώ, to freeze, Inf. (α-γων and ρΊγοϋν, Part 
 Gen. ριγώντος and βιγουντος, Subj. βίγφ, Opt. ρΊγωην, etc. 
 4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the 
 Opt. in -ην, namely, in the Sing, of verbs in -έω and -όω, the form in -οΐην is 
 much more in use than the common form, and in verbs in -άω it is used almost 
 exclusively ; but in the Dual and PI. of all three, the common form is more in 
 use ; in the third person PL, the Attic form is always the same as the common 
 form ; e. g. τιμώεν. 
 
106 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 97. 
 
 5. The verb λ ο ν ω, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- 
 tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., in the 
 ending of which there is -ε or -o ; e. g. ελου instead of έλουε, ελοϋμεν instead 
 of έλούομεν, Mid. λοϋμαι, (λόει,) λοϋται, etc., Imp. λοϋ, Inf. λοϋσΰαι, Impf. 
 έλούμην, ελου, έλοϋτο, etc., as if from the stem ΑΟΕΩ. 
 
 Remark. On the change of the accent in contraction, see §11, 2 . 
 
 XLIV. Vocabulary. 
 (a) Contract Verbs in -άω in the Pres. and Impf. Act. 
 
 Αγαπάω, to love. ζάω, to live. πριν, w. inf., before. 
 
 αθάνατος, -ov, immortal, ηλικία, -ας, ή, age, especial- πώς ; how % 
 
 ά&λίως, miserably, unfor ly youth or manhood. σιωπάω, to be silent, 
 
 innately. θαββαλέως, boldly, cour- συγκυκάω, to move to- 
 
 άκμή,-ής,ή,& point, height, ageously. gether, bring into con- 
 full power, bloom. Ιδέα, -ας, ή, an appear- fusion, confound. 
 
 άστράπτω, to lighten. ance, an outward figure, σύμμαχος, -ov, fighting 
 
 Βροντάω, to thunder. νικάω, to conquer, over- with ; subst, a fellow- 
 
 3ιψάω, to thirst, or be come. combatant, or ally, 
 
 thirsty. δλοφύρομαι,ιυ.αοο.,ίο pity, τελευτάω, to finish, (βίον 
 
 δράω, to do, act. δράω, to see. understood) to die. 
 
 έξ-απατάω, to completely ορμάω, to rush, advance, τολμάω, to dare, venture, 
 
 deceive, or mislead. πεινάω, to hunger, or be prevail upon oneself. 
 
 έράω, w. gen., to love (ar- hungry, 
 dently). 
 
 Ύίολλάκις γνώμην εξαπατώσιν Ιδέαι. Μ.ή σε νικάτω κέρδος. Έρώ της αρε- 
 τής. "Πολλάκις νικά καϊ κακός άνδρα αγαθόν. Οι αγαθοί έρώσι των καλών. 
 ΐίολλοι άνθρωποι εν τη της ηλικίας άκμη τελεντώσιν. Ή σιώπα, η λέγε άμεί- 
 νονα. 'Ανάγκη εστί πάντας ανθρώπους τελευτςίν. Νους δρα και νους ακούει. 
 Οαββαλέως, ω στρατιώται, δρμώμεν επί τους πολεμίους. ΤΙριν μεν πεινην, πολ- 
 λοί έσθίουσι, πριν δε διψην, πίνουσιν. Ουκ εστί τοϊς μη δρώσι σύμμαχος τύχη. 
 Τίερικλης ήστραπτεν, έβρόντα, συνεκύκα την 'Ελλάδα. Είθε πάντες παίδες 
 τους γονέας άγαπώεν. ΤΙώς αν τολμωην τον φίλον βλάπτειν ] Το μεν σώμα 
 πολλάκις και πεινη και διψή ■ η δε ψυχή πώς αν η δϊψφη η πεινφη ; "Ϋυχή αθά- 
 νατος και αγηρως ζη δια παντός. Κρεϊττον το μή ζην εστίν η ζην άθλίως. Όλο- 
 φυρόμεθα τον εν τη της ηλικίας άκμη τελευτώντα. 
 
 Children love their (the) parents. Either be silent (pi.) or speak better. 
 With the mind (dot.) we see and hear. Youths should be silent (imp.). We 
 will love virtue. All citizens fear (fear holds all citizens) that (μή, w. subj.) the 
 enemies will advance against the town. It is well to love our parents. We 
 pity those who die (pait.) in the bloom of youth (ηλικία). The soldiers ad- 
 vanced courageously against the town. The army is often hungry and thirsty. 
 All the citizens feared, that the enemies would rush against the town. May 
 you always, Ο boy, love your parents ! 
 
§ 97. "1 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 107 
 
 XLV. Vocabulary. 
 (b) Contract Verbs in -έω in the Pres. and Impf. Act. 
 
 Αϋυμέω, to be dispirited, •&έλω and έ&έλω, to will, well to, to confer a fa- 
 despair, wish, be willing. vor on. 
 
 άμελέω, w. gen., to neg- καν, w. subj. — καί and πονέω, laboro, to take trou- 
 
 lect, not to care for. the modal adverb av, or ble, work, toil. 
 
 av (instead of εάν), w. και εάν, even if, al- προσδοκάω, to expect, pre- 
 
 subj., if. though ; or καί and the sunie. 
 
 άποββέω, to flow away, or particle αν. ρ"ιψ, ρΊπός, δ, ij, a reed, 
 
 from. κρατέω, w. gen., to be mas- σιγάω, to be silent. 
 
 άσκέω, to practise, adorn. ter of, have power over, συλλαμβάνω, w. dot., to 
 
 δέω, w. gen., to want ; δεϊ, command. take in common with, 
 
 there is need, it is ne- λαλέω, to talk, prate. help, assist, 
 
 cessary, one must ; w. μάλιστα, {superlative of σνμπονέω, w. dot., to work 
 
 ace. and inf. μάλα, very) most, es- with, help, assist. 
 
 δυστυχέω, to be unfortu- pecially. τελέω,ίο accomplish, fulfil, 
 
 nate. [praise, μέλι, -ιτος, τό, honey. υπέρ, w. gen., instead or in 
 
 έπαινέω, to approve of, μήτε — μήτε, neither — nor. behalf of, on account 
 
 εντυχέω, to be fortunate, ουδέποτε, never. of; w. ace, above, be- 
 
 happy. πλέω, to sail. yond. 
 
 ευχή, -ης, η, a request, a ποιέω, to make, do ; ευ φρονέω, to think ; μέγα 
 
 prayer. ποιεϊν, w. ace., to do φρονείν, to be haughty. 
 
 Άνήρ πονηρός δυςτυχεϊ, καν ευτυχή. Βίος κράτιστος, αν &υμοϋ λ κρατής. Σί- 
 γψν μάλλον, η λαλεϊν πρέπει. "Ο τι αν ποιητε, νομίζετε δραν -&εόν. Φίλος 
 φίλφ συμπονών αύτώ 2 πονεϊ. Οι άν&ρωποι -&νητοι μη φρονούντων ύπερ -&εονς 
 Ό μάλιστα ευτυχών μή μέγα φρονείτω. Ούδέποτ' άϋ-υμείν τον κακώς πράττοντα 
 δεϊ, τα βελτίω δε προςδοκαν αεί. Τω πονοΰντι •&εος συλλαμβάνει. Αικαιοσν- 
 νην άσκεϊτε καϊ έργω καί λόγω. Άπό της Νέστορος γλώττης, ώςπερ μέλι, δ λό- 
 γος άπέββει. Ό Σωκράτης του σώματος ουκ η μέλει, τους δε άμελοϋντας ούκ 
 επήνει. Είι9•ε, ώ •&εός, τελοίης (τελοΐς) μοι την ευχήν. Έλυε ευτνχοίτε (εύτν- 
 χοίητε), ώ φίλοι, θεοΰ ΰέλοντος, 3 καν (και αν) έπί ρίπος πλέοις. 
 
 Bad men are unfortunate, even if they are fortunate. If God were willing, 
 we could sail even on a reed. Whatever thou doest, believe, God sees it. 
 Friends, who work with friends, work for themselves. Practise justice in word 
 and deed. The Greeks neglected neither the body nor the mind. Ο that ye, 
 Ο gods, would fulfil my desire! Ο that thou wert happy, my (0) friend! 
 Friends should work with friends ! It is well to practise virtue. 
 
 XL VI. Vocabulary. 
 
 (o) Contract Verbs in -όω in the Pres. and Impf. Act 
 
 Αμαυρόω, to darken, de- αμέλεια, -ας, ή, careless- άν&ρώπινος, -η, -ον, hu- 
 stroy, weaken, blunt. ness. man. 
 
 1 § 158, 7. (a). 2 § 161, 5 3 Genitive Absolute. 
 
108 CONTRACT PURE VERBS. [§ 97 
 
 άποβρΌή, -ης, ή, a flowing ζητέω, to seek, strive. δρεξις, -εως, ή, a striving 
 
 off, a source. ζωή, -ης, ή, life. after, a desire. 
 
 δολόω, to outwit, trick, ΰεΐος, -a, -ov, godlike, δρϋ-όω, to make straight, 
 
 deceive. divine. erect, raise up. 
 
 δουλόω, to enslave, sub- Ινα, in order that, that, ούτε — ούτε, neither — nor. 
 
 jugate. (after a principal tense δσπερ, ήπερ, όπερ, who- 
 
 έλευ&ερόω, to set free, to with the subj. ; after a ever, whatever. 
 
 free. historical tense with the συν-εξ-ομοιόω, to make e- 
 
 έξισόω, to make equal. opt.). qual. 
 
 ζηλόω, to strive after, imi- κοινωνία, -ας, ή, commu- τυφλόω, to make blind, to 
 
 tate, value, think hap- nion, intercourse. blind. 
 
 py, admire. λιμός, -ov, b, hunger. χαλεπώς, with difficulty. 
 
 To άληΰές κάλλος, δπερ έκ ΰείας κοινωνίας έχει την άπορβοήν, ούτε πόνος ή 
 λιμός ή αμέλεια τις, ούτε δ πολύς χρόνος αμαυροϊ. Αϊ φιλίαι τα. έΰη ζητονσι 
 σννεξομοιοϋν. Χαλέπώς αν ταϊς των άγαΰών αρεταΐς εξισοίης (εξισοίς) τους 
 επαίνους. Ευνομία άμαυροί ϋβριν. Ζήλου, ω παϊ, τους εσϋλούς και σώφρονας 
 άνδρας. ΤΙολλοϋς κακώς πράττοντας όρ&οΐ τύχη. ΤΙλή-&ος κακών τήν άν&ρω- 
 πίνην ζωήν αμαυροϊ. Αί περί τι σφοδραι ορέξεις τυφλοϋσιν εις τάλλα 1 τήν ψυ- 
 χήν. Ύήν άρετήν καϊ τήν σοψίαν ζηλώμεν. Χρυσός εστίν δ δουλών -&νητών 
 φρένας. Oi πολέμιοι το στράτευμα ημών έδόλουν. Οι νεανίαι τήν σοφίαν ζη- 
 λοϊεν. Οι πολέμιοι επλησίαζον, Ινα τους αιχμαλώτους ελευ&εροϊεν. 
 
 The violent striving after anything makes the soul blind for everything else. 
 The enemies approach, in order that they may free the prisoners. Imitate, Ο 
 youths, noble and wise men ! It is not easy to make praise equal to the vir- 
 tues of the good. "We love youths who strive (particip.) after wisdom. The 
 enemies freed the prisonei's. May violent desire not make your soul blind for 
 everything else. Youths should strive after virtue. 
 
 XL VII. Vocabulary. 
 
 (d)ContractVerbs in -άωίη the Pre s. and Impf. Mid. orPass. 
 
 Άδυνατέω, to be unable. set my mind or heart μηχανάομαι, mdcMnor, to 
 
 άεικής, -ές, unseemly, dis- upon, desire. contrive. 
 
 graceful. εύεργετέω, w. ace, to do ομοίως, in like manner, 
 
 άκροάομαι,ιο. gen., to hear, well to, benefit. alike. 
 
 listen to- ήδομαι, w. pass. aor. and πειράομαι, w. pass, aor., to 
 
 άξιόω (τινά τίνος), to think fut, to rejoice. try. 
 
 deserving, consider wor- ήμεροδρόμος, -ου, δ, (run- τ'ιμάω, to esteem, honor. 
 
 thy, desire, wish. ning through the day,) ύπόδημα,-ατος, τό,( bound 
 
 yap, for. a courier. under) a sandal, a shoe. 
 
 είτε — είτε, sive — sive ; ίάομαι, to heal. χράομαι, w. dot., to use ; 
 
 whether — or. μακάριος, -a, -ov, blessed, utor. 
 
 έπι&υμέω, w. gen. or inf., to happy. ώφελέω, w. ace, to benefit. 
 
 'Ομοίως άμφοΐν άκροασ'&αι δεϊ. "Οταν αδύνατης τω πλούτφ χοήσ&αι, τί δια• 
 1 By Crasis instead of τά άλλα. 
 
§ 97.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 109 
 
 φέρεις τον πένητος ; Έύνονς λόγος λνπην ίάται. Υψωμένοι πάντες ηδονται 
 βροτοί. ΟΙ άν&ρωποι πολλά μηχανώνται. Μακάριος, ος ουσ'ιαν καΐ νονν έχει ■ 
 χρηται γαρ εις ά 1 δεϊ καλώς. Ό άγαΰυς ύπό πάντων τιμάται. Τλώττης πειρώ 
 κρατεϊν. ΐίερικλης νπό των Ά&ηναίων ηγαπάτο και έτιμάτο. Οί ημεροδρόμοι 
 ουκ εχρώντο νποδημασιν εν ταϊς όδοϊς. Οϋκ άεικές, εάν τις νπ' εχ&ρών έξαπα- 
 τάται. Είϋε πάντες γονείς υπό των τέκνων άγαπώντο. ΟΊ άγαΰοϊ νπό πάν- 
 των αγαπάσΰων. Είτε νπό φίλων έΰ-έλεις άγαπάσϋαι, τους φίλους ενεργέτε ι, 
 είτε νπό τίνος πόλεως έπιϋυμεΐς τιμάσ-&αι, την πόλιν ώφέλει, είτε νπό της 'Ελ- 
 λάδος πάσης άξιοϊς έπ' άρετ?) -&ανμάζεσΰαι, την Ελλάδα πειρώ εν ποιεϊν. 
 
 Listen to both, h? like manner, Ο judge ! It is not disgraceful if we are de- 
 ceived by enemies. Kind words heal sorrow. Man rejoices in being (part.) 
 honored by others. "We wish to be loved by our friends and honored by the 
 citizens. Among (παρά, w. dat.) the Lacedaemonians old men were extraordi- 
 narily honored. Let the good man always be loved and honored by all. The 
 judge should hear both. 
 
 XL VIII. Vocabulary. 
 (e) ContractVerbsin -έω in thePres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Άδικέω, w. ace, to do έτος, -εος =■ -ονς, τό, a ind. fut., after verbs of 
 
 wrong to, injure, do in- year. care. 
 
 justice. Ισχυρός, -ά, -όν, strong, πλησίος, -a, -ov, near; ol 
 
 αΐδέομαι, w. ace, to be powerful. πλησίον, those near, 
 
 ashamed before any one, κατα-φρονέω, w. gen., to neighbors, fellow-men. 
 
 reverence, esteem, wor- despise ; pass., καταφρο- πολιορκέω, to besiege. 
 
 ship. νέομαι, to be despised, προς-ποιέω, to add ; mid., 
 
 άπιστέω, w. dot., to disbe- λοιδορέω, to scold, abuse. to acquire, claim, or 
 
 lieve ; pass., άπιστέομαι, μίσέω, to hate. make for oneself. 
 
 to be disbelieved. 'όπως, how ; in order that ; φοβέω, to frighten ; mid. 
 
 άπό-λϋσις, -εως, ή, dehV- w. subj., after a princi- w. pass, aor., to be fright- 
 
 erance, liberation. pal tense ; to. opt, after ened, fear. 
 
 δέομαι, w. pass. aor. and an historical tense; to. 
 
 gen., to want, need. 
 
 ΑΙδον ϋ-εόν. Τον άγα&όν άνδρα ποιον έταϊρον. Φιλονντες φιλοννται, μι- 
 σονντες μισούνται. Ύόν Ισχνρόν δει πράον 2 είναι, όπως οι πλησίον αιδώνται 
 ιιάλλον, η φοβώνται. Αίδεΐσ-&αι δεϊ φίλους. Άπιστοννται οι λάλοι, καν άλη- 
 ϋενωσιν. Οί Τίέρσαι νπό τών Ελλήνων έμισονντο και κατεφρονονντο. Ό μη- 
 δέν αδικών ονδενός δεΐται 3 νόμον. Τροία δέκα έτη υπό τών Ελλήνων έπολιορ- 
 κεΐτο. Οί πολϊται έφοβονντο, μη η πόλις πολιορκοιτο. Αοιδορουμενος φέρε • ό 
 γάρ λοιδορών, έάν ό λοιδορουμενος μη προςποιηται, λοιδορειται λοιδορών. Μη- 
 δεϊς φοβείσ&ω -Θάνατον, άπόλυσιν κακών. 
 
 Worship (pi.) God. One who loves (pan.) is loved, one who hates (pari.) 
 is hated. Those who do no (not) injustice (part.) need no law. The king of 
 the Persians was hated and despised by the Hellenes. The citizens fear, that 
 
 1 Instead of είς ταϋτα, εις ά. 2 See $48• 3 $ 158, 5. (a). 
 
 10 
 
110 CONTRACT PUKE VERBS. [§ 98. 
 
 the town will be besieged by the enemies. May you make (pi.) good men your 
 friends. Parents delight to be honored (part.) by their children. It is not 
 disgraceful to be hated by the bad. 
 
 XLIX. Vocabulary. 
 (f) Contract Verbs in -όω in thePres.and Impf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Αλκή, -ης, ή, strength. εξ-αμαυρόω, άμαυρόω μερίζω, to part, divide. 
 
 γαυρόω, to make proud; strengthened by εξ, σαρξ, -ρκός, η, flesh. 
 
 mid. w. pass, aor., to be page 107. ταπεινόω, to bring low, 
 
 proud, pride oneself in. ζημώω, to punish. humble. 
 
 δηλόω, to make known or η&ος, -εος = -ους, τό, cus- υπερήφανος, -ον, haughty, 
 
 evident, show. torn, manner, the char- proud. 
 
 εναντώομαι, w. dot., ad- acter. χειρόομαι, to worst, sub- 
 
 versor, to oppose, resist, αήτε — μήτε, neither — nor. due, subjugate. 
 
 thwart. 
 
 Αονλούμεΰα τη σαρκϊ 1 καϊ τοις πά&εσιν. 'Ύπό της ανάγκης πάντα δουλοϋ- 
 ται ταχϋ. Ή φιλία εις πολλούς μεριζομένη έξαμαυρονται. Τους φίλους ελευ- 
 ΰερώμεν, τους δε εχ&ροϋς χειρωμεϋ-α. Μη γαυροϋ σοφία, 11 μήτ" αλκή, μήτε πλού- 
 τω. Τό ή&ος μάλιστα εκ των έργων δηλοΰται. Ό υπερήφανος ταπεινοΐτο. Ού 
 καλόν ίστι, τη σοφία γαυροϋσΰαί. ΟΙ τοϊς άγ&&οΐς εναντιουμενοι αξιοί είσι ζη- 
 μΐοϋσϋαι. Οι στρατιώται υπό των βαρβάρων έδολοϋντο. ΤΙάντες κακοί ζη- 
 μιοϊντο. 
 
 The immoderate are enslaved to the flesh and the passions. Be (pi.) not 
 proud of your wisdom (dat.). May the haughty be brought low. It is dis- 
 graceful to thwart the good. The citizens fear, that they may be subjugated by 
 (υπό, w. gen.) the enemies. Cowardly (bad) soldiers are punished by the gene- 
 ral. One who prides himself in (part.) his (the) wisdom (dat.) is not wise. 
 
 § 98. Contract Verbs which, contrary to the rule, retain the short 
 Characteristic-vowel informing the Tenses. 
 
 1. As in several uncontracted pure verbs, the short characteristic-vowel is re- 
 tained (§94) contrary to the rule in forming the tenses ; so also in several con- 
 tract verbs. Most of these verbs take a σ in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and in the 
 first Aor. Pass., and the tenses derived from both of these forms. This is indi- 
 cated by the phrase, Pass, with σ (§ 95). They are the following: 
 
 (a) -άω. 
 γελά ω, to laugh, Put. γελάσομαι ; Aor. εγέλάσα. Pass, with σ. 
 k λάω (usually έλαύνω), to drive, Fut. ίλάσω (Att. ελω, \ 83), etc. 
 ϋ-λάω, to bruise, ΰ-λ&σω, etc. Pass, with σ. 
 κλάω,ίο breah, κλάσω, etc. Pass, with σ. 
 χαλάω, to loosen, χαλάσω, etc. Pass, with σ. 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (a), (δ). 2 §161,3, 
 
§ 98.] CONTRACT PURE VERBS. Ill 
 
 δαμάω (usually δαμάζω), to subdue, Aor. έδάμάσα. Pass, with σ. 
 
 περάω,ίο transport, to sell, Fut. περάσω ; Aor. έπέρΰσα ; Perf. πεπέράκα ; but 
 
 περάω, to pass over (In trans.), Fut. -κεράσω ; Aor. έπέράσα. (These seven 
 
 verbs have a liquid before the characteristic- vowel a), 
 σπάω, to draw, σπάσω, etc. Pass, with σ. 
 σχάω, to loose, to open, σχάσω, etc 
 
 (b) -έω. 
 άκέομαι, to heed, άκέσομαι, ήκεσάμην ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ηκεσμαι ; Aor. Pass. 
 
 ήκέσ&ην. 
 άλέω,ίο grind, to beat, Put. άλω (§ 83) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, άλήλεσμαι ($ 89). 
 άρκέω, to suffice, etc. Pass, with σ (also to be sufficient), 
 έμέω, to vomit, Put. έμέσω, etc.; Perf. Act. έμήμεκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass, έμή- 
 
 μεσμαι (§89). 
 ζέω, to boil, usually intrans., and ζένννμί, usually trans. Pass, with σ. 
 ξέω, to scrape. Pass, with σ. — τε λέω, to accomplish, Fut. τελώ (§ 83). Pass. 
 
 with σ. 
 τ ρέω, to tremble. — χ έ ω, to pour. 
 
 Remake:. The following have in some tenses the long, in others, the short 
 vowel : 
 aiv έω, to praise, Fut. αΐνέσω ; Aor. ήνεσα ; Perf. rjvena ; Aor. Pass, ήνέ&ην , 
 
 but Peif. Mid. or Pass, ήνημαι. 
 αίρέω, to take, Aor. Pass, ήρέΰην ; also η ; e. g. αίρησω, ήρηκα, ηρημαι. 
 γ αμέ ω, to marry, Fut. γαμώ (§ 83); Aor. εγημα; Perf. γεγάμηκα; Aor. Pass. 
 
 εγαμήΰην (I was taken to wife), 
 δέω, to bind, δήσω, έόησα, εδησάμην; but δέδεκα, δέδεμαι, εδέ&ην ; Fut. Perf. 
 
 δεδησομαι, which takes the place of the Fut. Pass, δε&ήσομαι not used by 
 
 the Attic writers. 
 κ a 7. έ ω, to call, Fut. καλώ (§ 83) ; Aor. εκά?.εσα ; Perf. Act. κέκ?,ηκα ; Perf. Mid. 
 
 or Pass. κέκ7.•ημαι, I am called; Fut. Perf. κεκ.7„ήσομαι, I shall be called; Aor. 
 
 Pass. έκ7>ή•&ην ; Fut. Pass. κ7~η-&ήσομαι. ; Fut. Mid. κα>.ονμαι ; Aor. Mid. 
 
 έκα7^εσάμην. 
 π ο •& έ ω, to desire, old Attic Fut. πο&έσομαι ; Aor. έπόΰεσα ; elsewhere πο&ήσω, 
 
 έπό&ησα ; Perf. Act. πεπό&ηκα ; πεπόΰημαι ; Aor. Pass, έποΰέσΰ-ην. 
 πον έω, laboro, Fut. πονήσω, etc. (to work) ; πονέσω (to be in pain) ; Perf. πεπό- 
 
 νηκα in both senses. 
 
 (c) -όω. 
 αρόω, to plough, Fut. άρόσω, Aor. ηροσα : Perf. Mid. or. Pasi. άοήρομαι (§ 89 j ; 
 Aor. Pass, ήρόΰην. 
 
112 
 
 TENSE-FORMATION OF CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 [§99 
 
 § 99. Para 
 
 ACTIVE, 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic ε. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Perfect 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Future 
 
 Aorist 
 
 σπ(ά-ω)ώ, to draw, 
 
 εσπ(α-ον)ων 
 
 έσπάκα 
 
 έσπάκειν 
 
 σπ&σω 
 
 έσπασα 
 
 τελ(έ-ω)ώ, to accom- 
 
 ετέλ(ε-ον)ουν [plish, 
 
 τετέλεκα 
 
 έτετελέκείν 
 
 τελώ 
 
 ετελεσα 
 
 άρ(ό-ω)ώ, to plough, 
 
 ηρ(ο-ον)ουν 
 
 άρ-ήροκα 
 
 άρ-ηρόκείν 
 
 άρόσω 
 
 ηροσα 
 
 PAS 
 
 Aorist 
 
 έσπά-σ--&ην | ε τ ελέ-σ -U ην | ηρόΰην 
 
 Verbal adjectives : σπα-σ τέος, -τέα, -τέον 
 
 Rem. 1. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. with σ, see § 95 ; and on the 
 Attic reduplication in αρ-ηρομαι, § 89, (a). — The further inflection of εσπα-σ- 
 μαι, εσττά-σ-μην, τετέλε-σ-μαι, ετετελέ-σ-μην is like that of κεκέλευ-σ-μαι, έκε- 
 κελεν-σ-μην (§ 95). 
 
 Rem. 2. On the Attic Put. (τελέσω = τελώ, τελείς, etc., τελέσομαι = τελού- 
 μαι, τελεϊ, etc.), see § 83. 
 
 Rem. 3. Two contract verbs assume σ in the Pass , although they lengthen 
 the characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. χόω, to heap, Put. χώσω, 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέχωσμαι, Aor. Pass, έχώσϋην, and χ ρ ά ω, to give an oracle, 
 Put. χρήσω, Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέχρησμαι, Aor. εχρησϋ-ην. — Χ ράομαι, to use, 
 Put. χρησομαι, has in the Perf. κέχρημαι, but in the Aor. εχρήσϋην. On the 
 contrary, ελάω, αινεω, αίρέω, δέω and άρόω, do not assume σ, although the char- 
 acteristic-vowel in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and in the Aor. Pass., remains short. 
 Comp. § 98. 
 
 L. Vocabulary. 
 Formation of the Tenses of Contract Verbs 
 
 Αγρός, -ov, ό, ager, a field. 
 
 άδαημων, -ov, inexpe- 
 rienced, ignorant. 
 
 άκέομαι, to heal. 
 
 άκολον&έω, to. dot., to fol- 
 low, go behind, imitate. 
 
 άνελεν&ερία, -ας, η, illibe- 
 ralitas, disgraceful ava- 
 rice. 
 
 άτνχέω, to be unhappy. 
 
 &ήλος, -η, -ov, evident. 
 
 εάω, to let, allow, permit, 
 leave. 
 
 έλκος, -εος = -ονς, τό, ul- 
 cus, a sore, an ulcer. 
 
 ιατρός, -ov, ό, a physician. 
 
 καίριος, -a, -ov, and καί- 
 ριος, -ov, at the right 
 time, opportune, fitting. 
 
 καριτόομαι, to enjoy the 
 fruits of. 
 
 ιοσμέ«), to adorn. 
 
 κτάομαι, to acquire, gain ; 
 perf., to possess, have. 
 
 λογίζομαι, to think, con- 
 sider, reflect. 
 
 λόγιος, -a, -ov, eloquent, 
 intelligent. 
 
 μηδέποτε, w. imp. or suhj 
 in an imp. sense, never. 
 
 οίκέω, to dwell, inhabit 
 
 οίκοδομέω, to build a 
 house, build. 
 
§99.] 
 
 TENSE-FORMATION OF CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 digms 
 
 MIDDLE 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic ε. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 σπ(ά-ο)ώ-μαι 
 έσπ(α-ό)ώ-μην 
 έσπ α- σ- μα ι 
 ε σπά-σ- μη ν 
 σπάσομαι 
 εσπασάμην 
 
 τε?ι(έ-ο)ον-μαι 
 έτελ(ε-ό)ού-μην 
 τ ετέλε-σ- μαι 
 ε τ ε τ ε λ ε - σ - μ η ν 
 τελούμαι 
 ετελεσάμην 
 
 άρ(ό-ο)οϋ-μαί 
 
 ήρ(ο-ό)ού-μτν 
 
 άρ-ήρομαι 
 
 άρ-ηρόμην 
 
 άρόσομαι 
 
 ηροσάμην 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 Future \σπα-σ-•&ήσομαι \τελε-σ-•&ήσομαι \ άρο&ήσομαι 
 
 τελε-σ-τέος, -έα, -έον 
 
 αρο-τεος, -εα, -εον. 
 
 πενιχρός, -α, -όν, poor. σιωπηλός, -ή, -όν, silent, ύψόω, to elevate. 
 πλοντέω, to be or become σφάλλω, to shake, make χηρόω, to deprive, rob, 
 rich. fall, deceive. bereave. 
 
 ΟΙ περί rbv Αεωνίδαν τριακόσιοι 1 γενναίως μαχόμενοι έτελεύτησαν. Νίκη- 
 σον οργην τω λογίζεσΰαι 2 κα?ιώς. Μακάριος, δςτις εντνχησεν εις τέκνα. ΤΙολ- 
 λούς κακώς πράττοντας ώρϋωσε τύχη. Σφάλ?<.ει εκείνους, ους αν ύψωση τύχη. 
 'Ράδια πάντα •&εώ τελέσαι. Μηδέποτε κρίνειν άδαήμονας άνδρας ίασης. 'Έν 
 οις αν τόποις τις άτνχηση, τούτοις πλησιάζων ούχ ήδεται. Ό νεανίας άκολον- 
 ΰησάτω τη σοφία. 3 Ό ποιητής τον λογιώτατον 'Οδυσσέα σιωπηλότατον πεποίη- 
 κεν. Οί άγα&οϊ πατρίδα κοσμήσουσιν. ΤΙολλάκις πενιχρός άνηρ αιψα μάλ' 
 επλούτησεν. Πολλοί κεκτημένοι μεν πολλά, ου χρώνται δε δι' ανελεν&ερίαν. 
 Αύσανδρος, ό Σπαρτιάτης, μεγάλων τιμών 4 ήξιώΰη. Οί ήμεροδρόμοι ουκ εχρη- 
 σαντο ΰποδήμασιν 2 εν ταϊς όδοις. Ή πόλις πολλών ανδρών 6 έχηρώ&η. Οί ια- 
 τροί τά, έλκη άκέσονται. Ή γλώττα σιγην καιρίαν κεκτημένη καϊ γέροντι καϊ 
 νέω τιμήν φέρει. Ουδείς έπαινον ήδοναϊς εκτησατο. Ούτε τω καλώς άγρον φν- 
 τευσαμένω δηλον, όςτις καρπώσεται, ούτε τω κα7.ώς οΐκίαν οίκοδομησαμένω δή- 
 ?Μν, όςτις οικήσει. 
 
 The good will love (αγαπάω) and honor the good. Noble youths will follow 
 virtue. The citizens will think the brave warriors deserving of great honor. 
 Alexander, king of the Macedonians (ό Μακεδών, -όνος), conquered Darius 
 king of the Persians. Leonidas and his 300 warriors adorned their country by 
 their bravery. The citizens thought the brave warriors deserving of great honors. 
 Fulfil (aor.) for me, Ο Zeus, my prayer! The soldiers have conquered the ene- 
 mies. The war has robbed the town of many citizens. The enemies were con- 
 quered. The brave warriors will be thought by the citizens deserving of great 
 honors. The physicians healed the ulcer. No one will gain praise by pleasures. 
 The town has been robbed of many citizens. It has all (plur.) been well fulfilled. 
 
 1 i. e. Leonidas and his 300 warriors. 2 § 161, 3, 
 4 § 158, 7. (γ). 6 § 158, 5. 
 
 10* 
 
 3 § 161 2. (a), (δ). 
 
114 IMPURE VERBS. — STRENGTHENING THE STEM. [§§ 100, 101. 
 
 § 100. 2. Imp ure Verbs. 
 Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 
 
 1. Impure verbs, i. e. those whose characteristic is a consonant 
 (§ 92), undergo several changes in the stem, a part of which take 
 place in the formation of the tenses ; these changes in the stem are 
 as follows : 
 
 (a) There is either a strengthening consonant added ; e. g. τνη-τ-ω, 
 stem ΤΤΠ; κράζ-ω, stem ΚΡΑΓ; 
 
 (b) or the stem-vowel is lengthened ; e. g. φενγ-ω, stem ΦΤΓ; 
 ληβ•-ω, stem ΑΑΘ; τήκ-ω, stem ΤΑΚ; 
 
 (c) or there is a change of the stem-vowel in the tenses ; this 
 change may be called variation, and the vowel subject to the change, 
 the variable vowel; e. g. κλέπτ-ω, ε-κίαπ-ψ, κέ-κλοφ-α; Comp. 
 English fly, flew, flown, — sing, sang, sung. 
 
 2. In verbs, whose stem is thus changed in the formation of the 
 tenses, the two different stems must be distinguished, viz. the origi- 
 nal, simple one, and the full, strengthened one ; the former is called 
 the pure, the latter the impure, stem. The Pres. and Impf. of these 
 verbs contain the impure stem, the secondary tenses (when such are 
 formed), and especially the second Aor., the pure stem ; but the 
 other tenses either the pure or impure ; e. g. 
 
 Pres. τύπ-τ-ω, to strike, Aor. II. Pass, έ-τϋπ-η ν Fut. τύψω (τύπ-σω) 
 λείπ-ω, to leave, Aor. II. Act. ε - λ Ι π- ο ν λείψω (λείπ-σω) 
 
 3. For every form of a verb which cannot be derived from the 
 Pres. tense in use, another Pres. is assumed, mostly for the mere 
 purpose of formation ; this may be called the Theme (&έμά), and is 
 printed in capitals, so as to distinguish it from the form of the Pres. 
 in actual use ; thus, e. g. φεύγω is the Pres. form in use, ΦΤΓΩ, is 
 the assumed Pres. form, or the Theme, in order to construct the se- 
 cond Aor., ε-φνγ-ον. 
 
 § 101. Strengthening of the Stem. 
 
 1. The strengthening of the stem by consonants consists in mere- 
 ly strengthening the simple characteristic consonant of the stem by 
 means of another consonant ; e. g. 
 
 τνπτω, to strike, Aor. II. Pass, έ- τϋπ-ην 
 τάττω, to arrange, " " ε-ταγ-ην 
 
 κράζω, to cry out, " Act. ε-κράγ-ον . 
 
 2. Yet the stem, strengthened in this way, is found only in the 
 
§ 102. J VERBS. — CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOAVEL. 115 
 
 Pres. and Impf. ; in the other tenses the strengthening letters are 
 omitted and the simple stem appears ; e. g. 
 
 Pres. τνπτω Impf. favirrov Aor. Π. Pass, ετντζην Fut. τνψω (τνττσω). 
 
 Remark. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. it in ΤΤΠ-Ω, is called the 
 pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. πτ in τυτχτ-ω, the impure 
 characteristic. 
 
 3. The short stem-vowel of many verbs is lengthened in the Pres 
 
 and Impf. ; this short vowel reappears in the second Aor., and in 
 
 the Fut. of liquid verbs. Thus ; 
 
 a is changed into η in mute verbs, e. g. (ε-λύι?-ον) λήγω 
 
 a " cll " liquid " " (φαν -ω) φαίνω 
 
 ε " ει " " " " (φ&ερ-ώ) φθείρω 
 
 ϊ " εί " mute " " ( ε-λϊπ-ον) λείπω 
 
 Ι " ΐ " " and liquid verbs, " (ε-τρίβ-ην ) τρίβω 
 
 ν " ν " " " " " " (ε-φρύγ-ην) φρνγω 
 
 ν " εν " mute verbs, " (ε-0 -uy-ov) φεύγω. 
 
 §102. Change 7- Variation of the Stem -vow el. 
 
 1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel, § 100, 1. (c), oc 
 curs only in the Secondary tenses, except in a few first Perfects. 
 
 2. Most mute, as well as liquid, verbs, with a monosyllabic stem 
 and with δ as a stem-vowel, take the variable vowel, namely, short 
 a in the second Aor. instead of ε ; e. g. 
 
 τρέπ-ω, to turn, Aor. Π. Act. ε-τραπ-ον 
 τρέφ-ω, to nourish, " Pass, ε - τ ρ α φ - ην 
 
 στέ/Λ-ω, to send, " " έ-σταλ-ην 
 
 φτ&είρ-ω, to destroy, " " έ-φΰ-αρ-ην. 
 
 But not fxjlysyllables ; e. g. άγγέ/Λω, to announce, Aor. II. Pass. ηγγέλην. 
 
 Rem. 1. This change of the stem-vowel does not occur in the second Aor 
 Pass, of some verbs of this class (the second Aor. Act. not being used), because 
 the second Aor. Pass, cannot be mistaken for the Impf., see § 103, Rem. 2 ; e. g 
 β λ ε - ω, to see, Impf. Ι-/?λεττ-ον, second Aor. Pass. έ-β?ιέπ-ην. 
 
 3. Liquid verbs with monosyllabic stems and with the stem- vowel 
 ε, take the variable «, not only in the second Aor., but also in the 
 first Perf. and first Plup. Act. and the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or 
 Pass, and the first Aor. Pass. ; e. g. 
 
 στέλ?.ω, to send, Put. στελ-ώ Perf. έ-σταλ-κα ε-στα7^-μαί Aor. ε-στά?^--&ην . 
 But not polysyllables ; e. g. ήγγελκα, ψ/γέ?&ην from άγγέλλω. Comp. No. 2. 
 
 4. Those mute verbs, which have ε in the final stem-syllable of 
 the Pres., take the variable ο in the second Perf. ; but those which 
 have ει in the final stem-syllable, take οι ; liquid-verbs, which have 
 ε or ε* in this syllable, take ο ; e. g. 
 
116 REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. [§ 103. 
 
 τρέφω, to nourish, τέτροφα δέρω, to flay, όέδορα 
 
 λείπω, to leave, λέλοίπα σπείρω, to soio, έσπορα. 
 
 5. The following take the variable o, in the first Perf., contrary 
 to the rule in No. 1. 
 
 κλέπτω, to steal, first Perf. κέκλοφα, but Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέκλεμμαι (κέ• 
 
 κλαμμαι very rare and only poetic). 
 λέγω, to collect, first Perf. ξυνείλοχα, ε ξ είλοχα; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 σννείλεγμαι. 
 πέμπω, to send, first Perf. πέπομφα; but Perf. Mid. or Pass, πέπεμμαι. 
 τρέπω, to turn, first Perf. r έτ ροφά, (in form like the second Perf. of τρέφω, to 
 
 nourish). 
 
 6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with 
 
 the stem -vowel ε, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the variable a in 
 
 the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still the a is not found in the first Aor. 
 
 Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs ; e. g. 
 
 στρέφω, to turn, Perf. Mid. or Pass, έστραμμαι, but first Aor. Pass, εστρέφ&ην 
 τρέπω, to turn, " τετ ρ α. μ μ at, " " ετρέφΰην 
 
 τρέφω, to nourish, " τέΰ-ραμμαί " " έΰ-ρέφ&ην. 
 
 §103. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. 
 The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting 
 the tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal- 
 endings, -or, -όμην, -ην, -ήσομαι, -a and -ειν, to the pure character- 
 istic of the verb ; e. g. second Aor. ε-λϊπ-ον, but first Aor. ε-παίδεν- 
 σ-α ; partly in being formed throughout from the unchanged pure 
 verb-stem, e. g. λείπω ε-λ ϊ π-ον, φεύγω ε-φ ν γ-ον ; and partly in 
 having the variable vowel, e. g. στρέφω, ε-στραφ-ην, στράφ-ήσομαι; 
 but ε-ατρεφ-&ψ. 
 
 Rem. 1. The second Perf. does not always retain the short stem-vowel, but it 
 either lengthens it in many verbs, viz. a into η, and after p and vowels into 0. ; 
 e.g. 
 
 κράζω, to cry out. second Aor. έ-κρΰγ-ον second Perf. κέ-κράγ-α 
 φρίσσω, to shudder, stem:4>PIK(Z) " πέ-φρίκ-α 
 
 ■&άλλω, to bloom, Put. ϋ-άλ-ώ " τέ-ΰ-ηλ-α; 
 
 so, πέφηνα, λέλη&α from ΦΑΝ-ω, ΑΑΘ-ω ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- 
 thong of the Pres. ; e. g. πέφευγα from φεύγω, but second Aor. Act. έφϋγον, τέ- 
 τηκα from τήκω, but second Aor. Pass, ετακην. 
 
 Rem. 2. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. would not be distinguished from 
 the Impf, at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no second Aor. 
 Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., because this has a different end* 
 ing from the Impf. ; e. g. 
 
 γράφω Impf. έγράφον Aor. II. Act. wanting Aor. II. Pass, έγρχφην. 
 
§§ 104, 105.] MUTE VERBS. CHARACTERISTIC. 117 
 
 A. Mute Verbs. 
 §104. Introduction 
 Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three classes ; in 
 each of these classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. 
 and Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure characteris- 
 tic (§ 100, 2). 
 
 1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (β, π, φ pure char- 
 acteristic ; πτ impure characteristic) ; e. g. 
 
 (a) pure characteristic, ηεμπ-ω, to send, τρίβ-ω, to rub, γράφ-ω, 
 to write ; 
 
 (b) impure characteristic, τυπτ-ω, to strike, (pure characteristic it, 
 pure stem ΤΤΠ), βλάπτ-ω, to injure, (β, BAAB), ρίπτ-ω, 
 to hurl, (φ, 'PI Φ). 
 
 2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (κ, γ, χ pure 
 characteristic ; σα or Attic ττ, impure characteristic) ; e. g. 
 
 (a) pure characteristic, πλεκ-ω, to weave, άγ-ω, to lead, τεύχ-ω, to 
 prepare ; 
 
 (b) impure characteristic, φρίσσ-ω, Att. φρίττ-ω, to shudder, (pure 
 characteristic κ, pure stem ΦΡ1Κ), τάσα-ω, Att. τάτζ-ω, to 
 arrange, (γ, ΤΑΓ), βησσ-ω, Att. βήττ-ω, to cough, (χ, BHX). 
 
 3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (τ, δ, & pure char- 
 acteristic ; ζ impure characteristic) ; e. g. 
 
 (a) pure characteristic, άνύτ-ω, to complete, αδ-ω, to sing, πείϋ•~ω, 
 to persuade ; 
 
 (b) impure characteristic, φράζ-ω, to say, (pure characteristic δ, 
 pure stem ΦΡΑΔ). 
 
 § 105. Remarks on the Characteristic. 
 
 1. Some verbs in -σσω, -τ τ ω, have a Tau-mute — not a Kappa-mute — for 
 the pure characteristic: άρμόττω (αρμόζω), to Jit, Fut. -όσω ; — ερέσσω, to 
 τοιν, Fut. -έσω ; — ττ άσσω, to scatter, Put. -άσω ; — π λάσσω, to form, Fut. -άσω ; 
 — - τίσσω, to pound, Fut. -ίσω. 
 
 The verb ν άσσω, to press together, varies between the two formations, Fut. 
 νάξω, etc., Perf. Mid. or Pass, νένασμαι, verbal adjective ναστός. 
 
 2. The following verbs in -ζω, which for the most part express a call or sound, 
 have for their pure characteristic not a Tau but a Kappa-mute, usually y, viz. 
 α Ιά ζω, to groan, Fut. αΐάξω ; u 7. α λ ά ζω, to shoict ; not ζ ω, to squeak, to grunt 
 (like a swine); κράζω, to scream; κρώζω, to caiv ; μαστίζω, to whip; δδά- 
 ζω, to bite; οϊμωζω, to lament, Fut. ο'ιμωξομαι ; δ?.ολνζω, to howl; ρ'υστά•' 
 ζω, to drag to and fro ; στάζω and σταλάζω, to trickle ; σ τ ε ν ά ζω, to sigh ; 
 
118 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [§ 106. 
 
 στηρίζω, to make firm ; στίζω, to prick ; συ pi ζω, to whistle ; σφάζω ( Att. 
 σφάττω), to kill; σφύ ζω, to throb; τ pi ζω, to chirp (τέτριγα) ; φ 2. ν ζω, to bubble. 
 
 3. The following verbs in -ζω vary between the two modes of formation: 
 βαστάζω, to bear, Fut. -άσω, etc., Aor. εβαστάχ&ην ; — νυστάζω, to nod, to 
 sleep, Fut. -άσω and -άξω ; — παίζω, to sport, Fut. παιξονμαι (§ I. 6, 3) and παί- 
 ζομαι, Aor. έπαισα, Perf. Mid. or Pass, πέπαισμαί. 
 
 4. The following verbs in -ζω have for a pure characteristic, γγ : κλάζω, 
 to sound, to clang, Perf. κέ-κλαγγ-α, Fut. κλάγξω, Aor. εκλαγξα ; — πλάζω, to 
 cause to wander, Fut. πλάγξω, etc., Aor. Pass, επλάγχ&ην ;— σαλπίζω, to blow 
 a trumpet, Fut. -ίγξω. 
 
 § 106. Fo rmation of the Tenses of Mu te Verbs. 
 
 Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. with 
 the tense-characteristic σ, and the first Perf. and first Plup. Act. 
 with the aspirated endings -a and -ειν, when the characteristic is a 
 Pi or Kappa-mute ; but with the endings -κα, -κειν, when it is a Tau- 
 mute. The Tau-mute, however, is omitted before κ ; and before μ 
 and τ in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, is changed into σ ; but this σ is 
 omitted before σ of the personal-endings ; e. g. πεί&ω, to persuade, 
 πέπεισμαι, -otai ; φράζω, to speak, πέφρασμαι, -σται ; still, the se- 
 cond Pers. is πέττει-σαι. The vowels α, ι, ν in the verbs which 
 have a Tau-mute as a characteristic, are short before endings with 
 the tense-characteristic o~ and κ (•κα, -κειν) ; e. g. φράζω, φραβω, 
 'ίφράβα, πεφράκα-, πλάβσω, to form, πλάσω; νομίζω, to think, ένό- 
 μϊσα ; κλνζω, to wash, κλνσω, etc. 
 
 Rem. 1. On the changes which the Mutes undergo by the addition of the end- 
 ings beginning with σ, ■&, μ or r, and before the aspirated endings -ά, -είν, and 
 also on the lengthening of ε into ει before σ of verbs in -ένδω or -ένΰω, e. g. 
 σπένδ-ω, to make a libation, Fut. (σπένδ-σω) σπείσω, see § 8. 
 
 Rem. 2. When μ precedes a Pi-mute, which serves as a characteristic, e. g. 
 in π'εμπ-ω, the μ is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings beginning 
 with μ ; thus πέμπ-ω, to send, πε-πεμ-μαι (instead of πέ-πεμπ-μαι, πέ-πεμμ-μαή, 
 κάμπτ-ω, to bend, κέ-καμ-μαι (instead of κε-καμπ-μαι, κε-καμμ-μαι). So also 
 when two y's stand before μ, one of them is omitted ; e. g. σφίγγ-ω, to bind, 
 έ-σφίγ-μαι (instead of έ-σφίγγ-μαο). 
 
 Rem. 3. Verbs whose characteristic is a Tau-mute, do not form the second 
 Aor., in the Common Language. 
 
 Rem. 4. Endings beginning with σΰ- drop the σ after a mute, and the muto 
 is changed into an aspirate on account of the ■& following ; e. g. κεκρνφΰαι in- 
 stead of κεκρνψ-&αί, πεπλέχ-&αι instead of πεπλέξϋ -at. 
 
 Rem. 5. The third person PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., which, in pure 
 verbs, properly ends in -νται and -ντο, in impure verbs both mute and liquid, 
 cannot have these endings, on account of the accumulation of so many conso- 
 nants. Hence this person is usually expressed by a periphrasis consisting of 
 
§ 107.J 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 119 
 
 the plural of the Perf. Part., and the third person PL Pres. and Impf. of είναι, to 
 be ; sometimes however the ν is dropped, and its place supplied by an a, which is 
 aspirated after a Kappa and Pi-mute, but after a Tau-mute is unaspirated ; 
 e.g. 
 
 τρίβ-ω, to rub, τ'ε-τριμ-μαι third Pers. PL τετρίόάται (instead of τέτρφνταή 
 
 Plup. έτετρίφάτο 
 πλέκ-ω, to tvnst, πέ-πλεγ-μαι third Pers. ΡΙ.ττεττλέ^αταί (instead of πέπλεκνταή 
 τάττ-ω, to arrange, τέ-ταγ-μαί " τετάχαται (instead of τέταγνται) 
 
 σκενάζ-ω, to prepare, έ-σκενασ-μαί " έσκενάδαταί (instead of έσκεναδνται) 
 χωρίζ-ω, to separate, κε-χώρίσ-ααι - κεχωρίδαται^ίβ&άοίκεχώρίδνται). 
 
 Paradigms of Mute Verbs. 
 
 §107. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi -mute 
 
 (ft η, ςρ). 
 
 (a) Pure Characteristic, β, jt, £ (Fut -ψω). 
 
 τρΐβ-ω, to rub. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 Perf. 
 
 Plup. 
 Fut. 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Ind. τρΐβ-ω Subj. τρΐβ-ω Imp. τρϊβ-ε Inf. τρΐβ-ειν Part τρΐβ-ων 
 
 Ind. ε-τρΐβ-ον Opt. τρΐβ-οιμι 
 
 Ind. (τέ-τρίβ-ά) τέ-τρΐό-α Subj. τε-τρΐ^-ω Imp. not used Inf. τε- 
 
 τρϊψ-έναι Part, τε-τρίό-ώς 
 Ind. (ε-τε-τρΐβ-είν) έ-τε-τρΐψ-ειν Opt τε-τρΐφ-οιμι 
 Ind. (τρίβ-σω) τρίψω Opt. τρίψοιμί Inf. τρίψείν Part, τρίψων 
 Ind. έ-τρϊώα Subj. τρίψω Opt τρίψαιμι Imp. τρϊψον Inf. τρϊψαι 
 
 Part, τρίύ-ας- 
 
 MIDDLE 
 
 Pres. I Ind. τρΐβ-ομαι Subj. τρΐβ-ωμαο Imp. τρΐ3-ον Inf. τρΐβ-εσΰαι 
 
 Part τρίβ-όμενος 
 Impf. I Ind ε-τρίβ-όμην Opt. τρίβ-οίμην 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Ind. 
 8.1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.I. 
 
 (τέ-τρφ-μαί) 
 τε-τριμ-μαι 
 τέ-τριψαι 
 τέ-τρίττ-ται 
 τε-τρίμ-με&ον 
 τέ-τρι,ό-ϋον 
 τέ-τριψ-&ον 
 τε-τρίμ-μεΰα 
 τέ-τρίό-ΰε 
 
 τε-τριμ-μένοί είσί(ν) 
 I or τε-τρίό-άταί 
 
 Plup. 
 
 8.1. 
 
 ε-τε-τρίμ-μην D ε- 
 
 Ind. 
 
 2 
 
 ε-τε-τρνύο έ- 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ε-τε-τριπ•το ε 
 
 Opt 
 
 
 τε-τριμ-μενος ειην 
 
 Imperative. 
 (τέ-τρφ-σο) 
 τέ-τριψο 
 τε-τρίφ-ϋ-ω 
 
 τέ-τριό-ΰον 
 τε-τρίο-ΰων 
 
 τέ-τριό-ϋ-ε 
 τε-τρίό-ϋ-ωσαν 
 or τε-τρίό-ΰων 
 
 Infinitive. 
 (τε-τρΐβ-ΰ-αι) 
 τε-τρϊψ••&αί 
 
 Participle. 
 ■ε-τριμ-μένος, -η, ον 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 τε-τριμ-μένος ύ 
 
 ■ε-τρίμ-μεΰ-ον Ρ. έ-τε-τρίμ-μεϋα 
 -έ•τρίό•'&ον έ-τέ-τριφ-ΰ-ε 
 
 re -τρίό-ΰ-ην τε-τριμ-μένοι ήσαν. 
 
 τρίψομαί Opt. τρινροίμην Inf. rpiyeevat Part, τριψόμενος 
 
 έ-τριψάμην Snbj. τρίψωμαι Opt τριψαιμην Imp. τρϊψαι Ιη£ 
 
 τρί-ώασϋ-αί Part, τρίψάμενος 
 
 τε-τρίψοααι Opt. τε-τριψοίμην Inf. τε-τρίψεσ&αι Part τε-τοί- 
 
 ■ψόμενος. 
 
 Fut 
 Aor. I. 
 
 F. Pf. 
 
 Ind 
 Ind 
 
 Ind 
 
120 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 [§ 108, 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. I. 
 Aor.IL 
 Fut.H. 
 
 Ind. (k -τρίβ-ΰην) έ-τρίφ-βην Subj. τριφ-ΰώ Opt. τριφ-ΰείην Inf. 
 
 τρίφ-ΰήναί Imp. τρίφ-ϋ-ηπ Part, τριφ-ΰείς 
 Ind. τριφ-ΰ-ήσομαί Opt. τριφ-ΰησοίμην Inf. τρίφ-•&ήσεσΰαί Part. 
 
 τριφ-ϋ-ησόμενος 
 Ind. ε-τρίβ-ην Subj. τρϊβ-ώ Opt. τρ'φ-είην Imp. τρίβ-ηβ -L Inf. 
 
 τρίβ-ήναι Part, τρϊβ-είς 
 Ind. τρίβ-ησομαι Opt. τρϊβ-ησοίμην Inf. τρϊβ-ήσεσΰ -at Part, τρϊ/?- 
 
 Verbal adjective: (τρφ-τός) τρυπ-τός, -η, -όν, τριπ-τέος, -έα, -έον. 
 
 108. (b) Impure Characteristic , π τ ι λ Pres. and 
 Impf. (Fut. --ψ ω). 
 
 κόπτω, to cut. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 Perf. I. 
 Plup. I. 
 Perf. II. 
 Plup. II. 
 Fut. 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. Pf. 
 
 κοπτ-ω 
 έ-κοπτ-ον 
 (κέ-κοπ-ά) κέ-κοφ-α 
 ε-κε-κόφ-είν 
 κέ-κοπ-α (Horn.) 
 έ-κε-κόπ-ειν 
 (κόπ-σω) κόψω 
 έ-κοψα 
 
 κοπτ-ομαι 
 ε-κοπτ-όμην 
 κέ-κομ-μαι, like τέ-τριμμαι 
 έ-κε-κόμμην, like έ-τε-τρίμμην 
 
 κόψομαι 
 
 k -κοψάμην 
 
 κε-κόψομαι 
 
 A.or. Ι. ε-κόφ-ΰην 
 Fut. Ι. κοφ-ΰήσομαι 
 Aor. Π. ε-κόπ-ην 
 Fut. II. κοπ-ησομαί 
 
 Verbal adjective : κοπ-τός, -η, -ον, κοπ-τέος, -τέα, 
 
 Inflection of the 
 κάμπ-τ-ω to bend (κέκαμ-μαί 
 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 for κέκαμμ-μαι § 106, Eem. 2). 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S.i. 
 
 2. 
 
 κέκαμμαι 
 κέκαμψαί 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 κεκαμττται 
 
 κεκάμμεβ-ον 
 
 κέκαμφΰον 
 
 κέκαμφΰον 
 
 κεκάμμεΰα 
 
 κέκαμφϋε 
 
 3. 
 
 κεκαμμένοι είσί(ν) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 κέκαμψο 
 κεκάμφϋ-ω 
 
 κεκαμφϋ-ον 
 κεκύμφΰων 
 
 κέκαμφΰε 
 κεκάμφϋωσαν or κεκά/. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 κεκάμφ&αι 
 
 Participle. 
 κεκαμμένος, -η, -ον 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 κεκαμμένος ώ 
 
 Verbal adjective : καμπτός, -η, -όν, καμπτέος, -τέα, -τέον. 
 
 Μών, -ώνος, δ, aevum, du- 
 ration of time, time, 
 lifetime. 
 
 αλείφω, to anoint. 
 
 LI. Vocabulary. 
 
 βνσσόΰεν {fr„ ό βν&ός, the 
 deep), from the depth, 
 or the bottom. 
 
 γυμνός, -η, -όν, naked. 
 
 άνα-τρέπω, to turn up,, έξ-αλείφω, to wipe or rub 
 overturn, destroy. off, obliterate. 
 
 Βίοτος, -ου, 6, life, liveli- Φάπτω, to bury. 
 hood, food. καλύπτω, to conceal. 
 
 κάμπτω, to bend. 
 
 κατα-λείπω, to leave be- 
 hind, desert. 
 
 κεχρημένος, (perf. part, of 
 χράομαι, utor,) wanting, 
 w. gen. 
 
 κλέπτω, to steal. 
 
 κόπτω, to cut, strike. 
 
109.] 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 121 
 
 κρύπτω, to ^-lide, conceal. 
 
 μέλος, -εος = -ονς, τό, a 
 song, a melody. 
 
 μνχατος, -η, -ov, inmost, 
 hidden. 
 
 ναυμαχία, -ας, ή, a sea- 
 fight 
 
 πρεσβευτής^ -ov, δ, an am- 
 bassador, plot πρέσβεις. 
 
 προ-λείπω, to forsake, de- 
 sert 
 
 ρ"ιπτω, to throw, throw out. 
 
 σκληρος,-ά,-όν, dry, rough, 
 hard. 
 
 περι-τρέπω, to turn round, σνν-ΰ-άπτω, to bury to- 
 overturn. gether with. 
 
 τάξις, -ευς, ή, order, a 
 
 rank. 
 τρίβω, to rub. [phy. 
 
 τρόπαιον, -ου, τό, a tro- 
 φαίνω, to show 5 mid. to 
 
 appear. 
 φ&όνος, -ου, δ, envy. 
 φώρ, -ωρός, ό, a thief. 
 χορεύω, to dance. 
 
 Ό 7ra?c την έπιστολήν έγεγράφει. ΟΊ πολέμιοι πρέσβεις εις την πάλιν έπεμ- 
 ψαν. Οίνος και 1 τά κεκρυμμένα φαίνει βυσσόΰεν. Τίάν ϋψος εν ΰνητώ γενεί 
 περιέτρεψεν 2 η χρόνος, η φ&όνος. Ύάς των σπουδαίων φιλίας ουδ' αν ό πάς αιών 
 έξαλείψειεν. Σοφοκλής μετά την εν Σαλαμϊνι ναυμαχίαν περί τρόπαιον γυμνός 
 άληλιμμένος 3 -έχόρευσεν. Μίφμηκες γης μνχάτους οίκους προ?>ελοιπότες έρχον- 
 ται βιότου κεχρημένοι. ΪΙολ?ΜΚΐς όργη άν&ρώπων νουν έξεκάλυψεν. Τω Έπα- 
 μεινώνδον σώματι συνέ&α-ψε την δυναιιιν των Θηβαίων ό καιρός. Της αρετής 
 τόν πλοϋτον ου διαμειψόμεϋα τοις χρήμασιν. Ευριπίδης εν Μακεδονία τέ&απ- 
 ται. θεός τοϊς άν&ρώποις το μέλλον κεκάλυφεν. Οί Αακεδαιμόνιοι έτράφησαν 
 έν σκληροϊς ήΰ-εσιν. Άκουσας καλόν μέλος τερφ•&είης αν. Ύήμα παρά καιοόν 
 όιφ&εν ανέτρεψε πολλάκις βίον. Οί φώρες ήμίν τά χρήματα κεκλόφασιν* Οί 
 πολέμιοι την πόλιν άνατετρόφασιν. 4 Οί στρατιώται τάς τάξεις κατέλιπον. 6 
 
 The letter is (ί. e. has been) written by the boy. Ambassadors were sent (aor.) 
 by enemies into the town. Wine often discovers what the man has concealed 
 (part, sing.) in his heart. With the body of Epaminondas the power of the The- 
 bans was buried (aor. 2). The future has been concealed by God from men. 
 The Lacedaemonians brought up (aor.) their children in rough manners. A 
 beautiful song delights (aor.) us. Many treasures have been stolen by the 
 thieves. The enemies destroyed (aor.) (overturned) the town. By the soldiers 
 the ranks were deserted. 
 
 §109. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa- 
 mute {γ, v., γ)• 
 
 (a) Pure Characteristic, y, κ, r. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
 ImpT., σσ, Att. ττ, rarer ζ. 
 
 πλέκ-ω, to weave 
 
 τάσσω, Att. τάττω, to arrange. 
 
 Even. 
 
 2 The Aor. expresses a custom. 
 11 
 
 § 89. < § 102, 5. • § 101, 3. 
 
122 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 [§ 109. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 (έ-πλέκ-ΰην) k -πλέχ-ϋ-ην 
 
 (έ-τάγ-ΰην) έ-τάχ-•&ην 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 πλεχ-ΰήσομαΐ 
 
 ταχ--&ησομαι 
 
 Aor.rr. 
 
 έ-πλάκ-ην and ε-πλέκ-ην 
 
 έ-τάγ-ην 
 
 Put. Π. 
 
 πλακ-ήσομαι 
 
 ταγ-ησομαί 
 
 Verbal adjective : πλεκτός, -η, -όν ; πλεκ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον ; τακτός, τακτέος. 
 
 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 τάσσω, to arrange, and σφίγγω(\ 106, Rem. 2), to bind. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 τέταγμαι 
 
 έσφιγμαι 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 2. 
 
 τέταξαι 
 
 έσφιγξαι 
 
 τέταξο 
 
 εσφιγξο 
 
 3. 
 
 τετακται 
 
 έσφιγκται 
 
 τετάχ&ω 
 
 εσφίγχ&ω 
 
 D.l. 
 
 τετάγμεΰον 
 
 έσφίγμε-&ον 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 τέταχ&ον 
 
 έσφιγχ&ον 
 
 τέταχ&ον 
 
 έσφιγχ&ον 
 
 3. 
 
 τέταχ&ον 
 
 έσφιγχ-&ον 
 
 τετάχ&ων 
 
 εσφίγχ&ων 
 
 P.l. 
 
 τεταγμένα 
 
 εσφίγμε&α 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 τέταχ&ε 
 
 έσφιγχ-&ε 
 
 τέταχ•&ε 
 
 έσφιγχ&ε 
 
 3. 
 
 τεταγμένοι ε'ισί(ν) 
 
 εσφιγμένοι είσί(ν) 
 
 τετάχ&ωσαν 
 
 εσφίγχ&ωσαν 
 
 
 or τεταχαται 
 
 
 or τετάχ&ων 
 
 or εσφίγχ&ων 
 
 Inf. τετάχ&αι , ίσφίγχ&αι Part, τεταγμένος έσφιγμένος. 
 
 Αμαρτία, -ας, η, an of- 
 fence, a fault. 
 
 άν-έλπιστος, -ov, unex- 
 pected. 
 
 άνορνττω, to dig up again. 
 
 άπο-κηρύττω, to cause to 
 be proclaimed, disin- 
 herit, [ness. 
 
 άσ&ένεια, -ας, ή, weak- 
 
 άστεγος, -ov, without a 
 roof, houseless. 
 
 άφρων, -ov, foolish, brain- 
 less, [range. 
 
 όια-τάσσω, to order, ar- 
 
 όιχόμϋ&ος, -ov, double- 
 speaking, false. 
 
 εν-τακτος, -ov, well-or- 
 dered. 
 
 ήπιος, -ov, and ήπιος, -a, 
 -ov, mild. 
 
 LII. Vocabulary. 
 
 ΰ-έλγω, to charm, soften, παρα-πλάζω, to lead from 
 soothe. the right way, mislead. 
 
 κατα-πληττω, to strike πενητεύω, to be poor, 
 down, astonish, alarm, περι-άγω, to lead round. 
 
 κατα-φλέγω, to burn down, πλέκω, to knit, weave. 
 
 σνν-τάττω, to order, ar- 
 range systematically. 
 
 σφίγγω, to squeeze, or 
 draw together. 
 
 or totally consume. 
 κλόπιμος, -η, -ov, thievish, 
 
 stolen. 
 κλώ-φ, -ωπός, b, a thief. 
 
 κράζω (§ 103, Pern. 1), to ταραττω, to throw into 
 cry, cry out. confusion, disturb, ren- 
 
 λ'ιαν, very, violently, over- der uneasy. 
 
 much. ταραχή, -ης, η, confusion, 
 
 μεταλλάττω, to change. disturbance. 
 
 ξένος, -ου, ό, a stranger, τάσσω, to arrange, order. 
 
 a guest. [out. τύμβος, -ov, ό, a tomb. 
 
 δρέγω, to stretch the hand φυλάττομαι, w. ace, to 
 παρα-&ήκη, -ης, η, deposi- guard oneself from, be 
 turn, that which is laid on one's guard against, 
 down by any one. take care. 
 
 Τίολλάκις ήπιος μν&ος και άφρονα άνδρα έ-&ελξεν. Μη τύμβον τε-&αμμίνον 
 ανόρυξης. 1 ΑΙ φρενών ταραχαϊ παρέπλαγξαν και σοφόν. Ό πλοϋτος πολλάκις 
 περιηγαγεν* εις άσ&ένειαν. Θεμιστοκλέα, τον Άΰηναϊον, ό πατήρ άπεκηρυξε 
 όιά τάς εν τη νεότητι αμαρτίας, θεός πάντα εν τη φύσει άριστα διατέταχεν. 
 ΤΙλοντον έχων σην χείρα πενητεύουσιν όρεξον. Έάν έχωμεν χρήματα, έξομεν 3 
 
 4 153, Rem. 2. 2 See § 89, Rem. 3 έχω has the rough bxathing in the Fut. 
 
§110.] 
 
 MUTE VERBS. 
 
 123 
 
 φίλους. Οί πολέμιοι εις την πόλίν πεφεύγασιν. Ξένον σιγάν κρεΐττοτ. , // κε- 
 κραγέναι. 'Έλπιζε τιμών 1 τους γονέας πράξειν καλώς. Λίαν φιλών 1 σεαυτον 
 ουχ έξεις φίλον. Ύ Ων ό τρόπος εστίν εύτακτος, τούτοις και ό βίος συντέτακται. 
 Οί πολέμιοι έδιώχ-&ησαν. Πολλά μεν ανέλπιστα πράττεται, πολλά, δε πέπρακ- 
 ται, πολλά δε πραχϋησεται. ΈΊ πολέμων και πραγμάτων φροντίζεις, ό βίος σου 
 ταραχ&ήσεται. Τίεφύ?ιαξο τους άν&ρώπους, οι γλώτταν διχόμυΰον έχοισιν. 
 Άστεγον ε'ις οίκον δέξαι. Φωρών μη δέξη κλοπίμην ανδρών παραϋήκην • αμφό- 
 τεροι κλώπες, και ό δεξάμενος και ό κλέφιας. Πόνου μεταλ?^αχϋ-έντος, 2 οί πόνοι 
 γλυκείς. Ή πόλις υπό τών πολεμίων κατεφλέγη. Οί βάρβαροι καταπ?ιαγέντες 
 άπέφυγον. 
 
 The barbarians, pursued by the Hellenes, fled into the town. Their charac- 
 ter is well-ordered, who have also their life well-ordered. The enemies burnt 
 down (aor.) the town. The barbarians alarmed the citizens. If thou troublest 
 thyself about war and exploits, thou wilt render thy life uneasy. Many and 
 splendid exploits have been achieved (πράττω) by the Greeks. I will be on my 
 guard against men who have a double-speaking tongue. The women, alarmed 
 by the enemies, cried out. 
 
 §110. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Τ au- 
 ra ute (δ, τ, -&). 
 
 (a) Pure Characteristic, δ, r, ■&. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
 Impf, ζ, rarer σσ. — Put. -σω. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE . 
 
 Pres. 
 
 ■φεύδ-ω, 
 
 ■φεύδ-ομαι, 
 
 φράζ-ω, 
 
 φράζ-ομαι, 
 
 
 to deceive, 
 
 to lie, 
 
 to say, 
 
 to think, 
 
 Impf. 
 
 έ-ψευδ-ον 
 
 ε-ψευδ-όμην 
 
 έ-φραζ-ον 
 
 ε-φραζ-όμην 
 
 Perf. 
 
 (έ-ψευδ-κα) 
 
 (έ-ψευδ-μαι) 
 
 (πέ-φραδ-κα) 
 
 (πέ-φραδ-μαι) 
 
 
 έ-ψευ-κα 
 
 έ-φ>ευσ-μαι 
 
 πέ-φρά-κα 
 
 πέ-φρασ-μαι 
 
 Plup. 
 
 έ-ψεύ-κειν 
 
 έ--φεύσ•μην 
 
 ε-πε-φρά-κειν 
 
 έ-πε-φράσ-μην 
 
 Put. 
 
 (-φεύδ-σω) 
 
 (ψεύδ-σομαι) 
 
 (φράδ-σω) 
 
 (φράδ-σομαι) 
 
 
 ■φεύ-σω 
 
 ψεύ-σομαι 
 
 φρά-σω 
 
 φρά-σομαι 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 έ-ψευ-σα 
 
 ε-φ>εν-σάμην 
 
 έ-φρά-σα 
 
 ε-φρα-σάμην 
 
 P.Pf. 
 
 
 ε--φεύ-σομαι 
 
 
 πε-φρά-σομαι 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 (έ--ψεύδ--&ην) έ-ψεύσ-ΰην 
 
 (έ-φράδ-ΰ-ην) έ-φράσ-ΰην 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 ψευσ-ΰήσομαι 
 
 φρασ•-&ησομαι 
 
 Verbal adjective : (ψευδ-τέος) ψευσ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον ; φρασ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον. 
 
 Inflection of Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 έφιευσ-μαι 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 2. 
 
 έ'ώευ-σαι 
 
 έφιευ-σο 
 
 ε-ψεϋσ--&αι 
 
 3. 
 
 έφευσ-ται 
 
 έ-φεύ-σ-&ω 
 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 έψεύσ-μεΰον 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 2. 
 
 έ-φευ-σϋ-ον 
 
 έ-φευ-σϋ-ον 
 
 έ-ψευσ-μένος, -η, -ον 
 
 3. 
 
 έ-φεν-σϋ-ον 
 
 εφ)εύ-σ-&ων 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 Ιψεύσ-μεΰ-α 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 2. 
 
 έψευ-σΰ-ε 
 
 έφ>ευ-(τ&ε 
 
 έ-ψευσ-μένος ώ. 
 
 3. | έψευσ-μένοι είσί(ν) 
 
 έψεύ-σ&ωσαν or έ-φεύ-σϋ-ων] 
 
 § 176, 1. 
 
 2 Gen. absolute. 
 
124 LIQUID VERBS. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [§111 
 
 LIU. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άμαρτάνω, to err, be mis- μετέπειτα, afterwards. to trust to, rely upon. 
 
 taken, commit a fault, όλβος, -ου, 6, riches, pros- πληγή, -ης, ή, a blow, a 
 
 αρπάζω, to plunder. perity. wound. 
 
 αύθις, again. [thirst, όπάζω, to let follow, be- ρίγος, -εος=-ους, τό, cold. 
 
 δίψος, -εος = -ους, τό, stow. σκεδάζω, to scatter, dissi- 
 
 έγκώμιον, •ου, τό, eulogy, ορίζω, to fix, appoint. pate. 
 
 encomium. παύω, to cause to cease ; σπανίζω, to be in want. 
 
 ίτί, still, besides. τινά τίνος, to free a στρέψω, to turn. 
 
 ευφροσύνη, -ης, η, mirth. person from anything ; συν-αρμόζω, to fit togeth- 
 
 ίφηβος, -ου, ό, a youth. mid. to cease, w. part. er, adjust, arrange. 
 
 ηδη, already. πείθω, w. ace, to persuade; Φράζω, to tell, express, 
 
 μαλακίζω, to soften, ren- per/. 2, πέποιθα, w. dat., pronounce. 
 
 der effeminate. 
 
 ΐΐαϋσόν με, ω Φίλε, πόν&ν, σκέδασον δε μέριμνας, στρέψον δ' αύθις εις εύΦρο- 
 σύνας. Σπανιοϋσιν 1 οι τοις χρτ/μασιν ου χρώνται. Μιθριδάτης Άσίαν ηρπακεν. 
 Αόγισαι προ έργου. ΟΙ θεοί τοις θνητοίς όλβον ώπασαν. Ό θεός άπαντα 
 συνηρμοκεν . Ά ΪΤν συ κακώς δικάσης, σε θεός μετέπειτα δικάσει. Τους συνετούς 
 αν τις πείσειε τάχιστα ευ λέγων. 2 'Έν τοϊς Δράκοντος νόμοις μία άπασιν ώρισ- 
 το τοις άμαρτάνουσι ζημία, θάνατος. ΤΙλούτω πεποιθώς* άδικα μη πειρώ ποιείν. 
 'Υπέρ σεαυτοϋ μη Φράσης εγκώμια. Οι των 'Ελλήνων έφηβοι είθίσθησαν 3 φέ- 
 ■ ρειν λιμόν τε καϊ δίψος καϊ βϊγος, έτι δε πληγάς και πόνους άλλους. Εί πολέ- 
 μων 4 φροντιεΐς, 1 ό βίος σου ταραχθήσεται. Οί 'Αθηναίοι άει θαυμασθήσονται. 
 ΤΙλούτω 5 πολλοί ηδη έμαλακίσθησαν. 
 
 Cares are dissipated through [δια, ιυ. ace.) thee. He will be in want who does 
 not use his money. Success is bestowed on mortals by the gods. Everything 
 is arranged by God. The sensible can (άν, to. opt.) quickly be persuaded (aor. 
 1 pass.). Draco fixed (aor.) for all offenders one punishment, death. Wealth 
 had already rendered (aor.) all effeminate. We shall always admire the Athe-^ 
 nians. The Athenians accustomed their youths to bear all hardships. Socrates 
 was admired for (επί, w. dot.) his wisdom. It is not well to rely upon riches. 
 The song has dissipated the cares. 
 
 B. Liquid Verbs. 
 
 §111. Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 1. Liquid verbs, i. e. verbs whose characteristic is one of the li- 
 quids λ, μ, ν, ρ, form the Fut. Act. and Mid. and the first Aor. Act. 
 and Mid. without the tense-characteristic σ, but the Perf. Act. with 
 the tense-characteristic κ ; e. g. 
 
 σφάλλω (stem ΣΦΑΛ), Eut. σφα'λ-ώ, first Aor. i -σφηλ-α, Perf. έ-σφαλ-κα. 
 
 Rem. 1. The future-endings of liquid verbs, viz. -ώ and -ονμ,αι (arising from 
 
 1 § 83. 2 § 176, ι. 3 On the Augment, see § 87, 3. 
 
 4 §158, 6. l,(b). 6 H61,3. 
 
§111.] LIQUID VERBS. — FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 125 
 
 -έσω, -έσομαι), are inflected like the Pres. Act. and Mid. of contracts m -έω ; 
 e. g. φιλ-ό, oL/.-ovuaL. The Fut. Perf. is usually wanting in liquid verbs. 
 
 2. The Present tense of these verbs — with the exception of a few 
 whose stem-vowel is ε — is strengthened, either by doubling the 
 characteristic λ, or by inserting the liquid ν after the characteristic, 
 or by either lengthening the short stem-vowel, as is the case with all 
 verbs in -ινω, ννω, νρω, or by changing it into a diphthong; e. g. 
 αφάλ-λ-ω, τψ-ν-ω, y.Qiv -ω, άμνρ-ω, κτείν-ω, φαίν-ω, (stems ΣΦΛΛ, 
 ΤΕΜ, ΚΡΙΝ(ϊ), ΆΜΤΝ(ν), ΚΤΕΧ, ΦΑΝ) ; but μέν-ω, νεμ-ω 
 with a pure stem. 
 
 3. All the tenses are formed from the pure stem, yet the vowel 
 in the final syllable of the stem in the first Aor. Act. and Mid., is 
 lengthened; e. g. σφάλ λ- ω {ΣΦΑΛ), Fut. σφάλ-ώ, second 
 Aor. Pass, i -σφάλ-ην, first Perf. Act. s-acpal-y.a, first Aor. Act. 
 8-σφηλ-α, first Aor. Mid. ε-σφηλ-άμην. 
 
 4. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes, according as the 
 stem-vowel of the Fut. is ά, ε, t or ν before the ending -ω. In the 
 first Aor. Act. and Mid., a is lengthened into η, ε into «, c into Γ, 
 ν into v. Thus : 
 
 I. Class with a in the Future. 
 Pres. Fut Aor. 
 
 κάμν-ω, to labor, κάμ -ονμαι wanting 
 
 τεκμαίρ-ω, to place a limit, τ ε κμάρ-ώ έ-τέκμηρ-α 
 
 φαίν-ω, to show, φ ΰ ν -ώ ε-φην-α. 
 
 Π. Class with ε in the Future. 
 
 μέν-ω, to remain, μεν -ώ ε-μειν-α 
 
 άγγέλλ-ω, to announce, άγγ ελ-ώ ήγγειλ-α 
 
 τέμν-ω, to cut, τεμ -ω wanting 
 
 νέμ-ω, to divide, ν ε μ -ώ έ-νειμ-α 
 
 ίμείρ-ω, to desire, ί μ ε ρ -ώ ιιιειρ-α. 
 
 ΓΠ. Class with ι in the Future. 
 
 τίλλ-ω, to pluck, τϊλ-ώ ε-τίλ-α 
 
 κρΐν-ω, to separate, κ pi ν -ώ έ-κρίν-α. 
 
 IV. Class with ν in the Future. 
 σνρ-ω, to draw, σ ύ ρ -ώ ί-σνρ-α 
 
 άμνν-ω, to defend, άμνν-ω ήμνν-α. 
 
 Εεμ. 2. The following verbs in -αινώ of the first class, take a in the Aor. in- 
 stead of rj, namely, ίσχναίνω, to make emaciated, (Ισχνάνα, ϊσχνάναι), κερδαίνω, 
 to gain, {έκέρδάνα, κερδάναι), κού,αίνω, to hollow out, (έκο'Λάνα, κοι?,άναι), λεν- 
 καίνω, to whiten, όργαίνω, to enrage, πεπαίνω, to ripen ; also all verbs in -ραίνω, 
 e. g. πε(αίνω, to accomplish, Fut. περάνω, Aor. έττέρανα, Inf. περάναι (except 
 τετραίνω, to bore, έτέτρηνα, τετρηναή, and all in -ιαίνω, e. g. πιαίνω, to mahefat^ 
 Ιπίανα, τηάναι (except μιαίνω, to stain, μιηναι, rarely μιάναι). 
 11* 
 
126 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [§ Π2. 
 
 5. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v, ac- 
 cording to § 8, 4, would end in -γκα, e. g. μεμίαγ-κα (from μιαίνω 
 instead of με-μίαν-κα), ηεφαγκα (from φαίνω), τταρωξυγκα (from 
 παρωξννω, to excite). But this form is found only among later wri- 
 ters. The best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by drop- 
 ping the v, e. g. κεκερδακα (from κερδαίνω), or also, as in κλείνω, 
 by using the form of the second Perf., e. g. έκτονα, in the sense of 
 the first Perf., or, as in the case of verbs in -ένω, by not forming 
 any Perf., or, as e. g. in μένω, by forming it from a new theme, as 
 μεμενηκα (from ΜΕΝΕΩ). 
 
 6. The three following verbs drop the characteristic v, not only 
 in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. 
 or Pass, and in the first Aor. Pass. : 
 
 κρίνω, to separate, 
 
 κέκρίκα 
 
 κέκρϊμαί 
 
 έκρί&ην 
 
 κλίνω, to bend, 
 
 κέκλϊκα 
 
 κέκ,λϊμαι 
 
 εκλίϋ-ην 
 
 πλύνω, to wash, 
 
 πέπλϋκα 
 
 πέπλνμαί 
 
 εττλνϋ-ην. 
 
 7. On the formation of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, the following 
 things should be noted : 
 
 (a) When c& follows a liquid, the σ is omitted (§ 106, Rem. 4) ; 
 e. g. ήγγελ&αι (instead of ηγγέλ-σ&αι), πεφάν&αι. 
 
 (b) Verbs in -αίνω and -woo, usually drop the ν before the end- 
 ings beginning with μ, and insert a to strengthen the syllable, e. g. 
 φαίν-ω, πεφα-ΰ-μαι, πε-φά-σ-με&α; but some verbs of this kind 
 assimilate the ν to the following μ, e. g. παροξύνω, to excite, παρώ- 
 ξνμμαι; αίσχνν-ω, to shame, ηβχνμμαι, Inf. ησχνν&αι. The Perf. 
 of τείνω is τέτάμαι. 
 
 8. In the second Perf., which, however, is formed only by a few 
 verbs, the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is lengthened, as 
 in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with ε in the Fut., which take 
 the variable o, § 102, 4 ; e. g. φαίν-ω, first Aor. ε-φψ-α, second 
 Perf. πε-φψ-α ; but σπείρ-ω, Fut. σπερ-ώ, second Perf. έ-σττορ-α. 
 
 §112. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 
 
 άγγέλλω, to announce. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Present, 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. άγγέλλ-ω Subj. άγγέλλω Imp. άγγελλε Inf. αγγελλειν 
 
 Part. άγγέλ?ιων 
 Ind. ηγγελλ-ον Opt. αγγέλλοιμι. 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 Plup. I. 
 Perf. Π. 
 
 Ind. ηγγελ-κα Subj. ηγγέλκω Imp. not in use Inf. ηγγελκεναι 
 
 Part, ηγγελκως 
 Ind. ηγγέλ-ιιειν Opt. ηγγέλ-κοιμι 
 
 ε-φΰοο-α, perdidi, from φΰε'φ-ω, perdo ; Plup. Π. έ-φ&όρ-ειν 
 
§112.] 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 127 
 
 Fut. Ind. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 άγγελ-ώ 
 άγγελ-εϊς 
 άγγελ-εϊ 
 άγγελ-εϊτον 
 άγγελ-εΐτον 
 άγγελ-ονμεν 
 άγγελ-είτε 
 άγγελ-ονσι(ν) 
 Inf. άγγε?.εϊν 
 
 Opt. 
 
 αγγε/,οίμι 
 
 άγγε?^οϊς 
 
 άγγε?<χ>1 
 
 άγγελοϊτον 
 
 άγγελοίτην 
 
 αγγελοϊμεν 
 
 άγγελοϊτε 
 
 άγγελοϊεν 
 
 Part, άγγελών, -ονσα, 
 
 άγγελοίην 
 
 άγγελοίης 
 
 άγγελοίη 
 
 άγγελοίητον 
 
 άγγελοιήτην 
 
 άγγελοίημεν 
 
 άγγελοίητε 
 
 άγγελοϊεν 
 
 Λογ. Ι. 
 Αογ. Π. 
 
 Ind. ηγγειλ-α Subj. άγγεί'λω Opt. άγγείλαψί* Imp. αγγειλον 
 
 Inf. άγγεΐλαί Part, άγγείλας 
 Ind. ήγγελ-ον Subj. άγγέλω Opt. άγγελοιμι Imp. άγγελε 
 
 Inf. άγγελεϊν Part. αγγέλων, -ονσα, -όν. ^^^ 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. άγγέ?ά-ομαί Subj. άγγελλ.ωμαί 
 
 γέλλεο~&αί Part, άγγελλόμενος 
 Ind. ήγγελ?>-όμην Opt. αγγε?Αοίμην 
 
 Imp. (///έλλου Inf. ay• 
 
 Pf. Ind. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 ηγγε?.-μαι 
 
 ήγγε7>-σαι, 
 
 ήγγε?.-ταί 
 
 7}γγέλ-με-&ον 
 
 ήγγελ-ΰον 
 
 ήγγελ-ΰον 
 
 ηγγέλ-μεΰα 
 
 ήγγε?*-ϋ-ε 
 
 ηγγελ-μένοί είσί(ν) 
 
 Imperative. 
 ■ηγγελ-σο 
 ηγγέλ-•&ω 
 
 ηγγελ-ΰ-ον 
 ήγγέλ-ΰων 
 
 ηγγελ--θε 
 
 ήγγέλΰ-ωσαν or ήγγέ?>,-•&ων] 
 
 Infinitive. 
 ηγγέλ-ΰ -at 
 
 Participle. 
 ηγγελ-μένος 
 Subjunctive. 
 ηγγελ-μένος ώ 
 
 Pip. Ind. | ήγγελ-μην, -σο, -το, -με-&ον, --σον, -ΰην, -μεϋ-α, -#ε, ηγγελμενοι ήσαν 
 
 Fut. Ind. 
 
 s.i. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 1 3. 
 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 άγγελ- 
 
 ουμαι 
 
 rj or -εϊ 
 
 είταί 
 
 ονμε-&ον 
 
 εΐσΰ-ον 
 
 εϊσΰ-ον 
 
 ούμε&α 
 
 εϊ(Γ&ε 
 
 Opt. άγγελ-οίμην 
 άγγελ-οϊο 
 αγγελ-οϊτο 
 άγγελ-οΐμε-&ον 
 άγγελ-οϊσ-&ον 
 άγγελ-οίν&ην 
 άγγελ-οίμεΰα 
 άγγελ-οϊσΰε 
 άγγελ-οϊντο 
 
 Infinitive. 
 άγγελ-εϊσ&αι 
 
 Participle. 
 άγγε?>-ον μένος 
 
 Aor. Ι. 
 Aor. Π. 
 
 Ind. ηγγειλ-άμην Subj. άγγείλ-ωμαί Opt. άγγει?*-αίμην Imp. 
 
 άγγειλ-αι Inf. άγγείλ-ασΰαι Part, άγγειλ-άμενος 
 Ind. ήγγελ-όμην Subj. αγγέλ-ωμαί Opt. άγγελ-οίμην Imp. 
 
 άγγελ-ον Inf. άγγελ-εσΰ-αι Part, άγγελ-όμενος. 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. I. 
 Aor. Π. 
 Fut. Π. 
 
 Ind. ηγγέ?^--&ην Subj. άγγελ-ϋώ Opt. άγγελ-ϋείην Imp. άγ• 
 γέλ-ϋ-ητι Inf. άγγε/,-ΰ-ηναι Part, άγγελ-ϋείς 
 
 Ind. άγγελ-ΰ-ησομαι Opt. άγγε?,--&ησοίμην Inf. άγγελ-ΰ-ησεσ- 
 ■&at Part. άγγε/,-ΰησόμενος 
 
 Ind. ψ/γέλ-ην Subj. άγγε?.-ώ Opt. άγγελ-είην Imp. άγγέλ-ηϋ -t 
 Inf. άγγελ-ηναι Part, άγγελ-είς 
 
 Ind. άγγε?,-ήσομαι, etc., like the first Fut. Pass. 
 
 Verbal adjective : άγγελ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον. 
 
128 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [§ Π8. 
 
 §113. Shorter Paradigms , arranged according to 
 the Stem-vowel of the Future. 
 
 (a) with a in the Future, σφάλλω, to deceive; φαίνω, to shoxv, 
 Mid. to appear. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Fres. 
 
 σφάλλ-ω 
 
 σφάλλ-ομαί 
 
 φαίν-ω 
 
 φαίν-ομαι 
 
 Impf. 
 
 έ-σφαλλ-ον 
 
 έ-σφαλλ-όμην 
 
 ε-φαιν-ον 
 
 ε-φαιν-όμην 
 
 Pcrf. I. 
 
 έ-σφαλ-κα 
 
 ε-αφαλ-μαι 
 
 (πέ-φαγ-κα) 
 
 τϊ'ε-φασ-μαι 
 
 Plup. I. 
 
 k -σφάλ-κειν 
 
 έ-σφάλ-μην 
 
 (ε-πε-φάγ-κείν) 
 
 ε-πε-φάσ-μην 
 
 Perf. Π. 
 
 
 
 πέ-φην-α, I appear, 
 
 Plup. Π. 
 
 
 
 έ-πε-φήν-ειν, I appeared, 
 
 Fut. 
 
 σφάλ-ώ, εΐς, εϊ 
 
 wanting 
 
 φάν-ώ 
 
 φάν-ονμαί 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ε-σφηλ-α 
 
 wanting 
 
 έ-φην-α 
 
 Ι έ-φην-άμην. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ε-σφάλ-ΰην 
 
 έ-φάν-ΰην, I appeared, 
 
 Fut. I. 
 
 σφαλ-ΰησομαι. 
 
 φαν-ϋησομαι 
 
 
 Aor. II. 
 
 ε-σφυ,λ-ην 
 
 ε-φ&ν-ην, I appeared, 
 
 Fut. Π. 
 
 σφαλ-ήσομαι 
 
 φάν-ησομαι, I ivill appear. 
 
 
 Verbal adjective : σφαλ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον, φα\ 
 
 >-τεος. 
 
 
 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 
 
 
 φα 
 
 ί ν - ω , to show, ξηραίν-ω, to dry, and τ ε t ν - 
 
 ω , to stretch. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 πέ-φασ-μαί 
 
 ε-ξηραμ-μαι 
 
 τέ-τά-μαί 
 
 2. 
 
 τϊέ-φαν-σαι 
 
 ε-ξήραν-σαι 
 
 τε-τα-σαι 
 
 3. 
 
 πέ-φαν -rat 
 
 ε-ξηραν-ταί 
 
 τε-τα-ται 
 
 D.l. 
 
 πε-φάσ-με&ον 
 
 ε-ξηράμ-μεΰον 
 
 τε-τα-με'&ον 
 
 2. 
 
 πέ-φαν-Φον 
 
 ε-ξήραν-ΰον 
 
 τέ-τα-σϋ-ον 
 
 3. 
 
 πέ-φαν-ΰ-ον • 
 
 ε-ξήραν-ΰον 
 
 τέ•τα-σ-&ον 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 πε-φάσ-μεΰα 
 
 ε-ξηράμ-μεΰα 
 
 τε-τά,-με&α 
 
 2. 
 
 πέ-φαν-ΰε 
 
 ε-ξηραν-'&ε 
 
 τέ-τα-σ•&ε 
 
 3. 
 
 πε•φασ-μένοι είσι(ν) 
 
 έ-ξηραμ-μένοι ε1σΐ(ν) 
 
 τε-τα-νταί 
 
 Imp. S. 2. 
 
 (ττέ-φαν-σο) 
 
 (ε-ξηραν-σο) 
 
 τέ-τά-σο 
 
 3. 
 
 πε-φάν•-&ω 
 
 ί-ξηράν-ΰω 
 
 τε-τά-σϋ-ω 
 
 D.2. 
 
 πέ-φαν-ϋ-ον 
 
 ε-ξήραν-ϋ-ον 
 
 τέ-τα-σΰον 
 
 i 3. 
 
 πε-φάν-ΰων 
 
 έ-ξηράν--&ων 
 
 τε-τά-σΰ-ων 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 πέ•φαν--&ε 
 
 ε-ξηραν-'&ε 
 
 τέ-τα-σ&ε 
 
 3. 
 
 τνε-φάν-ϋ-ωσαν or 
 
 έ-ξηράν-ΰωσαν or 
 
 τε-τά-σ\9ωσαν οι 
 
 ι 
 
 πε-φάν-ΰων 
 
 έ-ξηράν-ϋ-ων 
 
 τε-τά-σχ^ων 
 
 Inf. 
 
 πε•φάν--&αι 
 
 ε-ξηράν-ϋ -at 
 
 τε-τά-σ\9αί 
 
 Part. 
 
 πε-φασ-μένος ε-ξηραμ-μένος 
 
 τε-τά-μένος. 
 
§§114,115.] 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 129 
 
 §114. (b) with ε in the Future, 'ίμείρ-ω (Ion. and Poet.) 
 to desire, and στέλλω, to send. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 ιμεφ-ω 
 
 ίμεΐρ-ομαι 
 
 στέλλ-ω 
 
 στέλλ-ομαί 
 
 Impf. 
 
 ιμειρ-ον 
 
 ιμειρ-ομην 
 
 έ-στελλ-ον 
 
 ε-στελλ-όμην 
 
 Perf. I 
 
 ιμερ-κα 
 
 ιμερ-μαι 
 
 ε-σταλ-κα 
 
 έ-στα?ι-μαι 
 
 Plup. I. 
 
 ιμερ-κείν 
 
 ομερ-μην 
 
 έ-στάλ-κειν 
 
 έ-στάλ-μην 
 
 Perf. II. 
 
 
 
 έ-ψ&ορ-α fr. ώ■&είp-ω,Ihave perished, 
 
 Plup. II. 
 
 
 
 έ-φΰόρ-ειν, I had perished, 
 
 Put. 
 
 ιμερ-ω 
 
 ιμερ-ονμαι 
 
 στ'ελ-ω Ι στελ-ονμαί 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ιμεφ-α 
 
 ιμειρ-αμην 
 
 ε-στείλ-α | έ-στείλ-άμην. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ίμέρ-ΰην 
 
 
 ε-στάλ-ΰην Aor. II. έ-στάλ-ην 
 
 Fut I. 
 
 Ίμερ-ϋ-ήσομαι 
 
 
 στα?^--&ήσομαί Put. II. στάλ-ήσομαί 
 
 Verbal adjective : ίμερ-τός 
 
 , -η, -όν, ίμερ-τέος, -τέα, -τέον, σταλ-τός, σταλ-τέος. 
 
 Remark. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, is like ηγγελ-μαί. 
 
 § 115. (c) with I and ν in the Future. 
 
 (α) τίλλ-ω, to pluck, σύρω, to draic, μολνν-ω, to defile. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 τίλλ-ω 
 
 σνρ-ω 
 
 μολνν-ω 
 
 
 τίλλ-ομαι 
 
 σϋρ-ομαι 
 
 μολνν-ομαι 
 
 Perf. 
 
 τέ-τιλ-κα 
 
 σε-σνρ-κα 
 
 (με-μόλυγ-κα) 
 
 
 τέ-τιλ-μαι 
 
 σε-σνρ-μαι 
 
 με-μό7^νσ-μαι 
 
 Fut. 
 
 τϊλ-ώ 
 
 σνρ-ω 
 
 μολνν-ω 
 
 
 τϊλ-ονμαι 
 
 σνρ-ονμαι 
 
 μολνν-ονμαι 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 έ-τίλ-α 
 
 ε-σνρ-α 
 
 ε-μόλνν-α 
 
 
 ε-τίλ-άμην 
 
 ε-σνρ-αμην 
 
 ε-μολνν-αμην 
 
 A. I. P. 
 
 έ-τίλ-•&ην 
 
 ε-σνρ-ΰην 
 
 έ-μο7ίύν- , &ην 
 
 F. I. P. 
 
 τίλ--&ησομαι 
 
 συρ-$ησομαι 
 
 μολνν-'&ήσομαί 
 
 Aor. Π. and Fut. II. P. έ-σνρ-ην, σνρ-ησομαι 
 
 
 Verbal adjective : τιλ-τός, τί7^-τέος, σνρ-τός; σνρ-τέος, 
 
 μνλνν-τός, μνλνν-τέος. 
 
 Rem. 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 τέ-τίλ-μαι, σέ-σνρ -uai, 
 
 is like ήγγελ-μαί, and με-μόλνσ-μαι like ττέ-ψασ-μαι 
 
 , and ήσχνμ-μαί, from 
 
 αίσχύν-ω, to shame, like ε-ξηραμ-μαι.. 
 
 
 (β) κλΐν-ω, to bend, π7ινν-ω, to icash, with ν dropped (§ 111, 6). 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE . 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf. 
 Fut, 
 Aor. I. 
 
 κ7αν-ω 
 
 κέ-κλϊ-κα 
 
 κλϊν-ω 
 
 έ-κλίν-α 
 
 κλΐν-ομαι 
 κέ-κ7ΐ-μαι 
 
 κλϊν-ονμαι 
 ε-κ7άν-άμην 
 
 π7ιύν-ω 
 
 τζέ-ττλν-κα 
 
 π7„νν-ώ 
 
 έ-π7,νν-α 
 
 πλνν-ομαί 
 πέ-πλν-μαί 
 -κλνν-ονμαι 
 έ-πλνν-άμην 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Aor. II. 
 
 έ-κ7α--&ην Fut. Ι. κ7ά-•&ήσομαί 
 έ-κ/αν-ην Fut. Π. κλϊν-ησομαυ 
 
 £-πλν--&ην πλν--&ήσομαί 
 
 Verbal adjective : κ.7α-τός, -η, -όν, κλι-τέος, -τέα, -τέον, πλν-τός, πλν-τέος. 
 
 Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέ-κλί-μαι and πέ- 
 πλν-μαι is like τέ-τά-μαι, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. 
 
130 LIQUID VERBS. [§ 115. 
 
 LIV. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άγγέλ?Μ, to announce. επεί, when, since. πεδίον, -ου, τό, a plain. 
 
 αδύνατος, -ov, impossible, ίμείρω, to desire. πεπαίνω, to make ripe, 
 
 άμύνω, to keep off, repel ; κα&α'φω, to purify, clear. mitigate. 
 
 mid., to revenge oneself, κάμνω, to labor, be weary, περι-στέλλω, to clothe, 
 
 άπο-κτείνω, to kill. κερδαίνω, to gain, get ad- decorate. 
 
 άπο-στέλλω, to send, de- vantage. πλύνω, to wash, 
 
 spatch. κλίνω, to bend. [secret, σπείρω, to sow. 
 
 ασώματος, -ov, bodiless, κρυπτός, -ή, -ov, concealed, στέλλω, to send, 
 
 incorporeal. μένω, to remain. σύρω, to draw. 
 
 αύξησις, -εως, η, increase, μετα-βάλλω, to alter, τείνω, to stretch. 
 
 γύα, -ης, ή, a field. change. τεκμαίρω, to limit. 
 
 δυσχεραίνω, w. dot., to be μιαίνω, to pollute. τέμνω, to cut, lay waste, 
 
 displeased with. ναυαγός, -ov, naufragus, τίλλω, to pull, pluck. 
 
 έκ-φαίνω, to show forth, ship-wrecked. φΰείρω, to lay waste, de- 
 make known, express, νίκη, -ης, η, victory. stroy. 
 
 ίξ-οκέλλω, to drive (pro- νοέω, to think. χαίνω&ηάχάσκω, to yawn; 
 
 perly a ship) away from ξηραίνω, to dry. per/. 2, κέχηνα, to gape, 
 
 the right course, mis- οίκτείρω, w. ace, to pity. wait with open mouth, 
 
 lead. παραδόξως, unexpectedly. listen. 
 
 Κρϊναι φίλους ου βφδιον. Ή άδολεσχία πολλούς ηδη διέφϋ-ειρεν. Ό πλούτος 
 πολλάκις εξόκειλε τον κεκτημένον είς έτερον η&ος. Ό άγγελος έπηγγειλε την 
 νίκην. ΟΙ πολέμιοι την χωράν διέφΰειραν. Ναυαγούς οϊκτειρον, έπει πλους 
 έστιν άδηλος. Ήν αποκτείνης έχ&ρον σου, χείρα μιανεϊς. Σπερώ γύας • δ δε 
 &εός αύξησιν παρέξει. Ύά κρυπτά μη έκφήνης φίλου. Φύσιν πονηράν μεταβα- 
 λεϊν ου βάδιον. Ή τύχη πολλάκις τους μέγα φρονοϋντας παραδόξως έσφηλεν. 
 Οι Τίέρσαι πολλάς ναύς εις Ελλάδα άπεστάλκεσαν. Θεον μεν νοησαι, χαλεπόν, 
 φράσαι δε, αδύνατον • το γαρ άσώματον σώματι σημηναι, αδύνατον. Την -φυχηρ 
 καλοϊς νοημασι περίστειλον. Ό κήπος καλοϊς βύδοις τέϋηλεν. 1 Ύί κέχηνας, & 
 παι ; Οί πολέμιοι τά πεδία διαφ•&εροΰσιν. Οι σοφισταϊ εκ της σοφίας πολλά 
 έκέρδάναν. 'Έκάΰ-ηρε θησεύς των κακούργων την όδον την είς Ά&ήνας έκ Ύροι- 
 ζηνος. Καλόν εστί. την όργην πεπάναι. Μ.η δυςχεράνης τοϊς άγαΰοϊς. 
 
 The way to Athens from Troezen was cleared of evil-doers by Theseus. By 
 the Persians many ships had been sent to Hellas. The boys gaped. Already 
 many haughty persons had been greatly shaken (aor. 2 pass.) by fortune. By 
 prating many have already been ruined. The victory was announced by the 
 messengers. The country was laid waste {aor.) by the enemies. The good 
 (man) will pity the poor. The good will choose the good for friends (ace). 
 Thou hast derived great gain (hast gained many things) from wisdom. One 
 friend (a friend) will not make known the secrets of another (of a friend). The 
 citizens sowed (aor.) the fields, but the enemies laid them waste (aor.). Vice 
 will soon 2 show itself. The fields will soon be laid waste by the enemies (fut. 
 2 pass,). 
 
 1 τέ&ηλα has a present signification. 2 quickly. 
 
§ 115.] LIQUID VERBS. 131 
 
 LV. Vocabulary. 
 
 Αυλητής, -ov, ό, a wrest- κοινός, -ή, -όν, common, πολιορκία, -ας, η, a siege. 
 
 ler. public, general. σπονδάζω, to be in ear - 
 αίρω, to raise. μακράν (sc. όδόν), far, at nest, zealons, active. 
 αίσχίνω, to sbame ; mid. ic. a distance. στάδιον, •ον, τό, the length 
 
 pass, aor., be ashamed, όμιλέω, w. dat., to asso- of one hundred and 
 
 άπο-φαίνω, to show ; mid., ciate or have inter- twenty-five paces, a sta- 
 
 show of oneself, ex- course with. dium, a race course. 
 
 press, declare. δράσις, -εως, η, sight. ταύρος, -ov, ό, a bull. 
 
 βασκαίνω, fasc"ino, to be- ον-ποτε, not once, never, τάχα, quickly, soon. 
 
 witch. παιδίον, -ov, τό (diminu- τέ7ιος, -εος = -ονς, τό, an 
 
 δια-σπείρω, dissemino, to five of παΐς), a little end; δια r£?„ot>c,through- 
 
 scatter, spread. child. out, continually, to the 
 
 έμπτνω, to spit into or on. παρα-τείνω, to stretch out. last. 
 
 έν-τέλ?*ω, -ομαι, to com- παροξύνω, to encourage, τιϋήνη, -ης, η, a nurse. 
 
 mission, order, enjoin περαίνω, to complete, ac- τόξενμα, -ατός, τό, an ar- 
 
 upon. complish. row. 
 
 ήττα, -ης, ή, a defeat. π?.ήττω, to strike, wound. 
 
 Οι στρατιώται νπο τον στρατηγού είς την μάχην παρωξνν&ησαν. Φίλιππος 
 εν τη πολιορκία της Μεΰώνης είς τον δφ$α?ι.μόν π7,ηγείς τοξενματι διεφΰάρη 1 
 την δρασιν. Σοφίας ό καρπός ονποτε φ&αρήσεται. Αισχνν&είην αν, ει φανείην 
 μά?<.λον φροντίζειν της έμαντον δόξης, η της κοινής σωτηρίας. Μίλων, ό εκ Κρό• 
 τωνος άϋ?.ητής, τανρον αράμενος έφερε δια τον σταδίον μέσον. Έίς την πόλιν 
 διέσπαρτο ό λόγος, τονς πο?.εμίονς νικη-&ηναι. Οι πο7ΐται τονς πολεμίονς περί 
 της ηττης άμννοννται. Ει σπονδάζετε, πάντα τάχα περαν&ήσεται. Εύβοια 
 μακράν παρατέταται. Κακά έργα είς τέ?^ος έξεφάνη. 2 Ό στρατηγός τοις στρα- 
 τιωταις ενετεί?,ατο έπι τονς πολεμίονς όρμησαι. Αϊ τι&ηναι έμπτνονσι τοις παι- 
 δίοις, ως μη βασκαν&ωσιν. Οι πο/,έμιοι διεσπάρησαν. Όλόφνραι τους πένητας. 
 Ό κριτής την γνώμην άπεφηνατο. Άγα&οϊς άν&ρώποις όμύ.ων μάλιστ 3 αν εν~ 
 φραν&είης. 
 
 The general encouraged (aor.) the soldiers to the battle. Battles will never 
 destroy the fruit of wisdom. The enemies have spread the report, that our ar- 
 my has been conquered. The citizens revenged themselves on the enemies for 
 the defeat. If you are zealous, you will accomplish everything quickly. The 
 scattered enemies appeared {plup. 2) again. If thou hast intercourse {party 
 with good men, thou wilt be much delighted. The good citizen will never ap- 
 pear (as such), who cares {part.) more for his own reputation than for the gene- 
 ral welfare. If thou hast had pity {aor. mid. part.) on the unfortunate, thou also 
 wilt be pitied in misfortune (being unfortunate). All the citizens were rejoiced 
 by the victory. The town has been destroyed by the enemies. 
 
 1 Lost 2 The Aor. here denotes a custom. 
 
132 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OP VERBS. [§116, 
 
 § 116. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of 
 single Verbs, both Pure and Impur e . 
 
 1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle form ; 
 e. g. ακούω, to hear, Fut. άκούσομαι, I shall hear, Aor. ηκοναα, I 
 heard; απαντάω, to meet, Fut. άπαντήσομαι, I shall meet, Aor. 
 απήντησα ; απολαύω, to enjoy, Fut. άπολαύσομαι, Aor. άπέλανσα, 
 etc. Comp. § 144, c. 
 
 2. The two following verbs in -άω or -αίω, have av* in the Fut. 
 and Aor. : 
 
 καίω, Att. κάω (without contraction), ίο burn, Fut. κανσω ; Aor. έκανσα; 
 Perf. κέκανκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέκαυμαι ; Aor. Pass, εκαύ&ην ; Fut 
 Pass, καυβ-ησομαί ; verbal adjective, κανστέος, κανατάς, καυτός ; 
 
 κλαίω, Att. κλάω (without contraction), to weep. See No. 3. 
 
 3. The five following verbs in -ε'ω, viz. &έω, νέω, πλέω, πνέω and 
 ρέω, have εν* in the Fut. and Aor. Besides the common Fut. in 
 -σομαι, the first four have also one in -σονμαι. This circumflexed 
 Fut. is called the Doric Future. Besides the four above-named, 
 the verbs κλαίω, παίζω, πίπτω and ψενγω^ have the same Fut. form. 
 
 •& έω, to run, Put. ϋευσομαι or ΰευσοϋμαί. 
 
 νέω, to swim, Put. νεύσομαι or νευσοΰμαι, No. 3 ; Aor. ένενσα. 
 
 πλέω, to sail, Put. πλευσομαι, usually πλευσονμαί ; Aor. έπλευσα ; Perf. πέ- 
 
 πλευκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, πέπλευσμαι, ; Aor. Pass. επλευο~&ην ; verbal 
 
 adjective, πλευστέος. 
 πνέω, to blow, to breathe, Fut. πνεύσομαι or πνενσοΰμαι ; Aor. έπνευσα ; Aor. 
 
 Pass, έπνεύσ&ην. 
 ()έω 7 to flow, Fut. βεύσομαί ; Aor. έβρευσα ; instead of these forms the Attics 
 
 use, Fut. βυήσομαι ; Aor. εββύην, and Perf. ερβύηκα. 
 χέω, to pour out, differs from the preceding, Fut. χέω ; Aor. έχεα ; Perf. κέ- 
 
 χϋκα ; Fut. Mid. χέομαι ; Aor. Mid. έχεάμην ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέχνμαι ; 
 
 Aor. Pass, έχύϋην. 
 κλαίω, Att. κλάω (without contraction), to weep, Fut. κ?ιαυσοϋμαι and κλαύ- 
 
 σομαί ; Aor. έκλαυσα ; verbal adjective, κλαυστέος and κλανστός. Comp. 
 
 § 125, 14. 
 φ ε ν γ ω, to flee, Fut. φευξοϋμαι and φεύξομαί ; Aor. έφυγον ; Perf. πέφενγα. 
 παίζω, to sport, Fut. παιξονμαι and παίζομαι ; Aor. έπαισα ; Perf. Mid. or 
 
 Pass, πέπαίσμαί. Comp. § 105, 3. 
 πίπτω, to fall (stem ΠΕΤ), Fut. πεσοϋμαι. See § 123. 
 
 * The υ in the Fut. of these verbs, is occasioned by the reappearance of the 
 Digamma (F), softened into the vowel υ. The Digamma would regularly stand 
 in the Pres. before the personal-ending -ω, but is omitted where it would come 
 between two vowels. But it can appear in the Fut., as it there stands before the 
 consonant σ. — Tr 
 
§116.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 133 
 
 LVI. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άμα, at the same time. κηρός, -ov, ό, wax. πτερόν, -οϋ, τό, a wing. 
 
 άναρπάζω, to seize, catch κλαίω, to weep, mourn στρατιά, -ας, ή, an army. 
 
 up quickly. for, deplore. συγχέω, to pour together, 
 
 απαντάω, to meet. κόλπος, -ου, ύ, a bosom, a confundo; confuse, con- 
 
 απολαύω, to enjoy. gulf. found, disturb. 
 
 avpiov, to-morrow. νυν, nunc, now. σφαίρα, -ας, ή, a ball. 
 
 έκ-νέω, enato, to swim out. όπλον, -ov, τό, a weapon, τήκω, to melt anything ; 
 έκ•πλέω, to sail out. πέλαγος, -εος = -ους, τό, mid. w. 2 aor. and 2 fut. 
 
 εμπίπτω, to fall into; w. the sea. pass., to melt (intrans.). 
 
 dot. or εις and ace. περφβέω, to flow round ; τιμωρία, -ας, ή, punish- 
 
 έναντίος, -ά, -ov, opposite. to fall down or away. ment. 
 
 ήγέομαι, duco, to lead, con- πίστις, -εως, ή, belief, χ&ων, χ&ονός, ή, the earth, 
 
 sider. trust, confidence. the ground, the soil. 
 
 κατα-καίω, to burn down, πνέω, to breathe, blow. 
 
 Ή στρατιά αίψιον εκπ7^ενσεται (έκπ?ι.ενσεϊται). Άνεμος Βοβόάς ενάντιος τίρ 
 στρατιά έπνενσεν. 'Έ,ν rrj ναυμαχία τ?) εν κόλπω Κρισαίω οι ΤΙελοποννήσιοι άν- 
 δρας των Αθηναίων άπέκτειναν, όσοι μη εξένευσαν αυτών. "Οταν οι πολέμιοι 
 τή πόλει 1 πλησιάσωσιν, ο'ι στρατιώται άναρπάσαντες τα όπλα ΰευσονται προς 
 τάς πυλας. Πολλοίς και σοφοϊς άνδράσι 2 κέκλαυσται τάν&ρώπινα, τιμωρίαν 
 ήγουμένοις είναι τον βίον. Τίς ουκ αν κ?^ανσειε τον φίλον άτυχη ; Οί πολίται 
 ηλπισαν τους πο?,εμίους ψευξεΐσϋαι. Οί παίδες σφαίραν παιξοϋνται. Σωκρά- 
 της πολλάκις επαισεν άμα σπουδάζων. Συγκέχυκε ΐΰν την πίστιν ό κα&' ημάς 
 βίος. 3 ΟΊ πο?ιέμιοί τάς των 'Ελλήνων τάξεις σννέχεαν. Οί νόμοι δια τον πόλε- 
 uov συγκεχυμένοι ε'ισίν. Ίκαρος, ό του Δαιδάλου υιός, τακέντος τοϋ κηροϋ καϊ 
 των πτερών περφβνέντων, εις το πέλαγος ενέπιπτεν. Οί πολέμιοι την πόλιν 
 κατέκαυσαν. Αί εν Αυδία Σάρδεις νπο τών ελλήνων κατεκανΰ-ησαν. 
 
 The army sailed away. The north wind will blow against the army. The 
 soldiers hoped to swim (inf.fut.) through the river. The soldiers were going to 
 run to the gates {inf.fut.). You will mourn for the unfortunate. The enemies 
 will flee. The children were playing at ball. If thou hast intercourse with 
 children {part., having intercourse with children), thou wilt play. The enemies 
 will disturb the ranks of the soldiers. Pour {aor.) Ο boy, the water on {εις) the 
 ground ! The wax will melt, and the wings will fall away. The town is burnt 
 down by the enemies. The citizens expected that the enemies would bum 
 down the town {ace. w. inf.). 
 
 4. The following pure verbs, and impure ones, but which by as- 
 suming an ε as their characteristic, are analogous to pure verbs, form 
 the Perf. Subj. and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of an 
 auxiliary verb : 
 
 -ηται 
 or κεκτφμην, 
 -ώο, -ώτο. 
 
 uxiliary verb : 
 
 κτά-ομαι, to obtain, Perf. κέκτημαι, I possess, Subj. κεκτώμαι, -ή, 
 Plup. έκεκτήμην, I possessed, Opt. κεκτήμην, κεκτήο, κεκτήτο or κεκ 
 
 1 § 161, 2. (ι•.), (β). 2 Dat. instead of νπό with Gen. 3 ό κα&' ημάς βίος, οιττ age. 
 
 12 
 
134 SYNCOPE AND METATHESIS. — VERBS IN -ω. [§§ 117 — 119. 
 
 μιμνησκω (ΜΝΑΩ), to remind. See § 122, 12. 
 
 καλέ ω, to name, Perf. κέκλημαι, lam named; Plup. έκεκλήμην, Opt. κεκλ$• 
 ιιην, -yo, ~rjro. 
 
 § 117. Syncope and Metathesis. 
 
 1. In certain forms, some few verbs omit the stem-vowel, which 
 stands between two consonants. This omission of the vowel is call- 
 ed Syncope. Thus, εγείρω, to awaken, Aor. regularly ήγειρα ; first 
 Perf. εγήγερκα ; second Perf. εγρηγορα, I awake ; second Plup. 
 έγρηγόρειν, I awoke ; Aor. Mid. η γ ρ 6 μην, I awoke πετομαι, 
 to fly, Fut. πτήσομαι; Aor. ε λ 1 6 μ η ν, τι τ ε σ & α ι. 
 
 2. Metathesis is the transposition of a vowel and a liquid. Thus • 
 βάλλω, to threw, Fut. βάλω ; Aor. εβάλον ; BAA, Perf. β έβλη κ a; Perf. 
 
 Mid. or Pass, β ε β λ η μ a ι ; Aor. Pass, έβλήϋ-ην. 
 δαμάω, usually δαμάζω, to tame, Fut. δαμάσω ; Aor. έδάμασα ; ΔΜΑ, Perf. δ ε δ- 
 
 μη κ α ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, δέδμημαο; Aor. Pass, έ δ μ η ι9• η ν, εδάμην. 
 
 καλέω, to call, Perf. κέ κ λ η κ α (§ 98, Rem.). — On κάμνω, see § 119. 
 σκέλλω, σκελέω, to make dry, Perf. έ σ κ?ιη κ a; Fut. σ κ λ ή σ ο μ at. 
 
 §118. Verbs in -ω with the Stem of the Present 
 strengthened. 
 It has been already seen (§ 101), that the Present tense of many 
 verbs is strengthened ; but this strengthening remains only in the 
 Pres. and Impf. Besides the modes of strengthening mentioned in 
 § 101, by r and c and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are 
 still others which will be specified in the following list. 
 
 Remark. All the forms assumed for the purpose of constructing the tenses 
 in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 100, 3). — The abbreviation, Mid., denotes 
 that the verb forms the Fut. and Aor. middle. — D. M. (i. e. Deponent 
 Mid.) and D. P. (Deponent Pass.) signify that a verb wants the active form; 
 such a verb is called deponent middle, when its Aor. has a middle form, and deponent 
 passive, when its Aor. has a passive form. — The μι in parenthesis shows that the 
 form standing before it, is analogous to the conjugation in -μι, which will be 
 treated more at large below. 
 
 § 119. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by inserting ν before the ending. 
 Preliminary Remark. Βαίνω has lengthened the stem-vowel a into at ; 
 ελαύνω, a into av ; δυνω and πίνω, ν and Ϊ into ν and I. 
 
 1. βαίνω, to go, (BA-), Fut. βήσομαι; Perf. βε'βηκα; second 
 Aor. εβψ (μι, §142); Pass, in compounds, e. g. παραβεβαμαι; 
 Aor. παρεβαϋ-ψ. 
 
§ 120.] VERBS. — PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 135 
 
 2. ελαννω, to drive, Fut. ελασω, Att. ελώ, -άς, -a, Inf. ελαν, § 83 ; 
 Aor. ηλάσα; Perf. ελήλάκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ελήλάμαι-, Inf. 
 εληλάσΰ-αι ; Aor. Pass. ήλα\>?]ν. — On a in the tense-formation, see 
 § 98, (a).— Mid. 
 
 3. πίνω, to drink, Fut. πίομαι ; Aor. επιον, Inf. 7rt£M>, Part, αιών, 
 Imp. mth (μί, § 142), poet, ate; (ΠΟ-) Perf. πε'πωκα; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, πεπομαι ; Aor. Pass, επό&ψ. 
 
 4. ztW, ίο expiate, to satisfy, Fut. ζισω ; Aor. ετϊσα ; Perf. Act. 
 ζε'τϊκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass, τετισμαι; Aor. Pass, ετίσ&ην, Mid. 
 τίνομαι, to avenge oneself, to punish, τισομαι, ετϊσάμην. 
 
 5. φ&ανω, to anticipate, Fut. φ-&ήσομαι, more rarely (ρ&άσω; 
 first Aor. έφ&άσα; second Aor. εφ&ην and εφ&άμψ (μι, § 142); 
 Perf. εφ&άκα. 
 
 Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a con- 
 sonant : 
 
 δάκνω, to bite, Aor. εδάκον ; Fut. δηξομαι ; Perf. Act. δεδηχα ; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, δεδηγμαι ; Aor. Pass, εδήχ&ην. 
 
 κάμνω, labdro, to exert oneself, to weary oneself, to be weary, Aor. 
 8κάμον; Fut. καμονμαί; Perf. κε'κμηκα (§ 117, 2). 
 
 τέμνω, to cut, Fut. τεμώ ; Aor. ετεμον; Perf. τετμηκα; Perf, 
 Mid. or Pass, τε'τμημαι ; Aor. Pass, ετμήΰ-ην ; Fut. Perf. τετμησο 
 μαι. — Mid. 
 
 § 120. Π. Ferfo, wfose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf by inserting the syllable νε before the ending. 
 
 1. βϋ-νέ-ω, to stop up, fill up, Fut. βνσω ; Aor. εβϋσα ; Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass, βεβυσμαι-, Aor. Pass, έβνα&ψ (§ 95). 
 
 2. άφικ-νέ-ομαι, to come, Fut. άφίξομαι; Aor. άφϊκόμην; Inf. 
 άφϊκε'σ&αι ; Perf. άφΐγμαι ; Inf. άφΐχ&αι ; Plup. άφίγμην, άφΐκτο. 
 
 3. νπΐΰχ-νέ-ομαι, to promise, Aor. νπεσχ-όμψ, Imp. νπόσχον ; but 
 νποσχήσομαι ; Perf. νπε'σχημαι. So άμπισχνονμαι or άμπεχομαι, to 
 put on, to wear, (from άμττεχω, to put round, Fut. άμ•φεξω ; Aor. 
 ημπισχον, άμπισχεΐν) ; Fut. άμφεξομαι ; Aor. ήμπισχόμην and ί^- 
 πεαχόμψ (§91, 1). 
 
 LVII. Vocabulary. 
 
 Ακρος, -a, -ov highest, at άπ•α£, once. [exclude, ye (enclitic), a strengthen 
 
 the point ; τδ άκρον, άπελαύνω, to drive away, ingparticle, atleast,cer£e 
 
 the top, the point. άπο-τίνω, to compensate, (5a/cvcj, to bite. 
 
 Ιμπισχνονμαι or άμπέχο- pay ; wm'c?., to punish, έκ-βαίνω, to walk or go 
 
 μαί, to put on, wear. avenge oneself. out, turn out, evado 
 
136 
 
 VERBS. PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 
 
 [§ 120. 
 
 ίκ-πίνω, to drink out, or βόπαλον, -ου, τό, a club. 
 
 up. [out. συμβαίνω, to go with; 
 
 έξ-ελαύνω, expello, to drive συμβαίνει, it happens, 
 ενδαιμονέω, to be happy, occurs. 
 
 or fortunate. συμπίνω, to drink with. 
 
 εφικνέομαι, w. gen., to ar- τάλαρος, -ου, ό, a little 
 
 rive at, attain to, reach. basket. 
 
 Ίμάτιον, -ου, τό, a robe, a τίνω, to expiate, pay. 
 
 garment. τοί (enclitic), a strength- 
 μεΰύω, to drink μέϋυ (un- ening particle, certain- 
 
 mixed wine) ; hence to 
 be drank. 
 
 νήμα, -ατός, τό, spinning 
 thread, yarn. 
 
 πολυτέλεια, -ας, η, costli- 
 ness, splendor, sump- 
 tuousness. 
 
 one is anticipated; gen- 
 erally it may be trans- 
 lated by an adverb, as 
 before, or sooner than, 
 and the part, may be 
 expressed by the finite 
 verb, as οι πολϊται τους 
 πολεμίους εφ&ασαν είς 
 την πόλιν φυγόντες, 
 "the citizens anticipa- 
 ted the enemies in hav- 
 ing fled into the city ;" 
 that is, " the citizens 
 fled into the city soon- 
 er than the enemies." 
 
 ly, indeed. 
 
 3-άνω, to come before, an- 
 ticipate, w. the ace. of the 
 person who is anticipa- 
 ted, and the part, of the 
 verb which expresses φορέω, to carry, 
 the action in which any 
 
 Ύοΐς στρατιώταις εν ttj στρατιά πολλά κακά συνεβεβήκει. Σοφοϊς ομιλών 
 καϊ αυτός έκβηστι σοφός. Αυκοϋργος πολυτέλειαν εξήλασε της 'Σπάρτης. Περ- 
 σών ουδείς άπελήλαται νόμω 1 τιμών 2, και αρχών. 2 Πολλού συμπιόντες άπαξ γίγ- 
 νονται φίλοι. Ό μεΰύων δοϋλός εστί του πεπωκέναι. Ουκ έκπίομαι τον οινον 
 Ό οίνος υπό τών στρατιωτών εξεπόΰη. Ύούς κακούργους οι -&εοί άποτίσαιντο. 
 Οί πολίται τους πολεμίους εφΰασαν εις την πόλιν φυγόντες. Κύων 3 δήξεται τον 
 δακόντα. Ό λαγώς* υπό του κυνός εδήχ&η. Ουκ αν μη καμών ευδαιμονοίης. 
 Οί κεκμηκότες στρατιώται άνεπανσαντο. Άττικη ίιπό τών Περσών έτμήΰη. 
 Ό Ηρακλής το βόπαλον, ο έφόρει, αυτός ετεμεν εκ Νεμέας. Ό τάλαρος νήματος 
 βέβυσται. Οί πρέσβεις είς την πόλιν άφίκοντο. Ού τοί γ' εφίξει τών άκρων 
 άνευ πόνου. Ό φίλος υπέσχετό μοι άφίξεσΰαι. Αϊ γυναίκες ημπέσχοντο καλά 
 ιμάτια. 
 
 The enemies will proceed into our country. The enemies were driven out 
 of the town by the citizens. The law will exclude (drive away) no citizen from 
 honor and offices of command. Lycurgus has driven sumptuousness out ot 
 Sparta. The wine has been drunk up by the soldiers. The laws will punish 
 evil-doers. The citizens will flee into the town sooner than the enemies. The 
 dog has bitten the hare. The hare is (i. e. has been) bitten by the dog. If you 
 will work (pari.), you will be happy. The enemies have laid waste the land. 
 The country is (i. e. has been) laid waste by enemies. The enemies will lay 
 waste the land. The woman filled (aor.) the basket with yam. The father is 
 come. The friend will promise me, to come (fid.) to-morrow. The boy has 
 promised the teacher to learn diligently. The women will put on beautiful 
 garments. 
 
 1 $ 161,3. 
 
 157. 
 
 § 47, 6. 
 
 4 §30. 
 
§ 121. "I VERBS. ΓϋΚΕ STEM STRENGTHENED. 137 
 
 § 121. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by inserting the syllable av, more rarely aiv, before the 
 ending. 
 
 (a) av or atv is inserted without any change. 
 All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a three-fold stem, 
 viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second 
 Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, con- 
 sisting of a pure stem and an annexed ε, which is changed in the 
 inflection into η. — The a in the ending -άνω is short. 
 
 1. αίσθ-άν-ομαι, to perceive, Aor. ψΰ-όμψ, αισ&εσ&αι; Perf. 
 ησ&ημαι; Fut. αίσθήσομαι. 
 
 2. άμαρτάνω, to miss, Aor. ημαρτον ; Fut. άμαρχήσομαι ; Perf. 
 ήμάρτηκα ; Perf. Pass, ήμάρτημαι. 
 
 3. απεχθάνομαι, to be hated or odious, Aor. άπηχ&όμην; Fut. 
 άπεχθήσομαι ; Perf. άπήχϋ-ημαι, lam hated. 
 
 4. αυξάνω (and ανξω), to cause to increase, to increase, Fut. αυ- 
 ξήσω ; Aor. ηϋξησα ; Perf. ηνξηκα ; Mid. and Pass, to grow, Perf. 
 ηυξημαι; Fut. αύξήσομαι; Aor. ηύξή&ην, 
 
 5. βλαστάνω, to sprout, spring, Aor. εβλαστον ; Fut. βλαστήσω ; 
 Perf. εβλάστηκα and βεβλάστηκα (§ 88, 2). 
 
 6. δαρ&άνω, to sleep, Aor. εδαρ&ον; Fut. δαρ&ήσομαι; Perf. 
 δεδάρ&ηκα. 
 
 7. όλισϋ-άνω, to slip, to glide, Aor. ώλισ&ον; Fut. ολισθήσω', 
 Perf. ώλίσ&ηκα. 
 
 8. όσφραίνομαι, to smell, Aor. ώσφρόμην ; Fut. οσψρήσομαι. 
 
 9. οφλίύ"κώ>ω, to 5e fo'ao/e ίο a fine, to incur punishment, to owe,• — 
 the double strengthening ισκ and av is to be noted — Aor. ωφλον ; 
 Fut. όφλήσω ; Perf. ώφληκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ωφλημαι. 
 
 (b) av is inserted before the Tense-ending, and ν is insert 
 
 ed before the Characteristic-consonant of the 
 
 Pure Stem. 
 
 The short vowel• in the middle of the pure stem, is changed into 
 a long one, in inflection. The ν before a Pi-mute is changed into 
 u, before a Kappa-mute, into γ. 
 
 10. θιγγάνω, to touch. Aor. ε&ϊγον ; Fut. θί'ξομαι. 
 
 11. λαγχάνω, to obtain by lot, to acquire, Aor. ελαχον; Fut. λή• 
 ξομαι ; Perf. εΐληχα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εϊληγμαι (§ 88, 4) ; Aor. 
 Pass, ελήχϋ-ψ. 
 
 12. λαμβάνω, to take, Aor. ελαβον, Imp. λαβε; Fut. λήψομαι; 
 
 12* 
 
138 VERBS. PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. [§ 121. 
 
 Perf. εΐληφα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εί'λημμαι (§ 88, 4) ; Aor. Mid. 
 ίλαβόμην ; Aor. Pass, ελήφ&ψ. 
 
 13. λαν&άνω, (seldom λή&ω), to be concealed, Aor. ελα&ον ; Fut. 
 λήσω; Perf. λελη&α, I am concealed, Mid. to forget, Fut. λήσομαι; 
 
 ι Perf. λέληαμαι; Aor. ελαϋ-όμην. 
 
 14. μαν&άνω, to learn, Aor. εμαΰ-ον; Fut. μαϋ-ήσομαι; Perf. με- 
 μά&ηκα. — The cc remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are formed 
 from the stem ΜΑΘΕ, according to No. a. 
 
 15. πννϋ-άνομαι, to inquire, to ash, to learn by ashing, Aor. iitv- 
 Φσμην ; Perf. τιεττυαμαι, ηεπυσαι, etc. ; Fut. τίεναομαι ; verbal ad- 
 jective, πενστός, πενστε'ος. 
 
 16. τνγχάνω, to hit, to happen, to obtain (with Gen.), Aor. ετνχον; 
 Fut. τενξομαι (TETX-) ; Perf. τετνχηκα (TTXE- according to 
 No. a). 
 
 LVIII. Vocabulary. 
 Αγγελία, -ας, η, a mes- δίς, bis, twice. κατα-δαρϋάνω, to fall a• 
 
 sage, news. δοκέω, to think, appear, sleep, sleep. 
 
 αγε, age ! come now. seem. λυγρός, -ά, -όν, sad. 
 
 άνα-στρέφω, to turn round έλπομαι, to hope. οπίσω, behind, back. 
 
 {trans, and intrans.). έξ-αμαρτάνω, άμαρτάνω προσ-ήκων,-ηκουσα,-ηκον, 
 
 άν&εμον, -ου, τό, a flower, strengthened by εξ. fitting, becoming. 
 
 a blossom. (§ 121, 2). πω (enclitic), yet. 
 
 Βούλευμα, -ατός, τό, ad- έπαρκέω, w. dot., to help, συμφορά, -ας, fj, an event, 
 
 vice, a decision, a reso- επίβουλη, -ης, ή, a plot. especially a misfortune. 
 
 lution. έπι-ορκέω, to swear false- χρυσίον, -ου, τό (diminu- 
 
 βραχύς, -εΐα, -ύ, short. ly ; w. ace, to any one. tive of χρυσός), gold. 
 
 γενναίος, -a, -ov, of noble ευεργεσία, -ας, η, a favor, ως, as ; ως τάχιστα, as 
 
 birth, noble, brave. beneficence. soon as. 
 
 οεϋρο, hither. κάμηλος, -ου, δ, η, a camel. 
 
 Λ η σ ε ι ν διά τέλους μη δοκείτω δ πονηρός. Κέρδος πονηρό~ν μη λαβείν 
 βούλου ποτέ. Αίκαια δράσας συμμάχου τεύξη ΰεοϋ. 1 "Γράμματα μα&εϊν 
 δεϊ καΊ μαϋ- όν τ α νουν έχειν. Ααβε πρόνοιαν τοϋ προςήκοντος βίου. Έέ- 
 νοις επαρκών 2 των Ισων τεύξη ποτέ. Ό βασιλεύς της προς εαυτόν επίβουλης 3 
 ουκ ήσ-&ετο. Οί ΐίέρσαι τοις "Έλλησιν 4 άπήχ&οντο. Φίλιππος αυτός 
 άπεφαίνετο δια χρυσίου μάλλον, η δίά των όπλων η ύ ξ η κ£ν α ι την ιδίαν βασι- 
 λείαν. Ο/ στρατιώται βραχύν χρόνον κατ έδ αρ-8-ον. Ώς ώσφροντο τά- 
 χιστα των καμήλων* 1 ο'ι Ιπποι, οπίσω άνέστρεφον. Μη ΰίγης τοϋ κυνός. 6 "Ays 
 δεύρο, Ίνα πύ&τ/ της ?.υγρας άγγε?άας. 3 θεόν επίορκων μη δόκει λεληϋ- εν αι. 
 Άρχης τετυχηκώς 1 ίσϋι ταύτης άξιος. Καλόν, μηδέν εις φίλους άμαρτεϊν. 
 Μακάριος, όςτις έτυχε γενναίου φίλου. Μά-&ε φέρειν την συμφοράν. Ού~ 
 6είς πω ξένον έξαπατήσας άϋανάτους ε λ α ■& ε ν. Άπ' έσ-&?ιών εσ&λά μαΰήσψ 
 
 Μ 158, 3. (b). 2 §176,1. 3 § 158, 5. (b). 
 
 4 § 161, 2. (c). 5 $ 158, 5. (a). 6 § 158, 3. (b). 
 
§ 122.] VERBS. PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 139 
 
 Και κακός ττολλά/αο τιμής και δόξης έλαχε ν. Παρά των -&εών πολλά πάρει- 
 λή ψαμεν δώρα. Ον λ ε λ η ■& ε ν, δςτις άδικα έργα πράττει. Έ,ι ϋεον αντίο τις 
 ε?ιττεται λαΰ εϊν, άμαρτάνει. Αϊς εξαμαρτείν ταυτον 1 ουκ άνδρος σοόον. 
 'Έξ άγαΰής χϋονός έ β λα στ ε 2 καλά άν&εμα, εκ δ' όρΰών φρενών βονλενματ' 
 £σ#λά. Ύης ευεργεσίας οίιποτε λ η σο μα ι. 
 
 The king wall not perceive the plots against him. If thou drinkest (drink- 
 ing), talk not much (pi) ; for thou wilt err. What man has not once erred'? 
 The had (man) is hated by the good. Philip increased (aor.) his royal au- 
 thority more by money than by arms. From a correct understanding will al- 
 ways spring (β?Μστάνω) excellent resolutions. I have slept only a short time. 
 I will not touch the dog. Pericles has acquired great fame. The had will 
 never acquire true fame. ΛΥο shall take precaution for a hecoming life (gen.). 
 The town was taken (aor.) by the enemy. The ungrateful (person) has for- 
 gotten the fa\'or The boy has studied literature well. Hast thou heard the 
 sad news Ί 
 
 §122. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by annexing the two consonants σκ or the syllable ισκ. 
 
 Σχ is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and ισκ, 
 when it is a consonant. Most verbs, whose pure stem ends with a 
 consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of pure 
 verbs, e. g. ενρ-ίσχω (from ΈΤΡΕ-). Some of these verbs, in the 
 Pres. and Impf., take a reduplication also, which consists in re- 
 peating the first consonant of the stem with ι. 
 
 1. άλ-ίσκ-ομαι, to be taken, to be conquered, Impf. ηλισκόμην; 
 ζΑΛΟ-} Fut. άλώσομαι ; second Aor. ήλων, and εάλων (μι, § 142, 
 9), Itaas taken ; Perf. ηλωκα, and εάλωχα, I have been taken (Aug., 
 § 87, 6). The Act. is supplied by αιρεΐν (§ 126, 1), signifying, to 
 take captive, to conquer. 
 
 2. αναλίσκω, to spend, to consume, Impf. άνηλισκον; Fut. ανα- 
 λώσω ; Aor. άνηλωσα and ανάλωσα, χατψάλωσα ; Perf. άνηλωχα 
 and άναλωκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, άνηλωμαι and άνάλωμαι ; Aor, 
 Pass, άνάλώϋ-ην. 
 
 3. αρέσκω, to please, Fut. άρεσω ; Aor. ηρεσα ; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass, ηρεσμαι ; Aor. Pass. ήρέσ&ψ. — Mid. 
 
 4. γηράσκω or γηράω, to grow old, Fut. γηράσομαι ; Aor. ίγήρα- 
 σα; Inf. γηράσαι; Perf. γεγηρακα. 
 
 5. γιγνώσκω, to know, (ΓΝΟ-) Fut. γνώσομαι; second Aor. εγ- 
 νων (μι, § 142) ; Perf. εγνωκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εγνωσμαι (§ 95) ; 
 verbal adjective, γνωστός, γνωστεος. 
 
 1 ) GO, Rem. 2 Ou the Sing. verb, see p. 27. 
 
140 VERBS. — PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. [§ 122. 
 
 6. διδράσκω, to run away (usually compounded, e. g. άποδ., 
 εκδ., διαδ.), Fut. δράσομαι; Perf. δέδρακά; second Aor. εδράν 
 (μι, §142,1). 
 
 7. ευρίσκω, to find, second Aor. ενρον; Imp. εύρε; (ETPE-) 
 Fut. ενρησω ; Perf. ενρηκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ενρημαι ; Aor. 
 Pass, ενρεϋ-ψ; Aor. Mid. ενρόμ?]ν; verbal adjective, ενρετυς. 
 
 8. ηβάσκω, to come to one's strength, to come to the state of man- 
 hood, Aor. ηβησα (ιβάω, to he young, but άνηβάω, to become young 
 again). 
 
 9. &νήσκω, commonly άποϋνήσκω, to die, (QAN-) Aor. άπίβ-ά- 
 vov ; Fut. άπο&ανονμαι ; Perf. τέΰνηκα, etc. ; Fut. Perf. Τϋ&νήξω 
 old Att., and τε&ν?]ξομαι, I shall be dead. 
 
 10. ιλάσκομαι, to propitiate, Fut. ίλασομαι; Aor. ιλασάμψ. 
 
 11. μιμνησκω, to remind, (ΜΝΛ-) Fut. μνησω; Aor. εμνησα; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, μεμνημαι, I remember, I am mindful (Redup., 
 § 88, Rem. 1), Subj. μεμνώμαι, -jjj, -ηται (§ 116, 4), Imp. με'μνησο; 
 Plup. εμεμνήμψ, I remembered, Opt. μεμνημην, -yo, -ψο, or μεμνφ- 
 ιχψ, -φο, -φτο (§ 11 6, 4) ; Fut. Perf. μεμνησομαι, I shall be mindful; 
 Aor. εμρησϋ-ην, I remembered; Fut. μνησ&ησομαι, I shall remember. 
 
 12. πάσχω (arising from πάΰσκω, by transferring the aspiration 
 of the & to κ), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. επά&ον; 
 (ΠΕΝΘ-) Fut. τζείσομαι (§ 8, 7) ; Perf. πεπονϋ-α. Verbal adjective, 
 
 13. πιπίσκω, to give to drink, Fut. πίσω; Aor. ίπϊσα. 
 
 14. πιπράσκω, to sell (Fut. and Aor. in the Common language 
 expressed by άποδωσομαι, άπεδόμψ) ; Perf. πεπράκα ; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, πε'πράμαι (Inf. πεπράσΌ-αή ; Aor. επρά&ην ; Fut. Perf. 
 πεπράσομαι in the sense of the simple Fut. πρα&ήσομαι (not used). 
 
 15. στερίσκω (seldom στερεω), to deprive of, Fut. στερήσω ; Aor. 
 εστε'ρησα; Perf. εστερηκα; Mid. and Pass, στερίσκομαι, στερούμαι, 
 Fut. στερησομαι ; Perf. εστερημαι ; Aor. εστερί]ϋ•ψ. 
 
 16. τιτρωσκω, to wound, Fut. τ^ωσω ; Aor. έτρωσα; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, τετρωμαι ; Aor. ετρώϋψ ; Fut. τρωϋ-ησομαι and τρωσο- 
 
 17. ψάσκω, to think, to say, to affirm, assert (Ind. not used), Impf. 
 εφασκον; Fut. ψήσω; Aor. εφησα. 
 
 18. χάσκω, ίο ,ζ^^, (ΧΛΝ-) Aor. εχάνον ; Fut. χάνουααι ; Perf. 
 κε'χηνα, I stand 
 
 Eemark. Αιδάσκω, to teach, retains the /< in forming the tenses : Fut. διδάξω , 
 ΚονΛδίδαξα; Perf. δεδίδακα; Aor.Tass. έδιδάχ-&ην. — Mid. 
 
§ 123.] VERBS. — PURE STE -ΛΙ STRENGTHENED. 141 
 
 LIX. Vocabulary. 
 
 λλϋπος,-ον, without trou- επαναφέρω, to bring back, παλαιός, -a, -6v, old, aged, 
 
 ble, free from sorrow. refero, to refer, impute. of old time. 
 
 άμνημονέω, w. gen., to be ευγενής, -ες, well-born, of πάσχω, to feel, suffer ; 
 
 forgetful of. high birth, noble. with ευ, receive a favor, 
 
 δεκάς, -άδος, ή, a decad, μοίρα, -ας , ή, a share, a be well treated. 
 
 the number ten. lot, fate. πεν&έω, to grieve, mourn 
 
 έξ-ενρίσκω, to find out. μόρσιμος, -ov, fated. for. 
 
 Όλίγονς εν ρ ή σ ε ι ς άνδρας εταίρους πιστούς εν χάλεποϊς πράγμασιν. Πα- 
 σιν άν&ρώποις μόρσιμόν εστίν άπ οΰ αν εϊν. ΤΙεν&ονμεν τους τ ε•&νη κότ ας. 
 Ήδέως των παλαιών πράξεων 1 με μνην τ at οι άνϋρωποι. Ουκ αν εϋροις 
 άν&ρωπον πάντα? όλβιώτατον. Ή καλώς ζ?)ν, 3 η καλώς τ εΰνη κέν αι δ ευ- 
 γενής βούλεται. Έί δεινά δι' νμετέραν κακότητα π επόν&ατε, μη τι 4 ϋεοϊς 
 τούτων μοϊραν επαναφέρετε. Ύά άλλα και πόλεμος και μεταβολή τύχης αν ά- 
 λω σ εν - h ή τέχνη δε σώζεται, ΐίάντ' εστίν ε ξ ευ ρ ε ι ν, εάν μη τον πόνον 
 φεύγ-η τις. Εί τις γη ράσα ς ζην εύχεται, άξιος εστί γηράσκειν πολλάς εις ετών 
 δεκάδας. Μέμνησο, ότι •&νητος υπάρχεις. Ύύχ-η τέχνην ευ ρ η κ α ς, ου 
 τέχνη τύχην. Ουκ εστί βίον εΰρειν άλνπον ούδενί. 6 'Αχάριστος, όςτις εν 
 π α ι9• ώ ν άμνημονεϊ. Αίκαιον εν πράττοντα με μνη σΰ α ι τών άτυχων. 
 
 The town has been taken by the enemies. The citizens expected, that the 
 town would be taken by the enemies. By the war (dat.) the whole wealth of 
 the town has been consumed. Seek to please {aor.) the good. The fame of 
 virtue will never grow old. The bad (man) will never perceive the beauty of 
 virtue. The slaves have run away in the night. They say that (ace. w. inf.) 
 letters were invented (inf. aor.) by the Phoenicians. The brave warriors will 
 willingly die for their country. To mortals it is not permitted (ουκ εστί, w. dat.) 
 to say, This I will not suffer. The prisoners were sold (aor.) by the enemies. 
 The soldiers robbed (aor.) the citizens of their property. Many soldiers were 
 wounded in the battle. Alexander was instructed (aor.) by Aristotle. 
 
 § 123. V. Verbs, ichose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by prefixing the Reduplication. 
 
 This reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
 stern with e. To this class belong : 
 
 γίγνομαι (instead of γιγένομαι), to become, (ΓΕΛ Γ -) Aor. ίγενόμψ; 
 Fut. γενήσομαι ; Perf. γεγένημαι, I have become, or γεγονα with a 
 present signification, lam. 
 
 πίπτω (instead of πιπε'ζω), to fall, Imp. πίπτε; (ΠΕΤ-) Fut. πε- 
 σονμαι (§116, 3); Aor. επεαον; Perf. πεπτωκα with irregular 
 vowel of variation. 
 
 Remark. Several verbs of class IV, § 122, belong here, as γιγνώσκω. 
 
 1 § 158, 5. (b). 2 in eveiy respect. 3 § 97, 3. fa). 4 μη τι, in no respect 
 The Aor. denotes a custom. 6 ο ν κ εστί — ο ν δ ε ν ί, uo one can. See § 177, 6 
 
142 VERBS TO WHOSE PURE STEM £ IS ADDED. [§ 124. 
 
 § 124. VI. Verbs, to whose Pure Stem ε is added in the Pres. and 
 
 Imp/. 
 
 1. γαμεω, to marry (of the man), Perf. γεγάμηκα, but Fut. γαμώ 
 (§ 83) ; Aor. εγημα, γημαι ; Mid. γαμονμαι (with the Dat.), to marry 
 (of the woman, nubo), Fut. γαμονμαι (§ 83) ; Aor. εγημάμην, Pass. 
 to he wedded, Aor. εγαμή&ψ, etc. 
 
 2. γη&εω } usually Perf. γέγη&α (also prose), to rejoice, Fut. γψ 
 ϋ-ήσω. 
 
 3. δοκεω, to seem, videor, to think, Fut. δόξω ; Aor. εδοξα ; Perf. 
 Pass, δεδογμαι, visus sum ; Aor. Pass, εδόχ&ην. 
 
 4. μαρτνρε'ω, to witness, Fut. μαρτνρηαω, etc. But μαρτνρομαι, 
 Dep. Mid. ίο ca^ ίο witness. 
 
 5. ξνρε'ω, to shave, Mid. ξνρομαι; Aor. εξνράμην, but Perf. «£ti- 
 
 6. ώϋ-εω, to push, Impf. εώΦονν; Fut. ωσω and ω^σω ; Aor. 
 εωσα, ωσαι; Perf. εωκα; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εωσμαι; Aor. Pass. 
 eaHrthy* (Aug. § 87, 4).— Mid. 
 
 LX. Vocabulary. 
 'Απω&έω, to push, or drive εμπίπτω, to fall on or into συμ-πίπτω, to fall with ; 
 
 away. . something, to meet with. συμπίπτει, it happens. 
 
 άπ7, -ης, η, infatuation, εύδοκϊμέω, to be or become συμ-φέρω, to cany with, 
 
 and consequent unhap- celebrated. conduce, to be of use. 
 
 piness, evil. προ-νοέω, to think or con- συν-δια-τρίβω, to spend 
 
 είς-ωΰ-έω, to push, or drive sider beforehand. time with, to live with. 
 
 in. πώποτε, ever. φόνος, -ου, ό, murder. 
 
 ΐίολλάκις εκ κακοϋ εσΰ-λον έγένετο, καϊ κακόν εξ άγαΰοΰ. Χεϊρα πεσόντυ 
 δρεξον. Ό αγαπών κίνδυνον έμπεσείται αύτώ. Οί άν&ρωποι προς άρετην γε- 
 γόνασιν. Μη μοί γένοιΰ' α βούλομαι, αλλ' α συμφέρει. Μη σπεύδε πλουτεΐν, 
 μη ταχύ πένης γένη. ΤΙολλάκις ό ευδοκιμεΐν πειρώμενος, ου προνοησας, εις με- 
 γάλην καϊ χαλεπην άτην έπεσεν. "Οταν ατυχείν σοι συμπέση τι, Έύριπίδου 
 μνησΰ-ητι • Ουκ έστιν, οςτις πάντ' ανηρ ευδαιμονεΐ. Μενέδημος προς τον έρω- 
 τήσαντα, ει γημαι ό σπουδαίος, έλεξεν • Έγώ γεγάμηκα, Ή τοϋ φίλου •&υγατηρ, 
 έννάτην ήμέραν γεγαμημένη, τέΰνηκεν. Άχιλλέως ΰυμος έγεγηΰ-ει φόνον 
 Αχαιών ορώντος. 'Έδοξε τω στρατηγώ 1 επί τους πολεμίους στρατεύσασϋ-αι. 
 Σωκράτης έλεξεν • 'Ύπο πάντων μαρτυρησεταί μοι, 'ότι εγώ ηδίκησα μεν ουδένα 
 πώποτε άν&ρώπων, ουδέ χείρω 2 έποίησα, βελτίους δε ποιεϊν επειρώμην άεϊ τους 
 έμοϊ συνδιατρίβοντας. Αημοσΰ-ένης έξύρατο την κεφαλήν. Οί στοατιώται εις 
 την πάλιν ειςεωσΰ-ησαν. ΟΊ στρατιώται άπεώσαντο τους πολεμίους. 
 
 If thou actest so (so acting), thou wilt soon become poor. The soldiers have 
 fallen upon the enemies (εμπίπτω, w dat.). The daughter of my friend -will 
 
 1 The general determined. 2 § 35, Rem. 4. 
 
§ 125.] VERBS WHICH ASSUME £ IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. 143 
 
 marry the son of my brother. The citizens will rejoice, if they hear (hearing) 
 the defeat (gen.) of the enemies. It is determined (perf. pass, ο/δοκέω) that (ace. 
 to. inf.) the soldiers march against the enemies. All will hear testimony to 
 thee, that thou hast conferred many favors on the state. The slaves have had 
 their heads shaved. The enemies drove the soldiers into the town. 
 
 § 125. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and Impf, but which 
 in the other Tenses assume a Stem with the Characteristic ε. 
 The ε is lengthened into η in inflection. Exceptions : άχ&ομαι and μάχομαι. 
 
 1. άλέξω, to ward off, Fut. άλεξησω ; Mid. to ward off from one- 
 self, to defend, Fut. άλεξήσομαι (from ΛΑΕΚ-) ; Aor. ήλεξαμην. 
 
 2. αχ&ομαι, to be vexed, displeased, Fut. άχ&εσομαι ; Aor. ηχ&εσ- 
 ■&ψ ; Fut. άχ&εσ&ήσομαι having the same signification as άχΰ*έσομαι. 
 
 3. βόσκω, to feed, Fut. βοσκήσω ; Aor. εβόσκησα ; Mid. to feed 
 (intransitive). 
 
 4. βονλομαι, to wish, (second Pers. βονλει, § 82, 2), Fut. βονλψ 
 σομαι ; Perf. βεβονλημαι ; Aor. εβονλήϋ-ψ and ήβονλ. (Aug. § 85, 
 Rem. I). 
 
 5. δ son, to want, to need, usually Impers. δει, it is wanting, it is 
 necessary, Subj. όΥ $, Part, δέον, Inf. δεΐν ; Impf. έδει, Opt. δε'οι ; 
 Fut. δεήσει ; Aor. εδεησε(ν) ; Mid. δέομαι, to need, Fut. δεήσομαι; 
 Aor. εδεή&ψ. 
 
 6. ε&ε'λω and Φελώ, to vjill, Impf. ηϋ•ε).ον and ε&ελον ; Fut. ε&ε- 
 λήσω and Φελήσω ; Aor. ή&εληαα and εϋ-έλησα ; Perf. only ήΦέληκα. 
 
 7. εί'λω, to press, to shut up, Fut. είλήσω; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εΐ- 
 Χημαι; Aor. Pass, ειλή&ην. 
 
 8. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. ήρόμην, I inquired, ερεσΦαι, ερωμαι, εροι- 
 αψ, ερον, ερυμενος ; Fut. ερήσυμαι. The other tenses are supplied 
 by ερωταν. 
 
 9. ερρω, to go forth, Fut. ερρήσω ; Aor. ηρρησα. 
 
 10. ενδω, commonly κα&ενδω, to sleep, Fut. κα&ενδήσω (Aug., 
 § 91, 3). 
 
 11. ί/ω, to have, to hold, Impf. είγον (§ 87, 3) ; Aor. εσχον, Inf. 
 σγεΐν, Imp. σχε'ς, παράσχες (μι, § 142), Subj. σχώ, -r t g, παράσχω, 
 παράσχΐ]ς, etc., Opt. σχοίην (μι), Part, σχων, Fut. έ'ξω and σχήσω-, 
 Perf. εαχψα ; Aor. Mid. εσχόμην, Subj. σχώμαι, Opt. σχοίμψ, Imp. 
 σχον, παράσχον, Inf. σχεσ&αι, παρασχέσΰαι, Part, σγόμενος-, Fut. 
 σχψομαι ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εσχημαι ; Aor. Pass, εσχε'&ην ; ver- 
 bal adjective, εκτός and σχετός. 
 
 12. 'ί\ρω, to boil, to cook, Fut. εψήσω; verbal adjective, έφ&ός or 
 εψητοί, εψητεος. 
 
144 VERBS WHICH ASSUME δ IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. [_§ 125 
 
 13. καθίζω, to seat, make to sit, Impf. εκάϋ-ιζον, old Attic, κα#Γ- 
 ζον ; Fut. καΰιώ (§ 83) ; Aor. εκά&ϊσα, old Attic, κα&ΐσα ; Perf. 
 κεκά&ΐκα', Mid. Jsrni myself, Fut. κα&ιζησομαι; Aor. εκα&ισάμην, 
 I seated for myself, I caused to sit. But κα&εζομαι, I seat myself, 
 I sit, Impf. εκα&εζόμην; Fut. καϋ-εδονμαι (Aug. § 91, 3). 
 
 14. κλα/ω, ίο we<2£?, Att. κλάω without contraction, Fut. κλανσο- 
 uai and κλανσονμαι (§116, 3), rarer κλαιησω or κλατ/σω; Aor. 
 έκλαυσα ; Perf. κεκλανμαι and κέκλανσμαι ; verbal adjective, κλανσ"- 
 τός and κλ#ι>τΟ£, κλανστεος. — Mid. 
 
 15. μάχομαι, to fight, Fut. μαχοϋμαι (instead of μαχεσομαι) ; Aor. 
 εμαχεσάμψ ; Perf. μεμάχημαι ; verbal adjective, μαχετέος and μα- 
 χητεος. 
 
 16. μέλλω, to intend, to he about to do, hence to delay, Impf. εμελ- 
 lov and ημελλον; Fut. μελλησω ; Aor. εμε'λλησα (Aug., § 85, Eem.). 
 
 17. με'λεί μοι, it is a care, anxiety, interest to me, curae mihi est 
 (rarely personal μελω), Fut. μελήσει ; Aor. εμε-λησε(ν) ; Perf. μεμε- 
 ληκε(ν) ; Mid. μέλομαι, commonly επιμελομαι (and επιμελούμαι) ; 
 Fut. επιμελήϋομαι (sometimes επιμελη-ΰήσομαι) ; Aor. επεμελτ^ψ . 
 
 18. μύζω, to suck, Fut. μνζήσω, etc. 
 
 19. ο£ω, ίο smeZZ, Fut. όζησω; Aor. ωζησα; Perf. οδωδα with 
 the meaning of the Pres. (Att. Redup., § 89). 
 
 20. ο'ίομαι and οζι^οα, ίο think, second Pers. οΐει (§ 82, 2), Impf. 
 φόμην and φ/«^ ; Fut. οιήσομαι ; Aor. φήχτην, οίη&ήναι (Aug., 
 §87,1). 
 
 21. οΐχομαι, to depart, to go, to have gone, abii, Impf. ορχόμψ, I 
 went away; Fut. οίχήσομαι; Perf. φχημαι, in the Common lan- 
 guage only in composition, e. g. παρφχημαι. 
 
 22. οφείλω, to owe, to be under obligation, debeo, Fut. όφειλήσω ; 
 Aor. ώψείλησα; second Aor. ώφελον, -ες, -ε(ν) (first and second 
 Pers. PI. not used) in forms expressing wish, utinam. 
 
 23. τΐετομαι, to fly, Fut. πτήσομαι; Aor. επτόμψ, ntiad-ai (rarer 
 εητην and επτάμην, μι, § 142, 2) ; Perf. πεπότημαι. — Syncope, 
 §117, 1- 
 
 24. χαίρω, to rejoice, Fut. χαιρησω ; Aor. εχάρψ (μι, § 142, 8) ; 
 Perf. κεχάρηκα, I have rejoiced, and κεχάρημαι, lam rejoiced. 
 
 Remark. With these verbs several liquid verbs may be classed ; still, these 
 form, the Fut. and the Aor. regularly ; e. g. μένω, to remain, Perf. μεμένηκα, reg- 
 ular in the other tenses 5 νέμω, to divide, to distribute, Fut. νέμω and νεμονμαι ; 
 Aor. Ινειμα ; Perf. νενέμηκα ; Aor. Pass, ενεμηϋ-ην (rarer ενεμέϋην) ; Per£ 
 Mid. or Pass, νενέμημαι. — Mid. 
 
§ 125.] VERBS WHICH ASSUME £ IN THE TENSE-FORMATION. 145 
 
 LXL Vocabulary. 
 
 Αμβροσία, -ας, ή, the food τήδειος, -a, -ον, fit, re- μεστός, -ή, -όν, w. gen., full. 
 
 of the gods. quisite ; τά επιτήδεια, μύρον, -ου, τό, scented 
 
 άνα-πέτομαι, to fly up, or provisions. salve, perfumery. 
 
 away. ερωτάω, to ask. νέμω, to divide, distribute. 
 
 άνέψω, to boil up. ημίθεος, -ου, ό, a demi- όρνις, -Ιθος, ό, ή, a bird. 
 
 βασιλέως, -ον and βασί- god. όρος, -εος = -ους, τό, a 
 
 λείος, -α, -ον, royal, θρόνος, -ου, ό, a seat, a mountain. 
 
 regal. throne. πάππος, -ου, ό, a grand- 
 
 δια-μένω, to remain. καλοκαγαθία, -ας, ή, rec- father. 
 
 ει, if, in a question, whether. titude, virtue. πλην, except, besides. 
 
 έλέγχω,ίο examine,search, λεία, -ας, ή, booty, plun- τρίπους, -οδός, ό, three- 
 blame, convict. der. [part. footed, a tripod. 
 επιτήδειος, -ον and επί- μέρος, -εος = -ους, τό, a 
 
 Οι στρατιώταί τους πολεμίους άλεξήσονται. Μη άχθεσθήτε υπέρ ων 1 ήμαρ- 
 τάνετε ελεγχόμενοι. Ό ποιμήν αιγών την άγέλην εν τοϊς όρεσι βοσκήσει. ΟΙ 
 στρατιώταί έπι τους πολεμίους στρατεύεσθαι έβουλήθησαν. Ύοϊς στρατιώταις 2 
 έν τη πολέμια γη των επιτηδείων* δεήσει. ΤΙλούσιός εστίν ονχ ό πολλά κεκτη- 
 μένος, αλλ' ό μικρών δεησόμενος. Ό ΐ[ο?^υδεύκης ουδέ θεός ηθέλησε μόνος, άλ- 
 λά μάλλον ημίθεος συν τω άδελφώ γενέσθαι. Οί βάρβαροι, ΰποτών 'Έ?Λήνων 
 διωχθέντες, εις τον ποταμόν ε'ιλήθησαν. 'Έρον τον πατέρα, ει την έπιστολην 
 γέγραφεν. Οΰ πρέπει τον στρατηγον έν κινδύνοις καθευδησαι. Ουδείς ανθρώ- 
 πων ήξιώθη τοις θεοϊς 4 όμύιεϊν, πλην όσοι μετεσχήκασι κάλλους • ΤΙέλοψ γαρ 
 τούτου ένεκα αμβροσίας 5 μετέσχε και Τανυμήδης και άλλοι τινές. Μήδεια Αϊ- 
 σονα άνειρήσασα νέον ποιησαι λέγεται. Καθιοϋμέν σε, ω στρατηγέ, εις τον θρό- 
 νον τον βασίλειον. Ό βασιλεύς έπι του θρόνου καθιζήσεται. Οί "Έλληνες έν 
 Σαλαμΐνι θαρβαλέως έμαχέσαντο. Κϋρος υπο Μαν δύνης της μητρός ερωτηθείς, 
 ει βούλοιτο μένειν παρά τω πύππω, ουκ έμέλλησεν, άλλα ταχύ έλεξεν, ότι με - 
 νειν βούλοιτο. Τοΐς άγαθοΐς 6 της αρετής 7 μελήσει. Χρηστοί νέοι ον μύρων 
 όζήσουσιν,* άλλα καλοκαγαθίας. ΟΙ στρατιώταί οίηθέντες τους πολεμίους άπο- 
 φνγεΐν ωχοντο. Ή ψυχή άναπτομένη οίγήσεται αθάνατος και άγηρως. Οί κα- 
 κούργοι μεγύλην ζηιχίαν ώφείλησαν. 9 Ή ο Ίς άναπεπότηται. Οί πολίται δει- 
 νώς έκεχαρήκεσαν επί τη νίκη. ΟΊ θηρενται ~άσαν την νύκτα έν τοις όρεσι διε- 
 αεμενήκεσαν. Της λείας μέρος ύπο τών στρατιωτών τω στρατηγώ ενεμήθη (ένε- 
 αέθη). Τρίποδες ήσαν κρεών 10 μεστοί νενεμημένων. 
 
 The soldiers courageously kept off (aor. mid.) the enemies. Many herdsmen 
 tended (aor.) the herds of goats on the mountain 4 ;. The father will wish to de- 
 part to-morrow. A good general takes care, that (that not, όπως, μή, w. ind.fict.) 
 the soldiers may not want provisions. The good will not wish to go about with 
 the bad. I will ask the father, whether he has written the letter. If thou art 
 weary (being weary, per/, part.), thou wilt sleep comfortably (ήδέως). Those 
 who are held by evil desires are all slaves. Cowardly soldiers will not take 
 part in dangers. JEson, having been boiled by Medea, is said to have become 
 
 1 i. e. ύπερ τούτων, ά. 2 the soldiers will need. 3 § 158, 5. (a). 
 
 4 $ 161, 2. (a), (a). 5 § 158, 3. (b). 6 § 161, 5. 7 § 158, 6. I, (b). 
 
 8 όζειν τινός, to smell of something. 9 owed, had to suffer. 10 § 39, Rem. 
 
 13 
 
146 VERBS. TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. [§ 126. 
 
 young again. The soldiers set their general upon the regal throne. Good 
 warriors will fight courageously for their country. I will not delay, but quickly 
 ask. The laws will care for the general welfare {gen.). The flowers smell 
 (perf.) beautifully. The youths smelt of perfume. The citizens will not think, 
 that (ace. w. inf.) the enemies have already fled. I will go. The evil-doers will 
 have to suffer (will owe) a great punishment. The bird will fly away. I shall 
 rejoice to be honored (being honored) by the good. The soldiers have given 
 the general a share of the booty. 
 
 § 126. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different Roots, and 
 which are classed together only in respect to Signification. 
 
 1. αιρεω, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Fut. αιρησω ; Perf. ηρη- 
 κα ; Aor. (from ΈΑ) εϊλον, ελεΐν ; Aor. Pass, χιρεϋ-ην ; Fut. Pass. 
 αίρε&ήσομαι (§ 98, Rem.) ; Mid. to choose, Fut. αίρήσομαι ; Aor. 
 ειλόμην ; verbal adjective, αιρετός, -τεος. — Aug., § 87, 3. 
 
 2. έρχομαι, to go, to come (the remaining modes and participials 
 are borrowed from είμι [§ 137] ; thus έρχομαι, Γω, ΐ&ι, Ιεναι, Ιων) ; 
 Impf. ήρχόμην, commonly ψιν or rja, Opt. ίοιμι ; Fut. ειμί, I shall 
 go (ηξω, I shall come) ; — (ΕΛΕΤΘ-) Perf. εληλύϋα ; Aor. ηλ&ον, 
 ελ&ω, ελ&οιμι, ελ&ε, ^ΰ-εΐν, ελ&ων ; verbal adjective, ελενστεον. 
 
 3. εσ&ίω, to eat, impf. ησ&ιον; Fut. εδομαι; Perf. εδηδοκα; 
 (ΦΑΓ-) Aor. εφαγον, φαγεΐν ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εδηδεσμαι ; 
 Aor. Pass, ήδεβ&ψ ; verbal adjective, εδεστός. 
 
 4. όράω, to see, Impf. εωρων ; Perf. εωράκα (Aug., § 87, 6) ; 
 (ΙΛ-) Aor. εϊδον, ΐδω, ΐδοιμι, ίδε', ιδεΐν, ιδών. On the second Perf. 
 οϊδα, I know, see § 143. (ΟΠ-) Fut. οψομαι (second Pers. o\psi, 
 § 82, 2) ; Mid. or Pass, όρώμαι ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, εωράμαι or 
 ωμμαι, ω-ψαι, etc. ; Inf. ωφ&αι ; Aor. Mid. εϊδόμψ, ίδεσϋαι, ίδοΰ 
 (and with the meaning ecce, ιδού), as a simple, only poetic; Aor. 
 Pass, ώφ&ην, όφ&ήναι ; Fut. όφΰ-ήσομαι ; verbal adjective, ορατός 
 and όπτός. 
 
 5. τρέχω, to run, (ΛΡΕΜ-) Fut. δραμονμαι; Aor. εδράμον ; 
 Perf. δεδράμηκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, δεδράμημαι. 
 
 6. φέρω, to bear, (OI-) Fut. οΐσω ; — (ΕΓΚ-) Aor. ψεγκον (rarer 
 ηνεγκα), Opt. ενεγκοιμι, -ειε(ν), etc. (rarer -αιμι, etc.) ; Inf. ενεγκεϊν, 
 Part, ενεγκών, Imp. ενεγκε, -ετω, etc. ; (ENEK-) Perf. ενψοχα ; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, ενηνεγμαι, -γξαι, -γκται or ενψεκται ; Aor. Mid. 
 ηνεγκάμψ, ενεγκαι, -ασ&αι, -άμενος ; Aor. Pass, ψεχ&ψ ; Fut. ενεχ- 
 Φήσομαι; verbal adjective, οίστός, οίστεος. — Mid. 
 
 7. φημί (§ 135, 8), to say, Impf. εφην with, the meaning of the 
 Aor., also φάναι and φάς ; (ΕΠ-) first Aor. είπα, εϊπας, είπατε, 
 
§ 126.] VERBS. TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. 147 
 
 Imp. είπον, ειπάτω, Inf. εϊπαι ; second Aor. είπον, εϊπω, είποιμι, είπε 
 (compound πρόειπε), ειπείν, ειπών. From the Epic Free, ε'ίρω, come 
 Fut. ερώ ; Ferf. εΐρψα ; Ferf. Mid. or Fass. είρημαι ; Fut. Ferf. 
 ειρησομαι. From PE- Aor. Fass. ερρή&ην, ρηϋψαι, ρηϋείς ; Fut. 
 Pass, ρηϋ-ήσομαι; verbal adjective, ρητός, ρητεος. — Mid. only in 
 compounds, Fut. άπερονμαι and first Aor. άπείπασ&αι, to deny, to 
 despair, like άπειπεΐν. 
 
 LXII. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άγανακτέω, to be dis- εξ-ειπειν, to speak or say πάρα- τρέχω, w. ace, to run 
 
 pleased, or indignant. out, utter. [ly. by, or past. 
 
 άνα-κράζω, to cry out. εββωμένως, strongly, firm- παρα-φέρω, to carry by or 
 
 άτρεκέως, exactly, surely, εύβονλος, -ov, one who past. 
 
 βραδύς, -εΐα, -$, slow. consults well, clever, πέρας, -ατός, τό, the end. 
 
 γλαύξ, Attic γ?^αύξ, -κός, sagacious. a limit. 
 
 η, an owl. λυπέω, to distress. |dious. περι-οράω, to overlook, 
 
 δείδω, to fear; per/, δέ- μακρός, -ά, -ov, long, te- neglect. 
 
 δοικα has a present mean- μήπω, not yet. προ-έρχομαι, to go before. 
 
 ing. οργίζομαι, (w. pass, aor.), πταίρω, to sneeze. 
 
 δώμα, -ατός, τό, a house. to be angry. ρεύμα, -ατός, τό, a stream. 
 
 ένύπνιον, -ου, τό, a dream, παρακαταθήκη, -ης, η, a σφόδρα, very, violently, 
 
 a vision. thing deposited, apledge. very much. 
 
 Και βραδύς ευβουλος είλε 1 ταχϋν άνδρα διώκων. Οι 'Αθηναίοι θεμιστο- 
 κλέα στρατηγόν εΐλοντο εν τω ΐίερσικω πολεμώ. 'Οδυσσεύς εις "Αιδου μέγα 
 δώμα η λ ■& ε ν. Ήν αν μοϊραν ε λ η ς, ταυτην φέρε καϊ μη αγανακτεί. Αυπού- 
 μεΰ', άνπτάρητις• αν ει: π τ? κακώς, όργιζόμε&α- αν Ι δ η τις ένύπνιον, σφόδρα 
 φοβούμεθα ■ αν γλαύξ άνακράγη, δεδοίκαμεν. Μ?) πίστευε τάχιστα, πριν άτρε- 
 κέως πέρας ό ψ ε ι. Μετρίως φάγε. Ούδε εις "Ομηρου ειρηκε μακρόν. "Ος- 
 τις ?ιόγους, ως παρακαταΰήκην, λαβών ε ξ ε ι π ε ν, άδικος εστίν, η άγαν άκρατης. 
 Μ?7 τοϋτο βλέψης, ει νεώτερος λέγω, αλλ' ει φρονούντων τους λόγους ανδρών 
 έρώ. ΤΙέν&ει μετρίως τους άπο&ανόντας φίλους • ου γαρ τε&νήκασιν, άλλα την 
 αυτήν όδόν, ην πάσιν ε λ # ε Ι ν έστ' ανάγκη, προεληλύθασιν. Ξένους 
 πένητας μή παραδ ράμης ίδών. Τίοταμός τις καϊ βεϋμα βίαιόν εστίν ό 
 αιών • άμα τε γάρ ώφ&η και παρενην ε κτα ι και άλλο παραφέρεται, τό <5έ' 
 εν εχϋ-ή σ εται. "Εν εγ κε λύπην και βλάβην έββωμένως. Φίλον δι' οργψ 
 εν κακοϊς μη περιίδης. Μήπω μέγαν είπη ς, πριν τελευτήσαντ' Ι δ η ς. 
 
 The enemies have taken the town. Themistocles was chosen general by the 
 Athenians. Come, {aor.) Ο friend, and see (aor.) the unhappy man. If thou 
 art hungry (being hungry), thou wilt eat with relish (ήδέως). The boy has 
 eaten. The provisions are (i. e. have been) eaten. I have seen the unhappy 
 (man). The enemies were seen (aor.). If thou seest thy poor friends (part, 
 aor.), thou wilt not ran past them. The boy has run very fast. The grief was 
 borne (aor.) by the father with firmness. What has teen said to thee by tbj 
 friend ! 
 
 1 the Aor. is translated by is accustomed. instea il of άλλο δε. 
 
148 VERBS IN -μι. — CONJUGATION.— DITISION [§§ 127, 128. 
 
 VEEBS IK -μο. 
 
 § 127. Gonj ugation of Verbs in -μι. 
 
 1. The principal peculiarity of verbs in -μι is, that, in the Pres. 
 and Impf., and also in the second Aor. Act. and Mid. of several 
 verbs, they take personal- endings different from those in -ω, and 
 have no mode-vowel in the Ind. of these tenses. The formation of 
 all the other tenses of these verbs is like that of verbs in -co, with a 
 few exceptions. 
 
 2. Several verbs in -μι, which have a monosyllabic stem, in the 
 Pres. and Impf. take a reduplication (§ 123), which consists in re- 
 peating the first consonant of the stem with ι, when the stem begins 
 with a simple consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but, when the 
 stem begins with στ, τττ, or with an aspirated vowel, ι with the rough 
 Breathing is placed before the stem. There are only a few verbs 
 of this kind ; e. g. 
 
 ΔΟ- δί-δω-μί, to give, XPA- κί-χρη-μι, to lend, 
 
 ΣΤΑ- Ί-στν-μι, to place, Έ- ϊ-η-μι, to send• 
 
 § 128. Division of Verbs in -μι. 
 Verbs in -μι are divided into two principal classes : 
 I. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. The 
 stem of verbs of this class ends, 
 
 (a) in a, e. g. ϊ-στη-μι, to station, Stem ΣΤΑ- 
 
 (b) " ε, " τί-ΰη-μι, to place, " ΘΕ- 
 
 (c) " ο, " δί-δω-μι, to give, " Δ0- 
 
 (d) " ί, " είμι, to go, • " Ί- 
 
 (e) " σ, " ειμί, instead of έσμί, to be, " ΈΣ-. 
 
 Π. Such as annex to their stems the syllable vvv or vv, and then 
 append to this syllable the personal-endings. The stem of verbs of 
 this class ends, 
 
 A. In one of the four vowels, α, ε, ι, ο, and assumes vvv. 
 
 (a) in a, e. g. σκεδά-ννϋ-μι, to scatter, Stem ΣΚΕΔΑ- 
 
 (b) " ε, " κορέ-ννϋ-μί, to satisfy, " KOPE- 
 
 (c) " ι, only τί-ννν-μι, to atone, " TI- 
 
 (d) " o, e. g. στρώ-ννν-μι, to spread out, " ΣΤΡΟ-. 
 
 B. In a consonant, and assumes vv. 
 
 (a) in a mute, e. g. δεΐκ-νϋ-μι, to show, Stem ΔΕΙΚ- 
 
 (b) " liquid, u ομ-νϋ-μι, to swear, " ΌΜ-. 
 
 Remark. Of this second class, only the verb σβέ-ννυ-μι, to quench, from the 
 stem ΣΒΕ-, forms a second Aor., viz. εσβην. 
 
στύ-ω = στώ 
 
 cru -ης = στ?)ς 
 
 
 τι-ΰέ-ω = TL--&U 
 
 τι-ΰέ-ης = τι-ΰής 
 
 TL--&E-U 
 
 όί-όό-ω = δι-δώ 
 
 δι-δό-τ/ς = δί-δώς 
 
 δι-δό-η 
 
 §§ 129, 130.] VERBS IN -μι. — MODE-VOWELS. — ENDINGS. 149 
 
 §129. Mode-vowels. 
 
 1. The Ind. Pres., Impf. and second Aor. do not take the mode- 
 vowel, and he ice the personal-endings are annexed to the verb- 
 stem ; e. g. 
 
 ϊ- στ α- μεν έ-τί--& ε- μεν έ-δο- μεν 
 
 ί - σ τ ύ - μεΰα ε -τ L--& έ -μεΰα έ - δ ό - μεΰα. 
 
 2. The Subj. has the mode-rowels ω and η, like verbs in -ω, but 
 these vowels coalesce with the characteristic- vowel ; hence the fol- 
 lowing deviations from the verbs in -ω, in respect to contraction, are 
 to be noted, namely, 
 
 ύη and ay coalesce into ή and y (not, as in contracts in -άω, into a and a), 
 oy coalesces into <p (not, as in contracts in -όω, into οι) ; e. g. 
 
 l -στά-ω = ί-στώ ί-στά -yc = l -στης ί-στά-η-ται = i -στη-ται 
 
 -μαο = τι-ΰώ-μαι 
 = δι-δώ. 
 
 Rem. 1. This form of the Subj. of Ιστημι and τίϋημι is like the Subj. of the 
 two Aorists Pass, of all verbs ; e. g. τνφϋώ, -yc, -y, etc., τνπ-ώ, -yg, -y, from 
 τνπ-τω, στα-ϋώ, -yc, -y, from Ιστημι. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -ν μι is like that of verbs in -νω ; e. g. δεικννω, 
 -νης, etc. 
 
 3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel i, which 
 is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms a diph- 
 thong ; e. g. 
 
 Opt. Impf. Α. Ί-στα-ι-ην = ί-σταί-ην Aor. Π. Α. σταί-ην Impf. Μ. i -σταί-μην 
 τι-ΰε-ι-ην = τί-ΰεί-ην •&εί-ην τι--&εί-μην 
 
 δι-δο-ι-ην = δί-δοί-ην δοί-ην δι-δοί-μην. 
 
 Rem. 3. The form of the Opt. of verbs in -ε (τίΰημι) is like the Opt. of the 
 Aorists Pass, of all verbs ; e. g. στα-ϋεί-ην, τνώ--&εΙ-ην, τνπ-εί-ην. 
 
 Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -νμι > like the Subj. Pres., folic ws the 
 form in -ω ; e. g. δεικννοιμι. 
 
 § 130. Personal-endings. 
 1. The personal-endings of the Act. are the following : 
 (a) Indicative Present, 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 Dual 2. 
 
 -μι 
 -c 
 
 -σι{ν) 
 -τον 
 
 l -στη-μ ι 
 1-στη-ς 
 ΐ-στη-σι(ν) 
 Ι-στά-τον 
 
 3. 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 -τον 
 -μεν 
 -re 
 
 [-νσί(ν)] (properly -ντι) 
 13* 
 
 ί-στά-τον 
 
 Ι-στά-μεν 
 
 Ι-στά-τε 
 
 [Ι-στα-ντι 1-στα-νσι(ν \] 
 
150 VERBS IN ψΐ. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [§ 130. 
 
 The ending of the third Pers. PL -νσι(ν) is changed into -ασι(ν), and then is 
 contracted with the preceding stem-Yowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dialect 
 iidmits contraction only in the stems ending in a, thus : 
 
 from Ι-στα -vat is formed ί-στάσι (ί-στά-ύσι) 
 
 " τί-βε-νσο " TL -βεΙσί Att. τι-βέ-άσι 
 
 " δί-δο-νσι " δί-δοϋσι " δι-δό-άσι 
 
 " δύκ-νν-νσι " δεικ-ννσί " δεικ-νν-ασι. 
 
 (b) The personal-endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Subj. do 
 not differ from those of verbs in -ω. 
 
 (c) The following are endings of the Impf. and second Aor. Ind. 
 Impf. 
 
 Aor. Π. 
 
 So the Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second Aor. έστην ; 
 e. g. έτύπ-ην, έ-στά-βην, -ης, -η, -ητον, -ητην, -ημεν, -ητε, -ήσαν. 
 
 (d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor., 
 except in the first Pers. Sing., differ from those of the Opt. of the 
 historical tenses of verbs in -ω, only in being preceded by η; e.g. 
 
 σταί-ην l -στάί-ην βεί-ην Tt -βεΐ-ην δοί-ην δι-δοί-ην. 
 Rem. 1. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt., the η is commonly rejected, and the 
 ending of the third Pers. PI. -ήσαν is regularly shortened into -εν ; e. g. 
 
 τιβεί-ημεν = τιβεϊμεν Ισταί-ητε = Ισταϊτε 
 
 τϊ&εΐ-ησαν == πΰεΐεν διδοί-ησαν = διδοϊεν. 
 
 The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs ; e. g. τνφϋείημεν, τυ• 
 πείημεν = τνφΰ-εϊμεν, τνπεϊμεν (wholly like τι-&είην). — On the contrary, in the 
 Opt. second Aor. Act. of ϊστημι, τίΰημι, δίδωμι, the shortened forms are very 
 rare, except the third Pers. Plural. 
 
 (e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are : 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -V 
 
 -ς 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 -τον 
 
 3. 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 -την 
 -μεν 
 -τε 
 
 3. 
 
 -σαν 
 
 1-στη-ν 
 
 ε-τί--&η-ν 
 
 ϊ-στη-ς 
 ϊ-στη 
 
 έ-τί-ΰ-η-ς 
 ε-τί-βη 
 
 έ-στη-τον 
 
 ε--&ε-τον 
 
 ε-στή-τηχ 
 
 ε-ΰ-έ-την 
 
 ε-στη-μεν 
 ε-στη-τε 
 
 έ-&ε-μεν 
 
 έ-ϋ-ε-τε 
 
 ε-στη-σαν 
 
 ε-ΰε-σαν. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 3. 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3. 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 -τω 
 
 -τον 
 
 -των 
 
 -τε 
 
 -τωσαν 
 
 or 
 
 (ϊ-στα-βί) 
 
 (τί-βε-βή 
 
 (δί-δο-βή 
 
 ί-στά-τω 
 
 τί-βέ-τω 
 
 δι-δό-τω 
 
 ί-στα-τον 
 
 τί-βε-τον 
 
 δί-δο-τον 
 
 ί-στά-των 
 
 τι-βέ-των 
 
 δι-δό~των 
 
 1-στα-τε 
 
 τί-βε-τε 
 
 δί-δο-τε 
 
 ί-στά-τωσαν 
 
 τί-βέ-τωσαν 
 
 δί•δό•τωσαν 
 
 ' ί-στάντων 
 
 τι-βεντων 
 
 δί-δόντων. 
 
 Rem. 2. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. rejects the ending -βι, and as a 
 compensation lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into η, ε into 
 ει, ο into ου, ν into ν, 
 
 1•στα-βι becomes l -στη τί-βε-βι becomes τί-βει 
 
 δί-δο-βί " δί-δον δείκ-νν-βι " δείκνν. 
 
 The ending -β in the Pres. is retained only in a very few verbs. In the 
 
§ 131.] VERBS IN -μι. — FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 151 
 
 second Aor. c f τίΰημί, Ιημι and δίδωμι, the ending --&L is softened into -c, thus 
 #e dt becomes ΰες, ξ-ϋί = §ς, δό-ΰι = δός ; but in the second Aor. of Ιστ-ημι, 
 the ending -#£ is retained, thus στή-ϋι, also in the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs ; 
 β. g. τυπη-ϋι, παιδεν&ητι (instead of παιδεύΰη-ϋι, § 8, Rem. 8). In compounds 
 of στηΰ -c, the ending -rftL is often shortened into -a ; e. g. παράστά, άπόστα, 
 πρόβα, κατάβά. 
 
 (f ) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -ναι. This 
 ending is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic-vowel ; 
 but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel, a being lengthen- 
 ed into ?/, ε into ei, ο into ov, thus, 
 
 Pres. ί-στα -vat τί-ΰέ -vat δί-δό -vat δεικ -vv-vat 
 
 Second Aor. στή -vat ϋεϊ-ναι δούναι. 
 
 The Inf. of Pass. Aorists of all verbs is like στηναι ; e. g. τνπή ναι, βουλεν. 
 Β-η-ναι. 
 
 (g) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. participle are -vtg f 
 
 -rtaa, -vr, which are joined to the characteristic-vowel according to 
 
 the common rule, thus, 
 
 ί-στά-ντς == l -στάς, l -στάσα, ί-σταν στάς, στάσα, στάν 
 
 τι-&έ-ντς = τί--&εΐς, -εϊσα, -εν &είς, ΰεΐσα, -&έν 
 
 δί•δό-ντς = δι-δονς, -ονσα, -όν δονς, -ονσα, -όν 
 δεικ-νν-ντς = δεικ-ννς, -νσα, -νν. 
 
 The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like the Part, τιϋείς 
 or ϋείς ; e. g. τνττ-είς, -εϊσα, -εν, βον?*,εν&-εΐς, -εϊσα, -εν. 
 
 2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs in 
 -co, except that in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Ind., and 
 in the Imp., the personal-endings retain their full form, -σαι and -σο, 
 almost throughout ; see the Paradigms. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Sing. Impf. Act. of τίΰ-ημί and δΐδωμί is generally formed from 
 ΤΙΘΕΩ and ΔΙΔΟΩ with the common contractions. In verbs in -νμι, the col- 
 lateral forms in -υω are usual for the entire Pres. and Impf., and exclusively 
 in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt. ; e. g. ένδεικνύω, ομνύω, σνμμιγννω, together 
 with ενδείκνυμί, ομννμι, συμμίγννμι. 
 
 Formation op the Tenses. 
 § 131. I. First Class of Verbs in -μι. 
 
 1. In forming the tenses of the entire Act., as well as of the Fut 
 and first Aor. Mid., the short characteristic-vowel is lengthened, 
 namely, a into η, ε into η and (in the Perf. Act. of τί&ημι and ΐημϊ) 
 into it, and ο into ω ; but in the remaining tenses of the Mid., and 
 throughout the Pass., the short characteristic-vowel is retained, with 
 the exception of the Perf. and Plup. Mid, and Pass, of τί&ημι and 
 
152 
 
 VERBS IN -μι. TENSES AND PAEADIGMS. 
 
 [§ 131. 
 
 Ιημι, where the ει of the Perf. Act. (ti&ema, τέ&ειμαι, είχα, είμαι), 
 is retained. 
 
 2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of ζί&ημι, ϊημι and δίδωμι, has κ 
 for the characteristic of the tense, not a, thus : 
 
 έ-Φη-κ-α, ψκ-α, ε-δω-κ-α. 
 
 The forms of the first Aor. Act. ε&ηκα, ήχα and έδωκα, are, how- 
 ever, used only in the Ind., and, for the most part, only in the Sing. ; 
 in the other Numbers, as well as in the other Modes and Participials, 
 the forms of the second Aor. are regularly used. Also the forms of 
 the second Aor. Mid. of τί&ημι, ΐημι and δίδωμι, are used instead 
 of the first Aor. — On the contrary, the Sing, forms of the second 
 Aor. Ind. Act. of τί&ημι, Ϊημι and δίδωμι, namely, ε&ην, ψ, εδων, 
 are not in use. 
 
 3. The verb ΐστημι forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like verbs 
 in -ω, with the tense-characteristic σ ; e. g. ε•στψσ-α, ε-στψσ-άμψ>. 
 The second Aor. Mid. εστάμψ is not used. This tense is formed, 
 however, by some other verbs ; e. g. επτάμψ, επριάμην. 
 
 Rem. 1. The second Aor. Pass, and the second Eut. Pass, are wanting in these 
 verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in Ιστημι, the Put. Perf. of which is έστήξω 
 (old Att.) and έστήξομαι,. 
 
 § 133. Paradigms of 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 . 
 
 m 
 ω 
 
 Ο 
 
 'Σ, m 
 
 ω 
 w 
 
 2*8 
 
 a 
 
 
 Κ 
 
 ΣΤΑ- to place. 
 
 ΘΕ- to put. 
 
 ΔΟ- to give. 
 
 ΔΕΙΚ- to show. 
 
 δείκ-ννμι 1 
 
 δεΐκ-νΰ-ς 
 
 όείκ-νΰ-σι{ν) 
 
 δείκ-νν-τον 
 
 όείκ-νϋ-τον 
 
 όείκ•νΰ-μεν 
 
 δείκ-νν-τε 
 
 δειΐί-νν-άσί(ν) 
 
 αηάδείκ-ννσι(ν) 
 
 S 
 
 1. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Ό 
 
 1. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Ρ 
 
 1. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ί-στη-μο 
 
 ϊ-στη-ς 
 
 ϊ-στψσι{ν) 
 
 ΐ-στα-τον 
 ϊ-στα-τον 
 ϊ-στά-μεν 
 ι-στά-τε 
 ί-στά-σι(ν) 
 (ίγοταίστά-ασι 
 
 τί--&η-μι 
 
 τί-ϋ-η-ς 
 
 τί-•&η-σι(ν) 
 
 τΐ-ΰε-τον 
 τί-'&ε-τον 
 τί-ΰε-μεν 
 τί-ϋ-ε-τε 
 τι-ΰ-έ-ΰσί(ν) 
 &ηάτί•ΰ-εϊσι(ν) 
 
 δί-δω-μι 
 
 δί-δω-ς 
 
 δί-δω-σί(ν) 
 
 δί-δο•τον 
 δί-δο•τον 
 δί-δο-μεν 
 δί-δο-τε 
 δι-δό-άσι(ν) 
 &ηδ.δι-δονσι(ν] 
 
 
 S. ι. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ,» 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 S 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ρ. ι. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 t -στω 
 
 i -στψς 
 
 Ί-σττ} 
 
 ί-στη-τον 
 ί-στή-τον 
 1•στώ-μεν 
 ί-στη-τε 
 ί-στώ-σί(ν) 
 ■εις, etc., 
 
 τι--&ώ 
 
 π-ϋ-ή-ς 
 
 τι-ΰ-Ρ} 
 
 τί-ΰή-τον 
 
 τι-ΰη-τον 
 
 TL -ΰώ-μεν 
 
 τί•ΰή-τε 
 
 τί-ϋ-ώ•σί{ν) 
 
 δι-δώ 
 
 δι-δώ•ς 
 
 δί-δφ 
 
 δί-δώ-τον 
 
 δί-δώ•τον 
 
 δι-δω-μεν 
 
 δι•δώ-τε 
 
 δί•δώ-σι(ν) 
 
 δείκ-νύ-ω 
 δευκ-νυ-ης, 
 etc. 
 
 And δευίνυ-ω, -εις, etc., especially δεικνΰουσι,(ν). Also Impf. έδείκννον, 
 
132, 133.] VERBS IN -μι. — TENSES AND PARADIGMS. 
 
 153 
 
 Eem. 2. On the meaning of the verb ΐστημι, the following things are to be 
 noted : the Fres., Impf., Fut. and first Aor. Act. have a transitive meaning, to 
 place; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Feif. and Flup. Act., and the Fut. 
 Ferf., have a reflexive or intransitive meaning, to place one's self, to stand, namely, 
 εστην, I placed myself, or I stood, έστηκα, I have placed myself, I stand, sto, έστη- 
 κειν, stabam, έστήξω, έστήξομαι, stabo (άόεστήξω, I shall withdraw). The Mid. 
 denotes either to place for one's self, to stand, consistere, or to let one's self be placed, 
 i. e. to be placed. 
 
 § 132. II. Second Class of Verbs in -μι. 
 There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the second 
 class (§ 128). All the tenses are formed from the stem, after the re- 
 jection of the ending -ννϋμι or -ννμι. Verbs in -o, which in the 
 Pres. have lengthened the ο into co, retain the ω through all the 
 tenses ; e. g. σνρώ-ρνν-μι, ζω-ννν-μι, ρώ-ννν-μι, χω-ννν-μι, Fut. στρώ- 
 σω, etc. — But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, take, in forming 
 some of the tenses, a Theme ending in a vowel ; e. g. ομ-νν-μι, Aor. 
 ωμ-ο-σα, from ΌΜΟΩ. The second Aor. and the second Fut. 
 Pass, occur only in a few verbs ; e. g. ζενγ-νν-μι, second Aor. Pass. 
 εζνγην ; second Fut. Pass, ζνγήοομαι. 
 
 Verbs in -μι. 
 
 MIDDLE, 
 
 ΣΤΑ- to place. 
 
 ΘΕ- to put. 
 
 ΔΟ- to give. 
 
 ΔΕΙΚ- to show. 
 
 ί•στά. 
 1-στά• 
 ΐ-στά- 
 i -στυ.• 
 1-στα• 
 ΐ-στα- 
 ί-στά- 
 1-στα• 
 1-στα- 
 
 μαι 
 
 σαι 
 
 rat 
 
 μεΰον 
 
 σ&ον 
 
 σϋον 
 
 με-&α 
 
 σΰε 
 
 vrat 
 
 ί-στώ-μαι 
 
 Ι-στη 
 
 ί-στη -rac 
 
 1-στώ-μεΰον 
 
 ί-στή-σΰον 
 
 Ι-στη-σΰον 
 
 1-στώ•με$α 
 
 Ι-στη-σΰε 
 
 ί-στώ-νται 
 
 τί-ϋ-ε-μαι 
 
 τί-ϋ-ε-σαί and ' 
 
 τί-ΰε-ται 
 
 τί-ΰέ-μεΰον 
 
 τί-ΰε-σΰον 
 
 τί-ΰε-σΰον 
 
 τι-ΰέ-μεΰα 
 
 τί--&ε-σΰε 
 
 τί-ΰε-νται. 
 
 •Ί•$ν 
 
 όι-δο-μαι 
 
 δί-δο-σαι 
 
 δί-δο-ται 
 
 δι-δό-μεΰον 
 
 δί-δο-σ&ον 
 
 δί-δο-σ&ον 
 
 δί-δό-μεΰα 
 
 δί-δο-σϋ-ε 
 
 δί-δο-νται 
 
 δείκ• 
 δείκ• 
 δείκ 
 δείκ- 
 δείκ- 
 δείκ- 
 δεικ- 
 δείκ• 
 δείκ• 
 
 νν-μαι 
 
 νϋ-σαι 
 
 νν-ται 
 
 νν-μεΰ-ον 
 
 νν-σΰον 
 
 νν-σ&ον 
 
 νυ-μεϋα 
 
 νυ-σ-&ε 
 
 νν-νται 
 
 δι-δώ 
 δι-δώ 
 δι-δώ 
 δι-δώ 
 δι-δώ 
 δι-δώ- 
 δί-δώ 
 δι-δώ- 
 δί-δώ 
 -νες, •νε(ν), and the Farticip'e usually δεικνΰ- 
 
 ~ι--&ώ-μαι 
 
 τι-ΰή-ται 
 
 τι-ΰώ-με&ον 
 
 τι-ΰή-σΰον 
 
 τι-ϋή-σΰον 
 
 τι-ΰώ-μεΰα 
 
 τι--&ή-σ-&ε 
 
 τι-ΰ-ώ-νται 
 
 δεικ-νν-ωμαι 
 δεικ-νυ-η, 
 etc. 
 
 •μαι 
 
 ται 
 
 μεΰον 
 
 σΰ-ον 
 
 σ&ον 
 
 μεϋα 
 
 σ&ε 
 
 νται 
 
 ων, -ονσα, -ο ν, § 130, Rem. 3. 
 
154 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -μΐ. 
 
 [§133 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 » 
 w 
 
 09 
 
 Ο 
 
 ■ο 
 
 Ο 
 
 1-1 0? 
 
 .Ο Ό ο 
 C C αϊ 
 Ξ eS >- 
 
 ΣΤΑ- to place. 
 
 ΘΕ- to put. 
 
 ΔΟ- to give. 
 
 ΔΕΙΚ- to show. 
 
 
 β 
 
 s 
 
 3 α> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 2. 
 
 ϊ-στη 
 
 τί-ΰει 
 
 δί-δου 
 
 δείιζ-νν 
 
 
 
 83 
 
 
 [ίχονα.'ίστά'&ί) 
 
 (from τίΰ-εΰ-ι) 
 
 (from δίδο&ι) 
 
 (from δείκνϋΰι) 
 
 
 
 .s 
 
 3. 
 
 i -στά-τω 
 
 τι-ΰέ-τω 
 
 δί-δό-τω 
 
 δεικ-νν-τω 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 a* 
 
 D.2. 
 
 ΐ-στά-τον 
 
 τί-ϋε-τον 
 
 δί-δο-τον 
 
 δείκ-νϋ-τον 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 l -στά-των 
 
 τί-ΰέ-των 
 
 δι-δό-των 
 
 δεικ-νύ-των 
 
 
 ι| 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 ϊ•στά-τε 
 
 τί-&ε-τε 
 
 δί-δο-τε 
 
 δείκ-νϋ-τε 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 3. 
 
 i -στα-τωσαν 
 
 τι-ΰέ-τωσαν 
 
 δί-δό-τωσαν 
 
 δεικ-νν-τωσαν 
 
 
 
 
 et ί-στάντων 
 
 et TL -ϋ-έντων 
 
 et δί-δόντων 
 
 et δείκ-ννντων 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 ί-στα-ναι 
 
 Tt--&i-vat 
 
 δί-δό-ναί 
 
 δεικ-νυ-ναι 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 ί-στάς,άσα,αν 
 
 τι-ΰείς,εϊσα,έν 
 
 δι-δονς,οϋσα,όν 
 
 δείκ-νύς, ίσα, ΰν 
 
 
 
 G. άντος 
 
 G. εντός 
 
 G. όντος 
 
 G. νντος 
 
 
 
 
 S.I. 
 
 ϊ-στη•ν 
 
 ε-τί-"&ονν 
 
 έ-δί-δουν 
 
 έ-δείκ-ννν 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 1-στη-ς 
 
 ε-τί-ϋείς 
 
 ε-δί-δονς 
 
 ε-δείκ-νϋς 
 
 
 
 0Ϊ 
 
 3. 
 
 ϊ-στη 
 
 ε-τί-'&εί 
 
 ε-δί-δου 
 
 έ-δείκ-νϋ 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .1 
 
 2. 
 
 ΐ-στά-τον 
 
 ε-τί-β-ε-τον 
 
 ε-δί-δο-τον 
 
 έ-δείκ-νν-τον 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3. 
 
 1-στα-την 
 
 έ-τί-ΰέ-την 
 
 έ-δί-δό-την 
 
 έ-δεικ-νν-την 
 
 
 
 lq 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ϊ-στά-μεν 
 
 έ-τί-ΰε-μεν 
 
 ε-δί-δο-μεν 
 
 έ-δείκ-νν-μεν 
 
 
 ! 
 
 1 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ϊ•στά•τε 
 
 ε-τί-ΰε-τε 
 
 ε-δί-δο-τε 
 
 έ-δείκ-νν-τε 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ϊ-στά-σαν 
 
 έ-τί-ΰε-σαν 
 
 ε-δί-δο-σαν 
 
 ε-δείκ-νν-σαν 
 
 
 
 8.1. 
 
 ί-σταί-ην 
 
 Tt -ϋ-εί-ην 
 
 δι-δοί-ην 
 
 δείκ-νϋ-οίμι 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ί-σταί-ης 
 
 τι-β-εί-ης 
 
 δι-δοί-ης 
 
 δεικ-νΰ-οις, 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 i -σταί-η 
 
 τί-ΰεί-η 
 
 δι-δοί-η 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 2. 
 
 ί-σταΐ-τον ι 
 
 TL -ϋ-εϊ-τον 1 
 
 δι.-δοϊ-τον ι 
 
 
 
 
 ?s 
 
 3. 
 
 1-σταί-την 
 
 τι-ΰ-εί-την 
 
 δι-δοί-την 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ί-σταϊ-μεν 
 
 τι-ΰεϊ-μεν 
 
 δί-δοϊ-μεν 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 1-σταϊ-τε 
 
 τι-ΰ-εΐ-τε 
 
 δι-δοϊ-τε 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ί-σταϊ-εν 
 
 TL -ϋ-εϊ-εν 
 
 δι-δοϊ-εν 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 ε-στη -ν, Ι 
 
 (l-&n-v)C Α. Ι. 
 
 (ε-δω-ν)€ΑΙ. 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ε-στη-ς [stood, 
 
 (ε-ϋ-η-ς) /used 
 
 (ε-δω-ς) < used 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3. 
 
 ε-στη 
 
 \ε-$η) (forit 
 
 (έ-δω) ζ for it 
 
 
 
 
 •δ 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2. 
 
 ε- στ η -τον 
 
 ε--&ε-τον 
 
 έ-δο-τον 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 3. 
 
 ϊ-στη -την 
 
 έ-ΰέ-την 
 
 έ-δό-την 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ε-στη -μεν 
 
 έ•-&ε-μεν 
 
 έ-δο-μεν 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ε-στη -τε 
 
 έ-ΰε-τε 
 
 έ-δο-τε 
 
 
 
 Η 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ε-στη -σαν 
 
 έ-&ε-σαν 
 
 ε•δο-σαν 
 
 
 
 
 S. l. 
 
 στώ 2 
 
 #ώ 2 
 
 δω* 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 2. 
 
 στης 
 
 ■&η-ς 
 
 δω-ς 
 
 
 
 
 Ε 
 
 3. 
 
 στη 
 
 &ν 
 
 δώ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 5S 
 
 D. 1. 
 2. 
 
 στη-τον 
 
 ■&7J-T0V 
 
 δώ-τον 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 3. 
 
 στη-τον 
 
 •&7J-T0V 
 
 δώ-τον 
 
 
 
 
 Εξ 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 στώ-μεν 
 
 ■&ώ•μεν 
 
 δώ-μεν 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 στητέ 
 
 ■&η-τε 
 
 δώ-τε 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 στώ-σί(ν) 
 
 ■&ώ-σο(ν) 
 
 δώ-σι(ν) 
 
 
 
 1 See § 130, Eem. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 2 The compounds, e. g. άπ 
 
 οστώ, έκ&ω, Su 
 
 ιδώ, have the s 
 
 ime accentuation 
 
 
 as 
 
 the sim 
 
 pies, e. g. ά7ΐ jj 
 
 τώσι, έκΰήτον, 
 
 διαδύμεν. 
 
 
 
133.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN ~μΐ. 
 
 155 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 ΣΤΑ- to place. 
 
 ΘΕ- to put. 
 
 ΔΟ- to give. 
 
 ΔΕΙΚ- to shorn. 
 
 
 l -στά-σο and 
 
 τί-ΰε-σο and 
 
 δί-δο-σο and 
 
 δείκ-νϋ-σο 
 
 
 l -στω 
 
 τί-ϋου 
 
 δί-δον 
 
 
 
 ί-στά-σΰ-ω 
 
 π-ΰέ-σϋ-ω 
 
 δι-δό-σ&ω 
 
 δείκ-νύ-σΰω 
 
 
 Ι-στα-σύον 
 
 τί-ϋε-σϋον 
 
 δί-δο-σ&ον 
 
 δείκ-νν-σϋον 
 
 
 Ι-στά-σ&ων 
 
 τί-ΰέ-σ&ων 
 
 δί-δό-σ-&ων 
 
 δείκ-νύ-σΰων 
 
 
 1-στα-σϋε 
 
 τί-ΰε-σ&ε 
 
 δί-δο-σϋε 
 
 δεΐκ-νυ-σ&ε 
 
 
 Ι-στά-σ&ωσαν and 
 
 τι-ΰ-έ-σΰωσαν and 
 
 δί-δό-σϋ-ωσαν and 
 
 δεικ-νύ-σϋωσαν 
 
 
 ί-στά-σ&ων 
 
 τι-ϋέ-σ&ων 
 
 δί-δό-σϋ-ων 
 
 and δεικ-νύ-σ&ων 
 
 
 ϊ-στα-σΰ-αι 
 
 τί-ΰ-ε-σβ -ac 
 
 δί-δο-σβ -ai 
 
 δείκ-νυ-σΰ -ac 
 
 
 1-στα-μενος, η, ον 
 
 π-ΰ-έ-μενος, η, ον 
 
 δι-δό-μενος, η, ον 
 
 δείκ-νύ-μενος, η> 
 ον 
 
 
 ί-στά-μην 
 
 έ-π-ΰ-έ-μην [&ου 
 
 έ-δι-δό-μην [δον 
 έ-δί-δο-σο and έ-δί- 
 
 ε-δεικ-νΰ-μην 
 
 
 l -στα-σο and ι-στω 
 
 έ-τί-ϋε-δο and ε-τί- 
 
 έ-δείκ-νϋ-σο 
 
 
 ϊ-στά-το 
 
 ε-τί-Ό-ε-το 
 
 έ-δί-δο-το 
 
 έ-δείκ-νϋ-το 
 
 
 1-στά-μεϋ-ον 
 
 έ-τι--&έ-με-&ον 
 
 έ-δί-δό-μεϋον 
 
 έ-δεικ-νΰ-μεΰον 
 
 
 ι-στα-σΰον 
 
 έ-τί-&ε-σ&ον 
 
 ε-δί-δο-σϋ-ον 
 
 έ-δείκ-νυ-σ&ον 
 
 
 1-στά-σϋην 
 
 ε-τί-ϋ-έ-σϋ-ην 
 
 έ-δι-δό-σΰ-ην 
 
 ί-δεικ-νυ-σ&ην 
 
 
 ί-στά-με&α 
 
 έ-τι-ΰ-έ-μεΰα 
 
 ε-δί-δό-μεΰ-α 
 
 ε-δεικ-νύ-με•&α 
 
 
 Ι-στα-σΰε 
 
 ε-τί-ϋ-ε-σϋ-ε 
 
 έ-δί-δο-σ-&ε 
 
 έ-δείκ-νν-σΰ-ε 
 
 
 ϊ-στα-ντο 
 
 έ-τί-ΰε-ντο 
 
 έ-δί-δο-ντο 
 
 έ-δείκ-νυ-ντο 
 
 
 1-σταί-μην 3 
 
 τί--&οί-μην 4 
 
 δί-δοί-μην 4 
 
 δεικ-νν-οίμην 
 
 
 ί-σταϊ-ο 
 
 ΤΙ--&ΟΪ-0 
 
 δί-δοΐ-ο 
 
 δεικ-νύ-οιο, 
 
 
 1-σταϊ-το 
 
 TL--&OL-TO 
 
 δί-δοΐ-το 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 Ι-σταί-με&ον 
 
 τί-ΰ-οί-μεΰ-ον 
 
 δί-δοί-μεΰον 
 
 
 
 ί-σταΐ-σΰον 
 
 τι-ϋοΐ-σΰον 
 
 δί-δοϊ-σ&ον 
 
 
 
 ί-σταί-σϋ-ην 
 
 τι-βοί-σβην 
 
 δί-δοί-σΰ-ην 
 
 
 
 ί-σταί-με'&α 
 
 τί-•&οί-με-&α 
 
 δι-δοί-με&α 
 
 
 
 ί-σταΐ-σ&ε 
 
 τι-ΰοϊ-σϋ-ε 
 
 δί-δοΐ-σΰ-ε 
 
 
 
 ί-σταΐ-ντο 
 
 Τί-ΰ-οϊ-ντο 
 
 δι-δοΐ-ντο 
 
 
 
 (έ-στά-μην does 
 
 έ-&έ-μην 
 
 έ-δό-μην 
 
 
 
 not occur, but 
 
 ε--&ου({τοτα. έΰ-εσο) 
 
 έ-δον (from έδοσο) 
 
 
 
 έ-πτά-μην 
 
 ε-ϋ-ε-το 
 
 έ-δο-το 
 
 
 
 έ-πριά-μην) 
 
 έ-ΰέ-μεΰον 
 
 ε-δό-μεϋ-ον 
 
 
 
 
 ε-ϋε-σϋον 
 
 ε-δο-σ&ον 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 
 έ-ΰ-έ-σϋ-ην 
 
 ε-δό-σϋ-ην 
 
 
 
 
 ε-ϋ-έ-μεϋ-α 
 
 έ-δό-με&α 
 
 
 
 
 ί-Φε-σ&ε 
 
 £-δο-σ&ε 
 
 
 
 
 ε-ΰε-ντο 
 
 έ-δο-ντο 
 
 
 
 (στώ-μαι does not 
 
 ■&ώ-μαι & 
 
 δώμαι? 
 
 
 
 occur, but πρίω- 
 
 Η 
 
 δώ 
 
 
 
 μαι, -y, -ητα,ί, 
 
 ΰη-ται 
 
 δώ-ται 
 
 
 
 etc.) 
 
 ■β-ώ-με-β-ον 
 
 ΰή-σΰον 
 
 Ό-ή-σΰον 
 
 ΰώ-μεΰα 
 
 ■&ή-σΰε 
 
 ■&ώ-νται 
 
 δώ-με-&ον 
 
 δώ-σϋ-ον 
 
 δω-σ&ον 
 
 δω-με'&α 
 
 δώ-σϋ-ε 
 
 δώ-νται 
 
 
 3 On the accentuation in έπίσταιο, etc 
 
 , see § 134, 1. * £ 
 
 lee § 134, 2. 
 
 • Also in composition, έν&ώμαι, -ή, -ή 
 
 rac, etc., άποΰ-ώμαι, 
 
 -jj, -ήται, etc., έκ£ώ- 
 
 
 uat t -ω, -ωται, et 
 
 ;., απο䣕ιαι, -ώ, -ώ 
 
 rai, etc. 
 
 
156 
 
 PARADIGMS OP VERBS IN -μΐ. — REMARKS. 
 
 [§134 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 
 a 
 
 00 
 
 ο 
 
 ra 
 
 ο 
 
 i 
 
 μ οι 
 
 3 « a> 
 
 ΣΤΑ- to place. 
 
 ΘΕ- to put. 
 
 ΔΟ- to give. 
 
 ΔΕΙΚ- to show. 
 
 
 
 Ι 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D. 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 Ρ. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 σταί-ην 
 σταί-ης 
 σταί-η 
 
 σταί-ητον 1 
 
 σται-ητην 
 
 στάί-ημεν 
 
 σταί-ητε 
 
 σταϊ-εν 
 
 ϋεί-ην 
 &εί-ης 
 ■&εί-η 
 
 ■&εί-ητον* 
 
 Ό-ει-ητην 
 
 ■&εί-ημεν 
 
 ■&εί-ητε 
 
 ■&εϊ-εν 
 
 δοί-ην 
 δοί•ης 
 δοί-η 
 
 δοί-ητον 1 
 
 δοι-ήτην 
 
 δοί-ημεν 
 
 δοί-ητε 
 
 δοϊ-εν 
 
 
 
 Ι 
 
 S. 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 Ρ. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 στη -ΰι 2 
 στη -τω 
 στη -τον 
 στη -των 
 στη -τε 
 στη -τωσαν 
 &ηάστάντων 
 
 ■&ές (ΰ-έΰή 3 
 ■&έ-τω 
 ■&έ-τον 
 ■&έ-των 
 ■&έ-τε 
 ΰέ-τωσαν 
 and ΰ-έντων 
 
 δός [δό&ι) 3 
 
 δό•τω 
 
 δό-τον 
 
 δ^-των 
 
 δό-τε 
 
 δό-τωσαν 
 
 and δ όντων 
 
 
 
 /η/ 
 
 στη -vac 
 
 ■&εϊ-ναι 
 
 δοΰ-ναι 
 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 στάς, άσα, αν 
 Gen -στάντος 
 
 -&είς, εϊσα, εν 
 Gen. ϋ-έντος 
 
 δονς,ονσα,όν 
 Gen. δόντος 
 δώ-σω 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 στή-σω 
 
 ■&ή-σω 
 
 δείξω 
 
 
 Aorist I. 
 
 έ-στησα, Ι 
 [placed, 
 
 ε-ϋ-η-κα 
 Instead of these 
 Aor. is used in 1 
 Ind. and in the 
 Participials, $ 13J 
 
 ε-δω-κα 
 brans, the second 
 he Dual and PI. 
 other Modes and 
 ,2. 
 
 έ-δειξα 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 'έ-στη-κα, Α sto 
 
 τε- -& ε ι -ica 
 
 δε- δ ω -κα 
 
 δέ-δειχα 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 k -στη-κειν and 
 εΐ-στη-κειν 
 
 έ-τε- ■& ε ί-κειν 
 
 έ-δε- δ ω -κειν 
 
 ε-δε-δείχειν 
 
 
 Fut. Perf 
 
 έ-στήξωοίάΑίί. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 PAS 
 
 
 Aorist I. | έ-στά-ΰην | έ-τέ-ΰην 5 \ ε-δό-ΰην έ-δείχ-ΰην 
 1 See § 130, Kem. 1. 2 In composition, παράστηΰ-ι, παράστά ; άπόστη&ι, 
 
 άπόστά, § 130, Kem. 2. 3 In composition, περίΰες, έν&ες ; άπόδος, εκδος ; 
 
 περίϋετε, έκδοτε, § 84, Bern. 2. 4 See § 134, 3. 6 ετέ&ην and τε&ήσομαι 
 
 § 134. Remarks on the Paradigms, 
 
 1. The verbs δυναμαι, to be able, επίσταμαι, to know, κρέ μαμαι, to 
 hang, and πρίασ&αι, to buy, have a different accentuation from Ισταμαι, in the 
 Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., namely, Subj. δύνωμαι, έπίστωμαι, -y, -ηται, -ησ&ον 
 -ησ&ε, -ωνται ; Opt. δνναίμην, έττισταίμην, -αιο, -αιτο, -αισ&ον, -αισ&ε, -αιντο ; 
 BO also όναίμην, -αιο, -αιτο (§ 135). 
 
 2. The forms of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. Mid. with -οι, viz. τιϋοΊμην, 
 Φοίμην, are more common than those with -ει, viz. τιΰείμην, -εϊο, -εϊτο, eta, 
 Φείμην, -εϊο, -εϊτο, etc. In compounds the accent remains as in simples, thus, 
 
§ 134] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -μΐ. REMARKS. 
 
 157 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 ΣΤΑ- to place. 
 
 ΘΕ- to put. 
 
 ΔΟ- to give. 
 
 Δ Ε IK- to show. 
 
 
 (σταί-μηνάοβδηοί 
 occur, but πριαί- 
 μην, -αιο, -αιτο, 
 etc.) 
 
 $οί-μην β 
 
 ■&ΟΪ-0 
 "&ΟΪ-ΤΟ 
 
 ΰοί-με&ον 
 
 ■&οΙ-σ•&ον 
 
 ΰοί-σ&ην 
 
 •&οί-με$α 
 
 ■&οΐ-σϋε 
 
 ■&οΙ-ντο 
 
 δοί-μην* 
 
 δοϊ-ο 
 
 δοΐ-το 
 
 δοί-με&ον 
 
 δοϊ-σ&ον 
 
 δοί-σΰην 
 
 δοί-με&α 
 
 δοΐ-σΰε 
 
 δοΐ-ντο 
 
 
 
 (στά-σο or στώ 
 does not occur, 
 but πρία-σο or 
 πρ'ιω) 
 
 ΰον (#έσο) 7 
 ■&έ-σ$ω 
 ϋέ-σ&ον 
 ■&έ-σ&ων 
 ■&έ-σ$ε 
 
 ■&έ-σΰωσαν and 
 ■&έ-σ&ων 
 
 δον (δόσο) 7 
 δό-σ&ω 
 δό-σ&ον 
 δό-σ&ων 
 δό-σϋ-ε 
 
 δό-σϋωσαν and 
 δό-σϋων 
 
 
 
 (στά-σΰαι)πρ'ιασ. 
 
 ■&έ-σΰαι 
 
 όό•σ$αι 
 
 
 
 (στά-μενος) ττρία- 
 μενος 
 
 ΰέ-μενος, -η, -ον 
 
 δό-μενος, -η, -ον 
 
 
 
 στή-σομαι 
 
 ■&ή-σομαι 
 
 δώ-σομαι 
 
 δείξομαι 
 
 
 ε-στη-σαμην 
 
 (ε-ΰη-κά-μην) 
 
 Instead of these form 
 is used by the Attic w 
 
 (έ-δω-κά•μην) 
 
 s, the second Aor. Mid. 
 riters, $ 131, 2. 
 
 έ-δειξάμην 
 
 
 1-στά-μαι 
 
 τέ-ΰ ε ι -μαι 
 
 δέ-δο-μαι 
 
 δέ-δειγ-μαι 
 
 
 έ-στα-μην 
 
 k -τε- ΰ-εί -μην 
 
 k -δε-δό-μην 
 
 ε•δε-δείγ-μην 
 
 
 έ-στηξομαι 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 
 | Flit. 1. | στά-ΰήσομαι | τε-ϋήσομαι 6 
 instead of ε&έΰην and ΰεϋήσομαι (§ 8, 
 tion, κατάΰον, άπόΰον ; περίδον, άπόδί 
 πρόδοσΰε ; but kv&ov, ε'ιφοϋ ; προδοϊ 
 
 δο-ΰήσομαι δειχ-ΰήσομαι 
 10). ° See S 134, 2. 7 In composi- 
 )v ; κατάϋεσ&ε, περίδοσΰε ; έν&εσΰε, 
 , ένδον (§ 84, Eem. 2). 
 
 έν&οίμην (ενϋείμην), εν&οΐο (έν&εΐο), etc. The same is true of compounds of 
 δοίμην, e. g. διαδοίμην, διαδοΐο, etc. 
 
 3. The Perf. and Plup. ίστηκα, έστηκειν (not είστηκειν), form the Dual and 
 PI. immediately from the stem, viz. Perf. l -στά-τον, έ-στά-μεν, ξ-στά-τε, έ-στά• 
 ci(v) ; Plup. ί-στά-τον, -άτην, S -στά-μεν, ε-στά-τε, 1-στα-σαν ; instead of έστη- 
 κέναι, έσταναι is regularly used. The Part, is έστώς, -ώσα, -ώς, Gen. -ώτος, 
 -ώσης, also έστηκώς, -νια, -δς, Gen. -ότος, -νιας. 
 
 4. The forms of the Impf. έτί&ονν, -εις, -ει, εδίδονν, -ονς, -ου, are constructed 
 according to the conjugation in -έω and -δω. The other forms, έτίϋην, -ης, •η, 
 έδ'ιδων, -ως, -ω, are not used (§ 130, Eem. 3). 
 
 14 
 
158 VERBS IN -μι. [§ 134. 
 
 LXIII Vocabulary. 
 Άήρ, -έρος, ό, ή, the air. revolt ; mid., to go or establish, appoint, to 
 ινίστημι, to set up, raise, stand apart. render, to make. 
 
 awaken ; mid., to raise δύστημι, to place apart, λίμνη, -ης, η, a marsh, a 
 
 oneself, stand up, rise separate, sever. pond, a lake. 
 
 up. ένίστημι, to put into ; λοιμός, -ov, b, a plague, a 
 
 άντι-τάττω, to set oppo- per/., to be present. pestilence. 
 
 site ; mid., to set oneself εξ-ορ&όω,ίο make straight, νεφέλη, -ης, η, a cloud, a 
 
 against, oppose. erect, set up, restore. net for birds. 
 
 άπο-σπάω, to draw away, ηνίοχος, -ov, 6, a rein- παρίστημι, to place be- 
 άπο-στρέφω, to turn away. holder, guide. side, to help. 
 
 αϋος, -η, -ov, Attic ανος, -Θυσία, -ας, η, a sacrifice, πη, where 1 whither? 
 
 -ov, dry, thirsty. ϊστημι, to place, make to πολεμέω, w. dot., to carry 
 
 άφίστημι, to put away, stand. on war. 
 
 turn off, cause to re- κα&ίστημι, to lay down, πολυφιλία, -ας, η, a mul- 
 
 volt ; 2 aor., to fall away, titude of friends. 
 
 Ή πολυφιλία διίστησι καϊ αποσπά ical αποστρέφει. Έι τις •&υσίαν προςφέρων 
 εύνουν νομίζει τον ΰ-εον κα&ιστάναι, φρένας κούφας έχει. Ουδέ τον αέρα ol άν- 
 θρωποι τοϊς όρνισιν είων ελεύθερον, παγίδας καϊ νεφέλας ίστάντες. Φυλάττου, 
 αη το κέρδος σε της δικαιοσύνης άφιστη. Έν τω ΤΙελοποννησιακώ πολέμω εις 
 άνήρ, ό ΐίερικλης, εξώρΰου την π'ολιν και άνίστη και άντετάττετο καϊ τω λοιμώ 
 καϊ τω πολέμω. Ήίη άφίστη τους νέους της έπι την αρετην όδοϋ. 1 Θεμιστοκλής 
 λέγεται ειπείν, ώς το Μιλτιάδου τρόπαιον αυτόν εκ των ύπνων άνισταίη. Τάν- 
 ταλος έν τη λίμνη αϋος είστήκει. Ύο μεν του χρόνου γεγονός, 2 το δε ένεστώς 
 εστί, τό δε μέλλον. Οι Κορίνθιοι πολλούς συμμάχους άπέστησαν άπο των 'Αθη- 
 ναίων. Οι Ισάξιοι από των 'Αθηναίων άπέστησαν. Τίαράστα τοις άτυχέσιν. 
 ΤΙή στώ 3 ; πη βώ* ; Οι 'Αθηναίοι τοϊς Ναξίοις άποστάσιν άπ' αυτών επολέμη- 
 σαν. ΤΙαρασταίητε τοϊς άτυχέσιν. Αόγος διεσπάρθη, τους συμμάχους από της 
 πόλεως άποστηναι. 'Ή,νίοχον γνώμην στήσεις άρίστην. 
 
 Sportsmen place snares and nets for the birds. The bad seek to sever the 
 friendship of the good. The trophies of Miltiades woke Themistocles from his 
 sleep. Let us not turn away youths from the way to virtue. Do not sever (pi) 
 the friendship of the good. The citizens were afraid, that the enemies would 
 make their allies revolt from them. The bad rejoice, if they sever (part.) the 
 friendship of the good. Tantalus stands thirsty in the lake. The wise man 
 takes care not only for (gen.) the present, but also for the future. The soldiers 
 raised (aor.) a trophy over (κατά, w.gen.) the enemies. The Naxians sought to 
 revolt from the Athenians. Assist (stand by) the unfortunate. Where shall we 
 stand 1 where shall we go ? Thou shouldst assist the unfortunate. The sol- 
 diers will raise a trophy over the enemies. 
 
 LXIV. Vocabulary. 
 
 'Ακρόπολις, -εως, ή, a cit- αλλότριος, -a, -ov, anoth- άνα-τίθημι, to put up, 
 adeL er's, foreign. offer. 
 
 1 S 157. 2 §123. 3 § 153, Lb, (a), (3). 4 § 119, I. and $ 142. 
 
§ 134.] VERBS IN -μι. 159 
 
 αργαλέος, •ύ, -ον, heavy, i. e. a. staff of the Bac- προς-τί&ημι, to add. 
 
 troublesome, burden- chantes, wound round προ-τίΰημι, to set before, 
 
 some. with ivy and vine leaves. lay out (for view), set 
 
 διάδημα, -ατός, τό, a head- κιττός, -ον, ό, ivy. forth. [tre. 
 
 band, a diadem. μετα-τίΰημι, to change, σκήπτρον, -ου, τό, a scep- 
 
 διαφορά, -ας, ή, a differ- alter, remove. τί-&ημι, to place, arrange, 
 
 ence, a quarrel, enmity, μιμέομαι,ιυ.αχχ.,ϊο imitate. propose as a prize, give, 
 έν-τίΰ-ημι, to put in, instil, περι-τίΰ-ημι, to put or set make ; mid., place for 
 ϋύρσος, -ον, 6, a Thyrsus, round. oneself, take. 
 
 Τω κα?*ώς ποιονντι -&εός πολ7Λ άγαΰά τί-β-ησιν. Ό Τίλοντος πολλάκις μετα- 
 τί&ησι τον των άν&ρώπων τρόπον. ΤΙολλάκις οι άν&ρωποι τοϊς Ιδίοις κακοϊς 
 άλ?.ότρια προςτι-&έασιν. Έίς το βέλτιον τίϋει το μέλλον. 'Αντίγονος Αιόννσον 
 πάντα έμιμεϊτο, και κιττον μεν περιτι-&εΙς Trj κεφαλή αντί διαδήματος Μακεδό- 
 νικου, •&νρσον δε αντί σκήπτρον φέρων. Οι σοφισται την άρετην προετίΰ-εσαν. 
 Έντιΰώμεν τοις νέοις της σοφίας έρωτα. Ή τύχη πάντα αν μετατιΰείη. Ον 
 όζίδιον την φνσιν μετατι&έναι. Τίολλάκις δοκονντες ΰήσειν κακόν έσ&λόν έΰε- 
 μεν, και δοκοϋντες έσ&λόν έ-&εμεν κακόν. Ύάς διαφοράς μετα-&ώμεν. Άργαλέον 
 γήρας έ&ηκε •&εός. Ά-&ηναϊοι χαλκήν ποιησάμενοι λέαιναν εν πύλαις της άκρο- 
 πόλεως ανέθεσαν. 'Ραον 1 εξ άγαϋον -&εϊναι κακόν, η εκ κακόν έσ&λόν. Τό κα- 
 κόν ονδεις χρηστόν αν •&είη. Μετά&ετε τάς διαφοράς. Ανκονργον τον •&έντα 
 Αακεδαιμονίοις νόμους, μά?αστα ΰ-ανμάζομεν. Ό πόλεμος πάντα μετατέ&εικεν. 
 ΊΖρό της αρετής -&εοι ίδρωτα έΰεσαν. 
 
 To those who do well the gods give (= place) many good things. We often 
 add others' ills to our own. We often see riches change (changing) the char- 
 acter of men. The war has changed everything. God gave (placed, aor.) to 
 men many good things. The war will change everything. Who would give 
 (place, opt. aor. w. av) laws to foolish men ? It is not easy to change {aor.) na- 
 ture. The gods made (= rendered, placed) age burdensome. The bad we 
 cannot easily make good {opt. aor. w. av). The general should instil {pres. or 
 aor.) courage into the soldiers. May riches never change {pres. or aor.) thy 
 character ! We will instil {aor.) into the youths a love for virtue {gen.). 
 
 LXV. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άπο-δίδωμι, to give back, κέντρον, -ου, τό, a sting, πάγκάκος, -ον, thoroughly 
 
 repay ; mid., to sell. a goad. bad. 
 
 δίδωμι, to give, grant. μάκαρ, -αρος, happy, bless- πάλιν, again, on the con 
 
 εμπεδος, -ον, firm, sure, ed. trary. 
 
 lasting. μέλιττα, -ης, η, a bee. προ-δίδωμι, prodo, to be- 
 
 επι-λαν&άνομαι, to forget, μετα-δίδωμί τινί τίνος, to tray. 
 
 ευϋ-νς and ευ&ν, imme- give any one a share of χρήζω, w. gen., to be in 
 
 diately. anything. want. 
 
 ΟΙ -&εοι πάντα διδόασιν. Τνναικι 2 αρχειν ον δίδωσιν ή φύσις. Χάριν λαβών 3 
 ιιέμνησο* και δονς επιλαϋον. Ααβων άπόδος, καϊ λη -tyif πάλιν. Τ Ω μάκαρες 
 ϋ-εοί, δότε μοι όλβον καϊ δόξαν άγα-&ην έχειν. Ό πλοϋτος, ον αν δώσι ΰεοί, 
 
 1 See § 52, 10. 2 § 47, 2. 3 § 121, 12. 4 § 122, 11. 
 
160 VERBS IN -μι. [§ 134. 
 
 έμπεδός εστίν. η Α ή φύσις δέδωκε, ταντ' έχει μόνα δ άνθρωπος. Ή φύσις ταύ- 
 ρο tg έδωκε κέρας, 1 κέντρα μελίτταις. Ύ Ων 2 σοι ΰεος έδωκε, τούτων χρήζουσι δί• 
 δον. Έσι9-λώ άνδρΐ καϊ έσ&λά δίδωσί •&εός. ΐΐτωχφ ευΰύς δίδου. Χρήματα 
 δαίμων καϊ παγκάκω άνδρϊ δίδωσιν-, αρετής (Γ ολίγοις άνδράσι μοϊρ' έπεται. 
 θεόζ" μοι δοίη φίλους πιστούς. Ύοϊς πλονσίοις πρέπει τοις πτωχοϊς δούναι. Οί 
 στρατιώται την πόλιν τοις πολεμίοις προϋδίδοσαν. Ό άγα&ος χαίρει τοις πέ- 
 νησι χρημάτων 3 μεταδιδούς. Αεϊ τους άγα&ούς άνδρας γενναίως φέρειν, δ τι αν 
 ο ΰ-εός διδώ. Λ Οςάν μέλλη τήν πατρίδα προδιδόναι, μεγίστης 4 ζημίας άξιος 5 εσ- 
 τίν. Οί ΰεοί μοι αντί κακών άγα&ά διδοϊεν. Φίλος φίλον ου προδώσει. 
 
 God gives everything. If you (pi.) have received (aor. part.) a favor, remem- 
 ber it ; and if you have granted a favor (aor. part.), forget (it). If you have re- 
 ceived (anything), give again (aor.). Give me, Ο God, riches and reputation 
 to possess. The wealth which God has given (aor.) is lasting. The gods have 
 given men many good things. Give ye to the poor immediately. May the 
 gods give (aor.) me faithful friends ! Thou must bear nobly, what (ος άν, w. 
 subj.) the gods assign (give) thee. Good citizens will never betray their coun- 
 try. God gave men many treasm-es. The soldiers intended to betray (aor.) 
 the town. It is well to give to the poor. Who would betray a friend (opt. w. 
 av) 1 Honor the gods, who give (part.) all good (pi.) to men. 
 
 LXVI. Vocabulary, 
 
 Α,ΰ-έάτος, -ov, not to be εμμένω, w. dat., to remain δμνΰμι, to swear. 
 
 seen. with, abide by. δρκος, -ov, b, an oath. 
 απο-δείκνΰμι, w. 2 ace, to εντός, w. gen., within. πάντως, in every way, 
 show,represent,explain, εξ-ορκόω, to cause to swear, throughout, wholly, 
 declare any one as any- administer an oath to. παραγγέλλω, to order, 
 thing ;mid., show of my- έπίορκον, -ου, τό, a false πλαστική (i. β.τεχνή), mo- 
 self, express, declare, oath, perjury. [by. delling art, sculpture, 
 display, render. έπόμνϋμι, w. ace, to swear βώννϋμι, to strengthen. 
 δείκνϋμι, to show. μέτριος, -a, -ov, Attic μέ- σπανίως, rarely, seldom. 
 δικαίως, justly, fairly. τριος, -ov, moderate. ψήφισμα, -ατός, τό, a de- 
 είκη, inconsiderately, un- μήποτε, never. [tor. cree, a resolution, 
 advisedly. μιμητής, -ov, δ, an imita- 
 
 "Ορκον φεϋγε, καν δικαίως όμνύης. Μ.ή τι •&εούς έπίορκον έπόμνν. Ό οίνος 
 μέτριος ληφ-Θεϊς 6 βώννϋσιν. Οί διδάσκαλοι τους μαΰητάς μιμητάς εαυτών απο- 
 δεικνύάσιν. ΤΙν&αγόρας παρήγγειλε τοις μαν&άνονσι, σπανίως μεν όμνύναι, 
 χρησαμένονς δε τοις δρκοις πάντως έμμένειν. Ή πλαστική δείκνϋσι τα είδη τών 
 ■&εών, τών άν&ρώπων και ένιότε και τών -Θηρών. ~Μή ά&έατα δείξης ήλίω. Άνδρος 
 νονν οίνος έδειξεν. Φρύγες δρκοις ον χρώνται οΰτ' δμνύντες, οντ' άλλους έξορ- 
 κοϋντες. 'Ολίγοις δείκνϋ τα εντός φρενών. Οί κριταί τα ψηφίσματα άπεδείκνυ- 
 σαν. Μήποτε εική δμνύοιτε. Ό βασιλεύς τον αύτον νίόν στρατηγόν άποδέδειχεν. 
 
 Avoid an oath, even if you swear justly. Do not swear a false oath. Those 
 who swear a false oath, are deserving of the greatest punishment. The Phry« 
 
 1 § 39, Rem. 2 by attraction instead of a. 3 § 158, 3. (1>). 
 
 4 §52, 8. 5 §158, 7. ( y ). 6 § 121, 12. 
 
§ 134.] VERBS IN -lit. 161 
 
 gians did not swear. The judges declare their resolutions. May you never 
 
 swear unadvisedly ! It is not becoming to swear unadvisedly. The Athenians 
 declared Alcibiades ['Αλκιβιάδης, -ου) general. 
 
 LXVII. Vocabulary. 
 'A£ioAoyoc,-oi>,worthmen- μέλη, -ης, η, drunkenness, ολιγαρχία, -ας, η, the rule 
 
 tioning, noticeable, me- μωρός, -a, -ov, foolish ; ό of a few, oligarchy. 
 
 morable. μωρός, the fool. πρώτος, -η, -ov, first. 
 
 δεύτερος, -a, -ov, second, ναυτικός, -ή, -όν, belong- συν-ίστημι, to put togeth- 
 δνναμαι, ιυ. pass. aor., to be ing to ships, nautical; er;jnid., assemble, unite, 
 
 able, can, have power. ναυτική δυναμις, naval bring together. 
 έπίσταμαι, w. pass, aor., to power. 
 
 know, understand. 
 
 Ό πλούτος πολ?Λ δύναται. Ύίς αν μωρός δυναιτο εν όινφ σιωπαν ; Άνήρ 
 δίκαιος εστίν, δςτις άδικεΐν δυνάμενος μη βου7>εται. ΤΙράττε μηδέν ών ι μη έπίσ- 
 τασαι. Άριστον εστί πάντ' επίστασλαι καλά. Ζώμεν 2 ονχ ως έλέ?.ομεν, αλλ' 
 ώς δυνάμεθα. Τίρο μέλης άνίστασο. Ύί συμφέρει ενίοις πλουτεϊν, όταν μη 
 έπίστωνται τω πλούτω 3 χρήσλαι 2 ; Καταλυλέντος του ΐίελοποννησιακοϋ πολέ- 
 μου όλιγαρχίαν εν ταϊς π?„είσταις πό?.εσι καλίσταντο. Οι πολέμιοι ουκ άποστη- 
 σονται, πριν αν ελωσι Α την πό?*ιν. ΊΑίνως, ό δεύτερος, πρώτος 'Έ.?^ληνων ναυ- 
 τικήν δυναμιν άξιό?~ογον σννεστήσατο. Ύπό Ανσάνδρου, τοϋ Σπαρτιάτου, εν 
 Ά&ηναις τριάκοντα τύραννοι κατεστάλησαν. 
 
 Men have much power through wealth. Eise up [pi.) before intoxication, 
 The enemies could not take (2 aor.) the town. Of what use is it to thee to be 
 rich, if thou understandest not how to use riches ? What fools could (άν, \o. opt.) 
 be silent over wine ? No mortal is able to know everything. There are few 
 who understand {part.) how to use riches well. The magistrates who are ap- 
 pointed (aor. part, pass.) to rule over the town, must [δει, w. ace. of pers.) care 
 for its prosperity. 
 
 LXVIEI. Vocabulary. 
 
 Άλλως, -ά, -ov, trouble- der, manage; ιυ. adv., λησαυρός, -οϋ, ό, a trea- 
 
 some,pitiable,miserable. put into a disposition, sure. 
 
 άπο-τίλημι, to put away ; dispose. κατα-τίλημι, to lay down, 
 
 mid., take away. έπι-τίλημι, to add, put up- lay by ; mid., lay down 
 
 δια-τελέω, to complete ; on ; mid., put on one- for oneself. 
 
 w. part., it expresses the self; to. dot., apply to, κράνος, -εος = -συς, τό, a 
 
 continuance of the ac- attack, set upon. helmet, 
 
 tion denoted by the par- εγκράτεια, -ας, ή, self-con- λόφος, -ου, ό, a crest, 
 
 ticiple, as διατε?*.ώ γρά- trol, continence. στέφανος, -ου, ό, a crown. 
 
 φων, " I continue to έόόδιον, -ου, τό, viaticum, φοινίκεος, -έά, -εον, con• 
 
 write," or " writing." travelling money. traded -ους, -η, -οϋν, 
 
 iia -τίΰ-ημι, to put in or- ήκω, ηξω, I am come. jurple. 
 
 1 by attraction instead οι μηδέν τούτων, ά. s see $ 97, 3. 
 
 3 § 161, 3. 4 see § 126, 1. 
 
 14* 
 
162 VERBS IN «Mi, [§ 134. 
 
 01 Κελτίβηρες περί τάς κεφάλας κράνη χαλκά περιτίθενται φοινικοϊς ησκη- 
 ιιένα 1 λόφοις. Ονδένα θησαυρόν παισι καταθήση άμείνω 2 αίδοϋς. Ύίς αν εκών 
 φίλον άφρονα Ψοϊτο ; Ξενόφωνη θύοντι ήκέ τις εκ Μαντινείας άγγελος λέγων, 
 τον νίόν αντο ΰ τον Τρϋλλον τεθνάναι 3 ■ κάκεϊνος άπέθετο μεν τον στέφανον, 
 διετέλει δε θύνν ■ έπει δε ό άγγελος προςέθηκε και 4 εκείνο, 'ότι νικών τέθνηκε, 
 πάλιν ό Ξενοφών έπέθετο τον στέφανον. 'Αλκιβιάδης έφυγεν εις Σπάρτην καϊ 
 τους Αακεδαιμονίους παρώξννεν επιθέσθαι τοις Άθηναίοις. Τω μεν το σώμα 6 
 διατεθειμένω κακώς χρεία εστίν Ίατροϋ, τω δε την ψνχην φίλου. Έφόδιον εις 
 το γήρας κατατίθου. Οι 'Αθηναίοι εν τω δεντέρω τον ΊΙελοποννησιακού πολέ- 
 μου έτει υπό τον λοιμού αθλιότατα διετέθησαν. Κακόν ούδεν φύεται εν άνδρϊ 
 θεμέλια θεμένω του βίου σωφροσύνην καϊ έγκράτειαν. Τους πιστούς τίθεσθαι 
 δεϊ εκαστον έαντω. Οί πολϊται φοβούνται, μη οι πολέμιοι τη πόλει επιτιθώνται. 
 
 The citizens attack the enemies. We will take the good as our friends. 
 The citizens feared that the enemies might attack the town. Lay by travelling 
 money for old age. Put on (aor.) the crown. Take care that the enemies do 
 not attack (subj. aor.) you. Croesus deposited many treasures of gold in his 
 house. The character of men is often changed by riches. Nature cannot easily 
 be changed. A golden crown was placed (aor.) by the Athenians on the gate 
 of the Acropolis. Everything has been changed by the war. 
 
 LXIX. Vocabulary. 
 
 'Αμοιβή, -ης, ή, exchange, the same time ; mid., συν-νέω, to spin, weave 
 
 recompense, return. give oneself up with together with. 
 
 στρατός, -ού, ό, an army. others to a tiling. 
 cvv -επι-δίδωμι, to give at 
 
 Χάρις χάριτι άποδίδοται. Τω ευ ποιούντι πολλάκις κακή άποδίδοται αμοιβή. 
 ΤΙατρίδες πολλάκις δια κέρδος προύδόθησαν. ΐίολλά δώρα δέδοται τοις άνθρώ- 
 ποις παρά τών θεών. Ώς μέγα το μικρόν εστίν εν καιρώ δοθέν. "Οτε είλε 9 την 
 Θηβαίων πόλιν 'Αλέξανδρος, άπέδοτο τους ελευθέρους πάντας. 'Εκών σεαυτόν 
 τη Κλωθοϊ 7 συνεπιδίδου, παρέχων σνννησαι, οίςτισί 8 ποτέ πράγμασι βούλεται. 
 ^Ομοίως αίσχρόν, άκούσαντα χρησιμον λόγον μη μανθάνειν, καϊ διδόμενόν τι 
 αγαθόν παρά τών φίλων μη ?ιαμβάνειν. ΟΊ πολϊται φοβούνται, μη ή πόλις προ- 
 διδώται. Μηποτε υπό τών φίλων προδιδοϊο. Ό στρατός υπ' αυτού τού στρα- 
 τηγού προύδίδοτο. Άπόδου το κύπε7^λον. 
 
 Everything is given by God. The wealth which is given (aor.) by God is 
 lasting. The town was betrayed by the soldiers to the enemies. We must 
 bear nobly, what is sent (given) by God. The friend will not be betrayed by 
 the friend. Alexander is said, when he had taken (aor.) Thebes, to have sold 
 (aor.) all the free citizens. The army is said to have been betrayed (aor.) by 
 the general. The citizens feared, that the town might be betrayed. Let us 
 sell (aor.) the goblets. 
 
 1 from άσκέω, to adorn. 2 see §52, 1. 
 
 3 see § 122, 9. τεθνάναι instead of τεθνηκέναι, Comp. § 134, S. 
 
 4 also. r 5 \ 159, (7). e \ 126, 1. 
 7 Κλώθω, one of the Parcae, or goddesses of Pate. 
 
 K by attraction instead of πράγμασιν, α βούλεται. 
 
§ 135.] SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μΐ. 163 
 
 LXX. Vocabulary. 
 
 Αληΰώς, truly, in reality. έπί -dei/eve/ii, to show brag- πο7,υτελης, -ες, costly, 
 
 άαόι-έννϋμι, to put on, gingly, make a boastful splendid. 
 
 dress in. display of; mid., show βητωρ, -ορός, ό, an orator. 
 
 άπόλλνμι, to ruin ; mid., of oneself boastfully. σβέννυμι, to quench, ex- 
 he ruined or lost, per- κεράνννμί, to mix. tinguish. 
 ish. παββησία, -ας, η, free- συν-απόλλϋμι, to ruin at 
 
 ίν-δείκννμι, to show ; mid., dom in speaking, frank- the same time ; mid., go 
 
 show of oneself. ness. to ruin at the same time. 
 
 Φίλοί φίλοις σνναπόλ?\.ννται δυςτυχοϋσιν. Ουδέποτε κλέος έσϋλόν άπόλλυται. 
 Άνδρος δικαίου καρπός ουκ άπόλλνται. ΑΖ γυναίκες χαίρουσιν άμψιεννίμεναι 
 καλάς εσϋ-ητας. Οι ά7\,η$ώς σοφοί οϋ σπεύδονσιν έπιδείκνυσϋαι την αυτών σο- 
 φίαν. Ό οίνος, εάν ϋδατί 1 κεραννϋηται, το σώμα ρώννυσιν. Ή οργή εύΰϋς 
 σβενννοιτο. ΆεΙ εν τώ β'ιω άρετην καϊ σωφροσύνην ένδείκνυσο. Οι ΐΐέρσαί 
 πολυτελείς στολάς άμφιέννυντο. Ό ρήτωρ την γνώμην μετά παρ'ρ'ησίας άπεδεί- 
 ξατο. Αλκιβιάδης ΰπό των Άΰηναίων στρατηγός απεδείχθη. 
 
 The Persians put on splendid clothes. Always show in your life virtue and 
 soundmindedness. We admire the friends who accompany their unhappy friends 
 to ruin (going to ruin together with, etc.). Let us express our opinion with 
 frankness. The sophists made a boastful display of their wisdom. Women 
 put on splendid clothes. The orator should express (aor.) his opinion with 
 frankness. 
 
 Sum μ art op Verbs in -μι . 
 
 I. Verbs in - ,u £ which annex the Personal-endings to the 
 S t e m - vowel. 
 
 § 135. Verbs in - α (ί-στψμι, ΣΤΑ-) : 
 
 1. χί-χρη-μι, to lend (ΧΡΛ-), Inf. χιχράναι, Fut. χρήσω, etc. ; 
 Mid. to borrow, Fut. χρησομαι. — Aor. εχρησάμην in this sense is not 
 used by the Attic writers. To the same stem belong : 
 
 2. χρη, oportet (stem ΧΡΛ- and XPE-), Subj. χρη, Inf. χρηναι, 
 Part, (το) χρεών; Impf. εχρψ or χρην, Opt. χρείη (from XPE-). 
 
 3. άπόχρη, it suffices, sufficit ; there are also formed regularly from 
 ΧΡΑΩ,, άποχρώσιν, Inf. άτΐοχρψ ; Impf. άπε'χρη ; Aor. άπίχρψ 
 σε(ν), etc. Mid. άηοχρώμαι, to have enough, to abuse, waste, ano- 
 χρψϋ-αι, inflected like χράομαι. 
 
 4. όνίνημι, to benefit (ΟΝΛ-), Inf. ovivavcu ; Impf. Act. wanting ; 
 Fut. όνήσω ; Aor. ωνησα. Mid. όνίναμαι, to have advantage, Fut. 
 όνησομαι ; second Aor. ώνημψ, -ησο, -ψο, etc., Imp. ονησο, Part 
 όνήμενος, Opt. οναίμψ, -cuo, -airo (§ 134, 1), Inf, ovaa&ai ; Aor 
 
 1 $ 47, 10. and § 161, 2. (a), (a). 
 
164 
 
 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μι. 
 
 [§135 : 
 
 Pass, ώνήΰην instead of ώνημην. The remaining forms are sup- 
 plied by ωφελεΐν. 
 
 5. πι-μ-πλψμι, to fill {TIAA-), Inf. πιμπίαναι; Impf. επιμπλην; 
 Fut. πλησω ; Aor. ετζλησα ; Mid. πίμπλαμαι, πίμπλασ&αι ; Impf. 
 ίπψττλάμψ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, πέπλησμαι ; Aor. Pass. επλησϋ-ην. 
 —Mid. 
 
 The μ in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted 
 in composition, when a μ precedes the reduplication ; e. g. εμπίπλαμαι, hut ένε- 
 πιμπλάμην. 
 
 6. πίμπρημι, to hum, Trans., in all respects like πίμπλημι. 
 
 7. TAH-MI, to bear, endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting, (instead of 
 them υπομένω, ανέχομαι) ; Aor. ετΧψ, (τλώ,) τλαίψ, τλή&ι, τλψαι, 
 τλάς ; Fut. τλήαομαι ; Perf. τετΧψ,α (on the forms τέτλάμεν, etc., 
 comp. § 134, 3). 
 
 8. φψμί, to say (stem ΦΑ-), has the following formation : 
 
 Present. ACTIVE. Imperf. 
 
 Indi- 
 cative. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 p. ι. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 φημί 1 
 
 Φης ^ 
 
 φησί(ν) 
 
 φάτόν 
 
 φάτόν 
 
 φάμέν 
 
 φάτε 
 
 φάσί(ν) 
 
 Indi- 
 cative. 
 
 S.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P. ι. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 έφην 
 
 έφης, usually έφησΰα 
 
 εφη 
 
 έφάτον 
 
 εφάτην 
 
 έφάμεν 
 
 έφάτε 
 
 έφάσαν 
 
 Subj. 
 Imp. 
 
 Inf. 
 Part. 
 
 φώ, φτ)ς, φτ/, φήτον, φώμεν, φή- 
 
 τε, φώσι(ν) 
 φάΰί or φά,ϋ-ί, φατω, φ&τον, 
 
 φάτων, φύ,τε, φάτωσαν and 
 
 φάντων 
 φάναι 
 φάς, φ&σα, φάν 
 
 G. φάντος, φάσης 
 
 Opt. 
 
 φαίην, φαίης, φαί?], φαίητον 
 and φαΐτον, φαιητην and 
 φαίτην, φαίημεν and φαΐ- 
 μεν, φαίητε and φαΐτε, -εν 
 
 Fut. 
 Aor. 
 
 φήσω 
 εφ?] σα. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Perf. Imp. πεφάσΰω, let it be said. Aor. Part, φάμενος, affirming. 
 Verbal adjective, φατός, φατέος. 
 
 Rem. 1. In the second person φής, both the accentuation and the Iota sub- 
 script is contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the Ind. 
 Pres. (except φής), see § 14. 
 
 Rem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm 
 (aio), to assert, maintain, etc. The Put. φησω, however, has only the latter sig- 
 nification ; the first is expressed by λέξω, έρώ. The Impf. έφην with φάναι and 
 φάς, is used also as an Aorist. 
 
 1 In composition, άντίφημι, σνμφημι, άντίφ-ης, σύμφ^ς, άντίφησι, σύμφησι, etc. • 
 but Subj. άντιφώ, άντιφτ)ς, etc. 
 
§ 135.] SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -μΐ. 165 
 
 The following Deponents also belong here : 
 
 1. άγαμαι, to wonder, be astonished, admire, Impf. ήγάμην ; Aor. 
 ήγάσ&ην; Fut. άγάαομαι. 
 
 2. δνναμαι, to be able, Subj. δύνωμαι (§ 134, 1), Imp. δννασο, Inf. 
 δύναΰ&αι, Part, δυνάμενος ; Impf. εδυνάμψ and ήδυν. ; second Pers. 
 εδννω, Opt. δυνα(μψ>, δνναιο (§134, 1); Fut. δννήσομαι; Aor. 
 εδυνή&ην, ήδ. and εδννάα&ην (§ 85, Rem.) ; Perf. δεδύνημαι ; ver- 
 bal adjective, δυνατός, able and possible. 
 
 3. επίαταμαι, to know, second Pers. επίστασαι, etc., Subj. επία- 
 τωμαι (§ 134, 1), Imp. επίστω, etc. ; Impf. ήπιβτάμψ, ητζίστω, etc., 
 Opt. επισταίμην, επίσταιο (§ 134, 1) ; Fut. επιστήσομαι; Α.οτ.ηπιβ- 
 τή&ην (Aug., § 91, 3) ; verbal adjective, επιστητός. 
 
 4. εραμαι, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. εράω is used instead of 
 it in prose) ; Aor. ήράσ-&ην, amavi ; Fut. ερασ&ήσομαι, amabo. 
 
 5. κρεμαμαι, to hang, pendeo, Subj. κρεμωμαι (§ 134, 1) ; Part. 
 κρεμάμενος ; Impf. εκρεμάμψ, Opt. κρεμαίμψ, -cuo, -αιτο (§ 134, 1) ; 
 Aor. εκρεμάσ&ην ; Fut. Mid. κρεμησομαι, pendebo, I shall hang. 
 
 6. πρίασ&αι, to buy, a defective Aor. Mid., used by the Attic 
 writers instead of the Aor. Mid. of ώνέομαι, viz. εωνησάμην (§ 87, 
 4), which is not used by them, Subj. πρίωμαι (§ 134, 1), Opt. πριαί- 
 μην, -am, -αιτο (§ 134, 1), Imp. πρίασο or πρίω, Part, πρίαμενος. 
 
 LXXI. Vocabulary. 
 Δαιμόνων, -ου, to, the κώμη, -ης, η, a village. προ-σημαίνω, to indicate 
 
 Deity. ουκέτι, no more, no longer. beforehand, reveal. 
 
 έμπίπρημι, to set on fire, πολιτικός, -η, -όν, relating πρότερον, sooner, before. 
 
 burn up. to the state ; τά πολι- σύν-ειμι, to be with. 
 
 εΰκλεια and εύκλεία, -ας, τικά, politics. σωφρονέω. to be of sound 
 
 η, fame. πότερος, -a, -ov ; vter ? mind, sensible or pra- 
 
 Ζως, as long as. which of two Ί πότερον, dent. [save. 
 
 ίσως, perhaps. whether. φείδομαι, w. gen., to spare, 
 
 Σωκράτης προ πάντων φετο 1 χρήναι τους άν&ρώπους σωφροσυνην κτήσασ-&αι. 
 Έν έλπίσι χρη τονς σοφούς έχειν βίον. "Εργα και πράξεις αρετής, ου λόγους 
 Ζήλουν χρεών. Ίσως ειποι 2 τις αν, 'ότι χρην τον Σωκράτη μη πρότερον τά πο- 
 ντικά διδάσκειν τους έαυτώ συνδιατρίβοντας η σωφρονεΐν. Σωκράτης την πό- 
 ~h.v πολλά ώνησεν. Οι πολέμιοι πολλάς κώμας ένέπρησαν. Σωκράτης τό δαι- 
 mviov εφη προσημαίνειν έαυτώ το μέλλον. ΤΙόνος, φασ'ιν, εύκλείας πατήρ. Οι 
 πολΐται τους στρατιώτας της ανδρείας ηγάσϋησαν. 3 Αλκιβιάδης, έως Σωκράτεί 
 σννην, εδυνή&η τών μη καλών επιθυμιών κρατεϊν. Τίριαίμην πρό πάντων χρη- 
 μάτων τον σοφον άνδρα φΌ^ον εΐναί μοι. Πολλοί χρημάτων δυνάμενοι φείδε(Γ&αι, 
 πριν εραν, έρασΰέντες ουκέτι δύνανται. 
 
 Socrates maintained {aor.), that the Deity revealed the future to him. I 
 
 1 § .25, 20. 2 § 126, 7. 3 άγασΰαί τινά τίνος, to admire one for something. 
 
166 
 
 VERBS IN -μΐ. 
 
 [§§ 136, 137. 
 
 maintain, said the general, that (ace. w. inf.) you must attack the enemies. 
 Virtue will always benefit man. Fill {aor.) the goblets with wine. The town 
 was set on fire (aor.). The moderate (man) will always be able to control evil 
 desires. The wise (man) will always love virtue. Socrates understood (aor.) 
 how to turn the youths to virtue. We cannot purchase a faithful friend for 
 money. 
 
 §136. Verbs in -ε (τί-ϋη-μι, ΘΕ-) : 
 1. ϊ-ψμι (stem '£=), to send. Many forms of this verb are found 
 only in composition. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. ϊημι, ϊης, ϊησι(ν) ; ϊετον ; ίεμεν, ίετε, ίάσι(ν) or Ίεϊσι(ν). 
 Subj. ίώ, Ίής, ίή ; ιητον ; ίώμεν, Ίητε, ίώσι(ν) ; άφιώ, άφιής, άφιή 
 
 (άφίη in Xen.), etc. 
 Imp. (ϊεΰι), ϊει, Ίέτω, etc. Inf. ιεναι. Part, ίείς, ίεΐσα, ιέν. 
 
 Ind. low (from ΊΕΩ), άφίονν or ηφίονν (seldom ιειν), ϊεις, ΐει ; ϊε- 
 τον, ίέτην ; ίεμεν, Ιετε, ιεσαν. Opt. Ίε'ιην. 
 
 Perf. είκα. — Plup. εϊκειν. — Eut. ήσω. — Aor. Ι. ηκα (\ 131, 2). 
 Aor. Π. Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 131, 2); Dual είτον, είτην; 
 Plur. είμεν, καΰεϊμεν, είτε, άνεϊτε, είσαν, άφεϊσαν. 
 Subj. ώ, ής, άφώ, αφής, etc. 
 
 Opt. ε'Ίην, ε'ίης, ε'ίη ; είτον, είτην ; εϊμεν, είτε, εϊεν. 
 Imp. ες, αφες, έτω ; 'έτον, έτων ; έτε, έτωσαν and εντων. 
 Inf. είναι, άφεϊναι. — Part, εϊς, είσα, εν, Gen. εντός, εϊσης, άφέντος. 
 Remark. On the Aug. of άφίη μι, see § 91, 3. 
 
 MIDDLE, 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Ind. ιεμαι, ϊεσαι, ϊεται, etc. Subj. ίώμαι, άφιώμαι, ly, άφιή, etc. 
 Imp. Ιεσο or lov. Inf. ϊεσ&αι. Part, ίέμενος, -η, -ov. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 ίέμην, Ιεσο, etc. Opt. Ίο'ιμην (ίείμην), ίοΐο, άφωϊο, etc. 
 
 Aor. Π. 
 
 Ind. ε'ίμην Subj. ώμαι, άφώμαί, ή, αφή, ηται, άφηται 
 
 εϊσο, άφεϊσο Opt. προοίμην, -οϊο, -οίτο, -οίμεΰα, etc. 
 
 είτο, άφείτο Imp. ου, έσ&ω, etc. 
 
 ε'ίμεΰα, etc. Inf. έσ-&αι. Part, έμενος, -η, -ον. 
 
 Perf. είμαι, μεΰεϊμαι, Inf. είσΰ-αι, μεϋ-εϊσϋ-αι. — Plup. ε'ίμην, εϊσο, άφεϊσο, etc. 
 — Eut. ησομαι. — Aor. Ι. ήκάμην only in Ind. and seldom. 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 Aor. Ι. εϊΰ-ην, Part, έ&ε'ις. — Eut. έΰήσομαι. — Verb. Adj. έτος, έτέος (άφετος), 
 
 §137. Ειμί (stem'EZ-), to he, and Εΐμι (stem 5 /-), to go. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 ειμί, to be 
 
 Subj. ώ 
 
 Ind. 
 
 εΐμι, to go 
 
 Subj. 16) 
 
 2. 
 
 ει 
 
 fe 
 
 2. 
 
 ει 
 
 m 
 
 3. 
 
 έστί(ν) 
 
 V 
 
 3. 
 
 εισι(ν) 
 
 ι ν 
 
 D.2. 
 
 εστόν 
 
 7]T0V 
 
 D.2. 
 
 ιτον 
 
 ιητον 
 
 3. 
 
 έστόν 
 
 7]TOV 
 
 3. 
 
 ιτον 
 
 ιητον 
 
 P.l. 
 
 εσμεν 
 
 ωμεν 
 
 P.l. 
 
 ιμεν 
 
 ιωμεν 
 
 2. 
 
 εστε 
 
 ητε 
 
 2. 
 
 ιτε 
 
 ιητε 
 
 1 3. 
 
 εισί(ν) 
 
 ωσι(ν) 
 
 3. 
 
 Ida (ν) 
 
 ϊωσι(ν) 
 
§ 137.] 
 
 VERBS IN -μΐ. 
 
 167 
 
 Imp.S.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Ισ&ι 
 έστω 
 εστον 
 έστων 
 έστε 
 
 έστωσαν, 
 (more 
 
 Inf. είναι 
 Part, ων, ούσα, 
 
 δν 
 G. οντος,ουσης 
 
 seldom εστων 
 seldom όντων) 
 
 Imp. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 Ρ. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Wi, πρόςιΰι, 
 
 seldom πρόςει 
 Ιτω, προςίτω 
 ϊτον 
 ΐτων 
 ίτε 
 Ιτωσαν or Ιόντων 
 
 Inf. ιεναι 
 Part, ίων, lov- 
 
 σα, ιόν 
 Gen. ιόντος, 
 
 Ιούσης. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 
 εΐην 
 
 S.I. 
 
 είης 
 
 εϊη 
 
 είητον 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 ε'ιήτην 
 
 εϊη μεν (εϊμεν) 
 είητε (είτε) 
 είησαν and είεν 
 
 3. 
 
 Ρ. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 S.i. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 ην, I was 
 
 }}<τ&α 
 
 ην 
 
 ηστον (ητον) 
 
 ηστην (ήτην) 
 
 η μεν 
 
 ηστε (ήτε) 
 
 ήσαν 
 
 ψιν or 5?α, I went 
 
 ήεις, us'ly ηεισϋα 
 
 ηει 
 
 ηειτον, us'ly ητον 
 
 ηείτην, " ητην 
 
 ηειμεν, " ημεν 
 
 ηειτε, " %τε 
 
 ηεσαν 
 
 ιοιμι or 
 Ίοίην 
 ϊοις 
 ϊοι 
 
 ίοιτον 
 Ιοίτην 
 Ιοιμεν 
 ϊοιτε 
 Ιο Lev 
 
 Fut. έσομαι, I shall be, έση or έσει, έσται, etc. — Opt. έσοίμην. — Inf. εσεσ- 
 ■&αι. — Part, εσόμενος. 
 
 Rem. 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of ειμί, to be (except the second Pers. 
 el), see § 14. In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back as the 
 general rules of accentuation permit ; e. g. πάρειμι, πάρει, πάρεση, etc., Imp. 
 πάρι<τ&ι ; but παρην on account of the temporal augment, παρέσται on account 
 of the omission of ε (παρέσεται), παρεϊναι like infinitives with the ending -ναι, 
 παρώ, -ης, -η, etc., on account of the contraction ; the accentuation of the Part 
 m compound words should be particularly noted ; e. g. παρών, Gen. παρόντος, 
 so also παριών, Gen. παριόντος. 
 
 Rem. 2. The compounds of εϊμι, ίο go, follow the same rules as those of ειμί, 
 to be ; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds ; e. g. 
 πάρειμι, πάρει and πάρεισι (third Pers. Sing, of εϊμι and third Pers. PI. of ειμί) ; 
 but Inf. παριέναι, Part, παριών. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Pres. of εϊμι, to go, particularly the Ind., also the Inf. and Part., 
 among the Attic prose-writers, has almost always a Euture signification, I shall 
 or will gs>, or come. Hence the Pres. is supplied by έρχομαι (§ 126, 2). 
 
 Άπειμι, to be away, or 
 absent. 
 
 άπειμι, to go away. 
 
 άρκέομαι, w. pass, aor., to 
 satisfy oneself, be con- 
 tented, it;, dot. 
 
 άψ'ιημι, to let go, give up, 
 neglect. 
 
 βιόω, to live. 
 
 δέον, -οντος (from δεϊ ), τό, 
 that which is owed,duty. 
 
 LXXII. Vocabulary, 
 δή&εν, namely, forsooth, 
 
 εισ-ειμι, to go, or come 
 into. 
 
 έμβροχίζω, to drive into 
 the net or snare, en- 
 snare. 
 
 έξ-ίημι, to let or send out ; 
 of rivers, empty itself. 
 
 έπειτα, afterwards, then, 
 hereafter. 
 
 έφίημι, to send up to ; 
 mid. w. gen., send one- 
 self or one's thoughts 
 after anything, i. e. de- 
 sire. 
 
 καϋ-ίημι, to let down, lay. 
 
 κάπρος, -ου, ό, a wild boar. 
 
 καρτεράς, -ά, -όν, strong, 
 large. 
 
 κραυγή, -ης, ή, a ory, a 
 shout. 
 
168 VERBS IN -μι. [§ 138. 
 
 λί&ος, -ου, ό, a stone. πέδη, -ης, ?), a fetter. oca, to revenge oneself 
 
 με&ίημι, to let go, give πλεονάκις, oftener. on. [known. 
 
 up, neglect. πρός-ειμι, to go to, ap- φανερός, -a, -ov, evident, 
 
 παρασκευάζω, to prepare ; proach. Χ^ών, -όνος, η, snow. 
 
 mid., to prepare oneself, στόμα,-ατος,τό, the mouth. ώς, Attic for είς {with per- 
 
 παρίημι, to let pass, loosen, τιμωρέω, to help ; mid. w. sons). 
 
 01 άγαΰ -ol ου δια τόν ΰπνον μεΰ-ιασι τά δέοντα πράττειν. Άφεΐς τα Φανερά 
 u /ή δίωκε τά αφανή. ΤΙολλοΙ άν&ρωποι έφίενται πλούτου. 1 ΤΙέδας λέγονσιν εις 
 τόν Έλλήςποντον κα&εϊναι Εέρξην τιμωρούμενον δή&εν τον 'Έλλήςποντον. 
 Οϋτ' έκ χειρός με&έντα καρτερόν λί&ον βαον 2 κατασχεϊν, ούτ' από γλώττης λό- 
 γον. Ηρακλής τόν 'Έρυμάνθιον κάπρον διώξας μετά κραυγής εις χιόνα πολλην 
 παρειμένον ένεβρόχισεν. Ό Νείλος έξίησιν εις την -&άλατταν επτά στόμασιν. 
 Άττα 3 έπειτ' έσται, ταϋτα ΰεοϊς μέλει. ΈΙ θνητός εϊ, βέλτιστε, 4 -&νητά καΐ 
 φρόνει. Μέμνησο 5 νέος ων, ώς γέρων έση ποτέ. Δίκαιος ϊσΰ-', ίνα και δικαίων 
 τύχης. 6 Βίας παρούσης ούδεν ισχύει νόμος. Ευδαίμων είην και ΰεοϊς φίλος. 
 'Αλέξανδρος εϊπεν 7 • Έί μη 'Αλέξανδρος ην, Διογένης αν ην. Βιώσ -if άρκούμενος 
 τοίς παροϋσι, των απόντων ουκ έφιέμενος. Και νεότης και γήρας άμφω καλά 
 έστον. Οί άν&ρωποι εϋδαιμονεϊν δύνανται, καν πένητες ωσιν. 'Αλήθεια σοι 
 ■παρέστω. Ίωμεν, ώ φίλοι. Φεύγε διχοστασίας και έριν, πολέμου προςιόντος. 
 ΈπεΙ η Μανδάνη παρεσκευάζετο ώς άπιοϋσα πάλιν προς τον άνδρα, ό 'Αστυάγης 
 έλεγε προς τόν Κϋρον • Τ Ω παϊ, ην μένης παρ' εμοί, πρώτον μέν, όταν βούλη είς- 
 ιέναι ώς έμέ, έπϊ σοι έσται, 10 και χάριν σοι μάλλον έξω, δσω αν πλεονάκις είςίης 
 ώς έμέ. 'Έπειτα δε ιπποις τοις έμοϊς χρήση, και, 'όταν άπίης, έχων άπει ους αν 
 αυτός έ&έλης 'ίππους. 
 
 The good (man) will never omit to do his duty, Many strive after (έφίεσ-θ-αι. 
 w. gen.) the unknown, while they neglect (part, oar.) the known. Xerxes laid 
 fetters on the Hellespont. Let not a man be a friend to me with the tongue 
 (dot.), but in reality. Be just, that you may also obtain justice. The friend 
 cares for the friend, even though he is absent. When the enemies came into 
 the town, the citizens fled. Go in, Ο boy ! The soldiers should all go away 
 from the town. Two armies came into the town. 
 
 1 § 158, 3. (b). 2 § 52, 10. 3 § 62. 4 § 52, 1. 5 § 122, 11. 
 
 8 § 121, 16. 7 § 126, 7. 8 $ 142, 9. 9 § 39, Rem. 
 
 10 είναι 'επί τινι, to be in the power of any one. 
 
§ 138.] 
 
 ΤΓΚΒβ IN -μι. 
 
 § 138. II. Verbs in -μι which annex the Syllable ννΰ or vv to the 
 Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings. 
 
 Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem ends with 
 α, ε, ο, or with a Consonant. 
 
 A. Verbs whose Stem ends with α, ε or o. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 a. Stem in a. 
 
 b. Stem in ε. 
 
 c. Stem ino (ω). 
 
 Act. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 σκεόά-ννϋ-μί 1 
 
 κορέ-ννν-μί ι 
 
 στρώ-ννϋ-μι. 1 
 
 
 Impf. 
 
 έ-σκεδά-ννΰ-ν ι 
 
 έ-κορέ-ννϋ-ν ι 
 
 έ-στρώ-ννϋ-ν 1 
 
 
 Perf. 
 
 ε-σκέδά-κα 
 
 κε-κορε-κα 
 
 έ-στρω-κα 
 
 
 PllTD. 
 
 έ-σκεδά-κειν 
 
 έ-κε-κορέ-κειν 
 
 k -στρώ-κειν 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 σκεδά-σω, 
 Att σκεδώ, -ας, -φ 
 
 κορε-σω, 
 Att. κορώ, -εϊς, -εΐ 
 
 στρω-σω 
 
 
 Aor. 
 
 ε-σκέδα-σα 
 
 ε-κορε-σα 
 
 έ-στρω-σα 
 
 Mid. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 σκεδά-ννν-μαο 
 
 κορέ-ννν-μαι 
 
 στρω-ννν-μαι 
 
 
 Impf. 
 
 ε-σκεδα-ννν-μην 
 
 έ-κορε-ννν-μην 
 
 έ-στρω-ννύ-μην 
 
 
 Perf. 
 
 έ-σκέδα-σ -uat 
 
 κε-κορε-σ-μα 
 
 έ-στρω-μαι 
 
 
 Plup. 
 
 ε-σκεδα-σ-μην 
 
 ε-κε-κορε-σ-μην 
 
 έ-στρώ-μην 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 
 κορε-σ-ομαι 
 
 
 
 Aor. 
 
 
 ε-κορε-σ-ιιμιιν 
 
 
 
 P. Pf. 
 
 
 κε-κορε-σ-ομαι 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 ε-σκ.εδά-σ-ΰ-7]ν 
 
 έ-κορέ-σ-ΰ-ην 
 
 ε-στρώ-•&ην 
 
 
 Put. 
 
 σκεδα-σ-ΰ-ήσομαί 
 
 κορε-σ-ΰήσομαι 
 
 στρω-ϋ-ησομαί 
 
 Verbal 
 
 Adj. 
 
 σκεδα-σ-τός 
 
 κορε-σ-τος 
 
 στρω-τος 
 
 
 
 σκεδα-σ-τέος 
 
 κορε-σ-τεος 
 
 στρω-τεος. 
 
 Β. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 δλ-λϋ-μι, 2 perdo Ι δλ-λϋ-μαί, pereo 
 
 δμ-νϋ-μι? 
 
 δμ-νν-μαι 
 
 Impf. 
 
 ώλ-?ιϋ-ν 2 j ώλ-?,υ-μην 
 
 ώμ-νν-ν' 2 
 
 ωμ-νν-μην 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 δλ-ώλε-κα (ΌΛΕΩ), perdidi, 
 
 δμ-ώμο-κα 
 
 ομ-ωμο-μαι 
 
 
 §89. 
 
 (ΌΜΟΩ), 
 
 
 Perf. II. 
 
 <5λ.-ω?„-α, peini 
 
 § 89. 
 
 
 Plup. I. 
 
 ό?*.-ωλέ-κείν, perdideram 
 
 δμ-ωμό-κειν 
 
 δμ-ωμό-μην 
 
 Plup. II. 
 
 δλ-ώλ-ειν, pcneram 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 όλ-ώ, -εϊς, -εΐ Ι δλ•οΐψαί, -εϊ 
 
 δμ-ονμαί, -εΐ 
 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ώλε-σα | Α. II. ώλ-υμην 
 
 ωμο-σα 
 
 ωμο-σαμην 
 
 
 
 Α. Ι. Ρ. ωμό-σ-ϋ-ην et ώμόΰην 
 
 
 
 Ι. Ρ. Ρ. ομο-σ-β-ήσομαι. 
 
 Εεμαήκ. Όλλνμί comes by assimilation from δλ-ννμι. For an example of 
 A stem-ending with a mute, see δεΐκννμί above, unde" the paradigms (§ 133). 
 The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of δμννμι is δμωμοσμένο< . The remaining forme 
 of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the σ among the A ttic writers ; e. g, 
 ύμώμοτα,ί, δμώμοτο. 
 
 1 And σκεδα-ννΰω, εσκεδά-νννον — κορε-νννω, ε-κορέ-νννον — στρω-νννω, 
 i -στρώ-νννον (always ν). 
 
 8 And δλλύ-ω, ώλ?.υ- 
 
 υμνν-ω, ωμνν-ον (always ν). 
 15 
 
170 VERBS IN -μι. [§ 139. 
 
 Summary of the Verbs belonging here. 
 
 The Stem ends : 
 § 139. A. In a Vo wel and assumes -vvv. 
 
 (a) Verbs whose Stem ends in a. 
 
 1. κερά-ννν-μι, to mix, Fut. κεράσω, Att. κερώ; Aor. εκεράσαι 
 Perf. κεκράκα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, κέκράμαι ; Aor. Pass, εκρά&ψ, 
 also εκεράσ&ψ.— Mid. 
 
 2. κρεμά-ννϋ-μι, to hang, Fut. κρεμάσω, Att. κρεμώ ; Aor. «κρ/« 
 μασά; Mid. or Pass, κρεμάννϋμαι, I hang myself or am Azm# (but 
 κρεμάμαι, to hang, Intrans., § 135, 5) ; Fut. Pass, κρεμασϋ-ήσομαι ; 
 Aor. εκρεμάσ&ην, I was hung, or I hung, Intrans. 
 
 3. πετα-ννν-μι, to spread out, expand, open, Fut. πετασω, Att 
 πετώ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, τίεπτάμαι ; Aor. Pass, επετάσϋ-ψ (Syn- 
 cope, § 117, 1). 
 
 4. σκεδά-ννϋ-μι, to scatter, Fut. σκεδάσω, Att. σκβδω ; Perf. Mid, 
 or Pass, εσκεδασμαι ; Aor. Pass, έσκεδάσ&ψ. 
 
 (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in ε. 
 
 1. ε-ννν-μι, to clothe, in prose άμφιενννμι, Impf. άμφιεννυν with- 
 out Aug. ; Fut. άμφιεσω, Att. άμψιώ ; Aor. ήμφίεσα ; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, ήμφίεσμαι, ήμφίεσαι, ήμφίεσται, etc., Inf. ήμφίεσ&αι ; Fut. 
 Mid. άμφιεσομαι, Att. άμφιονμαι. — Aug., § 91, 3. 
 
 2. ζε-ννν-μι, to boil, Trans., Fut. ζέσω ; Aor. έζεσα ; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, εζεσμαι ; Aor. Pass, εζεσ&ψ. — (ζεω, on the contrary, is 
 usually intransitive). 
 
 3. κορε'-ννϋ-μι, to satisfy, satiate, Fut. κορεσω, Att. κορώ ; Aor. 
 ίκόρεσα ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, κεκόρεσμαι ; Aor. Pass, εκορεσ&ψ. — 
 Mid. 
 
 4. σβε-ννν-μι, to extinguish, Fut. σβεσω ; first Aor. εσβεσα, I ex- 
 tinguished; second Aor. εσβψ, I ceased to burn, went out; Perf. 
 §σβηκα, I have ceased to burn. — Mid. σβεννύμαι, to cease to burn, 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, εσβεσμαι; Aor. Pass, έσβέσ&ψ. No other 
 verb in -ννμι has a second Aorist. 
 
 5. στορε-ννϋ-μι, to spread out, abbreviated form στόρνυμι, Fut. στο- 
 ρεσω, Att. στορώ; Aor. εστόρεσα. The other tenses are formed 
 from ατρώνννμι, viz. εστρωμαι, εστρώ&ψ, στρωτές. See § 136, 
 A, c. 
 
§ 140.1 VERBS IN -μι. 171 
 
 (c) Verbs in o, with the ο lengthened into ω. 
 1 ζώ-ννν-μι, to gird, Fut. ζώσω ; Aor. έ'ζωσα; p er f. Mid. or 
 Pass, εζωσμαι (§ 95).— Mid. 
 
 2. ρω-ννν-μι, to strengthen, Fut. ρώσω ; Aor. 'ίδρωσα ; Perf. Midv 
 or Pass, εόρωμαι, Imp. έρρωσο, farewell, Inf. ερρώσ&αι ; Aor. Pass. 
 ερρωσ&ην (§ 95). 
 
 3. στρώ-ννϋ-μι, to spread out, Fut. σζρωσω ; Aor. έστρωσα, etc. 
 See στορένννμι and § 138, A, c. 
 
 4. χρώ-ννν•μι, to color, Fut. χρώσω ; Aor. εχρωσα ; Perf. Mid. or 
 "Pass, κε'χρωμαι. 
 
 §140. Β. In a Consonant and assumes -vv (see 
 δείκ-νν-μι, § 133). 
 
 1. άγ-νν-μι, to break, Fut. άξω ; Aor. εαζα, Inf. a£«t; second 
 Perf. εάγα, I am broken ; Aor. Pass, εαγψ (Aug., § 87, 4). — Mid. 
 
 2. εΐργ-νν-μι (or εΐργω), to shut in, Fut. εΐρξω ; Aor. είρξα. (But 
 «Γρ^ω, εΓρ£ω, είρξα, to shut out, etc.). 
 
 3. ζενγ-νϋ-μι, to join, Fut. ζενξω ; Aor. εζενξα ; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass, εζενγμαι ; Aor. Pass, εζενχ&ψ, more frequently εζυγψ. 
 
 4. μίγ-νν-μι, to mix, Fut. μ/£ω ; Aor. εμιξα, μΐ'ξαι ; Perf. μεμϊχα ; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, μεμιγμαι ; Aor. Pass, εμίχ&ην, more frequently 
 εμϊγην; Fut. Perf. μεμίξομαι. 
 
 ο. οΐγ-νν-μι or οΓ^ω, prose άνοΐγννμι, ανοίγω, to open, Impf. α^εφ- 
 yew; Fut. άίΌί£ω ; Aor. άνεω'ξα, άνοΐξαι; first Perf. άνεωχα, I have 
 opened ; second Perf. άνεφγα, I stand open, instead of which Att. 
 άνεφγμαι; Aor. Pass, άνεαίχ&ην, άνοιχ&ψαι (Aug., §87, 6). 
 
 6. όμόργ-νν-μι, to wipe off, Fut. όμόρξω ; Aor. ωμορξα. — Mid. 
 
 7. 6ρ-νν-μι, to rouse, Fut. ορσω ; Aor. ώρσα ; Mid. ορννμαι, to 
 rouse one's self, Fut. ορονμαι ; Aor. ώρόμην. 
 
 8. πηγ-νν•μι, to fix, fasten, Fut. ^ξοο ; Aor. έπηξα ; first Perf. 
 πέπηχα, I have fastened; second Perf. πεπηγα, I stand fast, Mid. 
 πήγννμαι, 1 stick fast ; Perf. πεπηγμαι, I stand fast ; Aor. Pass, επα- 
 γψ. — Mid. 
 
 9. ρηγ-νν-μι, to tear, break, Fut, ρήξω ; Aor. ερρηξα ; sec ond Perf. 
 ερρωγα, lam broken, rent; Aor. ερράγην; Fut. Pass. ραγίζομαι. 
 
 LXXIII. Vocabulary. 
 'Α,ηδης, -ες, unpleasant, join again; of an army, απο-σβένννμι, to quench, 
 disgusting. set out again. βδελνγμία, -ας, η, dislike, 
 
 ανα-ζευγννμι, to yoke, or άνα-καίω, to burn, kindle. disgust. 
 
172 VERBS IN -μι. f§ 141. 
 
 όίαββηγνΰμι, to break κωτίλλω, to chatter, prat- gether, make coagulate, 
 
 asunder, tear in pieces, tie. [liglifc- compose. 
 
 tear away. λύχνος, -ου, δ, a lamp, a φύσημα, -ατός, τό, breath. 
 
 ϊγ καλλωπίζομαι, to be μαλθακός, -η, -όν, soft, φως, φωτός, τό, light. 
 
 proud of, make a dis- rich, tender. χόλος, -ov, b, ill-will, an- 
 
 play. " δλλϋμι, to destroy. ger. [jury. 
 
 έξ-όλλύμι, to ruin utterly, στνγέω, to hate. ψευδόρκιον, -ov, τό, per 
 
 ζεύγνϋμι, to yoke, join. συμπηγννμι, to join to- ψεύδορκος, -ov, perjured. 
 
 Των βρωμάτων τα ηδιστα, 1 εάν τις προςφέρη, πρϊν επι&υμεϊν, αηδή φαίνεται, 
 
 κεκορεσμένοις δε και βδελυγμίαν παρέχει. Τω αντώ φυσηματι το μεν πυρ άνα- 
 
 καύσειας αν, το δε του λύχνου φως άποσβέσειας. Οι Ά&ηναϊοι μετά πάσης της 
 
 δυνάμεως επϊ τους ΤΙέρσας άνέζευξαν. Μη δαιμόνων χόλον δρσης. Ή ύβρις 
 
 πολλά ήδη των άν&ρώπων άπώλεσεν έργα. Έι μη φυλάξεις μίκρ\ απολεϊς τά 
 
 ιιείζονα. Οι πολέμιοι ώμοσαν τάς συν&ήκας φυλάξαι. Ξενοφάνης έλεγε, την 
 
 γήν εξ αέρος και πυρός συμπαγηναι. Σωκράτης, ιδών 2 'Άντισΰ-ένη τό διεββωγδς 
 
 Ιματίου μέρος άει ποιοϋντα φανερόν ■ Ου παύση, έφη, έγκαλλωπιζόμενος ήμιν ; 
 
 Φεύδορκον στυγεϊ ΰ-εος, όςτις δμεϊται. Ζευς άνδρ' έξολέσειεν 'Ολύμπιος, δς τδν 
 
 έταίρον μαλ&ακά κωτίλλων εξαπαταν ε&έλει. 
 
 Boil (aor.) the water, Ο boy! The garment is torn. The milk is curdled 
 (συμπηγνυμι, per/. 2). The doors are open. The wine was mixed {aor.) with 
 water {dot.). The goblet is broken to pieces. The light is extinguished. The 
 soldiers will again set out against the enemies. Swear (subj. aor.) not without 
 reason. Haughtiness will ruin you all. Extinguish (aor.) the light. The wo- 
 men in sorrow (sorrowing) tore (aor. mid.) their garments. 
 
 §141. Inflection of the two forms of the Perfect, 
 κεϊμαι and ή μ αι . 
 (a) Κεϊμαι, to lie down. 
 Κεϊμαι, properly, I have laid myself down, I am lain down, hence, 
 I lie down, is a Perf. form without reduplication. 
 
 Perf. Ind. κεϊμαι, κεϊσαι, κεϊται, κείμεΰα, κεϊσ&ε, κείνται ; 
 
 Subj. κέωμαι, κέη, κέηται, etc. ; 
 
 Imp. κεϊσο, κείσ&ω, etc. ; Inf. κεϊσϋαι ; Part, κείμενος. 
 Plup. Ind. έκείμην, έκεισο, εκείτο, third Pers. PI. έκειντο ; 
 
 Opt. κεοίμην, κέοιο, κέοιτο, etc. 
 Fut. κείσομαι. 
 
 Compounds, άνάκειμαι, κατάκειμαι, κατάκεισαι, etc. : Inf. κατακεϊσΰαι ; Imp. 
 κατάκεισο, έγκεισο. 
 
 (b) τ Ή.μαι , to sit. 
 1. Χ Ημαι, properly, I have seated myself I have heen seated, hence, 
 I sit, is a Perf. form of the Poet. Aor. Act. είσα, to set, to establish. 
 The stem is H/J- (comp. ήσ-ται instead of ήδ-ται [according to § 8, 
 1.] and the Lat. sed-eo). 
 
 1 § 51, 1. 2 §126, 4. 
 
§ 142.J VERBS IN -ω WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -μι. 173 
 
 Per/. | In J. ημαι, ησαι, ησται, ϊ/με&α, ησϋε, f/vrat ; 
 
 Ι Imp. Ι/σο, ήσ&ω, etc. ; Inf. ησ&αί ; Part, ημενος. 
 Plup. | νμνν, ήσο, ηστο, ήμεΰα, ησϋ-ε, ηντο. 
 
 2. In prose, the compound κά&ημαι, is commonly used instead of 
 the simple. The inflection of the compound differs from that of 
 the simple, in never taking a in the third Pers. Sing. Perf., nor in 
 the Plup., except when it has the temporal Augment: 
 
 Perf. Ι κίϊ&ημαί, κύϋησαι, κάΰ η τ αι, etc. ; Subj. κάΰωμαι, κάΰν, κάϋηται, 
 etc. ; Imp. κάΰησο, etc. ; Inf. καϋ-ήσ&αί ; Part, καθήμενος. 
 
 Plup. ι εκαΰημην and κα&ήμην, έκάΰησο and καΰήσο, έκά-&ητο and κα- 
 ΰή στ ο , etc. ; Opt. καΰ-οίμην, κάΰ-οω, κάϋοιτο, etc. 
 
 Remark. The defective forms of ημαι are supplied by έζεσΰαι or ϊζεσϋαι 
 (prose καΰέζεσΰαι, καΰ'ιζεσΰαή. 
 
 § 142. Verbs in -ω, which follow the analogy of Verbs in -μι, in 
 forming the second Aor. Act. and Mid. 
 
 1. Several verbs with the characteristic «, ε, ο, ν, form a second 
 Aor. Act. and Mid., according to the analogy of verbs in -μι, since, 
 in this tense, they omit the mode-vowel, and hence append the per- 
 sonal-endings to the stem. But all the remaining forms of these 
 verbs are like verbs in -ω. 
 
 2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the modes 
 and participials, is like that of the second Aor. Act. of verbs in -μι. 
 The characteristic-vowel is in most cases lengthened, as in ίστψ, 
 viz. a and ε into η, ο into ω, ϊ and ν into Γ and v. This lengthened 
 vowel remains, as in εστψ, throughout the Ind., Imp. and Inf. 
 The Imp. ending -η{τι in verbs whose characteristic-vowel is a, in 
 composition is abridged into a ; e. g. πρόβα instead of ττρόβη&ι. 
 
 Modes 
 
 a. Characteris. a 
 
 b. Characteris. ε 
 
 c. Characteris. ο 
 
 ά. Charac. ν 
 
 and 
 
 ΒΑ-Ω, βαίνω, 
 
 ΣΒΕ-Ω, σβένννμι, 
 
 ΓΝΟ-Ω, γιγνώσ- 
 
 δύ-ω, 
 
 Persons. 
 
 to go. 
 
 to extinguish. 
 
 κω, to know. 
 
 to wrap up. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 ε-βη-ν, I went 
 
 έσβην, I ceased 
 
 έγνων, I knew 
 
 έδϋν, to go 
 
 2. 
 
 έ-βη-ς 
 
 έσβης [to burn 
 
 έγνως 
 
 έδϋς [in or 
 
 3. 
 
 έ-βη 
 
 έσβη 
 
 έγνω 
 
 έδϋ [under 
 
 D.2. 
 
 έ-βη-τον 
 
 έσ βητον 
 
 έγνωτον 
 
 έδϋτον 
 
 3. 
 
 ε-βη-την 
 
 εσβητην 
 
 εγνώτην 
 
 εδϋτην 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 έ-βη-μεν 
 
 έσβημεν 
 
 έγνωμεν 
 
 έδνμεν 
 
 2. 
 
 ε-βη-τε 
 
 έσβητε 
 
 έγνωτε 
 
 έδϋτε 
 
 3. 
 
 έ-βη-σαν 
 
 έσβησαν 
 
 έγνωσαν 
 
 έδυσαν 
 
 
 (Poet, εβάν) 
 
 
 (Poet έγνων) 
 
 (ΊΌβί.έδϋν) 
 
 Subj. S. 
 
 βω, /%, βψ• 
 
 σβώ, -ής, -y l 
 
 γνώ, γνως, γνώ 1 
 
 δύω, -τις, -τ? 1 
 
 D. 
 
 βητον 
 
 σβητον 
 
 γνώτον 
 
 δνητον 
 
 P. 
 
 βώμεν, -ητε, 
 
 σβώμεν, -ητε, 
 
 γνώμεν, -ώτε, 
 
 δύωμεν, 
 
 
 -ώσι(ν) 
 
 -ώσι(ν) 
 
 -ώσί(ν) 
 
 -ητε, -ωσι(ν) 
 
 1 Compounds, e. g. ανάβω, άναβες, etc. ; άποσβώ ; δίαγνώ ; αναδύω. 
 15* 
 
171 VERBS WITH A SECOND AOR. LIKE VERBS IN -fit. [§ 142. 
 
 Opt. S. 1. 
 
 βαίην 
 
 σβείην 
 
 γνοίην 
 
 
 2. 
 
 βαίης 
 
 σβείης 
 
 γνοίης 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βαίη 
 
 σβείη 
 
 γνοίη 
 
 
 D.2. 
 
 βαίητον et -αϊτον 
 
 σβείητον et -εϊτον 
 
 γνοίητον et -οΐτον 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βα,ίήτην et -αίτην 
 
 σβειήτην et -είτην 
 
 γνοιήτην et -οίτην 
 
 
 P.l. 
 
 βαίημεν et -αΐμεν 
 
 σβείη μεν et -εϊμεν 
 
 γνοίημεν et -οϊμεν 
 
 
 2. 
 
 βαίητε et -αΐτε 
 
 σβείητε et -είτε 
 
 γνοίητε et -οϊτε 
 
 
 3. 
 
 βαϊεν (seldom 
 βαίησαν). 
 
 σβείεν 
 
 γνοϊεν (rarely 
 γνοίησαν). 
 
 
 Imp. S. 
 
 βή&ι, -ητω 1 
 
 σβή&ι, -ήτω 1 
 
 γνώΰί, -ώτω 1 
 
 δϋΰ -t, -ντω χ 
 
 D.l. 
 
 βητον, -ητων 
 
 σβήτον, -ητων 
 
 γνώτον, -ώτων 
 
 δντον,-ντων 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 βητε 
 
 σβητε 
 
 γνώτε 
 
 δντε 
 
 3. 
 
 βητωσαν and 
 
 σβήτωσαν and 
 
 γν ώτω σαν and 
 
 δύτωσαν et 
 
 
 βάντων 
 
 σβέντων 
 
 γνόντων 
 
 δύντων 
 
 Inf. 
 
 βηναι 
 
 σβηναι 
 
 γνώναί 
 
 δϋναί 
 
 Part. 
 
 βάς, -άσα, -αν 
 
 σβείς, -εϊσα, -εν 
 
 γνούς, -ονσα, -όν 
 
 δνς, -ϋσα,-ΰν 
 
 
 G. βάντος 
 
 G. σβέντος 
 
 G. γνόντος 
 
 G. δνντος. 
 
 Remark. The Opt. form 
 dialect, but in the Epic. In 
 formed in only a very few 
 (§ 135, p. 165). 
 
 δύην, instead of δνίην, is not found in the Attic 
 
 the Common language, the second Aor. Mid. is 
 
 verbs; e. g. πέτομαί (§ 125, 23), πρίασΰ-αί, to buy 
 
 Summary of Verbs with a second Aor. like Verbs in -μι. 
 Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : 
 
 1. διδράσκω, to run away (§ 122, 6), Aor. {JPA-) εδράν, -dg y 
 -α, -αμεν, -άτε, -άσαν, Subj. δρω, δρας, δρα, δράτον, δρώμεν, δράτε, 
 δρώΰΐ(ν), Opt. δραίψ, Imp. δρά&ι, -«τω, Inf. δράναι, Part, δρας, 
 -άσα, -άν. 
 
 2. τζετομαι, to fly (§ 125, 23), Aor. (ΠΤΛ-) επτην, Inf. πτψαι, 
 Part, mag ; Aor. Mid. επτάμην, πτάα&αι. 
 
 3. σκε'λλω or σκελεω, to dry, make dry, second Aor. {ΣΚΛΑ-) 
 εσκλην, to wither (Intrans.), Inf. σκλήναι, Opt. σκλαίην (§ 117, 2). 
 
 4. ψΰ-ά-νω, to come before, anticipate (§119, 5), second Aor. 
 εφϋ-ψ, φ&ήναι, cp&ag, φ#ώ, φ&αίην. 
 
 5. καίω, to burn, Trans. (§ 116, 2), second Aor. (ΚΛΕ-) εκάην,* 
 I burned, Intrans. ; but first Aor. εκανσα, Trans. 
 
 6. ρεω, to flow (§ 116, 3), Aor. (PTE-) ερρυψ* I flowed. 
 
 7. χαίρω, to rejoice (§ 125, 24), Aor. (ΧΛΡΕ-) εχαρψ.* 
 
 8. άλίσκομαι, to be taken, Aor. (ΑΛΟ-) ήλων and εάλων (§ 122, 1), 
 
 9. βώω, to live, second Aor. εβίων, Subj. βιώ, -φς, -φ, etc., Opt. 
 ιφην (not βιοίψ, as γνοίην, to distinguish it from Opt. Impf. 
 
 βιοιψ), Inf. βιώναι, Part, βιονς ; but the Cases of the Part, βιούς 
 are supplied by the first Aor. Part, βιωαας. Thus, άνεβίων, I canu 
 
 1 Compounds, e. g. άνάβη -d-t, άναβα, άνάβητε ; άπόσβη&ι ; διάγνωΰί ; άνάδϋΰ -L 
 * These are strictly Pa8s. Aorists, though they have an Act. Intrans. sign 
 fication. — Te. 
 
§ 143.] 
 
 THE IRREGULAR VERB ol6a. 
 
 175 
 
 to life again, from άναβιωσκομαι.— The Pres. and Impf. of βίοω 
 are but little used by the Attic writers ; instead of these, they em- 
 ploy the corresponding tenses of ζω, which, on the contrary, bor- 
 rows its remaining tenses from βωω ; thus, Pres. ζώ ; Impf. εζων 
 (§ 97, 3) ; Fut. βιωσομαι ; Aor. εβίων ; Perf. βεβίωκα ; Perf. Pass. 
 βεβίωται, Part, βεβιωμενος. 
 
 1 φνω, to bring forth, produce, second Aor. εφΰν, I was pro- 
 duced, born, I sprung up, arose, was, φνναι, φνς, Subj. φνω (Opt. 
 wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first Aor. εφνσα, /produced, 
 Fut. φνσω, Twill produce. The Perf. πέφνκα, also has an intran- 
 sitive sense, and also the Pres. Mid. φύομαι, and the Fut. φύσομαι. 
 
 § 143. Οιδ a (stem 'ΕΙΔ., to see), I know, 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 D. 2. 3. 
 P. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 οίδα Subj. είδώ Imp. 
 
 οΙσ-&α είδης Ισϋ -L 
 
 οΐδε(ν) είδη Ιστω 
 
 Ιστον, Ιστον είδητον, -ητον Ιστον, Ιστων 
 
 Ισμεν είδώμεν 
 
 ιστε είδητε ιστε 
 
 ίσάσί(ν) είδώσί(ν) Ιστωσαν 
 
 Inf. 
 είδέναι 
 
 Part 
 
 είδώς, -via, -ός 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ηδειν 1 Dual 
 ηδείς and -εισ&α ηδειτον 
 ηδει(ν) ηδείτην 
 
 Ρ1. ηδειμεν 
 ηδειτε 
 ήδεσαν 
 
 Opt. Sing, είδείην, -ης, -η ; Dual είδείητον, -ητην ; PI. είδείημεν (seldom 
 
 είδεϊμεν), είδείητε, είδεϊεν (seldom είδείησαν). 
 Fut. είσομαι, I shall know. — Verbal adjective, ίστεον. 
 
 Σννοίδα, compounded of οίδα, I am conscious, Inf. σννειδεναι 
 Subj. σννείδώ, etc. 
 
 , Imp. σννισ&ι, 
 
 λίμα, -ατός, τδ, blood. 
 
 άκολάστως, with impu- 
 nity, extravagantly, li- 
 centiously. 
 
 άπο-βαίνω, to go away. 
 
 άπο-γιγνώσκω, to reject; 
 w. έμαντόν, give oneself 
 up, despair. 
 
 άπο-διδράσκω, w. ace, to 
 run away from. 
 
 LXXIV. Vocabulary. 
 
 άπο-κρνπτω, to conceal. 
 άχρηστος, -ov, useless. 
 βοηϋέω, to hasten to help, 
 
 assist. 
 δνω, to go or sink into, 
 
 put on. 
 έκ-πέτομαι, to fly away. 
 εμπίπλημί τί τίνος, to fill. 
 νεκρός, -a, -όν, dead; ό 
 
 νεκρός, a corpse. 
 
 παρα-πέτομαι, to fly away. 
 
 πρό-οιδα, to know before- 
 hand. 
 
 προσ&ετός, -ή, -όν, or 
 πρόσ&ετος, -η, -ov, add- 
 ed (by art), artificial. 
 
 πτέρυξ, -γος, η, a wing. 
 
 συγγογνώσκω, w. dot., to 
 pardon. [that 
 
 ώστε, w. inf. and ind., so 
 
 1 First Pers. $δη, second ηδησΰα, third ηδη, are considered as Attic forms. 
 
176 VERBS. DEPONENTS MIDDLE MOST IN USE. [§ 144. 
 
 Οι άνθρωποι την άληθειαν γνώναι σπενδουσιν. Υνώθι σεαυτόν. Τνώναι 
 χαλεπον μέτρον. Ή πόλις έκινδύνευσεν υπό τών πολεμίων άλώναι. Φεϋγε 
 τους ακόλαστος βιώσαντας. Σύγγνωθί μοι, ώ πάτερ. Αίμος μέγίστον άλγος 
 άνθρώποις έφυ. Ί Οξεϊα ηδονή παραπτάσα φθάνει. Ό δούλος ελαθεν 1 άποδράς 
 τον δεσπότην. Οι στρατηγοί έγνωσαν 2 τοϊς πο?άταις βοηθεϊν. Ήίήποτε σεαυτόν 
 άπογνως. Ααίδαλος ποιήσας πτέρυγας προςθετάς εξέπτη μετά του Ίκαρου. 
 Σύλλας ένέπλησε την πάλιν φόνου καΐ νεκρών, ώςτε τον Κεραμεικυν 3 αϊματι βυη- 
 ναι. 01 πολέμιοι την γην τεμόντες 4 απέβησαν. Άχρηστον προειδέναι τά μέλ- 
 λοντα. ΟΊ άγαθοι πάντων μέτρον ίσασιν (know wow) έχειν. Πολλοί άν&ρωποι 
 ούτε δίκας ηδεσαν, ούτε νόμους. 
 
 Go away, Ο boy ! The whole town flowed with blood. The bird flew away. 
 The general determined to assist the town. The father pardoned the son. 
 Mayest thou not live licentiously ! Men rejoice to know {aor. part.) the truth. 
 The town was taken by the enemies. Let us not despair. The slave ran away 
 from his master. The boy rejoiced when he saw (aor. part.) the bird fly away 
 (aor. part.). It is well in everything to know (how) to observe moderation. 
 Never praise a man, before (πριν άν, w. subj.) thou knowest him well, (σαφώς). 
 
 § 144. Deponents (§118, Rem.), and Active Verbs whose 
 Fu ture has a Mi ddle fo r m . 
 
 a. List of Deponents Middle most in use. 
 
 'Αγωνίζομαι, to contend, δεξιάομαι, to greet, λωβάομαι, to insult, 
 
 αίκίζομαι, to treat inju- δέχομαι, to receive, μαντεύομαι, to prophesy, 
 
 riously, διακελευομαι, to exhort, μαρτνρομαι, to call to wit- 
 
 αΐνίττομαι, to speak darkly, δωρέομαι, to present, ness, 
 
 αισθάνομαι, to perceive, εγκελεύομαι, to urge, μάχομαι, to fight, 
 
 αΐτιάομαι, to accuse, εντέλλομαι, to command, μέμφομαι, to blame, 
 
 άκέομαι, to heal, επικελευομαι, to urge, μηχανάομαι, to devise, 
 
 ακροάομαι, to hear, εργάζομαι, to work, μιμέομαι, to imitate, 
 
 ακροβολίζομαι, to throw εύχομαι, to pray, μνθέομαι, to speak, 
 
 from afar, to skirmish, ηγέομαι, to go before, μυθο?,ογέομαι, to relate, 
 
 άλλομαι, to leap, θεάομαι, to see, μυκάομαι, to low, 
 
 άναβιώσκομαι, to restore to ίάομαι, to heal, ξυλεύομαι, to gather wood, 
 
 life, or to live again, ίλάσκομαι, to propitiate, ξυλίζομαι, to gather wood, 
 
 άνακοινόομαι, to communi- Ίππάζομαι, to ride, οδύρομαι, to mown, 
 
 cate with, ισχυρίζομαι, to exert one's οίωνίζομαι, to take omens 
 
 Απεχθάνομαι, to be hated, strength, by birds, 
 
 άπολογέομαι, to speak in κανχάομαι, to boast, όλοφνρομαι, to lament, 
 
 defence, κοινολογέομαι, to consult όρχέομαι, to dance, 
 
 όράομαι, to pray, with, δσφραίνομαι, to smell, 
 
 ασπάζομαι, to welcome, κτάομαι, to acquire, παραιτέομαι, to entreat, 
 
 άφικνέομαι, to come, ληΐζομαι, to plunder, παρακελεύομαι, to urge, 
 
 Βιάζομαι, to force, λογίζομαι, to consider, παραμυθέομαι, to encour' 
 
 γίγνομαι, to become, λυμαίνομαι, to maltreat, age, 
 
 1 § 121, 13. 2 determined. 3 a place in Athens. 4 § 119. 
 
§ 144] DEPONENTS PASSIVE. — ACT. VERBS WITH MID. FUT. 177 
 
 παρ'βησιάζομαι, to speak 
 
 freely, 
 πέτομαι, to fly, 
 -πραγματεύομαι, to be busy, 
 προοιμιύζομαί, to make a 
 
 preamble, 
 προφασίζομαι, to offer as 
 
 an excuse, 
 πνν&άνομαι, to inquire, 
 σέβομαι, to reverence, 
 
 σκέπτομαι, to consider, 
 στα&μάομαι, to estimate 
 
 (distance), 
 στοχάζομαι, to aim at, 
 στρατεύομαι, to go to war, 
 στρατοπεδενομαι, to en- 
 camp, 
 τεκμαίρομαι, to limit, 
 τεκταίνομαι, to fabricate, 
 τεχνάομαι, to build, 
 
 νπισχνέομαι, to promise, 
 υποκρίνομαι, to answer, 
 φείδομαι, to spare, 
 φ&έγγομαι, to speak, 
 φιλοφρονέομαι, to treat 
 
 kindly, 
 χαρίζομαι, to show kindness, 
 χρίομαι, to use, 
 ώνέομαι, to buy. 
 
 b. List of Deponents Passive most in use. 
 
 Αλάομαι, to wander, εναντιόομαι, to resist, ηδομαι, to rejoice, 
 
 ενο\ψέομαι, to reflect, κρέμαααι, to hang, 
 
 εννοέομαι, to consider well, μνσάττομαι, to loathe, 
 
 επιμέλομαι and -έομαι, to οίομαι, to suppose, 
 
 take care, προ-&νμέομαι, to desire, 
 
 επίσταμαι, to know, σέβομαι, to reverence, 
 
 άχ&ομαι, to be displeased, 
 βονλομαι, to wish, 
 βρνχάομαι to roar, 
 δέομαι, to want, 
 διανοέομαι, to think, 
 
 δνναμαι, to be abie (Mid. ενλαβέομαι, to be cautious, 
 Aor. only Epic), 
 
 Remark. "Αγαμαι, to wonder, α'ιδέομαι, to reverence, αμείβομαι, to exchange, 
 άμιλλάομαι, to contend, αποκρίνομαι, to answer, άπο7^ογέομαι, to apologize, άρνέο- 
 μαι, to deny, άνλίζομαι, to lodge, διαλέγομαι, to converse with, έπινόεομαι, to reflect 
 upon, ?.οιδορέομαι, to reproach, μέμφομαι, to blame, ορέγομαι, to desire, πειράομαι, to 
 try, προνοέομαι, to foresee, φιλοφρονέομαι, to treat kindly, and φιλοτιμέομαι, to be 
 ambitious, have both a Mid. and Pass, form for their Aorist. Of these, arauai, 
 αΐδέομαι, άμιλλάομαι, άρν έομαι, δια?.έγομαι and φιλοτιμέομαι, are more frequently 
 in the Pass. Aor. ; on the contrary, αμείβομαι, αποκρίνομαι, άπολογέομαι, μέμ- 
 φομαι and φιλοφρονέομαι, more frequently in the Mid. Aor. 
 
 c List of Active Verbs most in use with a Middle Future. 
 
 Άγνοέω,* not to know, 
 άδω,ϊ to sing, 
 άκονω,ϊ to hear, 
 αλαλάζω,* to cry out, 
 άμαρτάνω,^ to miss, 
 απαντάω,^ to meet, 
 απολαύω,^ to enjoy, 
 άρπάζω,'ϊ to seize, 
 βαδίζω, to go, 
 
 βαίνω, to go, 
 βιόω, to live, 
 βλέπω,* to see, 
 βοάω,] to cry out, 
 γελάω,ϊ to laugh, 
 γηράσκω, to grow old, 
 γιγνώσκω, to know, 
 δάκνω, to bite, 
 δαρ&άνω, to sleep, 
 
 δεΐσαι, to fear, 
 διδράσκω, to run away, 
 διώκω,* to pursue, 
 εγκωμιάζω, to praise, 
 ειμί, to be, 
 επαινέω,* to praise, 
 επιορκέω, to perjure one's 
 
 self, 
 εσΰίω, to eat, 
 
 * Also with Put. Act., in writers of the best period. — Te. 
 t Also with Put. Act., but only in the later writers. Comp. Post. Gr. Gram., 
 $ 82, VI. D, c). The forms of the Put. Mid., however, are to be preferred.— Tb. 
 
178 
 
 ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. 
 
 [§ 144. 
 
 ■&αυμάζω,* to wonder, 
 ■&έω,* to run, 
 ■&ηράω, ΰ-ηρεύω,* to hunt, 
 ΰιγγάνω, to touch, 
 ΰνήσκω, to die, 
 ΰρώσκω, to leap, 
 κάμνω, to labor, 
 κλαίω,] to weep, 
 κλέπτω, to steal, 
 κολάζω,* to punish, 
 κωμάζω,* to indulge in fes- 
 tivity, 
 λαγχάνω, to obtain, 
 λαμβάνω, to take, 
 λιχμάω, to lick, 
 ααν&άνω, to learn, 
 
 νεω, to swim, 
 
 οίδα, to know, 
 
 ο'ιμώζω,* to lament, 
 
 ολολύζω,* to howl, 
 
 δμ,νυμι,] to swear, 
 
 όράω, to see, 
 
 παίζω, to sport, 
 
 πάσχω, to suffer, 
 
 πηδάω, to leap, 
 
 πίνω, to drink, 
 
 πίπτω, to fall, 
 
 πλέω, to sail, 
 
 πνέω, to blow (but συμ- 
 
 πνεύσω), 
 πνίγω,] to strangle, 
 πο-&έω,* to desire, 
 
 προςκυνέω,* to reverence, 
 βέω, to flow, 
 σιγάω, to be silent, 
 σιωπάω,] to be silent, 
 σκώπτω, to sport, 
 σπουδάζω, to be zealous, 
 σνρίττω, to pipe, 
 τίκτω,* to produce, 
 τρέχω, to run, 
 τρώγω, to gnaw, 
 τυγχάνω, to obtain, 
 τωϋ-άζω, to rail at, 
 φεύγω, to flee, 
 φΰάνω,] to come before? 
 χάσκω, to gape, 
 χω ρέω,* to contain. 
 
SYNTAX 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 ELEMENTS OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 
 § 145. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject, — Predicate• 
 
 1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the expression of 
 a thought in words ; e. g. το ρόδον >&άλλει, the rose blossoms, 6 άν- 
 θρωπος θνητός εστίν, το καλόν ρόδον βάλλει εν τφ τον πατρός κηπφ. 
 Every thought must contain two parts or ideas related to each 
 other and combined into one whole, viz. the idea of an action and 
 of an object from which the action proceeds. The former is called 
 the predicate, the latter, the subject. The subject, therefore, is that 
 of which something is affirmed, the predicate, that which is affirmed 
 of the subject ; e. g. in the sentences, το ρόδον θάλλει, 6 άνθρω- 
 πος θνητός εστίν,— το ρόδον and ό άνθρωπος are the subjects, θάλ- 
 λει and θνητός εστίν, the predicates. 
 
 2. The Greek language expresses the relation of ideas partly by 
 inflection ; e. g. το ρόδον θάλλ-ε ι, ό στρατιώτης μάχ-ε τ α ι, οι στρα- 
 τιώται μάχ-ονται; partly by separate words; e. g. the tree is 
 green, ό άνθρωπος θνητός εστίν. In this last example, the notion 
 or idea contained in άνθρωπος is connected by εστίν to that con- 
 tained in θνητός. 
 
 3. The subject is either a substantive, — a substantive-pronoun or 
 numeral^— an adjective or participle used as a substantive, — an ad- 
 verb which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article, — a pre- 
 position with the Case it governs, — or an infinitive. Indeed, every 
 word, letter, syllable or combination of words may be considered as 
 a neuter substantive, and hence can become a subject, the neuter 
 article being usually prefixed. 
 
 t To βόδον ΰάλλει, the rose blossoms. Έγώ γράφω. Ύρεϊς ηλΰον. Ό 
 σοφός ευδαίμων εστίν, the wise man is happy. Ο i πάλαι ανδρείοι ήσαν, the an- 
 cients were courageous. Οί περί Μ,ιλτ ιάδην καλώς έμαχέσαντο. Τ δ δί 
 άσ κ ε ιν καλόν εστίν. Ύ ό ει σύνδεσμος εστίν, the ει is a conjunction. 
 
180 SYNTAX. SUBJECT. PREDICATE. AGREEMENT. [§ 146. 
 
 4. The subject is in the nominative. 
 
 Rem. 1. The subject is in the Ace. in the construction of the Ace. with the 
 Inf., see § 172. In indefinite and distributive designations of number, the sub- 
 ject is expressed by a preposition and the Case it governs ; e.g. είς τ έτταρας 
 ηλϋον, about four came ; so καΰ' έκαστους, singuli, κατά έϋνη, singuhe gentes. 
 
 Rem. 2. In the following cases, the subject is not expressed by a separate 
 word: 
 
 (a) When the subject is a personal pronoun, it is not expressed, unless it is 
 particularly emphatic ; e. g. -γράφω, -γραφείς, γράφει. 
 
 (b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- 
 priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject being 
 in a measure contained in the predicate, or, at least, indicated by it and hence 
 readily known ; e. g. έπέι οι πολέμιοι άνήλΰον, ε κ ή ρ υ ξ ε (sc. ό κήρυξ, the lier- 
 ald proclaimed) τοϊ,ς "Έλλησι παρασκευάσασ-&αι. So σημαίνει rfj σάλπιγγι, 
 έσάλπιγξεν (sc. δ σαλπικτής, the trumpeter gives the signal with the trumpet). So 
 also ν ε ι, it rains, νίφ ει, it snows, βροντά, it thunders, άστ ράπτει, sc. ό 
 Ζευς, it lightens, are to be explained. 
 
 (e) When the subject is easily supplied from the context•, thus, e. g. in such 
 expressions as φασί, λέγ ου σ ι, etc., the subject αν&ρωποι is regularly omitted. 
 
 Rem. 3. The indefinite pronouns, one, they, are commonly expressed by τις, 
 or by the third Pers. PI. Act., e. g. λέγουσι, φασί, or by the third Pers. Sing. 
 Pass., e. g. λέγεται, or by the personal Pass., e. g. φιλονμαι, φιλτ/, they love me\ 
 you, etc., or by the second Pers. Sing., particularly of the Opt. with a v, e. g. 
 φαίης αν, d'ueas, you may say, one may, can say. 
 
 5. The predicate is either a verb, e. g. τό ρόδον -& ά λ λ ε ι, or an 
 adjective, substantive, numeral or pronoun in connection with είναι. 
 In this relation είναι is called a copula, since it connects the adjec- 
 tive or substantive with the subject so as to form one thought ; e. g. 
 το ρόδον καλόν εστίν. Κνρος ην β ασιλεν ς. Σν .ή σ & α 
 πάντων πρώτος. Οι άνδρες ήσαν τρεις. Τούτο το πράγμα 
 ί σ τ ι τ ό δ ε. Without the copula είναι, these sentences would stand 
 το ρόδον — καλόν. Κνρος — βασιλεύς, etc., and of course would 
 express no thought. 
 
 Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish the use of είναι, when it expresses a 
 distinct independent idea of itself, that of being, existence, abiding, etc., e. g. έστι 
 •&εός, there is a God, God is, exists, from the use of the same word as a copula. 
 In the former sense it can be connected with an adverb ; e. g. Σωκράτης ήν ά ε I 
 συν τοις νέοις ; καλώς, κακώς έστιν, it is well, ill, etc. 
 
 § 146. Agreement. 
 1. The finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in number 
 and person; the predicative* or attributive adjective, participle, 
 
 * When the adjective belongs to the predicate, and is used in describing what 
 is said of the subject, it is called predicative ; but when it merely ascribes some 
 
§ 146. J SYNTAX. — AGREEMENT. 181 
 
 pronoun or numeral, and the predicative substantive, or the sub- 
 stantive in apposition (when it denotes a person), agree with the 
 subject in gender, number and Case (nominative). 
 
 Έ} ώ γράφω, σύ γράφεις, ούτος γράφει. Ό άνθρωπος θνητός εστίν. Ή αρετή 
 καλή έστιν. Ύό πράγμα αίσχρόν έστιν. Οι Έ?.ληνες πολεμικώτατοι ι/σαν. Ό 
 κάλος παϊς, η σοφή γννή, τό αικρον τέκνον. Κϋρος ην βασιλεύς ; here the pre- 
 dicate βασιλεύς is masculine, because the subject is masculine. Ύόμνρις ην 
 βασί?.εια ; here the predicate is feminine, because the subject is feminine. Κύ- 
 ρος, <ό βασι?*,εύς, Ύόμνρις, ii 3ασί?,εια 
 
 2. As Είναι, when a copula, takes two nominatives, viz. one of 
 the subject and one of the predicate, so also the following verbs, 
 which do not of themselves express a complete predicative idea, 
 take two nominatives : νηάοχειν, to be, γίγνεα&αι, to become, qivvai, to 
 arise, spring from, to be, ανξάνεσ&αι, to grow, μενειν, to remain, κα- 
 ταστηναι (from κα&ίστημι), to stand, δοκεΐν, ίοικεναι and φαίνεσ&αι, 
 to appear, δηλονσ&αι, to show one's self, καλεΐσ&αι, όνομάζεσ&αι and 
 λε'γεσϋ -cu, to be named, άκονειν, to hear one's self called, to be named 
 (like Lat. audire), αϊρεΐσ&αι, άποδείκννσϋ at and κρίνεσ&αι, to be 
 chosen something, νομίζεϋ-αι, to be considered something, and other 
 verbs of this nature. 
 
 Ό Κύρος έγέν ετο βασιλεύς των ΤΙερσών, Cyrus became king of the Persians. 
 Αιά τούτων b Φίλιππος ηύξήθη μέγας, by these means Philip grew great. Άλ- 
 κιβιάδης ή ρ ε θ η στρατηγός. Άντι φίλων και ξένων νύν κόλακες καϊ θεοΐς 
 έχθροι άκούονσιν (audiunt), instead of friends, etc., they (hear themsdves called) 
 are called fiatterers and enemies of the gods. 
 
 Remark. Instead of the second Nom., several of these verbs are also con- 
 nected with adverbs ; then they express a complete predicative idea ; e. g. τό 
 άνθος καλώς αυξάνεται, the flower grows beautifully. Thus, the verbs γίγ- 
 νεσθαι and φύν α ι particularly, are connected with the adverbs οίχα, χωρίς, 
 έκάς, ϊγγνς, αλις ; e. g. τοΐς 'Αθηναίων στρατηγοϊς έγίγνοντο όίχα αϊ γνώμαι, 
 the views of the Athenian commanders were divided; τά πράγματα ούτω πέφν- 
 κ εν, the affairs were of such a nature. 
 
 LXXV. Exercises for Translation from English into Greek. 
 (§§ 145 and 146). 
 
 Piety is the beginning of every virtue. To mortal men God is (a) refuge. 
 The wise strive after virtue. Learning (to learn) is agreeable both to the youth 
 and to the old man. Before the door stood about four thousand soldiers. The 
 (maxim), know (aor.) thyself, is everywhere useful. The general commanded 
 (aor.) (them) to hold (their) spears upon (είς) the right shoulder, till the trum- 
 
 quality to the substantive with which it agrees, it is called attributive ; e. g. in 
 the expression ό αγαθός άνηρ (the good man), αγαθός is attributive, but in ό άνήρ 
 έστι αγαθός (the man is good), it is predicative. — Tr. 
 
 16 
 
182 SYNTAX. — AGREEMENT. [§ 147. 
 
 peter should give a signal (with) the trumpet. The herald made {am.) procla- 
 mation to the soldiers to prepare themselves for (εις) battle. We admire brave 
 soldiers. Without self-control we can practise (aor.) nothing good. Semiramis 
 was queen of Assyria. Socrates always passed his time in public. After (μετά, 
 w. ace.) death, the soul separates from the irrational body. It is (= has itself) 
 difficult to understand (aor.) every man thoroughly. The Loves are perhaps 
 called archers on this account, because the beautiful wound even from a dis- 
 tance. Tyrtaeus, the poet, was given (aor.) by the Athenians to the Spartans 
 as a general. The Lacedaemonians were (καταστήναι) the authors of many ad- 
 vantages to the Greeks. Minos, who (part.) had ruled very constitutionally and 
 had been careful to do justice, was appointed (aor.) judge in (κατά, w. gen.) 
 Hades. Virtue remains ever unchanged. If (εάν, w. subj.) one, chosen (to be) a 
 general, has subjected (aor.) an unjust and hostile city, shall we call him unjust? 
 
 § 147. Exceptions to the General Rules of Agree- 
 ment. 
 
 (a) The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree with 
 the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Oonstructio χαζά 
 σννεσιν or ad intellectum). 
 
 To πλήΰος έπεβοήΰ-ησαν, the multitude brought assistance ; the verb would reg- 
 ularly be singular here, but is put in the plural, because πλήΰος being a collec- 
 tive substantive, includes many individuals. Ό στρατός απέβαινον. To στρα- 
 τόπεδο» άνεχώρονν. Το μειράκών εστί καλός, the boy is beautiful; here the sub- 
 stantive is neuter, while the adjective is masculine, agreeing with the subject, 
 therefore, only in sense. To γυναικών έστι καλή. 
 
 (b) When the subject is not to be considered as something defi- 
 nite, but as a general idea or statement, the predicative adjective 
 is put in the neuter singular, without any reference to the gender 
 and number of the subject. In English we sometimes join the 
 word thing or something with the adjective, and sometimes translate 
 the adjective as if it agreed with the substantive. 
 
 Ουκ άγ αΰ-όν πολυκοιρανία• εις κοίρανος έστω, a plurality of riders is 
 not a good thing, etc. Αι αετ άβολα ι λνπηρόν, changes are troublesome. Ή 
 μοναρχία κράτ ιστον. 
 
 Rem. 1. When the predicate is a demonstrative pronoun, it agrees with the 
 subject in gender, number and Case, as in Latin ; e. g. Ούτος έστιν ό άνήρ, this 
 is the man. Αϋτη εστί πηγή καϊ αρχή πάντων των κακών. Ύοϋτό έστι τό άν- 
 &ος. Yet the Greeks very often put the demonstrative in the neuter singular, 
 both when it is a subject and predicate ; e. g. Ύοϋτό εστίν ή δικαιοσύνη, 
 this is justice. Ύοϋτό έστι πηγή και αρχή γενέσεως 
 
 (c) Verbal adjectives in -τός and -τ&ος frequently stand in the 
 neuter plural instead of the singular, when they are used imperson- 
 ally like the Latin verbal in -dum. 
 
§ 147.] SYNTAX. AGREEMENT. 183 
 
 Πίστα έστι τοις φ'Λοις, we must trust friends, instead of πισιον έστι. So 
 also, when the subject is contained in an infinitive or in a whole clanse, where 
 in English we use the pronoun it ; e. g. Την πεπρωμένην μοΐραν άδυν ατά 
 έστιν άποφυγεϊν και &εώ, it is impossible even for God to escape the destined fate. 
 Δηλά έστιν (it is evident) ότι δεϊ ένα γέ τίνα ημών βασιλέα γενέσ&αι. 
 
 (d) A subject in the neuter plural is connected with a verb in the 
 singular. 
 
 Τά ζώα τρέχει. Τά πράγματα έστι κα?φ. Κακοϋ ανδρός δώρα 
 όνησιν ουκ έχει. 
 
 Rem. 2. When the subject in the neuter plural denotes persons or living be- 
 ings, the verb is often put in the plural, to render the personality more promi- 
 nent; e. g. τά τέ?ιη (magistracy, magistrates) τους στρατιώτας εξέπεμψαν. This 
 is also the case, when the idea of individuality or plurality is to be made particu- 
 larly prominent ; e. g. Φανερά ήσαν υποχωρούντων και Ιππων και άν&ρώπων 
 Ιχνη πολλά (many tracks appeared). 
 
 (e) A dual subject is very often connected with a plural predi- 
 cate. 
 
 Avo άνδρε έ μ αχ έσαντ ο. Άδελφώ δυο ήσαν καλοί. 
 
 Rem. 3. The dual is not always used, when two objects are spoken of, but 
 only when they are of the same kind, either naturally connected, e. g. πόδε, 
 χεϊρε, ώτε, two feet, etc., or such as are considered as standing in a close and 
 mutual relation, e. g. άδελφώ, two brothers. 
 
 Rem. 4. A feminine substantive in the dual has its attributive in the mascu- 
 line dual; e. g. άμφω τώ πόλεε ; here τώ (masculine) agrees with πόλεε (femi- 
 nine), and so in the other examples. Τ ώ γνναϊκε. Άμφω τον τ ω τ ω ημέρα. 
 Τ ο ι ν γενεσέοιν. Τ οντω τώ τέχνα. 
 
 (f ) When the predicate is a superlative, and stands in connection 
 with a genitive, the gender of the superlative is commonly like that 
 of the subject, as in Latin, more seldom like that of the genitive. 
 
 Φ # όν ο ς χαλέ π ώτ ατός έστι τών νόσων. Ό ήλιος πάντων λαμπρό- 
 τατος έστιν. Sol omnium rerum lucidissimus est 
 
 LXXVI. Exercises on § 147. 
 The army of the enemy retired. The people of the Athenians believe that 
 {ace. w. inf.) Hipparchus, the tyrant, was killed (aor.) by Harmodius and Aris- 
 togiton. Envy is something hateful. Drunkenness is something burdensome 
 to men. Inactivity is indeed sweet, but inglorious and base. Beautiful indeed 
 is prudence and justice, but difficult and laborious. To learn from (παρά, w. 
 gen.) (our) ancestors, is the best instruction. Together with the power, the pride 
 of man also increases. Money procures men friends and honors. Afflictions 
 often become lessons to men. The misfortunes of neighbors serve (= become) 
 as (εις) a warning to men. The Athenian (of the Athenians) courts of justice, 
 misled by a plea, often put to death the innocent (= not doing wrong), while 
 'δέ) they often acquitted the guilty (= wrong-doers), either moved to sympathy 
 
184 SYNTAX. — AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. [§ 147 b . 
 
 (sympathizing) by (εκ) the plea, or because the guilty had spoken (aor.) grace- 
 fully. The two long roads lead to (εις) the city. The Spartan youths, in the 
 streets, kept their hands within the mantle. The enemy possessed themselves of 
 two great and magnificent cities. The eagle is the swiftest of all birds. Virtue 
 is the fairest of all blessings. 
 
 § 147b. Agreement when there are several subj ects. 
 
 1. Two or more subjects require the verb or copula to be plural. 
 When the subjects are of like gender, the adjective is of the same 
 gender, and in the plural ; but when the subjects are of a different 
 gender, then, in case of persons, the masculine takes precedence of 
 the feminine and neuter, and the feminine of the neuter ; but in 
 case of things, the adjective is often in the neuter plural, without 
 reference to the gender of the substantives. 
 
 Ό Φίλιππος καϊ 6 'Αλέξανδρος πολλά και •&αυιιαστά έργα ά π ε δ ε ί- 
 ξαντο. Ό Σωκράτης και ό ΐίλάτων ήσαν σοφοί. Ή μ. η τ η ρ καϊ 
 η ϋ-υγ άτη ρ ήσαν καλαί. Ή ό ργη και ή ασνν ε σ ι α ε ισΐ κ α και. 
 Ό ά ν η ρ καϊ ή γυνή άγαΰ-οί είσιν. Ή γ υ ν η και τα τέκνα άγα&αί 
 είσιν. Ώο είδε πατέρα τε και μητέρα και αδελφούς και την εαυτού γ υ- 
 ν αϊ κ α αιχμαλώτους γεγενημένους, έδάκρυσεν. Ή αγορά και το πρυ- 
 ταν εΐον ΤΙαρίω λί&ω ησκη μένα ην. Α Ί-& ο ι τε καϊ πλίν&ο ι καϊ ξύλα 
 καϊ κέραμος ατάκτως έρριμμένα ούδεν χρήσιμα εστίν. 
 
 Εεμ. 1. Sometimes the verb and adjective agree, in form, with the nearest 
 subject ; this is particularly the case, when the predicate precedes the subjects ; 
 e. g. φιλεϊ σε 6 πατήρ και ή μητηρ and άγαϋ-ός εστίν ό πατήρ καϊ η μήτηρ. 
 Sometimes where the verb follows different subjects, it agrees with the first, the 
 other subjects being thereby made subordinate ; e. g. β α σ ι λ ε ύ ς δε καϊ οι συν 
 αυτώ δ ιώκων ε ίσπίπτ ε ι. 
 
 2. When several subjects of different persons are connected, the 
 first person takes precedence of the second and third, but the second 
 of the third ; and the verb is put in the plural. 
 
 Έγώ καϊ σύ γράφομεν, ego et tu scribimus ; εγώ και εκείνος γράφομεν, ego et ille 
 scribimns ; εγώ καϊ σύ καϊ εκείνος γράφομεν, ego et tu et ille scribimus ; σύ καϊ εκεί- 
 νος γράφετε, tu et ille scribitis ; εγώ και εκεϊνοι γράφομεν, σύ και εκείνοι γράφετε, 
 ημείς καϊ εκείνοι γράφομεν, νμεΐς καϊ εκείνος γράφετε. 
 
 Εεμ. 2. In addition to a subject-nominative which expresses the idea of plu- 
 rality, there is often one or more denoting the parts of which the first is com- 
 posed (σχήμα* καΰ' όλον καϊ μέρος) ; e. g. ο ι στρατιώται ο Ι μεν ηναντιώ- 
 ΰησαν τοις πολεμίοις, οι δ ε άπέφυγον, some of the soldiers withstood the enemy, 
 but the others fled; here στρατιώται denoting the whole is in the Nom., instead of 
 being in the Gen. and governed by its parts οι μέν and ol δέ. 
 
 * A construction by which the whole is named, and a part is put in apposi- 
 tion with the whole, instead of the whole being in the Gen. and governed by a 
 word denoting a part. — Tr. 
 
§ 148.] SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 185 
 
 LXXVII. Exercises on § 147*. 
 Socrates and Plato were very wise. J^isus and Euryalus were friends (in) 
 word and deed. Wisdom and health were always the greatest blessings of man 
 (plur.). The Spartan Cleonymus and Basias (an) Arcadian, two gallant men, 
 died in the battle fought against (προς) the Carduchians. Shame and fear are 
 innate (in) man. I and my brother love thee. You and your friends have 
 done me many favors. The citizens ran in different directions, every one to 
 (επί, w. ace.) his own. When (my) friends saw me, they embraced me, one on 
 one side, the other on the other.* (Of) the citizens, some rejoiced over (επί, w. 
 dnt.) the victory of Philip, others mourned. 
 
 §148. The Article. 
 
 1. The substantive as a subject, as well as in every other relation, 
 takes the article 6, ή, τό, the, when the speaker wishes to represent 
 an object as a definite one, and to distinguish it from others of the 
 same kind. The substantive without the article represents the idea 
 in a merely general and indefinite manner, without any limitation ; 
 e. g. άν&ρωπος, man, i. e. an individual or some one of the race of 
 men ; but the substantive with the article makes the object definite, 
 indicating that such was the view taken of it by the speaker ; e. g. 
 6 άν&ρωπος, i. e. the man whom I am considering, or have in view, 
 and whom I consider as a different individual from the rest of men. 
 So φιλοσοφία, philosophy in general, ή φιλοσοφία, philosophy as a 
 particular science, or a particular branch of philosophy. 
 
 Rem. 1. The article is also used, where one object is to be distinguished from 
 or contrasted with, another of a different kind ; e. g. πόλεμος ουκ εστίν άνευ 
 κίνδυνων, war is not ivithout danger; but δ πόλεμος ουκ άνευ κίνδυνων, ή δ 1 
 ειρήνη ακίνδυνος ; here πόλεμος takes the article because it is contrasted with 
 
 lipfjVTj. 
 
 Rem. 2. The substantive, as a predicate, usually omits the article, the idea 
 conveyed by it being mostly of a general nature ; e. g. ν ύ ξ ή ήμερα έγένετο, 
 day became night, έμπορων δ' ήν το χωρίον, and the place was an emporium ; 
 — but if the predicate denotes something definite, before mentioned or well 
 known, it takes the article ; e. g. συνεβάλλετυ τον Ό ρ έστην τοϋτον είναι, 
 lie concluded that this was Orestes (the one before mentioned). 
 
 2. Hence the article is also used to denote the whole compass of 
 the idea, since the speaker considers an object as the representative 
 of all others of the same class, and therefore as expressing a definite 
 whole ; e. g. 6 avft ρωπος Φνητό** εστίν, man (i. e. all men) is 
 mortal; η ανδρεία καλή εστίν, i. e. everything which is under- 
 
 * άλλος άλλοΰεν, alius aliunde. 
 
 16* 
 
186 SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. [§ 148. 
 
 stood by the term ανδρεία ; — τ 6 γ άλα εατϊν ήδυ, milk is sweet, i. e. 
 milk in general, all milk. 
 
 Eem. 3. When the English indefinite article a or an, denotes merely the class 
 to which a particular thing belongs, the Greek uses the substantive alone with- 
 out the article; e. g. a man, άν&ρωπος. 
 
 Rem. 4. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where according to No 
 1, it would be used. Such omission occurs, (a) with appellations denoting kin- 
 dred or relationship, and the like, where the definite relation is obvious without 
 the article; e. g. πατήρ, μήτηρ, υιός, αδελφός, παϊδες, γονείς, άνήρ {husband), 
 ■γυνή {wife), etc. ; — (b) when two or more independent substantives are united to 
 form one whole ; e. g. παϊδες και γυναίκες, πόλις καΧ οΐκίαι ; — (c) when common 
 nouns are used as, or instead of, proper nouns ; e. g. ήλιος, ουρανός, άστυ, used, 
 of Athens, πόλις, of a particular city, known from the context, γη, of a particular 
 country, βασιλεύς, of a particular king, commonly the king of Persia; — (d) when 
 common nouns which are usually specific, and would take the article, are used 
 in an abstract sense ; e. g. ήγεϊσ&αι ϋεούς, to believe in gods, εφ' 'ίππου ίέναι, to 
 ride horse-back, έπι δεϊπνον έλϋεΐν, to come to supper, i. e. to eat. 
 
 Rem. 5. Abstract nouns, the names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and 
 vices, generally omit the article, when they are taken in their abstract sense ; 
 e. g. αλήϋ-εια, σωτηρία, σωφροσύνη, δικαιοσύνη, επιστήμη, ευσέβεια, ασέβεια, 
 κακία ; hut if one class of abstracts is to be distinguished from another, or the 
 whole compass of a science, etc. is intended, the article is used. 
 
 3. The article very often takes the place of the possessive pro- 
 noun, when it is connected with such substantives as naturally be- 
 long to a particular person mentioned in the sentence. 
 
 Οι γονείς τα, τέκνα στέργουσιν, parents love theik children. Κϋρός τε κατα- 
 πηδήσας από του άρματος τ bv ■& ω ρ ακα ένέδυ και άναβάς έπι τόν ίπ- 
 πον τα παλτά εις τάς χείρας έλαβε, C. having leaped down from HIS 
 chariot, put on his breast-plate, etc. 
 
 Rem. 6. The article is often used in a distributive sense ; the article is here to 
 be explained by its giving individuality to the noun with which it is connected ; 
 e. g. ό Κύρος ύπισχνεϊται δώσειν τρία ήμιδαρεικά του μηνός τω στρατιώ- 
 ττι, C. promises to give three haif-Darics, a (each) month to each soldier. 
 
 4. The article, being originally a demonstrative pronoun, is of- 
 ten used where an object, at first stated indefinitely, is named a 
 second time ; for the same reason it is used, when the speaker points 
 to an object. 
 
 Ό Κύρος δίδωσιν αντφ μνρίονς δαρεικούς. Ό δε λαβών το χρυ σίον, C. 
 ices him ten thousand Darics; but he taking the (that) money — , where χρυσίον 
 has the article, because it refers to the preceding δαρεικούς. ξενίας αγώνα έ&η- 
 κε • έ&εώρει δε τον αγώνα Κύρο;. 'Υπέρ της κώμης γήλοφος ήν, τών δε Ιπ- 
 πέων ό λόφος ένεπλήσΰ-η, where ζόφος is the same as the preceding γήλοφος. 
 Φέρε μοι, ώ παϊ, τό βιβλίο ν, the (that) book. 
 
 5. Proper names as such, i. e so far as in themselves they denote 
 
§ 148.] SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 187 
 
 individuals, do not take the article ; e. g. Σωκράτης εφη. Ένικησαν 
 Θηβαίοι ^ί ακ ε δαιμόνιους. Μη οιεσΟε μήτε Κερσοβλ έπ- 
 την ΰπερ Χ ε ρ ρ ο ν η σο ν, μήτε Φίλιππο ν υπέρ Λμφιπό- 
 λεως πολεμησειν, όταν ίδωσιν ημάς μηδενός των αλλότριων εφιεμέ- 
 νονς. They, however, take it, when they have been mentioned and 
 are afterwards referred to, or even when they have not been pre- 
 viously mentioned, if they are to be represented as well known ; 
 e. g. Λπο του Ίλισ σ οΰ λε'γεται ο Β ορέ ας την Ώ ρ ε ί&υ ιαν 
 άρπάσαι. 
 
 Εεμ. 7. Proper names, even when an adjective agrees with them, do not com- 
 monly have the article ; e. g. σοφός Σωκράτης, the wise Socrates. The article is 
 also omitted with a proper name, when a noun in apposition having the article, 
 follows it ; e. g. Κ ρ ο ϊ σ ο ς, ό τών Ανδών βασιλεύς. The names of rivers are 
 usually placed, as adjectives, between the article' and the word ποταμός ; e. g. 
 ό ΊΙηνεώς ποταμός, the river Peneus. 
 
 6. When adjectives and participles are used as substantives, they 
 regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The English, in 
 such a case, either employs an adjective, used substantively, e. g. 
 οι άγαϋ-οί, the good, or a substantive, e. g. το άγα&όν, the advantage, 
 the good, 6 λέγων, the speaher, or resolves the participle, which is 
 equivalent to εκείνος ος (is, qui), by he, who, which, etc. In Greek, 
 this use of the participle, in all its tenses, is very frequent ; e. g. 
 Ό πλείστα ω φ ελών (= εκείνος ος ωφελεί) το κοινον μεγίστων 
 τιμών άξιοϋται, he ioho (whoever) benefits the state most, is worthy of 
 the highest honors ; 6 πλείστα ω φ ελησ ας (= εκείνος ος ωφέλησε) 
 το κοινον μ. τ. ηξιώσατο ; 6 πλ. ώφελησων τ. κ. μ. τ. άξιω&η- 
 σεται. Πολλούς έξομεν τους ετοίμως συναγωνιζόμενους. But if 
 the adjectives are to express only a part of the whole, the article is 
 omitted ; e. g. κακά καΐ αισχρά επραξεν. The infinitive also has 
 the article, when it is to be considered as a substantive ; e. g. το 
 γράφειν. 
 
 7. jL λ λ ο ι signifies others, οι άλλοι, the others, the rest, i. e. all 
 besides those who have been mentioned ; η άλλη Ελλάς, the rest of 
 Greece. "Ετερος, alter, takes the article (6 ε τ ε ρ ο ς), to denote 
 one of two definitely ; so ο ί έτεροι, the one of two parties. Πολ- 
 λοί signifies many, ο ι πολλοί, the many, the multitude, the mass 
 (in distinction from the parts of the whole) ; ο ι πλείονς, the 
 greater part (in distinction from the smaller part of the whole) ; oi 
 πλείστοι, the most (of a preponderance in number). 
 
 8. The Greek can change adverbs of place and time, more sel- 
 dom of quality, into adjectives or substantives, by prefixing the ar- 
 
188 SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. [§148. 
 
 tide. In like manner, a preposition with its Case may be consid- 
 ered as an adjective. 
 
 Ή άνω πόλις, the upper city ; b μετάξι) τόπος, the intervening place ; οί έν&άδε 
 άνϋρωποι or οι εν&άδε ; ό νυν βασιλεύς, οί πάλαι σοφοί άνδρες, οι τότε, ή αύ- 
 ρων (sc. ημέρα), ό αεί, ihe ever enduring ; οί πάνυ των στρατιωτών, the best of tlvt 
 soldiers ; ή άγαν αμέλεια, the too great carelessness ; b προς τους ΤΙέρσας πόλεμος, 
 the Persian war ; ?) εν ΧεβρΌνήσω τυραννΐς. 
 
 9. "When a substantive having the article has attributive exple- 
 tives connected with it, viz. an adjective, adjective pronoun or nu- 
 meral, a substantive in the genitive, an adverb, or a preposition 
 with its Case (No. 8), then in respect to the position of the article, 
 the two following cases must be distinguished : 
 
 (a) The attributive is connected with its substantive so as to ex- 
 press a single idea ; e. g. the good man — the worthy ; the wise man 
 = the sage, and denotes an object which is contrasted with others 
 of the same kind, by means of the accompanying attributive. In 
 this case, the attributive stands either between the article and the 
 substantive, or is placed after the substantive with the article re- 
 peated. 
 
 Ο άγα&ος άνηρ or ό άνηρ b άγαΰός (in opposition to the bad man) ; οί πλού- 
 σιοι πολϊται or οί πολϊται οί πλούσιοι (in opposition to the poor citizens) ; b 
 των Ά&ηναίων δήμος or ό δήμος b των Άΰ-ηναίων (in opposition to another peo- 
 ple) ; οί νυν άν&ρωποι or οί άν&ρωποι οί νυν ; b προς τους ΤΙέρσας πό7\,εμος or b 
 πόλεμος b προς τους ΤΙέρσας (the Persian in opposition to other wars). Bi all 
 these examples the emphasis is on the attributive : the good man, the rich citizens, 
 the Athenian people, men of the present time, the Persian Avar. 
 
 (b) The attributive is not connected with its substantive to ex- 
 press a single idea, but is to be considered as the predicate of an 
 abridged subordinate clause ; here the attributive is not contrasted 
 with another object of the same kind, but with itself, inasmuch as it 
 is designed to show that an object is to be considered, in respect to 
 a certain property, by itself, without reference to another. The 
 English in this case uses the indefinite article with a singular sub- 
 stantive, but with a plural substantive, omits it entirely. Here the 
 adjective without the article is placed either after the article and 
 substantive, or before the article and substantive. 
 
 Ό άνηρ άγ αϋ- ό ς or άγαΰ ό ς ό άνηρ, a good man = άγα&ός ων, the man 
 who is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good. Οί άν&ρωποι μισονσι τον άνδρα 
 κακόν or κακόν τον άνδρα, they hate a bad man, i. e. they hate the man, inas- 
 much as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, τον κακόν άνδρα or τον άνδρα 
 rbv κακόν, the bad man, in distinction from the good ; hence, τους μεν άγαϋοϋς 
 
5 148.] SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 189 
 
 άν&ρώπονς άγαπώμεν, τονς δε κακοϊς μισονμεν). Ό βασιλεύς ήδέως χαρίζεται 
 τοΐς πολίταις άγαΰοϊς, good citizens, i. e. if or because they are good; (on the 
 contrary, τοις άγα&οϊς πολίταις or τοΐς πολίταις τοις άγαΰοϊς, good citizens, in 
 distinction from bad citizens). Ό &εος την ψνχήν κρατίστην τω άν&ρώπω 
 ένέόνσεν, God has implanted in man a soul, which is the most excellent or -perfect. 
 ΟΙ νπό τον ηλίου καταλαμπόμενοι τα χρώματα μελάντερα εχονσιν, have a blacker 
 skin ; the blackness of the skin is the consequence of the καταλάμπεσϋ-αι υπό 
 τον ηλίον. 
 
 Rem. 8. When a substantive with the article has a genitive connected with it, 
 the position under (a) occurs, only when the substantive with its genitive forms 
 a contrast with another object of the same kind ; e. g. δ των 'Αθηναίων δήμος or 
 ο δήμος δ των Ά&ηναίων (the Athenians, in contrast with another people) ; then 
 the emphasis is on the genitive. On the contrary, the genitive without the arti- 
 cle of the governing substantive is placed before or after that substantive, when 
 this latter substantive expresses a part of what is denoted by the substantive in 
 the genitive, the emphasis then being on the governing substantive ; e. g. δ δή- 
 μος των Άϋηναίων or των Ά&ηναίων δ δήμος, the people, and not the nobility. — 
 When the genitive of substantive-pronouns is used instead of the possessive pro- 
 nouns, the reflexives έαντον, σεαντον, etc. are placed according to No. 9, (a) ; 
 e. g. δ έμαντον πατήρ or ό πατήρ δ έμαντον, etc. ; but the simple personal pro- 
 nouns μον, σον, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the substan- 
 tive which has the article : e.g. δ πατήρ μον or μον δ πατήρ, δ πατήρ σου or σον 
 δ πατήρ, δ πατήρ αντον (αυτής) or αντον (αυτής) δ πατήρ, my, thy, his [ejus) 
 father, δ πατήρ ημών, υμών, αντών or ημών, νμών, αυτών δ πατήρ, our, your, their 
 (eorum) father. In the Sing, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always used. 
 
 Rem. 9. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest 
 with the adjectives άκρο ς, μέσο ς, έσχατος. When the position mentioned 
 under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attribute forms a contrast with other 
 objects of the same kind ; e. g. ή μέση πόλις, the middle city, in contrast with other 
 cities ; ή εσχάτη νήσος, the most remote island, in contrast with other islands. 
 When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) occurs, the substantive 
 is contrasted with itself, since the attributive defines it more clearly. In this 
 last case, we usually translate these adjectives into English by substantives, and 
 the substantives with which they agree as though they were in the genitive ; e. g. 
 έπι τω δρει άκρω or έπ' άκρω τω δρει, on the top of the mountain, properly on the 
 mountain where it is the highest : iv μέση τη πόλει or εν τή πάλει μέση, in the 
 middle oftlie city ; kv έσχατη τή νήσω or εν νήσω τή εσχάτη, on the border or edge 
 of the island. 
 
 Rem. 10. In like manner, the word μόνος has the position mentioned under 
 (a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive; e. g. 
 ό μόνος παις, the only son ; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), 
 when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate ; e. g. Ό παις μόνος or 
 μόνος δ παις παίζει, the boy plays alone (without company) ; whereas δ μόνος παις 
 would mean, the only bo.y plays. 
 
 10. Further ; on the use of liie article with a substantive which has 
 an adjective agreeing with it, the following things are to be noted : 
 
190 SYNTAX. — THE ARTICLE. [§ 148. 
 
 (a) The article is used with a substantive which has an adjective 
 pronoun connected with it, when the object is to be represented as 
 a definite one ; the adjective pronoun is then placed between the 
 article and the substantive, e. g. ό εμος πατήρ; on the contrary, 
 έμος αδελφός, a brother of mine (undetermined which), εμος παις, a 
 child of mine, but ο εμος παις, my child, a definite one, or the only 
 one. 
 
 (b) The article is used with a substantive, with which τοιούτος, 
 τ ο ιό ς δ ε, τοσούτος, τ ηλικον τ ο ς, agree, when the quality 
 or quantity designated by these, is to be considered as belonging to 
 a definite object, or to a whole class of objects previously named. 
 The article commonly stands before the pronoun and substantive ; 
 e. g. ο τοιούτος άνηρ θαυμαστός εστίν, τα τοιαύτα πράγματα καλά 
 εστίν. On the contrary, the article must be omitted, when the ob- 
 ject is indefinite, any one of those who are of such a nature, or are 
 so great ; e. g. τοιούτον άνδρα ουκ αν επαινοίης, you would not praise 
 such a man. 
 
 (c) When πάς, πάντες belong to a substantive, the following 
 cases must be distinguished : 
 
 (a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as 
 altogether a general one, the article is not used ; e. g. πάς άνθρω- 
 πος, every man, i. e. every one to whom the predicate man belongs, 
 πάντες άνθρωποι, all men. Here, πάς in the singular, generally 
 signifies each, every. 
 
 (β) When the substantive to which πάς, πάντες belong, is to be 
 considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes the arti- 
 cle, which is placed according to No. 9, (a) ; e. g. ή πάσα γη, the 
 whole earth, οι πάντες πολϊται, all the citizens without exception, the 
 citizens as a whole or body. This usage is more seldom than that 
 under («). The same construction occurs also with όλος, but it 
 is still more rare than with πάς. Here the singular πάς always has 
 the sense of the whole, all. 
 
 (γ) When πάς is joined with a definite object having the article, 
 merely for the purpose of a more full explanation, but without any 
 special emphasis, its position is according to No. 9, (b) ; e. g. ol 
 στρατιώται είλον το στρατόπεδον άπαν or άπαν το στ ρ α- 
 τ όπεδον; οι στρατιώται πάντες or πάντες οι στρα- 
 τιώται καλώς εμαχεσαντο. This is by far the most frequent use 
 of πάς, πάντες. The word όλος also is usually constructed in the 
 same manner, when connected with a substantive having the arti- 
 
§ 148.] STNTAX.^THE ARTICLE. 191 
 
 cle ; e. g. διά την πολιν ολην or διά ολην την πόλιν, through the whole 
 city, i. e. simply through the city (not δια την ολην πόλιν, which 
 would signify through the whole city). 
 
 (d) When έκαστος, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the 
 article is omitted, as with πάς in the sense of each, every, when the 
 idea expressed by the substantive is considered as altogether gene- 
 ral ; e. g. καϋ•' εκάστην ημεραν, every day, on all days ; when, on 
 the contrary, the idea contained in the substantive is to be made 
 prominent, then the article is joined with it, and is always placed 
 according to No. 9, (b) ; e. g. κατά την ή μ ε' ρ αν εκάστην, or 
 usually καϋ•' εκάστην την ή με ρ αν, every single, individual day. 
 
 (e) When i κ ά τ ε ρ ο ς, each of two, άμφω and άμφότερος, 
 both, belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here 
 only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken of. The 
 article is here placed according to No. 9, (b) ; e. g. επί τ ω ν π λ ε ν- 
 ρών ε κατ ε ρ ω ν or επί εκατ ερων των πλευρών, τα ω τ α, 
 αμφότερα or αμφότερα τά ω τ α, άμφοίν τ οι ν χεροΐν 
 οττοΐν χεροΐν άμφοίν. 
 
 (f ) When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the article 
 is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is indefinite ; e. g. 
 τρεις άνδρες ηλ&ον ; the substantive, on the contrary, takes the ar- 
 ticle which is placed, — (a) according to No. 9, (a), when the sub- 
 stantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea of a uni- 
 ted whole; e. g. ol των βασιλέων οινοχόοι διδόασι τοις τρισι 
 δακτύλοις όχοϋντες τψ φιάλην, \. e. with the three fingers (the 
 three generally used) ; indeed the article is very frequently used, 
 when a preceding substantive without the article, but with a cardi- 
 nal agreeing with it, is afterwards referred to ; — (β) according to 
 No. 9, (b), when the numeral is joined with a definite object merely 
 to define it more explicitly, without any special emphasis; e. g. 
 εμαχεσαντο οι μετά Περικλέους όπλΐται χίλιοι or χίλιοι οι μετά Π. 
 όπλΐται. 
 
 (g) Further; substantives to which the demonstratives ούτος, 
 ο δ ε, εκείνος and αυτός, ipse, belong, also regularly take the 
 article ; but the article has only the position of No. 9, (b) ; e. g« 
 
 ούτος 6 άνηρ or 6 άνηρ ούτος, not ό ούτος άνηρ, 
 ηδε η γνώμη or ή γνώμη ηδε, 
 εκείνος 6 άνηρ or ο άνηρ εκείνος, 
 
 αυτός 6 βασιλεύς or ό βασιλεύς αυτός, but ό αυτός βασιλεύς sig- 
 nifies the same king. 
 
192 SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. [§ 148. 
 
 Eem. 11. The article is omitted, — (a) when the pronoun is the subject, feat 
 the substantive the predicate ; e. g. αύτη εστίν ανδρός αρετή, this is the virtue of 
 the man ; so there is a difference between τούτω τω διδασκάλω χρώνται, they have 
 this teacher, and τούτω διδ. χρ., they have this man as or for a teacher; — (b) when 
 the substantive is a proper name; e. g. ούτος, εκείνος, αυτός Σωκράτης. 
 
 LXXVIII. Exercises on § 148. 
 Avarice is (the) root of every vice. Good education is (the) source and root 
 of excellence. Wisdom is worthy of all diligence. Man has understanding. 
 Strive, Ο young man, after wisdom. A kid, standing upon {επί, w. gen.) a house, 
 reviled, when he saw a wolf passing by, and railed at him. But the wolf said : 
 Ho there,* you do not revile me, but the place. An honorable war is better 
 (more desirable) than a shameful peace. Too great ease is sometimes injurious. 
 In the war against {προς) the Persians, the Greeks showed themselves very 
 brave. The Athenians, persuaded by Alcibiades to strive (aw.) for power upon 
 {κατά, w. ace.) the sea, lost {aor.) even their dominion upon the land. The 
 wealth of Tantalus and the dominion of Pelops and the power of Eurystheus 
 are celebrated by the ancient poets. The halcyon, a sea-bird, utters a mournful 
 cry. Those who were born of the same parents and have grown up in the same 
 house and have been beloved by the same parents, those indeed (δη) are of all the 
 most intimate. Thy mind directs thy body, as it ehooses. I saw thy friend. 
 Through the park in Celaenae flows the river Maeander. On the top of the tree 
 sits a bird. On (κατά, w. ace.) Caucasus is a rock, that has (ρα /f.) a circumference 
 of ten stadia. The city lies on (εν) the edge of the island. The words of those, 
 who (ol av, w. subj.) practise truth, often avail more than the violence of others. 
 If (εάν, w. subj.) such men promise one anything, they perform nothing less than 
 others who immediately give. The earth bears and nourishes everything fair 
 and everything good. Among all men it is an established custom, that (ace. w. 
 mf.) the elder begin every word and work. The generals resolved to put to 
 death (aor.) not only those (the) present, but all the Mytilenaeans. Most of the 
 cities sent, every year, (as) a memorial of former kindness, the first fruits of 
 their grain to the Athenians. Every day, deserters came to Cyrus. Mysus 
 came in, holding in each of his two hands a small shield. The peltastae ran 
 (aor.) to (επί, w. ace.) each of the two wings. When Darius was sick and ex- 
 pecting the end of (his) life, he desired that (ace. w. inf.) both his sons might be 
 present before him (sibi). Both the ears of the slave were bored through. Both 
 the cities were destroyed by the enemy. These works are very agreeable to me. 
 That man is very wise. Dionysius, the tyrant of Syracuse, founded in Sicily a 
 city directly (αυτός) under the mountain of Aetna, and named it Adranum. Ac- 
 cording to these laws the judge decides. This is a sufficient defence. This is 
 true justice. Not only the soldiers, but the king himself fought very bra~ely 
 This they employ (as) a mere pretence. This Charmides recently met me, 
 dancing. Cyrus sent to Cilicia the soldiers, that Menon had, and Menon, the 
 Thessalian, himself. The time of maturity for (dot.) woman is twenty years, 
 for man, thirty years. The three cities lying on (παρά, ψ. ace.) the sea were 
 destroyed by the enemy. 
 
 * Τ Ω ούτος. 
 
149, 150.] STNTAX. — CLASSES OF VERBS. 193 
 
 § 149. Glasses of Verbs. 
 The predicate or verb, in reference to the subject, can be express- 
 ed in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, which 
 are indicated by different forms. 
 
 1. The subject appears as active; e. g. ό παις γράφει, το άν- 
 •&ος & ά λ λ ε ι. — The active form, however, has a two-fold signifi- 
 cation : 
 
 (a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is directed, 
 is in the accusative, and therefore receives the action ; e. g. 
 τνπζω τον παΐδα, γράφω την επιστολψ. — Transitive verb. 
 
 (β) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the subject, 
 e. g. το άν&ος -&άλλει, or when the verb has an object in the 
 Gen. or Bat, or is constructed with a preposition ; e. g. int- 
 &νμώ της αρετής, χαίρω vrj σοφία, έρχομαι εις την πόλιν. — 
 Intransitive verb. 
 
 2. Again, the subject performs an action which is reflected on it- 
 self; hence the subject is at the same time the object of the action, 
 i. e. the actor and the receiver of the action are the same ; e. g. τύπ- 
 τομαι, I strike myself, βουλεύομαι, I advise myself — Middle or re- 
 flexive verb. 
 
 Rem. 1. Ayiien the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects on 
 each other, e. g. τνπ -ovrat, they strike each ether, όίακελενονταί, they encourage 
 each other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb a reciprocal verb. 
 
 3. Lastly, the subject appears as receiving the action ; e. g. ol 
 στρατιώται ντζο των πολεμίων εδιώχ&ησαν, the soldiers were pursued. 
 — Passive verb. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the Greek 
 has only two tenses, viz. the Fut. and Aor. All the other forms are indicated 
 by the Mid., inasmuch as the passive action was considered as a reflexive one. 
 
 § 150. Remarks on the Glasses of Verbs. 
 1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, besides 
 a transitive signification, have also an intransitive or reflexive sense. 
 (Comp. the English expressions, I move [Intrans.] and Imove the hook 
 [Trans.], the tree breaks [Intrans. J and the ice breaks the trees [Trans.], 
 and the Latin vertere, mutare, declinare) ; thus, e. g. άνάγειν, to draw 
 back, regredi, διάγειν, to continue, perstare, ελαννειν, to ride, εμβάλ- 
 λειν and ειςβάλλειν, to fall into or upon, εν.βάλλειν, to spring forth, 
 άτζοκλίνειν, declinare, τρίπειν, like vertere, στρεφειν, like mutare, 
 
 17 
 
194 SYNTAX. — CLASSES OF VERBS. [§ 150. 
 
 εχειν in connection with adverbs, e. g. εν, κακώς εχειν, bene, male 
 se habere, τελενταν, to end, to die, and many others. 
 
 2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form 
 both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive signification, but in 
 the second Aor. an intransitive : 
 
 δύω, to wrap up, first Aor. έδυσα, I wrapped up, second Aor. έδϋν, I went in, down, 
 ϊστημι, to place, " έστησα, I placed, " έστην, I stood, 
 
 <pv ω, to produce, " έφνσα, I produced, " έφνν, I was produced, 
 
 oneXktj,tomalcedry, " (έσκηλa,Poet.Imadedry), " έσκ^Αην, I ivitJwred. 
 
 So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which form 
 both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive signification, but 
 in the second an intransitive : 
 
 εγείρω, to awake, first Pf. εγήγερκα, Ihave awaked, second Pf. έγρήγορα, lam awake, 
 δλλνμι, to destroy, " όλώλεκα, I have destroyed, " δλωλα, I have perished, 
 ■πεί^ω, to persuade, " π επ ε ικα, Ihave persuaded, " π έπο & a, I trust. 
 
 Moreover, some second Perfects of transitive verbs which do not 
 form a first Perf., have an intransitive signification ; e. g. άγννμι, to 
 break, second Perf. εάγα, lam broken, τζήγννμι, to fasten, πέπηγα, 1 
 am fastened or standfast, ρηγννμι, to rend, ερρωγα, lam rent, σήπω, 
 to make rotten, σέσητζα, lam rotten, τήκω, to smelt, e. g. iron, τέζηκα, 
 lam smelted, φαίνω, to show, πέψψα, I appear. 
 
 3. On the signification and use of the middle form, the following 
 are to be noted : 
 
 (a) The middle denotes first, an action which the subject per- 
 forms directly upon itself, where in English we use the active verb 
 and the accusative of the reflexive pronoun ; e. g. τνπτομαι, I strike 
 myself, ετνψάμην, I struck myself, τύψομαι, I shall strike myself. 
 This use of the middle is rare. Here belong the following verbs 
 which are presented in the aorist-form : απέχω, to keep from, άποβ- 
 χεσ&αι, to keep one's self from, to abstain from; άπάγξαι τινά, to 
 strangle, to hang some one, ά7ΐάγξασΰ~αι, to strangle or hang one's self; 
 tvipaaxrai, κόιρασΦαι, to strike one's self; ετζιβαλε'σ{ται τινί, to throw 
 or place one's self upon something, to apply one's self to something ; 
 ττανσασ&αι, to cease (from πάνω, to cause to cease) ; δείξασ-&αι, to 
 show one's self; particularly verbs which express an action per- 
 formed by the subject on his own body : λονσασ&αι (to ivash one's 
 self), νί-ψασΌ-αι, άλείιρασ'&αι, χρίσασ&αι, γνμνάσ&αι, καλνιρασ&αι, 
 κοαμήΰασϋ'αι, ένδνσαα&αι, έκδνσασ&αι, κείρασ&αι, ατεφανώβαϋ&αι, 
 and the like. With the exception of the above verbs and some 
 others, this reflexive relation is commonly expressed by the active 
 form with the accusative of the reflexive pronoun ; e. g. επαινενν 
 
§ 150.] SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. 195 
 
 εαυτόν, άναρταν εαυτόν, to make himself dependent on, αποκρύπ- 
 τει ν εαυτόν, ί&ιζειν εαυτόν, παρέχει ν εαυτόν, άπολύειν εαυτόν, to free 
 himself, άποσφάττειν εαυτόν, άποκτείνειν εαυτόν. Then the middle 
 form has the signification of the passive,, thus, επαινεΐσϋαι, άποκτεί- 
 νεσϋαι, άποσφάζτεσϋαι, laudari, inierfici, jugidari ab alio, and al- 
 so has a passive form for its Aorist and Future. 
 
 Rem. 1. Iii all the middle verbs mentioned above, the action is such as does 
 not necessarily refer to the subject ; for I can, e. g. as well wash another as my- 
 self. But the action may be such as necessarily refers to the subject, inasmuch 
 as the subject which performs the action, must be considered the same as the 
 object which receives the action ; then the middle form expresses the simple 
 idea of an intransitive action ; this is a frequent use of the middle. Here be- 
 long particularly very many verbs which express an act or perception of the 
 mind. Only a very few verbs of this kind have their Aor. with a middle form ; 
 e. g. φυλάξασ&αι, to guard one's self to beware (ψυλάξαι, τινά, to guard any one), 
 βονλενσασ&αι, to advise one's self (βουλενσαί τινι, to advise any one), γενσασ&αι, 
 to taste (Act., to cause to taste) ; on the contrary, most verbs of this kind have 
 their Aor. with a passive form, but have the future in the middle form; e. g. 
 αναμνησϋ-ηναι, άναμνί/σεσ&αι, to remind one's self to remember, rccordari (άναμνη- 
 σαί τίνα, to remind any one), αίσχυν&ήναι, αίσχυνεΐσ&αι, to be ashamed (αίσχΰναί 
 τίνα, to make ashamed), φοβη-ΰηναύ, ψοβησεσϋαι, to fear {ψοβησαί τίνα, to malce 
 afraid, tcrrcre), πορεν&ι/ναι, τζορενσεσΰαι, to go, proJi.cisci (πορενσαί τίνα, to cause 
 one to go, to convey one), περαιω-&ήναι, περαιώσεσΰαι (ττοταμόν), to pass over, (πε- 
 ραιώσαί τίνα, to cause to pass aver, trajicere), κλα-γχ&ηναί, ττ?Μγξεσ-&αι, to wander 
 about, ciramvogari (πλάγξαί τινά, to cause to wander), άνια~&τ/ναι, άνιάσεσΰαι, to 
 afflict one's self, to be grieved (άνιασαί τίνα, to afflict any one) ; also διαλν&ηναι, 
 όιακριϋ-ηναι, to separate one's self, discedere, άπα?ιλαγήναι, abire, κοιμηϋήναι, to 
 sleep, όανΐ/ναι, apparere, παγήναι, to congeal, ετταρϋηναι, to raise one's self and 
 many others. 
 
 (b) In the second place, the middle form denotes an action which 
 the subject performs on an object belonging to itself, on one con- 
 nected with itself or standing in- an intimate relation with it. In 
 English, we commonly use here either a possessive pronoun or a 
 preposition with a personal pronoun ; e. g. τύπτομαι, ετνψάμψ την 
 κεφαλήν, I strike, struck my head (τύπτειν κ., to strike the head of 
 another), λούσασϋ-αι τους πόδας, to wash one's own feet (λούειν τ. π., 
 to vjash the feet of another), άποκρύ'ψασϋ-αι τα εαυτού, to conceal 
 one's own affairs ; καταατρε'ψασ'Ο'αι γην, sibi subjicere terram, to sub- 
 jugate land for one's self άναρτηοασ&σ,ί τίνα, sibi devincire, to make 
 dependent on one's self άπολύσασ&αί τίνα, to loosen j or> one's self to 
 redeem, πορίσ ασχταΐ τι, sibi aliquid comparare, to procure for one's 
 self (ποριζειν τι τινι, alii aliquid comparare, to procure something 
 for another), κτήσασ&αί τι, παρασκευάσασ&αί τι, sibi comparare, to 
 
196 SYNTAX.— CLASSES OP VERBS. [§ 150. 
 
 acquire, prepare for one's self ; άμύνασϋαι τους πολεμίους, propul- 
 sare a se hostes, to keep off the enemy from one's self άπώσασ&αι 
 κακά, a se propulsare mala. This use of the middle is much the 
 most frequent. 
 
 Rem. 2. As the active can be used, when the subject does not itself perform 
 an action, but causes it to be done by another, e. g. 'Αλέξανδρος την πόλιν κα- 
 τέσκαψεν, caused the city to be destroyed, so also can the middle be used to express 
 the same idea, yet with this difference, that with the middle the action always 
 refers in some way to the subject ; e. g. b πατήρ τους παϊδας εδιδάξατο, which 
 either signifies, the father educated his own children, or, if it is clear from the con- 
 text, he caused them to be educated ; αείρασϋ-αί, to shave one!s self or to get one's self 
 shaved ; 'Κργεϊοι εαυτών εικόνας ποιησάμενοί ανέθεσαν εις Αελψούς. ΤΙα- 
 ραβ-έσϋαι, τράπεζαν, to set a table before one's self or have it set before one's self 
 
 Rem. 3. The middle form is often used to express reciprocal actions (see § 149, 
 Rem. 1). This is particularly the case with verbs signifying to contend, vie with, 
 converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or compact ; e. g. μάχεσΰαι, ίο 
 fight with, άμίλλάσ&αι, to contend with, αγωνίζεσ-ϋαι, to strive, δίαλέγεσ-Θ-αι, to con• 
 verse with, άσπάζεσ-&αι, to salute, ταντα σνντίϋ-εσχϊαι,, mutually to agree on tliese 
 points, σπονδάς σιτένδεσϋ -aL or ποιεϊσ•&αι, to make a treaty (σπονδάς ποιεΐν signi- 
 fying to make a libation). So also, where 'the action is not strictly reciprocal, but 
 where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily supposes two persons or two 
 parties, as in questions and answers ; e. g. ττνν&άνεο~&αί and ερεσϋ-αι, to inquire, 
 άποκρίνεσϋ-αί and άπαμείβεσ&αι, to answer, σνμβονλενεσϋ -at, to consult with one, 
 ask his advice, and άνακοίνοϋσ-&αι, to consult one (άνακοινοϋν being especially used 
 of consulting oracles). 
 
 4. From the reflexive signification of the middle, the passive is 
 derived. Here the subject permits the action to be performed by 
 another upon itself. Hence the subject of a passive verb always 
 appears as the receiver of an action ; e. g. μαστιγοϋμαι, ζημ,ιοϋμαι 
 (υπό τίνος), I receive blows, punishment, 1 let myself be struck, pun- 
 ished = I am struck, punished (by some one) ; βλάπτομαι, αδικούμαι, 
 I suffer injury, injustice ; διδάσκομαι, I ht myself be instructed, I 
 receive instruction, I learn, hence υπό τίνος, from some one = do- 
 ceor ab aliquo ; πείϋομαι, I persuade myself, or I permit myself to 
 be persuaded, υπό τίνος, by some one = I am persuaded. 
 
 5. For two tenses, however, viz. the Fut. and Aor., there are 
 separate forms to express a passive action ; yet the Aor. Pass, (see 
 E-em. 2,) of many reflexive and intransitive verbs, is used instead 
 of the middle; all the other tenses are expressed by the middle 
 form. Hence the rule : the Fut. and Aor. Mid. have a reflexive or 
 intransitive signification, not passive, inasmuch as there are sepa- 
 rate forms for the Fut. and Aor. Pass. ; all the other tenses of the 
 middle are used at the same time to cienote the passive also. 
 
§ 150.] SYNTAX. CLASSES OP VERBS. 197 
 
 Rem. 4. The cause or author of the passive condition or state, is expressed hy 
 the preposition νπό with the Gen. ; e. g. Οί στρατίώται ύπο των πολεμίων 
 Ιδιώχ&ησαν, the soldiers were pursued by the enemy. Instead of νττό, προς with 
 the Gen. is used, when at the same time the strong and direct influence of a 
 person, is to be denoted: e. g. άτιμάζεοΰαί, άδικεΐσ&αι προς τίνος; also παρά 
 with the Gen. is used, when the author is. at the same time, to be represented as 
 the person from whose vicinity or neighborhood, or through whose means in- 
 ternal or external the action has come•, hence especially with πέμπεσΰαι, δίδο- 
 σϋαι, ωφε7>.εϊσ&αι, σνλ/,έγεσ&αι, λέγεσ&αι, σημαίνεσ-Βαι, επιδεικνύομαι (demon• 
 strciri) ; e. g. Ό άγγελος επέμψΰη παρά βασιλέως, icas sent from being near the 
 king, by the king. Ή μεγίστη ευτυχία τούτω τω άνδρϊ παρά -Θεών δέδοται. Πολ- 
 λά χρήματα Κίφω παρά των όί'λων συνειλεγμένα ην. 
 
 6. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that not merely the active of 
 transitive verbs governing an accusative, may be changed into the 
 personal passive, but also the active of intransitive verbs governing 
 the Dat. or Gen. 
 
 Φϋ-ον οΰ μαι υπό τίνος, I am envied by some one, invidetur mihi ab aliquo (from 
 φϋονεϊν τινι, invidere alicui). Τίιστευομαι, άπ ιστοϋ μα ι υπό τίνος, credi- 
 tor, non creditur mihi ab aliquo (from πιστευειν, άπιστεΐν tlvl). Και επιβου?..εύ- 
 οντες, και έπιβονλευόμενοι διάξουσι πάντα τον χρόνον (from έπιβονλεύειν 
 τινί). Άσκεϊται το άεί τιμώμενον, αμελείται δε το άτιμαζόμενον (from άμε- 
 λεϊν τίνος). So άρχομαι, κρατούμαι, καταφρονούμαι νπό τίνος 
 (from άρχειν, κρατεΐν, καταφρονεϊν τίνος). 
 
 Rem. 5. Deponents (§ 118, Eem.) are merely verbs, which have only the 
 middle form, and a reflexive or intransitive signification. 
 
 LXXIX. Exercises on §§ 149, 150. 
 
 Cyrus, (as he was) riding by, cried out to Clearchus, to lead the army against 
 (κατά, w. ace.) the centre of the enemy. The river Acheron, which [pan.) flows 
 through Thesprotia, falls into the Acherusian lake. Cp-us died fighting very 
 bravely (aor.). The general commanded the soldiers to go forward, until they 
 should engage (opt. aor.) with Cyrus. In the third year of the Peloponnesian 
 war, Lesbos revolted from the Athenians. The Athenians say that (ace. w. inf.) 
 the first men were born in (= out of) Attica. "When the soldiers slept, the 
 general was awake. Nothing among men, neither good nor evil, has a (§ 148, 
 9, b) steadfast order. The wicked are pale from anxiety, and lean (= dried up) 
 in body. Antisthenes prided himself, that (part.) he always showed his garment 
 torn. Troy was taken by the Greeks. Some came, after (aor. part.) they had 
 exercised and anointed themselves, others, after they had bathed. Beware of 
 the flatterer. Abstain from intercourse with bad men. The youths had adorn- 
 ed themselves with garlands. The Sphinx flung herself from the height. AjaX 
 killed himself in a fit of madness (aor. part.). Those whom (οι av, w. subj.) men 
 fear (aor.) very much, they cannot look in the face, even if they encourage 
 (them).* Xerxes, after the sea-fight at (περί, w. ace.) Salamis, departed (aor.) 
 
 * ουδέ παραμυ^ονμένοις άντιβλέπειν. 
 
 17* 
 
198 SYNTAX. TENSES AND MODES. [§§ 151, 152. 
 
 with a part of his force from Europe. The soldiers separated. Agesilaus tra- 
 velled (aor.) from Sparta into Asia. Ulysses wandered about (aor.), ten years. 
 Ninas, the king of the Assyrians, collected (aor•.) a respectable army, and made 
 (for himself) an alliance with (προς, w. ace.) Ariaeus, the king of the Arabians. 
 The combatants anointed {aor.) their bodies with oil. What thou hast not (μη) 
 laid up (aor. mid.), take not. When Alexander took (aor.) the city of the The- 
 bans, he sold (aor.) all the freemen. The Plataeans repelled the attacks of the 
 Thebans, wherever they met (opt.) (them). Fair is the man, who (part.) has 
 adorned his mind with culture. Beside necessary evils, men themselves provide 
 themselves yet others. The soldiers held (aor.) their shields before them. Al- 
 ways lay up for thyself travelling-money for (εις) old age. If (part.) thou hast 
 acquired reflection, thou wilt neither strive after riches, nor reproach poverty. 
 Intelligent parents have their children educated. Darius caused a stone monu- 
 ment to be made (part, aor.), and erected it (aor.). If we keep off (part.) the 
 enemy, we shall possess the city free and little exposed (pres.) to stratagems. 
 A government that (part.) has been neglected (aor.) and begun to degenerate 
 (taken a transition to [επί, w. ace] the bad), is hard to restore again. Hate 
 flatterers (part.) as deceivers (part.) ; for both injure those who trust them (aor.). 
 It is burdensome to be governed by a bad man. 
 
 §151. Tenses and Modes. 
 
 1. Tenses denote the time of the predicate, which is represented 
 either as present, future or past ; e. g. the rose blooms, will bloom, 
 bloomed. 
 
 2. Modes denote the manner of representing the affirmation con- 
 tained in the predicate ; i. e. the relation of the subject to the pre- 
 dicate is represented either as an actual fact, as a conception, or as 
 a direct expression of the will. The mode which expresses a fact, 
 e. g. the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a 
 conception, e. g. the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive; the mode 
 which denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, e. g. 
 give. 
 
 § 152. A. More Ρ articular View of the Tenses. 
 
 1. The tenses may be divided, in accordance with their form and 
 meaning, into two classes, namely, (a) into Principal tenses, which, 
 both in the Ind. and Subj., always indicate something present or fu- 
 ture ; — (b) into Historical tenses, which, in the Ind. always denote 
 something past, in the Subj. (Optative), sometimes that which is 
 past, and sometimes that which is present or future. 
 
 2. The Principal tenses are the following : 
 
 (a) The Present, (a) Indicative, e. g. γράφομεν, scribimus; (β) Subjunctive, 
 -• S- γρύφωμεν, scribamus ; 
 
§ 152.] SYNTAX. TENSES. 199 
 
 (1)) The Perfect, (a) Indicative, c. g. γεγράφαμεν, scripsimus; (β) Subjunctive, 
 e. g. γεγράφωμεν, scripserimus ; 
 
 (c) The Future, Indicative, e. g. γράψομεν, scribemus, we shall write; 
 
 (d) The Future Perfect, Indicative, c. g. βεβονλενσομα^ I sliall have advised 
 myself, I shall deliberate, I shall be advised. 
 
 3. The Historical tenses are the following : 
 
 (a) The Aorist, (a) Indicative, e. g. έγραψα, I wrote; (β) Optative, o. g. γρά- 
 ψαιμι, I might write, or I might have written ; 
 
 (b) The Imperfect, (a) Indicative, e. g. έγραφον, scribebam; (β) Optative, e. g. 
 γράφοιμ,ι, scriberem; 
 
 (c) The Pluperfect, (a) Indicative, e. g. εγεγράφειν, scripseram; (β) Optative, 
 e. g. γεγράφοιμι, scripsissem ; 
 
 (d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. γράψοιμι, I would write, and of 
 the Fut. Perf, e. g. βεβου?ιευσοίμην, I should have deliberated, or have been 
 advised; e. g. δ άγγελος έλεγεν, δτι o'l πολέμιοι ν ικήσ ο ι εν, the messen- 
 ger said, that the enemy would conquer ; έλεγεν, otl πάντα νπο τον στρατη- 
 γού εν β ε βονλεύ σο ιτο, he said that everything would be well planned by 
 tlie general. 
 
 4. The present indicative represents the action in the time pre- 
 sent to the speaker. The present is often used in the narration of 
 past events, since in a vivid representation, what is past is viewed as 
 present. This is called the Historical Present. 
 
 Ύαύτην την τάφρον βασιλεύς μέγας ποιεί άντι έρύματος, επειδή πνν& α- 
 ν ε τ α ι Κνρον προςελαύνοντα. τ Ή.ν τις Τίριαμιδων νεότατος ΤΙολνδωρος, Εκά- 
 βης παις, ον έκ Τροίας έμοι πατήρ δ ι δ ω σ ι Τίρίαμος εν δόμοις τρέφειν. 
 
 Rem. 1. The present ειμί {to go) with its compounds, has a future signifi- 
 cation, in the Ind. and Subj., I shall go; the Inf. and present Part, have both a 
 present and future signification; e. g. ουκ ευ&ϋς αφήσω αυτόν ουδ' απ ειμί 
 (abibo), αλλ' ε ρ ή σο μα ι αυτόν και εξετάσω και ελέγξω. Comp. § 137, 
 Rem. 3. — Ο ιχομαι and ή κ ω with present forms, are often translated in 
 English by perfects, namely, ο ιχομαι, I have departed, and ή κ ω, I have come ; 
 yet οϊχομαι, properly means, lam gone, and η κ ω, I am here (adsum) ; e. g. 
 Μη λνπον, δτι Άράσπας οιχεται εις τους πολεμίους, that Λ. is gone ( = trans- 
 fugit) to the enemy. Ή κ ω νεκρών κευϋ-μώνα και σκότον πνλας λιπών. 'Τμεϊς 
 μόλις άφικνεϊσϋ-ε, οποί ήμεϊς πάλαι η κ ο μεν {have come). 
 
 5. The perfect indicative represents a past action in time present 
 to the speaker. The action appears as one completed in time pre- 
 sent to the speaker. 
 
 Τέγραφα την έπιστολήν, I have written a letter, the letter is now written, it being 
 immaterial whether it was written just now or a long time ago 5 ή πόλις έκτισ- 
 ται, the city is nozo built, now stands there built. 
 
 Rem. 2. Many Greek perfects are translated into English by the present 
 tense ; in this case a condition or state occasioned by the completion of the action 
 is denoted ; e. g. δέδεμαι (I have been bound), I am now in a bound state, am bound; 
 
200 SYNTAX. — TENSES. [§ 152. 
 
 τέ&νηκα (I have died), lam dead; πέφηνα (I have shoivn myself). I appear, οίδα, 
 novi (I have seen), I know, τέΰηλα (I have bloomed), I am blooming, πέποι-&α (I have 
 convinced or persuaded myself), I trust, βέβηκα (I have stepped out), I go, μέμνημαι, 
 memini (I have reminded myself), I am mindful, κέκτημαι {I have acquired for my- 
 self), I possess, κέκλημαι (I have been called), I am called, and many others. 
 Where the perfect is translated by a present, the Pmp. is translated by an Imp. ; 
 e. g. επεφηνειν, I appeared. 
 
 6. The future indicative denotes an action as future in relation to 
 the present time of the speaker. The Greeks very often use the 
 Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an Historical tense, to 
 express that which should, must or ynay he, where the Latin employs 
 the Subj. ; the other forms of the Fut., particularly the Part., are 
 also so used. 
 
 Νόμους ύπάρξαι δεϊ τοιούτους, δι'' ών τοις μεν άγαΰοϊς έντιμος καϊ ελεύθερος 
 ό βίος παρασκενασϋ-ήσεται (might be obtained), τοίς δε κακοΐς ταπεινός τε 
 καϊ αλγεινός καϊ αβίωτος δ αιών ε π αν α κ είσ ε τ at. Ηγεμόνας έλαβον οί 
 στρατιώται, οί αυτούς αξουσ ι ν (should lead), εν&εν i ξ ο υ σ ι (might obtain) τά 
 επιτήδεια. 
 
 7. The future perfect indicative represents the action as past 
 (completed) in the future, in relation to the present time of the 
 speaker. 
 
 Καϊ τοις κακοϊς μεμίξεται έσΰλά, the good shall have been mixed with evil. 
 Ή πολιτεία τελέως κεκοσμησεται, έαν ό τοιούτος αύτην επισκοπή φύλαξ δ 
 τούτων επιστήμων. The Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated 
 by the present (see Bern. 2), must then be translated by the simple future ; e. g. 
 ηεμνησομαι, meminero (1 shall Jiave reminded myself), I shall be mindful. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek, only in principal clauses, and in 
 subordinate clauses introduced by ότι and ώς (that). In all other subordinate 
 clauses, the Subj. Aor. (more seldom the Perf.) in connection with a conjunc- 
 tion compounded of av, e. g. έάν, επάν, έπειδάν, όταν, πριν αν, εςτ' αν, ος αν, 
 etc., is used instead of the Put. Perf. ; Q.g.hav τούτο λέξης, si hoc dixeris, if 
 you shall have said thus. 
 
 8. The aorist indicative expresses past time, in a wholly indefi- 
 nite manner, without any additional relation ; e. g. έγραψα, Iivrote, 
 Κνρος πολλά εϋνη ενίκησεν. It thus stands in contrast with the 
 other tenses which express past time ; still, since it indicates past 
 time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these tenses. 
 
 9. The imperfect indicative represents an action as past, but al- 
 ways in relation to another past time. 
 
 Έν φ σύ έπαιζες, εγώ ε γ ραφον, while you were playing, I was writing. 
 "Οτε εγγύς %σαν οι βάρβαροι, οι "Έλληνες έμάχοντο, when the barbarians 
 were near, the G. fought. "Οτε οί βάρβαροι επεληλνϋ-εσαν (or επηλϋον), ol "Ε λ,- 
 
§ 152.] SYNTAX. — TENSES. 201 
 
 ληνες έ μύχοντ ο. Τότε (or tv τ civvy τ?) μ άχτι) οι "Έλληνες ΰαββα- 
 λεώτατα έ μύχοντ ο. 
 
 Rem. 4. The Irapf. Ind. is also used to denote, — (a) the beginning of an ac- 
 tion, e. g. επεϊ εγγνς έγένοντο εξατζίνης, οι μεν αντών ετόξεν )ν, some of them 
 began to shoot their arrows; — (b) the continuance, e. g. oi μεν ε π ο ρ εν οντο, ol 
 δ' εΐττ οντο, one party continued their march, the other continued to pursue; — (c) 
 habit or custom, e. g. αντύν οιττερ τζρόςΰεν π ρ ο ς ε κ ν ν ου ν, καϊ τότε ,προςεκί- 
 νησαν, those who xcere before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also; — 
 (d) endeavor or attempt, e. g. πρώτος Κ/,έαρχος τονς αντοϋ στρατιώτας ε β ιάζετο 
 Ιέναι, Clearchus endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. 
 
 10. Hence the Aor. Ind. is used in historical narration, in order 
 to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. is used to denote 
 the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. narrates, the Impf. de- 
 scribes and paints ; the Aor. denotes a single, momentary action, the 
 Impf. a continued action. 
 
 Τονς πε/,ταστάς έ δ έ ξ αν τ ο oi βάρβαροι καϊ ε μάχο ν τ ο • επεϊ δ' εγγύς 
 ήσαν oi δπλϊται, έτ ράποντο ■ καϊ oi πελτασταϊ εΰΰϋς είπον τ ο. Ό δε 
 Κ?^έαρχος έταράχϋ-η καϊ εφοβεϊτο, and C. was terrified (a single, momen- 
 tary act) and feared (continued act). 
 
 Rem. 5. The Aor. Ind. is often used in general propositions, -which express a 
 fact borrowed from experience ; the verb is then translated by an English Pres. 
 or by is wont or is accustomed, -with the Inf. ; e. g. Κάλλος η χρόνος ά ν α λ ω σ ε ν, η 
 νόσος ε μα ρ αν εν, either time destroys (is wont to destroy) or disease impairs beauty. 
 
 11. The pluperfect represents an action as completed before an- 
 other past action. 
 
 Έπειδη oi "Έ?2ηνες ε π ελη λύ& ε σ αν (had come), oi πολέμιοι άπεπεφεύ- 
 γεσαν (had fed). Ότε οί σύμμαχοι επλησίαζον, οι 'Αΰηναϊοι τους Τίέρσας 
 ένενικήκεσαν. 'Έγεγράφειν την επιστολην (sc. when the friend came). 
 
 Rem. 6. It is to be noticed, that -where the relation of one past time to another 
 is readily seen from the connection, and no special emphasis belongs to it, the 
 Greeks commonly use the Aor. instead of the Plup. : e. g. επειδή οί Έλληνες 
 επηλΰον, οι πολέμιοι άπεπεόενγεσαν. Indeed, the Aor. is often used instead 
 of the Perf. even, -when the relation of the past to the present does not require 
 to be particularly indicated. 
 
 12. As the Aor. Ind. expresses a past action as independent and 
 completed, and as the Impf. Ind., on the contrary, represents an ac- 
 tion in its duration and progress, (since it always refers to a past ac- 
 tion which is related to another past action, being used in descrip- 
 tion and delineation,) so the subordinate modes of the Aor., viz. the 
 Subj., Opt. and Imp., together with the Aor. Inf. and Part., are 
 used when the action is represented by itself, as completed ; on the 
 contrary, the subordinate modes of the Pres., together with the 
 
202 SYNTAX. — TENSES. [§ 152, 
 
 Pres. Inf. and Part., and also the Opt. Impf., are used, when the 
 speaker would describe an action in its duration and progress. In 
 this manner the following forms stand contrasted : 
 
 (a) The Aor. Subj. and the Pres. Subj. ; e. g. φύγω μεν and φ εύγ ω μεν, 
 let us fly ; λέγω, Ινα μ α ■& η ς and ίνα μανϋ- άννς, that you may learn ; 
 
 (b) The Aor. Imp. and the Pres. Imp. ; e.g. φύγε and φ ε ν γ ε, fly ; δός 
 and όίόου μοι το βιβλίον, give ; 
 
 (c) The Aor. Inf. and the Pres. Inf. ; e. g. έΰέλω φνγεΐν and φεύγε ιν, I 
 wisli to fly ; κελεύω σε δουν ac and δ ιδόν at μοι το βιβλίον ; but the 
 Aor. Inf. can also denote a past time and take the place of the Perf. Inf., 
 when the relation to the finite verb does not require to be particularly in- 
 dicated ; e. g. ήγγειλε τους πολεμίους άποφυγ εΐν and άποπεφευ- 
 γ εν α ι, nuntiavit hostes fugisse ; 
 
 (d) The Aor. Opt. and the Impf. Opt. ; e. g. έλεγον, ίνα μάΰοις and Ινα 
 μαν& άν ο ι ς, that thou mayest learn, ut disceres ; εΐ-&ε τούτο γένοιτο 
 and γ ί γ ν ο ι τ ο, Ο that this might happen ! The Aor. Opt. can also take 
 the place of the Plup. Opt., when the relation to another past action does 
 not require to be particularly indicated; e. g. ήγγειλεν, δτι, επειδή ol 
 "Έλληνες ε π έλ-& ο ι εν (had come), οι βάρβαροι ήδη άποφύγο ι εν 
 (had already fled). 
 
 The Aor. Part, always denotes past time, and hence stands in contrast with 
 the Perf. Part., since the former describes an action as absolutely past, while 
 the latter, at the same time, represents it in relation to the finite verb ; e. g. ol 
 αυτόμολοι ήγγειλαν τους πολεμίους άποφυγ όντας and άποπεφευγότας. 
 
 LXXX. Exercises on § 152. 
 After Darius was dead and Artaxerxes had ascended (aor.) the throne, Tis- 
 saphemes traduced Cyrus to (προς, to. ace.) his brother, (asserting) that he was 
 plotting against him (opt). The latter (ό) credits it ( = is persuaded) and ap- 
 prehends Cyrus, intending to put him to death (ως, w.fut part.) ; but his mother 
 by entreaty gains his release (== having begged him off for herself, aor.) and 
 sends him again to his government. Hector, whither has gone the courage, that 
 thou once hadst 1 Be not troubled that Araspas has gone over to the enemy. 
 In good time* art thou come. Themistocles wrote: (I,) Themistocles, have 
 come to thee. If any one does not know himself, and believes he has come to 
 a knowledge of that which he does not truly know, he is a fool. The messen- 
 gers from Sinope said: We are come to (part.fut.) congratulate you, Ο war- 
 riors, that ye have been delivered, as we have heard, through (δια, w. gen.) many 
 dangers. Under (επί, w. gen.) Cecrops and the first kings, until (εις) Theseus. 
 Attica was always inhabited by cities. God has carefully regulated everything 
 in the world. The dwellings in Memphis have remained until (μέχρι) modern 
 times. (Enoe, which lies (=is) on the borders of Attica and Boeotia, had 
 been fortified. Zeno scourged a slave for (επί, w. dat.) theft; upon his saying 
 
 * εις καλόν. 
 
§ 153.] SYNTAX. — MODES. 203 
 
 (gen. abs.) : " It was fated for me to steal," Zeno said : " To be flayed too (am.) " 
 The world is a stage, life a passage across (that stage) ; thou earnest, thou saw- 
 est, thou wentest away. Xerxes threw a bridge over the Hellespont and dug 
 through Athos. Destiny casts down what (οι άν, w. svbj.) it has exalted (aor.). 
 Even the worst (man) acquires riches easily. Inactivity teaches a great deal of 
 vice. Commanding is easier than doing. Cyras called (part.) Araspas, a Mede, 
 who had been a comrade of his (= to him) from youth (εκ παιδός), and bade 
 him guard for him the wife of Abradatas, the Susian, and the tent, until he him- 
 self shoxdd take (them) in charge. The people resolved to choose thirty men, 
 who should draw up the laws of the country, in accordance with which 
 (κατά, ιο. ace.) ihey should administer the government. Even-where in Greece 
 the usage prevails, that the citizens swear (ace. w. inf.) to be united (fiit.). The 
 soldiers hoped to take the city. I believe, that those, who (§ 148, 6) practise 
 wisdom, and believe (themselves) to be competent to teach the citizens that 
 which is useful, by no means become violent. Say what I must do, and it shall 
 be done. It (= tins) is very beautifully said and ever will be (= remain) said, 
 that the useful is beautiful, the hurtful odious. Tyrants will acquire nothing 
 valuable. Noble men we shall ever remember. 
 
 §153. B. More Particular View of the Modes. 
 
 1. The three following modes are to be distinguished, viz. the 
 Indicative, Subjunctive (Optative) and Imperative (§ 151, 2). 
 
 a. The Indicative expresses a fact or phenomenon, asserts some- 
 thing directly ; e. g. το ρόδον & άλλε ι — ό πατήρ γ ε γ ρ α φ ε την 
 Ιπιστολην — οι πολέμιοι άπε'φυγον — οι πολΐται τους πολεμίους 
 νιχησον σ ι ν. 
 
 b. The Subjunctive denotes a conception. The Subj. of the his- 
 torical tenses is called the Optative in Greek (§ 73, II.). 
 
 (a) The Subj. of the principal tenses, i. e. of the Pres. and Perf., 
 and also the Subj. Aor., in Greek always represents the conception 
 as something future. The Subj. of the principal tenses is used in 
 principal clauses : (1) in the first Pers. Sing, and PI. to express an 
 exhortation or admonition ; (2) in the second Pers. Sing, and PL 
 of the Aor. (not Pres.) with μη to express a prohibition ; (3) in 
 doubtful questions ; in principal clauses, however, almost exclusively 
 in the first Pers. Sing, and PI., but in subordinate clauses, it may 
 be in any of the different persons. 
 
 Ίωμεν, eamus, let us go- Μη Ιωμεν, let us not go. M# φοβη-β-ής, ne metuas, do 
 
 not fear. Ύί -ζοιώμεν ; what shall we do? In subordinate clauses, Ονκ εχω, δποι, 
 
 τρά -cjuai, non habco, quo me vertenn, I do not know where to go. Ουκ έχει, δποί 
 τράτζηται, he does not know where to go. 
 
 (β) The Subj. of the historical tenses, viz. the Opt. of the Aor., 
 
204 SYNTAX. — MODES. [§ 153. 
 
 Impf. and Plup. as well as the Opt. of the Fut. (§ 152, 3, d), repre- 
 sent what is conceived either as past, present or future. The Opt. 
 denotes a present or future, only in conditional clauses, and in such 
 elliptical clauses as arise from them ; e. g. ει τι εχοις, δοίης ά ν, 
 if you had anything, you would give it. Both the condition ει τ ι 
 εχοις, and the consequence δοίης άν, are here represented as a 
 present, mostly a future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, a 
 mere supposition, admission or conjecture (Comp. § 185). This 
 form of the conditional clause, viz. ε ι with the Opt., may express a 
 wish, the concluding clause connected with it, being understood ; e. g. 
 ει τούτο γένοιτο! if this should happen (then I would be happy, 
 ευτυχής άν εΐην), — Ο that this might happen/ Instead of the sim» 
 pie ει, the stronger εϊϋ* ε, ει γ ά ρ, Ο that, is then commonly used .; 
 e. g. ε ϊ& ε ( ε Ι γ ά ρ ) i μοί ϋ-εοι ταντην την δνναμιν παρα&εϊεν} 
 Ο that the gods would give me such power! Very frequently the 
 concluding clause is used elliptically, the condition connected with 
 it being understood ; e. g. ηδεως άν άκούσαιμι, I would gladly 
 hear (if it were possible, ει εξείη). Comp. No. 2, c. With the 
 exception of the instances here mentioned, the Opt. generally refers 
 to the past. 
 
 Kem. 1. When a wish is to be represented as one which the speaker knows 
 cannot he realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used ; e. g. εϊ&ε τούτο 
 kyiyv ετο ! Ο that this might be {were) done ! εϊϋε τούτο έγ εν ετο ! Ο that 
 this had been done ! 
 
 c. The Imp. denotes the immediate expression of one's will ; e. g. 
 δ 6 ς and δίδον μοι το βιβλίον, give ; γ ρ α \\) ά τ ω and γ ρ α φ ε τ ω 
 την ΙηΐΰτοΧην, scribito, let him write. 
 
 Rem. 2. The difference between the Pres. and Aor. Imp., is, that the Pres, 
 generally denotes a continued, oft-repeated action, while the Aor. denotes a single, 
 instantaneous action : e.g. ιτεί-&ου τοΐς σοφωτέροις, obey those wiser titan yourself 
 a direction to be observed at all times ; άνατεινάτω την χείρα, let him raise 
 his hand, βλέψον εις τά δ ρ η, look upon tlie mountains, single, instantaneous 
 acts. So άκουσον, ακούσατε, λέξον, λέξατε. Comp. § 152, 12, b. — The Perf. 
 Imp., which is of rare occurrence, is used to indicate that the consequences of 
 the action are to remain or be permanent ; e. g. κεκλείσ&ω ή ΰύρα, let the door be 
 shut (and remain shut). It will be evident, therefore, that neither the Aor. nor 
 Perf. Imp., expresses any relation of past time, as the Ind. of these tenses does, 
 but only such modifications of action as are stated above. 
 
 Rem. 3. In negative or prohibitive expressions with μ ή (ne), the Greek coni- 
 monly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp., but instead of it, the Aor. 
 Subj. ; e. g. μη γρ^φε (but not μη γράφνς) or μη γράψης, do not write (but not 
 μη γράψον). 
 
§ 153.] SYNTAX. — MODAL ADVERB άν. 205 
 
 Remarks on the Modal Adverb uv. 
 2. The discussion of the modal adverb άν is intimately connected 
 with the treatment of the modes. This adverb is used to show the 
 relation of the conditioned expression to the conditioning one, inas- 
 much as it indicates that the predicate of the sentence to which it 
 belongs, is conditioned by another thought. A complete view of 
 the use of «V cannot be presented until conditional sentences are 
 treated of (§ 185) ; for the present, the following remarks on its 
 construction will be sufficient. It is connected : 
 
 a. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, viz. the Impf., Plup. 
 and Aor., 
 
 (a) To indicate that something could take place under a certain 
 condition, but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. 
 
 Εί τοντο έ?„εγες, ήμάρτανες άν, si hoc diceres, erra?-es, if you said this, you were 
 wrong {but now I know you did not say it, consequently you did not do wrong). ΈΙ 
 τοντο ε?.εξας, ημαρτες άν, si hoc dixisses, errasses ; at hoc non dixisti, ergo non er• 
 insti (the Aor. here takes the place of the Plnp.) : or without a protasis, e. g. 
 εχάρης άν, laetaveris or laetatus fuisses (sc. si hoc vidisses). 
 
 (β) To indicate that an action took place (was repeated) in cer- 
 tain cases or under certain circumstances. The historical 
 tense of the principal clause is then usually an Imperfect. 
 
 ΈΙ τις τώ Σωκράτεί περί του άντιλέγοί, έπϊ την νπόΰεσίν ε π αν η γ εν 
 αν -κ αν τ α τον λόγον, if any one contradicted Socrates^ he would (he was accus- 
 tomed to) carry bach the whole argument to the original proposition (i. e. he would do 
 this as often as any one contradicted). 
 
 Rem. 3. 'Av is not used with the Ind. of the principal tenses. 
 
 b. With the Subj., in order to represent the conceived future 
 event, which is naturally expressed by the Greek Subj. [No. 1, b. 
 (a)], as conditional, and dependent on circumstances. In the Com- 
 mon Language, this usage occurs only in subordinate clauses, the 
 modal adverb then standing in close connection with the conjunction 
 of the subordinate clause, or combining with it and forming one 
 word. In this manner originate εάν (from u αν), όταν (from οτε 
 άν), οπόταν (from οπότε άν), πο)ν άν, ο&ι άν, ον άν, οπον άν, οϊ άν, 
 οποί άν, y άν, όπη άν, ο-&εν άν, όπό&εν άν, etc., og άν (quicunque or 
 si quis), οίος άν, οποίος άν, όσος άν, όπόσος άν, and others. 
 
 c. With the Opt. (very seldom with the Fut. Opt.), to represent 
 a present or future uncertainty, undetermined possibility, a mere 
 supposition, admission or conception, as conditional. The Opt. with 
 av must always be considered as the principal clause of a conditional 
 
 18 
 
206 SYNTAX. MODAL ADVERB av. |_§ 153. 
 
 proposition, even if the condition belonging to it, is not expressed 
 [No. 1, b. (|5)]. 
 
 Εί τούτο λέγοις, άμαρτάνοιςάν. Without a protasis, e. g. χαίροις άν, you 
 might, could, would rejoice {if you heard this). Τένοιτ' αν πάν εν τώ μακρώ χρόνφ, 
 all might, could happen. Αέγοις αν, you might speak (sc. si tibi placuerit). The 
 Opt. with av is very frequently used, when the speaker wishes to state a strong 
 affirmation modestly. 
 
 d. With the Inf. and Part, (very seldom with the Fut. Inf. and 
 Part.), when the finite verb, used in the place of the Inf. and Part., 
 would be connected with av. 
 
 EI τι εϊχεν, έφη, δούναι av, if he had anything, he said he would give it 
 (oratio recta, εϊ tl ε'ίχον, έδωκα av, if I had anything, I would give it). Έ1 τι έχοι, 
 έφη, δούναι av (oratio recta, εϊ tl έχοι μι, δοίην αν). Αήλος εΐάμαρτάνων 
 αν, εί τούτο λέγοις { = δηλόν εστίν, 'ότι άμαρτάνοις αν, εϊ τούτο λέγοις). 
 
 Rem. 4. As αν represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be 
 joined with the predicate, e. g. λέγοιμι άν, έλεγον άν ; yet it commonly follows 
 that member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. και ουκ. οϊει α σ- 
 χ η μ ο ν αν φανεϊσ&αι το τού Σωκράτους πράγμα. Hence it is regularly joined 
 to such words as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to negative adverbs and 
 interrogatives ; e. g. ουκ άν, οΰδ' άν, ούποτ' άν, οΰδέποτ' άν, etc. — τίς άν, τι άν, 
 τί δ' άν, τί δήτ' άν, πώς άν, πώς γαρ άν, άρ' άν, etc. ; — also to adverbs of place, 
 time, modality and other adverbs, which, in various ways modify the expression 
 contained in the predicate and define it more exactly; e. g. ενταύθα άν, τότ' άν, 
 εΐκότως άν, Ισως άν, τάχ' άν, μάλιστ' άν, ηκιστ -1 άν, βαδίως άν, ηδέως άν, etc. 
 Hence it happens that άν is sometimes repeated in the same sentence. 
 
 LXXXI. Exercises on § 153. 
 Let us shun the unseemly, and aspire after the beautiful. Let us pray (ctor.) 
 the Gods to guide the present (enterprise) to the most honorable issue. Let us 
 not yield to the enemy. How shall I, who am {pan.) mortal, contend with di- 
 vine destiny'? Tell me, whether {πότερον) we shall say that Socrates in his 
 conversations speaks seriously or jests (= call S. speaking seriously or jesting). 
 When Hercules was at a loss, which of two {δπότερος, w. gen.) ways to {επί, w. 
 ace) life he should enter ( = turn himself), there appeared two majestic women. 
 One, running to him {aor.), spoke thus : I see, Ο Hercules, thou art at a loss 
 ( = thee at a loss) which way to life thou shouldst enter. If {εάν, w. subj.) there- 
 fore thou wilt make me a friend {fern.), I will lead thee to the pleasantest and 
 easiest way. Ο Gods, that ye might avert danger from us. Ο that the triad 
 of the Graces {Χάριτες) might ever assist {aor.) me. Ο that I might ever asso- 
 ciate with the wise and good, and never have intercourse with {gen.) the bad. 
 Ο if I could have lived with you then, when you were still a youth. If I were 
 (but) able to make what is done {part.) undone ! Tight bravely, soldiers. Strive 
 after virtue, young men. The temple-robber ought to be torn in pieces by 
 wild beasts. Historians ought neither to extol anything in order to conciliate 
 (προς, w. ace.) favor, nor omit (anything), if it is deserving of mention and re- 
 
§ 154.] SYNTAX. ATTRIBUTIVES. 207 
 
 membrance. Judge (aor.) not contrary to (παρά, w. ace.) the laws. war- 
 riors, despair (aor.) not of yourselves. He who (§ 148, 6) ventures to em- 
 ploy force, may need not a few allies ; but he who ean persuade, none. How 
 could those who do base (deeds), become friends to those who hate such (deeds) ? 
 Who without self-control could either learn or properly practise anything good ? 
 With {μετά, w. gen.) a wise understanding, one may pass (aor.) life most pleas- 
 antly. The bad no one can make (= place, aor.) useful. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 § 154 Attributives» 
 1. Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea contained 
 in the substantive to which they belong ; e. g. το καλόν ρόδον, 6 
 ιιεγ ας παις. The attributive may be : 
 
 a. An adjective or participle, e. g. το καλόν ρόδον, το άν&ος 
 & άλλον; 
 
 b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol τον δ ε ν δ ρ ο ν καρποί; 
 
 c. A substantive governed by a preposition, e. g. ή προς την 
 πόλιν οδός ; 
 
 d. An adverb, e. g. ol νυν άν&ρωποι; 
 
 e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Κροίσος, 6 βασιλεύς. 
 
 Rem. 1. The genitive depending on substantives, receives different names ac- 
 cording to the relations it expresses : (a) subjective, when it takes the place of 
 the subject, e. g. oi του δένδρου καρποί (arising from το δένδρον φέρει 
 καρπούς), the fruits of the tree, i. e. which the tree produces ; τά τοΰ Όμηρου ποιή- 
 ματα, tJie poems of Homer, i. e. which he made; — (b) objective or causative, when it 
 takes the place of the object of an intransitive verb, e. g. ή της σοφίας επι- 
 θυμία, the desire for wisdom (επιθυμώ της σοφίας, the σοφίας being the cause 
 of the επιϋυμία) ; εύνοια τίνος, good-will towards one (εννονς ειμί τινι) ; — (c) 
 passive, when it takes the place of the object of an active verb, and thus denotes 
 the thing affected or caused by the transitive action, e. g. η της πόλεως κτί- 
 σις (from κτίζει την πό/αν), the possession oftlie city (the city being the thing pos- 
 sessed) ; ό της επιστολής γραφεύς, the writer of the letter; — (d) oi quality, 
 e. g. το εύρος τ εττάρων σταδίων; άνηρ μεγ ά?<,η ς αρετής ; — (e) of pos- 
 session, e. g. το τον Ήίένωνος στράτευμα. 
 
 Rem. 2. When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the 
 attiibutive, contains a general idea or one which can be easily supplied from the 
 context, or, by frequent usage in a particular connection, may be supposed to 
 be known, then the substantive, as it is subordinate in the idea to be expressed, 
 is often omitted, and the adjective or participle commonly with the article, is 
 used as a substantive. Such substantives are, e. g. άνθρωπος, άνηρ (man, hus- 
 band), γυνή (woman, wife), πατήρ, μήτηρ, υιός, παις, θυγάτηρ, αδελφός, πράγμα, 
 χρήμα, έργον, χρόνος, ήμερα, χώρα, γή, οδός, οικία, οίκος, and others. 
 
208 SYNTAX. APPOSITION. [§ 154. 
 
 0/ θνητοί (sc. άνθρωποι), mortales. Ύά ημέτερα (sc. χρήματα), res nostrae. 
 Ή νστεραία (sc. ήμερα). Ή πολέμια and ή φίλια (sc. χώρα), a hostile and friend- 
 ly land. Ή οικουμένη (sc. γη), the inliabited earth. Ύήν ταχίστην (sc. οδόν), 
 •jtuim celerrime. Ύο κακόν, evil. Ύά κακά, evik. 'Αλέξανδρος ό Φι?ύππου (sc. 
 υιός). Έν αδου (sc. οίκω) είναι. Έ'ις διδασκάλου, εις ΐΐλάτωνος φοιταν. Ύά 
 της τύχης, fortune and all which belongs to it ; τά της πόλεως, the affairs of the city ; 
 τά του πολέμου, the whole extent of the war. Οι νυν, οι τότε, οι πάλαι (sc. άν- 
 θρωποι). Ύά οίκοι {πράγματα), res domesticae. Οι καθ' ημάς, our contemporaries. 
 Οι άμφι or περί τίνα, a person with his companions, followers or scholars ; οι άμφι 
 ΤΙεισίστρατον, Pisistratus and his troops ; οι άμφι θαλήν, Tholes and his school. 
 
 2. "When a substantive is put in the same case with another, for 
 the sake of a more exact definition, it is said to be in apposition 
 with that substantive. A word may be in apposition not merely 
 with a substantive, but also with a substantive pronoun ; e. g. ημείς, 
 oi σοφοί — εκείνος, 6 βασιλεύς, and even with a personal pronoun 
 contained in the verb. 
 
 Θεμιστοκλής η κ ω παρά σέ, J, Themistocles, have come to you. Ό Μαίας 
 της "Ατλαντος διακονούμαι αυτοϊς (instead of εγώ ό Μαίας sc. υιός), I, tli£ 
 son ofMaia, the daughter of Atlas, etc. 
 
 3. When a word is in apposition with a possessive pronoun, that 
 word is put in the Gen., because the possessive then takes the place 
 of the Gen. of the personal pronoun. 
 
 'Έμος του άθλιου βίος, the life of me wretched; here άθλιου is in apposition 
 with εμάς, which is used instead of έμον. Ύάμά (= τά εμά) του δυστήνου κακά, 
 the evils of me, unhappy one! Ση της καλλίστης ευμορφία, thy gracefulness, Ο most 
 beautiful one ! In English, as these examples show, we may often translate the 
 Gen. by an exclamation. On the expression ό ημέτερος, υμέτερος, σφέτερος 
 αυτών πατήρ, see under § 169. Rem. 2. 
 
 LXXXIL Exercises on § 154. 
 In Hades dwell (= are) all the dead. Men send their children to school (to 
 the house of teachers), that they may learn (part, fit.) the sciences, music and 
 the (τά) (exercises) in the gymnasium. Alexander, the son of Philip, achieved 
 many and brilliant actions. Many, who (part.) neglect (aor.) domestic affairs, 
 attend to those of the state. Leonidas and the three hundred with him, fought 
 bravely at Thermopylae against (επί) the Persians. Thales and his school and 
 almost all philosophers abstained from political affairs. The character of the 
 Deity we must reverence very highly. Ο fortunate (man), thy life have the 
 Gods adorned with every blessing (Greek: thy life of the fortunate). Unhappy 
 men that we are, our (== the) enemies have ruined our native land. The com- 
 panions of Ulysses perished (aor.) by their own crime. Our own citizens have 
 betrayed us. Your own brother deserts you. 
 
§§155 — 157.] syntax. — genitive. 209 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 §155. The Objective Construction. 
 As the attributive construction (§ 154) serves to define the sub- 
 stantive more particularly, so the objective construction serves to de- 
 fine the predicate more particularly. By object, taken in its wider 
 sense, is to be understood everything by which the predicate is more 
 particularly defined, viz. (a) the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their 
 Cases, (c) the Infinitive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 
 
 Έ~ι\)ιμώ της σοφίας. Τ ράψω την ετηστο7^]ν. Εύχομαι τοϊς -&εοΙς. "Εστη 
 παρά τω βασι?ιει. Έτηΰυμώ γράφει. Τε/,ών εϊπεν. Καλώς- εμαχέσατο. In 
 each of these examples, it is evident that the verb is limited, defined or more 
 fully explained by the word or words connected with it. 
 
 Cases. 
 § 156. I. Genitive. 
 The Genitive Case primarily denotes the relation whence, and 
 therefore expresses, — (a) in a local relation, the out-going or removal 
 and separation from an object, since it designates the object or point 
 from which the action of the verb proceeds ; e. g. εΐκε ιν όδυν, cedere 
 via, to withdraw from the way ; — (b) in a causal relation, it ex- 
 presses the cause, source, author, in general the object which calls 
 forth, produces (gignit), excites and occasions the action of the verb ; 
 e. g. επι&νμώ της αρετής; here αρετής is the object which calls 
 forth, etc. the desire expressed by επι&νμώ. 
 
 § 157. A. Local Relation. 
 Genitive of Separation. 
 The Genitive, in a local relation, is used with expressions de- 
 noting removal, separation, being distant from, beginning, loosing, 
 abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, missing, deviating from, dif- 
 fering from , depriving. 
 
 Snch verbs are παραχωρεϊν, νποχωρεϊν, εικειν and ύπείκειν, ύπανίστασϋαι 
 and έξίστασ^αι, νοσφίζειν, χωρίζειν, δωρίζειν, άφιέναι, άφίεσΰαο, άπέχείν, άπέ- 
 χεα&αι, άρχειν, άρχεσΰαι, νπάρχειν, εξαρχενν, παύειν, παύεσ&αο, λήγειν, κω- 
 λύε ιν, είργείν, λνειν, ελεν&εροϋν, άπαλλάττειν, στερειν, άποστερεΐν, χηροϋν, 
 ερημονν, διαφέρειν, αμαρτανειν, σφάλλεσϋαι, ψεύδεσΰαι, etc.; διεχειν and άπέ- 
 χειν, to be distant; — the adjectives ελεύθερος, κα&αρός, κενός, έρημος, γυμνός, 
 18* 
 
210 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [§158. 
 
 ορφανός, ψιλός, διάφορος, and many compounded with a privative ;— the adverbs 
 άνευ, χωρίς, πλην, έξω, έκάς, δίχα, πέραν. 
 
 Οι των Λακεδαιμονίων νεώτεροι τοϊς πρεσβυτέροις σνντυγχάνοντες ει κ ου σ ι 
 της δ δοϋ ( withdraw from the road) . Απέχει των άργυ ρ είων (is distant 
 from the silver mines) η εγγύτατα πό?ας Μέγαρα πολύ πλειον των πεντακοσίων 
 σταδίων. Μήτηρ παιδός εϊργει μυΐαν (keeps the fly from her child). Τίαύ- 
 ου της ύβρεως (cease your insolence). Ή πόλις η λ ευ θ ε ρω θ η των τυ- 
 ράννων (was freed from tyrants). Οι πολέμιοι τους πολίτας των αγαθών 
 άπεστ έρησαν (deprived the citizens of their goods). Τω νώ οι άνθρωποι δ ι α- 
 φ ε ρου σι των άλλων ζώων (differ from other animals). Άρχεσθαί τί- 
 νος signifies to begin generally, without any reference to others ; e. g. σύν τοις 
 θεοΐς άρχεσθαί χρη παντός έργου; hut άρχε ιν, εξ άρχε ιν, ύπαρ- 
 χε ιν, κατ άρχε ιν, signify to do something first (i. e. before others), to begin, hence 
 also to be the author of, to originate ; e. g. Οι πολέμιοι fy ρξαν άδικων έργων. 
 Οι Αθηναίοι και Λακεδαιμόνιοι υπήρξαν της ελευθερίας άπάση τι) 
 Ελλάδι, libertatis auctores fuerunt. 'Ελεύθερος φόβου, free from fear • κ α- 
 χ) αρ ο ς αδικίας, free from injustice ; άρματα κενά ηνιόχων, chariots with- 
 out drivers ; απαίδευτος μουσικής, uneducated in music ; χωρίς των 
 άλλων, apart from the others; πλην Ν έ ων ο ς, except Neon; πέραν τοϋ 
 ποταιιοΰ, beijond the river ; έξω Βελών είναι, to be beyond the reach of the darts. 
 
 § 158. B. Causal Relation of the Genitive. 
 The Gen., in the causal relation, signifies also an out-going, but 
 not as in the local relation, a mere external out-going, but an inter- 
 nal and active one, since it expresses the object, by whose inward 
 power, the action of the subject is called forth and produced (gig- 
 nitur). 
 
 a. The Genitive as an expression of Action* or the Active 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 1 . In the first place, the active Gen. stands as the Gen. of origin 
 or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to originate from, 
 to spring from, arise from, to produce from, to he produced from, to 
 be born from: γίγνεσ&αι., ορνειν, φνναι, είναι. 
 
 'λρίστων ανδρών άριστα βουλεύματα γ ί γ ν ε τ α ι, the best counsels origl• 
 note from the best men. Πατρός μεν δη ?ιέγεται ο Κϋρυς γενέσθαι Καμ- 
 8 ύ σου, Ιίερσών βασι?ιέως, Cyrus is said to have been the son of (to have originated 
 from) his father Cambyses ; ο δε Καμβύσης ούτος τού ΐίερσειδών γένους ην, 
 but this Cambyses was a descendant of (of the race of) the Persians; μητρός δε 
 ομολογείται Μ α ν δ ά ν η ς γενέσθαι. 
 
 2. In the second place, the active Gen. stands as that object 
 
 * With this Gen. the subject appears as receiving the action denoted by the 
 Genitive. 
 
§ 158.] STNTAX. — GENITIVE. 211 
 
 which lias acquired another, made it its own and possesses it, — henco 
 as Gen. of the owner or possessor. This Gen. stands with the verbs 
 that, γενεσΦαι ; also with the adjectives Ίδιος, οικείος, ιερός, κύριος. 
 
 Της φύσεως ιιέγιστον κάλλος εστίν, nature possesses (has) the greatest 
 beauty. Τον Σωκράτους πολλή ήν αρετή, Socrates hael much virtue. Hence 
 originates the Gen. of quality, with which in English we connect the substantives, 
 business, wanner, custom, peculiarity, Juty, mark; e. g. Άνδρος εστίν άγαΰοϋ 
 εν ποιείν τους φίλους, it is the business, custom, peculiarity, duty, mark of a good 
 man to benefit his friends; or it becomes, it bespeaks a good man, a good man is wont, 
 etc. Oi μεν κίνδυνοι πολλάκις των ηγεμόνων ίδιοι, μισΰος δ' ουκ εστίν, 
 dangers are often the lot of {peculiar to) commanders. Κνρος ταύτης της χώρας 
 κύριος εγένετο, Cyrus icas the ruler of this place. Ίππος ιερός τον Ηλίου, 
 a horse saert d to the sun. 
 
 3. In the third place, the active Gen. stands as that object which 
 includes another or several other objects, as parts belonging to it ; 
 the Gen. expresses the whole in relation to its parts, and is com- 
 monly called the partitive Genitive. This Gen. is used : 
 
 (a) With the verbs είναι and γ ί γ ν ε σ & α ι, which then signify 
 to be among, to he numbered or considered among, to be of the num- 
 ber of, to be a paii, of, to be one of. 
 
 Ή ν και ό Σωκράτης των άμφί Μίλ,ητον στρατευομένων, Socrates also 
 icas among those who earned on war around Miletus ; στρατευομένων here denotes 
 the whole, of which Socrates is a part. Ή Ζέλ&ά εστί της Ασίας, Ζ. is a 
 part (or a city) of Asia. Τον -Θάνατον ηγούνται πάντες oi άλλο* των μεγίσ- 
 των κακών εϊν α ι, is among, or is one of, the greatest evils. 
 
 Eem. 1. The partitive Gen., denoting the whole of which a part is taken, is 
 very often used as an attributive : — (a) with substantives, e. g. σταγόνες ύδατος, drops 
 of water, (here ύδατος is the whole, parts of which are expressed by σταγόνες, and 
 so in the other examples) ; σώματος μέρος, a part of the body : — (b) with neuter 
 adjectives and pronouns, e. g. μέσον ημέρας, the middle of the day ; εν μέσω της 
 όδον, in the middle of the way; εν τοιούτω του κινδύνου, in such circumstances of 
 danger ; εις τούτο οργής, to such a degree of anger ; πλείστον του στρατεύματος, 
 most of the army; — (c) with substantive-adjectives, particularly superlatives, with 
 participles, substantive-pronouns (interrogative and indefinite) and numerals, e. g. 
 oi χρηστοί των άν&ρώπων, the useful part of (the useful amcn\g) men; oi εν ώρο- 
 νοϋντες των άν&ρώπων, the wise among men ; των υποζυγίων τα αναγκαία και τα 
 δννατώτατα, the necessary and more able of the beasts of burden; το ηγονμενον του 
 στρατεύματος, thed part of the army which lead = the van ; oi διώξαντες των ιπ- 
 πέων, those of the horsemen who pursued ; τις των στρατιωτών, who of the soldiers? 
 oi σοφώτατοι άν&ρώπων, the wisest of men. — Πολλοί, ολίγοι, τίνες τών άν&ρώπων. 
 (On the contrary, oi •&νητοί άν&ρωποι, because the property of mortality be- 
 longs to the whole class ; ττολλοί or 'ολίγοι άνθρωποι, denotes a whole consisting 
 of many or few, but πολλοί or ολίγοι άν&ρώπων, represents the many or the few 
 as a r>arf• ri the r,We) : — (d) with adverbs, (a) of place, e. g. Ούδαμη Αιγύπτου, 
 nof* f .?c ι /vf i "k οίδα, υπου γης εστίν, 1 do not know where on earth he is,- 
 
212 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. .[§ 158c 
 
 πανταχού της -γης, ubique terrarum, everywhere in the world; so also with πόθεν, 
 ποβρΊ&, πρόσω ; (β) of time, e. g. θψε της ημέρας, της ηλικίας, τον χρόνου, late 
 in the day, late in life, etc. ; τρΙς της ημέρας, thrice a day ; πολλάκις της ημέρας, 
 many times a day. 
 
 (b) With words which signify to participate, to share in, to im- 
 part, to communicate ; — to touch, to take hold of, to he close to, to 
 border on ; — to acquire and obtain, or to strive to acquire. 
 
 Here belong the verbs μετέχειν, μέτεστί μοι, μετά-, διαδιδόναι, κοινωνεΐν, κοι- 
 νούσθαι (these often taking a Dat. besides the Gen.), επαρκεϊν (to impart a share 
 of), διδόναι,,προςδχδόνάι ..; — θιγγάνειν, -ψαύειν, άπτεσθαι, λαμβάνεσθαι, μετά-, 
 σνλλαμβάνειν, επί-, άντιλαμβάνεσθαι, συναίο.εσθαι, έχεσθαι (to adhere to, to har- 
 der upon), αντ-, περιέχεσθαι, γλίχεσθαι ; — τυγχάνειν (to acquire, to hit), λαγχά- 
 νειν, έφικνεϊσθαι, κληρονομεϊν, προςήκει (μοί τίνος, something belongs to rue) ; — 
 δρέγεσθαι, έφίεσθαι, άντιπυιεϊσθαι, εντρέπεσθαι, στοχάζεσθαι ; — the adjectives 
 κοινός, "ίσος, όμοιος, άντίος, ενάντιος, παραπ?,ησιος (which however commonly 
 take the Dat), επιχώριος, φ'Λος, αδελφός, διάδοχος, also with Dat. ;— the adverbs 
 έξης, εφεξής, πρόσθεν, έμπροσθεν, όπισθεν, μεταξύ, ευθύ, straightforward to, μέ- 
 χρι, up to, άντ'ιον, πλησίον, etc. 
 
 Τίολλάκις οι κακοί άρχων και τιμών μετ έχον σιν, evil men often par- 
 take of offices and honors, θάλπους μεν και ψύχους και σίτων και π ο- 
 τ ων και ύπνου ανάγκη και τοις δονλοις μεταδιδόναι, πολεμικής <? 
 επιστήμης καϊ μελέτης ού μεταδοτέον, it is necessary to share heat and 
 cold, etc., with slaves, but we are not to share the knowledge of war, etc. Ό σοφός 
 της ύβρεως άμοιρος εστίν, is free from (does not partake of) insolence. 
 "Α π τ ε σθ α ι της χειρός, λίμνη έχετ α ι (borders on) τον σήματος με- 
 γάλη. "Έργου έχω μ εθ a, let us lay hold of opus aggrediamur. Ό στρατηγός 
 των αυτών τοις στρατιώταις συναίρεται κινδύνων, the general shares in 
 the same dangers as the soldiers. 'Επειδή θνη τ ού σώματος έτυχες, αθα- 
 νάτου δε -ψυχής, πειρώ της ψυχής αθάνατου μνήμην καταλιπεϊν, since you 
 have obtained a mortal body, but an immortal spirit, etc. Τυγχάνειν, ?ιαγχάνειν, 
 χρημάτων, ευτυχίας. Ύυχεϊν τελευτής, ονόματος. Όρέγεσθε or έφίεσθε της 
 αρετής, strive to obtain virtue. "Ομοιος φυγής, όμοιος του Ηφαίστου, ευθύ Τν- 
 θείου, πλησίον Θηβών, εξής Ώλούτωνος. 
 
 Rem. 2. Verbs signifying to take hold of govern the Gen. of the part taken 
 hold of ; e. g. έλάβοντο τής ζώνης τον Όρόντην, they took Orontes by the girdle ; 
 χειρός έλείν τινά, to take one by the hand. So any verb may govern the Gen., 
 when its action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part ; e. g. έταξε 
 Τλοϋν και Τίίγρητα, λαβόντας τού βαρβαρικού σ τ ρ α τ ο ν, he commanded 
 G. and P., having taken A part of the army ; έδόκει, συγκαλέσαντας λοχαγούς καϊ 
 πελταστάς και των όπ'λιτ ών, they thought best, having called togetlier tJie captains, 
 targetiers, and A part of the heavy-armed, etc. 
 
 4. The active Gen., in the fourth place, denotes the place where, 
 and the time when, an action occurs. The action or event belongs, 
 as it were, to the place and time, and in a degree proceeds from 
 them, and is produced by them, 
 
§ 158.] SYNTAX. GENITIVE. 213 
 
 Ths Gen. of place is rare in prose. Adverbs of place in tlie form of the 
 Gen. Sing, occur very frequently; c. g. ov, where, αυτού (τόπον), there, at 
 Uiat place, ούδαμού, nowhere, and others. "Αν&η Φόλλεί τον έαρος, blossoms 
 put forth in the spring, the spring being considered as the producer of the blos- 
 soms. So ϋέρονς, in summer, χειμώνος, in winter, ημέρας, by day, της αντης ήμέ- 
 οας, νυκτός. The Gen. too denotes the time within which anything is done 5 c. g. 
 Βασίλεί'ο οϋ μαχεϊται δέκα ήμερων, within ten days. 
 
 5. Finally, the active Gen. denotes the material of which any- 
 thing is made. This Gen. is used: 
 
 (a) With verbs signifying to make or form from something; — 
 with expressions denoting fulness andwara£; — with verbs signifying 
 to eat, to drink, to taste, cause to taste, to enjoy ; — to smell, and to 
 emit an odor of something. 
 
 Here belong the verbs ποιείν, πλήϋειν, πληρούν, πιμπλαναι, γέμειν, σάττειν, 
 ενπορεϊν, άπορεϊν, πένεσϋαι, δεϊσϋαι, δεϊ, σπανίζείν, χρη, έσΰίειν, φαγείν, εύω- 
 χεΐσ&αι, πίνειν, γεύειν, κορέσασΰαι, άπο?.αύειν, πνεϊν, όζειν, προςβά?^ειν, etc. , 
 the adjectives πλέος, πλήρης, μεστός, πλούσιος, δασύς, πένης, ενδεής, etc. : — ad 
 verbs, as άΐις. 
 
 Χ ύ Λ κ ο υ π επο ιη μέν α εστί τα αγάλματα, made of bronze. Έ στ ρω με- 
 ν η εστίν όδυς λίΰον, the way is paced with stone. (Hence the attributive rela- 
 tion, Έκπωμα ξ ν?, ου, a cup [7nade] of wood. Τράπεζα αργυρίου. Στέφανος 
 να κί ν&ων). Ή νανς σεσαγμένη ην άν& ρώπων, the ship was loaded 
 icith men. Τά Άναξαγόρου βιβ/άα γ έ με i σοφών λόγων, are full of wise say- 
 ings. Έι/ταίΦα ήσαν κώμαι πο/ιλαΐ μ ε στ αϊ σίτου και οίνου, there many 
 villages abounded with food and wine. Άπορ ε Ι ν, πέν εσΰαι, σπανίζείν 
 των χρη ματ ων, to be in leant of means. Έ σ ■& ί ε ι ν κ ρ ε ων, to eat of flesh. 
 Ko ρέσασϋ α ι ώο ρβη ς, to be filed icithfood. Hi ν ε tv olv ου, to drink of wine. 
 *Α.πο?<,αύειν πάντων των άγ αϋ ών,ίο enjoy all good things. Γ ευ εσι? α ι 
 τιμή ς, to taste honor. Γ ευ ε ι ν τινά τ t μη ς, to cause one to taste honor. "Ο ζ ε c ν 
 Ιων, to smell violets, σύρου π ν ε Ι ν, to emit the smell of myrrh. Π ρος β άλλε cv 
 μύρου. ΤΙνείν τράγου. "Οζειν κρο μ ν ων. Ώο ήδύ μοι προςέ- 
 πν ευ σ ε χοιρείων κ ρ ε ων, so siceet ivas the smell of swings flesh to me. Δ a- 
 σύς δένδρων, covered with trees ; ■& η ρ ί ω ν π?„ήρης, full of animals. 
 
 Rem. 3. Verbs of eating and drinking, govern the Ace, (a) when the substance 
 is represented as consumed wholly or in a great measure ; (b j when the sub- 
 stance is to be indicated as the common means of nutriment, which each one 
 takes ; e. g. Hi νω τον οϊνον, πολύν olvov, I drink the wine, much wine. Hence 
 πίνειν olvov is said of one whose usual drink is wine, but πίνειν οΐνον is to 
 take a drink of wine, to drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of 
 eating and drinking has a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or 
 drink of something. Άττολαν ε ιν τινός τι, signifies to receive gcod or evil 
 from some one. 
 
 Rjem. 4. Δεϊ, as impersonal, may take the Dat. of the person, with the Gen. 
 of the thing or person needed ; e. g. El μεν νμϊν τίνος ά?ιλου όεϊ, if you need any- 
 thing else. Δεΐ and χρή in the sense of r.ecesse, opus est, are followed either by the 
 
214 SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [§158. 
 
 Inf. alone, or by the Ace. of the person with the Inf.; e. φ §€Ϊ• (χρή) σε ταντα 
 ποιεΐν, you must do this. Αεί also, though more rarely, takes the Dat. of the per- 
 son with the Inf. ; e. g. εϊ col δέοι διδασκειν, if it were necessary for thee to teach. 
 
 (b) With verbs οι sensation and perception ; e. g. άχονειν, άκροα- 
 σϋ'αι, πνν&άνεσ&αι, αια&άνεοϋαι, όσφραίνεσϋαι, σννιεναι, to under- 
 stand ; and with verbs of reminding, remembering and forgetting ; 
 e. g. μιμνήσκειν, μνημονενειν, μεμνησϋαι, ίπιλανϋάνεσϋ'αι, and the 
 corresponding adverbs, e. g. λά&ρα, κρνφα. 
 
 Kal Κω ψ οΰ σ ν ν ί η μ l, καϊ ον φ ων ου ν τ ο ς ακούω, I understand the 
 dumb man, and hear him although he does not speak. Ώς ω σ φ pov τ ο τάχιστα 
 των καμήλων οι ίπποι, as soon as the horses smelt the camels. Ουκ άκροώ- 
 μενοι τον α δ ο ν τ ο ς, not hearing the singer. Άκούειν δίκης, to hear a suit; 
 a Ι σ tf άν ε σΰ α ι κραυγής, ■& ο ρ υ β ου, επίβουλης, to perceive a cry, tu- 
 mult, plot. These verbs often govern the Ace. of the thing ; often also they gov- 
 ern the Aec. of the thing in addition to the Gen. of the person ; e. g. Ό Αρμέ- 
 νιος, ώς ή κ ου ε τ οϋ αγγέλου τά παρά του Κύρον, εξεπλάγη, but as soon as 
 the Armenian heard from the messenger the communication of Cyrus — . Οι άγαμοι 
 και απόντων των φίλων μέμνηνται, the good remember even absent 
 friends. Μ?) επιλαν&άνου των ε υ ε ρ γ ε σ ι ώ ν, do not forget acts of kind- 
 ness. Αά•& ρ α των στρατηγών, without the knowledge of the generals. 
 
 (c) With, expressions of being acquainted and unacquainted with, 
 of experience and inexperience, of knowledge and ignorance, of 
 making trial of something, and with those of ability, dexterity and 
 skill in anything. 
 
 Here belong the words έμπειρος, άπειρος, επιστήμων, επισταμένος, άνεπιστή- 
 αων, συγγνώμων, αδαής, απαίδευτος, ιδιώτης, πειράσ-&αι, απείρως and ξένως έχειν, 
 and adjectives in -ικός (derived from transitive verbs) which express the idea of 
 dexterity. 
 
 "Έμπειρος or επιστήμων ειμί της τ έχνη ς, I am acquainted with the 
 art. Απαίδευτος αρετής, μουσικής, ignorant of virtue, music ; συγ- 
 γνώμων των ανθρωπίνων πραγμάτων, pardoning (not knowing) hu- 
 man errors. Απείρως έχειν των ν ο μ ων, to be unacquainted with, ignorant 
 of the laics ; απ ο π ε ι ρ άσ-& α ι γ ν ώ μ η ς, to venture, to try an opinion. Π ε ι- 
 ρώ μένος του βάΰους, trying [making trial of) the depth; π ειρώαενο ι 
 ταύτη ς της τάξεως, making trial of this arrangement. Και παρασ κευ α- 
 στικό ν των εις τον πόλεμον τον στρατηγόν είναι χρή και π οριστ ικόν 
 των επιτηδείων' τοις στρατιώταις, it is necessary for the general to be capable 
 of providing what -pertains to the war, and of furnishing what is necessary for the sol- 
 diers. Διδασκαλικός της σοφίας, skilled in teaching philosophy. 
 
 (d) Finally, with verbs signifying to see, to observe, to judge, to 
 examine something, some action, external indication or single cir- 
 cumstance in one {τινός), particularly with verbs signifying to ad- 
 mire, to praise and blame. — The person in whom one sees, etc. 
 something, is put in the Gen., and thai which is seen, etc., in the 
 
§158.] Sl'NTAX. GENITIVE. 215 
 
 Ace, or in an accessary clause, or in the Gen. of the Part, which 
 then agrees with the person. 
 
 Such verbs are όρφν, ΰεάσΰαι, σκοπεΐν, νπονοεΐν, έννοεϊν, γιγνώσκειν, έπίσ- 
 τασδαι, ειδέναι, έν&νμεΐσ&αι, πυν&άνεσ&αι, αίσΰάνεσ&αι, μαν&άνειν, κρίνείν, 
 έξετάζειν, λέγειν, δηλοϋν, άγασ&αι, ΰαυμάζειν, έπαινεΐν, μέμφεσ-&αι, ψέγειν. 
 
 ΤΙρώτον μεν αυτών έσκόπει, he first considered in respect to them. "Ή.σ-&ησαι 
 τονμοϋ βίου, thou hast observed in my way of life. Έγνω έμοϋ ποιοϋντος, he per- 
 ceived tliat I was doing. To βραδύ καϊ μέλλον, δ μέμφονται μάλιστα ημών 
 (which is the chief complaint they make against us), μη α'ισχννεσ-&ε. Ει ay ασαι 
 τοϋ πατρός, 'όσα πέπραχε, if you admire my father for what he has done. Έγώ 
 και τούτο επαινώ 'λ γ η σ ιλάον, I praise Agesilaus for this also. Τ οργίου 
 μάλιστα ταϋτα άγαμα ι, I admire these things especially in Gorgias. Ό ■& a v- 
 μάζω τοϋ εταίρου, τάδε εστίν, what I admire in a companion is this. Πολλά 
 Όμηρου επ α ιν ου μεν, ice praise many things in Homer. 
 
 Rem. 5. When the above words refer merely to a thing which one admires, 
 blames or loves, they govern the Ace, sometimes also the Ace. of the person 
 alone ; e. g. έπαινεΐν, ψέγειν, μέμφεσΰαί τίνα ; so also, άγασ-&αι, -&αυμάζειν 
 τινά, to look with ivonder at one, either at the person himself or the whole nature of the 
 person. 
 
 b. The Genitive as the expression of Cause. 
 
 6. The second division of the causal Gen. includes the Gen. which 
 expresses cause ; i. e. the Gen. denotes the object which calls forth 
 and occasions the action of the subject. This Gen. stands : 
 
 I. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the mind, 
 viz. (a) with verbs signifying to desire, to long for ; — (b) to care for, 
 to be concerned for ; — (c) to be pained, to be grieved, to pity ; — (d) 
 to be angry and indignant ; — (e) with φ&ονεϊν, to envy (τινί τίνος , 
 Dat. of person and Gen. of thing); — (f) to admire, praise and 
 blame {τινά τίνος, Ace. of person and Gen. of thing). 
 
 Such verbs are, (a) έπιϋυμεΐν, έραν, ερωτικώς έχειν or διακεΐσΰαι, διψήν, 
 πεινην ; — (b) έπιμελεΐσ-&αι, όροντίζειν, κήδεσ&αι, περιοράσϋ-αι, προοραν, νπερο- 
 ραν, προνοεϊν, μέλει, μεταμέλει, άμελεΐν, όλιγωρείν, φείδεσ^αι ; — (c) δλοφύρε- 
 σ-&αι, πεν&ικώς έχειν, έλεέϊν and οίκτείρειν (with Ace. of person and Gen. of 
 thing): — (d) δργίζεσΰ-αι (with Dat. of person), χαλεπώς όέρειν ; — (f) ΰ-αυμάζειν, 
 άγάσϋαι, ζήλουν, ίυδαιμονίζειν, έπαινεΐν, μέμφεσ&αι (all with Ace. of person and 
 Gen. of thing). 
 
 Ονύεις π ο τ ου έ π ιΰυ μεΐ, αλλά χρηστού π ο τ ο ν, καϊ ου σίτου, άλλα 
 χρηστού σίτου- πάντες γαρ άρα τ ών άγ αΰ ών έ π ιΰυ μοϋ σ ι ν, no one 
 desires drink, but icholcsome drink, etc. : for all desire what is good. Td άνόμοιον 
 άν ομοίων επιθυμεί και έ ρ a, desires and loves the unlike. Π ε ivy ν τών 
 σίτων, τών ποτών, τοϋ επαίνου, to long for food, drink, praise. Οι νό• 
 uoirov κοινού άγαΰοϋ έ π ι μ έ λ ο ν τ α ι, the laics care for, have a regard for 
 ' 7 i< public good. Οί γονείς πεν&ικώς είχον τοϋ παιδος τ εΰνη κ.ότος. 
 
216 SYNTAX.— GENITIVE. [§ 158. 
 
 the parents grieved for their dead child. Τίοσειδών Kv κλωπος εκεχό?,ωτο, 
 Neptune had been angry with the Cyclops. Οι κακοί φ&ονοϋσι τοις άγα&οϊζ 
 τής σοώίας, the evil envy the good on account of their wisdom. Άγαμαί σε 
 της ανδρείας, I admire you on account of your bravery, θ αν μάζομεν τόν 
 Σωκράτη της σο φ ία ς, we admire Socrates for his wisdom. Ζηλώ σε τον 
 πλου τον, I admire you for your riches. Ένδαιμονίζω σε των άγα&ών, 
 I conside)• you happy on account of your blessings. Α. Ι ν ω σε της προ&νμίας, 
 I praise you for your readiness. 
 
 Rem. 6. The verbs αγαπάν, φιλεϊν, στ έργείν, tolove, and ποΰεϊν, 
 to long for, do not govern the Gen., but the Ace. — Μ ε λ ε ι, as impersonal, takes 
 the Dat. of the person earing, and the Gen. of the person or thing- cared for ; 
 e. g. Μέλει μοί τίνος, I care for some one. If the thing cared for is expressed by 
 a neuter pronoun, it may stand in the ISom. as the subject of the verb, which 
 then becomes personal ; e. g. Ταϋτα ΰ-εώ μελήσει, God will take care of these things. 
 — The verbs -&av μάζειν and άγασϋαι have the following constructions : 
 (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the wonder or 
 admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole nature of a 
 person or thing; e. g. -θαυμάζω (αγαμαι) τον στρατηγόν — -θαυμάζω την σοφίαν ; 
 — (b) the Gen. of the person and the Ace. of the thing, when we admire some 
 action, external manifestation, or single circumstance in a person ; e. g. τοντο 
 ■θαυμάζω σον — -θαυμάζω (άγαμαι) σον, διότι ονκ άργνρίον καϊ χρνσίον προείλου 
 ■θησαυρούς κεκτήσ-θαι μάλλον η σοφίας. Comp. 5, (d) ; — (c) the Ace. of the per- 
 son and the Gen. of the thing, when we admire a pei'son on account of some 
 quality; e. g. -θανμάζω (άγαμαι) τον Σωκράτη της σοφίας. Comp. 6, I. Instead 
 of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition can be used here, commonly επί with the 
 Dat; e. g. -θαυμάζω τον Σωκράτη έπϊ τη σοφία. — It will be seen that the relation 
 of the Gen. with verbs of praising, admiring and the like, is expressed by the 
 prepositions for, on account of. 
 
 II. With verbs which signify to requite, to revenge, to punish, to 
 accuse and condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as 
 the cause of the requital, revenge, etc. 
 
 Here belong the verbs τιμωρεϊσθ-αι, τίνεσ-θαι, αϊτιάσθαι, επαιτιάσ-θαι, διώ- 
 κειν, είςάγειν, νπάγειν, γράφεσ-θαι, προςκαλεϊσ-θαι, δίκάζειν, κρίνειν, αίρεϊν, to 
 convict (all with Ace. of person and Gen. of thing), έπεξιέναί, εγκαλεϊν, επισκή- 
 πτεσΰ-αι (all with Dat. of person and Gen. of thing), φενγείν, to be accused, άλώ- 
 vat, to be convicted. 
 
 'Οδυσσεύς έτίσατο τους μνηστήρας της νπερβασίας, Ulysses punished, 
 the suitors for their wickedness. Τιμωρεϊσ-&αί τίνα φόνον, to punish one, or 
 take vengeance upon one for murder Έπαιτίάσΰ-αί τίνα φόνον, to accuse one 
 of murder. Έπίσκήπτεσΰ-αί τ lv l των -ψ εν δομαρτν ρ ιών, to prosecute one 
 for false witness. Μιλτιάδην oi εχΰ-ροϊ έδίωξαν τνραννίδος της εν Χεβ- 
 ρονησφ, prosecuted (pursued judicially) Miltiades for his tyranny in Chersonesus. 
 Τράφεσϋ-αί τίνα παρανόμων, to indict or accuse one for unconstitutional measures. 
 Φ ε ν γ ε ι ν (to be accused) κ?ιοπής, φόνου, ασεβείας. Κ ρ ί ν ε σ ■& α ι (to be accused) 
 ασεβείας. Δικάζονσιν οί ΐΐέρσαο καϊ έγκλη μ ατός, . . . . αχαριστίας, 
 the Persians condemn as a crime, ingratitude, etc. Άλωνα ι κλοπής, to be con• 
 
§ 158.] SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. 217 
 
 victed oftlieft. Also the punishment of the guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. 
 id to be considered as the Gen. of price, § 158, 7. (7); e. g. ΰανάτον, κρίνειν, 
 κρίνεσ&αι, to condemn, to be condemned, to death. 
 
 Rem. 7. Έ; κα'λΰν besides the above, has the following constructions : (a) the 
 Dat. of person and Ace. of thing, to cliarge something upon some one; — (b) the Dat- 
 of person followed by a clause with ότι or by the Inf. ; — (c) the Dat. of person 
 alone, to accuse (§ 161, 2. c) : — (d) the Ace. of thing alone, to bring as a charge. 
 Κατηγορεϊν, to accuse, is construed, (a) with Gen. of person, sometimes with 
 κατά and Gen. ; — (b) with Gen. of person and Ace. of thing, to lay something to 
 one's charge ; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, sometimes with περί 
 and Gen. of thing : — (d) with Ace. of thing alone. — Ύιμαν, τιμάσΰ-αι, to fine or 
 punish one with, take the Dat. of person with Gen. of punishment; e. g. Ύιμαν 
 tivl δέκα τα?Μντων, του θανάτου, to fine one ten talents, sentence one to death. 
 
 Rem. 8. The causal Gen. is used with the adverbs ευ, καλώς, μετρίως 
 and some others, connected with the verbs έχειν, ηκειν, and sometimes είναι, 
 to denote the object by which a particular condition is caused ; e. g. ε ν τον 
 βίου ij κε ιν, to be well off as to the means of living ; ούτω τρόπον έχεις, 
 you are thus in respect to circumstances — you are in sucli circumstances ; ώ ς τά- 
 χους έκαστος είχε ν, as quick as each one could. 
 
 c. The Genitive denoting certain Mutual Relations. 
 
 7. The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by 
 which certain mutual relations are expressed. In these mutual re- 
 lations, one idea (e. g. that of superiorit} 7 or inferiority) necessarily 
 supposes the other, and thus in a measure calls it forth and occa- 
 sions it. Hence the Gen. is used : 
 
 (a) With expressions of riding, preeminence, excelling, promi- 
 nence, and the contrary, viz. those denoting subjection, yielding to, 
 and inferiority. 
 
 Here belong the verbs άρχειν, κρατεΐν, δεσπόζειν, τνραννεϊν, τνραννεΰειν, 
 στρατηγεϊν, έπιτροπενειν, έπιστατεϊν, βασιλενειν, ηγεμονενειν, ηγεϊσ&αι, προέ- 
 χειν, περιεϊναι, περιγίγνεσΰαι, προςτατεϊν, νπερβάλλειν, νπερφέρειν, διαψέρειν, 
 πρωτενειν, πρεσβενειν, προκρίνειν, προτιμαν, πλεονεκτεϊν, ήττάσΰαι, ΰστερεϊν, 
 -ίζειν, λείπεσ-8-αι, άπο?<,είπεσ•&αι, έλαττονσϋαι, μειοϋσ&αι, μειονεκτεϊν, ύστερον 
 είναι, ηττονα είναι ; the adjectives άκρατης, εγκρατής. 
 
 Ό λόγος τον έργον έκράτ ει, the report exceeded the thing itself. Τα μοχ&η- 
 pd, άν&οωπια πασών, οίμαι, τών έπιϋνμιών άκρατη εστίν, depraved men 
 are subject to [not able to control) all their passions. Τίολλάκις λνπτ/ ν π ε ρ β άλλε ι 
 τό άδικεϊν τον άδ ι κ εΐσΰ- α ι, the doing an injury often exceeds in grief the being 
 injured. Oi πονηροί ηττώνται τών έπ ι•&υ μ ιών, wicked men are slaves to 
 (inferior to) their passions. 
 
 Rem. 9. Ηγεμονενειν and ήγεϊσ&αι in the sense of to go before, with όδόν ex- 
 pressed or understood, to show the way, govern the Dat. ; κρατεΐν in the sense of 
 to conquer, regularly governs the Ace., but in the sense of to rule, the Gen. 
 
 19 
 
218 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [§ 158. 
 
 (β) With the comparative and with adjectives in the positive, 
 which have the force of the comparative, e. g. numerals in -άβιος 
 and -πλους, etc., the object by which the comparison is made, is put 
 in the Gen. 
 
 Ό υιός μείζων εστί του πατρός, greater than his father. Χρυσός κρείττων 
 μ ν ρίων λόγων βροτοϊς, gold is better for men than a myriad of words. Td 
 'Έλληνικόν στράτευμα φαίνεται π ολλαπλάσ ιον έσεσϋ-αι του ημετέρου, 
 many times larger than ours. Ου δ εν ο ς δεύτερος, ύστερος, inferior to no one. 
 Τ ων άρ κούντ ων περιττά κτήσασϋ-αι, to acquire more than enough. 
 
 (γ) With verbs signifying to buy and sell, exchange and barter, 
 and with expressions of valuing (άξιονν, άξιος), of being worthy or 
 unworthy ; and generally, the -price of a thing stands in the Gen. 
 
 Such verbs are ώνεΐσ&αι, άγοράζειν, πρίασ.-&αι, κτάσ-&αι, παραλαμβάνει, πω- 
 λεϊν, άπο-, περιδίδοσ&αι, διδόναι, άλλάττειν, -εσΰαί, διαμείβεσΰαι, λύειν, τιμψν, 
 τιμάσΰαι, ποιείσβ-αι. 
 
 Οι θράκες ων ου ν τ α ι τάς γυναίκας παρά των γονέων χρημάτων μεγάλων, 
 buy their wives from their parents at a great price. Τ ων πόνων πωλοϋ σ lv ημίν 
 πάντα τάγά&' οι -&εοί, the gods sell all good things to us for toils. Οι άγαΰοϊ ούδενός 
 αν κέρδους την της πατρίδος έλεν&ερίαν αν τ αλλά ξ a lv τ ο, the good would 
 exchange the freedom of their country for no gain. Ιατρός πολλών άλλων αντά- 
 ξιος εστίν, a physician is worth as much as many others. "Έγωγε ουδέν άνισώτερον 
 νομίζω των εν άν&ρώποις είναι του των ίσων τόν τε κακόν καί άγα&όν άξιον- 
 σ•&αι, I think there is nothing more unequal among men than that the evil and the good 
 should be honored equally. "Αξιος τιμής, worthy of honor. Πόσου διδάσ- 
 κει; πέντε μ ν ων, for how much does he teach ? For five minae ; άργνρίον, 
 αισΰ οϋ έργάζεσΰ-αι, to work for money, for hire. 
 
 LXXXIII. Exercises on §§ 157, 158. 
 The soul must be restrained from evil desires. It is mournful and grievous 
 to be deprived of the good- will of men. The soul, if (εάν, w. subj.) it depart 
 from the body polluted and impure, is not immediately with God. As the body, 
 bereft of the soul, sinks away ( = falls), so also a state, bereft of laws, will be 
 dissolved. He who (όςτις) does not consider the highest good ( = the best), 
 but in (εκ) every way seeks to do that which is ( = the) most agreeable, how 
 can (§ 153, 2. c) (he) differ from the irrational brutes Ί The battle has deliver- 
 ed us from shameful slavery. We esteem the old man happy, because he is 
 free from passions. Epaminondas sprang ( = was) from an obscure father. 
 Erom Telamon sprang (γίγνεσϋ-αι) Ajax and Teucer, from Peleus, Achilles. 
 It is the business of the general to command, but the duty of the soldiers, to 
 obey. Stags were sacred to Artemis. Of all friends, the first and truest is a 
 brother. Socrates generously proffered what was his to all. The hired labor- 
 ers, who (όςτις) for the sake of a subsistence performed slave-labors and parti- 
 cipated in no office, were the poorest of the Athenians. A good king allows the 
 citizens to enjoy ( == participate in) a just freedom of speech and action. The 
 word takes hold upon the spirit. Hold fast, young men, to instruction, and di» 
 
158.] SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. 219 
 
 rect yourselves to {προς, w. ace.) that which is ( = the) move excellent (phir.). 
 The virtues of good men obtain honor and fame even with enemies. The young 
 (cot up.) must (χρν, iv. ace. and inf.) aspire after the good (plur.) and abstain 
 from evil actions. The pains of the sick are more violent at night than by day. 
 In winter, men desire summer, hut in summer, winter. Hercules cleared ( = 
 tamed out) Lybia, which was (fart.) full of wild beasts. The good lack not 
 praise. Those ( = the) natures, that seem (part.) to be the best, most need ed- 
 ucation. The earth is full of injustice. Virtue leads us (in) a ragged and 
 toilsome ( = full of sweat) path. Aetna is filled (γέμεή with valuable firs and 
 pines. We contrive much, whereby (oV ών) to ( = we may) enjoy the good 
 (plur.) and avert the evil. Milo, the Crotonian, ate twenty minae of flesh (plur.) 
 and as much bread (plur.), and (δε) drank three flagons of wine. Men derive 
 many advantages from sheep, horses, cows and the other animals. It is writ- 
 ten in the laws, that both the plaintiff and the defendant should be heard alike 
 ( = to hear alike both, etc.). It is fair and right, to be mindful of the good (plur.) 
 rather than of the evil. It is pleasant to the unhappy to forget, even for a short 
 time, present evils. Since (part.) thou art young, be willing to hear thine ( = 
 the) elders. He who is unacquainted with the sciences, though he sees, sees 
 not ( = the unacquainted — seeing, sees not). Hermes had great experience 
 in the medical science. It is better to die (aor.) than to exercise ( = make trial 
 of) violence. Socrates considered with respect to philosophers, — whether (πό- 
 τερα) they devoted ( = turned) themselves to (επί, w. ace.) reflection (to φρον- 
 τίζείν, ιυ. gen.) upon the celestial, from the opinion (part, aor.) that they already 
 sufficiently understood (inf. pres.) the human (plur.), or (whether they) supposed 
 that they did what was befitting in neglecting (aor.) the human and ( = but) 
 contemplating the divine. This Ave admire in Socrates, that even while banter- 
 ing, he could instruct the young men, who (part.) associated with him. Socrates 
 exhorted young men to aspire after the fairest and choicest virtue, by (dot.) 
 which both states and households are wisely ( = well) directed. Pluto, who 
 (part.) loved (aor.) Proserpine, stole her away secretly with the cooperation of 
 Jupiter. That is a poor president, who (δςτις) cares for the present time, but 
 is not [μη) also provident for the future. Do not n-eglect even absent friends. 
 Be sparing of time. The good (man) is more concerned for the common weal, 
 than for his (own) fame. Many care more for the acquisition of money than 
 for that of friends. The Athenian state (of the A.) often repented (aor.) of sen- 
 tences passed (= which happened, aor. part.) in (μετά, iv. gen.) anger and with- 
 out ( == not [μη] with) examination. I pity thee for thy mournful fate. Envy 
 (aor.) me not the memorial, Demosthenes we admire for his ( = the) 
 greatness of nature and self-command in action ( = practice), and for his dig- 
 nity ( = gravity), promptitude, boldness of speech and firmness. Anaxa- 
 goras is said to have been condemned (aor.) for impiety, because he called the 
 sun a red-hot mass. Melitus accused (aor.) Socrates of impiety. Themistoeles 
 was accused, in his absence (αποδήμων),- of treason and condemned to death. 
 All (things) everywhere are subject to the gods, and the gods rule alike over 
 all. Apollo led the nine Muses, whence he was also called the Muse-leader. 
 Why are the educated prominent above the uneducated ? Cadmus of Sidon 
 ( == the Sidonian) reigned (aor.) over Thebes, but over the whole of Peloponne- 
 
220 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. [§ 159. 
 
 sus reigned Pelops, the (son) of Tantalus. Many are slaves {'ήττονες) to money. 
 Govern appetite, sleep and anger. The bravery of the Greeks triumphed over 
 (περιγίγνεσΰ-αι, aor.) the power of the king of the Persians. Nothing is more 
 valuable to men, than the cultivation of the mind. No teacher of hunger, thirst 
 and cold is better than necessity. Thou canst (§ 153, 2. c) not purchase virtue 
 and nobleness of mind for money.- Diphridas took Tigranes with his wife, and 
 released them for a large sum ( = much) of money. The Chaldaeans enlisted 
 for pay, because they were very warlike and poor. They only who (§ 148, 6) 
 practise virtue, are worthy of honor. The benefactors of men are deemed 
 (aor.) worthy of immortal honors. 
 
 §159. II. Accusative. 
 
 1. The Accusative Case expresses the relation whither, and de- 
 notes, (a) in a local relation, the limit or 'point to which the action 
 of the verb is directed ; in prose, however, a preposition is regularly 
 used here; e. g. εις άστυ ελϋ-εΐν; — (b) in the causal relation, it de- 
 notes the effect, consequence, result, of the action of the verb, as well 
 as the object on which the action is performed. In this latter rela- 
 tion, the object in the Ace. receives the action performed by the 
 subject, i. e. is in a passive or suffering condition; whereas, with 
 the Gen., the subject is represented as receiving the action. Comp. 
 § 158, a. et seq. The Ace. also differs from the Dat., in being the 
 immediate or direct object of the verb, while the Dat. is the remote 
 or indirect object. Comp. § 161, 2. 
 
 (a) Accusative denoting Effect. 
 
 2. The Accusative of effect is used as in other languages ; e. g. 
 γράφω επιστολην {ετηστολψ being the effect of the action of the 
 verb). In respect to the Greek, it is to be observed, that a verb 
 either transitive or intransitive very frequently governs the Ace. of 
 a substantive, wdiich is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
 has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pronoun 
 commonly belongs to the Ace. This is commonly called the Ace. 
 of a kindred or cognate signification. 
 
 'Επιμελούνται πάσαν επ ιμελε ιαν, they take care with all diligence. 
 Δ έ ο μα ι υμών δικαίαν δ έ η σ ι ν, I ask of you a just request. So καλας πράξεις 
 πράττειν,—^εργάζεΓΰαι έργον καλόν, — αρχειν αρχήν, — όονλείαν δουλεύειν, — πό- 
 λεμον πολεμεϊν, — νόσον νοσεϊν. "Ορκους δμννναι, to swear oaths ; άσΰ-ενεϊν νό• 
 σον, to be sick of a disease ; ζήν βίον, to live a life. 
 
§ 150.] SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. 221 
 
 (b) Accusative of the Object on which the action is 
 performed, i. e. the suffering Object. 
 
 8. Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, 
 take some other Case than the Ace., or are constructed with prepo- 
 sitions. They are : 
 
 (1) The verbs ώφελεΐν, όνιναναι, ονίναϋχται (λνσιτελεΐν, however, 
 with Dat.), to be useful ; βλάπτειν, άδικεΐν, νβρίζειν, λνμαίνεσ&αι, 
 λωβάσχται ; ενσεβεΐν, άσεβεΐν ; λοχαν, ενεδρενειν, insidiari ; τιμω- 
 ρεΐσ&αι; ΰεραπενειν, δορνφορεΐν, επιτροπεύειν, to he a guardian; 
 κολακενειν, ΰωπενειν, χτώπτειν, προςκννεϊν ; πεί&ειν ; άμείβεσ&αι, 
 respondere and remunerari ; φνλάττεσ&αι, ενλαβεΐσ&αι ; μιμεϊαϋ-αι, 
 ζήλουν. 
 
 θεράπευε τονς ά-& αν άτου ς, serve the gods. 'Αλκιβιάδης ε π ε L-& ε rb 
 π λ η ■& ο ς, ΑΙ. persuaded the multitude. Τΐλείσταρχον, τον Αεωνίδου, οντά βα- 
 σιλέα και νέον έτι, επετρόπενεν ό ΐίαυσανίας, Pausanias was the guardian of 
 Plistarchus, etc. Μη κολάκευε τους φ ί λ ο ν ς, do not flatter friends. Ώφέ- 
 λεί τους φίλους, και μη β λ ά π τ ε τους εχθρούς, assist friends, and do 
 not injure enemies. Μη άδικε ι τους φίλους. Μη ύβριζε τους παΐ- 
 δας. ΊΙολλάκις και δούλοι τιμωρούνται τους αδίκους δέσποτας, 
 often even slaves take vengeance on their unjust masters. Άμείβεσ-&αί τίνα 
 μύϋοις, 7ώγοις, to answer one; ά μ εί β ε σΰ α ι χάριν, εύεργεσίανονάμει 
 β εσ&αί τίνα χάριτι, to return a favor to one. 
 
 (2) Verbs which signify to do good or evil to any one, by word 
 or deed. Such are ευεργετεί», κακυνργεΐν, κακοποιεΐν, ενλογεΐν, κα- 
 κολογεΐν, εν, καλώς, κακώς λέγειν, ειπείν, άπαγορενειν. 
 
 "Ανθρωπε, μη δ ρ α τους τ ε-&νη κότ ας κακώς, do not injure the dead. 
 Μη κακόν ρ γ ε ι τον ς φίλου ς, do not harm your friends. Ευεργετεί 
 την πατρίδα, do good to your country. Έύ π οίε ι τ ο ν ς φ ί?>ον ς, confer 
 favvrs on your friends. Έυ λέγε τον ευ λέγοντα, και ευ π οι ε ι τον ευ 
 π ο ι ο ν ν τ a, speak well of him who speaks well, and do well to him who does well. 
 Instead of the adverbs εν and κακώς with ποιεϊν, etc., the Greek also uses the 
 corresponding adjectives : καλά, κακά ποιεϊν, λέγειν τ ιν a, to do or say 
 good or ill to one. See under double Accusative (§ 160, 2). 
 
 (3) Verbs of persevering, awaiting, waiting for, and the con- 
 trary ; e. g. μενειν, Φαόρεΐν ; φενγειν, άποδιδράακει,ν, δραπετενειν. 
 
 Μη φεύγε τον κίν δυ ν ον, do not flee from, danger. ΧρήΦαρβεϊν θά- 
 νατον, it is necessary to meet death bravely = not to fear death. Ό δούλος απ έ- 
 δρα τον δ ε σπ ότην, the slave ran away from his master. ΟΙ τών πραγμάτων 
 καιροί ου μένου σ ι την η μετέραν βραδύτητα, the favorable opportunities 
 for action do not wait for our sloihfulness. 
 
 (4) Verbs of concealing and being concealed, viz. Ιαν&άνειν, 
 ν,ρνπτειν (celare), κρνπτεσ&αΐ', — also the verbs φ& άνειν (to an- 
 
 19* 
 
222 SYNTAX.-- -ACCUSATIVE. [§ 159. 
 
 ticipate), λείπειν, επ ιλ ειπείν, to fail ; — verbs of swearing and 
 the like. With verbs of swearing, the object sworn by is put in the 
 Ace. Hence also adverbs of swearing are followed by the Ace. ; 
 *. g. μά, ου μά, ναι μά, νη. 
 
 Θεούς ούτε λ αν & άν ε ι ν, ούτε βιάσασ&αι δυνατόν, it is not possible to be 
 oncealed from, to escape the notice of the gods, etc. Οί πολέμιοι έφβ-η σ αν τους 
 A-d -ηναίους άφίκόμενοι είς το άστυ, anticipated the Athenians in coming into the 
 city, i. e. reached the city before them. Έ πίλε ί πει με ο χρόνος, ή ήμερα, the 
 time, the day fails me. "Ο μ ν ν μ ι πάντας τους & ε ους, I swear by all the gods. 
 Nat μ ά Αία, yes, by Jupiter ! Μά τους ■& ε ο ν ς, by the gods. 
 
 (5) Very many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the 
 mind; e. g. φοβεΐσΦαί, δεΐσοα; αίσχννεσϋ'αι, αίδεΐσχται; άχ&εα&αι; 
 δνςχεραίνειν ; εκπλήττεσ&αι, καταπλήττεσ'&αι ; οίκτείρειν, ελεεΐν, 
 ολοφνρεσ&αι, etc. 
 
 Χρή αίδ εΐσΰ αι τους ■& ε ου ς, it is necessary to reverence the gods, Α,ίσ- 
 χννομαι τον ■& ε ό ν, I am ashamed before the god. Όλοφύ ρου τους πέ- 
 νητας, pity the poor. 
 
 (6) With verbs of motion, the space or wag is put in the Ace, 
 these being the objects on which the action of the verb is perform- 
 ed ; so also the time during which an action takes place, in answer 
 to the question, How long ? so too measure and weight, in answer to 
 the question, How much ? 
 
 ~B αίν ε ιν, περάν, ε ρ π ε ι ν, πο ρ εν εσ& α ι ο δ δ ν, to go a way, like itgue 
 reditqne viam. Χρόν ov, τον χρόν ο ν, a long time, νύκτα, η με ρ αν, dur- 
 ing the night, day. Ή Σύβαρις ήκμαζε τούτον τον χρόνον μάλιστα, was 
 nourishing during this time. "Ισχυσαν τι και θηβαΐοι τους τελευταίους 
 τούτου σι χρόνους μετά την εν Αεύκτροις μάχην, during these last times. 
 Μιλτιάδης άπέπλει ΤΙάρον πολιορκήσας εξ καϊ ε'ίκοσιν ημέρας, having besieged P. 
 twenty-six days. To Έαβυλωνιον τάλαντον δύναται Ενβοΐδας έ β δ ο μη κον- 
 τά μ ν ας, the Babylonian talent is worth (weighs as much as, amounts to) seventy 
 Euboean minae. So δύναμαι, signifying to be worth, regularly takes the Ace. 
 
 (7) Finally, the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
 and intransitive adjectives of all kinds, to explain them more fully. 
 Here, also, the Ace. represents the object as acted upon or suffering, 
 since it denotes the object to which the intransitive action of the 
 
 erb or adjective refers or is directed. This is the Ace. of more 
 definite limitation, or, as it is often called, the Ace. of synecdoche* 
 
 Κ αμνέ ιν τους ό φ ■& α λ μ ο ν ς, to be pained in or in respect to the eyes ; τ ά Λ 
 ώ ρ ένας ύγιαίνειν, to be sound in mind ; άλγεϊν τους πόδας, τά σώματα, 
 to have pain in the jeet, body. Διαφέρει γυνή ανδρός την <pv σ ιν, woman differs 
 in (in respect to) her nature from man. Ό άνθρωπος τον δάκτνλον ά/,,γεϊ, the 
 man has a pain in his finger (is pained in respect to). Άγαΰός τέχνη ν τινά, 
 
§ 159.] SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. 223 
 
 distinguisJied in some art. Διεφθαρμένος την ψυχή ν, corrupt in spirit. Φάνης 
 και. γ ν ώ μην Ικανός, και τά π ολέ μια άλκιμος ην, Phanes icas competent in 
 counsel, and brave in battle. 'Ανέστη Φερανλας τ υ σώμα ονκ άφνϊ/ς και την 
 ψυχή ν ονκ άγεννεΐ άνδρϊ έοικώς. The English commonly uses prepositions 
 to express the force of this Ace, viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with 
 an adjective, the English sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a perso- 
 nal substantive and makes the adjective agree with it ; e. g. άγα.θός τέχνην, a 
 good artist, or the prepositions of or with are placed before the substantive denot- 
 ing the tiling, and the attributive adjective is made to agree with that substan- 
 tive ; e. g. νεανίας καλός την ψνχήν, a youth of or with a lovely spirit. 
 
 Remark. In this way many adverbial expressions are to be explained, as, 
 είψος, νψος, μέγεθος, βάθος, μήκος, πλήθος, αριθμόν, γένος, όνομα, μέρος ; also 
 τι, τοσούτον, μέγα, πάν, πάντα, το λοιπόν, etc.; e.g. Κλέανδρος γένος ην Φι- 
 γαλεύς απ' 'Αρκαδίας, a Phigalian by descent. Μετά ταντα άφίκοντο επί τόν 
 Ζάβατον ποταμόν το εν ρος τεττάρων πλέθρων, four hundred feet in width. 
 
 LXXXIV. Exercises on § 159. 
 
 He who is enslaved {part.) to pleasures, submits to (= serves) the most shame- 
 ful servitude. The laws not only punish the wrong-doers, but also benefit the 
 virtuous. If thou wishest to be beloved by friends, benefit (thy) friends ; if thou 
 desirest to be honored by a state, be useful to and benefit the state. Riches of- 
 ten injure both the body (plur.) and the mind (plur.). He who (§ 148, 6) flatters 
 friends, does them much (πολλά) wrong. Eevenge not thyself upon thine ene- 
 mies. Those who (part.) injure a benefactor, are punished by God. We wor- 
 ship no man as lord, but the gods. Sedentary trades injure the body (plur.) and 
 enfeeble the mind (plur.). The hunter lays snares for the hares. Endeavor to 
 repay benefactors with gratitude. Beware most of all of meetings for (εν) ca- 
 rousal. Imitate wise men. Prudent men (sing.) take heed to the danger* from 
 which they have once been rescued (aor.). We must (χρεών) emulate works 
 and acts, not words of virtue. It is said, that (ace. w. inf.) Xerxes threw down 
 (aor.) fetters into the Hellespont in order to revenge (part, fut.) himself upon 
 the Hellespont. A slave, who has run away (aor. part.) from his master, de- 
 serves stripes. Shun a pleasure that afterward brings pain. The general must 
 (χρή, w. ace. and inf.\ demean himself kindly towards (προς, w. ace.) his soldiers, 
 that they may have confidence (θαρβεΐν) in him. Tell me, what (όποιος) pun- 
 ishment the betrayer of his country will expect after (μετά, w. ace.) death. Con- 
 ceal (aor. mid.) from me nothing, (my) friend. To deceive (aor.) men is easy; 
 but to remain concealed from God (is) impossible. Provision (βίος) failed the 
 army. I swear to you by all the gods and all the goddesses, that I have never 
 injured any one of the citizens ( = to have injured no one, etc.). Young men 
 must (δεΐ, w. ace. and inf.) have respect, in (επί, w. gen.) the house, to parents, 
 in (εν) the ways, to those who meet (part.) them, in solitude (plur.), to themselves. 
 The beginning of wisdom is to fear God. Have compassion (aor.) upon me, 
 who (part.) am unfortunate beyond desert. The Lacedaemonians had not less 
 reverence for old men than for (their) fathers. Shrink not from going (inf.) a 
 long way to (προς, w. ace.) those who (§ 148, 6) profess to teach anything useful. 
 For a long time the Lacedaemonians had (aor.) the supremacy of Greece by 
 
224 SYNTAX. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 160. 
 
 (κατά, w. ace.) land and by sea. Theophrastus died (aor.) after [part.) he 
 had lived (aor.) eighty-five years. Phanes was of sufficient prudence (= suffi- 
 cient in prudence), and brave in battle. Men seem to be well in body (plur.) 
 after (άπό) many labors. Cyrus was very beautiful in person, of a humane 
 heart, (and) very fond of learning and very eager for honor. Larissa was built 
 of (dot.) earthen tiles; underneath was a stone foundation of twenty feet in 
 height. 
 
 §160. Double Accusative. 
 In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the Ace 
 with one verb. 
 
 1. In the construction mentioned above, § 159, 2, when the verb 
 has a transitive signification, e. g. φιλίαν φιλεϊν ; then the idea of 
 activity consisting of the verb and substantive, with which an ad- 
 jective usually agrees, being blended into one, may at the same time 
 be extended to a personal object ; e. g. φιλώ μεγ άλην φ ιλίαν 
 (= με'γα φιλώ) τον π αϊ δ a, Hove the boy with great love (greatly) ; 
 καλώ σε τούτο το 6 ν ο μ a, I call you this name or by this name. 
 Here φιλίαν and όνομα are Accusatives of cognate signification, 
 having a sense similar to their respective verbs. 
 
 2. Expressions of doing or saying good or evil, which may contain 
 an Ace. of the thing said or done, take the object to which the good 
 or evil is done in the Ace. The Ace. here also, denotes the object 
 acted upon ; e. g. ποιεϊν, πράττειν, εργάζεσ&αι, etc., λέγειν, ειπείν, 
 etc., ά γ α & ά, κακά τίνα, to do good or evil to any one, to satf 
 good or evil of any one. 
 
 Τότε δη δ Θεμιστοκλής εκείνον τε και τους Κοριν&ίονς πολλά τε 
 και κακά έλεγε ν, Tkemistocles said much evil of him and tlie Corinthians. Ού- 
 δεπώποτε επανοντο πολλά ημάς π ο ιονντ ες κακά, never ceased to do 
 much evil to us. 
 
 Rem. 1. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon, the Dat. is sometimes 
 used, which is to he considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage ; e.g. 
 προςκόπει, τί σο ι ποιησονσιν οί αρχόμενοι, consider what your subjects sliall do 
 sob you; but with σε, what they will do το you. 
 
 3. Moreover, verbs take two Accusatives, which signify to make, 
 to choose, to appoint, to nominate, to consider as anything, to de- 
 clare, to represent, to regard, to know, to say, to name, to call ; e. g. 
 ποιεϊν, τι&έναι {to appoint), χα&ιστάναι, αιρεϊσ&αι, νομίζειν, ήγεΐο&αι, 
 λέγειν, ονομάζει,ν, καλεϊν, etc. — One of these Accusatives is the ob- 
 ject acted upon, or the suffering object, the other is the predicate, 
 and hence may often be an adjective. 
 
§ 160.] SYNTAX. — DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 225 
 
 Ό Κϋρος τους φίλους έ ποίησε πλουσίους, made his friends rich, 
 ΐίαιδ ευ ε ι ν τινά σοφόν, to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education. 
 Αίρειν τινά μέγαν, to make one great. Ν ομίζε ι ν, ηγεϊσΰ-αί τίνα 
 άνδρα άγαΰόν, to think, to consider some one a good man. Όνομάζε ι ν τινά 
 σο φ ι στη ν, to call one a sophist. Aip εϊσ-& αί τίνα στρατηγόν,ίο choose one 
 a commander. Τον Τωβρύαν συν δ ε ιπνον παρέλαβε ν, he made Gobryas 
 his companion at supper. Πόλεως- πλου τον ηγούμαι συμμάχους, π ί σ- 
 τ ι ν, ευ ν ο ι αν. 
 
 Rem. 2. In the passive construction, this explanatory Ace. is changed into 
 the Nom. and agrees with the subject ; e. g. ΤΙαιδεύειν τινά σοφόν, but Pass, τ Ι ς 
 έπαιδενΰη σοφός; αίρεϊσϋ-αί τίνα στρατηγόν, but Pass, τις f /ρεΰ-η στρα- 
 τηγός. 
 
 4. With verbs, (a) of entreating, heseeching, desiring, inquiring, 
 asking, e. g. αιτεϊν, πράττειν (to demand), πράττεοΰαι, ερωταν, 
 εξετάζει?, ιατορεΐν; (β) of teaching, e. g. διδάσκειν, τΐαιδενειν; (γ) 
 of dividing, cutting in pieces, e. g. διαιρεϊν, τεμνειν, διανέμειν, (δ) 
 of depriving, taking away, e. g. άφαιρεΐσ-Θ-αι, ϋτερεϊν, άποστερεϊν, 
 ανλαν, etc. ; (ε) οι concealing or hiding from, e. g. κρνπτειν ; (ζ) of 
 putting on and off, e. g. ενδύειν, εκδνειν, άμφιεννύναι. 
 
 ΤΙέμψας Καμβύσης είς Αίγυπτον κήρυκα, ή τ ε ι "Αμασ ιν ■& υ γ α τ έ ρ a, asked 
 Amasisfor his daughter. Αυτούς εκατόν τ άλαντ α ε π ραξαν, demanded of 
 them a hundred talents. Άργύ ρ tov π ρ άτ τ ε ι ν τ tv a, to exact money from one. 
 Πολλά διδάσκει με ό πολύς βίοτος, teaches me many things. ΤΙαιδεύου- 
 σ ι τους π αϊ δ ας τρία μόνα, they teach the boys three things only. Τλώτ- 
 τ άν τε την Άττικην και τρόπους των Άΰηναίων εδίδασκον τους παϊ- 
 δας, they taught the boys the Attic tongue and the Athenian customs. Τρεις μοί- 
 ρας ό Ξέρξης ε δ άσ ατο πάντα τον π ε ζόν στ ρ ατό ν, divided all the 
 land-army into three divisions. Τ έ μ ν ε ι ν, δ ι α ι ρ ε Ι ν τι με ρ η, μοίρας, to di- 
 vide anything into parts. Ό Κϋρος το στράτευμα κατ εν ε ι με δώδεκα 
 μέρη, divided the army into twelve parts. Τον μόνον μοι καΐ φίλο ν π αϊ δ α 
 ίφείλετο την -ψυχή ν, deprived my only child of life. Την τ ι μη ν αποσ- 
 τερεί μ ε, he robs me of honor. Τα ημέτερα ημάς αποστερεί ό Φί- 
 λιππος. Κρύπτω σε το ά τ υ χ η μ a, I conceal the misfortune from you. ΤΙαΐς 
 αέγας έτερον π αϊ δ α μικρόν μέγαν χιτώνα εξέδυ σ ε, και τόν χι- 
 τώνα μεν έαντοϋ εκείνον η μφίεσ ε, a large boy stripped another small boy of 
 his large tunic, and put his own tunic on him. 
 
 Rem. 3. Άποστερεϊν and άφαιρεϊσ-&αι, to deprive, to take away, are construed (a) 
 with Ace. of thing alone ; — (b) with Ace. of person alone, but rarely; — (c) with 
 Ace. both of person and of thing, very often; — (d) with Gen. of person and Ace. 
 of thing, less often ; — (e) άποστερεϊν with Ace. of person and Gen. of thing, very 
 often (§ 157.), ίφαιρεϊσϋ-αι very seldom, and then means to prevent; στερεϊν 
 is construed both as in (c) and (e). 
 
 Rem. 4. When the active verbs mentioned under No. 4, are changed into the 
 passive, the Ace. of the object receiving the action, becomes the Nom., but the 
 A-cc. of the thing remains (according to § 150, 4) ; e. g. Έρωτώμαι την γνώ- 
 
226 SYNTAX. — DATIVE. [§ 161. 
 
 μην, I am ashed my opinion, Παιδεύομαι, διδάσκομαι μονσικήν, 1 
 am taught, I learn music. Τη δε καϊ οικήσεις τα αν τ α μέρη δ ι αν ε μ η & ή τ ω, 
 let the land and its habitations be divided into the same number of parts. Άφαιρε- 
 ΰ-ηναι, αποστ ερη&ήν αι την αρχήν, to be deprived of office. Κρνπτο- 
 uai τον το το πράγμα, this thing is concealed from me. Άμφιένννμαι 
 χιτώνα, lam clothed with, or I put on a tunic. 
 
 Rem. 5. Even some verbs, which in the active are constructed with the Dat. 
 of the person and the Ace. of the thing, in the passive change this Dat. of the 
 person into the Nom., while the Ace. of the thing remains. The following are 
 regularly so constructed : επιτάττειν, έπιτρέπειν, επιστέ?ιλειν τ ινί τ ι, to com- 
 mit, to entrust something to some one, e. g. Επιτρέπομαι, έπιτάττομαι, επιστέλλομαι 
 την φνλακήν, lam entrusted with the guard, or the guard is entrusted to me. 
 
 Rem. 6. The σχήμα κα&' όλον και μέρος occurs with the Ace. as well as with 
 the Nom. (§ 147b, Rem. 2); e. g. Οί πολέμιοι τον ς πολίτας τον ς μεν 
 άπέκτειναν, τον ς δε έδονλώσαντο, as for the citizens, the enemy hilled some, and 
 enslaved others, or the enemy killed some oftlie citizens, etc. 
 
 LXXXV. Exercises on § 160. 
 "When Pyrrhus had twice conquered (aor.) in engagements (σνμβάλλειν, aor. 
 part.) with the Romans, having lost (aor.) many of his friends and leaders, he 
 said: Although (εάν, w. subj.) we have conquered (aor.) the Romans in battle, 
 we are ruined. Critias and Alcibiades occasioned {aor.) very many evils to the 
 state. The gods have conferred (aor.) many blessings upon human life. Esteem 
 labor as the guide to (gen.) a pleasant life. Plato called (aor.) philosophy a 
 preparation for (gen.) death. Misfortune makes men more thoughtful. Socrates 
 did not exact from those who (§ 148, 6) had intercourse with him, (any) money 
 for (gen.) his conversation. Apollo, who was (-γίγνεσθαι, aor. part.) the inven- 
 tor of the bow, taught men archery. The Greeks, in the Median (wars), took 
 (aor. part.) the supremacy from the Lacedaemonians and gave it to the Athe- 
 nians. The public square of the Persians surrounding (= around) the gover- 
 nor's residence, is divided into four parts ; of these, one is for boys, another for 
 youths, another for adult men, another for those who (§ 148, 6) are (γίγνεσθαι, 
 perf) past (=over, beyond) military years. Many, who (part.) have mean 
 minds, are adorned (== invested) with fine persons and fine lineage (plur.) and 
 wealth (plur.). Wisdom was taught to many young men by Socrates. After 
 (part.) the power was taken from (aor.) Croesus, he lived with Cyrus. The sol- 
 diers, to whom (part.) the guard had been intrusted, had fled. 
 
 §161. III. Dative. 
 1. The Dative Case expresses the relation where, and hence is 
 used, first, to denote, (a) the place in which an action is performed; 
 in prose, however, prepositions are commonly joined with substan- 
 tives expressing this relation, e. g. iv ο ρ ει, in monte ; — (b) the 
 time when or in which an action is performed, e. g. ravrrj rrj 
 
§ 161.] SYNTAX. DATIVE. 227 
 
 η μ ε ρ a, this day ; τ% αντί} ννκτί, the same night ; πολλοίς 
 ετεα ι ν, many years ; τ ρ ί τ φ μηνί; zrj avzrj ω ρ a; here also 
 the preposition εν is often used; — (c) the being with, associating, 
 accompanying, (a) the Dat. singular of collective nouns, or the Dat. 
 plural of common nouns, connected with a verb of going or coming, 
 e. g. Λ&ψαϊοι ηλ&ον π λ η β- ε ι ουκ όλίγφ, πολλαΐς ν αν α ί ν, 
 Gt ρ at φ, στ ρατ ιωτ αι,ς, etc., came with a large number, with 
 many ships, with an army, with soldiers, etc. ; (β) the Dat. connect- 
 ed with αντ 6g which agrees with the substantive in the Dat., to 
 express the idea, at the same time with, together with, e. g. Οι πολέ- 
 μιοι Ινεπίμπρασαν την πόλιν αν τ οΐς τ ο tg / ε ρ ο ΐς, burnt the city 
 together with the sanctuaries. 
 
 2. The Dat. is used, in the second place, to denote an object, 
 which is indeed aimed at by the action of the subject, but which is 
 not, as with the Ace, attained, reached or accomplished, but only 
 participates and is interested in it. Hence the Dat. is used : 
 
 (a) With expressions of association and union ; here belong, (a) 
 expressions denoting intercourse, associating with, mixing withy 
 communication, participation ; — (β) verbs and expressions signify- 
 ing to go against, to encounter, to meet, to approach, to be near to, 
 and their opposites, e. g. to yield to, to submit ; — (γ) to fight, to quar- 
 rel, to contend, to vie with; — (δ) to follow, to serve, to obey, to trust 
 and to accompany ; — (ε) to counsel, to incite, to encourage. 
 
 Here belong, (a) the verbs διδόναι, παρέχειν, όμίλεϊν, μιγνύναι, -νσϋαι, κοι- 
 νονν, -οϋσΰ-αι, κοινών εϊν, δι-, κατα7\,λάττειν, -εσΰαι, ξενοϋσ&αι, σπένδεσ&αι or 
 σπονδάς ποιεϊσ&αι, πράττειν, ν^ισχνεϊσΰαι, είκεϊν, λέγειν, διαλέγεσ&αι, εϋ- 
 χεσ&αι, καταράσΰαι, also adjectives and adverbs and even substantives, as κοι- 
 νός, σύντροφος, σύμφωνος, συγγενής, μεταίτιυς and others compounded with, συν 
 and μετά ; — (β) the verbs νποστήναι, νφίστασ&αι, άπανταν, νπανταν, ύπαντιά- 
 ζειν, πλησίαζε ιν, πελάζειν, έγγΐζειν, εϊκειν, νπείκειν, χωρεϊν, the adjectives πλη- 
 σΐος, ενάντιος, the adverbs εγγύς, πέλας ; — (γ) the verbs έρίζειν, μάχεσϋ-αι, πόλε 
 μεϊν, άγωνίζεσΰ-αι, δικάζεσΰαι, άμφισβητεϊν ; — (δ) the verbs επεσΰαι, άκολου 
 ■&εϊν, διαδέχεσΰαι (to succeed), πε'ϊ&εσΰαι, νπακονειν, άπεϊ&εϊν, πιστεύειν, πε 
 ποι&έναι, the adjectives and adverbs άκόλον&ος, -ως, διάδοχος, έξης, εφεξής ; — 
 (ε) the verb3 προς-, έπιτάττειν, παραινεϊν, παρακελεύεσϋ-αι. 
 
 Ό μ'ιλει τοις άγα&οϊς άν&ρώποις, associate with good men. Ε v- 
 χεσ& ε τοις ■& ε οι ς, pray to the gods. Άπαντφν, πλησίαζε ιν, έγγι- 
 ζε ιν τ ιν ί, to meet, approach, come near to one. Μη εικετε τοις πολέ- 
 μιο ι ς, do not yield to the enemy. Οι "Έλληνες καλώς έ μαχέσαντο τοις 
 ΤΙέρσαις, fought with the Persians. ΟΊ στρατιώται αν η κονστησαν τοις 
 στ ρατηγοϊς, disobeyed the commanders. Τίεί•&ου τοις νόμο ι ς, obey the 
 laws. Τ?7 αρετή άκολον&εϊ δόξα, glory follows virtue. Τίεπον&έναι τινϊ, 
 to trust one. "Ύ δατι μεμιγμ'ένος την μάζαν, having mixed the maize with water. 
 
228 SYNTAX.— DATIVE. [§161. 
 
 (b) With expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
 and unlikeness, of agreement and difference. Under those of like- 
 ness is included ό αυτός, signifying the same. 
 
 Such are έοικέναι, όμοιοϋν, -οϋσΰαι, όμοιος, -ως, ίσος, -ως, εμφερής (similar), 
 παραπλήσιος, -ως, άμα, διάφορος, όιάφωνος, and very many words compounded 
 with όμοϋ, συν, μετά ; e. g. όμονοεϊν, όμόγλωττος, σνμφωνεϊν, etc. 
 
 Οι παϊδες ε μ φ ερέστ α τ ο ι τ]σαν τω πατ pi, the children were very much 
 like their father. Ώπ/.ισμένοι πάντες ήσαν οι περί τον Κΰρον τοίς αϋτοις τ φ 
 Κυρ ω δπλοις, all Cyrils' soldiers were provided with the same arms as Cyrus. 
 
 (c) With verbs and expressions signifying, (a) to assent to, to 
 agree with, etc.; — (β) to upbraid, to reproach, to he angry, to envy: 
 — (γ) to help, to be useful to, to avert from, and verbs compounded 
 with ovv, expressing this idea ; — (δ) to be becoming, to be suitable, 
 to be fit, to please, and with many others, the personal object is put 
 in the Dat. In addition to the Dat. of the person, these verbs fre- 
 quently govern the Ace. of the thing. The Dat. is also used with 
 verbs signifying to rejoice at, to be pleased with, and the like. In 
 many cases, however, the Dat. with such verbs may be regarded as 
 the Dat. of cause. Comp. § 161, 3. — In general, the Dat. is used, 
 when the action take's place for the benefit or injury of a person or 
 thing. This is called the Dat. of advantage or disadvantage, and 
 often includes what is termed the limiting Dat., or the Dat. express- 
 ing the relation of to or for. 
 
 Here belong, (α) όμολογεϊν ; — (β) μέμφεσΰαι (with Ace. it means to blame), 
 λοιδορεΐσΰ-αι, επιτιμαν, εγκαλειν (§ 158, Eem. 7) and έπικαλείν (τινί τι), έπι- 
 πλήττειν, όνειδίζειν, ένοχλεϊν, -&υμοϋσΰ-αι, βριμοϋσΰαι, χαλεπαίνειν, φ&ονεϊν, 
 βασκαίνειν (to envy) ; — -(γ) άρήγειν, άμννειν, άλέξειν, τιμωρεϊν, βοηΰεΐν, έπικον- 
 ρεϊν, άπολογεϊσ&αι, ?ιυσιτελεϊν, επαρκεϊν, χραισμειν, συμφέρειν, συμπράττειν, 
 σννεργεϊν, and adjectives of similar signification, e. g. χρήσιμος, φίλος ; and those 
 of an opposite signification, e. g. εχ&ρός, βλαβερός, etc.; — (δ) πρέπειν, άρμότ- 
 τειν, προςήκειν (with Inf. following), είκός εστί, άρέσκειν, the adverbs πρέπον- 
 τος, άπρεπώς, ε'ικότως. 
 
 ΤΙοσειδών σφόδρα ε μεν έαιν εν Όδυσσεϊ, was very angry with Ulysses. Έ π ι- 
 πλήττ ε ι ν, όνειδίζειν, έγ κάλε ϊν τινί τι, to reproach one for something, 
 to charge something on one. Ου τοις αρχειν βονλομένοις μέμφομαι, 
 ά?^λά τοις νπακούειν έτο ιμοτέροις ούσιν, Τ do not reproach those wishing 
 to rule, but those, etc. , Ή.νώχλε ι ό Φίλιππος τοίς 'Κϋ-ην αίο ι ς, Philip gave 
 trouble to the Athenians. Φ&ον είν τ ι ν ι, to envy one. Άμυνώ τ φ νόμω, 
 I will defend (the idea of aiding) the hw, etc. Όρεστής ήΰέλησε τιμωρεϊν 
 πατ pi, Orestes wished to help his father, etc. Άχιλλενς έτ ιμώρη σ ε ΤΙατρό- 
 %λφ τ φ έ τ αίρω τον φόνον, avenged the murder of (for) his friend Patroclus. 
 Ή άρεττ) αρέσκει τοις ά γ α&οϊς, virtue pleases the good. ΈΙκότως σοι 
 γαίρονσ ι ν ol Λακεδαιμόνιοι, rejoice in, are pleased with you. "Ή.δεσϋαί 
 τ {.γ ι, to be pleased with a thing. 
 
§ 161.] SYNTAX. — DATIVE. 229 
 
 (d) Finally, the Dat. is used to denote the possessor with the 
 verbs είναι, ν π άρχε ιν and γ ίγ ν ε σ & α ι, these verbs then be- 
 ing translated by the verb to have, and the Dat. as the Norn. ; e. g. 
 Kv ρ co ην μεγάλη βασιλεία, Cyrus had a great kingdom ; and in 
 general, the Dat. is used, where an action takes place in respect to, 
 in relation to a person, or an object considered as a person ; e. g. 
 Σωκράτης τοιούτος ών τιμής άξιος ην τη π όλε ι μάλλον, η θανά- 
 του, Socrates being such, deserved honor in respect to the city rather 
 than death. Hence the Dat. is also frequently used with the pas- 
 sive, and regularly with verbal adjectives in -τε'ος and -τός, instead 
 of νττό with, the Gen. ; e. g. ως μ ο ι ηρότερον δεδηλωται, as has 
 been before shown by me. Λσκητία εστί σ ο ι η αρετή, virtue must 
 be practised by you. On the construction with the verbal adjective, 
 see § 168, 1, 2. 
 
 3. In the third place, the Dat. is used like the Latin Ablative 
 (Abl. of instrument), to denote the cause, means and instrument 
 (hence with χρησ-&αή, the manner and way, the measure (by which 
 the action is limited, particularly with comparatives and superla- 
 tives), conformity (according to, in accordance with), often also, 
 the material. 
 
 Οί πολέμιοι φόβω άπήλΰον, went back through, on account of fear (the fear be- 
 ing the cause of the action). Άγάλλομαι τη ν ική, I exult on account of victory. 
 Στέργω, αγαπώ τοις νπάρχουσ ι ν άγαΰοίς, I am pleased with those who 
 are good. Ό φ& αλμοΐ ς δρώμεν, ώσϊν άκονομεν, we see with our eyes, we hear 
 with our ears. Ίσχνειν τω σώματι, to be strong in body. Οί στρατιώται συμ- 
 φορά μεγ άλγ εχρη σαν τ ο, experienced (used) great misfortune. 'Αλέξανδρος 
 δ ιδασ κάλω εχρησατο Άριστοτέλει. Οί πολέμιοι βία εις την πόλιν είςήεσαν, 
 entered the city by force. Οί Άΰηναϊοι τον Μ.ι?ιτιάδην πεντήκοντα τ αλάν το ι ς 
 εζημίωσαν; fined Miltiades fifty talents. Ή αγορά ΤΙαρίω λίΰ- φ ασκημένη }jv, 
 the Agora was adorned with Parian marble. ΤΙολλώ, δλ'ιγω μείζων, greater by 
 much, little (the Dat. measuring the degree of difference between the things com- 
 pared). Τ ή άλη-&εία κρίνειν, to judge according to truth. 
 
 4. The Dat. of the thing often stands with verbs, substantives 
 and adjectives, to denote in what respect their signification is to be 
 taken ; e. g. νπερβάλλειν τόλμη, to excel in or in respect to boldness ; 
 Κυδνος ονόματι, Cydnus by name; ταχνς no σι, swift of foot. This 
 Dat., however, is often tie same as the Dat. of means or instrument. 
 
 5. The Dat. stands as the indirect object or complement of very 
 many verbs, to denote the relation expressed in English by to or 
 for ; e. g. δίδωμί σ ο ι το βιβλίον, I give a book to you ; Κνρος αύτφ 
 είηεν, Cyrus said to him ; ου ως φίλοι προςεφε'ροντο η μι ν, they did 
 
 20 
 
230 SYNTAX. — PREPOSITIONS. [§ ] 62. 
 
 not conduct towards us as friends ; ϋτράτενμα σννελεγετο Κ ν ρ φ, an 
 army was collected for Cyrus. 
 
 5. (a) The Dat. is also put after adjectives to denote the object to 
 which their quality is directed. The relation of this Dat. is usually 
 expressed by tc or for, e. g. π ά β ι δηλον εγενεζο, it became evident 
 to all ; α ν ζ φ οι άγα&οι εννοι ήσαν, the good were well disposed to- 
 wards him ; εχ&ρος άν&ρώποις, hateful to men. 
 
 Remark. The rules 5 and 5, (a) are mainly included in 2, (a), (b), (c), but are 
 stated here in a more specific form, for the benefit of beginners. 
 
 LXXXVI. Exercises on § 161. 
 Cyrus resolved (aor.) on this day to engage with the enemy ; after the battle 
 he marched (aor.) the same day twenty stadia. The Athenians made an expe- 
 dition (στρατενείν) with thirty ships against the islands of Aeolus. When the 
 Persians came (aor.) with (their) entire (παμττληϋ-ης) force (στόλος), the Athe- 
 nians dared (aor. part.) to encounter (aor.) them, and conquered them. The 
 Athenians conquered the enemy and took their ships together with the men. 
 Associate not with bad men, but cleave ever to the good. Thamyris, who was 
 distinguished (aor. part.) for beauty and for (skill in) harp-playing, contended 
 (aor.) with the Muses for (the superiority in) (περί, w.gen.) music. Human na- 
 ture is mingled with a divine energy. Truth discourses with boldness (μετά, 
 w. gen.), and therefore men are displeased with it. It is easy to advise (aor.) 
 another (έτερος). The general exhorted the soldiers to fight bravely. Life is 
 like a theatre. Most of the Roman women were accustomed to wear ( == to 
 have) the same shoes as the men. Actions are not always like words. Homer 
 compares the race of men to leaves. The mind ruined by wine is in the same 
 case as (= suffers the same as) chariots, that have lost (part, pres.) their 
 charioteers. Some object to the laws of Lycurgus, that they are indeed suffi- 
 cient to call forth (προς, w. ace.) bravery, but are insufficient to. maintain ( = 
 for) justice. To please the multitude is to displease the wise. Esteem those as 
 true friends, who (§ 148, 6) censure faults. Quails have a pleasant song. Hu- 
 man destinies ( = the human, plur.) have been deplored by many wise men, who 
 believed (part.) that life is (inf.) a punishment. The gods rejoice in the virtue 
 of men. The bull wounds with the horn, the horse with the hoof, the dog with 
 the mouth, the boar with the tusk. The Thessalians practised (χρήσΰαι) law- 
 lessness more than justice. Helen was very (= much) distinguished (aor.), as 
 well by birth as for beauty and fame. Wisdom is far (by much) better than 
 riches. One can (= it is possible) neither safely use a horse without bridle, 
 nor riches without consideration. 
 
 §162. Prepositions. 
 1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whither and 
 where, so the prepositions denote other local relations, which desig- 
 
§ 1G3.] syntax. — prepositions. — αντί, πρό. 231 
 
 nate the extension (dimension) of things in space, viz. the juxta- 
 position of things (near to, before, by, around, with), and the local 
 opposites, above and below, luithin and without, before and behind, 
 etc. 
 
 2. The Case connected "with the preposition shows in which of 
 the three above-named relations — whence, whither, where — the local 
 relation expressed by the preposition, must be considered. 
 
 Thus, e. g. the preposition παρά denotes merely the local relation of vicinity, 
 the near or by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. ηλϋ-ε παρά τοΰ β ασ ί- 
 λεω ς, it denotes the direction ichence (he coxae from near the king, de chez le roi) ; 
 in connection with the Ace, e. g. ye c παρά τον βασιλέα, the direction 
 whither (he went into tlie vicinity or presence of the king) ; and in connection with 
 the Dat., e. g. ε στ η παρά τώ β ασιλεϊ, the where {he stood near the king) 
 
 3. The prepositions are divided according to their construction * 
 
 (a) Into prepositions with the Gen. : αντί, από, εκ, προ, ένεκα ; 
 
 (b) Into those with the Dat.: εν and συν ; 
 
 (c) Into those with the Ace. : ανά, εις, ώς ; 
 
 (d) Into those with the Gen. and Ace: όιά, κατά, υπέρ ; 
 
 (e) Into those with the Gen., Dat. and Ace: άμφί, περί, επί, μετά, πάρα, 
 προς and νπό. 
 
 4. The local relation expressed by prepositions is transferred to 
 the relations of time and causality (cause, effect, etc.) ; e. g. ν no 
 της γης είναι and ν π ο φόβου φεύγειν, to be under the earth, to 
 flee for, on account of, fear ; εκ της πόλεως άπελ&εϊν and 
 εξ ημέρας άπελχτεΐν, to depart out of the city, to depart imme- 
 diately after daybreak. 
 
 A. Prepositions with one Case. 
 
 §163. I. Prepositions with the Gen. alone. 
 
 1. Αντί, Lat. ante, original signification, over against, before, 
 opposite ; then for, instead of in the place of, e. g. στηναι άντ ί 
 τίνος, to stand before one ; δονλος αν τ ι β α σ ι λ ε' ω ς, a slave in- 
 stead of king ; αντί ημέρας ννξ εγ ενετό, instead of day there was 
 night ; avtf ov, wherefore, because. 
 
 2. Προ, pro, prae, before, for, agrees with αντί in all its rela- 
 tions, but is used in a much greater variety of relations ; e. g. στη- 
 ναι προ πυλών, to stand before the gates ; προ ημέρας, before 
 day (αντί is not used of time) ; μάχεσ&αι, άποΰανεϊν προ της 
 πατρίδος, to fight, to die for one's country ; δούλος προ δεσπότον, 
 a slave instead of master ; προ τώνδε, for these things, therefore. 
 
232 syntax. — prepositions. — από, εκ, ένεκα. [§ 163» 
 
 3. Λ π ό, ab, original signification, from, e. g. α π ο της πό- 
 λεως ηλΰεν; — of time: from, since, after, e. g. από δείπνου 
 εμαχέσαντο, after the meal ; — είναι, γίγνεσθαι από τίνος, to he de- 
 scended from some one ;^-τφ από των πολεμίων φόβω, on ac- 
 count of fear of (from) the enemy, like metus ab aliquo ; — of the 
 means : by, with, e. g. τρεφειν το ναντικόν από προςόδων, to 
 support the fleet by revenues ; — ά πό τίνος καλεΐσ&αι, to be called 
 by something. 
 
 4. Έκ, εξ, ex, original signification, out of, e.g. εκ της πόλεως 
 άπήλ&εν ; — of time immediately following : after, e. g. εξ ή μ ε ρ α ς, 
 ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day; εκ παίδων, from 
 childhood ; εξ αίθριας τ ε και ν η ν ε μι ας συνεδραμεν εξαπίνης 
 νέφη, after the clear weather clouds suddenly collected. — Ό ϋός πα- 
 ζηρ εν τηδε τη μια ήμερα εξ άφρονος σώφρων γεγένηται, your 
 father in this one day, from a senseless man has become discreet ; — 
 είναι, γίγνεσθαι εκ τ ι ν ο ς, to be descended from some one ; — accord- 
 ing to, by virtue of, after or for, e.g. ο της 6 xp ε ω ς τον ονείρου, 
 according to the appearance of the dream. — Όνομάζεσϋ~αι εκ τίνος, 
 to be named after or for some one. 
 
 5. "Ενεκα (placed before or after the Gen.), on account of, for 
 the sake of; — by means of 
 
 Remark. Also some adverbs and substantives are very often used as prepo- 
 sitions, and are tberefore called improper prepositions (see, however, § 157, et 
 seq.) ; e. g. πρόσΰεν and έμπροσθεν, before, δπισ&εν, behind, άνευ 
 and χωρίς, without, πλην, except, μεταξύ, between, μέχρι, until, χάριν 
 (usually placed after the Gen.), gratia, for the sake of. Instead of the Gen. of the 
 personal pronouns, χάριν regularly takes the possessive pronouns agreeing with 
 it in gender, number and case ; e. g. εμην, σήν χάριν, mea, tua gratia. 
 
 LXXXVII. Exercises on § 163. 
 
 No one would (§ 153, 2. c) take (aor.) a blind leader in place of one who could 
 see (= a seeing one). It is beautiful to exchange (aor. mid.) a mortal body for 
 immortal fame. Those who (§ 148, 6) have made proficiency (aor.) in philoso- 
 phy, become free instead of slaves ; truly rich instead of poor ; considerate (με- 
 τριότεροι) instead of unintelligent and stupid. Before action deliberate. A 
 (art.) friend often does for his (art.) friend, that (plur.) which he did not do (aor.) 
 for himself. Ephesus is distant a three days' journey from Sardis. The Helle- 
 spont was named from Helle, who there lost her life ( == who died [part.] in it). 
 When (part.) Socrates brought (= offered) small offerings from (his) small 
 (means), he believed (himself) to be no less meritorious (μειοϋσΰαι) than those 
 who (§ 148, 6) from (their) many and great (means) bring many and great (of- 
 ferings). Socrates lived very contentedly with very little property. We may 
 not judge the best (men) by ( = from) (their) exterior, but by (their) morals. It is 
 
§§ 164, 165.] syntax. — prepositions. — εν, συν, ανά. 233 
 
 easier to make (= place, aor.) evil out of good, than good out of evil. The 
 character reveals itself especially in (= out of) the actions. From the fruit 
 I know the tree. After the war came peace. Men plot against each other 
 for the sake of gold, fame (phir.) and pleasures. Semiramis reigned until 
 old age over the Assyrians. A beautiful action is not performed without 
 virtue. The gods bestow upon men nothing good (plur. gen.) and beautiful, 
 without labor and care. Tempe lies between Olympus and Ossa. Conceal 
 good fortune, lest it excite envy (= on account of envy). 
 
 §164. 2. Prepositions with the Dat. alone. 
 
 1. Έν denotes that one thing is in, upon, by or near another; it 
 indicates an actual union or contact of the two objects spoken of, 
 and hence is the opposite of εκ, e.g. Ι ν νήσω, εν γη, εν Σπάρ- 
 t ν ; — ε ν ο τι λ ο ι ς, ε ν τ όζο ι ς διαγωνίζεσ&αι ; εν η ρ ο μάγο ις, 
 εν τε & εοϊς και άν-&ρώποις [among) ; hence, before, coram ; 
 upon, εν ο ρ ε σ ι ν, εν ϊττπ ο ι ς, εν -& ρόνο ι ς ; — at, by, near to, 
 so especially of the names of cities, and particularly in describing 
 battles; e. g. ή εν Μαντινεία μάχη, the battle near Mant. — Of 
 time, εν τ ο ν τ φ τ φ χρόν φ, εν φ, in or within this time, while, 
 during the time that, εν πέντε η μ ε' ρ α ι ς. — Of the means and in- 
 strument with the expressions δ η λ ο ν ν, δ η λ ο ν εϊν α ι, σ η μ αί- 
 νειν εν τ ιν ι, to show by something ; e. g. οτι οι -&εοί σε ΐλεφ τε 
 και ευμενείς πέμηονσι, και εν ιεροΐς δηλον και εν ουράνι- 
 ο ι ς ση μείο ις, it is evident both by the victims and the signs from 
 heaven, that, etc. 
 
 Eeji. 1. With several verbs of motion, the Greek commonly uses εν with the 
 Dat., instead of εις with the Ace. ; e. g. τιΰέναι, κατατι&έναι, άναπΰέναι (to 
 consecrate) and the like. 
 
 2. Συν (ξυν, mostly old Attic). The original signification of 
 συν corresponds almost entirely with the Latin cum and the English 
 with, e. g. ο στρατηγός συν τοις στρατ ι ω τ αις ; — of assistance 
 or help, e. g. σνν -& ε φ, by the help of God; — σ υ ν τ άχει, συν 
 βία ποιεϊν τι. 
 
 Rem. 2. Here belongs α μ a, at tfie same time with, ivith, one of the adverbs 
 used as improper prepositions. 
 
 §165. 3. Prepositions with the Ace. alone. 
 I. Jiva. Original signification, up, on, upon. It forms the 
 strongest contrast to κατά with the Ace. As κατά is used to de- 
 note motion from a higher to a lower place, so ανά to denote motion 
 from a lower to a higher place ; e. g. ανά τον π ο τ α μ 6 ν, ανά 
 20* 
 
234 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS.— £iV, ως. [§ 165. 
 
 ρό ο ν πλεΐν, to sail up the stream (the opposite being κατ ά ποτ a" 
 μόν, down the stream). It commonly serves to denote local exten- 
 sion from a lower to a, higher place, from bottom to top : throughout, 
 through ; ανά την Ελλάδα — ανά τον π όλε μον τ ο ν τ ο ν, 
 (per, during). Thus ανά π άσ αν την ή μ β ρ αν, through the 
 whole dag, ανά πάν το έτος, during the whole gear; hence 
 without the article, ανά π άσ αν ή μ ε ρ αν, ανά πάν έτος, 
 every day, every year, daily, yearly, ανά νύκτα, per noctem, ανά 
 χρόν ο ν, in course of time ; — to denote the manner and way ; e. g. 
 ανά κράτος, up to the full strength, vigorously, ανά. μέρος, 
 by turns ; — in a distributive sense with numerals ; e. g. α ν ά πέντε 
 π α ρ α σ άγγ ας της ημέρας, five parasangs daily ; also with 
 numerals, like the English about (Lat. circa) ; e. g. αν ά διακόσια 
 ■στάδια, about two hundred stadia. 
 
 2. Εις (ες, old Attic), corresponds almost entirely with the Lat. 
 in with the Ace. ; e. g. ίε'ναι εις τ ι) ν πόλι ν, into the city ; — in a 
 hostile sense: contra, e. g. εστράτενσαν εις την Λττικην, into, 
 against Attica ; — with numerals : about, e. g. νανς εις τ άς τ ε- 
 τ ρακο σ Ίας, about four hundred ships ; — in a distributive sense 
 with numerals ; e. g. ε ι ς εκατόν, centeni, by hundreds, each hun- 
 dred, εις δύο, bini, two by two, two deep ; — in the presence of co- 
 ram, yet with the collateral idea of the direction whither ; e. g. λό- 
 γους ποιεΐσϋ-αι εις τον δη μον, to speak to or before the people. — 
 Of time: until, towards, upon, εις i σπ έ ρ αν, towards evening, 
 εις την ν στ εραίαν, upon the following day, εις τρίτη ν η μέ- 
 ρα ν, to or on the third day. — To denote purpose, object, respect ; e. g. 
 εχρησατο τοις χρημασιν εις την πόλι ν, he used the money for the 
 city ; εις κ ε ρ δ ο ς τι δραν, to do something for gain ; διαφέρειν τι- 
 νός εις ά ρ ε τ η ν, to differ from one in respect to virtue ; εις πάν- 
 τ a, in every respect. 
 
 3. Ώ, ς, ad, to, is used only with persons, or qbjects considered as 
 persons, to denote direction towards them ; e. g. ίέναι, πέμπειν ώ g 
 βασιλέα, ηκειν ως την Μι λ η τ αν (to the Milesians). 
 
 LXXXVIXL Exercises on §§ 164, 165. 
 (He) is the best (man), who {'όςπς) is nurtured amid the greatest necessities 
 (τα αναγκαιότατα). Said Diogenes: A friend is one soul, that (part.) dwells 
 (= lies) in two bodies. My sons, do not deposit (aor.) my body either in gold 
 or in silver, but restore it as quickly as possible to the earth. The Grecian ar- 
 mament conquered the barbarians at Salamis. With the help of the gods let 
 as go against the unjust. The acquisition of true friends is by no means 
 
§ 166.] syntax. — prepositions. — διά, κατά. 235 
 
 made by ;' — with) violence, but rather by beneficence. At daybreak (= with 
 the day) the soldiers began their march (= marched out, oft'). The Car» 
 duchians dwell on the mountains and are warlike. The vessels could not, 
 sail up the river. The deeds of Alcibiades were celebrated throughout all 
 Greeee. During the whole war the greatest harmony prevailed (= was) 
 among the generals. The three daughters of Phorcus, having (but) one eye, 
 made use of it alternately. The enemy pressed into the middle of the city. 
 Apollo was sent {aor.) out of heaven to the earth. Time, revealing everything, 
 brings (it) to the light. The Athenians performed (= displayed, aor.) many 
 beautiful actions before all men, as well in a private as in a public capacity. 
 The Lacedaemonians made an expedition against Attica. Employ the leisure 
 of ( = in) life in listening {inf.) to beautiful discourses. God brings like to 
 like. Agesilaus sent ambassadors to the king of the Persians. 
 
 . § 1G6. B. Prepositions with the Gen. and Ace, 
 
 1. Ala, original signification, through. A. With the Gen. through 
 and out again, e. g. εξήλαννε τον οτρατον διά της Θράκης επί 
 την 'Ελλάδα, through Thrace; — through, e.g. διά πεδίον, per 
 campum, διά πολέμιας πορεύεσΌ'αι, to march through a hostile 
 country. — Of time to denote extension through a period : through, 
 after, properly, to the end of the period, through and out, e. g. OV 
 'έτους, through the year ; διά πολλον, μακρόν, ολίγον χ ρο- 
 φό ν, after (through) a long, short time ; διά, παντός τον χρό- 
 νου τοιαύτα ονκ εγένετο, throughout the whole time. So also of an 
 action repeated at successive intervals, e. g. διά τρίτον ετονς 
 ουνψααν, every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three 
 years; διά πέμπτου 'έτους, διά πέντε ε τ ων, quinto quoque 
 anno; διά τρίτης ημέρας, every third day. — To denote the 
 means, e. g. δι 6 φ -& αλμών 6 ρ αν, to see with, by means of, the 
 eyes ; — the manner and way, e. g. διά σπονδής, with earnestness, 
 earnestly; διά τάχονς, with speed, speedily. — B. With the Ace, 
 of time, e. g. διά νύκτα, per noctem ; — to denote the cause, means, 
 e. g. δ ι ά τον τ ο, τ αν τ a, therefore, because of this ; διά βονλάς, 
 by means of counsels ; διά μην ι v. 
 
 2. Κατά, original signification, from above down (desuper). 
 A. With the Gen., e. g. εορίπτονν εαντονς κατά τον τείχους 
 κάτω, threw themselves down from the wall ; — down into, e. g. κατα- 
 δεδυκέναι κατά της Ό• αλάττης, to go down into the sea ; — un- 
 der, e.g. κατά γης. — To denote the cause, author: de, concerning, 
 e. g. λέγειν κατά τίνος, dicere de aliqua re, especially in a hos- 
 tile sense, e. g. λέγειν κατ ά τίνος, against one ; \ρεύδεσ{ται κατά 
 τον Ο ε ο ν, to lie against God. — Β. With the Ace, κατά forms a 
 
236 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS. — WISQ. [§ 166. 
 
 strong contrast with ανά, in respect to the point where the motion 
 of the action begins, but agrees with ανά in denoting the direction 
 to an object and the extension over it, the one being down through, 
 the other up through. The use of ανά in prose is not so frequent 
 as that of κατά. — To denote local extension from above downwards : 
 throughout, through, over, e. g. κ a if Ελλάδα, κατά πα α αν 
 την γη ν; it often signifies, over against, opposite to, e. g. κείται ή 
 Κεφαλληνία κατά Λκαρν αν ίαν, opposite to Acar. — Of time, to 
 denote its extension or duration: during, through, e. g. κατά τον 
 αν τον χρόν ον, during, or in the course of the same time ; κατ a 
 τον τιρότ ερον πόλεμο v. — To denote purpose, object, e. g. κ α- 
 τά & ε αν ηκειν, spectatum venisse ; conformity {secundum), respect, 
 reason, e.g. κατά ν ό μ ο ν, according to, agreeable to law ; κατ ά 
 λόγ ov, ad rationem, pro ratione, agreeable to reason ; κατά γνώ- 
 μη ν την ε μην; κατά τον τ ο, hoc respectu, hence propter hoc, 
 κατά φ ν σ ι ν, secundum naturam ; κατά δνν αμιν,ίο the best of 
 one's ability; κατά κράτος, with all ones might; κατά μικ- 
 ρόν, nearly, by degrees ; κατ άν&ρωπον, according to the man- 
 ner or standard of man; — to denote an indefinite measure, e. g. 
 κα& εξή κοντά ε τ η, about sixty years; — to denote manner and 
 way, e. g. κατ ά τάχος, siuiftly, κατ ά β ν ντ ν χι αν, by chance ; 
 — in a distributive sense, e. g. κατ ά κ ω μ α ς, vicatim ; κατά μή- 
 να, monthly, καϋ^ η με ρ αν, daily, κατ έτος, yearly, κ a ft' έπ~ 
 τ ά, septeni, by sevens. 
 
 3. 'Τ π ε ρ, super, over. A. With the Gen., e. g. νπερ γης. — 
 To denote the cause : for, for the good of, in behalf of, e. g. μά- 
 χεσ&αι νπερ της πατρίδος, to fight for one's country, as it were 
 to fight standing over it ; ο νπερ της 'Ελλάδος ϋάνατος, death 
 in behalf of Greece. — B. With the Ace. : over, beyond, e. g. ρίπτειν 
 νπερ τον δόμο ν, to throw over the house ; νπερ Έλληςπον- 
 τον οίκεΐν, beyond, i. e. on the opposite side of; νπερ την ήλι- 
 κίαν, νπερ δνναμιν, νπερ άν&ρωπον, beyond the nature or 
 strength of man, νπερ τ ά τ εττ α ρ άκοντα ε τ η. 
 
 LXXXIX. JSxercises on § 166. 
 There is a middle path that leads neither through dominion nor through sla- 
 very, but through freedom. Socrates conferred the greatest benefits (τά μέγιστα 
 ώφελεϊν) upon men, by teaching wisdom to all who wished (it) (§ 148, 6). 
 The river Euphrates flows through the middle of Babylon. The presidents of 
 the cities come together every three years. Those who (§ 148, 6) learn every- 
 thing by their own efforts (=by themselves), are called self-taught. Apollo 
 
§ 167.] syntax. — prepositions. — άμφί, περί. 237 
 
 benefitted the human race by oracles and other sen-ices. He who (§ 148, 6) 
 is indolent for the sake of pleasure, may (§ 153, 2. c.) very soon be deprived (aor.) 
 of that charm of inactivity, for the sake of which he is indolent. Praise not a 
 worthless man because of (his) wealth. Some rivers penetrate into the earth 
 and flow (— are borne) a long way, concealed under the earth. The island At- 
 lantis sank (part, aor.) under the earth and disappeared (aor.). He who (§ 148, 
 6) contrives a snare against another, turns (περοτρέπείν) it often against him- 
 self. During the period of the holy war, great (= much) disorder and dissen- 
 sion prevailed (== was) over all Greece. Do not impose upon others a greater 
 (charge) than their abilities permit (= than according to ability). It is neces- 
 sary that (ace. w. inf.) men live according to laws. The city was in danger of 
 being ( = to be) taken (aor.) by force. A bad man who (part.) obtains (aor.) 
 power, is not wont to bear good fortune as man ought (= suitably to man). 
 The Athenians annually sent to Crete seven boys and seven maidens (as) food 
 for the Minotaur (= to the M. as food). God has given (aor.) us the powers, 
 by which we are to bear (fid.) all the events of destiny. The sun passes over 
 the earth. Overhanging ( = over) the city is a hill. Arsamus governed the 
 Arabians and Aethiopians dwelling over Egypt. Alcestis, the daughter of Pe- 
 lias. was desirous (aor.) to die (aor.) for her husband. It is very dishonorable to 
 shun (aor.) death for (one's) country. Clearchus waged war with the Thracians 
 dwelling beyond the Hellespont. It is folly to attempt (= to do) something 
 above (one's) capacity. EOma Pompilius, the most fortunate of the Roman 
 kings, is said to have lived above eighty years. 
 
 §167. C. Prepositions with the Gen., Oat. and A>so. 
 
 1. Λ μ (pi denotes that one thing is around another {on both sides), 
 near, close to, another. A. With the Gen. seldom used of place, e. g. 
 a u φ\ της π όλβοι ς οικεΐν, to dioell around the city. — Of cause : 
 about, for, for the sake of e. g. μαχεσ&αι άμφί τίνος, to fight 
 about, for something. — B. With the Dat., as with the Gen.— C. With 
 the Ace., e. g. ά μ φ} την πόλιν. — To denote time and number 
 indefinitely, e. g. άμφί εαπεραν, about evening ; άμφιτονς 
 μ ν ρ ίο ν ς, about ten thousand. 
 
 2. Περί signifies all around, round, containing the idea of a cir- 
 cuit or circumference, and in this respect differing from άμφί, which 
 signifies properly on both sides. A. With the Gen. — In a local re- 
 lation it is not used in prose, but the more frequently in a causal 
 sense: concerning, for, about, on account of, e. g. μάχεσ&αι, άπο- 
 &ανεΙν περί της π α τ ρίδ ο ς, to fight, die for one' 's country ; λέ- 
 γειν περί τίνος, to speak about something ; φοβεΐσ&αι περί πα- 
 τρίδος; — to denote value, in the phrases περί πολλού, περί 
 πλείονος, περί πλείστον, περί ολίγον, περί οί'δενος 
 ποιεΐσχται or ηγεΐα&αί τι, to value high, higher, etc. — Β. With the 
 
238 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS. επί. [§ 167. 
 
 Dat. : around, on, near, e.g. περί τ αΐς κεφαλαϊς εϊχον τιάρας, 
 around, on their heads ; περί trj χει ρ ι χρνσονν δακτύλων φερειν ; 
 - — in a causal sense : about, for, on account of, e. g. δεδιεναι πεοί 
 τ ιν ι, to fear for, about one. — C. With the Ace. : about, near, by, 
 throughout, e. g. φκονν Φοίνικες περί it a 6 αν την Σ ι κελί αν 
 (about, throughout). — To denote time and number indefinitely, e. g. 
 περί τούτους τους χρόνους, about these times; περί μύ- 
 ριους στρατιώτ ας. — In a causal sense to denote respect, e. g. 
 σωφρονεϊν περί τους ■& εού ς, in respect to the gods. 
 
 3. 'Επί signifies primarily, upon, at, near. A. With the Gen., 
 e. g. τα άχϋ-η οι μεν άνδρες ε πι των κεφαλών φορονσιν, αι δε 
 γυναίκες επί των ώμων, the men carry burdens on their heads, the 
 women on their shoulders ; μένειν επι τι] ς α ρ χ η ς, ε π Ι της γνώ- 
 μ η ς, to remain in; οι επι τ ώ ν πραγμάτων, those intrusted 
 with business ; — -towards, if the idea is that one is striving to reach 
 a place, e. g. πλεΐν επι Σάμου [according to § 158, 3. (b)]. — In 
 relation to time, to denote the time in or during which something 
 takes place, e. g. i π Ι Κυρ ου βασιλεύοντος, during, in, under 
 the reign of Gyrus. — To denote the occasion, the author, e. g. κα~ 
 λεϊσ&αι επί τίνος, to be named after, for one; conformity, e. g. 
 κρίνειν τι επί τίνος, to judge according to something. — B. With 
 the Dat. : upon, at, by, e. g. inl τοις δόρασι ροιάς ειχον χρνσάς, 
 upon the spears ; οίκεΐν inl & αλάττη, by the sea, upon the sea- 
 coast. — To denote dependence, e. g. in ι τινι είναι, to be in the 
 power of any one ; γίγνεσθαι in ί τιν ι, to come into the power of 
 any one ; — condition, purpose, object, motive, e. g. in ι τούτω, hac 
 conditione, on this condition ; inl κ ακφ άν&ρώπον σίδηρος άνευ- 
 ρηται, in perniciem hominis ; — cause, occasion, e. g. χαίρειν επί 
 τινι, to rejoice at something. — C. With the Ace. : upon, on, over, 
 towards (different from επί with the Gen., since with the Ace. mere- 
 ly the direction to a place is denoted), to, e. g. άναβαίνειν εφ 3 In- 
 nov; in άν&ρώηονς (among). — Of time: until, εφ' εσηε- 
 ρ αν; for, during, per, inl ηολλάς ημέρας. — To denote pur- 
 pose, object, e. g. επί ϋ-ηραν ίεναι, venatum ire; in a hostile sense: 
 against, e. g. στρατεύεσ&αι inl Πέρσας, to make an expedition 
 against the Persians. 
 
 XC. Exercises on § 167, 1, 2, 3. 
 The poets have uttered such language (= words) about the gods themselves, 
 as no one would dare (aor., § 153, 2, c) to utter about (his) enemies. Consider 
 first, how (δπωο) the adviser has managed (aor.) his own (affairs) ; for he who 
 
§ 167.] syntax. — prepositions.—• μετά. 239 
 
 (§ 148, 6) has not (μη) reflected (aor.) upon his own (concerns), will never de- 
 cide well upon another's. Carthage waged war with Rome for Sicily, twenty- 
 four years. All men value (their) kindred more than strangers. With reason 
 dost thou esteem the soul more highly than the body. Gyges found a corpse 
 that had on the hand a golden ring. Some of the Persians had both necklaces 
 about the neck, and bracelets about the hands. The motion of the earth around 
 the sun makes the year (ένιαυτός), but the motion of the moon around the earth, 
 the months. The Spartan boys (= of the S.) as (part.) they went round the 
 altar of Orthia, were scourged by law. Be (γίγνομαή such towards thy parents, 
 as (οίος) thou wouldst (§ 153, 2, c) wish (aor.) thy children to be (ace. w. inf.) 
 towards thee. No human pleasure seems to lie (= είναι) closer at hand (kyyv- 
 τέρω, w. gen.), than joy on account of honors. The enemy, despairing of (aor ) 
 their cause, about (άμφί) midnight abandoned the city. There are said to be 
 about one hundred and twenty thousand Persians. Each of the Cyclops had 
 one eye in the forehead. In Egypt, the men cany burdens on their (=the) 
 head, but the women on their shoulders. The soldiers returned home. After 
 the battle Croesus fled to Sardis. Under Cccrops and the first kings until The- 
 seus, Attica was inhabited in cities. All the children of the better (sup.) Per- 
 sians were educated at the court (at -dvpat) of (the) king. Strive not after that 
 which (§ 148, 6) is not (μή) in thy power. Macedonia was in the power of 
 the Athenians, and brought tribute. Dost thou consider that which (τά, w.paii,.) 
 happens for thy (= the) advantage, as the work (plur.) of chance or of intelli- 
 gence 1 Eor epic poetry we most admire Homer, for tragedy, Sophocles, for 
 statuary, Polycletus, for painting, Zeuxis. We ought (χρή) not to be displeased 
 at (the) good fortune of others, but rejoice for the sake of (διά) our ( = the) 
 common origin. The Nile flows (=is borne) from south to north. Xerxes 
 collected (part, aor.) an innumerable army and marched against Greece. So- 
 crates not only exhorted men to virtue, but also led them onward (npoayecv, aor.) 
 to it. Jupiter permitted (aor.) Sarpedon, the king of (the) Lycians, to Hve for 
 three generations. 
 
 4. Μετά (from μέσος) denotes the being in the midst of some- 
 thing. A. With the Gen. to denote association, connection, and 
 'participation loith ; e. g. μ ε τ ά ν & ρ ω π ω ν είναι, to be among men. 
 Είναι μετά τ ivog, to be with, on the side of one. 'Τμΐν οι πρόγο- 
 νοι τοντο το γέρας εκτήσαντο και κατελιπον μετά πολλών και 
 μεγάλων κινδύνων, with many and great dangers ; — to denote 
 conformity : μ ε τ α των νόμων, μ,ετά τον λόγο ν, in confor- 
 mity zvith the laius, with reason. — B. With the Dat., only poetic : 
 among, e. g. μετ άϋανάτοις. — G. With the Ace, in prose it is used 
 almost exclusively to denote that one thing follows another in space, 
 time and order ; c. g. ί'πεσ&αι μετά τίνα, after ; μετά τον βίον, 
 afterlife; ποταμός μέγιστος μετ ά "Ι στ ρ ο ν, the greatest after the 
 Ister, and in the phrase μετ ά χείρας εχειν τι, to hold something 
 between, in the hands. 
 
, 240 syntax. — prepositions. — παρά. [§ 167. 
 
 5. Παρά signifies the heing near something: by, near, by the side 
 of. A. With the Gen. to denote a removal from near, from beside 
 a person : from, e. g. ελϋ-εΐν παρά τίνος, to come from some one. 
 — To denote the author, e. g. πεμφ&ηναι παρά τίνος, to be sent 
 by some one (§ 150, Rem. 4), άγγελοι, πρέσβεις παρά τίνος, en- 
 voys from any one; άγγέλλειν παρά τίνος, τα παρά τίνος, 
 commissions, commands, etc. of any one ; — μαν&άνειν παρά τίνος, 
 axoveiv παρά τίνος, to learn, to hear from. — B. "With the Dat. to 
 denote rest near a place or object, e. g. εστη παρά τ φ βασιλεΐ. 
 — C. With the Ace. to denote direction or motion so as to come 
 near a person or thing, e. g. άφικεσ&αι παρά Κροίσο ν, to Croe- 
 sus; — direction or motion along by a place: along near, by, beyond, 
 e. g. παρά την Βαβυλώνα παριεναι, to go by Babylon. Hence, 
 παρά δόξαν, praeter opinionem ; παρ' ελπίδα, contrary to 
 hope; παρά φύσιν, παρά το δίκαιον, παρά τους ο ρ- 
 κ ου ς, π αρά δύν αμιν, beyond one's power ; also, besides, praeter, 
 παρά τ αϋ τ a, praeter haec, besides these things ; — to denote local 
 extension near an object : along, e. g. π α ρ ά τον Λσ ωπόν, along 
 the Α. — To denote the extension of time, e. g. παρ η με ρ αν, πα- 
 ρά τον πόλεμο ν, during the day, the war ; παρά την πόσιν, 
 inter potandum, while drinking. So also of particular, important 
 points of time, during which something takes place, e, g. παρ αυ- 
 τόν τον κίνδυν ov,in ipso discrimine, in the very moment of dan- 
 ger. — In a causal relation to denote a comparison, e. g. ηλίου εκλεί- 
 ψεις πυκνότεραι ήσαν παρά τά εκ του πρίν χρόνου μνημο- 
 νευόμενα, eclipses of the sun were more frequent compared with 
 (than) those mentioned in former time. 
 
 XCI. Exercises on § 167, 4, 5. 
 Strive (pursue) after reputable pleasures. No one deliberates safely in ( = 
 with) anger. It is noble to fight with many and brave allies. The good after 
 death (= dead) lie not in (= with) oblivion, but ever bloom in memory. The 
 Athenians, amid very many hardships and very famous contests, and dangers 
 very honorable, liberated Greece, and highly exalted (μεγίστην άποδεικννναί, 
 aor.) their native country. The judge ought to render judgment conformably 
 to the laws. After life the wicked await their punishment (plur.), but the vir- 
 tuous are forever happy (= abide in happiness). After the sea-fight at Sala- 
 mis, Sophocles, who (part.) was still a boy, having been anointed, danced naked. 
 The Chians, first of the Greeks after the Thessalians and Lacedaemonians, made 
 use of slaves. Of all tilings (κτήμα) in life, after the gods, the soul is most di- 
 vine. A messenger came from Cyaxares, who (part.) said that an embassy ot 
 Jews had arrived (= was present), and brought a very beautiful dress from him 
 
§ 167.] syntax. — prepositions. — προς. 241 
 
 to Cyrus. Prometheus stole (part aor.) fire from the gods and brought (aor.) 
 it in a reed to men. The praises of good men are very pleasant. The gods 
 rejoice most in honors from the most pious men. What is not (μη) manifest to 
 men, it is allowable (for them) to ascertain from the gods by divination. It is 
 said, that (ace. w. inf.) the invention of the sciences was given (aor.) by Jupiter 
 to the Muses. In (κατά) the war against the Messenians, the Pythia gave as a 
 response (χράω, aor.) to the Spai'tans, that they should ask (=to ask, aor.) a 
 general from the Athenians. Minos pretended to have learned his (= the) laws 
 from Jupiter himself. The Persian boys ( = of the Persians) are educated not 
 with (the) mother but with a (= the) teacher. The good are honored among gods 
 and men. Cyrus sent ambassadors to the king of the. Persians. Osiris is said 
 to have travelled from Egypt through Arabia to the Eed Sea. The river Seli- 
 nus flows by the temple of Diana in Ephesus. The Amazons dwelt (aor.) on 
 the river Thermodon. A word unseasonably ( = against season) thrown out, 
 often destroys ( = subverts) life. Paris, contrary to all justice (δίκαων, plur.), 
 carried off (aor.) the wife of his (= the) host Menelaus to Troy. The Roman 
 lawgiver (= of the Romans) gave (aor.) to (art.) fathers full power over (κατά, 
 w. gen.) their (= the) sons during their (= the) whole life-time (== time of life). 
 No man (=no one of men) will be fortunate during his (=the) whole life. 
 In comparison with (art.) other creatures, men live as gods, since (pari.) by (their) 
 nature, body and mind, they are superior (κρατιστενω). 
 
 6. IT ρ ο ς (arising from προ) signifies before (in the presence of). 
 A. With the Gen. to denote direction or motion from the presence 
 of an object, especially in reference to the situation of a place, e. g. 
 οϊν.εΐν προς νότου άνεμου, towards the south, like ab oriente. 
 Sometimes it is ίο be translated by in the view of, in the eyes of, etc. 
 (properly before one), e. g. ο τι -διχαιότατον άο,Ι προς &εών και 
 προς άν&ρώπων, τον το πράξω, in the eyes of, in the judgment 
 of gods and men ; — also, for the advantage of any one, on the side of, 
 for some one, e. g. δοχεΐς μοι τον λόγον προς εμοΰ λέγειν, to speak 
 for me. — To denote the cause, occasion and author, hence with pas- 
 sive and intransitive verbs, e. g. άζιμάζεσίΥαι προς Πεισιστρά- 
 του, to be dishonored by Pisistratus ; — in oaths, e. g. προς ft ε ων, 
 per deos, by the gods, properly before the gods. — B. With the Dat. to 
 denote local rest before, near or by an object, e.g. προς tf { πόλει, 
 before, by the city, προς τοις χριταις, before the judges, είναι, 
 γίγνεσ&αι προς τινι, to be earnestly engaged in something, e. g. 
 προς π ρ ά γ μ α σ ι, προς τ φ λόγω, in business, in conversation. 
 Then, in addition to, besides, e. g. π ρ 6 ς τον τ cp, προ ς τούτοις, 
 j-raster ea.—Q. With the Ace. to denote the local limit, direction or 
 motion before an object, both in a friendly and hostile sense, e. g. 
 fllhTv προς τίνα, to, άποβλεπειν προς τίνα, upon, λέγειν πρόg 
 τίνα; to, σνμμαχίαν ποιεΐσ&αι προς τ ίνας, with, μάχεσ&αι, πο- 
 
 21 
 
242 syntax.— prepositions.— tw>. [§ 167. 
 
 λεμεΐν προς τ ι ν a, against, προς μέση μβρίαν, towards, αδει-ρ 
 προς αν λ 6 ψ, to sing to the flute, i. e. to the flute's accompaniment. 
 — To denote indefinite time, e. g. προς η με ρ αν, towards day- 
 break. Also in reference to indefinite number. — In a causal sense 
 to denote purpose, e. g. παντοδαπά ενρημενα ταΐς πόλεσι προς 
 φυλακή ν καϊ σ ωτηρίαν, various schemes were devised to guard 
 mid save the cities; — conformity, conformable, according to, e. g. 
 προς την oipiv τ αν την τον γάμον τούτον έσπευσα, according 
 to this view. So κρίνειν τι προ ς τι, to judge according to some- 
 thing. Also, προς β ί a ν, by force, against one's will, προς ανάγ- 
 κην, necessarily, forcibly ; — hence, on account of, propter, e.g. προ ς 
 τ αΰτ a, properly, in conformity with these things, hence, on this ac- 
 count, therefore; — hence to denote a comparison, usually with the idea 
 of superiority (prae) : in relation to, in comparison with, before, e. g. 
 λήρός εστί προς Κινησ ία ν, he is mere talk, nonsense, compared 
 with Ginesias ; — in general to denote a respect, e. g. σκοπεϊν, βλεπειν 
 προς τι, διαφερειν προς αρετή ν, to differ in respect to virtue, 
 7. 'Τπό, sub, original signification, under. A. With the Gen. to 
 denote motion from a depth out: out from under, forth from, e. g. 
 ν π απήνης λύειν ίππους, to loose the horses from the chariot ; — to 
 denote rest under an object, e. g. υπ 6 γης οίκεϊν. — To denote the 
 author, with passive and intransitive verbs, e. g. κτείνεσ&αι υπό 
 τίνος, άπο&ανεϊν υπό τίνος, to be put to death by some one ; — 
 the cause, occasion, active influence, e. g. υ π ο καν ματ ο ς, for, on 
 account of because of the heat, υπ οργής, from, out of anger ; — to 
 denote the means and instrument, particularly with reference to the 
 accompaniment of musical instruments, e. g. εστρατεύοντο υπο σαλ- 
 πίγγων, they marched by the sound of trumpets ; υπ 3 αύλον χο- 
 ρεύειν, to dance by the music of the flute. — B. With the Dat., e. g. 
 ν π ο γϊ} είναι, etc. as with the Gen. — C. With the Ace. to denote 
 direction or motion towards and under, e. g. Ιίναι υπο γ ην; exten- 
 sion under an object, e. g. υπεστιν οικήματα υπο γ ή ν, are under the 
 earth. — To denote time approximately, e. g. υ π 6 νύκτα, sub noc- 
 tem, towards night ; — to denote extension of time, e. g. υπο την 
 νύκτα. 
 
 Remark. When the article (alone or with a substantive) in connection wiih 
 a preposition, expresses a substantive-idea, and the preposition εν ought to be 
 used, then this preposition is attracted by the verb denoting the direction whence, 
 and is changed into από or έ /c; e. g. Οι εκ της αγοράς αν&ρωποι απίφν- 
 γον, the men belonging ίο the market-place fled, instead of οι έν τη αγορά dp- 
 Φρωποι εκ της αγοράς άπέφνγον. 
 
§ 168.] SYNTAX. VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -Ztog. 243 
 
 XCII. Exercises on § 167, 6, 7. 
 Rhampsinitus, a king of Egypt, erected (== placed, aor.) two statues, of which 
 the Egyptians call the (one) standing (per/.) towards (the) north, summer, the 
 (one) towards (the) south, winter. Arabia is the most remote of the inhabited 
 countries towards the south. (It is) time for us to deliberate about ourselves, 
 that we mar not (that not = μη), in the judgment both of gods and of men, ap- 
 pear (άττοοαΐνεσΰαί) very mean and dishonorable. The Persians were deprived 
 (aor.) bv the Lacedaemonians of the supremacy of Asia. It is not for the ad- 
 vantage of your reputation, to εϊη against the public (= common) laws and 
 against our ( = the) ancestors. By the gods, abstain from injustice. Stesieho- 
 rus, the poet, was magnificently interred (aor.) in Catana, near the gate called 
 from him (the) Stesichorean. Xear the dwelling of the king, a lake affords an 
 abundance of -water. Socrates was zealously employed in discourse. Alcibia- 
 des was beautiful, and more than this, also very brave. Aristippus. the Thes- 
 salian. comes to Cyrus, and asks of him about two hundred mercenaries. 
 The Megareans buried their (=the) dead, turning them towards the east, but 
 the Athenians towards the west. Xicocles demeaned himself [aor.) towards the 
 citizens with (μετά) very great (=mueh) lenity. The Greeks fought (aor.) 
 against the Persians. Towards evening the enemy retreated. Socrates was 
 very much hardened ( = very enduring) against winter and summer and all 
 hardships. (All) estimable men have the same disposition towards their ( = 
 the) inferiors as their (=the) superiors have towards them. The Thracians 
 danced to the flute with their (= the) arms. The exercise (phtr.) of the body 
 is useful for the health. Let us not judge happiness by (= according to) money, 
 but by virtue and wisdom. Socrates despised even-thing human, in comparison 
 with (art.) counsel from the gods. A very beautiful fountain flows under the 
 plane-tree. Hector was slain by Achilles. Already many masters had been 
 violently (= with violence) put to death (α-οϋνήσκείν, aor.) by the slaves. Ar- 
 chestratus travelled over (aor.) all lands and seas from a love of pleasure. The 
 rich often do not enjoy their (=the) prosperity from its (=the) unvarying 
 pleasure. The soldiers go to the battle to the sound of trumpets. All (the) 
 gold upon earth and under earth (ace.) is not equivalent to virtue. Dionysius 
 founded a city in Sicily just (αϊτός) at the foot of mount Aetna, and called it 
 Adranum. Towards night the enemy retreated. Towards the end of the war 
 there arose a violent famine. 
 
 § 168. Remarks on the construction of Verbal Adjectives in -tiog, 
 -Tta, -rtov, and on the construction of the Comparative and Su- 
 perlative. 
 1. Verbal adjectives derived from transitive verbs, i. e. from such 
 
 as govern the Ace., are used either like the Lat. verbal in -dum, 
 
 impersonally in the neuter, -τίον or -tea [§ 147, (c)], or personally. 
 
 like the Lat. participle in -dus ; but verbal adjectives derived from 
 
 intransitive verbs, can be used only impersonally. 
 
244 SYNTAX. USE OF THE PRONOUNS. [§ 109. 
 
 2. The verbal adjective when used impersonally takes its object 
 in the same Case as the verb from winch it is derived. The per- 
 son acting stands in the Dat., called the Dat. of the agent [§ 161, 
 2, (d)]. 
 
 Άσκητέον (or -τέα) εστί σοι την αρετή ν or άσκητέα εστί σοι ή αρετή, 
 you must practise virtue, or virtue must be practised by you. Έπϊ&υμητέον εστί 
 σο l της αρετής, you must desire virtue. Έπιχεφητέον εστί σο ι τ φ έργω, 
 you must attempt the work. Κολαστέον (or -τέα) εστί σο l τον αν&ρωπονοΐ 
 κολαστέος εστί σο ι ό άν&ρωπος, you must punish the man. So with deponent 
 verbs ; e. g. Μψητέον (or -τέα) εστί σοι τους άγα&ονς (from μιμεΐσϋ-αί 
 τίνα) or μιμητέοι, είσί σ ο t οι άγαΰ-οί, you must imitate the good. 
 
 3. When two objects are compared, the one by which the com- 
 parison is made, is put either in the Gen. [§ 158, 7, (β)~], or is con- 
 nected by the conjunction η (than) ; e. g. ό τζατηρ μείζων εστί τον 
 νιο ν or 6 π. μ. εστίν, η 6 υιός, is greater than the son. 
 
 Remark. When two qualities belonging to an object are compared with each 
 other, both are expressed by the comparative adjective and are connected by ή ; 
 e. g. ϋάττων, η σοφώτερός εστίν, cderior, quam prudentior, he is more swift than 
 prudent. So also with adverbs ; e. g. τοντο ΰάττον, η σοφώτερον έποίησας, cek- 
 rius, quam prudentius, you did this with more dispatch than prudence. 
 
 XCIII. Exercises on § 168. 
 We must shun a (= the) dissolute friend. The citizens must obey the laws. 
 We must attempt noble actions. We must despise dangers for the sake of vir- 
 tue. We must avoid (= keep ourselves from) him who (part, pres.) is governed 
 by (art.) evil passions. We must put the hand even to difficult undertakings. 
 
 §169. Remarks on the use of the Pronouns. 
 
 1. The subject, predicate, attribute and object are expressed by 
 pronouns, when the parts of the sentence containing the pronouns, 
 are not to represent the ideas of objects or qualities, but when it is 
 merely to be shown, that an object or quality refers either to the 
 speaker himself or to another (second or third) person or thing (§ 55). 
 
 2. All the rules which have been given on the substantive and 
 adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective pronouns ; still, a 
 few remarks are here necessary on the use of the personal pronouns. 
 
 3. The substantive personal pronouns in the Nom., viz. εγώ, αν, 
 αντός, -ή, -6, ημείς, etc., and the adjective (possessive) pronouns as 
 attributives, e. g. ε μ ο ς ττατηρ, are, in Greek, as in Latin, expressed 
 only when they are specially emphatic, hence particularly in anti- 
 theses ; e. g. και σ ν ταντα επραζας ; καΐ ΰο g πατήρ άπεΰανεν ; — 
 
§ 160.] SYNTAX. — USE OF TIIE PRONOUNS. 215 
 
 εγώ μεν car ει μι, σν δε μ&8. But where this is not the case, they 
 are omitted, the substantive pronouns being supplied by the endings 
 of the verb, and the adjective pronouns by the article prefixed to 
 the substantive; e. g. γράφω, γράφεις, γράφει — η ^ν τ7 ]9 είπε μοι 
 (my mother) — οι γονείς στεογονσι τα τ ε υ. ν a (love their children). 
 See above, § 5G and § 59, also § 148, 3. 
 
 Rem. 1. Α υ τ ό ς in the Nom. is not generally used as the subject of the verb, 
 but for the most part as an intensive pronoun (self, very), agreeing with another 
 pronoun expressed or understood, or with a substantive. In some instances, 
 however, it seems to be used as the simple subject of the verb, though even then 
 retaining something of its intensive force ; e. g. 6 πατήρ αυτός έφοβήϋ-η ; σϋ 
 αυτός έτυψάς με; αυτός εφη. It has its intensive force also, when it agrees 
 with a pronoun or substantive in any other Case than the Nom. — The demon- 
 strative ούτος (hie) and δ δ ε, usually refer to what is near, he, this man, this 
 thing ; the demonstrative έ κ ε Ι ν ο ς ( ilk), on the contrary, properly refers to what 
 is more remote, the person or thing there, that person or thing, but sometimes to what 
 immediately precedes. Hence when εκείνος and ούτος are used in opposition 
 to each other, the latter refers to what is nearer, the former, to what is more re- 
 mote, though the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Lat. hie and ille. 
 
 Rem. 2. The difference between the accented and enclitic forms of the perso- 
 nal pronouns, e. g. εμον and μου, lies in the greater or less emphasis with which 
 they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented forms are always used, 
 e. g. in antitheses ; e. g. έ μ ο ν μεν κατεγέ?.ασε, σε δε επψεσεν, he derided me, 
 but praised you. — On the use of the Gen. of substantive, instead of adjective (pos- 
 sessive) pronouns, see § 148, Rem. 8 and § 59. — On the possessive pronouns 
 taking the word in apposition, in the Gen., e. g. ημέτερος αυτών πατήρ, see Rem. 
 4, below. 
 
 4. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something before 
 named, this being opposed to itself as an object (in the Gen., Dat., 
 Ace, or in connection with a preposition) or as an attribute. 
 
 Ό σοφός έ αυτού κρατεί, the wise man rules himself. Σϋ σ ε αν τ ώ αρέσκεις, 
 you are pleased icith yourself. Ό παις εαυτόν επαινεί, the boy praises himself. 
 Οι γονεϊς άγαπώσι τους εαυτών παϊδας. Τνώΰι σ ε α υ τ όν. Ούτος ό άντ/ρ 
 πάντα δι' έαυ τ οϋ μεμά&ηκεν. Ό στρατιρ/ός ϋπό τών έ αυτού στρατιωτών 
 άπέΰανεν, ivas killed by his own soldiers. 
 
 5. The object before named, to which the reflexive pronouns re- 
 fer, is : 
 
 (a) The subject of the sentence, as in the examples of No. 4 ; 
 
 (b) An object of the sentence, e. g. Κνρος διηνεγχε τών άλλων 
 βασιλέων, τών αρχάς δι εαυτών χ,τηοαμένων, C. differed 
 from other kings, who acquired sovereignty by themselves. Mi• 
 οονμεν τους άν&ρώπονς τονς φ&ονονντας ε αν τ ο ΐς, we hate 
 
 21* 
 
246 SYNTAX.— JpSE OF THE PRONOUNS. [§ 169. 
 
 men who bear ill-will towards themselves. Λπο σ αν τ ο ν εγώ 
 ϋε διδάξω. 
 
 6. In Greek, as in Latin, the reflexive pronoun may be used in 
 the lelations above named, with the construction of the Ace. and 
 the Inf., or of the Part., and even when it stands in a subordinate 
 clause. In this case, the English language often uses the persona 
 pronouns him, her, it, instead of the reflexive pronouns. 
 
 Ό τύραννος νομίζει τους πολίτας νπηρετεϊν ε αν τ ω, the tyrant thinks that 
 the citizens are subject to him. Τίολλών εϋ-νων ηρξεν 6 Κί ρ ο ς ονΰ' ε αν τ φ 
 όμογλώττων όντων, ούτε άλληλοις, Cyrus governed many nations, not speaking the 
 same language with him nor ivith each other. Ό κατήγορος έφη τον Σ ω κράτη ν 
 άναπείϋ-οντα τονς νέονς, ώς αντος είη σοφώτατός τε καϊ άλλους ικανότατος ποιή- 
 σαι σοφούς, ούτω διατιΰέναι τους αν τ ω σννόντας, ώςτε μηδαμοϋ παρ' αντοίς 
 τονς άλλονς είναι προς έ αν τ όν, the accuser said that Socrates, by persuading 
 the youth that he himself was the wisest of men, and most capable of making others 
 wise, so influenced the minds of those who associated with him, that otliers were of no 
 account, in comparison ivith him. 
 
 7. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun αντός, 
 -η, -6 : viz. αν τ ο ν, -ης, αν Τ φ, -y, αντόν, -ην, -6, αν των, etc., 
 or of a demonstrative, are universally used, when an object is not 
 opposed to itself, but to another object; e. g. Ό πατήρ αν τ φ εδωκδ 
 το βφλίον, gave the booh to him (the son). Στ έργω αντόν (him). 
 Απεχομαι αν τ ο ν, I abstain from him. The pronoun αντον, etc. 
 is here nothing else than the pronoun of the third person. 
 
 Rem. 3. The personal pronoun ov, 61, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense in 
 the Attic writers. But in this case, it is regularly employed, only when the re- 
 flexive relation has respect, not to the nearest, but to the more remote subject ; 
 e. g. Ό τύραννος νομίζει τονς πολίτας νπηρετεϊν ο ί (but not τύραννος χαρίζεται 
 οι). 
 
 8. In the instance mentioned under No. 6, the corresponding 
 forms of αντός are very frequently used instead of the reflexive 
 pronoun ; and this is always the case, where a member of a sen- 
 tence or a subordinate clause, is not the expression or sentiment of 
 the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the expression of the 
 speaker (writer). 
 
 Κύρος εδεϊτο τοϋ Σάκα πάντως σημαίνειν αν τ ω, οπότε έγχωροίη εϊςιεναι 
 προς τον πάππον, C. rogabat Sacam, ut indicaret sibi, quando tempestivum esset. 
 Οι πολέμιοι εν-&νς άφησονσι την λείαν, έπειδάν ίδωσί τινας επ' αντον ς έλαύ- 
 νοντας, the enemy will stop plundering, as soon as they see any coming against them. 
 Την έαντού γνώμην άπεφαίνετο Σωκράτης προς τονς δμιλονντας αύτώ, Socrates 
 expressed his views to those who associated with him. Σωκράτης έγνω τον έτι Cijv τό 
 τεϋ-νάναι αν τ ω κρεϊττον είναι, S. knew that death was better for him than a longer 
 •period of life. 
 
§ 169.] syntax. — usi: of the proxouns. 247 
 
 9. In the compound reflexive pronouns, αυτός either retains its 
 exclusive force or it does not, i. e. it is sometimes emphatic, and 
 sometimes not. 
 
 (a) Αίκαιόν έστι φίλους μεν ποιεϊσΰαι τους ομοίως αντοΐς τε (or σφίσι 
 τε αυτοί ς) καϊ τοίς άλλοις χρωμένους, φοβεϊσΰαι δε και δεδιέναι τους προς 
 σφάς μεν αυτούς (or εαυτούς) οίκειότατα διακείμενους, προς δε τους άλ- 
 λους αλλότριος, it is proper to make friends of those who treat themselves and others 
 alike, but to fear those who are very friendly to themselves, hut L•stile to others ; here 
 the reflexives αντοις and σφάς αυτούς, each being compounded of αυτός, are em- 
 phatic — se ipsis and se ipsos. — (b) Οί στρατιώται παρεϊχον ε αυ τού ς (or σφάς 
 αυτούς) άνδρειοτάτους [se), showed themselves very brave. Οί πολέμιοι παρέδο- 
 σαν εαυτούς (or σφάς αυτούς) τοις "Έλλησιν (se), delivered themselves to the 
 Greeks ; in these two examples, the αυτός contained in the reflexives is not em- 
 phatic. 
 
 Rem. 4. The reflexive possessive pronouns are either used alone, e. g. μεταδί- 
 δωμί σοι των εμώ ν χρημάτων, I share with you my effects; δικαιότερόν εστί 
 τά ημέτερα ημάς έχειν η τούτους, it is more just tluat we should have our own 
 than that they should have it ; ύμεις άπαντες τους υμετέρους παΐδας αγαπάτε : 
 οί πολϊται τά σφ έτερα σώζειν έπεφώντο ; or with the addition of the Gen. 
 of αυτός (according to § 154, 3) ; or instead of the possessives, the Gen. of the 
 compound substantive-reflexives is employed ; and indeed in the common lan- 
 guage, the last form is always used with the singular pronoun, and more fre 
 quently than the possessives with the third Pers. PL, but the Gen. of αυτός is 
 usually employed with the plural of the possessives (except the third person). 
 Thus : 
 
 S. ό έμαυτού (σεαυτοϋ, εαυτού) πατήρ not ό έμός (σος, δς) αΰτοϋ π 
 
 την έμαυτού (σεαυτού, εαυτού) μητέρα not την έμήν (σήν,ήν) αύτον μ. 
 
 τοις έμαυτού (σεαυτού, εαυτού) ?ώγοις not τοις έμοΐς (σοϊς, οίς) αύτοϋλ. 
 
 Ρ. ό ημέτερος αυτών πατήρ extremely rare ό ημών αυτών π. 
 
 την νμετέραν αυτών μητέρα extremely rare την υμών αυτών μ. 
 
 τά ημέτερα αυτών αμαρτήματα extremely rare τά ημών αυτών ά. 
 
 ό σφέτερος αυτών πατήρ more frequent ό εαυτών πατήρ, but not 
 
 ό σφών αυτών π. 
 
 Here also, αυτός is sometimes emphatic, sometimes not : (a) Ό παις υβρίζει 
 τον εαυτού πατέρα, suum ipsius patrem, his own father, ύμεϊς υβρίζετε τους 
 υμετέρους αυτών πατέρας, vestros ipsorum patres, your own parents, οί παί- 
 δες ύβρίζουσι τους εαυτών πατέρας, suos ipsorum patres ; (b) Στρατονίκην, την 
 εαυτού άδελφήν, δίδωσι Σεύΰ-η, suam sororem, his sister; — in the examples un- 
 der (a), αυτός retains its emphatic force, in the one under (b), it does not. 
 
 Rem. 5. Αυτός with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after the substan- 
 tive and adjective pronouns ; e. g. ημών αυτών, ύμϊν αύτοϊς, ό υμέτερος αυτών 
 πατήρ, etc. But when the personal pronoun is used with the reflexive sense, 
 then αυτός, used in its exclusive sense, may precede or follow the personal pro- 
 noun; e. g. αυτού εμού (μου), αύτώ εμοί (μοι), αύτον έμέ (με), or εμού αυτού, 
 έμοί αύτώ, etc. 
 
 Rem. 6. For the sake of perspicuity, or rhetorical emphasis, a demonstrative 
 pronoun, particularly αυτός, is frequently put in the same sentence after a pre- 
 
248 SYNTAX. — THE INFINITIVE. [§ 170. 
 
 ceding substantive or pronoun, when a long intermediate clause separates the 
 Case from the verb which governs it. This pronoun again resumes the preced- 
 ing substantive or pronoun; e. g. Κ.?\,έαρχος δε Ύολμίδην ΉλεΙον, bv 
 ετύγχανεν έχων παρ' έαυτώ κήρυκα άριστον των τοτέ, τ ού τ ο ν άνειπεϊν έκέ- 
 λευσε, Clearckus commanded Tolmides of Elis, ivhom he happened to have with him, 
 and who was the most distinguished herald of his time, that he should make proclama' 
 tion. Έ/ώ μεν ουν β α σ t % έ α, φ πολλά ούτως εστί τά σνμμαχα, είπερ προΰυ- 
 μεϊται ημάς άπολεσαι, ουκ οϊδα, δ τί δεϊ άντον ομοσαι καϊ δεξιάν δούναι. 
 
 XCIV. Mcercises on § 169. 
 
 The dissolute (man) makes himself the slave of himself. Care for all, but 
 most for thyself. The passions (ήδοναί), implanted in the soul, do not persuade 
 It to be considerate, but forthwith to render service both to themselves and to 
 the body. I should (§ 153, 2, c) be ashamed (aor.) if I cared more for my re- 
 putation than for the common welfare. (Those) whom (ους αν, w. subj.) we 
 esteem (aor.) as better than ourselves, those we are willing to obey and (that) 
 without compulsion. To those who (§ 148, 6) do not (μή) command them- 
 selves to do right (= the good), God assigns others (as) masters (= comman- 
 ders). The Chaldaeans came and prayed (part.) Cyrus to make (aor.) peace 
 with them. The Athenians thought they ought (inf.) not to thank others ('έτε- 
 ρος) for (art.) deliverance, but the other Greeks them. In the Peloponnesian 
 war, Grecian cities were destroyed (aor.), some by (the) Barbarians, others by 
 themselves. Enrich thy (= the) friends ; then thou wilt enrich thyself. Phrixus, 
 as soon as (part.) he learned (aor.) that his father was about (μελλειν, opt.) to 
 sacrifice him, took (part, aor.) his sister, and mounting (aor.) a ram with her, 
 came (aor.) through the sea into the Pontus Euxinus. The Persians went 
 through the whole country of the Eretrians, binding (aor.) their (=the) hands, 
 that they might be able (έχειν) to tell (aor.) the king, that no one had escaped 
 them. 
 
 §170. The Infinitive, 
 The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract sub- 
 stantive-idea; but it differs from the substantive, in retaining so 
 much of the nature of the verb, as that, on the one hand, it exhi- 
 bits the nature or quality of the action, viz. duration, completion 
 and futurity, e. g. γράφειν, γεγραφεναι, γράψαι, γράψειν, while on 
 the other, it has the same construction as the verb, i. e. it governs 
 the same Cases as the verb ; e. g. γράφειν επιστολή ν, επι&νμεΐν 
 της αρετής, εναντίον α&αι τοις πόλε μ Ιο ι ς. The attributive 
 qualification of the Inf. is an adverb, and not, as in the case of an 
 actual substantive, an adjective ; e. g. καλώς άποΰανεϊν (but κάλος 
 ■&άνατος). The Inf. will first be considered without the article, 
 and then with it. 
 
i§ 171, 172.] syntax. — the infinitive. 249 
 
 §171. A. Infinitive without the Article. 
 
 1. The Inf. without the article is used, in the first place, as the 
 subject. 
 
 Ου κακόν βασιλεύει ν, to bea king is not evil. Άεί ήβα τοίς γέρουσιν εν 
 μ α τ? ε Ι ν, the ability to learn always remains young even to the old. Μόχϋος μέ- 
 γιστος γης πατρίας στ ε ρ εσ& α ι. 
 
 2. In the second place, the Inf. is used as the object in the Ace, 
 to express something effected, wished, aimed at, the purpose, object 
 or result, with the following classes of verbs* and adjectives : 
 
 (a) With verbs which denote an act or expression of the will ; 
 e. g. to wish, to desire, to long for, to dare, to ask, to command, to 
 counsel, to permit, to fear, to delay, to prevent ; — (b) with verbs which 
 denote the exercise of the intellectual powers or their manifestation ; 
 e. g. to think, to intend, to hope, to seem, to learn, to say, to deny ; — 
 (c) with verbs which contain the idea of being able, effecting, of 
 power or capacity ; — (d) with many other verbs and adjectives to 
 express a purpose or object, a consequence or result. 
 
 Β ο ν ?, ο μ α ι, μ έ ?. ?*. ω y ράφ ε ι v. Έπ ιΰ-υ μω πορεύεσΰαι. Τολμώ 
 νπομέν ε ιν τον κίνδννον. ΤΙαραινώ σοι γ ράφ ε ι ν. Οντος τους δούλους 
 έπεισ εν έπι& έσ&α ι τοις δεσπόταις. Ύ -Pj άλ?^ στρατιά άμα παρεσκευά- 
 ζετο β οη&εΐν έπ' αυτούς. Κωλύωσεταϋταποιεΐν. Φοβούμαι die- 
 λέγχεινσε. Νομίζω άμαρτεϊν. 'Ελπίζω εύτυχήσειν. Ή πό- 
 λις έκινδύνευσε πάσα δ ιαφ•& α ρ η ν α ι. *Έφη είναι στρατηγός. Λ έ- 
 γω ε'ιδέναι ταύτα. Ήίαν&άνωίππεύειν. Διδάσκω σε γράφειν. 
 Αύναμαι ποιεί ν ταύτα. Ho ι ω σε γελάν. "Αξιός εστί •&αυ μάζε- 
 σ-&αι. Ήκομενμαν&άνειν. 
 
 Εεμακκ. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that with these adjectives, it com- 
 monly uses the Inf., Act. or Mid., instead of the passive Inf. Such Infinitives 
 may be translated both actively and passively into English ; e. g. κα?.ός εστίν 
 ίδεΐν, he is beautiful to see, or to be seen, άξιος εστί •&αυμάσαι, worthy to be admired 
 λόγος δυνατός εστί κατανοησαι, able to be understood. 
 
 §172. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace, with the Infini- 
 tive. 
 1. Most verbs which take an Inf., have, in addition to this object, 
 also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the principal 
 
 * The verbs which take an Inf. aftgr them, are usually such as do not express 
 a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other construction, 
 to complete the idea. The Inf. therefore, is the complement of the verb on 
 which it depends. Comp. what is said on the Part, as a complement of the verb, 
 S 175.— Tb. 
 
250 SYNTAX. THE INFINITIVE. [§ 172. 
 
 verb requires; e. g. δέομαι σον ελ&εϊν, I beg you to come. 
 Συμβουλεύω σοι σωφροτεΐν, I advise you to be discreet. Έ π o- 
 r ρ ν ν ω σε μάχεσ&αι, I urge you to fight. Κελεύω σε γράφειν. 
 
 2. But when the principal verb is a verbum sentiendi* or decla- 
 randi, governing the Ace., and the subject of the principal verb is at. 
 the same time its object (or in English, when the subject of the 
 principal verb is the same as the subject of the dependent clause, 
 e. g. I think that I have erred), then the Ace. of a personal pronoun 
 is not joined with the Inf., as in Latin, but is wholly omitted. 
 
 Οϊομαι άμαρτείν (instead of οίομαι εμαυτον άμαρτεΐν), I think that I have 
 erred, credo me errasse ; οίει άμαρτεΐν (instead of οΐει σεαυτόν άμαρτεΐν), you 
 think that you have erred, credis te errasse ; ο'ίεται άμαρτεΐν (instead of οιεται 
 εαυτόν άμαρτεΐν), he thinks that he has erred, credit se errasse. 
 
 3. When adjectives or substantives are joined with the Inf., as 
 explanations of the predicate, they are put, by attraction, in the 
 same Case as the object of the principal verb, viz. in the Gen., 
 Dat. or Ace. ; and when the subject of a verbum sentiendi or decla- 
 randi is also its object, i. e. when the subject of the principal verb 
 and of the Inf. is the same, the explanatory word is put in the Nom. 
 by attraction. 
 
 Nom. with Inf. Ό στρατηγός έφη πρόθυμος είναι έπιβοη&εΐν, the comman- 
 der said that he was zealous to render aid. 
 
 Gen. witli Inf. Αέομαί σου προΰ-ύμου είναι, I wish you to be zealous. 
 
 Dat. with Inf. Συμβουλεύω σοι π ροϋ-ύ μ φ είναι. 
 
 Ace. with Inf. 'Έ•ποτρύνω σε π ρό&υ μ,ον είναι. *Έφη σε ευδαίμονα 
 είναι. 
 
 Rem. 3. When the subject of the principal verb and of the Inf. is the same, and 
 the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is the case particularly in 
 antitheses, then the subject of the Inf. is expressed in the Ace. ; e. g. Κροίσος 
 ένόμιζε εαυτόν είναι πάντων όλβιώτατον, Croesus thought that he was the most 
 happy of all men. 
 
 Rem. 2. Very frequently the predicative explanations which are joined with 
 the Inf., and refer to the object of the principal verb, are not put in the samo 
 Case as this object, but in the Ace. ; this is explained by considering the object 
 of the principal verb, at the same time as the subject of the Inf. ; e. g. δέομαι 
 υμών (υμάς) β οηΰ-οϋ ς γενέσθαι. Ά&ην αίων εδεήΰησαν σφίσι βοηθούς 
 γενέσ&αι, they requested the Athenians to assist them ; here the word 'Αθηναίων 
 stands in a two-fold relation, first as the object of εδεήϋησαν, in the Gen., and 
 second, as the subject of γενέσ&αι, in the Ace; Ξενία ηκειν παρήγγειλε λα- 
 δ όντα τους άνδρας ; εξεστι δ' υμΐν, ει βον?^εσ-&ε λαβόντ ας όπλα εις κίν~ 
 δυνον έμβαίνειν. * 
 
 * Verba sentiendi are such as signify to believe, think, see, perceive, hope, hear, and 
 tho like : — verba declarandi, such as signify to say, affirm, show, announce, etc. — Tr, 
 
§ 173.] SYNTAX. THE INFINITIVE. 251 
 
 Rem. 3. When the Inf. is used as the subject (§ 171, 1), and lias a subject of 
 its own or predicative explanations, connected with it, both the subject of the 
 Inf. and the predicative explanations are put in the Ace. ; e. g. 'Ύπερ της πα- 
 τρίδος μαχόμενους άποΰανεϊν καλόν εστίν, it is honorable to die fighting for 
 our country ; here άποΰανεϊν which is the subject of εστί, has for its own sub- 
 ject the Ace. τινάς or ημάς understood, and for its predicative explanation, μα- 
 χόμενους, also in the Ace. 
 
 XCV. Exercises on §§ 171, 172. 
 
 Critias and Alcibiades believed that, if they should associate (aor. opt.) with 
 (art.) Socrates, they might (§ 153, 2, d.) become very competent both to speak 
 and to act (= in speaking and in acting). Endeavor to be a lover of labor with 
 thy (= the) body, a lover of wisdom with thy mind, that (ίνα, w. suhj.) thou 
 mayest execute thy (= the) purposes (τα όόξαντα) with the one, foresee that 
 which is for thy advantage ( = the advantageous) with the other. The Persians 
 thought they were invincible by (κατά) sea. Thou wilt find many tyrants who 
 (part.) have been destroyed by those who (§ 148, 6) seemed most to be (their) 
 friends. Socrates said, that those who (§148, 6) consult an (=the) oracle 
 (for that) which the gods have given (aor.) men (the ability) to learn (part, aor.) 
 and to decide, were insane. It becomes every ruler to be discreet. I believe 
 that men have (art.) riches and (art.) poverty not in their houses (sing.) 
 but in their minds. Their (=the) common dangers made the allies kindly 
 disposed towards each other. Some philosophers ( = of the philosophers) be- 
 lieve (δοκεί, w. dat.) that everything (plur.) is in motion ( = moving itself), 
 but others that nothing can ever move (§ 153, 2, d.). and some, that everything 
 is coming into existence (= becoming) and perishing, but others that nothing 
 can ever either (= neither) come into being (aor.) or (=nor) perish (aor.). 
 Men, when they are sick (part.), submit (= present) their bodies both to be am- 
 putated (act.) and cauterised (act.) amid (μετά) sufferings and pains. Cyrus 
 ordered the enemy to deliver up (aor.) their arms. It is better to learn late 
 than to be ignorant. 
 
 §173. B. Infinitive with the Article. 
 
 1. The Inf. with the article (ro) is treated in all respects as a 
 substantive, and is such, since by means of the article, it can be de- 
 clined, and is capable of expressing all those relations, which are 
 indicated by the Cases of the substantive. On the contrary, it here 
 also, as in the Inf. without the article, retains the nature of a verb ; 
 e.g. το ε πι σ τ ο λ η ν γράφειν, το καλώς γράφει», etc., το καλώς 
 άπο&νησκειν, an honorable death, το νπερ της πατρίδος άπο&ανεΐν, 
 death for one's country. 
 
 2. When the Inf., whether used as a subject or object, has a sub- 
 ject and predicative explanations belonging to it, then both these, 
 as in case of the Inf. without the article (§ 172, Α.), are put in the 
 
252 SYNTAX. — THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 174. 
 
 Acc. When, however, the subject of the Inf. is the same as that 
 of the principal verb, it is not expressed, and the predicative expla- 
 nations are put by attraction in the same Case as the subject of 
 the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (§ 172, 2 and 3). 
 
 To άπο~& α ν εϊν τ tv α νπερ της πατρίδος καλή τις τύχη, that one should die 
 for his country is a happy lot. To άμαρτάν ε tv άν& ρώπον ς όντας ον- 
 όέν, οΐμαι, θαυμαστόν, that those ivho are men shoidd err, I think, is not surprising, 
 or it is not surprising that, etc. Έίλέαρχος μικρόν έξέφυγε του καταπετρω- 
 ΰήναι, C barely escaped being stoned to death. 'Σωκράτης παρεκάλει επιμε?^εϊ- 
 σϋαι τον ώς φ ρον ιμώτ ατον εϊν at καϊ ώφ ελιμώτ ατον, Socrates ex- 
 horted each one to make it his object to be {to have a care for being) as wise and as 
 useful as possible ; here φρονιμώτατον, etc. agrees with εκαστον understood, which 
 is the subject of the Inf. είναι, while the whole clause is used as a substantive. 
 (Very often τον or τον μή with the Inf. is used to denote a purpose or object : 
 e. g. Ανναμιν παρασκευάζεται τον μη ά δ t κ ε ϊ σ & α ι, he is preparing a force in 
 order that he may not be injured). Οι άνθρωποι πάντα μηχανώνται έπϊ τω εντν- 
 χείν, use every expedient in order to be prosperous. Ό Κνρος δια το φιλο- 
 μαθής είναι πολλά τους παρόντας άνηρώτα, και 'όσα αυτός ΰπ' άλλων (sc. 
 άνηρωτάτο), δια το άγχί νους είναι ταχύ άπεκρίνετο, on account of his 
 fondness for learning, Cyrus was in the habit of proposing many questions to those 
 about him, and whatever he himself was asked by others, he readily answered, on ox• 
 count of his quickness of perception ; in this sentence, the subject of the Infinitives 
 being the same as that of the principal verb, the predicative explanations φιλο- 
 μαθής and άγχίνους, are put in the Nom. by attraction, agreeing with the im- 
 plied subject of the Infinitives. So in τοντο έποίει εκ τον χαλεπός είναι, 
 this he effected by being severe. 
 
 XCVI. Exercises on § 173. 
 
 The huntsmen cheerfully toil in hope of game [λαμβάνειν, fut). Prome- 
 theus was bound in Scythia, because {δια) he had stolen fire. The Spartans 
 are proud of {επί) showing (= offering) themselves submissive and obedient to 
 magistrates. Avarice, besides {προς) conferring no advantage (= benefiting 
 nothing), often deprives even of present possessions. In order that the hares 
 may not escape from the nets, the hunters station scouts. So far from {αντί) 
 corrupting young men, Socrates incited them, in (έ /c) every way to practise vir- 
 tue. 
 
 §174. The Participle. 
 
 1. The Participle is used, in the first place, as the complement of 
 verbs and adjectives, e. g. χαίρω τον φίλον ώφελησας, I rejoice that 
 I have assisted a friend, where the Part, ώφελησας explains or com- 
 pletes the idea of the verb, which is imperfectly expressed without 
 it ; in the second place, the Part, serves not merely to denote an 
 immediate attributive qualification of a substantive, e. g. το & ά λ- 
 
 ^mmmm 
 
§ 175.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 253 
 
 λ ο ν ρόδον or zd ρόδον το ft άλλον, the blooming rose, but it can 
 also express the adverbial relations of time, causality, manner and 
 icay, and, in general, every explanatory circumstance, as well as a 
 more remote attributive of a substantive. 
 
 2. The Part, represents the idea of the verb as that of an adjec- 
 tive, and is like the adjective both in its form and in its attributive 
 use ; but, in the same manner as the Inf. (§ 170), it exhibits the 
 nature or quality of the action (γράφων, γεγραφως, γράχρας, γρά- 
 -Φων), and retains the construction of the verb (γράφων έπισζο- 
 λί\ν, ν, άλως γράφων). As the Part, has an attributive form 
 and signification, it can never be used independently, but always 
 depends on a substantive, agreeing with it in gender, number and 
 Case. 
 
 § 175. Th e Participle as the co mp lement of the Verb. 
 
 1. As the Part, is an attributive, and therefore represents the ac- 
 tion as already belonging to an object, only such verbs can have a 
 Part, for their complement, as require for a complement an action 
 which, in the character of an attribute, belongs to an object, — the 
 object being in some state of action, or in some condition. Hence 
 the following classes of verbs have a Part, for their complement, 
 (a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the senses 
 or by the mind, e. g. to hear, to see, to observe, to know, to perceive, 
 to remember, to forget ; — (b) Verba declarandi, e. g. to declare, to 
 show, to make manifest, to appear, to be known, to be evident; — 
 (c) Verba affectuum, i. e. such as denote an affection of the mind, 
 e. g. to rejoice, to grieve, to be contented, happy, to be displeased, to 
 be ashamed, to regret ; — (d) Verbs signifying to permit, to endure, to 
 persevere, to continue, to be weary (ηεριοραν, επιτρε'πειν, άνέχεβ&αι, 
 καρτερεΐν, κάμνειν, etc. ; but εάν always with the Inf.) ; — (e) Verbs 
 signifying to begin and cease, to cause to cease, to omit, to be remiss 
 in something ; — (f ) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish 
 one's self, to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, to do wrong, to 
 enjoy, to be full of something. 
 
 Eem. 1. The Part, used with the preceding classes of verbs, is often equiva- 
 lent to a subordinate clause introduced by ore or ει, and in English, must often 
 be translated by that or if, or by the Inf. 
 
 2. The construction is here evident. The Part, agrees in Case 
 with the substantive-object of the principal verb, this object being 
 in the Case which the principal verb requires. But when the sub- 
 
 • 22 
 
25 i SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 175. 
 
 ject of tlie principal verb is, at the same time, its object, as οΐδά 
 (εγώ) έμαντοφ Φνητον οντά, then the personal pronoun which rep- 
 resents the subject as an object, is not expressed, and the Part, is 
 put by attraction in the same Case as the subject of the principal 
 verb, i. e. in the Nom. (comp. § 172, 2). 
 
 'Ορώ τον άν&ρωπον τρέχοντα, Τ see the man running. ΟΙ δ α άν- 
 & ρωπον -ΰνητον όντα, I know that man is mortal. ΟΙ δ α ΰνη το ς ων, 
 I know that I am mortal Ακούω α ντον λέγοντος, I hear him say. Oi 
 Άΰηναΐοι έφαίνοντο νπεραχ&εσϋέντες τη Μιλήτον αλώσει, the Athe- 
 nians seemed to have been exceedingly grieved at the capture ofM. Ύαδίως ελεγχ- 
 ΰ ή ση -ψ εν δ 6 μεν ο ς, you will easily be confuted if you falsify. ΟΙ -&εοϊ χαί- 
 f ov σ l τιμώμενοι νπο των άν&ρώπων, the gods rejoice, if they are honored, 
 at being honored. Χαίρω σοι έλϋ-όντ ι, I rejoice that you have come. Οι 
 πολίται π ερ ιεϊδον την γήν νπο τών πολεμίων τ μ η ■& ε Ι σ α ν, the citizens per- 
 mitted the country to be laid waste by the enemy. Ha ν ω σε άδικονντα, I make 
 you cease to do wrong, or doing wrong. Uavo μαί σε ά δ ι κ ων, I cease to injure 
 you. Άρχομαι λέγων, I begin to speak. Έν έποίησας άφικδμενος, 
 you have done well that you have come. Άμαρτάν εις ταντα ποιών, you err in 
 doing these things. Τίληρης είμι ταντα Ό- εώ μένος, I am satisfied with seeing 
 these things. 
 
 Rem. 2. Yet attraction is omitted, and the Ace. of the personal pronoun, ss 
 the object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is 
 emphatic ; e. g. περιείδον αν τον ς γήρα άδννάτονς γ εν ο μεν ο ν ς, they permit- 
 ted themselves to become enfeebled by old age. 
 
 Rem. 3. With σννοιδα, σνγγιγνώσκω ε μαντώ, the Part, can either 
 refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun which 
 stands with the verb ; if it refers to the subject, it is put in the Nom., if to the 
 pronoun, in the Dat.; e. g. σννοιδα {σνγγιγνώσκω) έμαντώ εν ποιήσας or σννοι- 
 δα έμαντω εν ποιήσαντι, lam conscious that I have done well. But when the sub- 
 ject is not at the same time the Object, but is different from the object, then the 
 object with its Part, is either put in the Dat., σννοιδα σοι εν ποιήσαντι, lam con- 
 scious that you have done well; or (though i\ore seldom) the substantive is put in 
 the Dat., but the Part, in the Ace. ; e. g. έ} ώ σοι σννοιδα εν ποίησαν τ α. 
 
 Rem. 4. Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with 
 the Inf., yet with a different meaning. 
 
 (a) ακονειν, with the Part., implies an immediate perception by one's own 
 senses ; with the Inf., one not immediate, but obtained by hear-say ; e. g. 
 ακονω αντον διαλεγομέν ο ν, i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis perci- 
 pio; but Ιδείν επεϋνμει ό Άστνάγης τον Κνρον, ότι ήκουε (ex aliis au- 
 diverat) καλόν κάγαΰόν αντον είναι; 
 
 (b) ε'ιδ ένα ι, έπίστασΰ-αι, with a Part., to know , with the Inf., to know 
 how to do something (to be able) ; e. g. οΐδα (επίσταμαι) ϋεονς σεβό- 
 μενος, I know that I reverence the gods, but σέβεσΰαι, I know how to 
 reverence the gods ; 
 
 (c) μαν&άν ε ι ν, with the Part, to perceive; with the Inf., to learn; e. g 
 
§ 175.] SYNTAX. — THE PARTICIPLE. 255 
 
 μαν& άν ω σοφός ων, I perceive that I am wise, σοφός είναι, I learn 
 to be wise ; 
 
 (d) γιγνώσκε tr, with the Part., to know, to perceive ; with the Inf., to learn, 
 to judge, to conclude; e. g. γ lyv ώσ κω άγα&οΰ ς όντας τοΐς στρατιώ- 
 ταις τους αγώνας, I know that the prize-fights are useful; but άγα&ονς 
 είναι, I judge that, etc. ; 
 
 (e) με μνϊ/σΰ ai, with the Part., to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf., to 
 contemplate doing something, to intend, to endeavor ; e. g. μέμνηται εν 
 ποιήσας τους πολίτας, lie remembers that he did good to the citizens; ευ 
 πο ιη σαι, he strives (wishes) to do good; 
 
 (f) <p α ί ν ε σ ΰ α ι, with the Part., to appear, apparere, to sL•™ one's self; with 
 the Inf., to seem, videri ; e. g. ε φαί ν ε τ ο κλαίων and κλαίειν; 
 
 (g) άγγέλλε ιν, with the Part, denotes the annunciation of actual events ; 
 with the Inf., the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed; e. g. 
 ό Άσσίψιος εις την χώραν ε μ β άλλων άγγέλλεται, it is announced 
 that the Assyrian has made an irruption into the country (a fact) ; but έ μ- 
 β αλλ ε ιν άγγέ?Λεται (whether he has made an actual irruption or 
 not, is not certain); 
 
 (ii) δ ε ικννν α ι or άπ ο φαί ν ε ι ν, with the Part., to show, to prove ; with 
 the Inf., to teach ; e. g. ε δ ε ι ξ α σε άδ ικήσαντα, 1 proved tliat you had 
 done wrong ; but ή βουλή λίσχίνην και προδ ότην είναι και κακά 
 νουν νμϊν άπ έ φ αιν εν (docuit) ; 
 
 (i) ποιεϊ ν, with the Part., to represent; with the Inf., to cause, to suppose 
 e. g. π ο ι ω σε y ε7^ώντ a, I represent you laughing ; but ποιώ σε γ έ- 
 λα ν, I cause you to laugh, or / will suppose that you laugh ; 
 
 (k) α'ισχννεσΰ-αι and αίδεϊσ-&αι, with the Part., to be ashamed on ac- 
 count of something which one does ; with the Inf., to be ashamed or afraid to 
 do something, to omit something from shame; e. g. αίσχυνομαι κακά 
 πράττ ων τον φίλον, lam ashamed of doing evil to a friend; but αίσχυ- 
 νομαι κακά πράττ ε ιν τον φίλον, lam ashamed to do evil to a friend; 
 
 (1) άρχεσ&αι, with the Part., to be in the beginning of an action ; with the 
 Inf., to begin to do something (something intended); e. g. ηρξαντο τά 
 τείχη οίκοδομοϋντες and οίκο δ ο μ ει ν. 
 
 Rem. 5. Instead of the impersonal phrases, δηλόν εστί, φανερόν εστί, φαίνεται, 
 it appears, it is evident, the Greek uses the personal construction, and makes the 
 Part, agree with the subject ; such phrases, however, are generally rendered in- 
 to English as if they were impersonal ; e. g. δηλός ειμί, φανερός είμι, φαίνομαι 
 την πατρίδα ευ ποιησας, it is evident that Iliave done well for my country.- 
 
 3. Finally, the Part, is used as a complement with the following 
 verbs : (a) τ ν γ χ ά ν ω, to happen ; (b) λ α ν& ά ν ω, to he concealed, 
 unobserved ; (c) διατελώ, διαγίγνομαι, διάγω, which ex- 
 press a continuance ; (d) φ & ά ν ω, to come before, to anticipate ; 
 (e) οΐχομαι, to go away, to depart. With these verbs, the English 
 ofter changes the construction, the verbs being frequently rendered 
 by ai adverb, and the Part, connected with them by a finite verb. 
 
256 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 175. 
 
 "Κροίσος φονέα τον παιδος έλύνΰ αν ε βάσκων, Croesus nourished the mur- 
 derer of his son unwittingly (without knowing it). Δ ι ά γ ω, δ l α τ ε λ ω, δ ι α* 
 γίγνομαι καλά π ο ιών, I always, continually do what is honorable. "Ω *« 
 χετ ο φ εν y ων, vient away quickly, or flew away, ώχοντ ο αποπλέοντες, 
 sailed away, οι χ ο μα ι φέρων, celeriter abstuli. "Έ,τνχον οπλϊται εν τη αγορά 
 καϋ- εν δ οντ ε ς ως πεντήκοντα, about fifty heavy armed soldiers were then, just 
 then, by chance, sleeping in the market-place. (Ύνγχάνω is always used, where an 
 event has not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental co- 
 operation of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things ; it may 
 sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance, but often cannot be 
 translated at all into English). Χαλεπό ν }jv άλλον φΰάσαί τοντο ποίη- 
 σαν τ a, it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him in do- 
 ing it 
 
 XCVII. Exercises on §§ 174, 175. 
 I hear (w. gen.) that some are commended, because they are men observant 
 of law. It is pleasant to learn (w. ace.) that a friend is prosperous. I once 
 heard Socrates discoursing upon friendship. No one repents (aor.) of having 
 been silent {aor.), very many of having talked. Remember that thou art a man. 
 (They) will fight more boldly against the enemy, who (ot uv) are conscious 
 that they are well trained. Socrates was well known to be humane. The man 
 had been convicted of having deceived (aor.) us. It is evident that the enemy 
 will besiege the city, at the same time, by sea and by land. Industrious pupils 
 rejoice to be commended. Xerxes repented of having scourged (aor.) the Helle- 
 spont. The citizens repented that they betrayed the city. It is hard to suffer 
 friends to be ruined. Be not weary (aor., § 153, Rem. 3) of benefiting a friend, 
 Socrates never ceased both to seek for and to learn the good. The enemy left 
 off (aor.) besieging the city'. Endeavor to surpass thy friends in kindness. I 
 was conscious of having done no wrong (aor.) to my friend. The Persians learn 
 betimes, while (part.) they are still children, both to govern and to obey (= to 
 be governed). A kindly-disposed friend understands (how) to alleviate (the) 
 grief of a friend. If (part.) thou art rich, remember to do good to the poor 
 Let us not be ashamed that we learn that which is useful from a stranger. The 
 Lacedaemonians, believing (aor.) that war would benefit them, resolved (aor.) to 
 render aid to Cyrus. Philip seems to have enlarged his dominion by gold ra- 
 ther than by arms. Death is (the) greatest of all blessings to man. The sol- 
 diers were at this very time drawn up (in order of battle). Canst thou tell me 
 what thou thinkesf? He who (οςτις) fears others (έτερος) is, without knowing 
 it, himself a slave. Callixenus, the Athenian, who (part.) had been confined 
 (aor.) in the prison (of the state), secretly dug through (aor.) it and escaped to 
 the enemy. Socrates did good continually (part). Benefactors are always be- 
 loved. If (έάν, w. subj. aor.) we first kill (aou) the enemj, no one of us will die. 
 After death the body indeed will be dead, out the soul immortal and never 
 growing old, will soar swiftly upward (aor.). The prisoners dug through (part, 
 aor.) the prison and speedily escaped. 
 
§ 176.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 257 
 
 §176. B. The Participle used to express Adverbial Relations and 
 Subordinate Explanatory Circumstances. 
 1. In the second place, the Part, denotes the adverbial relations 
 (a) of time : when, after, ivhile ; — (b) cause : since, because, as, inas- 
 much as; — (c) conditio aality and concession: if, although; — (d) 
 manner and way ; — (e) purpose, object: to, in order to, for the pur- 
 pose of j — (f ) and, in general, both every explanatory circumstance 
 which we translate by who, which, and a more remote attributive ot 
 a substantive. 
 
 (a) Ήν δε οπότε και αντοϊς τοις άναβασι πολλά πράγματα παρεϊχον ol 
 βάρβαροι πά?αν καταβαίνονσιν, sometimes also after they had ascended, the 
 barbarians again annoyed them much, while descending; άκονσασι ταντα τοϊ<, 
 στρατηγοϊς το έν&νμημα χαρίεν έόόκει είναι, when the generals heard this > they 
 thought tlie device ingenious ;— (b) ημείς δ' επί της γης βεβηκότες πολν ισχυ- 
 ρότερον πα'ισομεν, bid ice, inasmuch as we stand upon the ground, ivill be able to strike 
 a more severe blow ; 'Ιερώνυμος, πρεσβύτατος ω ν των λοχαγών, ηρχετο λέγειν, 
 because he ivas the oldest of the captains; τα επιτήδεια έχοιεν εκ της χώρας, πολ- 
 λής και αγαθής ο ν ση ς, they migJd obtain supplies from the place, because it teas ex• 
 tensive and fertile; — (c) φοβούμενοι την όόον 'όμως ol πολ?,οι συνηκο?ιουϋη 
 σαν, although they feared the journey, yet many followed; τονς φίλονς ενεργέ 
 τοϋντ ε ς εχθρούς δννήσεσθε κολάζειν, if you confer benefits on friends, you will 
 be able to punish your enemies; — (d) γ ελών ειπεν, he spoke laughing; τί ουκ 
 εποίησε πρέσβεις πέμπων, και παρέχων τα επιτήδεια έςτε σπονδών ετυ- 
 χεν, wlmt did he not do, by sending envoys and by furnishing supplies, until he obtain- 
 ed a truce 1 — (e) τοϋτο έρχομαι φ ρ άσων, I come to (in order to) say this; στρα- 
 tiuv πολλην άγων ώςβοηθήσων βασιλεϊ, leading a large army to assist the king ; 
 — (f ) λέξω τονς προς έμε λέγ οντ ας ώς, etc., I will mention tliose ivL• say to me, 
 that. 
 
 2. Here two different constructions of the Part, must be distin- 
 guished. The Part., like the attributive Part, either agrees with 
 its subject (i. e. the word to which it belongs) in gender, number 
 and Case ; e. g. ο Κνρος γ ελών είτζεν ; τοις Περσαις εις την γην 
 ειςβαλοΰσιν οι "Ελληνες ψαντιώ$ψαν, etc. ; or the Part, and 
 its subject are put in the Gen., called the Genitive Absolute ; e. g. 
 ιόν n αϊ δ 6 ς γ ελών τ ο ς, 6 Κνρος εϊτζεν, the child laughing, G. 
 said. 
 
 Eem. 1. In English, the explanatory Part, is more seldom used, than in 
 Greek, the place of it being supplied either by subordinate clauses introduced by 
 the conjunctions when, since, after, because, inasmuch as, if although, etc. : or by α 
 substantive with a preposition ; e. g. αποθανόντος τοϋ Κύ ρου, after t\e death 
 of C, φ ευ γ ων, in fight ; or by an adverb, e. g. ταντα π ο ιή σ ας, thereupon, then. 
 Very often also, we use the finite verb, where the Greek uses a Part. ; e. g. οι 
 22* 
 
258 SYNTAX. THE participle. [§ 176. 
 
 πολέμιοι, φνγ όντ ε ς ίδιώχβ-ησαν, fled and were pursued. But, where several 
 actions are combined into one whole, the Greek very carefully distinguishes the 
 principal action from the accompanying subordinate circumstances, by express- 
 ing the former by means of the finite verb, but the latter by the Part. 
 
 ΤίολλοΙ τά χρήματα άναλώσαντες, ών πρόσΰεν άπείχοντο κερδών, αισχρά 
 νομίζοντες είναι, τούτων ουκ ανέχονται, many after having squandered their 
 wealth, have recourse to those means of gain, which before they did not resort to, because 
 they thought them dishonorable. Του έαρος ε I'd- όντ ο ς, τά άν&η •&άλλει, when 
 the spring comes, the flowers blossom. Αηϊζόμενοι ζώσίν, raptu vivunt, live by 
 plundering. Πολλ?/ τέχνη χρω μεν ος τους πολεμίους ένίκησεν, he conquered the 
 enemy by using much stratagem. Etc Αελφούς πορεύεται χρησό μένος τω χρη- 
 στηρίω, oraculum consulturus. Αδύνατον πολλά τεχνώμενον άν&ρωπον πάν- 
 τα καλώς ποιεϊν, it is impossible for a man ινϊιο devises many things, to do all well. 
 The particles μεταξύ (during, while), άμα (at the same time), κ at, καίπερ 
 (although), are sometimes joined with the Part, to express its force more fully. 
 
 3. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. also is used, but for the 
 most part, only when the Part, has no definite subject, consequently, 
 where the verb from which the Part, comes is impersonal, e. g. 
 εξόν (from εξεση, it is lawful, possible), or with impersonal phrases, 
 e. g. a I (7 χ q 6 ν ο ν (from αισχρόν εστίν, it is shameful). The sub- 
 ject is sometimes expressed by a neuter pronoun. 
 
 TLapbv αύτω βασιλέα γενέσΰαι, άλλω περιέ&ηκε το κράτος, since it is pos- 
 sible for him to be a king, etc Αδελφοκτόνος, ούδεν δέον (quumfas non esset, fieri 
 non deberet), γέγονα, I slew my brother, although it ought not to have been done. So, 
 δόξαν ταύτα, when these things had been agreed upon; δόξαν αύτοϊς (quum lis 
 visum sit, esset) when, because they thought best ; δοκούν (quum videatur, videretur) 
 άναχωρεΐν ; π ρ ο ς ή κ ο ν, quum deceat, deceret, since, when it is fit, proper; εξόν, 
 quum liceat, liceret, since, ivhen it is in one's power, when he can. Also passive par- 
 ticiples : δεδογμένον, quum decretum sit, esset ; ειρημένον, quum dictum sit, 
 esset. In the third place, adjectives with bv ; e. g. a Ι σ χ ρ b ν 6 ν, quum turpe sit, 
 esset, since it is sliameful ; άδηλο ν b ν, since (as, when) it is uncertain ; δυνατόν 
 bv, αδύνατον bv. 
 
 Eem. 2. The particle of comparison, ως, is joined with the simple Part., and 
 also where it stands in the Gen. or Ace. absolute, when the idea expressed by the 
 Part, is to be indicated as something merely supposed, as the subjective view of the 
 agent ; hence where the view expressed is that of the agent, and not that of the 
 writer or speaker. In English the force of the Part, with ως can be translated 
 by as if, as though, since forsooth, because, thinking, intending, etc. The particle ά τ ε, 
 on the contrary, is used when a cause or reason is to be repi'esented as an objec- 
 tive one, i. e. really existing, in opposition to what is merely supposed. 
 
 a. Simple Participle. Οι άρχοντες, κάν όποσονοΰν χρόνον άρχοντες διαγένων- 
 ται, θαυμάζονται, ώ ς σοφοί τε και ευτυχείς γεγενημένοι, are admired, being 
 thought to have been wise and fortunate = νομιζόμενο ι σοφοί τε και εύτνχεΐζ 
 γεγενήσΰαι. Άγανακτοϋσιν, ώ ς μεγάλων τινών άπ ε στ ε ρ η μεν ο ι (i. e. ηγού- 
 μενοι μεγ. τ. άπεστερήσϋ-αι), they are displeased, thinking that they have been de- 
 
§ 177.] - SYNTAX. THE ADVERB. 259 
 
 pnved of some great things. Οί -ολψιοι άτε εξαίφνης kv tire σο ν τ ες άνδρά- 
 ττοδα πολλά ίλαβον, took many slaves, because they fell upon them suddenly. 
 
 b. Genitive Absolute. Ίίαρηγγειλεν αίτοΐς παρασκευάζεσϋαι, ώ ς μάχης έσο- 
 μέν η ς (i. e. νομίζων μάχην εσεσΰαι), he ordered them to get in readiness, as (in 
 his opinion), thinking that, there would be a battle. Έκήρυττον έξιέναϊ πάντας Θη- 
 βαίους, ώς των τυράννων τεΰνεώτων, they announced that all tlie Thebans 
 should come out, because [as they thought) the tyrants were dead. "A τ ε πυκνού δ ν- 
 το ς τον ίλσονς, ονχ έώρων οι εντός τους εκτός, because the grove was thick, tlwse 
 within did not see those without (a fact). 
 
 Rem. 3. A peculiar use of tbe Gen. absolute, in connection with ώ ς, occurs 
 witb tbe verbs είδέναι, έττίστασΰαι, νοεί ν, έχειν γνώμη ν, δ t α- 
 κεϊσ&αι την γνώμη ν, φ ρ ο ν τ ίζε ι ν, also sometimes with λέγειν, and 
 the like verbs, where, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substantive 
 with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., should stand as the object. The result of 
 the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by ούτω joined to the predicate ; e. g. 
 ώς ε μου ου ν Ιόντος, υπη άν καϊ νμεϊς, ούτω την γ ν ώ μην έχετε, be 
 assured that I will go xvherever you decide to go ; here ώς εμού Ιόντος stands instead 
 of έμε ίέναί. 
 
 XCVIII. Exercises on § 176. 
 The enemy burned (aor.) the city and immediately sailed to (επί) the islands. 
 If the body (plur.) is rendered effeminate, the mind (plur.) also becomes far 
 weaker. If agriculture prospers, the other arts also flourish. Should we say of 
 all unintelligent men that they were insane, we should (§ 153, 2, c.) speak ( = 
 say) correctly. Be assured (= believe) that you would (§ 153, 2, c.) be able to 
 live more securely, if there were peace, than if you were waging war. If thou 
 dost not labor (aor.), thou canst not be happy. All things (sing.) may (§ 153, 
 2, c.) happen (aor.), if God (so) disposes. Tyrtaeus, the poet, was given by the 
 Athenians to the Spartans at their request (as) a leader. Alexander killed Cli- 
 tus while supping, because he had ventured (aor.) to praise the deeds of Philip. 
 The soldiers break up their encampment in order to march against the enemy. 
 These seem to be the actions of a man fond of war, who (δςτις) while it is in 
 his power to have peace without injury or (== and) disgrace, prefers to cany on 
 war. While it was in his power to become (aor.) king himself, he gave the 
 sovereignty to another. Although it was possible to have taken (aor.) the city, 
 the enemy retreated. When the generals had resolved (δοκεΐ, w. dot., aor.) to 
 fight, the enemy hastily fled. The Athenians sent out colonies to Ionia, be- 
 cause Attica was not sufficiently spacious (= sufficient). Socrates enjoined on 
 men to endeavor to begin every action with the (approbation of the) gods, since 
 the gods controlled all actions. Endeavor so to live as if thou wert to live a 
 short as well as a long (= much) time. 
 
 §177. The Adverl•. 
 1. The objective relation, finally, is expressed by adverbs. Ad- 
 verbs denote the relation of place, time, manner and way of a predi- 
 
260 SYNTAX. THE ADVERB. [§ 177. 
 
 cate or attribute ; e. g. i γ γ ν & ε ν ήλ&εν, χ&ες απέβη, καλώς 
 άπε&ανεν. 
 
 2. Besides adverbs of place, time, manner and way, there are 
 still other adverbs, which do not, like those above-named, define the 
 predicate more precisely, but they point out the relation of the pre- 
 dicate to the subject. These are called modal adverbs. They de- 
 note certainty or uncertainty, affirmation or negation. Only those 
 expressing negation will be treated here, viz. ου and μη. On av 
 see § 153, 2. 
 
 3. Ου (as well as its compounds, e. g. ουδέ, ου τ ε, ουδείς, 
 etc.), is used when something is denied absolutely, by itself; μη 
 (and its compounds), on the contrary, when something is denied in 
 reference to the conception or will of the speaker or some one else. 
 Both are commonly placed before the word which is to be made 
 negative. 
 
 4. Hence ου is used in all sentences containing a direct assertion, 
 whether these are expressed by the Ind. or Opt.,e. g. ο υ γίγνεται, 
 ουκ εγενετο, ο υ γενησεται τοντο — ο ν ν. αν γίγνοιτο ταύτα ; also 
 in subordinate clauses with ο ζ ι, ώ ς, that, e. g. οΊδα, οτι ταϋτα 
 ουκ εγενετο ; in clauses denoting time, with οτε, επειδή, etc., and 
 ground or reason, with οτι, διότι, etc., and consequence, with ώςτε 
 and the Ind., e. g. οτε ουκ ηλϋ-εν — επει ταΰτα ουκ εγενετο ; 
 finally, when the idea of a single word in the sentence is to be ne- 
 gatived absolutely, e. g. ο υ κ άγα&ός, ο υ κακώς ; in this last case, 
 ov remains even when the relation of the sentence would otherwise 
 require μη, e. g. ει ο ν δώαει {recusabit). 
 
 5. Μη, on the contrary, is used with the Imp. and with the Imp. 
 Suhj., e.g. μη γράφε, μη γράιΟης (comp. § 153, Eem. 3); with 
 wishes and exhortations, e. g. μ η γράφοις, may you not write ; μ η 
 γράφωμεν, let us not write ; in all clauses denoting purpose, with ha, 
 etc. ; in conditional clauses, with ει, εάν, όταν, επάν, εως αν, etc., 
 e. g. λέγω, ίνα μη γράφος — ει μη γράφεις-, in clauses denoting 
 effect or consequence, with ωςτε and the Inf., e. g. οι πολΐται αν- 
 δρείως εμαχεσαντο, ωςτε μ η τονς πολεμίους εις την πόλιν είςβαλεϊν, 
 so that the enemy did not fall upon the city ; m all relative clauses, 
 which imply a condition or purpose, e. g. ο ς μ η άγα&ός εστί, τού- 
 τον ου φιλοϋμεν (i. e. ει τις μη άγ. ε.), whoever is not good, if any 
 one is not, etc. ; in interrogative clauses, which express anxiety on 
 the part of the inquirer, and hence demand a negative answer, e. g. 
 μ η νοσείς ; άρα μη νοσείς ; you are not sick, are you ? (in other in- 
 
 _ 
 
§177.] SYNTAX. THE ADVERB. 261 
 
 terrogative clauses ου is used, and an affirmative answer expected) 
 usually with the Inf. also ; and finally with participles and adjec- 
 tives, which may be resolved by a conditional clause ; e. g. ό μη 
 πιστεύων, si quis non credit, if any one does not believe (but 6 ου 
 πιστεύων = is, qui non credit, or quia non credit, he who does not 
 believe (absolute), or because he, etc. 
 
 6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or ad- 
 verbs, e. g. any one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc., 
 these are all expressed negatively. The negatives must all be of 
 the same kind, i. e. all compounded of ουκ or μη ; e. g. μικρά φύσις 
 ουδέν μέγα ουδέποτε ου δ εν α ου τ ε ίδιωτην ου τ ε πόλιν 
 δρα, a mean nature never docs anything either for any private in- 
 dividual or for the State ; ημείς ο ν δ' επινοονμεν ονδεν τοιούτον, 
 we do not intend any such thing ; άνευ γαρ αρχόντων ου δ ε ν αν 
 ου τ ε καλόν, ούτε άγαΰον γένοιτο ου δ α μ ου, for without leaders, 
 nothing great or advantageous could any where be accomplished. 
 
 7. After expressions of fear, timidity, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, 
 distrust — denying — hindering— forbidding, prohibiting, the Inf. usu- 
 ally follows with μ η, instead of the Inf. without μ η. This μ ή is 
 not expressed in English ; e. g. κ ω λ υ ω σε μ η ταύτα ποιεΐν, 1 
 prevent you from doing this. Λπηγόρενον Σκν&αις μ η επιβαίνειν 
 των σφετε'ρων ονρων, they forbade the Scythians to pass their boun- 
 daries. 
 
 Kemaek. When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed 
 by μη with the Ind. or Suhj. (Opt.), μη must be considered as an interrogative, 
 numne, icheiher not, and may often be translated by that; e. g. δέδοικα, μη άπο- 
 &άνη, meiuo, ne moriatur, I fear whether he will not die == that he will die; Ίδεδοΐ- 
 κειν, μη άποΰάνοι, metuebam, ne moreretur ; δέδοικα, μη τέ&νηκεν, ne mortuus sit, 
 I fear whether. he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is dead. On 
 the contrary, μη ο ν with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt), is used after the above ex- 
 pressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not take place, or 
 lias not taken place ; e. g. δέδοικα μη ο ν κ αποϋ-άνη, ne non moriatur, I fear that 
 he will not die; έδεδοίκειν μη ονκ άποϋάνοι, ne non moreretur, I feared that he 
 would not die; δέδοικα, μη ο ν τέ&νηκεν, ne non mortuus sit, that he is not dead. 
 
 8. Μη ov with the Inf. is used instead of the Inf. without nega- 
 tion, with expressions of hindering, denying, ceasing, abstaining, 
 distrusting and the like, when the negative ου, and in general, any 
 negative expression precedes μη ov. 
 
 3ϋδεν κωλύει σε μ ή ονκ άττ ο# αν εϊν, nothing prevents you from dying ; ουδείς 
 αρνείται, την άρετην μη ου καλην είναι, no one denies that virtue is lovely; ονκ 
 άπεσχόμην μη ο ν ταύτα λέγειν, I did not refrain from saying this. — Also after 
 the expressions δ ε ινον είναι, α'ισ χρόν, αισχύνη ν είναι, α'ισχνν ε- 
 
262 SYNTAX. THE ADVERB. [§ 177. 
 
 ad-ac, which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with μ η ο υ, vhen it is to 
 fae made negative ; e. g. ως τε πάσιν αισχύνη ν είναι, μ ή οΰχ\ σνσπουδά- 
 ζειν, so that all were ashamed not to be busy. 
 
 9. Ο υ μη with the Subj. or Fut. Ind., is elliptical, since with 
 ουκ a verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also ex- 
 pressed, must be supplied, and μη must be referred to this verb. 
 Hence ο ν μη is used, when the idea to be expressed is, it is not 
 (ov) to he feared that {μη) something will happen ; e. g. ο ν μη γε- 
 νηται rovxo, non vereor, ne hoc fiat, this certainly will not happen. 
 
 XCIX. Exercises on § 177. 
 The truly wise will never be the slaves of base desires. What might (§ 153, 
 2, c.) not happen in a long period ? What evidence did they employ (to prove) 
 that Socrates did not believe (in) the gods, (in) which the state believed. As 
 (επεί) the Persians did not hold out, the Greeks took the city. If (εάν, 
 w. subj.) thou hast not heard (aor.) from thyself, that what is right (= the right) 
 is useful, then trust (aor.) not another, who so says. Let us not flee before the 
 enemy. He who (δςτις) does not believe a man on his oath (— trusts [πεί&ε- 
 σΰαι] nothing to one swearing), can (επίστασ-&αι) easily swear falsely himself. It 
 is a great misfortune not to be able to endure misfortune. No one is free, who 
 (part.) does not control himself. Give (aor.) to friends, even if (part.) they do 
 not ask. The Sophists were not willing (έ&έλειν) to converse with those who 
 (§ 148, 6) had no money to give. What is not manifest to men, they endeavor 
 to ascertain from the gods by the art of divination. What one neither 
 earned ( = wrought out) nor saw, nor heard, nor executed for himself, friend 
 often furnished (aor.) friend. I might (§ 153, 2, c.) affirm that no one gains 
 (είναι, w. dat.) any cultivation from one who (§148, 6) does not please. 
 You affirm that you need no man for (εις) any purpose ( = thing). If 
 (part.) thou doest (aor.) anything shameful, never hope to remain concealed 
 (fut.). No envy at anything ever arises in (=to) a good (man). What is 
 beautiful never anywhere appears to any one as deformed. The Thirty Ty- 
 rants forbade Socrates to converse with the young men. Prexaspes denied that 
 he killed (aor.) Smerdis. Clearchus then scarcely escaped being stoned (= to 
 be stoned, aor.). All laws prohibit inscribing (the name of) any liar in the pub- 
 lic decrees. I fear that the city is already taken by the enemy. I am doubtful 
 (= fearful) whether it is not best for me to be silent. Neither snow-storms 
 (sing.), nor rain, nor heat, nor darkness (= night) hinder the Persian couriers 
 from most rapidly accomplishing (aor.) the journey (== course) before (= lying 
 before) them. No fear shall prevent me from saying what I think. Be of good 
 courage; surely nothing unjust will be done (~ happen, aor.), if there is justice 
 at heart (= if justice is present). The bad you will certainly never make bet- 
 ter. If (εάν) we conquer (aor.), the Peloponnesians will certainly never enter 
 (aor.) the country. Socrates s-aid: As long as (έωςπερ αν, w. subj.) I. breathe 
 and am able, I surely shall not cease { tor.) to philosophize. 
 
 ■iu 
 
§ 178. Ί SYNTAX. — coordination-. 263 
 
 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES, OR THE CONNEC- 
 TION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 § 178. A. COORDINATION. 
 
 1. When two or more sentences stand in an intimate connection 
 with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distinguished. 
 They are either related to each other in such a manner as to form 
 one thought, each, however, being in a measure independent of 
 the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise, Plato also was very wise ; 
 or they are wholly united, inasmuch as the one defines and explains 
 the other, or appears as the dependent member of the other, e. g. 
 When the spring comes, the flowers Uossom. The first kind of con- 
 nection is called Coordination, the last, Subordination, and the sen- 
 tences, Coordinate and Subordinate. 
 
 I came, I saw, I conquered. — Coordinate. 
 When I came, I conquered. — Subordinate. 
 
 2. Coordination consists either in expanding or restricting the 
 thought. The former is called copulative coordination, the latter, 
 adversative. Copulative coordination is either a simple succession of 
 words, or it is an enhancing or strengthening of the thought. 
 
 3. A simple succession of words is made, — (a) by κ α /, et, and, 
 more seldom in prose by τ ε (enclitic), que, and, e. g. Σωκράτης κα\ 
 ΙΏ.άτων ; — (b) by και — κ α ί, et — et, both — and, more seldom, 
 τ ε — τ ε, e. g. και αγαθοί καϊ κακοί, both good and bad; — (c) by 
 t i — και, both — and, as well so — as so, not only — but also, e. g. 
 καλός τε και- αγαθός, χρηστοί re και πονηροί. 
 
 Rem. 1. Κσί also signifies even, cfiam, with which the negative ουδέ, not 
 even, lie — qiudrm, corresponds : e. g. καϊ συ ταντα ελεξας (etiam iu), even ?/**• said 
 this; οί'δϊ συ ταύτα Ώ.εξας [ne tu quidem). not even you, etc. 
 
 4. The enhancing or strengthening of the idea is expressed by 
 the ?imple και, but still more definitely by, — (a) ο ν μόνον — άλ- 
 λα και (αλλ' ουδέ); — (b) ου χ ο ζ ι {όπως) or μη οτι 
 (Ό π ω ς) [i. e. ουκ ερώ, ο τ ι, μ η λεγ?., ο τ ϊ\ — » λ λά κ α ί (α λ λ' 
 
264 SYNTAX. — COORDINATION. ["§ 178. 
 
 ου δ ε), not only — but also (but not even), when either the more im- 
 portant member precedes the less important, or when two strongly 
 antithetic clauses are opposed to each other. 
 
 Σωκράτης ο ν μόνον σοφός ην, αλλά κ αϊ άγαΰ-ός, not only wise, but also 
 good. Kal μην υπεραποΰνησκειν γε μόνοι έΰέλουσιν οί έρώντες, ο ν μόνον 
 δ τ l άνδρες, αλλά κ αϊ γυναίκες (non modo — sed etiam), indeed, only lovers are 
 ready to die for each other, not only men, but also women. Ούχ όπως τους πολε- 
 μίους ετρέψαντο οί "Ελληνες, άλλα και την χωράν αυτών έκάκωσαν, I do not 
 say that the Greeks = the Greeks not only put the enemy to flight, but even destroyed 
 their country. Αισχίνης ούχ όπως χάριν τοϊς Ά&ηναίοίς είχεν, αλλά μισϋ-ώ- 
 σας έαντόν κατά τουτωνϊ επολιτενετο (non modo non — sed etiam). Ήίη όπως 
 ψχεϊσ&αι εν βν&μφ, αλλ- ο ν δ' όρ{τοϋσ-&αί εδΰναντο (non modo non), they were 
 rot only not able to dance to the tune, but not even to stand erect. 
 
 5. Adversative coordination consists in restricting or in entire abro* 
 jaiion ; e. g. he is indeed poor, but h*ave — he is not brave, fact cow- 
 ardly ; (here the clause but brave restricts the one preceding, ami 
 out cowardly wholly denies the idea of brave). Restriction is moit 
 generally expressed by δ ε, autem. With this δ ε there usually cor- 
 responds the connective μεν, standing in the preceding contrasted 
 sentence. Μεν primarily signifies, in truth, truly, indeed, yet com- 
 monly its force is so slight that it cannot be translated at all into 
 English. Μεν — -δ ε is particularly used in divisions, e. g. οι μεν — 
 οι δε, some — others, το μεν — το δε, on this side — on that, partly 
 — partly ; also where the same word is repeated in two different 
 sentences, e. g. εγώ σννειμι μεν &εοΐς, σννειμι δ' άν&ρώποις τοις 
 άγα&οΐς. 
 
 β. The following words also are to be noticed, viz. a v, commonly 
 in connection with δε' (cf av) rursus, on the contrary ; κ α ίτ ο ι, and, 
 yet, yet, verum, sed tamen ; μ εν τ ο ι, yet, however ; ο μ ω ς, although, 
 nevertheless; finally αλλά, but, which according to the nature of 
 the preceding member, denotes either the opposite of that which 
 is expressed in the first member, so that the first member is abro- 
 gated by the last, and one cannot exist at the same time with the 
 other, e. g. ονχ οί πλούσιοι ενδαίμονεν είσιν, αλλ' οι άγα&οί, not t/ie 
 rich are happy, but the good; or it merely denotes something differ- 
 ent from what is contained in the first member, so that the first mem- 
 ber is only abrogated in part, i. e. it is only restricted {still, yet, but), 
 e. g. τοΰτο το πράγμα ώφελιμον μεν εστίν, αλλ' ον καλόν. 
 
 7. The succession of negative sentences is made by ο ν τ ε — ο υ x s 
 (μήτε — μήτε), nee — nee, neither — nor, e. g. ούτε ϋεοί, οντζ 
 άνθρωποι, neither gods nor men. Ο ν δ ε expresses either contrast 
 
§ 179.] SYNTAX. — SUBORDINATION. 265 
 
 (but not), or it serves to annex a new additional clause (and not, 
 also not). 
 
 Kem. 2. "When a negative sentence follows a positive one, it is regularly 
 formed in prose by κ a I ο υ or κ a Ι μ ή ; e. g. Φαίνομαι, χάριτος τετνχηκώς, 
 κ a Ι ο ν μέμψεως, οΰόε τιμωρίας, I seem to have met with favor, and not blame 
 Mr punishment. 
 
 8. Disjunctive coordination consists in combining into one whole, 
 sentences, the one of which excludes the other, so that the one can 
 be considered as existing, only when the other does not. This re- 
 lation (disjunction) is expressed by the disjunctive conjunctions, viz. 
 η — η, out — aut or vel — vel, either — or; ε ΐτ ε — ε 'it ε (with Ind.), 
 εάν τ ε — εάν τ ε or ηντε — ηντε (with Subj.), sive — sive, ivhether 
 — or, either — or ; e. g. η 6 πατήρ η 6 νιος άπεθανεν, either the 
 father or son died (the first η can also be omitted, e. g. ό πατήρ 
 η 6 νιος απ.) ; ε ι τ ε καινά ε ΐτ ε παλαιά ταντά εστίν, whether these 
 are new or old; εάν τ ε πατήρ γράιρη, εάν τ ε μητηρ, whether 
 father or mother vjill write. 
 
 9. Finally, those sentences also can be coordinate with each 
 other, the last of which denotes either the cause of the preceding 
 sentence, or the conclusion, inference from it. The clause denoting 
 the cause is expressed by y άρ, for, enim, nam, and that denoting 
 the conclusion, by ο ν ν, consequently, therefore, άρα, then, there- 
 fore, τ ο ί ν ν v, then, so then, τ ο (γ α ρ, ergo, therefore, το ίγ α ρ τ οι, 
 for that very reason and no other, therefore, τ ο ι γ α ρ ο ν ι\ for that 
 reason then, wherefore ; e. g. Θανμάζομεν τον Σωκράτη • άνηρ γαρ 
 ην κάλος και αγαθός. Σ. άνηρ ην κάλος και αγαθός ■ θανμάζομεν 
 άρα αντόν. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Β. SUBOEDINATION. 
 
 §179. Principal and Subordinate Clause. 
 1. When sentences, which together present one united thought, 
 are so related, as to their import, that the one appears as a depen- 
 dent and merely completing member of the other, then their con- 
 nection may be expressed either by coordinate conjunctions, as και, 
 δε\ γάρ, άρα, etc., e. g. το εαρ ήλθε, τά δε ρόδα ανθεί, the spring has 
 rome, and the roses blossom ; or in such a manner that the sentence, 
 
 23 
 
266 SYNTAX. — SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 18C . 
 
 ■which, as to its import merely completes the other, is manifestly in 
 its outward form, a dependent, or a simply completing member of 
 the other ; e. g. ό τ ε το εαρ r\ λ & ε, τά ρόδα άν&εΐ, when the spring 
 has come, the roses blossom. This mode of connection is called Sub- 
 ordination. 
 
 2. The clause to which the other as a complementary member 
 belongs, is called the principal clause ; but the completing one, the 
 subordinate clause, and the two together, a compound sentence ; e. g. 
 in the compound sentence, οτε το εαρ ήλ-&ε, τά δένδρα &άλλει, the 
 clause τά δένδρα Φάλλει, is the principal clause, and οτε το εαρ ήλ- 
 <#•£, the subordinate clause. 
 
 3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of the subject, the attri- 
 bute, or the object of a whole sentence, and hence must be regarded 
 as substantives, adjectives or adverbs expanded into a sentence. 
 Accordingly there are three classes of subordinate clauses : substan- 
 tive, adjective and adverbial clauses. 
 
 Thus, e. g. in the sentence, " The victory of Cyrus over the enemy was an- 
 nounced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate sentence, viz. " That 
 Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ;" further, in the sentence, " Sing 
 to me, Ο Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive far-wandering, may be 
 expanded into a subordinate sentence, who has vcandered far. Comp., " He an- 
 nounced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy," with " He announced that Cyrus 
 had conquered the enemy ;" " In the spring the roses bloom," with " when the spring 
 has come, the roses bloom." 
 
 §180. I. Substantive-Sentences. 
 
 1. Substantive-sentences are substantives or infinitives expanded 
 into a sentence, and, like substantives, constitute the subject, as 
 well as the attribute and object of a sentence. 
 
 A. Substantive- Sentences introduced by otl or ώς, that. 
 
 2. Substantive-sentences introduced by the conjunctions on 
 and ω ς, that, express the object (Ace.) of verba sentiendi and de- 
 clarandi (p. 250), i. e. of such verbs as express either a sensation or 
 perception ; e. g. όραν, άκονειν, νοεϊν, μαν&άνειν, γιγνωσκειν, etc., or 
 such as denote an expression of a sensation and perception ; e. g. 
 λέγειν, δεικννναι, άγγέλλειν, δηλον είναι, etc. 
 
 3. The predicate of this substantive-sentence may be expressed, 
 (a) in the Ind., {b) in the Opt., (c) in the Opt. with av, (d) in the 
 Ind. of historical tenses with av. 
 
§ 180.] SYNTAX. SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 2G7 
 
 4. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when what is affirmed is to 
 be represented as a fact or phenomenon, something certain or actual. 
 In particular the Ind. is used regularly, when the verb of the prin- 
 cipal sentence is a principal tense, viz. the Pres., Perf. or Fut. 
 
 5. The Opt., on -the contrary, is used, when what is affirmed, is 
 to be represented as a mere conception or supposition, hence, par- 
 ticularly, when what is stated as the sentiment of another, is to be 
 indicated as such. 
 
 'Έ,λεγον, υ τ ι άρκτοι πολλούς ήδη π?*.ησιάσαντας δ ιέφθ ε ιραν, they said that 
 bears had already destroyed many. Ότε δη ταύτα ίνεθυμονμεθα, ούτως έγιγνώ- 
 σκομεν περί αυτών, ώ ς άνθρώπω πεώυκότι πάντων των άλλων ραον εϊη ζώων 
 η ανθρώπων άρχειν, wlien we were reflecting upon these things, we concluded thai it 
 was easier for man, as he is, to ride all other animals than men. 
 
 6. The Opt. with a ν is used, when the affirmation is to be indi- 
 cated as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, or as an 
 undetermined possibility (§ 153, 2, c). 
 
 Αέγω, δ τ ι, ει ταύτα ?.έγοις, άμαρτάνοις άν, I say that if you say these 
 thi?igs, you would err. Μίμνημαι άκουσας ποτέ σου, δ τ ι είκότως u ν και παρά 
 θεών πρακτικώτερος εϊη, ώςπερ και παρά ανθρώπων, δςτις μή (= ει τις μη), 
 δπότε εν άπόροις ειη, τότε κολακεύοι, άλλ' δτε τά άριστα πράττοι, τότε μάλιστα 
 τών θεών μεμνώτο, I remember once to have heard you remark, that lie icould reason- 
 ably be most likely to obtain what he wished from gods, as well as from men, who 
 should, etc. 
 
 7. The Ind. of the historical tenses with a ν is used, when the 
 affirmation is to be represented as conditional, as one whose exist- 
 ence or possibility is denied [§ 153, 2, a. (a)] ; e. g. δηλόν εστίν, 
 ότι, ει ταντα έλεγες, ήμάρτανες άν, it is evident that if you said this, 
 you erred, but you did not say it, hence you did not err. 
 
 Remark. Impersonal forms of expression are often changed into those which 
 are personal; e.g. δήλος είμι (φανερός ει μι), δτ ι ταντα εν έπραξα, it 
 
 is evident that I ; δή?ίθί ε ί σ ι ν, δτ ι ταντα ελεξαν, it is evident tliat tliey 
 
 said this. Comp. § 175, Rem. 5. 
 
 C. Exercises on § 180. 
 We know, that the kings of the Lacedaemonians are descendants from Her 
 cules. The Athenians fortified the city in a short ( = little ) time, and it is even 
 now evident, that the construction was done (= took place, aor.) in {κατά) haste. 
 I have often wondered (aor.) hy what (δςτις) arguments the accusers of Socrates 
 convinced (aor.) the Athenians, that he was deserving (άξιοι • είναι) of death from 
 (dot.) the State. Tissaphernes traduced Cyrus to (προς, w. ace.) his brother, 
 (saying) that he was plotting against him. Brasidas not only (τε) showed him 
 self prudent (= moderate) in other (respects), hut (και) in his speeches also he 
 
268 SYNTAX. — FINAL SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 181. 
 
 everywhere manifested that he was sent forth to liberate (part, fict.) Greece. 
 Many of those who (§ 148, 6) pretend to philosophize, might (§ 153, 2, c.) per- 
 haps say (aor.) that the just (man) could never become (got•.) unjust, nor the 
 sober-minded arrogant. It is evident that we may be delivered (aor.) far more 
 speedily, if (part.) we say (aor.) nothing, than if we defend ourselves poorly. I 
 pray you to observe beforehand that, if (part.) Aeschines had not brought for- 
 ward (κατηγορεϊν, aor.) something foreign to (= besides) the indictment, neither 
 would I (= I also 'would not) say (ποιεϊσ&αι) a single (= any) word. 
 
 §181. B. Final Substantive- Sentences introduced by 
 
 ως, 'ίνα, etc. 
 
 1. The second kind of substantive-sentences, are the final sen- 
 tences, i. e. those which denote a purpose, intention, end. These 
 sentences are introduced by the following conjunctions, ώ ς, όπως, 
 ϊν α, ώ ς μη, ο 7t ω g μη, ϊν α μ η. 
 
 2. The mode used in final sentences is commonly the Subj. or 
 Opt. When the verb of the principal sentence is a principal tense 
 — Pres., Perf. or Fut., or an Aor. with the signification of the 
 Pres. (§ 152, 12.) — the final conjunctions are followed by the Subj. 
 mode ; but when the verb of the principal sentence is an historical 
 tense — Impf., Plup. or Aor. — the final conjunctions are followed by 
 the Opt. (but never by the Opt. Fut.). 
 
 Ταντα γράφω, γέγραφα, γράψω, Ι ν 1 ε ?.■&?] ς, ut venias, that you may come; λέ- 
 ξον, ϊν' ε ιδώ, die, ut sciam, say, that I may hnou) ; — ταντα έγραφον, έγεγράφειν, 
 έγραψα, ϊν' ε λ ■& ο ι ς, ut venires, that you might come. Έ /c της των ΤΙερσών ελευ- 
 θέρας αγοράς καλούμενης τά μεν ωνια καΐ οι αγοραίοι α π ε λ ή λ α ν τ a ι είς άλ- 
 λον τόπον, ως μη μιγνυηται η τούτων τίψβη ry των πεπαιδευμένων ευκο- 
 σμία, traffickers and their goods have been removed from tlie public forum of the Per- 
 sians, that the disordei: of these may not mingle with the correct deportment of the edu- 
 cated. "Ινα σαφέστερον δη λω&ή πάσα ή ΤΙερσών πο/ατεία, μικρόν έπάνει- 
 μ ι (paucis repetam), in order that the entire jwlity of the Persians may be more clearly 
 understood, I will recapitulate briefly. Καμβύσης τον Κϋρον ά π ε κ ά λ ε ι, δ πω ς 
 τά εν ΊΙέρσαι ς έπιχώρια ε π ιτε/^οίη. 
 
 Remark. Hence what in Latin is the sequence or dependence of tenses, in Greek 
 is the sequence of modes. For example ; if in Latin the principal verb is in the 
 Pres., the verb of the subordinate clause is generally in the Pres. also ; and if 
 the principal verb is a past tense, so is the verb of the subordinate clause. 
 But in Greek, if the principal verb is a Pres., Perf. or Fut., the Subj. is used in 
 the subordinate clause ; and if the principal verb is a past tense, the Opt. is 
 generally used in the subordinate clause ; e. g. ταντα γράφω, γ έγραφα, etc., 
 ιν' ελϋ-ης, haee scribo, scripsi, ut venias; — ταντα ε γ ρ αφ ο ν, έγεγράφειν, 
 Ιν" έλϋ-οις, scvibebam, scripseram, ut venires. — On the Subj. after an historical 
 tense, see i 1S8. 4. 
 

 § 181.] SYNTAX. FINAL SUBSTANTIVE-SENTENCES. 269 
 
 3. With the final conjunctions cog and όπως. also ίνα, the mo- 
 dal adverb a ν is sometimes joined, winch refers to a conditional 
 sentence, commonly not expressed, but to be supplied ; e. g. δια της 
 σης χωράς αξεις ημάς, όπως αν ε ιδώ μεν, ά τε δει φίλια καΐ 
 πολέμια νομίζειν, you will lead us through your territory in order that 
 (when we set our foot on it) we may know, both ivhat it is necessary 
 to regard as friendly and what hostile. 
 
 4. Verbs of care, anxiety, considering, endeavoring, striving, ef- 
 fecting and admonishing, e. g. επιμελεΐσ&αι, φροντίζειν, φνλάττειν, 
 σκοπεΐν, βονλενεσ&αι, όραν, ποιεϊν, πράττειν, curare, μηχανάσ&αι, 
 παρακαλεΐν, παραγγέλλειν, προειπεΐν, αίτεΐα&αι, άγε, and the like, 
 are followed by the conjunction όπως (όπως μη) either with 
 the Subj. and Opt. (according to No. 2.), or, what is more usual, 
 with the Ind. Fut., not only after a principal tense, but very often 
 also after an historical tense ; in the latter case, the accomplishment 
 of the purpose is represented as really occurring and continuing. 
 
 Οί ΤΙερσικοι νόμοι έ π ι μ έ λ ο ν τ α ι, υπ ω ς την άρχην μ η τοιούτοι έσονται 
 οι πολϊται, οίοι πονηρού η αισχρού έργον έφίεσϋ-αι, the Persian laws take care, 
 that tlie citizens shall by no means be such as to desire any wicked or shameful act ; 
 Σ κ ο π εισ-& ε τούτο, ω άνδρες Άΰ-ηναϊοι, δπ ω ς μη λόγους έ ροϋ σ ι μόνον οί 
 παρ' ημών πρέσβεις, άλλα. και έργου τι δεικνύειν έ ξ ο ν σ ι ν, consider this, that 
 our envoys will not speak only, but they will be able, etc. 
 
 5. The final conjunctions ι ν a and ώ ς (more seldom ο πω ς), are 
 followed by the Ind. of the historical tenses, when a purpose is to be 
 expressed, which has not been accomplished or which cannot be ac- 
 complished. 
 
 'Έ,χρην σε Ύίηγά-σου ζεύξαι πτερόν, 'όπως ε φ αίνο ν τοις ■&εοΐς τραγικό- 
 τερος, it would be necessary for you to mount your Pegasus, that you might appear 
 more majestic to the gods; έ β ουλόμην δ' αν, Σίμωνα την αυτήν γνώμην έμοϊ 
 έχειν, ϊν' αμφοτέρων ημών άκούσαντες ταΐηΰη ραδίως έγνωτε τα δίκαια, 1 
 would that Simon were of the same opinion as lam, that having heard both of us, you 
 might eas-ily judge what is just. 
 
 CI. Exercises on § 181. 
 Contemplate thine actions as in a mirror, that thou mayest adorn the beauti- 
 ful, hide the unseemhy. The Lacedaemonians were not permitted (impers. w. dot.) 
 to travel abroad, lest the citizens should he filled with frivolity by (από) for- 
 eigners. Kemember absent as well as (= besides, προς, ιυ. ace.) present friends, 
 lest it may seem that you would neglect the latter also in their absence (part.). 
 Agesilaus took care that the soldiers should be able to endure hardships. The 
 president of the city must {χρή, w. ace. and inf.) see to it, that the best (men) 
 have the greatest honors. Noble (= honor-loving) and high-souled men (= of 
 men) do everything, that they may leave behind an immortal remembrance of 
 23* 
 
270 SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 182. 
 
 themselves. Endeavor to fight with all ardor, that you may sui-pass your fore- 
 fathers in renown. Would that (ει γαρ ώψελον) the multitude (ol πολλοί) were 
 able to effect the greatest evils, that they might also be able (to effect) the great- 
 est good (plur.) ; then (= and) it would be well ( = have itself well, § 153, 2, a.). 
 Why (τί) didst thou not seize (part, aor.) and slay me, that I might never show 
 {aor.) myself to men ? 
 
 §182. II. Adjective-Sentences. 
 
 1. Adjective-sentences are adjectives or participles expanded in- 
 to a sentence, and, like adjectives, define more fully a substantive 
 or substantive-pronoun ; e. g. οι πολέμιοι, ol εκ της πόλεως άπέφν- 
 γον = οι πολέμιοι εκ τ. π. άποφνγόντες; τά πράγματα, α Λλέξ- 
 ανδρός έπραξεν = τα νπο Αλεξάνδρου π ρ αχϋ• έντ α πράγματα. 
 These sentences are introduced by the relative pronouns ο ς, η, ο, 
 οςτ ι ς, ήτις, θ τι, οίος, etc. 
 
 2. The relative pronoun agrees in gender and number with the 
 substantive (standing in the principal sentence) to which it refers, 
 in the same manner as the attributive adjective with its substantive ; 
 but its Case is determined by the predicate standing in the subordi- 
 nate sentence ; e. g. ό άνηρ ο ν εΐδες — η άρετη, ή ς πάντες οι άγα&οΐ 
 επι&νμονσιν — οι στρατιώται, ο Ι ς μαχσμεϋα, etc. 
 
 Rem. 1. When a predicative substantive stands in an adjective-sentence, very 
 frequently the relative does not agree, in gender and number, with the substan- 
 tive to which it refers, but, by means of a kind of attraction, with the predica* 
 tive substantive. The verb of the adjective-sentence is usually a verb signify- 
 ing to be, to name, to call ; e. g. Ή οδός προς εω τρέπεται, ο καλείται ^λού- 
 σων στόμα, the course turns to the east, which is called the Pelusian mouth ; here δ 
 takes the gender of the predicative στόμα, instead of that of its antecedent όόός. 
 Άκρα, αϊ καλούνται κλείδες της Κύπρου. Τίερσικόν ξίφος, ο ν άκινά- 
 κην καλοϋσιν. Λ ό γ ο ι μην είσιν εν έκάστοις ημών, ας ελπίδας όνομάζο- 
 μεν. 
 
 Rem. 2. There is an exception in respect to number in the formula εστίν oh. 
 e. g. λεγονσι, sunt, qui dicant. This formula is treated in all respects as a sub- 
 stantive-pronoun, inasmuch as neither the number of the relative has any influ- 
 ence on that of the verb εστίν, nor is the tense changed, when the discourse re- 
 lates to past or future time. 
 
 απέφυγαν. 
 
 άπέσχετο. 
 
 ονχ ούτως έδοξεν. 
 
 άπέκτεινεν. 
 
 3. The person of the verb in the adjective-sentence, is deter- 
 mined by the substantive or pronoun (expressed or understood), to 
 which the relative refers. Έ γ ω, ο ς γράφω — σ ν, ο ς γράφεις — 
 
 Norn. 
 
 έστ ιν 
 
 ι 
 
 (= εν ιο ι) 
 
 Gen. 
 
 εστίν 
 
 ών 
 
 (== εν ίων) 
 
 Dat. 
 
 εστ lv 
 
 ο ις 
 
 ( = εν ίο ίς) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ε στ ιν 
 
 ους 
 
 (= εν ίου ς) 
 
§ 182.] SYNTA.X. ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 271 
 
 6 άνηο or εκείνος, ο ς γράφει. Hence after a Vocative Case, the 
 second person is commonly used ; e. g. a ν # ρ ω π ε, ο ς ημάς τοιαύτα 
 nana έπο ι η σ ας, Ο man, who inflicted such evils on us. 
 
 4. The relative is plural, when it refers to two or more objects ; 
 and when the gender of the substantives is the same, the relative 
 agrees with these in gender ; often, however, it is neuter, when the 
 substantives denote inanimate objects. 
 
 Έν εκείνη rrj ψων?) τε και τω τρόπω έλεγον, 'εν οίςπ ε ρ έτεΰ-ρύμμην. 'Ορώ 
 αυτόν κεκοσμημένον και όφ&α?ιμών υπογραφή, καϊ χρώματος έντρίψει, και κόμακ, 
 προςϋέτοις, ά δη νόμιμα ην εν Μήδοις. 
 
 5. When the substantives are of different gender, the relative, 
 when persons are spoken of, agrees with the masculine rather thar. 
 the feminine ; but when things are spoken of, it is usually neuter. 
 
 Ό αν η ρ και /; γυνή, ο Ι πάρα σε \f)\&ov. 'Ήκομεν έκκλησιάζοντες περί τε 
 πολέμου και ειρήνης, ά μεγίστην έχει δυναμιν έν τώ τών άνϋ-ρώπων βίω. 
 
 6. When the relative should be in the Ace, and refers to a sub- 
 stantive in the Gen. or Dat., it is commonly put in the same Case 
 as its substantive, when the adjective-sentence has nearly the force 
 of an attributive adjective or participle. This construction is called 
 attraction of the relative. The substantive frequently stands in the 
 relative sentence. 
 
 Αρίων διΰ-ύραμβον πρώτος άν& ρώπων ων ήμεϊς Ισμεν έποίησεν (in- 
 stead of ους ισμεν), Arion was the first among men known to us, to invent the dithy- 
 ramb. Ό στρατηγός ηγε την στρατιαν από τών πόλεων ών (instead of ας) 
 έπε ισ εν (= τών πεισΰεισών), the general led the army from the cities, which he 
 had persuaded. Συν τοϊς ΰησαυ ροϊς οι ς (instead of ους ) ό πατήρ κατέλι- 
 π εν (= τοϊς υπό του πατρός καταλειφΰ-εΐσιν), with the treasures which his father 
 left. Κϋρος προςήλ&ε συν φ είχε δυνάμει, Cyrus came with the force which 
 he had. 'Έγώ σοι νπισχνονμαι, ην ό &εός ευ δίδω, άν&' ω ν (== αντί τούτων, ά) 
 hv έμοι δ αν ει ση ς, άλλα π?,είονος άξια εύεργετησειν. 
 
 7. The relatives οίος, ο cog, οςτιςοΰν, ήλίκος, both as 
 Accusatives and Nominatives, are attracted, when the verb sivat 
 and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause ; e. g. 
 οίος σν εϊ, οίος εκείνος or ο Σωκράτης εστί. This attraction is 
 made in the following manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., 
 Dat. or Ace. to which the relative refers, is omitted, but the relative 
 is put in the Case of the preceding substantive or of the (omitted) 
 substantive demonstrative, and the verb είναι of the adjective-clause 
 is also omitted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the 
 Case of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause, 
 has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective ; the connec- 
 
272 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 182. 
 
 tion of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still more com- 
 plete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in tte adjective- 
 clause ; e. g. in the full and natural form of the sentence χαρίζομαι 
 άνδρι τοιοντφ, οίος συ ύ, by omitting the demonstrative, τοιούτφ, to 
 which the relative οίος refers, by attracting οίος into the Case of the 
 preceding substantive άνδρί, and by omitting ει of the relative sen- 
 tence, and attracting the subject συ into the Case of the relative, 
 we have the common form χαρίζομαι, άνδρί οϊφ οοί, or by transpo- 
 sition χαρίζομ,αι οϊφ σοι άνδρί. In English the above relatives may 
 be translated by as or such as. 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat, 
 Ace. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 ερώ οίου σον αν ο ρ ο ς. 
 χαρίζομαι ο'ίω σο Ι άνδρί. 
 επαινώ οίον σε άνδρα, 
 ερώ ο 'ίων υμών ανδρών, 
 χαρίζομαι οϊοις ν μ. Ι ν άνδ ράσ ι ν. 
 επαινώ οϊονς υμάς άνδρας. 
 
 βρω οίον σου. 
 χαρίζομαι ο'ίω σοι. 
 επαινώ οίον σε. 
 ερώ οίων ν μ ώ ν. 
 χαρίζομαι οίο ι ς ν μ Ι ν. 
 επαινώ οίους υμάς. 
 
 Ε,εμ. 3. Attraction also takes place, when οίος or οίος τε is used instead 
 of ώ ςτε with the Inf., signifying lam of such a nature, character that (is sum qui, 
 with the Subj.), hence, / can; e. g. Δ.ιελέχ&ην Στωϊκώ τοιούτω ο'ίω μήτε λυ- 
 πεί σ•& α ι, μητ' όργίζεσΰ-αι, I conversed with such a Stoic as could neither be 
 grieved nor irritated. The demonstrative is commonly omitted ; e. g. Ήίόνην την 
 τών άν&ρώπων γλώτταν εποίησαν ο'ι -&εοί οίαν άρ-& ρουν την φωνην, the gods 
 made the human tongue only, capable of uttering articulate sounds; here the demon- 
 strative τοιούτην, to which οίαν refers, is omitted. 
 
 Eem. 4. Sometimes an attraction takes place directly the opposite of that 
 mentioned in the adjective-clause, since the relative does not take the Case of 
 its substantive, but the substantive, the Case of the relative which refers to it. 
 This maybe called inverted attraction; e.g. Την ονσίαν (instead of ουσία) 
 η ν κατέλιπε τω υίφ, ου πλείονος άξια εστίν, the property which he left to his son is 
 worth no more. This inverted attraction is very common with ουδείς δςτις 
 ov (no one, who not = every one), after an omitted εστί. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ουδείς 
 
 δ ςτ ις 
 
 OV Ιί 
 
 αν ταντα ποιήσειεν. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ού δ εν ο ς 
 
 δτ ον 
 
 ον 
 
 κατεγέλασεν. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ον δ ενϊ 
 
 δ τ ω 
 
 ον κ 
 
 άπεκρίνατο. 
 
 Aec. 
 
 ον δ εν α 
 
 υ ν τ ιν α 
 
 ού 
 
 κατέκλανσεν. 
 
 8. On the use of the modes in adjective-sentences, the following 
 is to be observed : 
 
 (a) The Ind. is used, when the attributive qualification (i. e. the 
 idea contained in the predicate) is represented as something actual 
 or real; e. g. ή πόλις, η κτίζεται, η εχτίσ&η, η κτισ&ήσεται. The 
 Ind. Fut. is very frequently used, even after an historical tense 
 (§ 188, 4), to denote what should be done, or the purpose (§ 152, 6) ; 
 e. g. στρατηγούς αιροννται, οί τφ Φιλίτζπω n ολε μήσ ου σ ιν, who 
 should fight, or to fight with P. Also after negations the Greek 
 
§ 182.] SYNTAX. — A.DJECTIVE-SENTENCES. 273 
 
 uses the Ind., where the Latin has the Subj.; e. g. παρ εμο\ ου- 
 δείς, ο gr ι ς μη ικανός ε α τ ι ν Ίσα ποιεΐν ίμοί, nemo, qui -non pos- 
 sit. 
 
 (b) The relative with av, e. g. oV av, // αν, ο αν, οςτις αν, etc., 
 is followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
 one of the principal tenses (Pres., Perf. or Fut.), if the attributive 
 qualification is to be represented as merely conceived or assumed. 
 Hence it is also used to designate quality and size indefinitely, and 
 also to express indefinite frequency (as often as). The adjective- 
 sentence can commonly be considered as a conditional sentence, 
 and the relative with av can be resolved into the conjunction εάν 
 with τις or any other pronoun and the Subj. 
 
 Ο ν ς αν ( = εάν τινάς) βελτίονς τίνες έαντών η γ η σ ω ν τ a ι, τούτοις πολ- 
 Χάκις και άνευ ανάγκης έΰέ/ιουσι πείΰ-εσ&αι, whomsoever any persons think {if any 
 persons think any) superior to themselves, these they, etc. ' Χν&ρωποι έπ' οΰδένας 
 ιιά7ι.λον συνίστανται, η έττι τούτους, ους αν (= εάν τινάς) αίσ *& ων τ α ι αρ- 
 χειν αυτών έτηχειοοϋντας, men combine against none more than against those whom 
 they see endeavoring to rule them. 
 
 (c) The relative (without av) is used with the Opt., in the first 
 place, with the same signification as with the Subj. and av, but re- 
 ferring to an historical tense. Hence, it is used in general and in- 
 definite statements ; so also in expressing indefinite freauency, — in 
 which case the verb of the principal sentence is commonly in the 
 Impf. Here also the adjective-sentence may be resolved by εί with 
 the Opt. 
 
 Ot ττο?,έμιοι ττάντας έξης, δ τ ω ( = εί Ttvl) εν τ νχο ι εν, και τναϊδας καϊ γυ- 
 ναίκας εκτεινον, the enemy killed all, one after another, loth children and women, 
 whomsoever they fell in with ( = if they fdl in with any). Φί?,ους, όσους π ο ιή- 
 σαιτο και εννους γνοίη οντάς, και ικανούς κρίνειε συνεργούς είναι, δ τι 
 τυγχάνο ι βουλόμενος κατεργάζεσβ-αι, δμο/.ογεϊται προς πάντων κράτ ιστός δή 
 γενέσθαι ■& εραπεϋ ειν. 
 
 (d) In the second place, the Opt. is used, when a present or fu- 
 ture uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, a mere supposition, 
 conjecture, assumption, is to be denoted. The adjective-sentence 
 is then considered as an uncertain or doubtful condition [§ 153, 1, 
 b, (β)], or forms a part of a sentence expressing a wish. 
 
 Ύοϋ αυτδν 2,έγειν, α μη σαφώς ε Ί δ ε ί η, φείδεσ-&αι δεϊ, he mast avoid saying, 
 what he does not fully knoio (= if he does not fully know). Έ ρ δ ο ι τις, η ν έκα- 
 στος ε ί δ ε ί η τέχνην, any one can practise the art icith which he is acquainted ( = 
 if he is acquainted with it). 
 
 (e) The Opt. with av is used, when the attributive qualification 
 
274 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE-SENTENCES. [§ 182 
 
 is to be represented as & conditional supposition, conjecture, assump- 
 tion, an undetermined possibility (§ 153, 2, c.). 
 
 Ύονς λ ΐμβάνοντας της ομιλίας μισϋον άνδραττοδιστάς εαυτών άπεκάλει Σω- 
 κράτης, διά το άναγκαϊον αντοϊς είναι διαλέγεσΰαι, παρ' ων αν λάβοιεν 
 τον μισΰόν, Socrates said that those who receive a reward for their instruction, bar- 
 tered their own freedom, because it was necessary for them to converse with those from 
 whom they might receive a reward. Ova εστίν δ τι αν τις μείζον τούτον κακόν 
 πάΰ-ο ι, there is no evil which any one can experience, greater than this. 
 
 (f ) The Ind. of the historical tenses (Impf., Plup., Aor.) is used 
 with av, when it is indicated that the attributive qualification could 
 take place only under a certain condition, but did not take place, 
 because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 153, 2, a, (a)] ; e. g. η 
 πόλις, ψ οι πολέμιοι ουκ αν i π 6 ρ &ή <τ α ν, ει οι στρατιώται εβοη- 
 {τ?]σαν, quam hostes non diruissent, si milites auxilio venissent. 
 
 CII. Exercises on § 182. 
 Many acts have become (the) occasions of very great advantages, which at 
 first (=at the beginning ), all supposed {aor.) to be calamities (sing.). Who 
 would (§ 153, 2, c.) not praise you (aor.), who have fought (aor.) boldly for the 
 freedom of your native land? The ungrateful (men) forgot us, who conferred 
 on them great benefits. There are men who (or some) are esteemed happy by 
 all more than by themselves. Cannot thy brother, Ο Chaerecrates, said So- 
 crates, please (aor.) any one, or doth he please some very highly 1 Cleopompus 
 ravaged some (tracts, neut. plur.) of sea-coast. In the young man there dwells 
 a fear which we call shame. For the acquisition of a friend, which we say is a 
 very great blessing, we see that the multitude care little. There arose confused 
 noises, cries and shoutings, which is (a) common (thing) to all who (§ 148, 6) 
 engage in a naval battle. Of the nations with which we are acquainted in 
 Asia, the Persians rule, but the Syrians, Phrygians and Lydians are depen- 
 dent (= are ruled). I have never yet esteemed a rich man happy (aor.), who 
 (part.) enjoys nothing of that which he possesses. We must remember not only 
 the death of the departed, but also the virtue, which they have left behind. Many 
 indeed commend fair words, but nevertheless do otherwise (another, neat.) and 
 opposite to that which they have commended (aor.). Do nothing which thou 
 dost not understand. A rational man, if (part.) he has lost (aor.) a son or any- 
 thing else which he prizes very highly, will bear (it) more easily than others. 
 I have sent (aor.) thee this wine, said Cyrus, and I pray thee to drink it (aor.) 
 to-day with those whom thou most lovest. The tyrant has given sufficient sat- 
 isfaction for what he has done (aor.). The general led (aor.) the army away 
 from the cities, which he had subjected (aor.) to himself. The Persians wero 
 not able to fight (aor.) courageously against men so brave as were the Athe- 
 nians and Lacedaemonians. In a man such as thou art, the citizens of the 
 State will cheerfully confide. It is no trivial matter to engage in single combat 
 (aor.) with a man like thee. Socrates was one of those who listen only to rea- 
 son (= was such as to listen, etc.). The barbarians had dwellings (so built) 
 
§ 183.] SYNTAX. — ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 275 
 
 as to be fitted to shelter (them) both in winter and m summer. There was no 
 peril which our forefathers did not undergo for the freedom of their native land. 
 There was no one present (= of the present) except Socrates, whom Apollodo- 
 rus did not move (aor.) by his weeping (part.) and complaining (άγανακτείν). 
 What one does not (μη) possess, he cannot (§ 153, 2, c.) give (aor.) another. 
 (It is) not the golden sceptre (that) preserves royal dominion, but faithful 
 friends, that are the truest and surest sceptre for kings. The Phaeacians gave 
 Ulysses treasures, more than he would ever (= so many as he would never) 
 have gained (aor.) from Troy, if [el, w. ind. aor.) he had come unharmed to his 
 native land. There was then not a Spartan (gen. plur.), who, if the country 
 had been in danger, would not have been ready to die for it. States are called 
 very fortunate, that continue most of the time in peace. It is a great mark of 
 a sovereign, if the citizens voluntarily obey him and are ready to abide by (him) 
 : n dangers. A man is truly great, who can accomplish (aor.) a great (object) 
 by intellect (γνώμη) rather than by strength of body. He, at sight (part, aor.) 
 of whom men are stirred (aor.) and ardor and emulation seize (εμπίπτειν τινί, 
 aw. sing.) every one, he I might assert has something of a kingly nature. The 
 Assyrians prayed all whom (ocric, sing.) they might meet, that they would not 
 flee and leave them behind (part, aor.), but succor (aor.) them. "We cannot 
 (§ 153, 2, c) enjoy (aor.) a man, who delights in dainty food and wine more 
 than in friends. Who could hate (one), whom he knew to be considered noble ? 
 Socrates always said, that there was no (oh) better way to a (= the) good repu- 
 tation, than (that) by which one should become (aor.) versed (= good) in (ace.) 
 that in which he wished to appear so. Those who (§ 148, 6) took pay for their 
 instruction, Socrates called man-sellers of themselves, because (ocu to) they 
 were obliged to converse with those from whom they could receive pay. There 
 was no (ov) city there, by which they could defend themselves. 
 
 §183. III. Adverbial Sentences . 
 Adverbial sentences are adverbs, or participles used adverbially 
 (§176, 1), formed into a sentence, and, like adverbs, denote an ad- 
 verbial object, i. e. such an object as merely defines the predicate, 
 but does not, like the object expressed by the substantive-sentence, 
 complete it ; e. g. ore to εαρ ή λ & ε, t ά άν&η βάλλει (= τον 
 έαρος ελ&όντος). 
 
 Α. Adverbial Sentences οε Place and Time. 
 1. Adverbial sentences of place are introduced by the relative 
 adverbs of place, ov, ij, βπΐβ, οπον, εν&α, ΐνα (ιΜ) ; ο&εν, εν&εν 
 (unde) ; οι, οποί, rj, οπη (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express 
 the three relations, where, whence, whither. The use of the modes 
 in adverbial sentences of place, is in all respects, like that in adjec- 
 tive-sentences. 
 
276 SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§ 183 
 
 2. Adverbial sentences of time are introduced by the following 
 conjunctions : 
 
 a. To denote that one action is contemporary with another, by ore, οπότε, ώς, 
 ήνίκα, which designate a point of time, and εν φ, έως, while, which designate a 
 space of time. 
 
 b. To denote that one action is prior to another, by επεί, επειδή, postquam, εξ 
 ov, εξ 'ότου, ex quo, and up ov, since. 
 
 c. To denote that one action succeeds another, by πρίν, priusquam, έως, έως ov, 
 εις δ, εςτε, μέχρι ού, μέχρι δτον, μέχρι. 
 
 3. On the use of the modes, the following is to be observed : 
 
 (a) The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented as 
 afact; hence in mentioning actual events or occurrences. 
 
 Ώ,ς ημέρα τάχιστα έγ εγόν ει, άπηλ-&ον (ώς τάχιστα, quum pnmum, as 
 soon as it was day, they departed). Ού πρότερον έπανσαντο, πριν τον τε πατέρα 
 έκ του στρατοπέδου μ ε τ ε π έ μ-φ αν τ ο, και των φίλων αντον τονς μεν ά π έ κ- 
 τ ε ιν αν, τονς δ' έκ της πόλεως έ ξ έ β αλον, they did not cease, before they sent 
 for their father from the camp, and put to death some of his friends and banished others. 
 Έμάχοντο, μ έ χ ρ ι οί 'Αΰηναΐοι αν έπλεν σαν. 
 
 (b) The Subj. is used, when the statement of time or the asser- 
 tion of the predicate, is represented as something conceived and 
 general, and refers to a predicate of the principal sentence, the verb 
 of which is in one of the principal tenses. The modal adverb av 
 is united with the conjunctions ; e. g. όταν, οπόταν, ψίκ αν, επάν 
 (ετΐήν), ετζειδάν, τΐριν αν, εως αν, μέχρι αν, εςτ αν. Accordingly, 
 the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions from όταν to πρίν 
 αν, when the statement of time is also to be represented as the 
 condition, under which the predicate of the principal sentence will 
 take place. But with the conjunctions, which signify till, the Subj. 
 expresses an object expected and aimed at. In like manner also, 
 the Subj. is used to denote indefinite frequency ; the conjunctions 
 are then translated by as often as. 
 
 Έπειδάν σύ β ούλη διαλέγεσΰαι, ώς εγώ δνναμαι έπεσ&αι, τότε σοι δια- 
 λέξομαι, whenever you (if you) wish to discourse so that I can follow, then I will dis~ 
 course with you. Οϋ πρότερον πανσομαι, πριν αν έλω τε και πνρώσω τάς 
 Ά&ήνας, I will not cease, before I take and burn Athens (unless I take, etc.). "Εως 
 αν σώζη τ α ι το σκάφος, τότε χρη και ναντην και κυβερνητην προϋ-υμονς είναι 
 (dum servari possit), while the ship can be saved, the sailor and the pilot should be ac- 
 tive (if the ship, etc.). 'Οπόταν στρατοπεδενωνται οί βάρβαροι βασι- 
 λείς, τάφρον περιβάλλονται εύπετώς δια την πολνχειρίαν, as often as the barba- 
 rian kings make an expedition, they easily intrench themselves by means of the great 
 number of workmen. 
 
 (c) The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, — (a) when the 
 
§ 183.] SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 277 
 
 statement refers to an historical tense in the principal clause. When 
 the Opt. is used to denote indefinite frequency [as often as, comp. 
 (b)], the Impf. generally stands in the principal sentence ; (β) when 
 the statement of time is to be considered also as a condition of the 
 principal sentence, and such a condition as appears as a present or 
 future uncertainty, as a mere supposition, conjecture, assumption or 
 undetermined possibility [§ 153, 1, b. ({?)]. With the Opt. the con- 
 junctions are used without uv; e. g. οτε, επεί, etc. (not όταν, εηάν, 
 etc.). 
 
 Ov πρότερου έπανσατο, πριν ε?, οι τε καΙ π ν ρώσ ε ι ε τας Ά^νας. 
 'Οπότε (as often as, whenever, if ever) στ ρατοπ ε δ ευ ο ιν το οι βάρβαρο* 
 βασι?.εις, τάφρον π ε ρ ι ε β άλλο ν τ ο ενπετώς δια την πο? ί .υχεφίαν. Όπότ t 
 τό φιλοσοφείν αίσχρον η γ η σαι μην είναι, ονδ' αν άν&ρωπον νομίσαίμι έμαντόν 
 είναι (if I believed it disgraceful to be a philosopher, I would not think myself a man). 
 So also, οτε μη with Opt., nisi 
 
 Remark. In addition to the constructions already mentioned, the conjunc- 
 tion π ρ iv is constructed with the Inf., especially after affirmative sentences, 
 containing one of the principal tenses, when the action is to be represented as 
 an incidental or casual designation of the point of time. The subject of the Inf. 
 is put in the Ace; on attraction, see § 172,3. Ααρεϊος, πριν αιχμαλώτους 
 γενέσθαι τους Έρετριέας, ενεϊχεν αντοϊς δεινον χόλον, before the Ere• 
 trians were taken captive, Darius cherished bitter hatred towards them. 'Ήσαν Δα- 
 ρείω, ττρϊν βασίλευσα ι, γεγονότες τρεϊς παίδες, three children were born to 
 Darius before he was king. So πρότερον η and the Epic πύρος, are followed by 
 the Inf. 
 
 CI1T. Exercises on § 183. 
 
 The soul is freest when it leaves the body. Agesilaus offered sacrifice and 
 waited until the fugitives had brought (aor.) a sacrifice to Neptune. The Athe- 
 nians did not cease to be angry (έν bpyy εχειν) with Pericles, until they had 
 punished (aor.) him by a fine. If men have robbed (aor.) or stolen, they 
 are punished. Do not decide (aor.) before thou hast heard (aor.) both parties 
 (= the plea of both). We must (δει, w. ace. and inf.) resolutely perform (άνν- 
 eiv) the journey, till we have reached (aor.) the goal. What does it profit some 
 to be rich, who do not (§ 177, 5.) understand how to use riches? Those who 
 (§ 148, 6) have received favors (εν πάσχειν, aor.) we call ungrateful, if (when) 
 able to requite (aor.) they do not. No one was permitted (= it was not 
 permitted) to go (ειςέρχεσ&αι, aor.) to the general, if he was not (§ 177, 
 5) at leisure. The Chalcidians gave way (ένδίδόναι), as often as the enemy 
 charged, and as they fell back (άττοχωρεϊν, part, pres.) the eneoy pressed 
 on and threw javelins. Whenever young men associated with Socrates, 
 they made progress in virtue. He who (§ 148, 6) is voluntarily hungry, can 
 (§ 153, 2, c.) eat (aor.) when he will, and he who is voluntarily thirsty, can drink 
 (aor.) when he will; but he who suffers this by necessity, has not the power 
 (ίξεστι, w. dot.) to cease to hunger and thirst, when he will. Eat not, before 
 
 24 
 
278 SYNTAX. CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§§ 184, 185. 
 
 thou art hungry, and drink not, before thou art thirsty. That (= the) death is 
 without pain, which (part.) happens (aw.) ere (one could) think (δοκεΐν, aor.) 
 of (it). The tradition is, that the island (of) Delos, before Apollo appeared 
 (aor.) to men, was concealed by the sea (το πέ?ιαγος). 
 
 Β. Causal Adverbial Sentences. 
 
 §184. a. Adverbial Sentence s denoting Cause. 
 
 1. Such as are introduced by the conjunctions of time, ore, 
 οπότε, ως, ε π ε ί, quoniam, since, επειδή, quoniam, since the 
 cause is considered contemporary (ότε, οπότε, ως), with the predicate 
 of the principal sentence, or prior (επεί, επειδή) to it. The Ind. 
 is the prevailing mode in these adverbial sentences ; e. g. Μη 
 με κτεΐν, επει ονχ όμογάστριος' Εκτορός ε ί μι, quoniam — non sum, 
 do not slay me, since I am not a brother of Hector. "Ο τ ε τοίννν 
 ταν&' όντως έχει, προςηκει προ&ύμως ε&έλειν άκονειν, since these 
 things are so, etc. 
 
 2. Such as are introduced by the conjunctions ο τ ι and διότι, 
 because. With these also, the Ind. is the prevailing mode ; e. g. 
 Άρα. το όσιον, ότι όσιόν εστί, φιλεΐται νπό των <&εών, η, ότι 
 φ ι λ είτα ι, όσιόν εστίν, is what is holy, loved by the gods because 
 it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved f 
 
 §185. b. Conditional Adverbial Sentences. 
 
 1. The second kind of causal adverbial sentences, are those which 
 express a condition, and are introduced by the conjunctions ε ί and 
 εάν (ην, a ν, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb 
 av, see § 153, 2). The principal clause expresses that which is 
 conditioned by the subordinate clause. As the conditioning clause 
 precedes the conditioned, the former is called the Protasis, the lat- 
 ter, the Apodosis. 
 
 2. The Greek language has four different ways of expressing 
 condition ali ty : 
 
 (1) The protasis has ε i with the Ind., and the apodosis likewise 
 the Ind. (sometimes also the Imp.). Then both the condition and 
 that which is subject to the condition, are represented as a reality or 
 fact, and hence as certain. 
 
 Έί tovto λέγεις, άμαρτάνεις, if you say this (admitted or assumed as a 
 fact), you err. EZ ε'ισϊ βωμοί, είσΐ και ΰεοί, if there are altars (an admitted fact), 
 there are also gods. Έί εστί •&εός, σοώός έστ ι ν. Έί ταντα πεποίηκας. 
 
§ 185.] SYNTAX. CAUSAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 279 
 
 έτταινεΐσΰαι άξιος ε Ι. Εί τι ε Ι χ ε, και t δ Ί δ ο ν. Εί έ β ρόντ ?j σ ε, καϊ η σ- 
 τ ρ αψ εν. Εί ταύτα έ π ε ττ ο ι ?'/ κ ε ι, η μ α ρ τ η κ ε ι. Εί τούτο λέξεις, ά μαρ- 
 τη στ). Εί τι έ\ ε ι ς, δ υ ς. 
 
 (2) The protasis has ε ί with the Ind. of an historical tense, and 
 the apodosis also the Ind. of an historical tense with άν. This 
 form is used, when the reality of the condition and of that which is 
 subject to the condition, is to be denied. It is asserted that some- 
 thing could take place under a certain condition, but did not take 
 place, because the condition was not fulfilled. 
 
 El τι είχεν, ί δ'ιδον άν, si quid haberet, daret (nunc autem nihil habet ; ergo 
 nihil dare potest), if he had anything, he icould give it (but he has nothing, conse- 
 quently he can give nothing). Εί τούτο έλεγες (έλεξας), η μα ρ τ αν ες (ημαρ- 
 τες) αν, si hoc diceres, en-ares. Ει τούτο έ λ ε ξ α ς, η μαρτ ες άν ( Aor. instead 
 of the Plup.), si hoc dixisses, errasses, if you had said this, you would have erred (but 
 you hare not said it, consequently you cannot have erred). Εί έπείσΰην, 
 ονκ άν ηρβώστονν, si obedissem, non aegrotarem. 
 
 (3) The protasis has εάν with the Subj., and the apodosis the 
 Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fut. (also the Imp.). The 
 condition is then represented as a supposition, the accomplishment 
 of which is, however, expected; that which results from the princi- 
 pal clause is represented by the Ind." as certain or necessary. 
 
 Έάν (ην, άν) τούτο λίγης, άμαρτήση, if you say this (shall say), you will 
 err. (AYhether you will actually say this I do not yet know ; but I expect, I as- 
 sume, that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 
 'Εάν τι έχω μεν, δ ώ σ ο μεν, if ice have anything ( which we expect is the case, 
 or which depends on circumstances) we will give. 'Έάν τούτο 'λέξτ/ς, ά μαρ- 
 τ η σ ν, si hoc dixeris, errabis. 
 
 (4) The protasis has £ i with the Opt., and the apodosis the Opt. 
 with άν. (The Opt. Fut. is not then used). By this form, both 
 the condition, and that which is subject to the condition, is repre- 
 sented as a present, mostly a future uncertainty, as an undetermined 
 'possibility, a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption, without 
 any reference to the thing supposed, being real or not real, possible 
 or impossible. 
 
 Εί τι έχοις, δ ο ί -η ς αν, if you have anything (it neither being assumed nor de- 
 nied that you have ), you would give. Εί τούτο λέγοις, άμα ρ τ άν οις άν. Ονκ 
 άν ν π εν έγ και μ εν ούτε το καύμα, ούτε το ψύχος, ει εξαπίνης γίγν ο ι τ ο. Εί 
 άναγκαΐον ει η άδικειν ή άδικεΐσ-&αι, έλοίμην άν μάλλον άδικεϊσ&αι, η άδικεϊν. 
 
 Rem. 1. Εί with the Ind. or έάν with the Subj. is frequently followed by 
 tbe Opt. with ά ν ; e. g. εί τούτο λέγεις, άμαρτάνοις άν, if you (really) say this, 
 you would err ; εάν τούτο λέγης, άμαρτάνοις άν, if you say this (as Σ expect), you 
 would err ; on the contrary, εί with the Opt. is sometimes followed by the Ind. ; 
 e. g. εί τούτο λέγοις, άμαρτάνει;, if you should say this, you certainly err. 
 
280 SYNTAX. CAUSAL ADVEKBIAL SENTENCES. [§ 185., 
 
 Rem. 2. Ei with the Opt. is frequently used instead of a conjunction of time 
 [§ 183, 3, (c)] to denote indefinite frequency in relation to what is past. Then 
 ει is translated by as often as, and the principal clause has the Ind. of an histori- 
 cal tense, usually the Impf., with and without av ; e. g. Ε Ι τις αντώ δ ο κοίη 
 των προς τοϋτο τεταγμένων βλακεύειν, ε π α ι ε ν αν, as often as any one of those 
 appointed to this work, seemed to him to be indolent, he xoould beat him. El τις Σωκρά- 
 TBi περί του άντιλέγοι, έπι την ύπό&εσιν έπανηγ εν αν πάντα τον λόγον. 
 
 Rem. 3. "With the Ind. of the historical tenses, a ν is commonly omitted in 
 the conclusion with expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, justice, 
 possibility, freedom, inclination, thus, e. g. with χρην, έδει, ωφελον, with verbal ad- 
 jectives in -τέος, προςήκε(ν), καιρός ην, εικός ην, καλόν ην, αίσχρόν ην, κα?ιώς 
 ε ϊχ ε ( ν )ι εξην, έβουλόμην; e. g. Ει αίσχρόν τι έμελλον έργάσασΰαι, ΰάνατον αν? 
 αύτοϋ π ροαιρετ έον ην, mors praeferenda erat. What is here expressed ab- 
 solutely by the Greek, is expressed with an implied condition in English, e. g. εικός 
 fyv, it would be just, αίσχρόν i/v, it would be shameful. 
 
 Rem. 4. The protasis is often omitted, and then the Opt. with av stands with- 
 out any conditional clause ; yet the protasis is contained in an adjective-sen- 
 tence, or in a participle, or in some word of the sentence which may be expand- 
 ed into a conditional protasis, e. g. in the adverb ούτως, in a preposition, or it 
 is indicated in what precedes or follows. "Ος ταϋτα λέγοι (= ει τις ταϋτα 
 λέγοι), άμαρτ άνοι αν, whoever „ (if any one) should say this, would err. Ταϋτα 
 λέξας (= ε'ί συ λέξαις), άμαρτάνοις αν. Ούτω (= ει ούτω ποιήσαις) 
 γ αν άμαρτ αν ο ι ς. Very often, however, the protasis is actually wanting, 
 particularly where it can be easily supplied, e. g. by such phrases as, when one 
 wishes, if it is allowed, if I can, if circumstances favor ; e.g. βονλοίμην av 
 (scil. ει δυναίμην). 
 
 CIV. Exercises on § 185. 
 
 If we strive after virtue, we are happy. If thou wilt follow me, said Virtue 
 to Hercules, thou wilt become a good artificer of noble (deeds). If thou wish- 
 est the gods to be gracious to thee, thou must honor them. If thou art eager 
 to learn, thou wilt learn much (πολυμαϋ-η είναι). For all men death is (the) 
 boundary of life, even though one shut (aor. part.) himself in a cell and keep 
 watch. That which is (= the) unexpected, if it be good, delights men the more, 
 but if it be fearful, it terrifies the more. If thou callest to mind the past, thou 
 wilt decide better upon the future. If we have money, we shall have friends. 
 The possession is nothing, if it is not used (— if there is not using therewith). 
 If men supposed (aor.) that thou wert ungrateful towards thy (= the) parents, 
 no one would believe that he would be repaid ( — receive back a favor), if (part.) 
 he did thee a favor (aor.). The whole time would fail (aor.) us, if we should 
 enumerate all the deeds of Hercules. If we should banish (aor.) from life the 
 love of fame, what then would become (aor.) of virtue (= what would the good 
 become to us), or who would strive to do (aor.) anything illustrious ? • If thou 
 shouldst be ready to take hold (aor.) of philosophy, thou wilt shortly see how 
 much thou wilt be distinguished from others. Wisdom would awaken (= af- 
 ford) a vehement love (plur.), if it were seen by the eyes. Said Alexander: If 
 I were not Alexander, I would be Diogenes. If Socrates had not himself been 
 
§ 18G.] SYNTAX. — ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 281 
 
 (imp/.) very temperate, how would he have made (aor.) others temperate? If 
 ever Astyages demanded anything, Cyrus observed it first. If ever any one 
 served (aor.) Cyrus, when (part.) he had given a command (προςτάττειν, aor.), 
 in no case (= to no one) did he ever leave (aor.) his readiness unrewarded. It 
 would not be (= have itself) well, if the gods delighted more in great offerings, 
 than in small. If a greater danger were to (μέλλω) threaten (= be to) us there 
 than here, then we must perhaps prefer the greatest security ( = the most se 
 cure, neut.). 
 
 § 186. Adverbi al Sentences denoting Gonsequenct 
 or Effect. 
 1. Adverbial sentences of consequence or effect, are introduced 
 by the conjunction ω ςτε (more seldom ως). On the use of the 
 modes the following is to be observed : 
 
 (a) The Ind. is used, when the consequence or effect is to be 
 represented as a fact, something actually accomplished ; the Inf., 
 on the contrary, is used, when the consequence or effect is to be 
 represented as merely conceived, not actually accomplished, but 
 merely as possible or aimed at, or as the condition of the affirmation 
 in the principal clause {on condition that, supposing that). 
 
 "Αργός ανδρών εχηρώΰη ούτως, ώςτε oi δούλοι αυτών εσχον πάντα τά 
 πράγματα, Argos was left so destitute of men, thai the slaves had all their effects. 
 Σωκράτης προς το μετρίων δεΐσΰαι πεπαιδευμένος ην ούτως, ώςτε πάνυ μι- 
 κρά κεκτημένος πάνυ βαδίως εχειν άρκοϋντα, Socrates was so educated to have 
 moderate desires, that although he possessed very little, he very easily had a sufficiency 
 (here the consequence is not carried into effect, but is founded only on the na- 
 ture of Socrates). 
 
 Rem. 1. If the Inf. after ώςτε has a special subject, different from that of the 
 principal sentence, this is put in the Ace, but if the subjects of both sentences 
 are the same, then attraction takes place (§ 172, 3). 
 
 Rem. 2. Instead of ώςτε with an Inf., a relative, particularly οίος, 'όσος, is of- 
 ten used in connection with an Inf. ; this relative corresponds to a demonstra- 
 tive in the preceding clause, though sometimes the demonstrative is to be sup- 
 pbed; e. g. τοιούτος ό Στάσιππος ην, οίος μη βού?»εσ•&αι πο7*.λονς 
 άποκτιννύναι τών πο?ατών, Stasippus was such, as not to desire to put many of the 
 citizens to death. 
 
 (b) The Opt. with av is used, when the consequence or effect is 
 to be represented as a contingent conjecture, supposition or assump- 
 tion (§ 153, 2, c). 
 
 (c) Finally, the Ind. of the historical tenses with av, or the Inf. 
 with av is used, when it is to be indicated, that the consequence or 
 effect would take place only under a certain condition [§ 153, 2, a. 
 («) and d.]. 
 
 24* 
 
282 SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. ['§ 186. 
 
 Τοξίκην καϊ Ιατρικην καϊ μαντικών 'Απόλλων άνεϋρεν, επο•&υμίας καϊ έρωτος 
 ηγεμονενσαντος, ώςτε καϊ ούτος "Ερωτος αν εΐη μαθητής, Apollo discovered 
 archery, medicine and the prophetic art, under the instruction of desire and love, so that 
 he was a disciple of Eros. ΪΙάντες oi πολϊται πολεμικά δπλα κατεσκεναζον, ώς- 
 τε την πάλιν όντως ήγήσω αν πο?ιέμου έργαστήρων είναι (sc. ει είδες), all the 
 citizens were preparing weapons of war, so that you would think that the city was ac~ 
 tually a manufactory for war. Οι ΰ-εοί ούτω μοι εν τοϊς Ιεροϊς εσήμηναν, ώςτε 
 καϊ ίόιώτην αν γ ν ων α ι, 'ότι της μοναρχίας άπέχεσΰ-αί με δεϊ, so that even a pri- 
 vate man {if he had been present) might have perceived. 
 
 Rem. 3. Instead, of ώ ς τ ε with the Inf., signifying ea conditione, ut, or ita, ut, 
 {on the condition that), εφ 1 ώτ ε also, either with the Ind. Eut. or with the Inf., is 
 used ; e. g. Έ π ϊ τούτω ύπ'εξίσταμαι της αρχής, εφ' φ τ'ε ύπ' ούδενός υμών 
 αρξο μα l, I will give up all claim to the government on this condition, that I shall be 
 ruled by no one of you. 
 
 Rem. 4. Ώ ς is used with the Inf. in independent or parenthetic clauses ; e. g. 
 ώ ς ε Ι π ε ι ν, so to speak ; ως γέ μοι δ ο κ εϊν, as it seems to me ; ως is also often 
 omitted in such clauses 5 e. g. ου πολλώ λόγω είπ εϊν, to speak briefly. 
 
 d. Adverbial Sentences denoting Comparison. 
 
 2. Comparative adverbial sentences of manner and way, are in- 
 troduced by the relative adverbs, ώ ς, ω ς z ε, ω ς τι ε ρ, όπως, as. 
 The use of the modes in these sentences corresponds with that in 
 adjective-sentences (§ 182, 8). 
 
 8. Comparative adverbial sentences of quantity or degree, are in- 
 troduced by the relative ο σ ω (ο σ ο ν), and with this the demon- 
 strative τόσον τ φ {το gov τ ο ν) in the principal clause corres- 
 ponds ; these are translated so much — as, but with a comparative 
 or superlative, by the — the. 
 
 Τ οσοϋτον διαφέρείν ημάς δεϊ των δούλων, 'όσον οι μεν δούλου άκοντες τοϊς 
 δεσπόταις ύπηρετούσιν, we ought to differ so far from slaves, as slaves unwillingly 
 obey their masters. "Ο σ ω {όσον) σοφώτερός τίς εστί, τοσούτω {τοσούτον) 
 σώφρον έστ ερός εστίν, the wiser any one is, the more discreet will he be. "Ο σ φ 
 {όσον) σοφώτ ατός τίς εστί, τοσούτω {τοσούτον) σ ω φ ρον έστ ατός 
 ίοτίν. 
 
 CV. Exercises on § 186. 
 Cyrus had soon killed off {αναλίσκω) the beasts in the park, so that Astyages 
 could no longer collect others for him. The Greeks were obliged {δεϊ, w. ace. 
 and inf.) to go back so far while fighting, that (during) the whole day they went 
 (δίέρχεσΰαή not more than twenty-five stadia, and (αλλά) came into the villages 
 in the evening. In process of time {ως προηγεν ό χρόνος), Cyrus became (so) 
 filled with modesty, that he even blushed, if he met his parents. God provided 
 for men eyes that they (might) see the visible, and ears that they (might) hear 
 the audible. What law is full of so gross injustice, as to deprive him of recom- 
 pense who (§ 148, 6) gives away {aor.) something from his own (store, plur), 
 
§ 187.] SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 283 
 
 and doe-; (cor.) a humane deed? The Athenians were permitted to ride over 
 the rest c-i" the Greeks, provided that they themselves obeyed the Persian king. 
 Cyrus was very enger for honor, so that he underwent everything for the sake 
 of being praised. The generals stood firm, that the enemy might not throw the 
 wings into disorder. There are vessels at your command, so that you can sail 
 wherever [δπη αν) you will. The excellence of Nestor is well known to all the 
 Greeks, so that, if I should speak of [λέγειν) it, I should speak to (those) ac- 
 quainted (with it). The cup was so strong, that it could not he broken. The 
 barbarians had invested (aor.) the city so that the Greeks could not escape from 
 it unobserved (λαν&άνειν, aor.). The intestines of the sick burned (καίεσΰαι) 
 so, that they would very gladly have plunged themselves in cold water. 
 
 §187. Interrogative Sentences. 
 
 1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence or 
 dependent upon it; e. g. Is the friend comet- and I do not know 
 whether the friend has come. The first is called a direct question, 
 the last, an indirect. Both may consist either of one member, or 
 of two or more members ; e. g. Is the friend come, or is he not come ? 
 Knowest thou not whether he is coming, or whether he is not coming ? 
 According as the question refers to an object (person or thing) or to 
 ά predicate, the questions are divided into nominal and into predi- 
 cative questions; e. g. who has done this? (nominal question), and 
 hast thou written the letter? (predicative question). 
 
 2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the in- 
 quirer wishes to receive an answer on a single point, are introduced 
 by substantive or adjective interrogative pronouns, τις, ποιος, πόσος, 
 or such interrogative adverbs as πότερος, πώς, πη, που, πό&ι, πό&εν ; 
 e. g. τις ταντα εποίησεν ; — the predicative questions, i. e. those 
 where the inquirer desires only an affirmation or denial of bis in- 
 quiry, are introduced by adverbial interrogatives, as, άρα ; e. g. άρα 
 ταντα εποίησας ; 
 
 Eem. .1 . Predicative questions are frequently indicated by the mere tone and 
 by the position of the words, the predicate, or that word on which the force of 
 the question rests, standing first in the sentence. Thus particularly in the case 
 of negatives ; e. g. ο ν κ ε&έλεις Ιέναι, do you not wish to go ? 
 
 3. On the use of the interrogatives, the following is to be ob- 
 served : 
 
 (1) Ή. commonly in connection with other particles, implies an assertion, as- 
 severation, since it supposes that that in regard to which the question is asked, 
 actually exists, e. g. ή ovroc ττο/„έμιοί ε'ισι,ν, are these enemies'? fy ττου, num 
 forte, tnly ? indeed ? when the inquirer expects a negative answer ; e. g. η που 
 τετόλμηκ' έργον αϊσχιστον τόδε, has Jason indeed dared this thing? η yap, is it 
 
284 SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [§ 187 
 
 not so, is it not true? e. g. // γαρ, ώ -Ιππία, εάν τι ερωτά σε Σωκράτης, άποκρι- 
 νεϊ, will you not answer, if Socrates asks you ? 
 
 (2) Ά ρ a is properly used with questions of doubt, uncertainty and wonder, but 
 often, also, with a degree of modesty with questions wholly definite ; e. g. up 
 οϊσθά τινας, οι άνωφε?ιεϊς δντες ωφελίμους δύνανται φίλους ποιεΐσθαι, do you 
 know any persons destitute of all recommendation, who are able to acquire valuable 
 friends? (to which a negative answer is expected). 
 
 (3) Ov or μη is joined with άρα, according as the inquirer expects either an 
 affirmative or negative answer ; e. g. Άρ' ουκ εστίν ασθενής ; nonne aegrotat ? (he 
 is not sick, is he ?) Ans. Aegrotat. Άρα μη εστίν ασθενής ; numnam aegrotat ? 
 (he is not sick, is he ?) Ans. Non aegrotat. 
 
 (4) Μη always expresses apprehension or anxiety on the part of the inquirer, 
 and hence expects a negative answer ; e. g. Άλλα μ ή αρχιτέκτων βούλει γενέ- 
 σθαι ; Ουκ ούν έγωγ', εφη, do you not ivish to become an architect ? by no means, 
 said he. 'Αλλά μ η γεωμέτρης επιθυμείς, εφη, -γενέσθαι αγαθός ; Ούδε γεω- 
 μέτρης, εφη, κ. τ. λ. 
 
 (5) Μών (arising from the interrogative μη and ούν), corresponds in all re- 
 spects with the Lat. num, and hence always requires a negative answer ; e. g. 
 μών τετόλμηκας ταύτα δράσαι, you have not dared to do these things, have you ? 
 For the sake of perspicuity, the particles ούν and μη — μ ων ούν, μών μ ή — are 
 often joined with it ; e. g. μ ώ ν ούν τετόλμηκας — ; — ox μών μη τετόλμηκας 
 — ; — but when the negative oh is joined with μών, the question is affirmative 
 (nonne) ; e. g. μών ου τετόλμηκας — ; nonne ausus es — % 
 
 (6) Oh, non, nonne ? and ου κ ούν, non or nonne ergo ? with the collateral idea 
 of conclusion from what precedes, always denote affirmative questions ; e. g. ο v- 
 κοϋν γέλως ηδιστος εις εχθρούς γελάν, is it not then the sweetest laughter to laugh 
 at one's enemies ? 
 
 (7) Ε ι τ a and έπειτα are used in questions expressing indignation, astonish- 
 ment and irony, and denote opposition or contrast, and yet, since an unexpected 
 conclusion has been drawn from what precedes 5 e. g. έπ ε it' ουκ οΐει φροντί- 
 ζειν θεούς ανθρώπων, and yet do you not suppose that the gods care for men ? 
 
 (8) Direct double questions are introduced: 
 
 a. By π ότ ε ρ ο ν (πότερα) — ή, utrum — an ; e. g. πότερον ούτοι ύβρισταί 
 εισιν, η φιλόξενοι, are they insolent, or hospitable? (πότερον in the first member is 
 sometimes omitted) ; b. by r kpa — η, ne — an ; c. by Μ η — η, wJiether not — or ; 
 d. by "Ά λ λ ο τι η (instead of 'άλλο τι γένοιτ' αν, η) and αλλ ο τ ■ l, nonne; e. g. 
 άλλο τι η λείπεται το εντεύθεν έμοϊ κινδύνων δ μέγιστος, nonne relinquitur 
 mihi — ? is not the greatest of the dangers left to me? V A λ λ ο r ι ούν ο'ίγε φιλοκερ- 
 δείς φιλούσι το κέρδος, therefore, do not those fond of gain, love gain ? 
 
 (9) Single indirect questions are introduced: 
 
 a. By the interrogative pronouns δςτις, όποιος, όπόσος, όπότερος, όπως, 'όπου, 
 δπη, όποτε, etc. (§ 62, Rem. 1.) ; e. g. ουκ οϊδα, δςτις εστίν — ουκ οϊδα, όπως τό 
 πράγμα έπραξεν. 
 
 Rem. 2. But often the direct interrogatives τις, ποίος, πώς, etc., take the place 
 of the indirect question, the indirect question then assuming the character of the 
 direct; e. g. ουκ οϊδα, τίς ταύτα έπραξεν (instead of όςτις). 
 
 b. Εί, whether, like ή, is properly used only in double question?, and denotes 
 
§ 188.] SYNTAX. — INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 285 
 
 a wavering between two possibilities ; but often only one member is expressed, 
 wbile the other is present in the mind of the speaker. Hence ει is used after 
 verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquiring, asking, trying, knowing, sayiny : bpav, σκο- 
 πεϊν, σκοπεϊσΰαι, ϊΐδέναί, φοβεϊσϋαι, etc. — πειρίσϋαι, επινοείν, ερωτψν — λέγειν, 
 φράζειν, etc. ; e. g σκέψαι, ει 6 'Ελλήνων νόμος κάλλιον έχει, consider whether the 
 Greek custom is n t better. Also εάν with the Subj. is used in such questions, 
 when things expected and yet to be proved, are spoken of; e. g. σκέψαι, εάν 
 τόδε σοι μάλλον άρέσκη, consider whether this would ■please you better. 
 
 c. Μ ή, as in direct questions, whether not, is used after expressions of reflecting, 
 considering, inquiring, asking, as well as after those οι anxiety and fear, which also 
 have the idea of reflection. In English, this μή after verbs of fear and anxiety 
 is translated by that ; e. g. δρα, μη τοϋτο ούτως έχει, see, whether this is not so. 
 Φροντίζω, μη κράτιστον y μοι σιγαν, 1 am considering whether it is not best for me 
 to be silent. 
 
 (10) An indirect double question is introduced by, (a) πότερον {πότερα) — ή ; 
 e. g. ουκ οΐδα, πότερον ζ(ι η τέϋ-νηκεν ; (b) ει — η, the same as πότερον — ή, yet 
 with this difference, that ει — ή expresses uncertainty and choice; (c) είτε — 
 είτε, in the same signification as ει — //, except that by είτε — είτε, the cor- 
 responding relation of the two members is denoted, and the indecision of the 
 speaker between two possibilities is made more prominent ; e. g. και δείξεις τά- 
 χα, ε Ι τ' ευγενής πέφυκας, ει τ' έσϊτλών κακή. 
 
 Rem. 3. On the use of the modes the following is to be observed : The Ind. 
 is used in direct and indirect questions ; the Subj. and Opt. are used in doubtful 
 questions, and differ only as they are affected by the tense of the verb in the 
 principal sentence ; e. g. ουκ. έχω, δποι τράπωμαι and ουκ εϊχον, οποί τραποίμην 
 [§ 153, 1, b. (α)]. On the Ind. and Opt. of the historical tenses with uv, see § 153, 
 2, a. (a) and c. 
 
 Rem. 4. The answer is expressed : 
 
 a. By the repetition of the interrogative word ; e. g. Ό ρφς με, δέσποιν', ως 
 έχω, τον άϋλων ; Ans. Ό ρώ. In a negative answer, a negative is joined with 
 the interrogative word ; e. g. ΟΙ σ ■&' ούν βροτοϊς ος καΰ-έστηκεν νόμος ; Ans. 
 Ο υ κ οι δ α. 
 
 b. By φημί, φ ή μ' εγώ, έγ ω γ ε; negative, ου φημί, ουκ ε γ ω γ ε, ου. 
 
 c. Very frequently by γ έ, quidem, utique, assuredly, certainly, which denotes 
 that the answer completes the thought contained in the question, extends it fur- 
 ther, continues and strengthens it, or by an additional clause, limits and cor- 
 rects it. Also by γάρ, though still stronger. 
 
 d. By ναι, ν ή τον Δ ί α, π ά ν υ, κ ά ρ τ α, ε υ γ ε, and the like. 
 
 § 188. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. 
 1. The words or thoughts of a person, — whether this be a third 
 or second person, or the speaker himself — may be repeated again, 
 either without change, in precisely the same form as they were at 
 first stated by the person who uttered them, — then the discourse or 
 thought quoted is independent of the representation of the narrator, 
 
286 SYNTAX.— INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 188. 
 
 and is called direct (oratio recta) ; e. g. I thought, "■ all men are mor- 
 tal"-— he announced to me, "peace has been concluded,"— ana with- 
 out a preceding verb, all men are mortal ;■ — or, in the second place, 
 the discourse is made to refer to the representation of the speaker 
 or some one else, and thus depends on a verb of perception or com- 
 munication (verbum sentiendi or declarandi) in the principal sen- 
 tence. The statement is then quoted as the sentiment of the per- 
 son spoken of, i. e. of the person by whom it was originally uttered. 
 This is called indirect or oblique discourse {oratio obliqua) ; e. g. 
 he announced, that peace was concluded. 
 
 I will make peace with the enemy.— Oratio recta. 
 
 He said that he would make peace vjith the enemy. — Oratio obliqua. 
 
 2. The principal sentences of direct discourse, and also sentences 
 introduced by the coordinate conjunctions, e. g. γάρ, ovv, καίτοι, 
 etc., are expressed, in oblique discourse, when they contain a simple 
 affirmation, and denote something which happens, has happened, or 
 will happen, (a) either by the Ace. with Inf. (§ 172, 1), or by οτι 
 and ως with the finite verb (§ 180, 2), or by the participial con- 
 struction (§ 175, 1) ; e. g. επήγγειλε τους πολεμίους απ ο φυ- 
 γείν — ο τ ι οι πολέμιοι άποφύγοιεν or άπεφνγον — τους 
 πολεμίους ά π ο φ ν γ 6 ν τ α ς — or, (b) , when they express a 
 command, wish or desire, by the Inf. (§ 171, 2), e. g. ελεξε τοις 
 βτοατιώταις ε π ixr ε α & α ι τοις πολεμίοις, he commanded the sol- 
 diers to attack the enemy ; in oratio recta this would be expressed by 
 the Imp. επί&εα&ε. 
 
 "Ή,δομαι, ώ Κλέαρχε, άκούων σου φρόνιμους λόγους (oratio recta), I am pleased, 
 Clearchus, to hear you make these sensible remarks. Τισσαφέρνης έλεξεν, on ηδοιτο 
 άκούων Κλεάρχου φρόνιμους λόγους, Tissaphernes said that he was pleased to hear 
 Clearchus, etc. 
 
 3. The subordinate clauses of direct discourse are not changed in 
 indirect discourse, except that, after an historical tense in the prin- 
 cipal sentence, they take the Opt., in the place of the Ind. and Subj., 
 when the indirect discourse is to be represented as such, i. e. when 
 the statement contained in the subordinate clause is to be viewed as 
 the opinion or sentiment of the person spoken of. 
 
 Thus, e. g. εάν τοϋτο λ ε γης, άμαρτήση, in oratio obliqua becomes έλεξέ σε, 
 εί τοϋτο λέγοις, α,μαρτησεσΰαι. Ύελευτών έλεγεν, 'όσα άγα-&ά Κϋρος ΤΙέρσας 
 πεποιη κ ο ι {fecisset), he finally mentioned what advantages C. had conferred on 
 the Persians. Τισσαφέρνης ώμοσεν Άγησιλάω, εί σπ ε ίσα ι τ ο, έως ίλ&οιεν, 
 ους πέμψει ε προς βασιλέα αγγέλους, διαπράξεσϋαι αϋτώ, άφεΰ-τ,ναι αυτόνο- 
 μους τάς εν τη 'Ασία πόλεις Ελληνίδας, Tissaphernes took an oath to Agesilaus, if 
 
§ 189.] HOMERIC DIALECT. HEXAMETER. 287 
 
 he iccmld make a treaty, until the messengers, whom he had sent to the ling shoukl re- 
 turn, that he woulel effect that the Grecian cities in Asia should be independent. 
 
 4. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse tak*s the 
 form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in the prin- 
 cipal clause, the verb of the subordinate clause is in the Ind. of one 
 of the principal tenses, and in the Subj., as in direct discourse. 
 Here, although the actions and representations contained in the sub- 
 ordinate clauses, belong to the past, they are transferred to the time 
 present to the speaker. The use of the Ind. is regular, when the 
 statement in the principal sentence, is present to the time of the 
 speaker ; e. g. Xeyoa, on 6 άν-Θ-ρωπος •&νψός εστίν, or instead of 
 071 with the finite verb, the Ace. with the Inf. is used ; e. g. λέγω, 
 τον αν&οωπυν ΰνητον είναι. 
 
 'Αεί έπ ε μέλε lto ό Κϋρος, οπότε συσκηνοΐεν, όπως ενχαριστότατοι λόγοι 
 έμβληΰ-ήσονται, Cyrus always took care, wliemver they were with him in his 
 tent, tliat the most pleasant subjects of conversation sL•uId be 'presented. Έ δ ο ξ ε τφ 
 δήμω τριάκοντα έλέστ?αί,• ο Ι τους πατρίους νόμους συγγράψουσί, κα&' ους 
 πολίτ εν σου σ ιν, the people resolved to choose thirty mm, ivho should draw up 
 laws for the state, in accordance with which they should administer the government. 
 Όρκίοίς μεγά?.οις κατ είχοντο Ά&ηναΐοί, δέκα έτη χρησεσϋαο νόμοις, ους 
 αν αυτοίς Σόλων ϋήται. Ύούς Ιππέας έ κέλευ σ ε Κϋρος όυ?ΜΤτειν τους άγα- 
 γόντας, έως άν τίς ση μήνη. 
 
 5. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf., instead of the 
 finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. 
 
 Σκυΰας φασϊ τους νομάδας, έπεϊ αύτοΐς ΑαρεΙον είς β αλείν εις την 
 χωράν, μετά ταϋτα μεμονέναί αυτόν τίσασ&αι, they say that the Scythian noniads, 
 after Darius had made an irruption into their country, eagerly desired to take vengeance 
 on him. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. 
 
 §189. Introductory Remarks on the Hexameter . 
 
 1. The measure of the Homeric verse is Hexameter, which consists of six por- 
 tions, called feet. Each of these feet is a Dactyl or Spondee. A dactyl consists 
 of one long and two short syllables ( — « «- ), a spondee of two long ( — — ). 
 The first four feet of an Hexameter verse may be either dactyls oi spondees ; 
 the fifth is usually a dactyl, and the sixth a spondee or trochee ( — « ). The 
 followinir is the scheme : 
 
288 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT.— HEXAMETER. 
 
 [§ 189. 
 
 Άνδρα μοι 
 πλάγχ&η, ε 
 
 εννεττε, 
 πεί Ύροί 
 
 Μοϋσα, πο 
 ης Ιε 
 
 7\,ϋτροπον, 
 ρον πτολί 
 
 ος μάλα 
 εΰ-ρον ε 
 
 πολλά, 
 περσεν. 
 
 2. The first syllabic of the dactyl and also of tlie spondee, is pronounced witn 
 a stress or elevation of voice, which is called the Arsis ; the short syllables follow 
 ing the Arsis, or the long one, if the foot be a spondee, are pronounced with a 
 depression of voice, which is called the Thesis. The Arsis is marked in the 
 scheme by the sign ( — ). 
 
 Remark. The fifth foot is commonly a dactyl, but sometimes a spondee; 
 then the verse is called a spondaic verse. A succession of dactyls indicates a 
 quick and lively motion, while a succession of spondees, a slow and heavy mo- 
 tion. 
 
 3. In every well constructed Hexameter, there is at least one Caesura, which 
 is occasioned by the ending of a word in the middle of a foot. But as the har 
 mony of the verse requires that the ending of the foot and of the word should 
 generally not coincide, several words of an Hexameter verse may end in the mid- 
 dle of a foot, and hence there may be several caesuras in an Hexameter. 
 
 χωόμενον | κατά •&νμόν j εϋζώνοω \ γυναικός. 
 In this line the ending of the foot and of the word coincide only in the word 
 κατά. In a dactyl the word may end with a long syllable in the arsis ( J | « « ), 
 or with the first short in the thesis ( — «- | « ). In the former case, the caesura 
 is called masculine, in the latter, feminine. The principal caesuras are the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 (a) The most usual and most emphatic caesura is the masculine after the ar- 
 sis of the third foot ; e. g. 
 
 αλλ' b μεν Αΐϋίοπας \\ μετεκίαΰε τη7ώ-&' εοντας. 
 
 (b) Often also a less emphatic feminine caesura occurs in the thesis of the 
 third foot ; e. g. 
 
 ,-> -ι- -ι -'- -ι - - - 1 -' :-\- ". 
 
 άνδρα μοι έννεπε, Μοϋσα, \\ πολντροπον, ος μάλα πολλά. 
 
 (c) A third caesura is the masculine after the arsis of the fourth foot ; this is 
 usually preceded by a masculine caesura in the second foot ; e. g. 
 
 άρννμενος || ην τε ψνχην |[ καϊ νόστον εταίρων. 
 
 4. Beside these principal caesuras there are still other subordinate ones. 
 
 5. Beside the caesura, the Diaeresis (δίαίρεσις) also is of frequent occurrence, 
 i. e. a separation of the verse, occasioned by the ending of the word and of the 
 foot coinciding. The following are the principal diaereses: (a) after the first 
 foot; (b) after the second foot; (c) after the third foot; (d) after the fourth 
 foot ; e. g. 
 
 (a) ήσΰ-ιον ■ | αντάρ ό τοϊσιν άφεί?,ετο νόστιμον ημαρ 
 
 (b) αλλ' δτε δη έτος | ήλΰε, περιπλομένων ένιαυτών 
 
 (c) ίννημαρ μεν ανά στρατον \ ώχετο κηλα ΰεοϊο 
 
 (d) άνδρα μοι έννεπε, Μοϋσα, πολντροπον, \ δς μάλα πολλά. 
 
: 
 
 190. I HOMERIC DIALECT. — QUANTITY. 
 
 §190. Quantity (Comp. § 9). 
 Preliminary Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the 
 quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned bj 
 observation. 
 
 1. A syllable which has the vowels ε or o, followed by another vowel or a 
 single consonant, is short by nature ; e. g. τεκος, ΰεος, βοή. 
 
 2. A syllable which has the vowel η or ω, or a diphthong, is long by nature 5 
 so all contracted and circumilexed syllables are long by nature ; e. g. ήρώς, 
 ουρανός; άκων (instead of ίέκων), έτίμά (from ετίμαε), πάς, σίτος, ψϋχος, νυν. 
 
 3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel, a, 1, v, followed by another vowel 
 or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position ; e. g. άεί- 
 όυντες, δαιμονίη, φϋή, μάχη, φίλος, άργϋρεος. 
 
 4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two conso- 
 nants or a double consonant, is long by position ; e. g. ίκέσΰαι, εκατόμβη, δέξά- 
 σ&αι, εχ&Ιστος, φύλλον. 
 
 Exceptions to No. 3. 
 
 (a) α of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Gen. in -ας, is long in all the 
 Cases in which it occurs; e. g. ήμερα, φιλία, -ας, -ά, -άν, etc. 
 
 (b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long; e. g. Nom. Sing 
 λέαινα, Dual λ,εαίνά. 
 
 (c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -ao and Gen. PI. in -άων ; e. g. Άτρείδάο, 
 άγοράων. 
 
 (ά) the ending -ας of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nona, and Gen. Sing., 
 and in -the Ace. PI. ; e. g. Nom. ταμίας, Gen. σκιάς, Ace PL δόξας. 
 
 (e) a of masculine and feminine participles in -ας is long ; so also other words 
 in -ας where ντ or ν have been dropped; e. g. άκουσας (άκουσαντς), άκού- 
 σάσα, ίστάς, βάς ; γίγας (γιγαντς), μελάς (μελανς). 
 
 if) a in the third Pers. PL Perf. Ind. Act.; e. g. τετύφάσι. 
 
 (g) ν is long in the Sing, of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -υμί, 
 also in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle ; e. g. δεικνϋμι, 
 εδείκνΰν, δεικννς, δεικνϋσα. — Other exceptions may be learned by obser- 
 vation. 
 
 5. In Homer, a mute and liquid commonly make a syllable long by position. 
 
 6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position : (a) 
 ■hen it ends with a consonant, and the next word begins with a consonant; 
 
 g. και κά&ι Ι σον Ύρώ j ας ; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a short 
 vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with two sin- 
 gle consonants, which are not a mute and liquid ; e. g. άδμή j την, ην \ οϋπω 
 i> I tco ζνγον | ήγαγεν | άνήρ. A mute and liquid, in this case, always mslces the 
 syllable in the arsis long, while the syllable in the thesis may be either long or 
 short, according to the necessities of the verse ; e. g. μη μοι \ δώρ' kpa \ τα ττρό- 
 φε j ρε χρυ Ι σέης 'Κφρο \ δίτης ; on the contrary, in the thesis, αντάρ δ (ο) \ πλη- 
 σίον Ι έστή Ι κει. 
 
 7. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a word, is usually made short in 
 
 25 
 
290 HOMERIC DIALECT. —HIATUS. [§§191,192. 
 
 Homer, before a word beginning with a vowel, but it remains long when it is in 
 the arsis, or when the following word has the digamma (§ 193) ; e. g. ή μένη \ εν 
 βέν j ΰεσσιν ; — νΐες , ό \ μεν Κτεά \ τον, ό δ' άρ' \ Ένρντοϋ \ Άκτορί | ωνος ;— 
 αύτάρ ό | έγνω j ησιν ε \ νϊ φρεσι \ φώνη \ σέν τε ($σιν = Frjaiv). 
 
 8. A long vowel or diphthong in the middle of a word, before a following 
 vowel, is but seldom shortened ; e. g. έπειή («-_), εμπαιος ( _ « ν ), οίος ( « « ), 
 Βέβληαι. 
 
 9. The arsis can make a short syllable long, both at the beginning of a word, 
 e. g. άσπίδος \ ακαμα \ τον πνρ, and also at the end,— in which case it is gene- 
 rally followed by a liquid, or a σ or δ, the sound of which is easily doubled i« 
 pronunciation, or by a word with the digamma : e. g. καϊ πεδί | ά λω \ τεϋντα ; 
 — ΰ-υγατέ \ pd ην (= Vrjv). 
 
 10. Not unfrequently in Homer, merely from the necessities of the verse, a 
 short vowel in the thesis is measured as long, when it stands between two long 
 vowels ; e. g. νπο \ δεξί \ η. 
 
 §191. Hiatus. 
 Hiatus, i. e. a harshness in the pronunciation, arising from the concurrence 
 of two vowels, one of which ends a word, and the other begins the following 
 word, is generally avoided by the Greeks, but especially in verse. In the Ho- 
 meric Hexameter, however, it is admitted in the following cases : 
 
 (a) "With long vowels or diphthongs, either in the arsis, e. g. άντ&έ \ ω Όδυ \ 
 σηϊ, or in the thesis, in which case the long vowel or diphthong is short ; 
 e. g. οίκοι ε Ι σαν ; 
 
 (b) When the vowel does not admit elision, or but seldom ; e. g. παιδί άμυ- 
 νεν ; 
 
 (c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark ; e. g. αλλ' άνα, εί 
 μέμονάς γε ; 
 
 (d) In the feminine caesura (§ 189, 3), after the first short syllable in the third 
 foot of the verse ; e. g. κείνη J δε τρνφά \ λεία || αμ' j εσπετο J χειρϊ πα \ 
 
 χείν ; 
 
 (θ) In the diaeresis (§ 189, 5) after the first and fourth foot of the verse; e. g. 
 έγχεϊ \ Ίδομενηος ; — πέμψαι έπ' Άτρείδη Άγαμέμνονι \ ονλον Όνεφον ; 
 
 (f ) When the first word has the apostrophe; e. g. δένδρε' έ-&αλλεν ; 
 
 (g) Words which have the digamma occasion no hiatus (§ 193, 3). 
 
 §192. The Homeric Dialect. 
 The language of Homer and his school is the older Ionic ; these poets, how- 
 ever, were not satisfied with their own dialect merely, but selected from all the 
 dialects, in accordance with the true principles of art, those forms which were 
 adapted to the nature of their poetry ; the regular laws of versification, also 
 had much influence in forming the language. Thus they produced a peculiar 
 and definite poetic language, called the Epic or Homeric. 
 
193, 194.] HOMERIC DIALECT. — DIGAMMA. — VOWELS. 291 
 
 § 193. Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 
 
 1. The Greek language had originally a special lahial hreathing, the sound 
 of which corresponds nearly to the English f. From its form F, which re- 
 sembles one gamma standing upon another, it is called Digamma (double 
 gamma). 
 
 2. The Aeolians retained this character the longest : among the other Gre- 
 cian tribes it disappeared very early ; its sound, however, was in some instances 
 changed into the smooth labial β, e. g. βία, arising from Fig (later ις), vis ; in 
 some instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and after other vowels coal- 
 esced with these and formed the diphthongs αν, εν, ην, ov, ων, e. g. νανς instead 
 of νύΤς, navis, βονς (βό£ς), bovs, bos, Gen. bo-vis; in others still, it was merely 
 changed into a smooth breathing, which, at the beginning of the word, is indica- 
 ted by the Spiritus lenis, but in the middle of a word and before p, it was not 
 indicated by any character ; e. g. Fie, vis, ις ; εΐλέω, volvo, oSig, ovis, Fpooov, />ό- 
 δον ; finally, it was also changed, at the beginning of some words, into a rough 
 breathing, which was indicated by a Spintus asper; e. g. έσπερος, vesperus, εν- 
 ννμι, vestio. 
 
 3. In the Homeric poems, the character denoting the breathing F, no longer 
 exists ; but it is very clear that in the time of Homer, many words were pro- 
 nounced with the digamma ; e. g. άγννμί, άνδύνω, εαρ (ver), the forms of ΈΙΔ12 
 (video), εοίκα, ει μα (vestimentmn), έννϊμι (vestio), ειπείν, έκη?ιος, εος and δς (suus), 
 ου (sui), έσπερος (vesperus), οίκος (vicus), οίνος (vinum); this is obvious from 
 several facts : (a) words that have the digamma cause no hiatus ; e. g. προ ε&εν 
 ( = ττρό ϊέΰεν) ; (b) hence also a vowel capable of elision, when placed before 
 such a word, cannot be elided ; e. g. λίπεν δε ε (= δε Fε), instead of <Γ ε ; (c) 
 the ν έφελκνσπκυν is wanting before words which have the digamma; e. g. δαίέ 
 οι (—δαίέ Fot), instead of δαϊέν oi; (d) oh instead of ονκ is found before the 
 digamma; e.g. έπεί ου ε Ό- εν εστί χερείων (= οΰ Fε^^■εv), instead of ούχ έ-&εν ; 
 (e) in compounds neither elision nor crasis takes place; e. g. διαειπεμεν ( = 
 δια/ 'είπε μεν), instead of διειπέμεν, άαγής, instead of ίι^αγης; (f ) long vowels 
 are not shortened (§ 190, 3) before words that have the digamma; e. g. κάλλεί 
 τε στίλβων καΐ εΐμασι (= καϊ Fείμaσc). 
 
 §194. Change of Vowels. 
 
 Contraction. — Diaeresis. — Crasis. — Synizesis. — Apocope. 
 
 1. The Homeric language often varies in the use of contracted and uncon- 
 tracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse ; e. g. άέκων and άκων. 
 The particular instances of contraction will be seen below, under the contract 
 declensions and conjugations. The contraction of οη into ω takes place in the 
 verbs βοαν, to cry, and νοεϊν, to think; e. g. βώσας, instead of βοησας, άγνώσα- 
 σκεν, instead of άγνοήσασκεν ; so also, δγδώκοντα, instead of Όγδοηκοντα. 
 
 2. Diaeresis is the separation of a diphthong into its vowels. The use of this 
 is not rare in Homer : it occurs most frequently in those words where the two 
 
292 HcniEKic dialect. — change of consonants. [§ 195. 
 
 vowels are separated by the digamrna; e. g. παις, άϋτμή, breath (from α./~ω), 
 εΐσκω, έϋκτΐμενος, δϊς (δΙΊς, ovis), όΐομαι (cornp. opinor). 
 
 3. The use of erasis is limited to a few cases, particularly : κάγώ, τάλλα, ού- 
 μός, ούνεκα, ώριστος, ωυτός, instead of και εγώ, τα άλλα, δ έμός, δ άριστος, δ 
 αυτός. 
 
 4. Synizesis, i. e. the contraction of two vowels into one, which is perceptible 
 only in the pronunciation, but is not indicated by the form of the word, is of 
 very frequent occurrence : 
 
 (a) In the middle of words, most frequently in the following combination of 
 
 vowels : εα, εα, εαι, εας ; εο, εοι, εον ; εω, εφ ; e. g. στήΰεα, ήμέας, •&εοί, 
 
 χρυσέοις, τε&νεώτι ; much more seldom in αε, ια, ιαι, ιη, oj, ιο ; e. g. άε#- 
 
 λενων, πολιάς, πολιός ; οο only in όγόοον ; νοι only in δαιφύοισι ; ηι in 
 δηίοιο, δηίων, δηίοισι, ηια ; 
 
 (b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels: η α, η ε, 
 η η, η ει, η ον, η οι; ει ου ; ω α, ω ου ; the first word is one of the follow- 
 ing : η, ή, δη, μη and έπεΐ, or a word with the inflection-endings η, ω ; 
 e. g. η οϋ, δη α^νειότατος, μη άλλοι, ειλαπίνη ηε γάμος, άσβέστφ ονδ' νίόν. 
 
 5. Elision (§ 6, 3) occurs very frequently, namely: 
 
 (a) The a in the Neut. PL and in the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec. ; seldom 
 in the Aorist-ending -σα ; e. g. άλείψ' εμέ ; usually in the particle άρα ; 
 
 (b) The ε in the personal pronouns εμέ, με, σε, etc. ; in the Voc. of the second 
 Dec. ; in the Dual of the third Dec. ; in endings of the verb, and in par- 
 ticles, e. g. δε, τ ε, τότε, etc. (but never in Ίδε) ; 
 
 (c) The ι in the Dat. PI. of the third Dec, much more seldom in the Dat. 
 Sing., and indeed only when the connection is such, that it could not bo 
 mistaken for the Ace. ; e. g. χαίρε δε τω δρνιΰ-' Όδυσενς ; in άμμι, νμμι 
 and σφι ; in adverbs of place in -&ι, except those derived from substan- 
 tives ; in είκοσι ; finally, in all the endings of the verb ; 
 
 (d) The ο in από and υπό (but never in πρό), in δύο, in Neut. pronouns (ex- 
 cept τό), and in all endings of the verb ; 
 
 (e) ai in the endings of the verb, μαι, ται, σΰαι ; 
 
 (f ) οι in μοι, to me, and in the particle τοι. 
 
 6. Apocope (αποκοπή), i. e. the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
 beginning with a consonant, occurs in the prepositions ανά, κατά, παρά, seldom 
 in από and ΰπό, and in the conjunction άρα. — "Αν before β, π, φ, μ, is changed 
 into άμ (§ 8, 4) ; e. g. άμ βωμοϊσι, άμ πέλαγος, αμ φόνον, άμμένω ; κάτ assimi- 
 lates its τ to the following consonant, except that the rough mute is preceded 
 by the corresponding smooth ; e. g. κάδ δύναμιν, κάκ κεφαλής, κάγ γόνν, κάπ 
 φάλαρα ; examples of από and ϋπό are άππέμψει, νββάλλειν, instead of απο- 
 πέμψει, ΰποβάλλειν. 
 
 §195. Change of Consonants. 
 1. Δ and ψ remain before μ (contrary to § 8, 2) ; e. g. ιδμεν, κεκορν&μςνος, 
 instead of Ισμεν, κεκοουσμένος. 
 
§§ 196, 197.] HOMERIC DIALECT. — FIRST DECLENSION. 293 
 
 2. The metathesis of ρ with a preceding vowel, occurs not unfrequentfy ; e. g. 
 κραδίη, instead of καρδία, heart, κάρτερος and κρατερός, βύρδιστος (from βραδύς) ; 
 also in the second Aor. : επραΰον, έδρα&ον, εδραίων (from πέρΰω, δαρϋάνω, 
 δέρκουαι). 
 
 3. In Homer consonants can he doubled, after short vowels, according to the 
 necessities of the verse, in the following cases : 
 
 (a) The liquids and a on the addition of the augment, when there are three 
 successive short syllables ; e. g. έλλαβον, εμμαΰον, εννεον, έσσευα ; 
 
 (b) In composition, also, the liquids and a are doubled ; e. g. νεόλλουτος (from 
 νέος and λοί'ω) ; 
 
 (c) The σ in the inflection of the Dat. in σι, and of the Put. and Aor. ; e. g. 
 νέκυσσιν, φράσσομαι, κάλεσσα ; 
 
 (d) The σ in the middle of several words ; e. g. δσσον, τόσσον, δπίσσω, etc. 
 Of the mutes, π is doubled in the interrogatives which begin with δπ ; e. g. 
 
 δππως, etc. ; — κ in πέλεκκον, πελεκκάω ; — τ in δττι, δττεο, δττευ ;— δ in έδ 
 δεισε, άδδεές, αδδην. 
 
 Remark. The doubling of ρ, when the augment is prefixed and in composi- 
 tion (§ 8, 12), can be omitted, if the verse requires it; e. g. ερεζον (from βέζω), 
 χρυσόρντος. For the same reason, though but seldom, one of the consonants, 
 which otherwise usually occur doubled, is omitted ; e. g. Όδυσενς, Άχιλεύς, φά- 
 ρνγος, instead of 'Οδυσσεύς, Άχίλλεύς, φάρυγγος. 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 § 196. Suffix φ ι (ν). 
 
 In addition to the marks for the Cases, the Homeric dialect has the suffix 
 φ ι (ν), which expresses the relation of the Dat., and in connection with prepo- 
 sitions, that of the Gen. This suffix is always appended to the unchanged stem 
 of the word ; e. g. 
 
 I. Dec. only in the Sing. : αγέληφι, άπο νενρηφιν ; 
 Π. Dec. in Sing, and PI. ; all these forms, without respect to the accentuation 
 of the Nom., are paroxytones (-όφι) : ΰεοφιν (for ΰ-εών), of the gods, άπ' 
 δστεόφιν (for δστέων), of bones. 
 HL Dec. almost exclusively in the PI. : δρεσφι(ν), upon the mountains, έκ στη• 
 h (comp. § 44), ναϋφι. 
 
 § 197. First Declension. 
 
 1. Instead of the long α, η is used through all the Cases of the Sing. ; e. g. 
 Τΐηνελοπείης, ΤΙηνελοπείη from Τΐηνε/,όπεία, φρητρη, Έορέης, Βορέν, Βορέην. 
 
 Exceptions : ΰεά, goddess, -ας, -α, -αν ; Νανσικάά, Φείά ; Αινείας, Αυγείας, 
 'Ερμείας, and some other proper names in -ας pure. The Voc. of νύμφη is 
 νύμφα. 
 
 2. Substantives in -eta and - ο ι a, derived from adjectives in -ης and -ους, 
 and also some other feminines, change short a of the Attic dialect into η ; e. g. 
 
 25* 
 
294 HOMERIC DIALECT. SECOND AND THIRD DEC. [§§ 198, 199. 
 
 άληΰ-είη, άναιδείη, ευπλοϊη, κνίσση, instead of αληΰεια, αναίδεια, ευπλοια, 
 κνίσσά. 
 
 3. The Nom. Sing, of masculines, in a great number of words, have the end- 
 ing -a (like the Lat.), instead of -ης, according to the necessities of the verse; 
 e. g. Ίππότά, αιχμητα, μητίετα, ενρνοπα. The Voc. retains in all these the 
 ending -a. 
 
 4. The Gen. Sing, of masculines has the following endings : -do, - ω (con- 
 tracted from -ao) and - ε ω ; the last ending -εω is always pronounced with syni- 
 zesis, and in relation to the accent, ω is considered short (§ 30, Eem. 2) ; e. g. 
 Ερμείας, Gen. 'Έρμείαο and 'Έρμείω ; Βορέης, Gen. Βορέάο and Βορέω ; Άτρεί- 
 δης, Gen. Άτρείόάο and Άτρείδεω. 
 
 5. The Gen. PI. of masculines and feminines, has the endings: -ά ων, -ων 
 and -ε ων (έων is regularly pronounced with synizesis) ; e. g. κλισιάων, κλισιών, 
 πυλάων, πυλέων. 
 
 6. The Dat. PI. : - η σ ι (ν), -ης, and - αις (only in ΰεαΐς and ακταϊς) ; 
 e.g. κλισίτισι(ν), πέτρης προς μεγάλησι. 
 
 §198. Second Declension. 
 
 1. Gen. Sing. : -ου and - ο to ; e. g. ώμου, ώ μ ο lo from ώμος, δ, shoulder. 
 
 2. Gen. and Dat. Dual : -ollv (instead of -olv) ■ e. g. ώ μ ο ι 1 ν. 
 
 3. Dat. PL : -οισι(ν) and -ο ι ς; e. g. ώμο ισιν, ώμυις. 
 
 4. Attic Declension. Gen. Sing. : - ώ ο, instead of - ω ; e. g. ΤΙηνελεώο, from 
 ΊΙηνέλεως. In γάλως, sister-in-law, Ά&ως and Κως, the -ως produced by con- 
 traction, is resolved by ο ; e. g. γαλόως, Άΰοως, Κόως. 
 
 5. Contracted forms of the second Dec, occur but seldom, viz. νους, usually 
 νόος, χειμάρρΌυς and χειμάρρΌος, ΤΙάν&ους, ΤΙάν&ον, Ή,ύν&ω. With those in 
 -εος, -εον, Homer either lengthens the ε into ει, or emploj^s synizesis, as the na- 
 ture of the verse requires ; e. g. χρυσειος. . 
 
 § 199. Third Declension. 
 
 1. Dat. PI. : -σι (ν), -σσ ι (ν), -εσι(ν) and - εσσι (ν). The endings -εσι 
 and -εσσι, like the other Case-endings, are always appended to the pure stem ; 
 e. ο•, κύν-εσσι (from κυών, Gen. κυν-ός), νεκυ-εσσι (from νέκυς, υ-ος), χειρ-εσι. 
 In neuters, which have a radical a in the Nom. (§42, 1. and §44), this σ is 
 dropped ; e. g. εττέ-εσσι (instead of έπέσ-εσσι, from το έπος, instead of έπες), 
 δεπά-εσσιν (from το δέπας) ; ν is dropped in stems ending in αν, ευ, ου (§ 41) ; 
 e. g. βό-εσσι (instead of βό^-εσσι, bov-ibus), ίππη-εσσι. — The ending -σσι is 
 appended almost exclusively to stems, which end in a vowel ; e. g. νεκυ-σσι 
 (from νέκυς, υ-ος). 
 
 2. Gen. and Dat. Dual : - ο 1 1 ν (as in Dec. II.) ; e. g. ποδοιιν. 
 
 3. The Ace. Sing, of those in -νς, sometimes has the ending -a ; e. g. ευρέα 
 πόντον, Ίχΰνα, νέα, instead of εϋρύν, ιχύών, ναΰν. 
 
 4. The words γέλως, laughter, Ίδρώς, sweat, and έρως, love, which properly be- 
 long to the third Dec, in particular Cases in Homer, are declined like the Attic 
 second Dec: γέλω and γέλων, instead of -γέλωτα, γέλω, instead of γέλωτι ; 
 Ιδρώ, ίδρώ, instead of ίδρωτα, Ιδρώτι ; έρω, instead of έρωτι. 
 
§ 199. J HOMERIC DIALECT. — THIRD DECLENSION. 295 
 
 5. Those in - 1 c, Gen. -ίδο ς, especially proper names, often have the inflec- 
 tion - ιος, etc., and in the Dat. always ; e. g. μήνως, θέτιος, θέτϊ. 
 
 6. The neuter υνς, ώτύς, ear (§ 39), in Homer has the form ονας, ονατος, PL 
 ονατα ; the neuters στέαρ, fat, ov&ap, breast, and πεΐραρ, issue, have -άτος in the 
 Gen. : στέατος, ονΰατα, πείρατα, τζείρασι. In the neuters τέρας, κέρας and κρέας 
 (§ 39), the r is dropped; e. g. τέραα, -άων, -αεσσι ; Dat. κέρα, PI. κέρα, κεράων, 
 κεράεσσί and κέρασο ; PL κρέα, κρεάων, κρεών and κρειών, κρέασιν. 
 
 7. In the words mentioned under § 36, Homer can either retain or omit ε, as 
 the verse may require ; e. g. άνηρ, άνέρος and ανδρός, άνέρι and άνδρί, etc. (but 
 only ανδρών, ανδρασι and άνδρέσσή ; γ αστήρ, -έρος, -έρι and γαστρός, γαστρί, 
 γαστέρα, γαστέρες ; Αημητηρ, -ητέρος and -ητρος, Αημητέρα ; -&νγάτηρ, -&υγατέ• 
 ρος and ϋνγατρος, etc., -&υγατέρεσσι, but ΰ~υγατρών ; πατήρ and μήτηρ, -τέρος 
 and -rpof, etc. 
 
 8. The word ί^ώρ, δ /ooc? ofi/ie #<x7s, in the Ace. has ζ^ώ, instead of ίχωρα, and 
 κνκεών, ό, mixed drink, in the Ace. has «υ/οεώ or κυκειώ. 
 
 9. To § 41* belong - α υ c, - ε υ c, - ο ν ς. Of γρανς, there occur in Homer only 
 Nom. γρηνς, γρηνς, Dat. yp^i, and the Voc. γρην and /ρ??ΰ. The word βονς 
 does not admit contraction, thus : βόες, βόας ; Dat. PL βό-εσσι, see No. 1. 
 
 10. § 41. In common nouns in - εν ς and in the proper name Άχί?Λενς, η is 
 used instead of ε, in all the forms in which ν (F) of the stem is dropped; e. g. 
 βασι?,ενς, Voc. -εν, Dat. PL -είσ* (except άριστήεσσιν for αριστενς), but /?ασί- 
 X^oc, -^ί, -^α, -?^c, -^ac (a in the Ace. Sing, and PL is short). Among the 
 proper names, the following are to be specially noticed : Όδνσσενς, Όδνσσηος 
 and Όδνσηος and Όδνσσέος, also Όδνσσενς (contracted), Όδνσήϊ and Όδνσεϊ, 
 Όδνσσηα and Όδνσσέα, also Όδνσή ; Π^λεί^, Τίηληος and -έοο, -7?£ and -έϊ. -ηα ; 
 the others, as Άτρενς, Τνδενς. generally retain ε, and contract -εος in the Gen. 
 by synizesis, and sometimes -εα in the Ace. into -η, thus : Τνδέος, -έϊ, -έα and 
 -V- 
 
 11. § 42. - 77 f and - ε ς, Gen. -εος. The Gen. Sing, remains uncontracted ; 
 the Nom. PL is -εες and -είζ• ; the Gen. PL remains uncontracted (except when 
 the ending -εων is preceded by a vowel, in which case contraction takes place ; 
 e. g. ζαχρηών from ζαχρηέων, which is from ζαχρηης, impetuous), also the Ace. 
 PL - ε α ς. "Αρης is thus declined : Άρηος and -εος, Dat. Άρηϊ, Άρη, Άρεϊ, Ace. 
 'Αρη and Άρην ; Voc. τ Αρεζ• and "Αρες. 
 
 12. § 42. Proper names in - κ λη ς contract εε into η; e.g. Ήρακλέης, -κληος, 
 ηϊ, -ηα, Voc. Ηράκλειο; but adjectives in -έης, have both ε* and η; e.g. 
 
 άκλεης, άκληεΐς, άγακληος, but ένκλεΐας (Ace. PL) from ένκλεης, ενρ'ρ'εής, Gen. 
 ένββεως from έϊφβεης. So the forms dt'c/c /Ιέα, νπερδέα, instead of -εέα, occur. 
 
 13. § 43. -ο) ς, Gen. - ω ο ς. In Homer the contracted forms ή ρω Dat., and 
 Μά>ω Ace, occur. Of the words in -άς and -ω, Gen. -όος, only #ρώο and its 
 compounds, are uncontracted : χροός, χροΐ, χρόα. 
 
 14. § 44. (a) - α ς, Gen. - α ο ς ; the Dat. Sing, is uncontracted or contracted, 
 according to the necessities of the verse; e. g. γηραϊ and γηρα. But the Nom. 
 and Ace PL, are always contracted ; e. g. δέπα. — (b) - ο ς, Gen. - ε ο ς ; accord- 
 ing to the necessities of the verse, both the uncontracted and contracted forms 
 
 * These numbers refer to the sections in the first part of the Grammar. — Τκ. 
 
296 HOMERIC DIALECT. ANOMALOUS WORDS. [§ 200. 
 
 are used, (except in the Gen. PI., which always remains uncontracted, also in 
 the Gen. Sing., except in some substantives, which contract -εος into -ευς ; e. g. 
 'Έρέβενς, ΰάρσευς,) Dat. ϋέρεΐ and ΰ-έρει, κάλλεϊ and κάλ?ιει ; Nom. and Ace, 
 plurals in -εα, commonly remain uncontracted, but must be pronounced with 
 synizesis ; e. g. νείκεα, βέλεα. — In σπέος, κλέος, δέος, χρέος, ε is sometimes 
 lengthened into ει, sometimes into η, thus : Gen. σπείους, Dat. σπήϊ, Ace. σπέος 
 and σπεϊος, Gen. Pi. σπείων, Dual σπέσσι and σπήεσσι ; χρέος and χρεΐος ; 
 κλέά and κλεϊα. 
 
 15. § 45. -Ι ς, Gen. -Ιο ς; -ϋς, Gen. -ν ο ς. The Dat. Sing, is contracted ; 
 e. g. οίζνϊ, πλη&υΐ, νέκνι ; the Ace. PL, as the verse may require, is sometimes 
 uncontracted, sometimes, and indeed more commonly, contracted ; e. g. ίχ&νς, 
 instead of ίχϋ-ύας, δρυς ; the Nom. PL never suffers contraction, but is pro- 
 nounced with synizesis; e. g. ίχΰνες (dissyllable). The Dat. PL ends in -νσσι 
 and -νεσσι (dissyllable) ; e. g. ίχΰνσσιν and ίχ&ύεσσιν. 
 
 16. § 46. -Ι ς and - l, Gen. -Ι ο ς (Att. -εως) ; - ν ς and - ν, Gen. -ν ο ς (Att. 
 -εως ). (a) Words in - ι ς retain the ι of the stem through all the Cases, and. 
 are always contracted in the Dat. Sing., and sometimes in the Ace. PL , c. g. 
 πόλις, -ιός, -I, PL -ιες, -ιων, -ισι, -ιας and -Ις. The Dat. Sing, has also the 
 endings -εϊ and -ει ; e. g. πόσεϊ and πόσει, from ττόσις ; in some words the ι of 
 the stem is changed into ε in other Cases also; e. g. επάλξεις (Ace), έπάλξε- 
 σιν, especially in πόλις, which, moreover, as the verse requires, can lengthen ε 
 into η, thus : Gen. πόλΐυς, πόλεος and πόληος, etc., and in δις, ovis, Dat. PI 
 δΐεσσιν, οϊεσιν, δεσιν. — (b) Words in -ϋς, which in the Attic Gen. end in -εως, 
 have -εος, and in the Dat. Sing, both the uncontracted and contracted forms•, 
 e. g. εϋρέϊ, πηχει, πλατεϊ ; in the other Cases, the uncontracted forms are com- 
 monly used, though these are generally to be pronounced with synizesis. 
 
 §200. Anomalous Words (Comp. § 47). 
 
 1. Vow (to, knee) and δόρν (το, spear): 
 
 Sing, γοννατος and γοννός δονρατος and δουρός, δονρατι and δονρί 
 
 PL Ν. -γοννατα and γοϋνα δονρατα and δοϋρα ; Dual δοϋρε 
 
 G. γουνών δούρων 
 
 D. γούνασι (-σσι) and γοννεσσι δονρασι and δούρεσσι. 
 
 2. Κάρα (τό, head) . 
 
 Sing. Ν. κάρη Gen. κάρητος καρήατος κρατάς κράατος 
 
 Dat. κάρητι καρήατι κρατί κράατι 
 
 Ace. κάρη (κράτα, Masc, Od. 8, 92). 
 Plur. Ν. κάρα καρήατα (and κάρηνα) 
 
 G. κράτων ( " καρηνων) 
 
 D. κρασί 
 Α. κράατα { " κάρηνα). 
 
 8. Ν α ν ς (ή, ship) : 
 
 Sing. Ν. νηνς Plur. νηες and νέες 
 G. νηός and νεός νηών and νεών 
 
 D. νηί ^ νηνσΐ, νήεσσι, νέεσσι 
 
 Α. νηα and νέα νηας and νέας. 
 
 4. Χ f ι ρ (ή, hand), Dat. χερί, Ace. χέρα, Dat. PL χείρεσιν and #εφί<τ<?ί». 
 
201 — 203.] HOMERIC DIALECT. — ADJECTIVES. — PRONOUNS. 297 
 
 § 201. Adjectives. 
 
 1. The adjectives , 3a ύ ίς and ώκνς have sometimes the feminine form -έα 
 οτ-έη: βα&έης, βαΰέην, ώκέα. Some adjectives in - -Ίς are also of common 
 gender; e. g. "ϋρη &ηλνς έονσα, ήδνς άντμη. 
 
 2. Adjectives in - η ε ι ς, -ή εσσα, -η εν often occur in the contracted form : 
 - f/ f < -ήσσα, -ijv; e. g. τιμής ; those in -όεις, -ό εσσα, -ό εν contract οε 
 into εν ; e. g. πεδία /.ωτενντα. 
 
 3. Π ο λ ν ς (§ 48) is thus inflected : 
 
 Nom. Sing, πολύς and πνολυς ; πολύ ; and πο?.7.ός, πολλόν ; Gen. πολέος ; 
 Ace. πολύν and πουλύν ; — Nom. PI. πολέες and πο?.εΐς ; Gen. πόλεων ; 
 Dat. πο/.έσι, πο7Λσσι and πολεεσσι ; Ace. πολεας and ττολεΐο. 
 
 § 202. (7 ο ?w jt? arison. 
 
 1. The endings -ώτερος and -ώτ-ατοο are sometimes used, although the vowel 
 of the preceding syllable is long fcomp. § 50, I. (a)] ; e. g. οϊζϊρώτατος, κακοξει- 
 νώτερος. Adjectives in -νς and -ρος, have the Comparative in -ίων and -ιστός, 
 though sometimes also the regular form ; e. g. γλυκύς, γ?»υκίων ; βαϋύς. βό> 
 χϊιστος ; οικτρός οΐκτιστος and οικτρότατος. 
 
 2. Anomalous forms (§ 52). 
 
 u γ a ■& ό ς, Com. άρείων, ?,ωΐων and ?Μΐτερος, Sup. κάρτιστος 
 κακός, Com. κακώτερος, χειρότερος, χερείων, χερειότερος, Sup. ηκιστος 
 ό?,ίγος, Com. ολίζων ; — /5 ηίδ ιος, Com. βηΐτερος, Sup. βήϊστος and βηΐτατοζ 
 βραδύς, Com. βράσσων, Sup. βάρδιστος ; — μ α κ ρ ό ς, Com. μασσων 
 παχύς, Com. πάσσων. 
 
 
 § 203. Pronouns. 
 
 1 . Sing. Nom. 
 
 εγώ, before a vowel, έ/ών 
 
 σύ, τύνη 
 
 Gen. 
 
 έμέο, εμεί, μεΰ (μ^) 
 
 σέο, σεν (σεν) 
 
 
 έμεϊο, έμέΰ-εν 
 
 σεΐο, σέΰεν, τεοϊο 
 
 Dat. 
 
 εμοί, μοι 
 
 σοι, τοι, τεΐν 
 
 Ace. 
 
 έμέ, με 
 
 σε (σε) 
 
 Dual Nom. 
 
 νώϊ 
 
 σΦώϊν, σΦώϊ, σΦώ 
 
 G. and D. 
 
 νώϊν 
 
 σφώϊν, σόών 
 
 Ace. 
 
 νώϊ and νώ 
 
 σφώϊ and σφώ 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 ημείς, άμμες 
 
 νμεϊς, νμμες 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ήμεων, ημείων 
 
 ύμεων, ύμείων 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ήμϊν, ήμϊν, άμμι(ν) 
 
 νμϊν, νμμι(ν) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ήμεας, ημάς, αμμε 
 
 νμίας, νμιιε 
 
 εο, εν (εύ) 
 είο, ε&εν 
 έοϊ, οϊ (οι) 
 εε, ε (ε), μιν 
 
 σφωΐν (σΦωϊν) 
 σόωέ (σφωε) 
 
 σόέων (σφεων),σ<^ών 
 (σώων), σφείων 
 
 σόίσι(ν) [σΦισι(ν)], 
 σφί(ν) [σόι(ν)] 
 
 σόέας (σφεας),σφάς 
 (σφας), σόε. 
 
 2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns έμαυτοΰ, σεαντον, etc., 
 never occur in Homer : instead of them, he uses the personal pronouns, and 
 the pronoun αυτός separately; e. g. εμ' αυτόν, εμοί αύτώ, εμεν αυτής, ε αυτήν, 
 ϋΐ αντ?). 
 
 3. Possessive pronouns : τεός, -η, -όν, instead of σός ; έός , -η, -όν and δς, η, 
 
298 HOMERIC DIALECT. — NUMERALS. VERBS. [§§ 204, 205. 
 
 ov, suus, -a, -urn; άμός, -η, -όν, instead of ημέτερος ; νωΐτερος, -a, -ov, of us both , 
 ναός, -η, -όν, instead of υμέτερος; σφωΐτερος, -a, -ov, of you both; σφός, -η, -όν, 
 instead of σφέτερος. 
 
 4. Demonstrative pronouns : rolo and τεϋ, instead of του ; τοί and ταί, in- 
 stead of oi and αϊ ; τάων, instead of των ; τοϊσι, instead of τοϊς ; ταϊσι, τησι 
 and της, instead of ταϊς ; — δδε Dat. PI. τοϊςδεσι and τοίςδεσσι, instead of τοϊςδε. 
 
 5. Relative pronouns: δ, instead of δς; ο to, δον instead of ov, έης instead 
 of ης, ήσι and ής instead of αΐς. 
 
 6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns : (a) Gen. τέο, τεϋ, instead of τινός ; 
 Dat. τέω, τω, instead of Ttvt ; PI. άσσα, instead of τινά ; Gen. τέων, instead of 
 τινών ; Dat. τέοισι, instead of τισί ; — (b) Gen. τέο, τεϋ, instead of τίνος. 
 
 (c) δςτις : Sing. Nora, δτις, Neut. δτι, δττι Plur. δτινα 
 Gen. δτευ, δτεο, δττεο, δττεν δτεων 
 
 Dat. δτεω, δτω ότέοισι 
 
 Ace. δτινα, Neut. δτι, δττι δτινας, άτινα and άσσα. 
 
 § 204. Numerals. 
 The collateral form of μία is la, ϊης, Ιη, lav, and of ένί, the form Ιφ. Δυο, 
 δνω are indeclinable ; collateral forms of these are δοιώ, δοιοί, δοιαί, δοια, etc. 
 ΤΙίσνρες, -a, instead of τέσσαρες, -α. Ανώδεκα and δνοκαίδεκα and δώδεκα. 
 'Έείκοσι, instead of είκοσι. 'Όγδώκοντα and εννήκοντα, instead of δγδοήκ., 
 ένενηκ. 'Έ,ννεάχιλοι and δεκάχιλοι, instead of έννακιςχίλιοι and μύριοι. The 
 endings -άκοντα and -ακόσιοι become -ήκοντα, -ηκόσιοι. Ordinals : τρίτατος^ 
 τέτρατος, έβδόματος, δγδόατος, ένατος and εινατος. 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 §205. Augment. — R eduplication. 
 
 1. The augment is prefixed or omitted, as the verse requires ; e. g. λνσε, #e- 
 σαν, όράτο, έλε. In the Perf. the temporal augment is omitted only in single 
 words ; e. g. άνωγα. 
 
 2. Words which have the digamma, always take the syllabic augment ; e. g. 
 άνδάνω, εάδον ; είδομαι, έεισάμην, and also in the Part, εεισάμενος. The ε 
 seems to be lengthened on account of the verse, in ειοικνϊα and εναδε (έ^αδε 
 from άνδάνω). 
 
 3. The verbs οίνοχοέω and άνδάνω, take the syllabic and temporal augment 
 at the same time, viz. εωνοχόει, yet more frequently φνοχ., έήνδανε and ηνδανε. 
 
 4. The reduplication of ρ occurs in ρερνπωμένος from βνττόω, to make foul. 
 On the contrary, the Perfects έμμορα from μείρομαι, and έσσνμαι from σείω, 
 are formed according to the analogy of verbs beginning with p. — Κτάομαι makes 
 έκτημαι in the Perf. 
 
 5. The second Aor. Act. and Mid. also, frequently takes the reduplication , 
 this remains through all the modes, also in the Inf. and Part. The simple aug- 
 ment ε is but seldom prefixed to this in the Ind. ; thus, e. g. κάμνω, to become 
 
 second Aor. Subj. κεκάμω ; κέλομαι, to command, έκεκλόμην ; λαγχάνω, 
 
§ 206.] HOMERIC DIALECT. — VERBS. 299 
 
 to obtain, λέλαχον ; λαμβάνω, to receive, ?*ε/.αβέσϋαι ; φράζω, to say, πέφραδον, 
 έ~έφραδον. 
 
 6. The following are examples of the Homeric Perfects with the Attic redu- 
 plication (§ S9) ; e. g. ά?Μομαι, to wander, άλ-άλημαι ; ΆΧΩ (άκαχίζω), to grieve, 
 άκ-ήχεμαι, άκ-άχημαι ; έρείττω, to demolish, ερ-έρίπτο ; ερίζω, to contend, ερ-ήρυα- 
 μαι. 
 
 7. Homeric Aorists with the Attic reduplication (§ 89, Rem.) : άλέξω, to ward 
 off, ήλ-αλκον, αλ-αλκεΐν, άλαλκών ; έν-ίτττω, to chide, έν-ένίττον ; bp -νυμι, to er- 
 cite, ωρ-ορε ; and with the reduplication in the middle : ερνκω, to restrain, ^p* • 
 κσ-κον, Inf. ερνκακέειν and ενΐ-τω, ηνί-ττα-πεν. 
 
 § 206. Personal-endings and Mode-vowels. 
 
 1. First Pers. Sing. Act. Several subjunctives have the ending -μι ; e. g. 
 κτεΐνωμι, instead of κτείνω, εϋέλωμι, Ιδωμι, τνχωμι, Ικωμι, άγάγωμι. 
 
 2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. The ending -cr&a (§§ 137 and 143), occurs in 
 the second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -μι ; e. g. τίΰ-ησϋα, διδοϊσ&α ; also fre- 
 quently in the Subj. of other verbs; e. g. έϋ-έλτισ-&α, ειττ^ο~&α, more seldom in 
 the Opt. ; e. g. κ?,αΐοισ-&α, βά/.οιστ&α. 
 
 3. Third Pers. Sing. Act. The Subj. sometimes has the ending -σι(ν) ; e. g. 
 έΰέ?,τισι(ν), άγτ/σί. άλάλκψιι, δώηα (instead of δω), μεϋ-ί-ηα; the Opt. only in 
 παραόΰαίησο. 
 
 4. Personal-endings of the Plnp. Active : 
 
 First Pers. Sing. - ε a (so always) ; e. g. πεττοί-&εα, ίτε&ήπεα, γδεα, in 
 
 stead of εττεττοΐΰ-είν, etc. 
 Second " " - ε α ς ; e. g. έτε&ή-εας, instead of ετεΰή-τεις 
 Third " " - ε ε (v) ; e. g. έγεγόνεε, κατα?^ελοίπεε, εβεβρώκεεν. 
 Rem. 1. The third Pers. Sing. PI up. Act. in εΰ, and also the same Pers. of 
 the Impf. in ει, occurs in Homer before a vowel, with ν έφε?>κνστικόν ; έστ•η~ 
 κειν, βεβ?Ι]κειν, ησκειν, Impf. from άσκέω. Comp. § 143. 
 
 5. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses, Act. and Mid., 
 are sometimes exchanged for each other : -τον and - σ ΰ- ο ν, instead of -την 
 and -σ&ην ; e. g. διώκετον, ΰωρήσσεσΰον, instead of δίωκέτην, ϋ-ωρησσέσΰην. 
 
 6. The second Pers. Sing. Mid. appears either in the uncontracted form, -εαι, 
 -ηαί, -εο, -ao ; e. g. ?„εί~εαι, λιλαίεαι, άφίκηαι, ερνσσεαι, έπανρηαι, νπελνσαο, 
 έγείναο, or in the contracted form - -n (from -εαι, -ηαή, -ευ (from -εο), - ω 
 (from -ao) ; e. g. άφΐκη, εττλευ, ερχεν, έκρέμω. The endings -εεαι and -εο are 
 also lengthened into - ε tat and - ε to, or one ε is dropped ; e. g. μν&εϊαι, νεΐαι, 
 έρειο, σ-εϊο ; — μν&έαι (instead of μν&έεαή, ττωλέαί, έκλεο, έπώλεο. — In the 
 Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., c is sometimes dropped, viz. μέμναι (and μέμνη, 
 formed from μέμνε-σ -at), βέβληαί, εσσνο. 
 
 7. The first Pers. Dual and PI. Mid. ends in -μεσ&ον and -μεΰον, -μεσϋα 
 And -με&α ; e. g. όραζόμεσΰα and -μεΰα. 
 
 8. The third Pers. PI. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., and Opt Mid. has 
 the ending -αται, -aro, instead of -νται, -ντο; e. g. άκηχέαται, πεφοβήατο, 
 έστά?.ατο, τετράόαται, άρησαΐατο, γενοΐατο. 
 
800 HOMERIC DIALECT. — TERES. [§ 207. 
 
 9. The third Pers. PL Aor. Pass, has the ending -εν (instead of -ήσαν) ; e. g. 
 τράφεν, instead of ετράφησαν. 
 
 10. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. ω and η, are frequently shorten- 
 ed into ε and o, as the verse may require ; e. g. Ιομεν, instead of ϊωμεν, στρέ- 
 φεται, instead of στρεφηται. 
 
 11. The Inf. Act. has the endings -έ μεν at, -ε μεν and -ειν (ε being the 
 mode-vowel and -μεναι the ending) ; e. g. τνκτεμεναι, τυπτέμεν, τνπτειν ; verbs 
 in -άω and -έω have -ήμεναι (the η arising from the contraction of the mode- 
 vowel ε and the final vowel of the stem) ; e. g. γοή μεναι (γοάω), φιλί] μεναι (φι- 
 λέω) ; with the ending -η μεναι, that of the Pass. Aorists corresponds; e. g. τν- 
 •κη μεναι, instead of τυπήναι. In the Pres. of verbs in -μι, the endings -μεναι 
 and -μεν are appended immediately to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in 
 the second Aor. to the pure stem ; e. g. τιϋ-έ-μεναι, τι&έ-μεν ; ιστα-μεναι ; όι- 
 όό-μεναι ; δεικνν-μεναι ; ΰ-έ-μεν, όό-μεναι ; there is an exception in the case of 
 the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in a and v, which, as in the Ind., retain the 
 long vowel ; e. g. στή-μεναι, όύ-μεναι. 
 
 12. The Impf. and Aor. Ind. take the endings -σκον, -ες, -ε(ν), in the Mid. 
 -σκόμην, -ov (~εο, -εν), -ετο, when a repeated action is to be denoted; hence this 
 is called the Iterative form ; it regularly omits the augment ; e. g. όινεύ-ε-σκον, 
 βοσκ-έ-σκοντο, νικά-σκομεν, καλέ-ε-σκε, έλάσ-α-σκεν, όό-σκε, δύ-σκε, στά-σκε. 
 
 Rem. 2. In verbs in -ω, the mode-vowel of the Ind. is used before these end- 
 ings ; in those in - άω, -αεσκον is abridged into -άσκον, which as the verse 
 may require, can be lengthened into -άασκον; e. g. ναιετάασκον ; those in - ε ω 
 have -έεσ κον, seldom - ε σ κον (e. g. καλέσκετο), also -είεσκον (e. g. νει- 
 κείεσκον) ; in verbs in -μι the mode-vowel is omitted. 
 
 §207. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 
 
 1. A. Verbs in -άω. In these, the uncontracted form occurs only in single 
 words and forms ; e. g. πέραον, κατεσκίαον ; always in νλαω and those verbs 
 which have a long a for their characteristic ; e. g. διψάων, πειναων, εχραε (from 
 χρα-ω, to attack). In some verbs, a is changed into ε, viz. μενοίνεον, from με- 
 νοινάω, ηντεον, from άντάω, δμόκλεον, from όμοκλάω. 
 
 2. Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, there is a resolution of 
 the contracted syllable, by a similar vowel, a (a) being resolved into ad (da) 
 or da (da), and ω into οω or ωω ; e. g. όράασ-&αι (instead of όράσ&αι) ; μενοι- 
 vua (instead of μενοινα) ; όρόω (instead of ορώ) ; δρώωσι (instead of δρώσι). 
 
 Remabk. In the Dual-forms, προςανδήτην, σνλητην, συναντήτην, φοιτητην 
 (from verbs in -άω), αε is contracted into η, and in δμαρτητην and άπειλητην 
 (from verbs in -έω), εε is contracted into η, instead of into ει. 
 
 3. When ντ comes after a contracted syllable, the short vowel may follow 
 such contracted syllable ; e. g. ηβωοντο, instead of ήβώντα, γελώοντες ; in the 
 Opt. also, the protracted ω ο ι, instead of ω is found in ηβώοιμι, instead ( f #/?ά- 
 οιμι (= ήβώμι), 
 
 4. Β. Verbs in - ε ω. Contraction does not take place in all the forms in 
 which ε is followed by the vowels ω, ω, η, η, οι and ov ; e. g. φιλέωμεν, φιλέοιιιι, 
 etc. ; yet such forms must commonly be pronounced with synizesis. In others, 
 
§ 208.] HOMERIC DIALECT. — VERBS. 301 
 
 contraction is omitted or takes place, as the verse may require ; e. g. φίλέει, 
 έρέω, οτρννέονσα ; αίρενμην, γένεν. Sometimes ε is lengthened into ει ; e. g. 
 έτελείετο, μιγείη (instead οϊ μιγή, second Aor. Pass.). 
 
 5. C. Verbs in - ό ω. These follow either the common rules of contraction, 
 e. g. γουνονμαι, or they are not contracted, but lengthen ο into ω, so that the 
 forms of verbs in -δω resemble those of verbs in -άω ; e. g. ιδρύονται, ίδρώονσα, 
 ν-νύοντας (comp. i /βώοντα) • or they become wholly analogous to verbs in -άω, 
 since they resolve -qvol (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into -όωσι, -ονντο into -όωντο, 
 •οιεν into - ό ω ε ν ; e. g. (άρό-ονσί ) αρονσι άρόωσ ί (comp. όρόωσι) ; (δηϊόοντο) 
 δηϊονντο δη ϊ όωντο (comp. δρδωντο) ; (δηϊόοιεν) δηϊοϊεν δη ιό ω εν (comp. 
 όρόφεν). 
 
 § 208. Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 1. The Attic Put. (§ 83) occurs in verbs in -ίζω ; e. g. κτερωνσι. In verbs 
 in -έω, the ending - ε ω is often used instead of -έσω ; e. g. κορέεις, instead of 
 κορέσεις, μαχέονται, instead of μαχέσονται ; in verbs in -άω, after dropping c, a 
 corresponding short vowel is placed before the vowel formed by contraction : 
 e. g. αντώω, εϊώωσι, δαμάα; of verbs in -νω, έρνονσί and ταννονσί occur. 
 
 2. The following liquid verbs form the Put. and first Aor. with the ending 
 - σ ω and -σα: κείρω, to shear off (κέρσαι), κέ?,λω, to land (κέλσαί), εϋιω, to press 
 (ελσαί), κίψω, to fall upon (κίφσω), "ΑΡΩ (άραρίσκω), to fit (άρσαι), δρ-ννμί (δρ- 
 σω, ώρσα), to excite, διαφΰ-είρω, to destroy (δία<ρΰέρσαι.), φνρω, to mix (φνρσω). 
 
 3. The following verbs form the Put. without the tense-characteristic σ : βέο- 
 μαι or βείομαι (second Pers. βέ-η), I shall live, δηω, I shall find, κείω or κέω, 1 
 shall lie down. 
 
 4. The following form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic σ : χέω, 
 to pour out, εχενα ; σενω, to put in motion, εσσενα ; άλέομαι and ά?^ενομαί, to 
 avoid, ηλενατο, άλενάμενος, ά/.έασΰαι ; καίω, to burn, έκηα and έκεια. 
 
 5. The endings of the second Aor. are sometimes exchanged with those of 
 the first Aor. : βαίνω, to go, έβήσετο, Imp. βήσεο ; δνομαι, to plunge into, έδνσετο, 
 Imp. δνσεο, Part, δνσόμενος ; άγω, to lead, άξετε, άξέμεν ; ίκνεομαι, to come, 
 Ιξον ; ελέγμην, I laid myself down to sleep, Imp. λέξο, λέξεο ; δρννμι, to incite, 
 Imp. δρσεο(εν) ; φέρω, to bear, οϊσε, οίσέμεναι ; άείδω, to sing, Imp. άείσεο. 
 
 6. In the first Aor. Pass, of some verbs, ν is prefixed before the ending •ϋην, 
 as the verse may require, viz. διακρι,νϋ-ήτε, κριν&είς, έκλίν&η (§ 111, 6), ίδρνν• 
 "&ην (from ίδρνω), άμπννν&η (from πνέω). 
 
 7. Several second Aorists, in order to make a dactyl, are formed by a trans- 
 position (metathesis) of the consonants ; e. g. έδρακον, instead of έδαρκον (from 
 δέρκομαι), έπραΰον (from ττέρΰω), έδραΰον (from δαρΰύνω), ημβροτον, instead 
 of ημαρτον (from άμαρτάνω). In like manner, on account of the metre, a vowel 
 of the stem is dropped ; e. g. άγρόμενος, from άγερόμην (άγείρω, to assemble) ; έγ- 
 ρετο, from έγερόμην (εγείρω, to awaken) ; πέφνον, έπεφνον (ΦΕΝΩ, to put to death). 
 
 8. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs as 
 assume e (§ 124) in forming the tenses, or are subject to metathesis ; e. g. χαίρω 
 κεχάρηκα (from ΧΑΙΡΕΩ) ; βα7Χω βέβ? ί .ηκα (from ΒΛΑ-). Besides these, he 
 forms only second Perfects ; but even in pure verbs and in the impure verbs 
 just mentioned, he rejects the κ in single persons and modes, and regularly in 
 
 26 
 
302 
 
 HOMERIC DIALECT. — VERBS. 
 
 f§§ 209, 210. 
 
 the Part. ; thus these forms become analogous to those of the second Perf. ; e. g. 
 κεκμηώς, from κάμνω ; κεχαρηώς, from χαίρω, βεβάώς, from βαίνω (ΒΑΩ). 
 
 § 209. Conjugation in -μι. 
 
 1. Even in Homer, the forms of -έω and -όω (§ 130, Eem. 3) occur in the 
 second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. ; e. g. ετίϋεί, δίδοϊς, όιόοϊ. — Also 
 a reduplicated Put. of όίδωμί occurs : διδώσομεν and διδώσειν. 
 
 2. Verbs in -υ μι form an Opt. both in the Act. and Mid. ; e. g. έκδϋμεν (in- 
 stead of εκδνίημεν), from έκδύω, φϋη (instead of φυίη), from φύω ; δαινϋτο ; so 
 also φ&ϊο, φΰ-ϊτο, Opt. of έφΰ-ίμην, from φ&ίω. 
 
 3. The third Pers. PI. Impf. and second Aor. in •ε-σαν, -η-ραν, •ο-σαν, -ω-σαν, 
 -ν-σαν, is shortened into -εν, •άν, -ον, -ϋν ; e. g. ετιΰεν, instead of έτίΰεσαν, 
 εΰ-εν, instead of εΰεσαν ; έστάν, instead of έστησαν ; έδιδον, instead of εδίδο- 
 σαν ; έδον, instead of έδοσαν ; έφϋν, instead of έφνσαν. 
 
 4. In the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. and second Aor. Mid., Homer rejects 
 σ, and uses the uncontracted form; e. g. δαίνυο (instead of δαίννσο), μάρναο, 
 φάο, σνν&εο, έν&εο. 
 
 5. The short stem-vowel is lengthened before the personal-endings beginning 
 with μ and v, as the verse may require ; e. g. τιϋήμενος, διδοϋναί (instead of 
 διδόναι), δίδω&ι, ϊληβ-ι. 
 
 6. In the second Aor. Subj., the following forms are used, as the verse may 
 require : 
 
 resolved and lengthened forms : 
 
 contracted 
 
 Sing. 1. στώ 
 
 2. στης 
 
 3. στή 
 Dual στήτον 
 Plur. 1. στώμεν 
 
 2. στητέ 
 
 3. στώσι(ν) 
 Sing. 1. &ώ 
 
 2. ϋής 
 
 3. -&ν 
 Dual ϋήτον 
 Plur. 1. Φΰμέν 
 
 2. ΰ-ητε 
 
 3. &ώσι(ν) 
 Sing. 3. δω 
 Plur. Ι. δώμεν 
 
 3. δώσι[ν) 
 
 Remark. Instead of έστησαν (Aor. I 
 
 στεω, στειω 
 
 στητ/ς 
 
 στήη, εμβήη, φήη, φ$ηη 
 
 παρστήετον 
 
 στέωμεν, στείομεν, καταβείομεί 
 
 στηετ-ε 
 
 στέωσι(ν), περιστηωσι(ν) 
 
 -&έω, -&είω, δαμείω 
 
 ~&έης, &ήης, ΰεί-ης 
 
 ■&έη, ΰήη, άνήη, μεϋ-είη 
 
 ΰείετον 
 
 ΰέωμεν, •&είομεν 
 
 δαμείετε 
 
 ■&έωσι(ν), •&είωσι(ν) 
 
 δώησι(ν), δωη 
 
 δωομεν 
 
 δώωσι(ν). 
 
 the shortened form Ιστασαν occnre, 
 
 and instead of 'έστάτε (Perf.), the lengthened form έστητε. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Impf. Ind. 
 
 Fut Ind. 
 
 §210. Ειμί (ΕΣ-), to be. 
 
 2. εσσι. PI. 1. εϊμεν. 3. εΰ,σι(ν) 
 
 1. μετείω. 3. έη, έησι(ν), φσι(ν), είτ). PL 3. εωσι(ν) 
 
 2. εσσο. Inf. εμμεναι, έμεναι, έμεν. Part, εών, εονσα. 
 
 1. έα, fya, έον, έσκον. 2. εησϋ-α. 3. έην, η εν, ηην. Dual 3. ήστην. 
 
 PL 3. εσαν, εϊατο (instead of ηντο, from ημην).—-Ογί. 2. ίοις. 
 
 3. έοι. PL 2. είτε. 3. είεν. 
 _ Γ . ίσομαι (εσσομαή, etc. 3. εσεται and Ισεϊται. 
 
§§ 211, 212.] HOMERIC DIALECT. — VERBS. 303 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 Impf. Ind. 
 
 Fut. Ind. 
 
 § 211. ΕΊμι (Ί-), to go. 
 
 2. είσΰα. Subj. 2. ιησΰσ. Inf. ιμεναι, ιμεν. 
 
 1. ι/ϊ.α, ifiov. 2. iff. 3. ψ, Ιε(ν). PL 1. ήομεν. 3. ψσαν, τ)σαν, 
 
 ήϊον, ισαν. — Opt. lot, ίεΐη. 
 1. εϊσομαι. Aor. Ind. 3. είσατο and έείσατο. Dual 3. έεισάσ&ην. 
 
 Verbs in -ω, which in the second Aor. Act. and Mid., in the Peep, 
 and Plup. Act., and Pres. and Impp., follow the analogy op Verbs 
 
 III -μι. 
 
 § 212. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. (Comp. § 142). 
 
 A. The Characteristic is a Vowel: α, ε , ι, ο , ν . 
 
 βάλλω, to throw, second Aor. Act. (BAA-, εβλην) ξνμβλήτην, Inf. ξνμβλημεναι 
 
 (instead of ^ηναι) ; second Aor. Mid. (έβ?^ήμην) έβλητο, ξύμβληντο, Subj. 
 
 ξίμβληται, βληεται, Opt. βλείο (from ΒΑΕ-), Inf. βλησΰ-αι, Part, βλημενος. 
 
 Hence the Put. βλησομαι. 
 γηράω or γηράσκω, to grow old, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Sing, έγηρά, Part. 
 
 γηράς. 
 κτείνω, to kill, second Aor. Act. εκτάν, PL έκτάμεν, third Pers. PL εκτάν, Subj. 
 
 PL κτέωμεν, Inf. κτάμεναι, κτάμεν, Part, κτάς ; second Aor. Mid. with pas- 
 sive sense, άπέκτατο, κτάσΰαι, κτάμενος. 
 ούτάω, to wound, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Sing, οντά, Inf. ούτάμεναι, οντά• 
 
 μεν ; second Aor. Mid. ούτάμενος, wounded, 
 πελάζω, to approach, second Aor. Mid. επλήμην, πλήτο, πλήντο. 
 πλήϋω (πίμπλημι), to fill, second Aor. Mid. επλητο, Opt. πλείμην (from ΠΑΕ-), 
 
 Imp. π?ι.ήσο. 
 πτήσσω, to shrink with fear, second Aor. Act. third Pers. Dual καταπτήτην. 
 φ&άνω, to anticipate, second Aor. .Mid. φ&άμενος. 
 
 Remark. Prom εβην come the forms βατην (third Pers. Dual), and υπέρ- 
 βάσαν (third Pers. PL), with a short stem- vowel. 
 ΔΑΩ, Epic stem of διδάσκω, to teach, second Aor. Act. (ΔΑΕ-) έδάην, 1 learned 
 
 Subj. δαείω, Inf. δαημεναι. 
 φ-&ί-νω, to destroy and vanish, second Aor. Mid. έφϋίμην, Opt. φ&ΐμην, φ&ϊτο, 
 
 Imp. φ&ίσ&ω, Inf. φΰ-ίσΰ-αι, Part, φΰίμενος. 
 βιβρώσκω, to eat, second Aor. Act. έβρων. 
 
 πλώω, to swim, second Aor. Act. επλων, Part, πλώς, Gen. -ώντος. 
 κλίω, to hear, second Aor. Act. Imp. κλϋϋι, κλντε, κέκλνϋι, κέκλντε. 
 λίω, to loose, second Aor. Mid. λντο, λίντο. 
 πνέω, to breathe, second Aor. Mid. (ΠΝΤ-) άμπι ντο, instead of avi-KVvro^ht 
 
 took breath, 
 σείω, to put in motion, second Aor. Mid. εσσνμην, I strove, εσσνο, σίτο. 
 χέω, to pour, second Aor. Mid. χίντο, χνμενος. 
 
 Β. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 
 αλλομαι, to leap, second Aor. Mid. άλσο, αλτο, έπάλμενος, έπιάλμενος, Subj. 
 
 άληται. 
 αραρίσκω (ΆΡΩ), to fit, second Aor. Mid. άρ μένος, fitted to. 
 γέντο, to seize, arising from ϊέλτο (from έλεϊν, second Aor. of αίρεω). 
 
304 HOMERIC DIALECT. VERBS. [§§ 213, 214. 
 
 δέχομαι,, to take, second Aor. Mid. εδε /cro, Imp. όέξο, Inf. δέχΰαι, ; the first Pers. 
 
 εδέγ,μην and the Part, δέγμενος, like the Perf. δέδεγμαι, signify to expect, 
 έλελίζω, to whirl, second Aor. Mid. ελέλικτο. 
 
 ίκνέομαί, to come, second Aor. Mid. Ικτο, ϊκμενος and Ικμενος, favorable, 
 λέγομαι, to lie down, select, to count over, second Aor. Mid. ελέγμην, ε?>εκτο, λέκτο. 
 μιαίνω, to soil, μιάν&ην (third Pers. Dual, instead of έμίάν-σΰ-ην). 
 μΐγνϋμι, to mix, second Aor. Mid. μίκτο. 
 ορννμί, to excite, second Aor. Mid. ώρτο, Imp. δρσο, δρσεο, Inf. δρΰαι, Part, δρ• 
 
 μένος, 
 πάλλω, to brandish, hurl, second Aor. Mid. παλτό, he sprang, 
 πέρΰω, to destroy, second Aor. Mid. πέρϋαι, instead of πέρϋ-σϋ-αι. 
 πηγννμι, to make firm, to fix, second Aor. Mid. πηκτό, κατέπηκτο. 
 
 § 213. (2) Perf. and Plup. Active. 
 
 (a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. 
 
 γίγνομαί, to become, Perf. PL γέγάμεν, -άτε, -uugl(v), Inf. γεγάμεν, Part- γεγαώς; 
 
 Plup. εκγεγάτην. 
 βαίνω, to go, Perf. PI. βέβαμεν, etc. : Plup. βέβασαν. 
 δείδω, to fear, Inf. δειδίμεν, instead of δειδιέναι, Imp. δείδι&ι, δείδοτε ; Plup. 
 
 έδείδψεν, έδείδισαν. 
 έρχομαι, to come, ε'ι?ίή?ιον&μεν. 
 ΰνησκω, to die, Perf. PL τέΰναμεν, τε&νάσι, Imp. τέ&ναΰι, Inf. τεΰναμεν and 
 
 τεΰ-νάμεναί, Part, τεϋνηώς, -ώτος, τεϋνεώτι ; Plup. Opt. τε&ναίην. 
 ΤΑΛΑΩ, to dare, Perf. PL τέτλαμεν, Imp. τέτλαϋι, Inf. τετλάμεν, Part, τετληώς. 
 ΜΑΩ, to desire, Perf. PL μέματον, -άμεν, -άτε, -άασι, Imp. μεματω, Part, μεμαώς, 
 
 -ώτος and -ότος ; Plup. μέμασαν* 
 
 (b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. 
 
 Preliminary Remark. The τ of the inflection-ending, when it comes im- 
 mediately after the stem-consonant, is changed into ■&, in some Perfects. 
 άνωγα, to command, ανωγμεν, Imp. ανωχΰί, άνωχϋω, ανωχϋτε. 
 έγρήγορα, I awoke (from εγείρω, 1 awaken), Imp. έγρήγορ&ε, Inf. εγρηγόρ&αί\ 
 
 hence έγρηγόρΰασι, instead of εγρηγόρασι. 
 πέποιΰα, I trust (fr^m πεί-&ω, to persuade), Plup. επεπνΒμεν. 
 οϊδα, I know (from ΈΙΔΩ, video), Ιδμεν, instead οϊϊσμεν, Inf. Ιδμεναι. 
 έοικα, I am like (from ΈΙΚΩ), second and third Pers. Dual εικτον ; third Pers 
 
 Plup. Dual είκτην ; hence, Perf. Mid. or Pass, έϊκτο. 
 πάσχω, to suffer, Perf. πέποσ&ε, instead of πεπόν&ατε. 
 
 § 214. (3) Present and Imperfect, 
 άννω, to accomplish, Opt. Impf. άνντο(ά). 
 ταννω, to expand, to stretch, τάνϋται (instead of τανύεται). 
 έρύω and είρυω, to draw, είρύαται, instead of εφννται, Inf. fpva&ai. e'pvcr^at^ 
 
 in the sense of to protect, to guard. 
 ίδω, to eat, Inf. έδμεναι. 
 φέρω, to bear, Imp. φέρτε, instead of φέρετε. 
 
I. GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY, 
 
 WHICH ALSO 
 
 CONTAINS ALL THE ANOMALOUS VERBS AND ANOMALOUS 
 EORMS MENTIONED LN TREATING OE THE VERB. 
 
 The numbers 1, 2, 3, after an adjective, denote that it has one, two or three end- 
 ings. — Other numbers placed after a definition, denote the page, where the word 
 is more fully defined. — Abbreviations : w a., with the Accusative : w. d., with 
 the Dative : w. g., with the Genitive ; Char.. Characteristic. — The numerals and 
 prepositions are not inserted here ; the definitions of these may be found in the 
 sections where thev are treated. 
 
 'Αβίωτος 2, insupportable. 
 
 άβ?.άβεια, innocence, 88. 
 
 άγα&όν, advantage, 27. 
 
 άγα&ός 3, good. 
 
 άγάλλω, to adorn. 56. 
 
 άγαλμα, τό. statue. 
 
 άγαμαι, to wonder [§ 135, 
 p. 165]. 
 
 'Αγαμέμνων, -όνος, δ, 
 Agamemnon. 
 
 άγαν, too much, 36. 
 
 άγανακτέω, to be dis- 
 pleased, 147. 
 
 άγα ~ά ω , to love : w. d.., to 
 be contented with. 
 
 αγγελία, ή, message, 138. 
 
 άγγέ/.λω, to announce. 
 
 άγγε7.ος, 6, messenger. 
 
 άγε, age, come now. 
 
 άγείρω, to collect [Perf., 
 
 I a* (Ml 
 
 αγέλη, ή, herd, 36. 
 άγεννής, -ες, ignoble. 
 άγηρως, -ων, not growing 
 
 old, 31. 
 άγκιστρον, τό, hook. 
 
 αγννμι, to break [§ 140, 1 1. 
 
 αγορά, ή, market-place. 
 
 αγοραίος, ό, trafficker. 
 
 αγορεύω, to say. 
 
 άγρενω, to catch. 
 
 αγρός, ό, a field. 
 
 άγχίνονς 2, shrewd. 
 
 άγω, to lead, 23 [Aor., § 89, 
 Rem.; Perf. ηχα, Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass, ήγμαι], 
 
 άγων, -ώνος, ο, contest. 
 
 άόαήμων, -ον, inexperi- 
 enced, 112. 
 '. η, sister. 
 
 αδελφοκτόνος, ό, murder- 
 er of a brother. 
 
 άόε?.φός, ό, brother. 
 
 άδη?χ>ς 2, uncertain, 29. 
 
 άδης, -ον, ό, the lower 
 world. 
 
 αδικέω,Χο do wrong to, 109. 
 
 αδικία, η, injustice. 
 
 άδικος 2, unjust. 
 
 άδολέσχης, -ον, ο, prater. 
 
 άδολεαγία, prating, 22. 
 
 άδννατέω, to be unable. 
 
 αδύνατος 2, impossible. 
 
 26* 
 
 άδω, to sing, 34. 
 
 αεί, always. 
 
 άεικής, -ες, unseemly, 108. 
 
 αετός, ό, eagle. 
 
 αηδής, -ές, unpleasant, 171. 
 
 άηδίζομαι, to be disgusted 
 
 with [§ 87, 1]. 
 άηρ, -έρος, ό, air. 
 αθάνατος 2. immortal. 
 άϋέατος, not to be seen. 
 Αϋ-ήναι, -ων, αϊ, Athens 
 άϋλ.ητής, -ον, ό, wrestler. 
 άν-λιος, troublesome, 161. 
 άΰ/ύως, miserably, 106. 
 άΰλον, τό, prize, 37. 
 ά&νμέω, to be dispirited, 
 
 107. 
 Άΰως, -ω, ό, Athos. 
 αιαζω, to groan [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. 
 Αίακός, ό, Aeacus. 
 αιδέομαι, to reverence, 109 
 αϊδώς, ή, shame, 47. 
 ΑΙγν~τος, ή, Egypt. 
 άίϋηρ, η, ether. 36. 
 αί&ρία, η, pure air. 
 αίμα, -σ,τος, τό, blood. 
 
306 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 αΐνέω, to pmise [§ 98, (b), 
 
 αϊξ, -γός, η, goat. 
 
 αιρετός 3, chosen, 56. 
 
 αίρέω, to take [§ 126, 1]. 
 
 αφω, to raise. 
 
 αισθάνομαι, to perceive, 
 100 [$ 121, (a), I]. 
 
 αισχρός 3, disgraceful. 
 
 αίσχρώς, disgracefully. 
 
 αίσχύνω, to shame, 131. 
 
 Αίσων, -όνος, ό, Aesou. 
 
 αίτέω τινά τι, to ask. 
 
 Αίτνη, f), Aetna. 
 
 αιχμάλωτος, captured. 
 
 abba, quickly. 
 
 αιών, ό, age, 34. 
 
 άκέομαι, to heal [§ 98, (b)]. 
 
 άκινάκης, -ου, ό, a Per- 
 sian sword. 
 
 ακμάζω, to be at the prime. 
 
 ακμή, point, 106. 
 
 άκολάστως, adv., with im- 
 punity, 175. 
 
 άκολουθέω, to follow, 112. 
 
 ακούω, to hear [Pf., § 89, 
 (b) ; Put. άκούσομαι ; 
 Pass, with σ, § 95]. 
 
 άκρα, η, summit, 90. 
 
 άκρατης, -ες, immoderate, 
 46. 
 
 άκρατος, unmixed. 
 
 άκροάομαι,ίο hear [§96,3]. 
 
 ακροατής, -οΰ, ό, auditor. 
 
 άκρόπολι•ς, -εως, η, citadel. 
 
 άκρος 3, highest. 
 
 άκτίς, -Ινος, ή, beam, ray. 
 
 άκων, -ούσα, -ον, unwilling. 
 
 αλαλάζω, ίο shout [§ 105, 
 
 , *!■ 
 
 άλαόω, to make blind. 
 αλγεινός 3, painful. 
 άλγέω, to feel pain. 
 άλγος, -ους, τό, pain. 
 αλείφω, to anoint [Pf., 
 > § 89, (b)] 
 άλεκτρνών, -όνος, ό, a cock. 
 
 'Αλέξανδρος, ό, Alexander. 
 άλέξω, to ward off [$ 125, 
 
 1]• 
 άλέω, to grind [§ 98, (b), 
 
 p. Ill] 
 αλήθεια, ή, truth. 
 αληθεύω, to speak the 
 
 truth. 
 αληθής, -ες, true. 
 αληθινός 3,. true. 
 αληθώς, truly, 163. 
 ά /Uo, enough. 
 άλίσκομαι, to be taken 
 
 [§ 122, 1]. 
 αλκή, η, strength. 
 'Αλκιβιάδης, -ov, b, Alci- 
 
 biades. 
 άλκιμος 3, strong. 
 άλλα, but. 
 
 αλλήλων, of one another 
 ^ [§ 58]. 
 άλλοθεν, from another 
 
 place, 
 άλλοο, -η, -ο, another, 
 
 alius, 58. 
 αλλότριος, another's, 158. 
 άλλοτρίως, adv., foreign. 
 άλοάω, to thresh [§ 96, 3]. 
 άλσος, -ους, τό, grove. 
 άλυπος, without trouble, 
 
 141. 
 άλωσις, -εως, η, capture. 
 άμα, at the same time. 
 άμαρτάνω, to err, 124 
 f [§121,2]. 
 
 αμάρτημα, τό, error, 40. 
 αμαρτία, ή, offence, 122. 
 άμαυρόω, to darken, 107. 
 αμβροσία, η, food of the 
 
 gods. 
 αμέλεια, ή, carelessness. 
 άμελέω, to neglect. 
 άμνημονέω, to be forget- 
 ful of. 
 αμοιβή, exchange, 162. 
 άμοιρος 2, without a share 
 
 in. 
 
 άμπε?Μς, ή, vine. 
 
 άμπέχομαι, to put on, 135 
 [§ 120, 3]. 
 
 άμύνω, to keep off, 130. 
 
 άμφιγνοέω, to be uncer- 
 tain [Aug., § 91, 3]. 
 
 άμώιέννυμι,ίο clothe [§ 139, 
 
 ' '(b), 1 ; Aug, § 91, 3]. 
 
 άμφισβητέω, to dispute 
 [Aug, § 91, 2]. 
 
 άμφω, both [§ 68, Eem. 2]. 
 
 av, with Subj, instead of 
 εάν, if. 
 
 αναβαίνω, to go up. 
 
 άνάβασις, a going up, 72. 
 
 αναγιγνώσκω, to read. 
 
 αναγκάζω, to- compel. 
 
 αναγκαίος, necessary. 
 
 ανάγκη, necessity, 59. 
 
 άναζεύγννμι, to yoke 
 again, 171. 
 
 άνακαίω, to burn, 171. 
 
 άνακράζω, to cry out. 
 
 ανακύπτω, to peep up, 49. 
 
 αναλίσκω, to spend [§ 122. 
 
 2]• 
 'Αναξαγόρας, -ου, ό, Anax- 
 
 agoras. [90. 
 
 αναπαύω, to cause to rest, 
 άναπείθω, to persuade. 
 άναπέτομαι, to fly up, or 
 
 away. 
 άναπλέω, to sail upon the 
 
 high sea; (2) to sail 
 
 back. 
 άν αρπάζω, to seize, 133. 
 αναρχία, anarchy. 
 αναστρέφω, to turn round. 
 άνατίθημι, to put up, 158, 
 ανατρέπω, to turn up, 120. 
 άναχωρέω, to go back. 
 άνδραποδιστής, -οϋ, ό, 
 
 slave-dealer. 
 άνδράποδον, τό, slave. 
 ανδρεία, ή, bravery. 
 ανδρείος 3, brave, 31. 
 ανδρείως, adv bravely. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 307 
 
 Άνδμόγεως, -ω, ύ, An- 
 drogens. 
 
 άνελευθερία, disgraceful 
 avarice, 112. 
 
 ανέλπιστος 2. unexpected. 
 
 άνεμος, ό, wind. 
 
 άνερωτάω, to ask. 
 
 άνευ, w. g., without. 
 
 ανευρίσκω, to find. 
 
 ανέχομαι, to endure [§91, 
 
 1]• 
 άνέψω, to boil up. 
 άνηκονστέω, w. d., to be 
 
 disobedient. 
 άνήρ, 6, man [§ 36]. 
 άνθεμον, τό, a flower, 
 avi^oc, τό, a flower. 
 ανθρώπινος, human. 
 ανθρώπων, τό, man. 
 άνι^ρωττοΓ, ό, man. 
 άνισος 2, unequal. 
 άνΐστημι, to set up, 158. 
 ανοίγνυμι, ανοίγω, to open 
 
 [§ HO, 5]. 
 ανόμοιος 2 and 3, unlike. 
 άνομος 2, lawless. 
 άνοος, -oov, imprudent, 29. 
 άνορθόω, to raise up [§ 91, 
 
 1]• 
 
 άνορνττω, to dig up again. 
 
 άνταλλάττω, to exchange. 
 
 αντάξιος 3, w. g., of equal 
 worth. 
 
 'Αντίγονος, ό, Antigonus. 
 
 άντιδικέω, to defend at 
 law [§ 91, 4]. 
 
 αντιλέγω, to contradict. 
 
 'Αντισθένης, -ους, ό, An- 
 tisthenes. 
 
 άντιτίιττω, to set oppo- 
 site, 158. 
 
 άνυω, complete [§ 94, 1]. 
 
 άνω, above. 
 
 άνώγεων, τό, hall. 
 
 ανωφελής, -ές, useless. 
 
 αξιόλογος, worth mention- 
 ing, 161. 
 
 άξιος 3, w. g-, worthy of, 
 Ϊ.8. 
 
 άξώω,Χο think worthy,l 08. 
 άοιδη, song. 
 απαγορεύω, to call. 
 άττά}'ω, to lead away. 
 απαίδευτος 2, uneducated, 
 άτταλλάττω, to set free 
 
 from. 
 άτταντάω, w. d., to meet. 
 άπαξ, once. 
 άπας, altogether, 43 [§ 40, 
 
 Rem.]. 
 άπειμι, Inf. άπεϊναι, to be 
 
 absent, 167. 
 άπειμι, Inf. άπιέναι, to go 
 
 away. 
 άπειρος 2, w. g., unac- 
 quainted with, 87. 
 απείρως, adv., inexperi- 
 enced. 
 άπελαύνω, to drive away, 
 
 135. 
 απέρχομαι, to go away. 
 απεχθάνομαι, to be hated 
 
 [§ 121, 3]. 
 άπέχομαι, w. g, to abstain 
 
 from ; from 
 απέχω, to keep off; (2) to 
 
 be distant from. 
 άπηνη, η, wagon. 
 άπιστέω, to disbelieve. 
 άπιστος 2, unfaithful, 52. 
 άπλόος 3, simple. 
 αποβαίνω, to go away. 
 αποβλέπω, to look upon. 
 a7roy£yv(ja/ccj,toreject,175. 
 άποδείκνυμι, to show, 160. 
 αποδέχομαι, to receive, 89. 
 άποδημέω, to be from 
 
 home. 
 άποδιδράσκω, to run away 
 
 from. 
 άποδίδωμι, to give back, 
 
 159. 
 άποκαλέω, to call back, 
 
 name. 
 
 αποκηρύττω, to cause to 
 be proclaimed, 122. 
 
 αποκρίνομαι, to answer. 
 
 αποκρύπτω, to conceal. 
 
 άποκτείνω, to kill. 
 
 άττολύ^ω, w. g., to enjoy. 
 
 άπόλλυμι, to ruin, 163. 
 
 άπό?\.υσις, deliverance, 109. 
 
 'Απόλλων, -ωνοο, ό, Apol- 
 lo. 
 
 άποπειράομαι, w. g, to try. 
 
 άπορέω, to be in want. 
 
 άπορος 2, difficult ; εν άπο- 
 ρος είναι, to be in a 
 strait. 
 
 άπορέω, to flow from. 
 
 άποόρΌή, a flowing off. 
 
 άποσβένννμι, to quench. 
 
 ώττοσττάω, to draw away. 
 
 αποστέλλω, to send, 130. 
 
 άποστερέω, to deprive oi 
 
 αποστρέφω, to turn away 
 
 άποτίθημι, to put away 
 161. [135. 
 
 άποτίνω, to compensate, 
 
 αποτρέπω, to turn away, 
 87. 
 
 άποφαίνω, to show, 131. 
 
 αποφεύγω, w. a., to flee 
 away. 
 
 άπόχρη, it suffices [§ 135, 
 
 . 3] ' 
 
 a7ro^pw/iai,tohave enough 
 
 [§ 97, 3, (a)]. 
 άπτομαι, to touch. 40. 
 απωΦέω, to push away, 
 
 142. 
 άρα; [interrogative, § 187]. 
 άρα, igitur, therefore. 
 άργαλέος, troublesome,l 59. 
 άργύρεος, made of silver. 
 αργύρων, τό, silver. 
 άργυρος, ό, silver. 
 άρέσκω,ίο please [§ 122,3] 
 άρετη, η, virtue. 
 άρθρόω, to articulate. 
 αριθμός, ό, number, 72. 
 
308 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Αριστείδης, -ου, b, Aris- 
 
 tides. 
 αριστεύω, to be the best, 
 
 16. 
 άρκέω, to suffice ; Mid. w. 
 ^ d. [§98 (b)]. 
 άρκτος, b, ή, a bear. 
 άρμα, -ατός, τό, chariot. 
 άρμόττω, to fit [§ 105, 1]. 
 άρνέομαι, Dep. Pass., to 
 
 deny. 
 άροτρον, τό, a plough. 
 άρόω, to plough [§ 98, (c) 
 
 and § 89, (a)]. 
 αρπάζω, to plunder. 
 άρπαξ, rapacious, 
 aproc, ό, bread. 
 άρύω, bo draw water [§ 94, 
 
 ύρ£?7, a beginning, 50 ; την 
 αρχήν, from the begin- 
 ning. 
 
 αρχιτέκτων, -όνος, b, ar- 
 chitect. 
 
 άρχομαι, w. g., to begin. 
 
 αρ^ω, w. g., to rule, 44. 
 
 ασέβεια, η, impiety. 
 
 άσεβέω, w. a., to sin against. 
 
 ασέλγεια, ή, excess. 
 
 ασθένεια, η, weakness. 
 
 ασϋ-ενέω, to be weak. 
 
 άσΰενής, -ές, weak. 
 
 άσκέω, to practise, 107. 
 
 ασπίς, -ίδος, η, shield. 
 
 άστεγος 2, houseless, 122. 
 
 αστραπή, ή, lightning. 
 
 άστράπτω, to lighten. 
 
 άστν, τό, city [§ 46]. 
 
 άσννεσία, ή, stupidity. 
 
 ασύνετος 2, stupid. 
 
 ασφαλής, -ές, firm, 48. 
 
 άσώμ,ατος 2, bodiless, 130. 
 
 ατάκτως, adv., without or- 
 der. 
 
 άτη, infatuation, 142. 
 
 ατιμάζω, to despise, 44. 
 
 ατιμία, ή, dishonor. 
 
 άτρεκέωςμάν., exactly.147. 
 Αττική, ή, Attica. 
 άτνχέω, to be unhappy. 
 ατύχημα, τό, misfortune. 
 ατυχής, -ές, unfortunate. 
 ατυχία, ή, misfortune. 
 αύαίνω, to dry [Aug., 
 
 J 87, 1]. 
 αύΰ-ις, again. 
 αυλός, b, flute, 
 αυξάνω, to increase [§ 121, 
 
 αύξησις, increase. 
 
 αυος 3, dry, 158. 
 
 αύρων, to-morrow. 
 
 αυτόμολος, ό, deserter. 
 
 αυτονομία, ή, freedom, 90. 
 
 αυτόνομος 2, free. 
 
 αυτός, self [■§ 60]. 
 
 άφαιρέομαί τινά τι, to de- 
 prive of. 
 
 αφανής, -ές, unknown, 46. 
 
 αφθονία, absence of envy, 
 53. 
 
 άφθονος 2, unenvious, 64. 
 
 άφίημι, to let go, 167. 
 
 άώικνέομαι, to come [§ 120, 
 
 άφίστημι, to put awa3 T ,158. 
 
 'Αφροδίτη, ή, Venus. 
 
 άφρων, foolish. 
 
 άφυής, -ές, without natu- 
 ral talent. 
 
 'Αχαιός, b, an Achaian. 
 
 αχαριστία, ή, ingratitude. 
 
 αχάριστος 2,ungrateful,44. 
 
 άχ-&ομαι, to be indignant 
 [§125,2]. 
 
 άχϋ-ος, -ους, τό, burden. 
 
 Άχιλλεύς. -έως, ό, Achil- 
 les. 
 
 άχρηστος 2, useless. 
 
 Β. 
 
 Βαβυλω. ία, ή, Babylonia. 
 βά-&ος, -ους, τό, depth. 
 βαΰ-ύς, -εΐα, -ύ, deep. 
 
 βαίνω, to go, 31 [§119,1], 
 
 βάλλω, to throw [§ 117, 2} 
 
 βάρβαρος, barbarian, 72. 
 
 βαρύς, -εΐα, -ύ, heavy, 57. 
 
 βασ'ύ\.εια, ή, queen. 
 
 βασ&εία, ή, royal author- 
 ity. 
 
 βασίλεια, τά, palace. 
 
 βασίλειος 2, royal. 
 
 βασιλεύς, -έως, b, king. 
 
 βασιλεύω, to be a king, 4ί> 
 
 βασκαίνω, to bewitch. 
 
 βαστάζω, to carry [§105,3], 
 
 βάτραχος, b, frog. 
 
 βδελυγμία, ή, dislike, 171. 
 
 βέβαιος 3 and 2, firm, 50. 
 
 βήμα, -ατός, τό, step, 72. 
 
 βία, ή, violence. 
 
 βιάζομαι, w. a., to do vio- 
 lence to. 
 
 βίαιος 3, violent. 
 
 βιβλίον, τό, book. 
 
 βίος, b, life, 28. 
 
 βιοτεύω, to live. 
 
 βίοτος, livelihood, 120. 
 
 βιόω, to live [§ 142, 9]. 
 
 β?ιαβερός 3, injurious. 
 
 βλάβη, ή, injury. 
 
 βλακεύω, to be lazy. 
 
 βλάπτω, to injure [Perf., 
 § 88, 2]. 
 
 β? ί αστάνω,ίο sprout [§ 121, 
 51. 
 
 βλέπω, to look at, 63 [se- 
 cond Aor. Pass., § 102, 
 Rem. 1] 
 
 βοήθεια, ή, help. 
 
 βοηϋ-έω, w. d., to help, 175. 
 
 βοήΰημα, -ατός, τό, help. 
 
 βοηΰ-ός, b, helper. 
 
 Βοβρ'άς, -a, b, Boreas. 
 
 βόσκω, to feed [§ 125, 3]. 
 
 βότρϋς, -ϋος, b, cluster of 
 grapes. 
 
 βού7ιευμα, advice, 138. 
 
 βουλευω, to advise ; Mid., 
 to advise one's self 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 300 
 
 β<λ>λη, ?/, advice, 28. 
 βονλομαι, to wish, 44 
 
 [S 125, 4]. 
 βονς, ό, ή, ox. 
 βραδύς, -εΐα, -ν, slow. 
 βραχύς, -εΐα, -ί•, short. 
 βροντάω, to thunder. 
 βροντή, ή, thunder. 
 βροτός 3, mortal. 
 βρώμα, -ατός, τό, food. 
 βρώσίς, -εως, ή, eating. 
 βννέω, to stop up. [§ 120, 
 
 I]. [120. 
 
 βνσσόΰεν, from the depth, 
 βωμός, ό, altar. 
 
 Γ. 
 
 Γάλα, τό, milk [§ 39]. 
 
 γαμέτη, η, wife. 
 
 γαμέω, to marry [§ 124, 1]. 
 
 γάμος, ό, marriage. 
 
 Τανυμήδης, -εος, ό, Gany- 
 mede. 
 
 γάρ, for (stands after the 
 first word of the sen- 
 tence)• 
 
 γαστήρ, η, belly. 
 
 γαυρόω,ίο make proud,! 1 0. 
 
 γέ, at least, 135. 
 
 γείτων, -όνος, ό, neighbor. 
 
 γελάω, to laugh [§ 98, (a)]. 
 
 γέλως, -ωτος, ό, laughter. 
 
 γέμω, w. g., to be full. 
 
 γένεσις, -εως, ή, origin. 
 
 γενναίος, of noble birth, 
 138. 
 
 γενναίως, nobly, 87. 
 
 γέρας, τό, reward, 41 [§ 39, 
 Rem.]. 
 
 /έρων, -οντος, ό, old man. 
 
 γενώ, to cause to taste, 90. 
 
 γεωμέτρτ ς, -ov, ύ, geoiae- 
 ier. 
 
 γη, η, the earth. 
 
 γη&έω, to rejoice [§ 124, 2] . 
 
 γήρας, τό, old age [§ 39. 
 Rem.]. 
 
 γηράσκω, γηράω, to grow 
 
 old [§122, 4]. 
 γίγας, -αντος, ό, giant. 
 γίγνομαι, to become, 22 
 
 ft 123]• 
 γιγνώσκω, to know, 34 
 
 [§ 122, 5, and § 142]. 
 γλανξ, -κός, η, owl. 
 γλνκνς, -εϊα, -ν, sweet. 
 γ?.ώττα, ή, tongue, 23. 
 γνώμη, η, opinion. 
 γονείς, ό, parent. 
 γόνν, -ατός, τό, knee. 
 Τοργώ, -ονς, η, Gorgo. 
 γράμμα, τό, letter, 63. 
 γρανς, η, old woman [§41]. 
 γράφω, to write, 16. 
 Τρνλλος, ό, Gryllus. 
 γνία, η, field. 
 γυμνάζω, to exercise. 
 γυμνός 3, naked. 
 γυναικείος, belonging to 
 
 women, 88. 
 γνναίκιον,τό,Ίϊίύβ woman. 
 γυνή, ή, woman [§ 47, 2]. 
 
 Δ. 
 
 Ααίδαλος, ό, Daedalus. 
 
 δαιμόνων, τό, deity. 
 
 δαίμων, -όνος, ό, ή, divinity. 
 
 δαίομαι, to distribute. 
 
 δάκνω, to bite [§ 119]. 
 
 δάκρυον, τό, a tear. 
 
 δακρνω, to weep. 
 
 δακτύλιος, ό, ring. 
 
 δάκτυλος, ό, finger. 
 
 δαμάζω, -άω, to tame 
 ft 117, 2]. 
 
 δανείζω, to lend. 
 
 δαρϋάνω,ΐο sleep [§121,6]. 
 
 δε, but (stands after the 
 first word of the sen- 
 tence). 
 
 δέησις, -εως, η, entreaty. 
 
 δεΐ, it is necessary, 107 
 ft 125, 5]. 
 
 δείδω, to fear [Perf. δέ- 
 
 δοικα and δέδια ; Aor 
 
 εδεισα], 
 δείκννμι, show [§ 133]. 
 δείλη, ή, evening. 
 δειλός, timid, 32. 
 δεινός, fearful, 87. 
 δεινώς, terribly, 100. 
 δεκάς, decad, 141. 
 δελοίς, -ϊνος, ό, dolphin. 
 δένδρον, τό, tree. 
 δέομαι, w. g., to want 
 
 [§ 125, 5]. 
 δέον, τό, duty, 167. 
 δέρκομαι, to see [Perf. δέ- 
 
 δορκα, § 102, 4]. 
 δέρω, to flay [Perf., § 102, 
 
 4; second Aor. Pass., 
 
 έδάρην]. 
 δέσποινα, ή, mistress of 
 
 the house. 
 δεσ-ότης, -ου, ό, master 
 δενρο, hither. 
 δέχομαι, Dep. Mid., to re* 
 
 ceive. 
 δέω, to want, 107 [§ 125, 
 
 5] ; (2) to bind [§ 98, 
 
 (b) ; contracted, § 97, 2]. 
 δήΰ-εν, namely, scilicet, 167. 
 δήλος 3, evident. [110. 
 δηλόω, to make evident, 
 Αημητήρ, -τρος, ή, Deme- 
 
 ter or Ceres. [91. 
 
 δημοκρατία, ή, democracy, 
 δήμος, ό, people, 36. 
 Αημοσϋ-ένης, -ονς, ό, De- 
 mosthenes. 
 δήτα, certainly. 
 διαβολή, ή, calumny. 
 διαγίγνομαι, to live. 
 διάγω, to carry through, 
 
 live. [tend. 
 
 διαγωνίζομαι, w.d., to con- 
 διάδημα, τό, diadem, 159. 
 διαιρέω, to divide. 
 δίαιτα, ή, mode of life. 
 διαιτάω, to feed [Aug., 
 
 § 91, 2]. 
 
310 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 διάκειμαι, to be in a state, 
 to be disposed. 
 
 διακονέω, to serve [Aug., 
 .4 91, 2]. 
 
 διαλύω, to dissolve, 88. 
 
 διαμείβομαι, to exchange. 
 
 διαμένω, to remain. 
 
 διανέμω, to distribute. 
 
 διαπράττω, to effect. 
 
 διαρρηγννμι, to break a- 
 sunder, 172. 
 
 διασπείρω, to scatter, 131. 
 
 διατάττω, to order, 122. 
 
 διατελέω, to complete, 161. 
 
 διατίθημι, to put in or- 
 der, 161. 
 
 διατροφή, y, nourishment. 
 
 διαφέρω, to differ from, 63. 
 
 διαφθείρω, to destroy, 63. 
 
 διαφορά, ή, difference, 159. 
 
 διάφορος 2, different. 
 
 διδακτός 3, taught. 
 
 (Μάσκαλοο, ό, teacher. 
 
 διδάσκω, to teach. 
 
 διδράσκω, to run away 
 [§ 122, 6]. 
 
 δίδωμι, give [§ 133]. 
 
 διε?ιέγχω, to censure, to 
 make ashamed, con- 
 vince. 
 
 διθύραμβος, δ, song. 
 
 διίστημι, to separate, 158. 
 
 δικάζω, to judge. 
 
 δίκαιος 3, just. 
 
 δικαιοσύνη, η, justice. 
 
 δικαίως, justly, 160. 
 
 δικαστής, -ov, δ, judge. 
 
 δίκη, η, justice, 22. 
 
 Αιογένης, -ους, ό, Dioge- 
 nes. 
 
 Αιόδωρος, 6, Diodorus. 
 
 Αιόνυσος, δ, Bacchus. 
 
 διότι, because. 
 
 δίς, bis, twice. 
 
 δίχα, w. g., apart from. 
 
 ύιχόμϋθος, double-speak- 
 ing, 122. 
 
 διχοστασία, η, quarrel. 
 
 διψάω, to thirst [contract- 
 ed, § 97, 3, (a)]. 
 
 δίψος, -ους, τό, thirst. 
 
 διώκω, to pursue, 16. 
 
 δμώς, -ωύς, ό, slave. 
 
 δοκέω, to think, 138 [§124, 
 3]. 
 
 δολόω, to deceive, 108. 
 
 δόξα, ή, report, 23. 
 
 δόρυ, τό, spear [§ 39]. 
 
 δορυφορέω, w. a., to attend 
 as a life-guard. 
 
 δουλεία, ή, servitude. 
 
 δουλεύω, to be a slave, 37. 
 
 δούλος, ό, slave. 
 
 δουλόω, to enslave. 
 
 Δράκων, -οντος, ό, Draco. 
 
 δραπετεύω, w. a., to run 
 away. 
 
 δράω, to do, act. 
 
 dpe7ravr/0opoc,scythe-bear- 
 ing, 72. 
 
 δρόμος, ό, running, 100. 
 
 δύναμαι, to be able, 161 
 [§135] ; 
 
 δύναμις, η, power, 100. 
 
 δυνατός 3, possible, pow- 
 erful. 
 
 δύςκολος,\ι&γά to please,41. 
 
 δύστηνος 2, unfortunate. 
 
 δυςτυχέω, to be unfortu- 
 nate. 
 
 δυςχεραίνω, to be dis- 
 pleased with. 
 
 δώμα, -ατός, τό, house. 
 
 δώρον, τό, gift. 
 
 Ε. 
 
 Έάν, w. subj., if. 
 έαρ, έαρος, τό, spring. 
 εαρινός 3, belonging to 
 
 spring. 
 εάω, to permit, 112 [§ 96, 
 
 3; Aug., § 87, 3]. 
 εγγίζω, w. d., to come near. 
 εγγύθεν, from near, near. 
 
 εγγύς, near. 
 
 έγείρω,ίο awaken, 39 [§ 89, 
 
 f (*>)]. 
 
 εγ καλλωπίζομαι, to be 
 proud of, 172. 
 
 έγκλημα, τό, accusation. 
 
 έγκράτ ει a,self-control, 1 6 1 
 
 εγκρατή ς, -ές, continent^ 7 
 
 εγκώμιον, τό, eulogy. 
 
 έγχελυς, -υος, ή, eel. 
 
 εγχωρεί, it is possible, al- 
 lowable. 
 
 εγχώριος 2, native, 89. 
 
 έθέλω, to wish, 107 [§ 125 5 
 
 , 6] • 
 
 εθίζω, to accustom [Aug. 
 
 § 87, 3]. 
 
 έθνος, -ους, τό, nation, 56 
 
 έθος, -ους, τό, custom, 53. 
 
 ει, if; in a question, whe- 
 ther. 
 
 είδος, -ους, τό, form, 48. 
 
 ΈΙΔΩ, see δράω. 
 
 είθε, w. opt., Ο that. 
 
 εικάζω, to liken [Aug., 
 § 86, Rem.]. 
 
 εική, inconsiderately, 160. 
 
 εικός έστι(ν), it is light. 
 
 είκότως, αάυ-, naturally. 
 
 ΈΙΚΩ, see έοικα. 
 
 εικω, to yield to, 22. 
 
 είκών, -όνος, ή, statue. 
 
 εϊλον, see α'ιρέω. 
 
 ε'ίλω, to press, 143 [§ 125, 
 
 7]• 
 ειμί, to be [§ 137]. 
 ειμί, to go [§ 137]. 
 ΈΙΙΊΩ, see φημί. 
 ε'ίργννμι, to shut in [§ 140, 
 
 β- 
 
 είργω, w. g., to shut out. 
 ΈΙΡΟΜΑΙ, to inquire 
 
 ■ [§ 125, 8]. 
 εισα, to establish [Aug., 
 
 ^ 87,3]. 
 ε'ιςβάλλω, to throw into; 
 (2) intrans., to fall into 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 311 
 
 είςειμι, to go into, 167. 
 είςω&έω, to push in, 142. 
 είτα, then. 
 
 είτε — είτε, whether — or. 
 εΐωΰα, see εϋίζω. 
 έκάς, w. g., far. 
 ξκαστος, -η, -ov, each. 
 έκβαίνω, to go out, 135. 
 έκβάλλω, to throw out. 
 έκγονος, ό, η, descendant. 
 έκδύω τινά τι, to strip off. 
 εκείνος, -η, -ο, that, he. 
 εκκαίω, to burn out. 
 έκκαλύπτω, to disclose. 
 εκκλησία, η, assembly. 
 έκκλησιάζω, to hold an as- 
 sembly. 
 έκλειψις (ή) ηλίου, eclipse 
 
 of the sun. 
 εκνέω, to swim out. 
 εκπέμπω, to send out. 
 έκπέτομαί, to fly away. 
 έκπίνω, to drink up, 136. 
 εκπλέω, to sail out. 
 εκπλήττω, to amaze ; Mid. 
 
 Aor., to be amazed. 
 έκπωμα, -ατός, τό, drink- 
 
 ing-cup. 
 έκτος, w. g., without. 
 "Έκτωρ, -ορός, 6, Hector. 
 έκφαίνω, to make known, 
 
 130. 
 εκφέρω, to bring forth, 32. 
 έκφεύγω, w. a., to flee 
 
 from, escape. 
 εκών, -οϋσα, -όν, willing. 
 έλαφος, η, stag. 
 ελαύνω, to drive [§ 119, 2]. 
 έλεαίρω, w. a., to pity., 
 £?ι.έγχω, to examine, 145 
 
 [Perf., § 89, (a)]. 
 έλεέω, w. a., to pity. 
 Ελένη, η, Helen. 
 ί.λεν-άερία, ή, freedom. 
 ελεύθερος, free, 59. 
 ε?,ευ&ερόω, to make free. 
 ΕΛΕΥΘΩ, see έρχομαι. 
 
 έλέφας, ο, elephant, 43. 
 
 ελίσσω, to wind [Aug., 
 §87, 3 : Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass, έλήλιγμαι and el- 
 λιγμαι, § 89] . 
 
 έλκος, τό, a sore, 112. 
 
 ΈΑΚΤΩ and έλκω, to 
 draw [Fut. έ?ιξω ; Aor. 
 εϊλκυσα, έλκύσαι ; Aor. 
 Pass, είλκύσϋ-ην ; Perf. 
 Mid. or Pass, ειλκνσ- 
 μαι ; Aug., § 87, 3]. 
 
 Ελλάς, -άδος, η, Hellas, 
 Greece. 
 
 "Ελλην, -ηνος, ό, a Greek. 
 
 Έλληνίς, -ίδος, ή, Grecian. 
 
 'Ελλήσποντος, ό, the Hel- 
 lespont. 
 
 έλμινς, -ιν&ος, η, worm. 
 
 ελπίζω, to hope, 88. 
 
 έλπίς, -ίδος, η, hope. 
 
 έλπομαι, to hope [Perf, 
 §87,5]. 
 
 ΈΑΩ, see αίρέω. 
 
 έλώδης, -ώδες, marshy. 
 
 εμβάλλω, to throw in; (2) 
 intrans., to fall 'n or 
 upon. 
 
 έμβροχίζω, to ensnare, 167. 
 
 έμέω, to vomit [§ 98, (b)]. 
 
 εμμένω, to remain with, 
 160. 
 
 έμπεδος, firm, 159. 
 
 έμπειρος 2, w. g., expe- 
 rienced in. 
 
 έμπίπλημι, to fill. 
 
 έμπίπρημι, to set on fire, 
 165. 
 
 εμπίπτω, to fall into. 
 
 έμπτνω, to spit into or on. 
 
 έμφερής, -ές, w. d., simi- 
 lar to. 
 
 εμφυτεύω, to implant. 
 
 έμφυτος 2, implanted. 
 
 έμφύω, to implant. 
 
 έναντιόομαι,ίο oppose,l 10. 
 
 ενάντιος 3, opposite. 
 
 έναύω, to kindle [Pass. 
 with σ, $ 95]. 
 
 ένδεια, η, want. 
 
 ένδείκνυμι, to show, 163. 
 
 ενδύω, to put on, 88. 
 
 ένεγείρω, to awaken. 
 
 ενεδρεύω, w. a., to lie ill 
 wait for. 
 
 ΈΝΕΚΩ, see φέρω. 
 
 ενέχω, to have, hold. 
 
 έν&α, there. 
 
 έν&άδε, hither. 
 
 ένΰ-εν, whence. 
 
 έν&υμέομαι, Dep. Pass., to 
 consider. 
 
 ένιαυτός, δ, year. 
 
 ένιοι 3, some. 
 
 ένιότε, sometimes. 
 
 ένίστημι, to put into, 158- 
 
 έννατος 3, ninth. 
 
 'έννυμι, see άμφιένννμι. 
 
 ένοχλέω, w. d., to molest 
 [Aug., § 91, 1]. 
 
 ένταϋ-&α, here. 
 
 έντέλλω, -ομαι, to com- 
 mission, 131. 
 
 έντενΰ-εν, hence; τό έν- 
 τεϋϋ-εν, thereupon. 
 
 έντίϋ-ημι, to put in, 159. 
 
 έντιμος 2, honored. 
 
 εντός, w. g., within. 
 
 έντριψις, -εως, ή, cosmetic 
 
 έντυγχάνω, w. d., to fall 
 in with. 
 
 ένύπνιον, τό, dream. 
 
 εξαίφνης, suddenly. 
 
 εξαλείφω, to wipe off, 120. 
 
 έξαμαρτάνω, to err greatly. 
 
 έξαμαυρόω, to obscure ut- 
 terly. 
 
 εξαπατάω, to deceive com- 
 pletely, 106. 
 
 έξαπίνης, suddenly. 
 
 έξειμι, έξεστι, licet, it is 
 lawful, in one's power. 
 
 έξειμι, έξιέναι, to go out. 
 
 έξεΐπον( Aor.),to utter,! 47 
 
312 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 έξελαυνω, to drive out; 
 
 (2) to lead out. 
 εξετάζω, to examine. 
 εξευρίσκω, to find out 
 έξης, in order. 
 έξίημι, to send out, 167. 
 έξισόω, to make equal. 
 έξοκέλλω, to mislead,. 130. 
 κ ξόλλυμι, to ruin utterly. 
 εξορϋ-όω, to make straight, 
 
 158. [160. 
 
 έξορκέω, to cause to swear, 
 έοικα, to be like [§ 87, 5]. 
 έολπα, see έλπομαι. 
 έοργα, see ΈΡΓΩ. 
 εορτάζω, to celebrate a 
 
 feast [Aug., § 87, 5]. 
 έπαγγέλλω, to announce; 
 
 Mid. to promise. 
 επάγω, to bring on. 
 έπαινέω, to praise, 107. 
 έπαινος, ό, praise. 
 έπαιτιάομαι, to accuse. 
 'Έπαμινώνδας, ' -ου, ό, 
 
 Epaminondas. 
 έπάν (έπήν), w. subj., if. 
 έπανάγω, to lead back. 
 έπανάκειμαι, to lie upon. 
 επαναφέρω, to bring back, 
 
 141. 
 έπαρκέω, w. d., to help, 
 έπεί, when, since. 
 έπειδάν, w. subj., when. 
 επειδή, since, because. 
 έπειτα, then, 167. 
 επέρχομαι, to come to. 
 έπιβοηΰ-έω, w. d., to come 
 
 to the assistance of. 
 έπιβουλεύω,ίο plot against. 
 επιβουλή, ή, plot. 
 έπιδείκνυμι,ίο show boast- 
 fully, 163. 
 επιδιώκω, to pursue. 
 έπι-&υμέω, to desire, 108. 
 έπιΰυμία, ή, desire. 
 επικίνδυνος 2, dangerous. 
 επικουφίζω, to alleviate. 
 
 έπιλαν&άνομαι, to forget. 
 
 επιμέλεια, η, care. 
 
 έπιμέλομαι, -οϋμαι, to care 
 for, 25 [§ 124, 17]. 
 
 έπινοέω, to think of. 
 
 επιορκέω, to swear falsely, 
 138. 
 
 επίορκος, δ, perjured. 
 
 επιπίπτω, to fall upon. 
 
 έπισκοπέω, to look upon. 
 
 έπίσταμαι, to know, 161 
 Κ 135, p. 165]. 
 
 έπιστέλλω; to command. 
 
 επιστήμη, ή, knowledge. 
 
 επιστήμων 2, w. g., ac- 
 quainted with. 
 
 επιστολή, ή, epistle. 
 
 επιτάττω, to entrust to. 
 
 επιτελέω, to accomplish. 
 
 επιτήδειος, fit, 145. 
 
 έπιτηδεύω, to manage, 90. 
 
 επιτί&ημι,ίο putupon,161. 
 
 επιτρέπω, to entrust to ; 
 (2) to permit. 
 
 έπιτροπεύω, w. a., to be 
 guardian. 
 
 επιφέρω, to bring upon, 91. 
 
 έπιχειρέω, w. d., to put the 
 hand to something. 
 
 έπιχώριος 3, of or belong- 
 ing to, the country. 
 
 'έπομαι. Comp. 'έπω. 
 
 έπόμνυμι, to swear by. 
 
 .έπος, -ους, τό, word. 
 
 έποτρύνω, to urge on. 
 
 έπω, to be busily engaged 
 in, occurs in prose in 
 comp. (περιέπω, διέπω, 
 etc.) [Aug., § 87, 3 ; Aor. 
 Act. έσπον not used in 
 Att. prose] ; Mid. έπο- 
 μαι, to follow [Impf. 
 ε'ιπδμην ; Put. έψομαι ; 
 Aor. έσπόμην, έφεσπό- 
 μην ; Inf. σπέσΰ-αι ; 
 Imp. σποϋ, έπίσπου]. 
 
 έραμαι,ίοΙοΥΟ [§135,ρ.165] 
 
 εραστής, 6, lover, 25. 
 
 'Ερατώ, -οϋς, ή, Erato. 
 
 έράω,ίοΐονβ [§135, ρ. 165]. 
 
 εργάζομαι, to work [Aug., 
 § 87, 3]. 
 
 έργαστήριον, τό, work- 
 shop. 
 
 έργνυμι, see εΐργννμι. 
 
 έργον, τό, work, 27. 
 
 ΈΡΓΩ, to do [Perf, § 87 
 
 , 5] • 
 έρδω, to do. 
 
 ερείδω, to prop [Perf., 
 
 t * 89, (b)]. 
 
 ερίζω, to contend with. 
 
 έρις, -ιδος, ή, contention, 
 
 39. 
 Έρμης, -οϋ, ό, Hermes, 
 
 Mercury. 
 ΈΡΟΜΑΙ, see ΈΙΡΟΜΑΙ. 
 έρπύζω, έρπω, to creep 
 
 ^ [Aug, § 87, 3]. 
 έρβω, to go away [§ 125, 
 
 , 9] \ 
 έββωμένος, strong. 
 
 έββωμένως, strongly. 
 
 έρυμα, -ατός, τό, defence. 
 
 Έρυμάν&ιος,ΈϊγτηΆηύήΆη 
 
 έρχομαι, to go, come 
 
 Κ 126, 2]. 
 έρως, -ωτος, ό, love. 
 ερωτάω, to ask. 
 £m&iG>,toeat,16 [§126,3]. 
 έσ-&λός 3, noble, 23. 
 εσπέρα, ή, evening. 
 έςτε, until. 
 έστιάω, to entertain [Aug., 
 
 § 87, 3]. 
 έσχατος, last, 88. 
 εταίρος, ο, companion, 27. 
 έτερος 3, the other,afeer,87. 
 ετί, besides, 124. 
 έτοιμος 3, ready. 
 έτοίμως, adv., readily, 
 ετοο, -ovc, τό, year, 
 ευ, well, ευ πράττω, to do 
 
 well to. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISn VOCABULARY. 
 
 313 
 
 Εύβοια, ή, Euboea. 
 
 ενβουλος, consulting well, 
 147. 
 
 ευγενής, of high birth, 141. 
 
 εύδαιμονεω, to be fortu- 
 nate, 136. 
 
 εΰδαιμονίζω, to account 
 happy. 
 
 εύδαιμόνως, fortunately. 
 
 ευδαίμων, -όνος, fortunate, 
 
 εύδιος 2, serene. 
 
 εύδοκιμέω,ίο be celebrated. 
 
 εϋδω, see καθ-εύδω. 
 
 ευεξία, ή, good condition. 
 
 ευεργεσία, ή, beneficence, 
 138. 
 
 εύεργετέω, to benefit, 108. 
 
 εύεστώ, ή, prosperity, 47. 
 
 ein%vcj,tomake straight,23 
 
 εύΰνς, adv., immediately. 
 
 εύκλεια, ή, fame. 
 
 ευκόλως, adv., quickly. 
 
 εύκοσμία, ή, good order,24. 
 
 ευλαβέομαι, w. a., Dep. 
 Pass., to be cautious. 
 
 ευμενής, -ες, well-disposed. 
 
 εύμορφία,ή, beauty of form. 
 
 ευνομία, ή, good adminis- 
 tration. 
 
 εΰνοος 2, well-disposed, 29. 
 
 εύπετώς, adv., easily. 
 
 εύπορος, w. g., abounding 
 in. [des. 
 
 Ευριπίδης, -ους, b, Euripi- 
 
 εύρίσκω, to find [§ 122, 7]. 
 
 εύρος, -ους, τό, breadth. 
 
 ευρύς, -εΐα, -ν, broad. 
 
 εϋσεβέω, w. a., to rever- 
 ence. 
 
 ευσεβής, -ες, pious. 
 
 εύτακτος 2, well-ordered. 
 
 εϋτυχέω, to be fortunate, 
 107. 
 
 ευτυχής, -ες, fortunate. 
 
 ευτυχία, ή, good fortune. 
 
 ευφραίνω, to rejoice, 28. 
 
 ευφροσύνη, ή, mirth. 
 
 εύχαρις, attractive. 
 
 ευχάριστος 2, winning. 
 
 ενχή, V-, request, 107. 
 
 εύχομαι, w. d., to pray, 31. 
 
 έφηβος, b, a youth. 
 
 έφίημι, to send up to, 167. 
 
 έφικνέομαι,ίο arrive at,136. 
 
 εφόδων, τό, travelling 
 money. [tes. 
 
 Ευφράτης, -ου, b, Euphra- 
 
 εχθαίρω, w. a., to hate. 
 
 έχθάνομαι, see απεχθά- 
 νομαι. 
 
 έχ&ρος 3, hostile, 27, 58. 
 
 έχυρός, firm. 
 
 έχω, to have ; w. adv., 16 ; 
 w. inf., to be able [§ 125, 
 11]• 
 
 έψω, to boil [§ 125, 12]. 
 
 έως, as long as. 
 
 έως, -ω, ή, morning. 
 
 Ζάω, to live [Con., § 97, 
 
 3, (a)]. Comp. βιόω. 
 ζέννυμι, ζέω, to boil [§ 139, 
 
 (b), 2]. 
 ζεύγνυμι, to yoke, 172 
 
 R 140, 3]. 
 Ζευς, b [§47, 3], Zeus or 
 
 Jupiter. 
 ζηλόω, to strive after, 108. 
 ζημία, ή, injury. 
 ζημιόω, to punish. 
 ζητέω, to seek, 108. 
 ζωή, ή, life. 
 ζώνννμι, to gird [§ 139, 
 
 (c), 1]. 
 ζώον, τό, animal, 58. 
 
 H. 
 
 Ή, or ; η — ή, aut — aut. 
 
 φ, where. 
 
 ήβάσκω, ήβάω, to come to 
 
 manhood [§ 122, 8]. 
 ήβη, ή, youth. [way. 
 
 ηγεμονεύω, to point out the 
 
 27 
 
 ήγεμων, -όνος, b, leader. 
 
 ήγέομαι, to lead, 133. 
 
 ήδέως, adv., pleasantly, 16. 
 
 ήδη, already. 
 
 ήδομαι, to rejoice. 
 
 ηδονή, ή, pleasure. 
 
 ήδνς, -νια, -ύ, sweet. 
 
 ήΰος, -ους, τό, custom, 110. 
 
 ήκιστα, least of all. 
 
 ήκω, I am come. 
 
 ηλικία, ή, age, 106. 
 
 ήλίκος 3, as great as. 
 
 ήλιος, b, sun. 
 
 ήμαι, to sit [§ 141, (b)]. 
 
 ήμερα, ή, day. 
 
 ήμερο δρόμος, b, courier,l 08. 
 
 ήμί-θεος, b, demigod. 
 
 ην, w. subj., if. 
 
 ήνίκα, when. 
 
 ηνίοχος, b, guide, 158. 
 
 ήπιος 3, mild. 
 
 "Ηρα, ή, Hera or Juno. 
 
 Ηρακλής, -έονς, b, Her 
 
 cules. 
 %ρως, -ωος, b, hero. 
 ησυχάζω, to be quiet, still. 
 ησυχία, ή, stillness, 24. 
 ήσυχος 2, quiet. 
 ήττα, ή, defeat. 
 ήττάομαι, w. g., to be de 
 
 feated, inferior to. 
 
 θάλαττα, ή, sea. 
 
 ■θαλία, ή, feast. 
 
 ■θάλλω, to bloom, 34. 
 
 ■θάλπος, -ους, τό, heat. 
 
 ■θάνατος, b, death. 
 
 ΰ-άπτω, to bury. [106. 
 
 ■θαββαλέως, adv., boldly, 
 
 ■θαββέω, to be of good 
 courage; -θ. τινά, to 
 have confidence in ; &. 
 τι, to endure something. 
 
 ■θαυμάζω, w. g., to won- 
 der, 16. 
 
 ■θαυμαστός 3, wonderful. 
 
314 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ϋ-εάομαι, Dep. Mid., to see. 
 
 ■θεατής, -οΰ, ό, spectator. 
 
 ■θείον, τό, deity. 
 
 θείος 3, godlike. 
 
 θέλγω, to charm, 122. 
 
 θέλω, to wish, 107 [§ 125, 
 6], 
 
 θεμέλιον, τό, foundation. 
 
 Θεμιστοκλής, -έους, δ, 
 Themistocles. 
 
 θεός, δ, God. 
 
 θεράπαινα, ή, female ser- 
 vant. 
 
 θεραπεία, ή, care. 
 
 θεραπεύω, to honor, 22. 
 
 θεράπων, -οντος, δ, ser- 
 vant. 
 
 θέρος, -ονς, τό, summer. 
 
 θέω, to run [Fut., § 116, 
 3; Con., §97, 1]. The 
 other tenses from τρέ- 
 χω, which see. 
 
 θήβαι, at, Thebes. 
 
 θήρ, -ός, δ, wild beast. 
 
 θηρευτή ς, -ού, ό, huntsman. 
 
 θηρεύω, to hunt, 31. 
 
 θηρίον, τό, wild beast. 
 
 θησαυρός, ό, treasure. 
 
 θησεύς, -έως, ό, Theseus. 
 
 θιγγάνω, to touch [§ 121, 
 10]. 
 
 θλάω, to bruise [§ 98, (a)]. 
 
 θνήσκω, to die [§ 122, 9]. 
 
 θνητός 3, mortal. 
 
 θόρυβος, δ, tumult. 
 
 θραύω, to break, 100 
 [§ 95, Eem. 1]. 
 
 θρίξ, τριχός, η, hair. 
 
 θρόνος, δ, throne, 145. 
 
 θρώσκω, to leap. 
 
 θυγάτηρ, -ρος, ή, daughter. 
 
 θυμός, δ, mind, 28. 
 
 θύρα, ή, door. 
 
 θύρσος, δ, a thyrsus, 159. 
 
 θυσία, ή, sacrifice. 
 
 θύω, to sacrifice [§ 94, 2]. 
 
 θως, θωός, δ, ή, jackall. 
 
 θωπεύω and θώπτω, w. a., 
 to flatter. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ίάομαι, Dep. Mid., to heal. 
 
 Ιατρική, ή, medicine. 
 
 ιατρός, ό, physician. 
 
 Ιβηρία, ή, Spain. 
 
 ιδέα, ή, appearance, 106. 
 
 ίδιος 3, own, peculiar. 
 
 Ιδιώτης, -ου, δ, private 
 man; (2) layman. 
 
 ιδρύω, to build, 90 [§ 94, 1]. 
 
 Ιδρώς, -ώτος, δ, sweat. 
 
 Ιερεύς, -έως, δ, priest. 
 
 Ιερόν, τό, victim. 
 
 Ιερός 3, w. g., sacred to. 
 
 ϊζω, see καθίζω. 
 
 ϊημι, to send [§ 136], 
 
 'ιθύνω, to set right, 52. 
 
 Ικανός 3, sufficient, able. 
 
 "Ικαρος, δ, Icarus. 
 
 ικετεύω, to supplicate, 88. 
 
 ικέτης, -ου, δ, suppliant. 
 
 ικνέομαι, see άφικνέομαι. 
 
 ίλάσκομαι, to propitiate 
 [§122,10]. 
 
 Ιλεως, -ων, merciful. 
 
 Ίλιάς, -δος, η, the Eiad, 53. 
 
 Ίμάτιον, τό, garment. 
 
 Ιμείρω, to desire. 
 
 ίνα, that; (2) in order 
 that. 
 
 Ινδική, η, India. [dia. 
 
 Ινδοί, ol, inhabitants of In- 
 
 lov, τό, violet. 
 
 Ιππείς, -έως, δ, horseman. 
 
 Ιππεύω, to ride. 
 
 Ιππος, δ, horse. 
 
 Ισος 3, equal, 49. 
 
 ΐστημι,ίο place,] 58 [§133]. 
 
 Ιστορέω τινά τι, to in- 
 quire of. 
 
 ιστοριογράφος, ό, historian. 
 
 ιστός, δ, loom. 
 
 ίσχναίνω, to make emacia- 
 ted [§ 111, Rem. 2]. 
 
 ισχυρός 3, strong. 
 ισχύω, to be strong, 5S 
 Ισως, perhaps. 
 Ιχνος, -ους, τό, track. 
 ιχθύς, -ύος, δ, fish. 
 ΊΩ, see εϊμι, to go, 
 
 Κ. 
 
 Καθαιρώ, to purify, 130. 
 καθέζομαι, to sit down 
 
 [Aug., §91,3; Fut. κα- 
 
 θεδοϋμαι]. [10]. 
 
 καθεύδω, to sleep [§ 125, 
 κάθημαι, to sit [Aug., 
 
 § 91, 3]. 
 καΰ-ίζω, to set [§ 125, 13] 
 καθίημι, to let down, 167. 
 καθίστημι,ίο establish, 158. 
 και, and, even ; και — και, 
 
 both — and(et— et),38, 
 καινός 3, new. ' 
 καίριος, opportune, 112. 
 καιρός, the right time, 58- 
 καίω, to burn [§ 116, 2]. 
 κακία, ή, vice. 
 κακόνοος 2, ill-disposed. 
 κακός 3, bad, wicked. 
 κακότης, ή, wickedness, 39. 
 κακουργέω, w. a., to do 
 
 evil to one. 
 κακούργος, δ, evil-doer. 
 κακόω, to treat ill, hurt. 
 κακώς, adv., badly. 
 κάλαμος, δ, reed. 
 καλέω, to call, name [§ 98, 
 
 (b); Opt. Plup. Mid. or 
 
 Pass., § 116,4]. 
 Καλλίας, -ου, δ, Callias. 
 κάλλος, -ους, τό, beauty. 
 καλοκαγαθία, η, rectitude, 
 
 145. 
 καλός 3, beautiful, 27. 
 καλύπτω, to conceal. 
 καλώς, adv., well. 
 κάμηλος, δ, ή, camel. 
 κάμνω, to labor (intrans.)* 
 
 130 [§ 119]. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 315 
 
 *άν, even if, 107. 
 
 κάνεον, το, basket. 
 
 κάπρος; ό, wild boar. 
 
 καρδία, ή, heart. 
 
 καρπόομαι, to enjoy the 
 fruits of. 
 
 καρπός, ό. fruit. 
 
 κάρτα, very. 
 
 καρτερέω, to be patient. 
 
 καρτεράς 3, strong, 167. 
 
 Κάστωρ, -ορός, ό, Castor. 
 
 κατάβασις, ή, retreat, 72. 
 
 καταγελάω, w. g., to laugh 
 at [sleep, 138. 
 
 καταδαρΰάνω, to fall a- 
 
 καταδύω, to go down, 88. 
 
 κατακαίω, to burn down. 
 
 κατακλαίω, to bewail. 
 
 κατακλείω, to shut, 90. 
 
 κατακρύπτω, to hide. 
 
 καταλάμπω, shine upon. 
 
 καταλείπω, to leave be- 
 hind, 120. 
 
 καταλύω, to loosen, 88. 
 
 κατανέμω, to distribute. 
 
 καταπαύω, to put a stop to. 
 
 καταπετρόω, to stone to 
 death. [122. 
 
 καταπλήττω, to astonish, 
 
 κατασκευάζω, to prepare. 
 
 κατατί&ημι, to lay down, 
 161. [122. 
 
 καταφ?ιέγω, to burn down, 
 
 καταώρονέω, to despise. 
 
 καταφυγή, ή, refuge. 
 
 κατεργάζομαι, to accom- 
 plish. 
 
 κατέχω, to restrain, 23. 
 
 κατήγορος, ό, accuser. 
 
 κάτοπτρον, τό, mirror. 
 
 κάτω, below. 
 
 καϋμα, -ατός, τό, heat. 
 
 κάω, see καίω. 
 
 κεϊμαι, to he down [§ 141, 
 
 (a)l• 
 κελεύω,ίο order, bid [§ 95]. 
 Κ,ελτίβηρες, Celtiberians. 
 
 κέντρον, τό, sting, 159. 
 κέραμος, ό, clay. 
 κεράννυμι, to mix [§ 139, 
 
 (a), 1]• 
 κερδαίνω, to gain, 130 
 
 [§111, Aor. II; Perf. 
 
 κεκέρδακα], 
 κέρδος, -ους, τό, gain. 
 κευ&μών, -ώνος, ό, lair. 
 κεύ&ω, to conceal. 
 κεφα?*.ή, ή, head. 
 κεχρημένος, wanting, 120. 
 κήπος, ό, garden. 
 κήρ, κήρος, τό, heart. 
 κηρός, ό, wax. 
 κήρυξ, -ϋκος, ό, herald. 
 κηρύττω, to make known 
 
 (by a herald). 
 κιΰάρα, ή, lyre. 
 Ki?UKta, ή, Cilicia. 
 κινδυνεύω, to incur dan- 
 ger. 88. 
 κίνδυνος, ό, danger. 
 κΐς, κιός, ό, corn-worm. 
 κίστη, ή, chest. 
 Κίττός, ό, ivy. 
 κίχρημι, to lend [§ 135, 1]. 
 κλάζω, to sound [§ 105, 4 ; 
 
 Put. Perf. κεκλάγξω and 
 
 -γ^ομαέ] . 
 κλαίω, to weep, 133 [§ 125, 
 
 141. 
 κλάω, to break [§ 98, (a)]. 
 /cAeic, ή, key [§ 47, 5] . 
 Κλειώ, -ους, ή, Clio. 
 κλείω, to shut, 28 [Pass. 
 
 with σ, § 95, Eem. 1]. 
 κλέος, -ους, τό, fame, 48. 
 κλέπτης, -ου, ό, thief. 
 κλέπτω, to steal [Fut. κλέ- 
 
 ■ψομαι ; second Aor. 
 
 Pass, έκλάπην ; Perf., 
 
 § 102, 5]. 
 κλίνω, to bend [§ 111, 6]. 
 κλοπή, ή, theft. 
 κλόπιμος, thievish, 122. 
 Κλωΰώ, -οϋς, ή, Clotho. 
 
 κ?Μψ, -ωπός, ό, thief. 
 κνάω, to scrape [Cont., 
 
 § 97, 3]. 
 κοίζω, to squeak [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. 
 κοιλαίνω, to hollow out 
 
 [§ 111, Rem. 2]. 
 κοινός, common, 131 ; το 
 
 κοινόν, commonwealth. 
 κοινωνία, ή, communion, 
 
 108. 
 κοίρανος, ό, ruler. 
 κολάζω, to punish. 
 κο?Μκεία, ή, flattery. 
 κολακεύω, w. a., to flatter. 
 κόλας, -ακος, ό, flatterer. 
 κολαστής, -οϋ, ό, punisher 
 κολούω, to curtail [Pass. 
 
 with σ, § 95]. 
 κόλπος, ό, bosom, 133. 
 κομίζω, to bring. 
 κόπτω, to cut, 120. 
 κόραξ, -ακος, ό, crow. 
 κορέννυμι,ίο satisfy [§ 139, 
 
 (b),3]. 
 Κορίν&ιος, ό, Corinthian. 
 κόρυς, -υ&ος, ή, helmet. 
 κοσμέω, to adorn. 
 κόσμος, ό, ornament, 51. 
 κούφος 3, light, 39. 
 κράζω, to cry out, 122 
 
 [§ 105, 2 ; Put. κεκρά- 
 
 ξομαι]. 
 κράνος, -ους, τό, helmet. 
 κρατέω, w. g., to have 
 
 power over, 107. 
 κρατήρ, -7)poc,mixing bowl 
 κράτος, -ους, τό, strength 
 κραυγή, ή, shout, 167. 
 κρέας, τό, flesh, 41 [§ 39, 
 
 Rem.]. 
 κρέμαμαι and κρεμάννυμι, 
 
 to hang [§ 139, (a), 2]. 
 κρίνω, to judge, 48 [§ 111, 
 
 6]. [sa. 
 
 Κρισαϊος, belonging to Cri- 
 κριτής, -οϋ, ό, judge. 
 
316 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Κριτίας, -ου, δ, Oritias. 
 
 Κροίσος, δ, Croesus. 
 
 κροκόδειλος, δ, crocodile. 
 
 κρόμυον, τό, onion. 
 
 Κρότων, -ωνος, δ, Crotona. 
 
 κρούω, to knock. 100 [Pass. 
 with σ, § 95, Kern. 1]. 
 
 κρυπτός 3, concealed, 130. 
 
 κρύπτω, to conceal, 121. 
 
 κρώζω, to croak [§ 105, 2]. 
 
 κτάομαι, to acquire, 112 
 [Redup., § 88, Rem. 1 ; 
 Subj. Perf. and Opt. 
 Plup., §116,4], 
 
 κτείνω, to kill, usuallya7ro- 
 κτείνω [Perf. Act., $111, 
 5. Instead of εκταμ,αι 
 and εκτάβ-ην, τέϋνηκα 
 and άπέϋ-ανον υπό τίνος 
 are usual]. 
 
 κτείς, -ενός, δ, comb. 
 
 κτενίζω, to comb. 
 
 κτήμα, -ατός, τό, posses- 
 sion. 
 
 κτησ'ις, ή, possession, 51. 
 
 κτίζω, to found, 31. 
 
 κυβερνήτης, δ, pilot. 
 
 κύβος, δ, a die, cube. 
 
 Κύδνος, δ, Cydnus. 
 
 κυλίω, to roll [Pass, with 
 σ, § 95]. 
 
 κύπελλον, τό, goblet. 
 
 κυριεύω,ίο be master of,88. 
 
 κύρως, w. g., having pow- 
 er over. [clops. 
 
 Κύκλωψ, -ωπος, δ, Cy- 
 
 Κνρος, δ, Cyrus. 
 
 κύων, κυνός, δ, ή, dog. 
 
 κωλύω, to hinder. 
 
 κώμη, ή, village. 
 
 κωτίλλω, to chatter, 172. 
 
 κωτίλος 3, loquacious 
 
 κωφός 3, dumb. 
 
 Ααγχάνω, to acquire [§121, 
 
 ill 
 
 Αακεδαιμόνως, δ, Lace- 
 daemonian. 
 
 λαγώς, -ώ, ό, hare. 
 
 λαϊλαψ, -απος, ή, storm. 
 
 λαλέω, to talk. 
 
 λάλος 2, talkative. 
 
 λαμβάνω, to take, 31 
 [§ 121, 12]. 
 
 λαμπρός 3, brilliant, 23. 
 
 λανϋάνω, to be concealed 
 from, 89 [§ 121, 13]. 
 
 λάρυγξ, -υγγος, δ, throat. 
 
 λέαινα, ή, lioness. 
 
 λεαίνω, to grind, 43. 
 
 λέγω, to say, name ; λέγο- 
 μαι [§ 88, Eem. 2] ; (2) 
 to collect [§ 88, 4 ; Aor. 
 Pass. έλέχ-&ην*α&ά έλέ- 
 γην}. 
 
 λεία, ή, booty, 145. 
 
 λειμών, -ωνος, δ, meadow. 
 
 λείπω, to leave, leave be- 
 hind [Aor. ελιπον ; Pf. 
 λέλοιπα, § 102, 4]. 
 
 Αεωνίδας , -ου, δ, Leonidas. 
 
 λεπτός 3, thin. 
 
 λευκάζω, to whiten [§111, 
 Rem 2]. 
 
 λεύω, to stone [Pass, with 
 σ, § 95]. 
 
 λέων, -οντος, δ, lion. 
 
 λεώς, δ, people. 
 
 ληρος, δ, loquacity. 
 
 ληστής, -οϋ, δ, robber. 
 
 λίαν, very, 122. 
 
 Αιβύη, ή, Libya 
 
 λ'ώος, δ, stone. 
 
 λιμήν, -ένος, δ, harbor. 
 
 λίμνη, ή, marsh, 158. 
 
 λιμός, δ, hunger. 
 
 λογίζομαι, to think, 112. 
 
 λόγιος 3, eloquent, 112. 
 
 λόγος, δ-, word, 27. 
 
 λοιδορέω, to scold, 109. 
 
 ?,οιμός, δ, pestilence, 158. 
 
 λοιπός 3, remaining. [5]. 
 
 λούω, to wash [Cont., § 97, 
 
 λόφος, δ, crest- 
 λοχάω, w. a•, to lie in wait, 
 λυγρός 3, sad. 
 Αυδία, ή, Lydia. 
 Αυκοϋργος, δ, Lycurgus. 
 λυμαίνομαι^, a., to abuse, 
 
 maltreat. 
 λύμη, ή, disgrace. 
 λνπέω, to distress. 
 λύπη, ή, sorrow. 
 λυπηρός 3, sad, 47. 
 λύρα, ή, lyre. 
 λυρικός 3, lyric. 
 Αύσανδρος, δ, Lysander. 
 Αυσίας, -ου, δ, Lysias. 
 λυσιτελέω, w. d., to be 
 
 useful to. 
 λύχνος, ό, lamp, 172. 
 λύω, to loose, 22 [§ 94, 2]. 
 λωβάομαι, w. a., maltreat 
 
 M. 
 
 Μα&ητής, -οϋ, δ, a pupil,28. 
 
 Μαίανδρος, δ, Maeander. 
 
 μάκαρ, -αρος, happy. 
 
 μακαρίζω,ίο esteem happy. 
 
 μακάριος 3, happy, 108. 
 
 Μακεδονία, ή, Macedonia, 
 
 Μακεδόνικος, Macedonian. 
 
 Μακεδών, -όνος, ό, a Mace- 
 donian. 
 
 μακράν, far, 131. 
 
 μακρός 3, long. 
 
 μαλακίζω, to render ef- 
 feminate, 124. 
 
 μαλακός 3, soft. 
 
 μαλθακός 3, soft, 172. 
 
 μάλιστα, especially, 107. 
 
 μάλλον, rather, 64. 
 
 Μανδάνη, ή, Mandane. 
 
 μαν&άνω, to learn, 24 
 [§ 121, 14]. 
 
 Μαντινεία, ή, Mantinea. 
 
 μάντις, -εως, ό, prophet, 8•?, 
 
 μαραίνω, to make wither. 
 
 μαρτυρέω, μαρτύρομαι, to 
 bear testimony [§ 1 24,4]. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 317 
 
 μαρτχρία, ή, testimony. 
 μάρτυς, -τυρός, ό, witness. 
 μαστιγόω, to scourge. 
 μαστίζω, to whip [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. [38. 
 
 μάστϊζ, -ϊγος, ή, scourge, 
 μάχη, ή, battle. 
 μάχομαι, to fight, 16 [4 125, 
 
 15]. 
 μέγας, -άλη, -a, great [§48]. 
 μέγεθος, -ovo,ro,greatness. 
 μέθη, ή, drunkenness. 
 μεθήμων, -όνος, negligent, 
 
 65. 
 αεθίημι, to let go, 168. 
 αεθνω, to be drunk, 136. 
 Μεθώνη, ή, Methone. 
 μειράκίον, τό, young boy. 
 μέλας, -αινα, -αν, black. 
 μέλει, it concerns, 24 
 
 [§ 125, 17]. 
 μελέτη, η, care. 
 μέλι, -ιτος, τό, honey. 
 μέλιττα, ή, a bee. 
 μέλλω, to be about to, 88 
 
 [S 125, 16]. 
 μέλομαι, to have a care for 
 
 [§125,17]. 
 μέλος, -ους, τό, song, 121. 
 μέμφομαι, w. a., to blame ; 
 
 w. d., to reproach. 
 μέμ-ψις, -εως, η, reproach. 
 μέν — δε, truly — but, 38. 
 Μενέ?,εως, -εω, ό, Mene- 
 
 laus. 
 μενεναίνω, w. d., to bear 
 
 ill-will towards. 
 μένω, to remain : w. a., to 
 
 await ; second Perf. m- 
 
 μονα, to desire [§ 111,5]. 
 μερίζω, to divide. 
 μέριμνα, ή, care. 
 μέρος, -ους, τό, part. 
 μεσημβρία, ή, mid-day. 
 μέσος 3, middle. 
 αεσότης, mediocrity, 57. 
 μεστός 3, w. g., full. 
 
 μεταβάλλω,ϊο change,130. 
 
 μεταβολή, ή, change. 
 
 μεταδίδωμι. to give a share 
 of, 159. 
 
 μεταλ/.άττω, to change. 
 
 μεταξύ, w. g.. between. 
 
 μεταττέμ-ομαι, to send for. 
 
 μετατίθ η μι, to change,159. 
 
 μεταόέρω, to remove, 
 change. 
 
 μεταχειρίζομαι, to take in 
 hand, 65. 
 
 μετέπειτα, afterwards. 
 
 μετέχω, to take part in. 
 
 μέτριος 3, moderate. 
 
 μετρίως, adv., moderately. 
 
 μέτρον, τό, measure, 28. 
 
 μέχρι, until. 
 
 μη, not, 16; after expres- 
 sions of fear, 91. 
 
 μηδαμον, nowhere ; μ. εί- 
 ναι, to be of no value. 
 
 Μήδεια, η, Medea. 
 
 μηδείς, -εμία, -έν, no one 
 [§ 68, Rem. 1]. 
 
 μηδέττοτε, never, 112, 
 
 Μήδος, ό, a Mede. 
 
 μήκος, -ους, τό, length. 
 
 μήν, -νός, ό, month. 
 
 μηνις, -ιος or -ιδος, η, an- 
 ger, [with. 
 
 μηνίω, w. d., to be angry 
 
 μήποτε, never. 
 
 μήττω, not yet. 
 
 μήτε — μήτε, neither — 
 nor. 
 
 μήτηρ, -τρος, ή, mother. 
 
 αηχανάομαι, Dep. Mid., 
 to contrive. 
 
 μιαίνω, to pollute [§ 111, 
 Rem. 2]. 
 
 μίγνυμι, to mix [§ 140, 4]. 
 
 Μιθριδάτης, -ου, ό, Mith- 
 ridates. 
 
 μικρός 3, small. [des. 
 
 Μύ,τιάδης, -ου, ό, Miltia- 
 
 Μίλων, -ωνος, ό, Milo. 
 
 27* 
 
 μιμεομαι, to imitate. 
 μιμητής, -οΰ, ύ, imitator. 
 Μίνως (Gen. Μίνωος and 
 
 Μίνω), ό, Minos. 
 μιμνήσκω, to remind 
 
 [§122, 11]. 
 μίσγω, Λν. g., to mix with 
 μισέω, to hate. 
 μισθός, ό, reward. 
 μισθόω, to let out. 
 μνά, -ας, ή, mina [§ 26]. 
 μνήμη, ή, memory. 
 μνημονεύω, to remember. 
 μνηστήρ, -ήρος, ό, suitor. 
 μόλις, with difficulty. 
 μοναρχία, ή, monarchy. 
 μόνον, only, 64. 
 μόνος 3, alone. 
 μοίρα, ή, fate, 141. 
 μόρσιμος 2, fated. 
 Μοΰσα, ή, a Muse. 
 μουσική, ή, music, 87. 
 /zo£#?/pof3,miserable,base. 
 μόχθος, ό, toil, distress. 
 μοχλός, ό, bolt, 28. 
 μνζω, to suck [§ 125, 18]. 
 μνθος, ό, word, 40. 
 μυΖα, ή, fly. 
 μνρίος 3, innumerable. 
 μίψμηξ, -κος, ό, ant. 
 μνρον, τό, perfumery, 145. 
 jtitic, -t'oc, ή, mouse. 
 μνχατος 3, inmost, 121. 
 μνω, to close [formation 
 
 of tense, § 94, 1]. 
 μωρός 3, foolish, a fool. 
 
 N. 
 N<u, truly, 
 ναίω, to dwell. 
 Nafioc, ό, Naxian. 
 νάσσω, to press together 
 
 [Char., § 105, 1]. 
 ναυάγια, ή, shipwreck. 
 ναυαγός, ό, shipwrecked. 
 ναυμαχία, ή, sea-fight 
 ναυτής, -οϋ, ό, sailor. 
 
318 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ναυτικός 3, nautical, 161 ; 
 
 το ναυτικόν, a fleet. 
 νεανίας, -ου, δ, a youth. 
 Νείλος, 6, Nile. 
 νεκρός 3, dead, 175. 
 νέκταρ, -αρος, τό, nectar. 
 νέκνς, -νος, δ, corpse, 49. 
 Νεμέα, ή, Nemea. 
 νέμω, to divide, 145 [Fut. 
 
 νεμώ and νεμήσω ; Aor. 
 
 ενειμα ; Perf. νενέμηκα ; 
 
 Aor. Pass, ενεμήΰην 
 
 and -έϋην], 
 νέος 3, young, 28. 
 νεότης, -ητος, ή, youth. 
 Νέστωρ, -ορός, δ, Nestor. 
 νεφέλη, η, cloud, 158. 
 νέφος, -ους, τό, cloud. 
 νέω, to swim [§ 116, 3]. 
 νεώς, -ω, δ, temple. 
 νή, yes, truly. 
 νήμα, -ατός, τό, yarn, 136. 
 νηνεμία, ή, a calm. 
 νήσος, η, island. 
 νίζω, to wash. 
 νικάω, to conquer, 106. 
 νίκη, τ), victory. 
 νίπτω, to wash. 
 νίφει, it snows. 
 νοέω, to think. [57. 
 
 νόημα, -ατός, τό, thought, 
 νομ,άς, -άόος, δ, η, nomad. 
 νομείς, -έως, δ, shepherd, 
 
 44. 
 νομή, i}, pasture. 
 νομίζω, to think, 56. 
 νόμιμος 3, customary. 
 νόμος, δ, law. 
 νόος, δ, mind, 29. 
 νοσέω, to he sick. 
 νόσος, ή, disease, 28. 
 νότος, δ, south-wind. 
 Νύμφη, ή, a Nymph. 
 νυν, now. 
 
 νύξ, νυκτός, η, night. 
 νυστάζω, to nod [Char., 
 
 § 105, 3]. 
 
 Εενία, η, hospitality. 
 ξένος, δ, guest, 122. 
 Ξενοφάνης, -ους, δ, Xeno- 
 
 phanes. [phon. 
 
 Ξενοφών, -ώντος, δ, Xeno- 
 ξέω, to scrape [formation 
 
 of tense, §98, (b)]. 
 ξηραίνω, to dry. 
 ξίφος, -ους, τό, sword. 
 ξύλον, τό, wood. 
 ξυρέω and ξύρομαι,ίο shave 
 
 [§ 124, 5]. 
 ξύω, to scrape [Pass, with 
 
 σ, § 95]. 
 
 Όδάζω, to bite [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. 
 δδε, this. 
 δόός, η, way. 
 δόοϋς, -όντος, δ, tooth. 
 οδύρομαι, to mourn, 16. 
 'Οδυσσεύς, -έως, δ, Ulysses. 
 δζω, to smell of [§125, 19]. 
 όΰ-εν, whence. 
 ol, whither. 
 οίακίζω, to steer [Aug., 
 
 §87,1]. 
 οίδα, I know [§ 143]. 
 οϊγνυμι, ο'ίγω, see άνοίγ. 
 οικείος 3, belonging to, 
 
 own, intimate. 
 ο'ικέτης, -ου, δ, servant. 
 οίκέω, to dwell, 112. 
 οίκησις, -εως, ή, dwelling. 
 οικία, ή, house. [112. 
 
 οίκοδομέω, to build a house, 
 οίκος, δ, house. 
 οικουρέω, to guard a house 
 
 [§ 87, 2]. 
 οίκτείρω, w. a., to pity. 
 οιμαι, see οϊομαι. 
 οίμώζω, to lament [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. 
 οικτρός 3, pitiable, 58. 
 οίνος, δ, wine. 
 
 οινοχόος, ό, cup-bearer. 
 οίομαι, to think [§ 125, 20] 
 οίος, such as; w. inf., in 
 
 stead of ώςτε, so that 
 δϊς, οίος, δ, ή, sheep. [21]. 
 ο'ίχομαι, to depart [§ 125, 
 ΌΙΩ, see φέρω. 
 όλβιος 3, happy. 
 όλβος, δ, riches, 124. 
 ολιγαρχία, oligarchy, 161. 
 ολίγοι, few. 
 ολίγος 3, little, 53. 
 δλισΰ-άνω, to slip [§ 121,7]. 
 όλλν μι,ίο destroy [§ 138.Β], 
 ολολύζω, to howl [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. 
 όλος 3, whole. 
 όλοφύρομαι, to pity. 
 "Ομηρος, δ, Homer. 
 δμιλέω, w. d., to associate 
 
 with, 131. 
 δμιλ'ια, ή, intercourse with. 
 όμννμι, to swear [§ 138, B]. 
 ομνύω, to swear. 
 δμογάσ'τριος, δ, brother. 
 δμόγλωττος 2, speaking 
 
 the same language. 
 δμοιότης, -τητος, likeness, 
 o^oiw^inlike manner,108. 
 δμολογέω, to agree with, 
 
 admit. 
 δμόργνυμι, to wipe off 
 
 [§ 140, 6]. 
 όνειρος, δ, dream. 
 όνησις, -εως, ή, advantage. 
 δνίνημι, to benefit [§ 135, 
 
 . 4] • 
 
 όνομα, -ατός, τό, name. 
 
 ονομάζω, to name. 
 όντως, really. 
 δξύς, -εΐα, -ύ, sharp, sour. 
 δπάζω, to bestow, 124. 
 όπη, whither, where. 
 οπίσω, back, 138. 
 οπλίζω, to arm. 
 οπλίτης, -ου, ό, heavy-arm- 
 ed man. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 319 
 
 δπλον, τό, weapon. 
 
 δποι, whither. 
 
 ύποϊος 3, qiialis, of what 
 sort. [as. 
 
 όπόσος 3, quantus, as great 
 
 όποσοςοΰν 3, how great, 
 how long, soever. 
 
 οπόταν, w. subj., when. 
 
 όποτε, when, since. 
 
 όπότερος 3, which of two. 
 
 δπου, where. 
 
 ΌΠΤΩ, see δράω. 
 
 δπως, how, 109. 
 
 δρΰσις, -εως, ή, sight. 
 
 δράω, to see [§ 126, 4]. 
 
 όργαίνω, to enrage [§ 111, 
 Kem. 2]. 
 
 οργή, ή, anger. 
 
 οργίζομαι, Dep. Pass., to 
 be angry. 
 
 δρέγω, to stretch, 122. 
 
 δρεξις, a striving after,108. 
 
 δρυός 3. straight, 57. [108. 
 
 δρ&όω, to make straight, 
 
 όρΰρως 3, early. 
 
 ορίζω, to fix, limit, 124. 
 
 δρκιον, τό, oath. 
 
 δρ /coc, ό, oath. 
 
 ορμάω, to rush, 106. 
 
 δομή, ή, impulse, 57. 
 
 δρνϊ&οΰ-ήρας, -α, δ, bird- 
 catcher, 24. 
 
 όρνις, -ϊ&ος, δ, η, bird. 
 
 δρνϋμι, to rouse. 
 
 opoc, -ovf, τό, mountain. 
 
 δρτυξ, -γος, δ, quail. 
 
 δρύττω, to dig [Fut. δρύ- 
 ξω ; Pf. όρώρυχα ; Pf. 
 Mid. or Pass, δρώρνγ- 
 μαι, § 89, (a)]. 
 
 δρχηΰμός, δ, dance. 
 
 δσιος 3, holy. 
 
 οσμή, ή, smelL 
 
 οσοο, as great as, 67. 
 
 δςπερ, ήπερ, δπερ, who- 
 ever, 108. 
 
 ί^τεον, -ovv, τό, bone. 
 
 δςτις, ήτις, δ τι, whoever, 
 67 [§ 62]. 
 
 δσφραίνομαι,ντ. g., to smell 
 [§ 121, 8]. 
 
 Οταν, w. subj., when, 87. 
 
 δτε, when. 
 
 υτι, that, because. 
 
 οΰ, not, 17 ; ου, where. 
 
 ουδαμή, nowhere. 
 
 ουδέ, neither, 57. 
 
 ουδείς, -εμία, -εν, no one 
 [§ 68, Kem. 1]. 
 
 ουδέποτε, never. 
 
 ουκ, not, 16. 
 
 οϋκέτι, no longer, 165. 
 
 ουν, therefore. 
 
 οϋποτε, never, 131. 
 
 Ούρανίδαι, oi, gods, in- 
 habitants of Olympus. 
 
 ουράνιος 3, heavenly. 
 
 οϋς, ώτός, τό, ear [§ 39]. 
 
 ουσία, possession, 64. 
 
 ούτε — ούτε, neither — nor. 
 
 ουτω{ς), thus, 87 [§ 7]. 
 
 ουχ, not, 28. 
 
 όψείλω, to owe [§ 125, 22]. 
 
 δφέλλω, to nourish, 53. 
 
 δφϋ-αλμός, δ, eye. 
 
 o0ic, -εωο, ό, snake. 
 
 δφλισκάνω, to owe [§ 121, 
 9]. 
 
 ό#έω, to bear, endure. 
 
 δχλος, δ, the common peo- 
 ple (plebs). 
 
 όψ, οπός, ή, voice. 
 
 δψέ, late. 
 
 όψιος 3, late. [47. 
 
 o^ic, -εως, η, sight, visage, 
 
 δψοφάγος 2, dainty. 
 
 Π. 
 
 IIay£c> -?<%, ή, trap, 49. 
 πάγκακος, thoroughly bad. 
 πάθος, -ους, suffering, 53. 
 παιάν, -άνος, δ, war-song. 
 παιδεία, ή, education, 87. 
 παιδεύω, to educate, 16. 
 
 παιδίον,τό, little child, 131. 
 παίζω, to play, 17 [§116, 
 
 3]. 
 παις, -δύς, ό, ή, child, 39. 
 παίω, to strike. 
 πάλαι, formerly, long ago; 
 
 οί πάλαι, the ancients. 
 παλαίω, to wrestle [Pass. 
 
 w. σ, according to § 95]. 
 παλαιός 3, ancient. 
 πάλιν, again, 159. 
 πανταχού, everywhere, in 
 
 all respects. [kind. 
 
 παντοδαπός 3, of every 
 πάντως, wholly, 160. 
 πάνυ, altogether, very. 
 πάππος, δ, grand-father. 
 παραγγέλλω, to order. 
 παραδίδωμι, give over to, 
 
 commit. [edly. 
 
 παραδόξως, oc?y.,unexpect- 
 παραθήκη, ή, something 
 
 entrusted, 122. 
 παραινέω, w. d., to advise, 
 
 to exhort. 
 παρακαλέω, to call to, to 
 
 exhort. [147. 
 
 παρακαταθήκη, ή, pledge, 
 παραλαμβάνω, to receive. 
 παράνομος 2, contrary to 
 
 law. 
 παραπέτομαι, to fly away. 
 παραπλάζω, mislead, 122. 
 παραπλήσιος 3, like. 
 παρασκευάζω, to prepare, 
 
 168. 
 παρασκευαστικός 3,w.gen., 
 
 skilled in preparing. 
 π-αρατείνω, to stretch out. 
 παρατί&ημι, to place be- 
 side, provide. 
 παρατρέχω, to run by or 
 
 past. [past 
 
 παραφέρω, to carry by or 
 πάρειμι, να$.παρεϊναι, to be 
 
 present; πάρεστι(ν), it 
 
 is lawful, in one's power. 
 
320 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 πάρειμι, inf. παριέναι, to πέμπω, to send [§ 102, 5]. πη ; whither'? where? 
 
 go by, near. πένης, -ητος, b, ή, poor. πηγή, η, fountain. 
 
 παρέρχομαι, to go by. πενητεύω, to be poor. πήγννμί, to fix, make firm 
 
 παρέχω, to offer, grant, 27; πεν&έω, to grieve. [§ 140, 8]. 
 
 Mid., 58. πεν&ικώς έχω, w. g., to be πήχνς, -εως, b, cubit, 51. 
 
 παρίημι, to let pass, neg- sad about something. πικρός 3, bitter. 
 
 lect, 168. [158. ΠΕΝΘΩ, see πάσχω. πιέζω, to press. 
 
 παρίστημι, to place beside, πενία, η, poverty. πίμπλημι, to fill [§ 135, 5]. 
 
 παροινέω, to riot [Aug., πενιχρός 3, poor. πίμπρημι,ίο burn [§135,6]. 
 
 § 91, 1]. πένομαι, to be poor. πίνω, to drink [§ 119, 3]. 
 
 παροξύνω, to encourage, πεπαίνω, to make ripe, 130 πιπίσκω, to give to drink 
 
 7ra/5/3?yaia,i7,frankness,163. [§ 111, Rem. 2]. [§ 122, 13]. 
 
 παο, every, all. πεπρωμένη, ή, fate. πιπράσκω,ίο sell [§122,14] 
 
 πάσσω, to scatter [Char., πέπων, -όνος, ripe. πίπτω, to fall [§ 123]. 
 
 § 105, 1]. περαίνω, to complete, 131 πιστεύω, to trust, 25. 
 
 πάσχω, to suffer, 141 [§ 111, Rem. 2]. πίστις, -εως, ή, belief, 133. 
 
 [§ 122, 12]. περαϊος 3, beyond. π^στόο 3, trustworthy, 27. 
 
 πατήρ, -ρός, ό, father. πέρας, -ατός, τό, end, 147. πίων, -όνος, fat. 
 
 πάτριος 2, belonging to περάω, to transport [§ 98, πλάζω, to cause to wan- 
 
 the country. (a)]. cler [Char., § 105, 4]. 
 
 πατρίς, -ίόος, η, native περιάγω, to lead round. πλάσσω, to form [Char., 
 
 country. . περιβάλλω,ίο throw round. §105,1]. 
 
 ΊΙάτροκλος, ό, Patroclus. περίδρομος 2, running πλαστική, ή, sculptuxQ, 160 
 
 πάτρως, -ωος, ό, uncle, 47. round. [cles. Τίλάταια, ή, Plataea. 
 
 παύω, to cause to cease, ΤΙερικλης, -έους, ό, Peri- πλέΰρον, τό, measure of 
 
 124 [Aor. Pass, έπαύ- περιοράω, to overlook, 100 feet. 
 
 σΰ-ην ; Pf. Mid. or Pass. permit, 147. πλείστος 3, most. 
 
 πέπαυμαι, to cease 5 Put. περίπλοος, -ους, b, voyage πλέκω, to knit, weave. 
 
 Perf. πεπαύσομαι, will round. [133. πλεονάκις, oftener. 
 
 cease]. περφβέω, to flow round, πλε ov έκτη ς,- ου, a,Yancious. 
 
 πέδη, η, fetter. περιστέλλω, to clothe, 130. πλεονεξία, η, avarice. 
 
 πεδίον, τό, a plain. περιτ'ν&ημι, to put or set πλευρά, η, side. 
 
 πεί&ω, to persuade, 124 ; round. [121. πλέω, to sail [§116, 3; 
 
 Mid., 22 [ΑθΥ.έπείσ-&ην, περιτρέπω, to turn round, Cont., § 97, 1]. 
 
 I obeyed]. περιττός 3, beyond the πληγή, ή, a blow, wound. 
 
 πει&ώ, -οϋς, ή, persua- visual number, more πλη-&ος, -ους, τό, multi- 
 
 siveness. than sufficient. tude, 72. 
 
 πεινάω, to hunger [Cont., περιφέρω, to carry about, πλην, w. g., except, 145. 
 
 § 97, 3]. [try. ΤΙερσεφόνη, ή, Proserpine, πλήρης, -ες, w. g., full, 
 
 πειράομαι, Dep. Pass., to Τίέρσης, -ου, ό, a Persian. satisfied with. 
 
 πέλαγος, -ους, τό, sea. ΤΙερσικός, Persian. πλησιάζω, to approach. 
 
 ΤΙελοποννησιακός, Pelo- πετάννυμι, to expand πλησίος 3, near, 109. 
 
 ponnesian. [§ 139, (a), 3]. πλήττω, to strike, 131 [Pf. 
 
 Έελοπόννησος, η, Pelo- πέτομαι, to fly [§ 125, 23]. πέπληγα, I have struck; 
 
 ponnesus. πέτρα, ή, rock. Aor. Pass, έπλήγην; 
 
 ΤΙέλοψ, -οπός, 6, Pelops. ΠΕΤΘΟΜΑΙ, see πυν&ά- but in composition, έπ- 
 
 πελταστής, b, shieldsman. νομαι. λάγην,ν.ξ.'εξειχλαγην'Ι. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 321 
 
 πλίνΰος, ή, brick. 
 πλόος = πλους, δ, voyage. 
 πλούσιος 3, rich. 
 πλουτέω, to be or become 
 
 rich. 
 πλουτίζω, to enrich, 64. 
 πλούτος, δ, riches, 39. 
 πλύνω, to wash [§ 111, 6]. 
 πνέω, to breathe, blow 
 
 [§116,3:Cont.,§97,lJ. 
 πό&εν ; whence 1 
 ποΰέω, to desire [§ 98,(b)]. 
 ποιέω, to make, do; εύ 
 
 ποιέω, 107. 
 ποιητής, -ov, δ, poet. 
 ποικίλος 3. variegated, 40. 
 ποιμην, -ενός, δ, shepherd. 
 ποιος ; 3, of what kind ? 
 πολεμέω, w. d., to carry 
 
 on war. 
 πολέμιος 3, hostile, 88. 
 πολεμικός 3, warlike. 
 πό?<.εμος, δ, war. 
 πολιορκέω, to besiege. 
 πολιορκία, η, siege. 
 πόλις, -εως, η, city, 51. 
 πολιτεία, ή, the state, civil 
 
 polity, 90. 
 πολιτεύω, to govern the 
 
 state ; Mid., to live as a 
 
 citizen, to govern the 
 
 state. 
 πολίτης, -ου, δ, citizen. 
 πολιτικός 3, relating to 
 
 the state, 165. 
 πολλάκις, often. 
 πολλαπλάσιος 3, many 
 
 times more, 
 ίτολλοί, many. [lux. 
 
 Πολυδεύκης, -ους, ό, Pol- 
 πολυκοιρανία, η, the rule 
 
 of many. 
 πο?ιυ?.όγος 2, loquacious. 
 πολύπονος 2, laborious, 
 iro/lwc, much, 53 [§ 48]. 
 τολυτέλεία, #, costliness, 
 
 136. 
 
 πο?,υτελής, -ές, costly, 163. 
 
 πολυώιλία, η, multitude 
 of friends. 
 
 πολυχειρία, η, multitude 
 of hands, of workmen. 
 
 7rovea>,totoil,107 [§98,(b)]. 
 
 πονηρός 3, wicked, 48. 
 
 πόνος, ό, toil, 28. [90. 
 
 πορεύω, to lead forward, 
 
 πορΰέω, to destroy. 
 
 ποριστικός 3, w. g., skilled 
 in procuring. 
 
 πορφνρεος (ονς) 3, purple. 
 
 Υίοσείδών, -ώνος, ό, Po- 
 seidon, Neptune. 
 
 πόσις, -εως, ή, drinking, 51. 
 
 πόσος ; 3, how great ? 
 
 ποταμός, ό, river. 
 
 ποτέ, once, 43. 
 
 πότερος, which of two, 1 65. 
 
 ττοτόν, τό, drink. 
 
 πους, ποδός, ό, foot. 
 
 πράγμα, -ατός, τό, an ac- 
 tion, 40. 
 
 πρακτικός 3, capable of ac- 
 complishing, obtaining. 
 
 πράξις, -εως, η, an action. 
 
 πράος 3, mild, 53. 
 
 πράττω, to do, act ; πράτ- 
 τω, πράττομαι τίνα αρ- 
 γύρων, to demand of 
 one ; w. adv., 89. 
 
 πρέπει, it is becoming, 24. 
 
 πρέσβεις, ο'ι, ambassadors. 
 
 πρεσβευτής, -οϋ, 6, ambas- 
 sador, 121. 
 
 πρέσβνς, -εια, -υ, old. 
 
 πρίασΰαι, to buy [§ 135, 
 p. 165]. 
 
 πριν, before; w. inf., 106 ; 
 πρϊν ch>„w. subj., 88. 
 
 πρίω, to saw [Pass, with 
 σ, § 95]. 
 
 προαιρέομαι, to prefer. 
 
 πρόβατον, τό, sheep. 
 
 πρόγονος, ό, ancestor. 
 
 προδίδωμι, to betray. 
 
 προδότης, -οϋ, δ, betrayer. 
 
 προεΐπον (Aor.), to say 
 before, command. 
 
 προέρχομαι, to go before. 
 
 προθυμία, η, willingness. 
 
 πρόΰϋμος 2, willing. 
 
 προ&ύμως, adv., willingly. 
 
 προλείπω, to forsake, 121. 
 
 πρόμαχος, ό, fighting in 
 front, champion. 
 
 προνοέω, to consider be- 
 forehand, 142. 
 
 πρόνοια, ή, foresight, 87. 
 
 πρόοιδα, to know before- 
 hand. 
 
 προςαγορεύω,ϊο call, name. 
 
 προςβάλλω, w. g., to smell 
 of something. 
 
 προςβ?^έπω, to look at. 
 
 προςδοκάω, to expect, 107. 
 
 πρόςεψι, inf. προςεϊναι, to 
 be present, 47. 
 
 πρόςειμι, inf. προςιέναι, to 
 go to, 168. 
 
 προςελαννω, to advance 
 towards. 
 
 προςέρχομαι, to come to. 
 
 προςήκει,ϋ is becoming,24. 
 
 προςηκων, becoming, 138. 
 
 προσημαίνω,ίο reveal, 165. 
 
 πρόσΰεν, before ; w. g. 
 Η 24]. 
 
 προςΰετός 3, artificial, 175. 
 
 προςκυνέω, w. a., to wor- 
 ship, honor. 
 
 πρόςοδος, η, approach, 54. 
 
 προςπίπτω, to fall upon, 
 occur, 87. 
 
 προςπνέω,ίο breathe upon. 
 
 προςποιέω, to add to, 109. 
 
 προςτί-θ-ημι, to add. 
 
 προςώέρω, to bring to, 30. 
 
 πρότερος 3, before, sooner. 
 
 προτίϋ-ημι, to put before, 
 159. 
 
 προτρέπω, to turn to, 41. 
 
 προφητεύω to prophesy. 
 
322 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 πρυτανεϊον, τό, court of 
 justice at Athens. 
 
 πρώϊος 3, early. 
 
 πρώτος 3, first. 
 
 πταίρω, to sneeze. 
 
 πταίω, to strike against 
 [Pass with σ, § 95]. 
 
 πτερόν, τό, wing. 
 
 πτέρνξ, -γος, ή, wing. 
 
 πτίσσω, to pound [Char., 
 § 105, 1]. 
 
 πτω^όο, very poor, 56. 
 
 ΤΙν&αγόρας, -ου, 6, Pytha- 
 goras, [pact. 
 
 πυκνός 3, numerous, com- 
 
 πύλη, ή, gate. 
 
 πυν&άνομα/,, to inquire 
 [§ 121, 15]. 
 
 πίρ, πυρός, τό, fire. 
 
 πύργος, ό, tower. 
 
 πυρόω, to burn. 
 
 πώ (enclitic), yet. 
 
 πωλέω, to sell. 
 
 πώποτε, ever. 
 
 πώο; how? 
 
 P. 
 
 Ύάδιος 3, easy. 
 βαδίως, adv., easily. 
 βεϋμα, -ατός, τό, stream. 
 βέω, to flow [§ 116, 3]. 
 'ΡΕΩ, see φημί. 
 ρήγνυμι, to tear, break 
 
 Κ 140, 9]. 
 βήμα, -ατός, τό, word. 
 βήτωρ, -ορός, ό, orator. 
 βϊγος, -ους, τό, cold. 
 ριγόω, to be cold [Cont, 
 
 § 97, 3, (b)]. 
 ριπτεω, to throw. 
 ρίπτω, to throw. 
 /5ΐο, βινός, ή, nose, 
 /^ίψ, ρΊπός, ή, reed. 
 ροδοδάκτυλος 2, rosy-fin- 
 
 ρόδον, τό, rose. 
 0οίά, 7, pomegranate. 
 
 βόπα?ιον, τό, a club. 
 ρυϋ-μός, ό, rhythm. 
 ρυστάζω, to drag [Char., 
 
 § 105, 2]. 
 βώννυμι, to strengthen 
 
 L) 139, (c), 2]. 
 
 Σ. 
 
 Σαλαμίς, -ϊνος, η, Salamis. 
 
 σάλπιγξ,-ιγγος,ή ,trumpet. 
 
 σαλπίζω, to blow a trum- 
 pet [Char., § 105, 4]. 
 
 σαλπικτής, -οϋ, 6, trum- 
 peter. 
 
 Σάμως, ό, Samian. 
 
 Σαρδανάπάλος, ό, Sarda- 
 napalus. 
 
 Σάρδεις, -εων, αϊ, Sardis. 
 
 Σάρος, ό, the Sarus. 
 
 σαρξ, σαρκός, ή, flesh. 
 
 σάττω, to load. 
 
 σαφής, -ες, clear. 
 
 σαφώς, clearly. 
 
 σβέννυμι, to quench, 163 
 [§ 139, (b), 4; second 
 Aor., § 142]. 
 
 σέβας, τό, respect. 47. 
 
 σέβομαι, to honor, 31. 
 
 σεισμός, ό, earthquake. 
 
 σείω, to shake [Pass, with 
 σ, § 95]. 
 
 σέλας, -αος, τό, splendor. 
 
 σήμα, τό, sign, monument. 
 
 σημαίνω, to give a sign. 
 
 σημεϊον, τό, sign. 
 
 σιγάω, to be silent. 
 
 σιγή, ή, silence. 
 
 σίδηρος, b, iron. 
 
 σίναπι, -εος, τό, mustard. 
 
 σΐτος, 6, corn. 
 
 σιωπάω, to be silent. 
 
 σιωπή, ή, silence. 
 
 σιωπηλός 3, silent. 
 
 σκάφος, -ους, τό, trench. 
 
 σκεδάζω, to scatter, 124. 
 
 σκεδάνννμι, to scatter 
 Γ§ 139, (a), 4]. 
 
 σκέλλω,ίο dry up [§142,3] 
 
 σκήπτρον, τό, sceptre. 
 
 σκιά, ή, shadow. 
 
 σκληρός 3, dry, 121. 
 
 σκόλιος 3, crooked, 23. 
 
 σκοπέω, -έομαι, to behold, 
 consider. 
 
 σκότος, ό and τό, darkness. 
 
 σκώπτω, to joke, 59. 
 
 σμάω, to smear [Cont., 
 § 97, 3 ; Aor. Pass, έσ- 
 μήχΰην]. 
 
 σοφία, ή, wisdom. [46. 
 
 σοφιστής, -οϋ, ό, sophist, 
 
 Σοφοκλής, -έους, ό, Soph- 
 ocles. 
 
 σοφός 3, wise. 
 
 σπανίζω, w. g., to be in 
 want. 
 
 σπάνις, -εως, ή, need, 51. 
 
 σπανίως, adv., rarely, 160. 
 
 Σπάρτη, ή, Sparta. 
 
 Σπαρτιάτης, -ου, ό, Spar- 
 tan. 
 
 Σπαρτιατικός, Spartan. 
 
 σπάω, ίο draw [§ 98, (a)]. 
 
 σπείρω, to sow [Pf. έσπο- 
 pa ; Aor.Pass.ea7rap77v]. 
 
 σπένδω, to pour libations 
 Mid., to make a treaty. 
 
 σπεύδω, to hasten, 17. 
 
 σπουδάζω, to hasten, be 
 zealous, 131. 
 
 σπουδαίος 3, zealous, 34. 
 
 σπουδαίως, adv., zealously, 
 63. 
 
 σπονδή, η, zeal. 
 
 σταγών, -όνος, ή, drop, 52. 
 
 στάδιον, τό, stadium, 131. 
 
 σταθμός, 6, a station, 72. 
 
 στάζω, σταλάζω, to trickle 
 [Char., § 105, 2]. 
 
 στασιάζω, to revolt, be at 
 variance, 87. 
 
 στάσις, -εως, ή, faction, 51. 
 
 στάχυς, -νος, ό, ear of corn. 
 
 στέγη, ή, roof, house. 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 S23 
 
 στέλλω, to .send [second 
 Aor.Pass., § 102, 2, and 
 $ 114]. 
 
 στενάζω, to cigh [Char., 
 § 105, 2]. 
 
 στέργω, w. a., to love ; w. 
 d., to be contented with. 
 
 στερέω τινά τι, to deprive 
 one of something [§ 122, 
 16]. [of. 
 
 στέρομαι, to be deprived 
 
 στερίσκω, to deprive of 
 [§ 122, 15]. 
 
 στέφανος, ό, crown. 
 
 στήλη, ή, pillar. 
 
 στηρίζω, to make firm 
 [Char., § 105, 2]. 
 
 στίζω, to prick [Char., 
 § 105, 2]. 
 
 στολή, η, robe. 
 
 στόμα, -ατός, τό, mouth. 
 
 στορένννμι, στόρννμι, to 
 spread out [§ 139, (b), 5]. 
 
 στράτευμα, -ατός, τό, ar- 
 my, 72. 
 
 στρατεύω, to make an ex- 
 pedition, 89. 
 
 στρατηγός, ό, a general. 
 
 στρατιά, ή, army. 
 
 στρατιώτης, -ου, ό, soldier. 
 
 στρατοπεδεύομαι, to en- 
 camp. 
 
 στρατόπεδον, τό, encamp- 
 ment, encamped army. 
 
 στρατός, ό, army. 
 
 στρεβλόω, to torture. 
 
 στρέφω, to turn [Aor.Pass. 
 έστράφην, έστρέφ&ην ; 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass., 
 § 102, 6]. 
 
 στρωννυμι, to spread out 
 \S 139, (c), 31. 
 
 στυγέω, to hate. 
 
 Σνβαρΐτης, -ου, ό, Syba- 
 rite. 
 
 σι γγιγνώσκω, to think 
 with, agree with ; έμαυ- 
 
 τώ, to be conscious ; σ. 
 τινί, to pardon. 
 
 συγγνώμων, -ov, w. g., par- 
 doning; (2) agreeing 
 with. 
 
 συγγράφω, to describe, 72. 
 
 συγκυκάω,ίο confound,106 
 
 συγχαίρω, to rejoice with. 
 
 συγχέω, to pour together, 
 133. 
 
 συκη, η, fig-tree. 
 
 σϋκον, τό, fig. 
 
 συλάω τινά τι, to deprive 
 one of something. 
 
 συλλαμβάνω, to take with, 
 seize, 107. 
 
 Σύλλας, -ου, ό, Sylla. 
 
 συλλέγω, to collect. 
 
 σύλλογος, ό, assembly. 
 
 συμβαίνω, to go wiih, 136. 
 
 συμβον?>,ενω, to advise. 
 
 σύμβουλος, ό, adviser. 
 
 συμμαχία, ή, alliance, aid. 
 
 σύμμαχος, ό, ally, 106. 
 
 σύμτνας, all together, 72. 
 
 συμπηγνυμι, to join to- 
 gether, 172. 
 
 συμττίνω, to drink with. 
 
 σνμπίΰτω,ίο fall with, 142. 
 
 συμπονέω, to work with, 
 107. [142. 
 
 συμφέρω, to carry with, 
 
 συμφορά, ή, an event, 138. 
 
 συναγωνίζομαι, to contend 
 with. 
 
 συναίρομαι, w. g., to take 
 part in. 
 
 συναττόλλυμι, to destroy 
 together, 163. [124. 
 
 συναρμόζω, to fit together, 
 
 σύνδειπνος, ό, table-com- 
 panion. 
 
 σύνδεσμος, ό, band; con- 
 junction. [142. 
 
 συνδιατρίβω, to live with, 
 
 σύνειμι, inf. συνεϊναι, to 
 be with. 
 
 σύνειμι, inf. συνιέναι, w. 
 d., to come cr assemble 
 with. [qual. 
 
 συνεξομοιόω, to make e- 
 
 συνεπιδίδωμι, to give up, 
 162. 
 
 συνεργός, ό, helper. 
 
 σύνεσις, -εως, ή, under- 
 standing. 
 
 συνετός 3, sensible, 72. 
 
 aw77i9-«a,^,intercourse,22. 
 
 σνν&άπτω, to bury with. 
 
 συν&ηκη, η, treaty. 
 
 συνίστημι, to put together. 
 
 σνννέω, to spin with, 162. 
 
 σύνοιδα, to know with; 
 έμαυτώ, to be conscious. 
 
 συντάττω, to arrange, 122. 
 
 συντρέχω, to run with one. 
 
 συντυγχάνω, to meet with, 
 happen. 
 
 σΰριγξ, -ιγγος, η, flute. 
 
 συρίζω (συρίττω), to whis- 
 tle [Char., § 105, 2]. 
 
 Σύρος, ό, a Syrian. 
 
 σύρω, to draw. 
 
 συς, συός, ό, ή, boar, sow. 
 
 συσκηνέω, to tent with, 
 eat with. 
 
 σφάζω, σφάττω, to kill 
 [Char., § 105, 2]. 
 
 σφαίρα, η, ball. 
 
 σφάλ?Μ, to deceive, 113. 
 
 σφόδρα, very, 147. 
 
 σφοδρός 3, violent. 
 
 σφύζω, to throb [Char., 
 $ 105, 2]. 
 
 σφύρα, ή, hammer. 
 
 σχάω, to loose [§ 98, (a)]. 
 
 σχολαϊος 3, lazy. 
 
 σώζω, to save, 52 [Per£ 
 Mid. or Pass, σέσωσμαι; 
 Aor. Pass, έσώ&ην]. 
 
 Σωκράτης, -ους, ό, So- 
 crates. 
 
 σώμα, -ατός, τό, the body 
 
 σωτηρ, -ηρος, ό, preserver. 
 
324 
 
 GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 σωτηρία, ή, preservation. 
 σωφρονέω, to be of sound 
 
 mind, 165. 
 σωφροσύνη, ή, modesty, 59. 
 σώφρων, wise, 36. 
 
 Τ. 
 
 Ύάλαντον, τό, talent (a 
 
 weight). 
 τάλαρος, δ, little basket 
 τάλας,-αινα, -αν, wretched. 
 Τάνταλος, ό, Tantalus. 
 τάξις, -εως, ή, order, 121. 
 ταπεινός 3, low, humble. 
 ταπεινόω, to humble. 
 ταράττω, to throw into 
 
 confusion, 122. 
 ταραχή, η, confusion, 122. 
 τάττω, to arrange, 122. 
 ταύρος, δ, bull. [40. 
 
 ταυτολογία, η, tautology, 
 τάφρος, ή, grave. 
 τάχα, quickly, 131. 
 ταχέως, quickly. 
 τάχος, -ους, τό, quickness. 
 ταώς, ταώ, ό, peacock. 
 τέ — καί, both — and, 44. 
 Ύεγέα, η, Tegea. 
 τείνω, to stretch [Pf. τέ- 
 
 τάκα ; Pf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 § 113]. 
 τείρω, to wear out, tire, 22. 
 τείχος, -ους, τό, wall. 
 τεκμαίρω, to limit. 
 τέκνον, τό, child. 
 τελευταίος 3, last. 
 τελευτάω, to end, die. 
 τελευτή, ή, end, death. 
 τελέω, to accomplish, 107 
 
 [§ 98, (b)]. ^ 
 τέλος, -ους, τό, end, 131. 
 τέμνω, to cut, divide, 130 
 
 Β Π9]. 
 
 τέρας, -ατός, τό, wonder. 
 τέρπω, to delight, 34. 
 τετραίνω, to bore [§111, 
 Rem. 2], 
 
 τέττιξ, -ϊγος, ό, grasshop- 
 per. 
 
 τεχνάομαι, Dep. Mid., to 
 contrive. 
 
 τέχνη, ή, art. 
 
 τεχνίτης, -ου, δ, artist. 
 
 τήκω, to melt, 133. 
 
 T^e^a^oc^Telemachus. 
 
 τηλικοϋτος, so large, 67. 
 
 τηλοϋ, far. 
 
 τιάρα, η, turban. 
 
 τίϋ-ημι, to place, 159; νό- 
 μους τίϋ-εσϋ-αι, to make 
 laws [§ 133]. 
 
 τιΰ-ήνη, ή, nurse. 
 
 τίκτω, to beget [Fut. τέ- 
 ξομαι ; Aor. έτεκον ; • 
 Perf. τέτοκα], 
 
 τιμάω, to honor. 
 
 τιμή, ή, honor. 
 
 τίμιος 3, honored, 56. 
 
 τιμώ ρέω, to help, 168. 
 
 τιμωρία, ή, punishment. 
 
 τίνω, to expiate, pay 
 [§119,4]. 
 
 τιτρώσκω, to wound [§122, 
 16]. 
 
 τλήναι, to bear [§ 135, 7]. 
 
 τοί, indeed, 136. 
 
 τοίνυν, hence, therefore. 
 
 τοϊος 3, of such a nature. 
 
 τοιούτος 3, such [§ 60]. 
 
 τολμάω, to dare, 106. 
 
 τόξενμα, -ατός, τό, arrow. 
 
 τοξική, ή, archery. 
 
 τόξον, τό, bow. 
 
 τόπος, δ, place. 
 
 τοσούτος 3, so great [§ 60]. 
 
 τότε, then. 
 
 τραγικός 3, tragic. 
 
 τράγος, δ, goat. 
 
 τραγωδία, ή, tragedy. 
 
 τράπεζα, ή, table. 
 
 τρέπω, to turn; Mid., to 
 turn myself; (2) for 
 myself, 4 i. e. to put to 
 flight [Aor. έτρεψα ; 
 
 Mid. -άμην ; Pass, έτρέ- 
 φϋ-ην ; έτραπον, -όμην, 
 ετράπην ; Pf. Act. τέ- 
 τροφα ; Pf. Mid. or Pass. 
 τέτραμμαι, § 102, 5, 6]. 
 
 τρέφω, to nourish, 25 [Fut. 
 ■&ρέψω ; Aor. έ&ρεψα ; 
 Pf. τέτροφα, § 105, 2 ; 
 Pf. Mid. or Pass, τέτ- 
 ραμμαι, ibid., 6; Aor. 
 Pass, ετράφην (seldom 
 ετρέφϋ-ην)']. 
 
 τρέχω, to run [§ 126, 5]. 
 
 τρέω, to tremble [§98,(b)]. 
 
 τρίβω, to rub. 
 
 τριήρης, -ήρους, ή, trireme. 
 
 τρίζω, to chirp [Char., 
 § 105, 2]. 
 
 τρίπους, -οδός, tripod, 145. 
 
 Ύροιζήν, -ηνος, ή, Troe- 
 zene. 
 
 τρόπαιον, τό, trophy. 
 
 τρόπος, δ, way, manner,67. 
 
 τρυφή, ή, luxury, 22. 
 
 τρυφητής, -ού, δ, luxu- 
 rious, 24. 
 
 τρώγω, to gnaw [Fut. τρώ- 
 ξομαι ; Aor. ετραγον']. 
 
 τυγχάνω, to obtain [§121, 
 16]. 
 
 τύμβος, δ, tomb. 
 
 τύπτω, to strike. 
 
 τυραννίς, -ίδος, ή, tyranny. 
 
 τύραννος, δ, tyrant, 91. 
 
 τύρβη, ή, crowd, bustle. 
 
 τυφλόω, to make blind. 
 
 τνχη, ή, fortune, 23. 
 
 Ύάκινθ-ος, ό, hyacinth. 
 
 ύβρίζειν, w. a.,to be haugh- 
 ty towards one, to mal- 
 treat. [51 . 
 
 ύβρις, -εως, ή, insolence, 
 
 υβριστής, -ού, δ, insolent 
 man. [health. 
 
 υγιαίνω, to be in good 
 
GREEK AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 325 
 
 ύδωρ, τό, wnter [§ 47]. 
 
 ύει, it rains. 
 
 ν'ιός, δ, son- 
 
 ύπακούειν, w. d., to obey. 
 
 υπάρχω, to be at hand, to 
 be, 41. 
 
 υπεξ'ιστημι, to remove ; 
 Mid., to go or come 
 out from. 
 
 ύπεραπο&νήσκω, w. gen., 
 to die for one. 
 
 ύπεράχΰ-ομαι, to be much 
 grieved. 
 
 υπερβάλλω, to throw be- 
 yond, exceed. 
 
 ύπερβασία, ή, trespass. 
 
 t>7rep7?0ai>oc2,haughty,l 10. 
 
 ύπεροράω, to look over, 
 to despise. 
 
 ϋπέρφρων, haughty, 36. 
 
 ύπηρετέω, w. d., to aid, 
 serve. 
 
 ύπισχνέομαι, to promise 
 Κ 120, 3]. 
 
 ύπνος, δ, sleep. [ing. 
 
 υπογραφή, ή, paint, paint- 
 
 ΰπόδημα, -ατός, τό, san- 
 dal, 108. 
 
 ύπό&εσις, -εως, ή, hypo- 
 thesis. 
 
 υπομένω, w. a., to await, 
 endure. 
 
 υποφέρω, to endure. 
 
 ύποχωρέω, to go back. 
 
 ύστεραϊος 3, following. 
 
 ύστερος 3, later, following. 
 
 υφαίνω, to weave [Perf. 
 ύφαγκα ; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass, ύφασμαι]. 
 
 ύψος, -ους, τό, height, 48. 
 
 υψόω, to elevate. 
 
 ΦΑΓΩ, see έσ&ίω. 
 φαίνω, to show, 121. 
 φανερός, evident, 168. 
 φάρμακον, τό, remedy. 
 
 φάσκω,Χο assert [§ 122, 17]. 
 
 φαύλος, bad, evil. 
 
 φείδομαι, Dep. Mid., w. g., 
 to spare. 
 
 φέναξ, -ύκος, δ, impostor. 
 
 Φερεκύδης, -ους, δ, Phe- 
 recydes. 
 
 φέρω, to bear, 23 [§ 126, 6]. 
 
 φεύγω, to nee, 17 [§ 116,3], 
 
 φημί, to say [§ 126, 7 ; in- 
 flection, § 135, 8]. 
 
 φθάνω, to anticipate, 136 
 [$119,5]. 
 
 φθείρω, to destroy [§ 111, 
 Pf. Act. έφθορα; Pf. 
 Mid. or Pass, έφθαρ- 
 μαι ; Fut. Pass, φθαρή- 
 σομαι and second Aor. 
 Pass, έφθάρην, in the 
 sense of to perish]. 
 
 φθόνος, δ, envy. 
 
 φιάλη, ή, drinking-cup. 
 
 φιλάνθρωπος 2, philan- 
 thropic, 43. 
 
 φιλέω, to love. 
 
 φιλία, ή, friendship. 
 
 φίλιος 3, friendly. 
 
 φιλοκερδής, -ές, fond of 
 gain. 
 
 φιλομαθής, -ές, fond of 
 learning. 
 
 φιλόξενος 2, hospitable. 
 
 φιλοσοφέω,ίο philosophize. 
 
 φίλος, δ, a friend, dear. 
 
 φιλοχρημοσύνη, ή, avarice. 
 
 φλύζω, to bubble [Char., 
 $ 105, 2]. 
 
 φοβέω, to frighten, 109. 
 
 φόβος, δ, fear. 
 
 φοινίκεος (οϋς) 3, purple. 
 
 φοιτάω, to go to and fro. 
 
 φονεύς, -έως, δ, murderer. 
 
 φονεύω, to murder. 
 
 φόνος, δ, murder. 
 
 φορβή, ή, pasture, food. 
 
 φορέω, to carry. 
 
 φόρμιγξ, -ιγγος, ή, harp. 
 
 28 
 
 φράζω, to say, tell, 124. 
 φρήν, -ενός, ή, mind, 36. 
 φρονέω, to think, 107. 
 φροντίζω, to care for, 27. 
 φροντίς, -ίδος, ή, concern, 
 
 39. 
 Φρυγία, ή, Phrygia. 
 Φρύξ, -ύγος, δ, a Phrygian. 
 φυλακή, ή, guard, watch. 
 φνλαξ, -κος, δ, a guard, 51. 
 φυλάττω, to guard, 36; 
 
 Mid., w. a., to guard 
 
 against something, 122. 
 φύσημα, -ατός, τό, breath. 
 φύσις, -εως, ή, nature. 
 φυτεύω, to plant. 
 Φύω, to bring forth, 88 
 
 [§ 142, 10]. 
 φωνέω, to produce a sound, 
 
 speak. 
 φωνή, ή, voice. 
 φώρ, φωρός, δ, thief. 
 φως, φωτός, τό, light. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 Χαίνω, to yawn, 130. 
 
 χαίρω, to rejoice, 17 [§ 125, 
 24]. 
 
 χαλάω, to loosen [§ 98, 
 (a)]. [22. 
 
 χαλεπός 3, troublesome, 
 
 χαλεπώς, adv., with diffi- 
 culty. 
 
 χαλινός, δ, bridle. 
 
 χαλκός, δ, brass. 
 
 χάλκεος 3, brazen. 
 
 χαρίεις, graceful. 
 
 χαριέντως, gracefully. 
 
 χαρίζομαι, to gratify, 37. 
 
 χάρις, -ιτος, ή, favor, 39. 
 
 χάσκω, to yawn [§ 122, 18]. 
 
 χειμων, -ώνος, δ, winter. 
 
 χειρ, -ρός, ή, hand [§ 35, 
 Rem. 2]. 
 
 χειρόομαι, to subdue, 110. 
 
 χελιδών, -όνος, ή, swallow. 
 
 χέω, to pour [§ 116, 3]. 
 
326 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 χηρόω, to deprive of, 113. 
 
 χ&ές, yesterday. 
 
 χ&ών, -όνος, η, the earth, 
 
 133. 
 χιτών, -ώνος, δ, coat. 
 χιών, -όνος, η, snow. 
 χοεύς, χοώς, ό, measure,44. 
 χοίρειος 3, of swine. 
 χολόομαι, to be angry at. 
 χόλος, ό, anger, 172. 
 χορεύω, to dance. 
 χορός, ό, dance. 
 χόω, to heap up [Pass. 
 
 with σ, § 95]. 
 χραομαι, to use [§96, Rem.; 
 
 Cont., § 97, 3, (a)]. 
 χράω, to give an oracle 
 
 [§96, Rem.; Cont., §97, 
 
 3, (a)]. 
 χρεία, ή, need, 22. [2]. 
 χρη, it is necessary [§ 135, 
 χρήζω, w. g., to be in want. 
 χρήμα, -ατός, τό, a thing, 
 
 property, 41. 
 χρήσιμος, useful, 56. 
 χρησμοσύνη, poverty, 39- 
 χρηστός 3, useful, 41. 
 
 χρίω, to anoint [Pass. 
 
 with σ, § 94, 1]. 
 χρόνος, 6, time. 
 χρυσίον, τό, gold. 
 χρυσός, ό, gold. 
 χρνσεος (οΰς), -εα (η), -εον 
 
 (ονν), golden. 
 χρώμα, -ατός, τό, skin. 
 χρώνννμι, to color [§ 139, 
 
 (c)l. f 
 χώρα, η, country, region. 
 χωρίς, w. g., separately, 
 
 apart from. 
 χωοισμός, ό, separation. 
 
 •ψαύω, w.g., to touch [Pass. 
 
 with σ, § 95]. 
 -φάω, to rub [Pass, with a ; 
 
 Cont, § 97, 3, (a)]. 
 ψέγω, to blame. 
 ■ψευδής, -ες, false. 
 -ψεύδορκος 2, perjured ; τό 
 
 ψεύδορκον, perjury. 
 ψευδός, -ους, τό, a lie. 
 ψεύδω, to deceive, 47; 
 
 Mid., 89. 
 
 "ψεύστης, -ov, δ, liar. 
 -ψήν, -ψηνός, ό, wasp. 
 -ψήφισμα, -ατός, τό, de- 
 cree, 160. 
 ψνχν, V> the soul. 
 'ψύχος, -ους, τό, cold. 
 
 Ώιδή (φδή), η, song. 
 
 ώϋ-έω, to push [§ 124, 6]. 
 
 ώκύς, -εϊα, -υ, quick. 
 
 ώμος, δ, shoulder. 
 
 ώνέομαι, to buy [Aug., §87, 
 4. Comp. πρίασ&αι]. 
 
 ώνιος 3, for sale ; τά ώνια, 
 wares. 
 
 ώς, as, when, how, because; 
 ώς τάχιστα, as soon as 
 possible; with indefi- 
 nite numbers; — that; 
 in order that [§ 181]. 
 
 ώςπερ, as, just as. 
 
 ώςτε, so that. 
 
 ωφέλεια, η, advantage. 
 
 ώφελέω, w. a., to benefit. 
 
 ωφέλιμος 2, useful. 
 
 ώψ, ώπός, η, eye, counte- 
 nance. 
 
 II. ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 The numerals after a Greek word, denote the page where the meaning of the 
 word is more fully given, or where another word of the same signification may 
 be found. For the proper use of the prepositions, the student will depend prin- 
 cipally upon the definitions given in §§ 163 — 167. 
 
 able, to be, δύναμαι, ίσχϋω, abroad, to travel, άποδη- 
 
 Abandon, εκλείπω, προ- οϊός τε ειμί, έχω. 
 
 λείπω, καταλείπω, έπι- abolish, λύω. 
 
 λείπω, άφιημι. abounding in, εύπορος 2. 
 
 ability, δύναμις, -εως, ή. about, περί, αμφί. 
 
 abide by, παραμένω, έμ- Abradatas, Άβραδάτας, 
 
 μένω. -ου, δ. 
 
 μεω. 
 absence, in the, απών. 
 absent, απών. 
 absent, to be, απειμι. 
 abstain from, άπέχομαι. 
 abundance, άφ&ονία, #, 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 327 
 
 accompany, έπομαι. 
 
 accomplish, έξερ^άζομαι, 
 τελέω, διατ., περαίνω, 
 άνύω ; to accomplish, as 
 a journey, καταννω ; = 
 to effect, διαπράττομαι. 
 
 according to, in accord- 
 ance with, κατά. 
 
 account of, on, διά, επί, 
 ένεκα, υπέρ. 
 
 account, on this, διά τοϋτο. 
 
 accuse of, γράφομαι, κατη- 
 γορία, διώκω. 
 
 accuser, κατήγορος, ό. 
 
 accustom, εθίζω. 
 
 Acheron, Άχέρων, -οντος, 
 ό. 
 
 Acherusian, Άχερούσιος. 
 
 achieve, έξεργάζομαι, δια- 
 πράττομαι. 
 
 Achilles. Άχιλλεύς, -έως, ό. 
 
 acquainted with, to be, 
 οίδα, επίσταμαι. 
 
 acquire, κτάομαι, προς- 
 ποιέω, 7>αγχάνω. 
 
 acquisition, κτήσις, -εως, η. 
 
 acquit, άπολύειν. 
 
 Acropolis, 'Ακρόπολις, 
 -εως, ή. 
 
 across, passage, πάροδος, 
 V- 
 
 act, an, πράξις, -εως, ή, 
 πράγμα, τό ; = work, 
 έργον, τό. 
 
 act, to, πράττω, δράω. 
 
 action, see act. 
 
 add, προςποιέω, προςτί- 
 ■&ημι, έπιτίΰημι. 
 
 administer, διοικέω, πολι- 
 τευω ; to be an admin- 
 istrator, οίκέω ; to ad- 
 minister the govern- 
 mentj&oi/cecj την πόλιν. 
 
 administration, good, ευ- 
 νομία, ή. 
 
 admire, θαυμάζω, άγαμαι, 
 108. 
 
 adorn, κοσμέω, άγάλλω, 
 άσκέω. 
 
 adorn with (invest), άμ- 
 φιένννμί τινά τι. 
 
 Adranum, Άδρανον, τό. 
 
 adult, τέλειος 3. 
 
 advance, προβαίνω, ορμάω. 
 
 advantage, ωφέλεια, η, όν- 
 ησις, -εως, η. 
 
 , an, αγαθόν, τό ; ad- 
 vantages, τά άγα&ά. 
 
 , for the, of, προς. 
 
 advantageous, χρήσιμος 3, 
 χρηστός 3, ωφέλιμος. 
 
 advice, βουλή, ή, βούλευ- 
 μα, τό. 
 
 advise, βουλεύω, συμβου- 
 λεύω τινί. 
 
 adviser, σύμβου?ιος, ό. 
 
 Aeolus, Αίολος, ό. 
 
 Aeschines,Aia£iv?7C, -ου, ό. 
 
 Aetna, Α'ιτνη, ή. 
 
 Aeson. Αίσων, -όνος, ό. 
 
 Aethiopian, an, Αίθίοψ, 
 -ίοπος, ό. 
 
 affair, πράγμα, τό ; = oc- 
 cupation, πράξις, ή. 
 
 affirm, φημί. 
 
 affliction, πάθος, -ους, τό. 
 
 afford, παρέχω, παρέχομαι. 
 
 afraid, to be, φοβέομαι. 
 
 after, μετά. 
 
 afterwards, έπειτα, μετέ- 
 πειτα. 
 
 again, αύθις, πάλιν. 
 
 against, αντί, προς, επί. 
 
 Agamemnon,' Αγαμέμνων, 
 -όνος, ό. 
 
 age, ηλικία, η, 106. 
 
 , old, γήρας, -αος, τό. 
 
 Agesilaus, 'Αγησίλαος, 
 -άου, ό. 
 
 agreeable, ηδύς, -εΐα, -υ. 
 
 agriculture, γεωργία, ή. 
 
 aid,to render, βοηθέω, w. d. 
 
 Ajax, Αίας, -αντος, ό. 
 
 alarm, to, καταπλήττω. 
 
 Alcestis, Άλκηστις, -ιος 
 
 and -ϊδος, ή. 
 Alcibiades, Αλκιβιάδης, 
 
 -ου, ό. 
 Alexander, 'Αλέξανδρος, ό. 
 alike, ομοίως. 
 all, πάς, άπας. 
 alleviate, έπικουφίζω ; to 
 
 alleviate, as grief, θερα- 
 πεύω. 
 alliance, συμμαχία, ή. 
 allow, έάω. 
 
 allowable, to be, έξεστι. 
 ally, an, σύμμαχος, ό. 
 almost, σχεδόν, ολίγον 
 
 δεϊν. 
 alone, μόνος ; adv., μόνον 
 already, ήδη. 
 also, και. 
 altar, βωμός, ό. 
 alternately, εν μέρει. 
 although, καν or καΐ έαν, 
 
 καιπέρ. 
 always, αεί. 
 am (to be), ειμί, γίγνομαι, 
 
 υπάρχω, έχω w. adv. 
 Amazon, Άμαζών, -όνος, 
 
 ή. [-οϋ, ό. 
 
 ambassador, πρεσβευτής, 
 ambassadors, πρέσβεις, οί. 
 amid, εν. 
 among, εν, παρά. 
 amputate, αποτέμνω. 
 Anaxagoras, 'Αναξαγόρας^ 
 
 -ου, ό. [οί. 
 
 ancestors, προγεγενημένοι, 
 ancient, παλαίος 3. 
 and, και. 
 
 anger, οργή, ή, χόλος, δ. 
 angry, to be, οργίζομαι, 
 
 εν οργή έχω. 
 angry with, to be, άχθο- 
 
 μαι, 88. [τό. 
 
 animal, ζώον, τό, θηρίον, 
 announce, άγ}ΐλλω, 88. 
 annually, κατ' ένιαυτόν. 
 anoint, αλείφω, χρίω. 
 
328 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 another, άλλος. 
 
 ant, μύρμηξ, -ηκος, b. 
 
 Antisthenes, ' Αντισθένης, 
 -ους, b. 
 
 any one, τϊς. 
 
 any thing, τι. 
 
 any where, πού ; in a sen- 
 tence with a negative, 
 ούδαμοϋ. 
 
 anxiety, see care. 
 
 Apollo,' Απόλλων, -ωνος, b. 
 
 appear, φαίνομαι, 138. 
 
 appetite, y αστήρ, -έρος, η. 
 
 appoint, άποδείκνυμι ; = 
 appoint something to 
 one, ορίζω, 124. 
 
 Apollodorus, 'Απολλόδω- 
 ρος, b. 
 
 apprehend, συλλαμβάνω. 
 
 approach, to, πλησιάζω, 
 πρόςειμι. 
 
 approbation, δοκιμασία, ή. 
 
 approve of, έπαινέω, 89. 
 
 Arabia, 'Αραβία, ή. 
 
 Arabians, Άραβες, οί. 
 
 Araspas, Άράσπας, -ου, b. 
 
 Arcadian, 'Αρκάς, -άδος, b. 
 
 Archestratus, Άρχέστρα- 
 τος, ο. 
 
 archer, τοξότης, -ου, ό. 
 
 archery, τοξική, η. 
 
 ardor, σπουδή, η, θυμός, ό. 
 
 argument, λόγος, ό. 
 
 Ariaeus, Άριαϊος, ο. 
 
 arise (= to be), γίγνομαι. 
 
 Aris tides, 'Αριστείδης, -ου, 
 ό. 
 
 Aristippus, 'Αρίστιππος, b. 
 
 Aristogiton, 'Αριστογεί- 
 των, -όνος, b. 
 
 Aristotle, 'Αριστοτέλης, 
 -ους, b. 
 
 armament, στόλος, b. 
 
 arms (weapons), όπλα, τά. 
 
 army, στρατιά, η, στρα- 
 τός, ο. 
 
 around, περί, άμφί. 
 
 arrange, διατάττω, συν- 
 τάττω, 124, 159. 
 
 arrogant, υβριστής, -οϋ, 
 νπέρφρων. 
 
 arrow, τόξευμα, τό. 
 
 Arsamus, Άρσαμος, ο. 
 
 art, τέχνη, η. 
 
 Artaxerxes, 'Αρταξέρξης, 
 -ου, ό. 
 
 Artemis, Άρτεμις, -ϊδος, η. 
 
 artificer, έργάστης, -ου, ο, 
 εργάτης, -ου, ό. 
 
 artist, τεχνίτης, -ου, ό. 
 
 as, ώς, ώςπερ. 
 
 as long as, 'έως. 
 
 as much, τοσούτος. 
 
 as soon as, ώς τάχιστα. 
 
 as well as, και — και. 
 
 ascend the throne,e/c βασι- 
 λείου καταστήναι. 
 
 ascertain, πυν&άνομαι. 
 
 ashamed, to be, αΐδέομαι, 
 α'ισχυνομαι. 
 
 Asia, 'Ασία, η. 
 
 ask, ερωτάω, α'ιτέω, 88. 
 
 aspire after, όρέγομαι,ντ^., 
 διώκειν, w. a. 
 
 assert, φημί. 
 
 assist, παραστηναι, συμ- 
 πονέω, 175 ; = to de- 
 fend, άμύνω. 
 
 assign to, δίδωμι. 
 
 associate with, bμιλέω, 
 σύνειμι. 
 
 assured, to be (think), νο- 
 μίζω, ηγέομαι. 
 
 Assyria, Άσσυρία, η. 
 
 Assyrian, Άσσύριος, b. 
 
 astonish, καταπληττω. 
 
 Astyages, 'Αστυάγης, -ους, 
 b. 
 
 at, παρά. 
 
 Athenian, Αθηναίος, b. 
 
 Athens, 'Αθήναι, αι. 
 
 Athos, Άθως, -ω, b. 
 
 Atlantis, 'Ατλαντίς, -ίδος, 
 
 attack, an, προςβολή, η. 
 attack, to, επιτίθεααι, 161 
 attempt, to, πειράομαι ; 
 
 = do, ποιέω. 
 attend to, έπιμελέομαι^ 
 
 φροντίζω. 
 Attica, Άττίκη, η. 
 attractive, εύχαρις, -Ιτος. 
 auditor, ακροατής, -οϋ, ό. 
 audible, ακουστός 3. 
 author, αίτιος, ο. [ή. 
 
 authority, royal, βασιλεία, 
 avail, δύναμαι, ισχύω. 
 avarice, πλεονεξία, ή, φι- 
 
 λοχρημοσυνη, η. 
 ΆΥ&ήάοης,πλεονέκτης,-ου 
 avert, άλέξω, άμύνω, άπο 
 
 τρέπω. 
 avoid, φεύγω. 
 await, προςδοκάω, ύποαέ- 
 
 νω, w. a. 
 awake, to be, έγρηγορέναι. 
 awaken, εγείρω, άνίστημι ; 
 
 = to afford, παρέχω, 
 
 όπάζω. 
 away, to lead, απάγω. 
 
 Β. 
 
 Babylon, Βαβυλών, -ώνος, 
 V- 
 
 back, οπίσω ; go back, 
 άναχωρέω. 
 
 bad, κακός, πονηρός, φαύ- 
 λος, 32. [τό. 
 
 bad, the (abstract), κακόν, 
 
 ball, σφαίρα, η. 
 
 banish, έκβάλλω. 
 
 banter, παίζω. 
 
 barbarian, a, βάρβαρος, ό. 
 
 base, ταπεινός, κακός, πο- 
 νηρός. 
 
 Basias, Βασίας, -ου, b. 
 
 basket, κάνεον, τό. 
 
 bathe oneself, λούομαι. 
 
 battle, μάχη, fy. 
 
 be, to, ειμί, γίγνομαι, ίχω 
 w. adj. or adv. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 329 
 
 be with, σννειμι. 
 
 bear (carry), φέρω, φορέω, 
 βαστάζω ; = endure, 
 τλήμι ; = bring forth, 
 produce, φνω, αναφύω, 
 τίκτω. 
 
 beast (wild), θηρίον, τό. 
 
 beat, κρούω, 100. 
 
 beautiful, καλός 3 ; beau- 
 tiful persons, ο'ι καλοί. 
 
 , the, καλόν, τό. 
 
 beautifully, καλώς. 
 
 beauty, καλόν, τό, κάλλος, 
 -ονς, τό. 
 
 because, ότι, δώτί. 
 
 because of, διά. 
 
 become, γίγνομαι. 
 
 becomes, it, προςήκει. 
 
 becoming, προςήκων. 
 
 , it is, προςήκει. 
 
 befitting, προςηκων. 
 
 before, πρό. 
 
 (conj.), πριν, πρότε- 
 
 ρον. 
 
 beforehand, to observe, 
 προνοέω. 
 
 beg off, εξαιτέομαι. 
 
 beget, τίκτω. 
 
 begin, άρχομαι. 
 
 beginning, αρχή, ή. 
 
 behalf of, in, υπέρ. 
 
 behind, οπίσω ; to leave 
 behind, καταλείπω. 
 
 being, to come into, γίγ- 
 νομαι. 
 
 believe (trust), πείθομαι ; 
 = think, ηγέομαι, νο- 
 μίζω, δοκεϊ w. d. 
 
 believe in gods, θεούς νο- 
 μίζω, [μαι. 
 
 believed, to be, πιστεύο- 
 
 belly, γαστήρ, -ερός, η. 
 
 beloved, to be, see to love. 
 
 benefactor, ευεργέτης, -ου, 
 δ. 
 
 beneficence, ευεργεσία, η. 
 
 benefit, to, ωφελέω,ονίνημι. 
 
 benefit, ευεργεσία, ή, χά- 
 ρις, -ιτος, ή ; to confer 
 a, ενεργετέω w. a. 
 
 bereave, στερέω, άποστ. 
 τινά τίνος, άφαιρέομαι. 
 
 beside, προς w. ά. 
 
 besides, έτι, πλην, 145. 
 
 besiege, πο?αορκέω. 
 
 best, to be the, αριστεύω. 
 
 bestow, δίδωμι, δπάζω. 
 
 betimes, ευθύς. 
 
 betray, προδίδωμι. 
 
 betrayer, προδότης, -ου, δ. 
 
 between, μεταξύ. 
 
 beware of, φυλάττομαι 
 w. a., εύλαβέομαί τι. 
 
 beyond, p-ep., υπέρ. 
 
 beyond desert, παρ' άξίαν., 
 
 bid, κελεύω w. a. and inf. 
 
 bind, δέω. 
 
 bird, όρνις, -ΐθος, δ, ή. 
 
 birth, γένος, -ους, τό. 
 
 bite, δάκνω. 
 
 black, μέλας 3. 
 
 blame, to, ελέγχω, ψέγω. 
 
 blessing, a, αγαθόν, τό, 
 ευεργεσία, ή. 
 
 blind, adj., τυφλός 3. 
 
 , to make, τυφλόω. 
 
 blood, αίμα, τό. 
 
 bloom, ακμή, ή. 
 
 bloom, to, θάλλω. 
 
 blow, to, πνέω. 
 
 blow, a, πληγή, ή. 
 
 blush, to. ερυθραίνομαι, 
 w. Aor. and Fut. Pass. 
 
 boar, κάπρος, δ. 
 
 boastful display of, to 
 make, έπιδείκνυμι. 
 
 body, the, σώμα, τό. 
 
 , in a (= together), 
 
 σύμπας. 
 
 Boeotia, Βοιωτία, ή. 
 
 boil, to, £ψω, ζέννυμι. 
 
 boldly, θαβδαλέως. 
 
 boldness (of speech), παρ- 
 ρησία, ή. 
 
 28* 
 
 bolt, μοχλός, ό. 
 
 booty, λεία, ή. 
 
 bore through, τρυπάω. 
 
 borders, μεθόρια, τά. 
 
 born, to \>ο,,φϋναι,γίγνομαι 
 
 both, άμφω. 
 
 both — and, καί — και, τέ 
 — καί. 
 
 boundary, πέρας, -ατός, 
 τό, μεθόρια, τά. 
 
 bow, τόξον, τό. 
 
 bowl, mixing, κρατήρ, 
 -ήρος, δ. 
 
 boy, παις, ό. 
 
 bracelet, -ψελλών, τό. 
 
 Brasidas, Βρασίδας, -ον, δ. 
 
 brass, χα?ΜΟς, δ. [41. 
 
 brave, ανδρείος, γενναίος, 
 
 bravely, ανδρείως, γεν- 
 ναίως, [ή. 
 
 bravery, άνδρία, ή, αρετή, 
 
 bread, άρτος, δ. 
 
 break, ρήγνυμι, διαρή., κα- 
 τάγνυμι, 100. 
 
 up an encampment, 
 
 άναζεύγνυμι, ορμάω. 
 
 in pieces, διαδβήγ- 
 
 νυμι. 
 
 breathe, πνέω, εμπνέω. 
 
 bridge, to throw a, over 
 ζεύγνυμι w. a. 
 
 bridle, χαλινός, δ. 
 
 brilliant, λαμπρός 3. 
 
 bring, άγω, φέρω, κομίζω. 
 
 forward, as a charge. 
 
 κατηγορέω. 
 
 on, επάγω. 
 
 to, προςφέρω. 
 
 up (= educate), παι- 
 δεύω, τρέφω. 
 
 brother, αδελφός, δ. 
 
 brute, βόσκημα, τό. 
 
 build, ιδρύω, κτίζω, 112. 
 
 bull, ταυρός, δ. 
 
 burden, άχθος, -ους, τό. 
 
 burdensome, βαρνς, χαλε- 
 πός, άργαλέος, 22. 
 
330 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 burn, καίω, πίμπρημι, 171. 
 
 burn down, κατακαίω, κα- 
 ταφλέγω, έμπίπρημι. 
 
 bury, θάπτω. 
 
 business, έργον, τό, πράγ- 
 μα, τό. 
 
 but, δέ, αλλά. 
 
 but also, άλλα και. 
 
 by, ύπό, διά, παρά, προς. 
 
 Cadmus, Κάδμος, δ. 
 calamity, ατυχία, ή, κα- 
 κόν, τό. 
 call, to, καλέω, απαγορεύω, 
 
 29 : = name, ονομάζω. 
 call to mind, μνημονεύω 
 
 τι. 
 Callixenus, Καλλίξ ενός, δ. 
 calumny, διαβολή, ή. 
 can (be able), δύναμαι. 
 capacity, δύναμις, η ; in 
 
 a private, ιδία; in a 
 
 public, δημοσία. 
 Carduchians, Καρδοϋχοι, 
 
 οι, adj., -ως. 
 care, επιμέλεια, η, φρον- 
 
 τίς, -ίδος, ή, μέριμνα, ή, 
 
 40. 
 care, to, care for, take 
 
 care for, επιμέλομαι, 
 
 φροντίζω, 27. 
 careful, to be (w. inf.), 
 
 φροντίζω w. g. 
 carefully, επιμελώς. 
 carousal, πόσις, -εως, if. 
 carry, φέρω, βαστάζω. 
 — — about, περιφέρω. 
 
 on war, πολεμέω w. d. 
 
 off, απάγω. 
 
 Carthage, Καρχηδών, 
 
 -όνος, ή. 
 cast down, to, βίπτω. 
 castle, άκρα, ή. 
 Catana, Κατάνη, ή. 
 catch, θηρεύω, άγρεύω. 
 Caucasus, Καύκασος, δ. 
 
 cause (= affairs), πράγ- 
 μα, τό. 
 cauterize, καίω, άποκ. 
 cease, παύομαι, διαλείπω. 
 Cecrops, Κέκροψ, -οπός, ό. 
 Celaenae, Κελαιναί, αι. 
 celebrate ( — praise), επαι- 
 
 νέω. 
 
 in song, άδω, ύμνέω. 
 
 celestial, ουράνιος 3. 
 cell, ο'ικίδιον, τό. 
 censure, ψέγω, μέμφομαι 
 
 τι, έγκαλέω. 
 centre, μέσος 3, μεσάτης, 
 
 -ητος, ή. 
 certainly not, or never, ου 
 
 μν [* 177, 9]. 
 Chaerecrates, Χαιρεκρά- 
 
 της, -ους, ό. 
 Chaldaeans, Χαλδαϊοι, οι. 
 Chalcidian, Χα?^,κιδεύς, 
 
 -έως, ά. 
 chance, τύχη, ή. 
 change, to, μεταλλάττω, 
 
 μεταβάλλω, 58, 159. 
 character, τρόπος, δ, ήθος, 
 
 -ους, τό. 
 character of Deity, τά τοΰ 
 
 θεοϋ. [νω. 
 
 charge, to take in, λαμβά- 
 charge, to (= attack), επι- 
 τίθεμαι w. d. 
 chariot, άρμα, τό. 
 charioteer, ηνίοχος, δ. 
 charm, τερπόν, τό. 
 Charmides, Χαρμίδης, -ου, 
 
 ό. 
 cheerfully, ήδέως. 
 Chian, Χϊος, δ, 
 child, παις, δ, η, τέκνον, 
 
 τό. [-ές. 
 
 choice (adj.), πολυτελής, 
 choose, αίρέομαι ; — will, 
 
 βουλεύομαι, έθέλω, 48. 
 Cilicia, Κιλικία, ή. 
 circumference^e/w/zerpoc, 
 
 ή. 
 
 citizen, πολίτης, ό. 
 
 city, πόλις, ή. 
 
 clear, to ( == free from wild 
 
 beasts), εξημερόω ; = 
 
 purify, καθαιρώ. 
 Clearchus, Κλέαρχος, δ. 
 cleave to, εχομαι w. g. 
 Cleonymus, Κλεώνυμος, δ. 
 CleopompuSjKAeOTro/iTroc, 
 
 ό. 
 Clitus, Κλεϊτος, δ. 
 close (adj.), εγγύς. 
 
 , to, κλείω. 
 
 clothes, έσθής, -ήτος, η. 
 cluster (of grapes), βό- 
 
 τρυς, δ. 
 cold, ψϋκος, τό, βϊγος, τό. 
 — — (adj.), -ψυκρός 3. 
 collect, συλλέγω, συνίστη- 
 
 μι. 
 colony, αποικία, ή. 
 combatant, αθλητής, δ. 
 combat, μάχη, ή ; to en- 
 gage in single combat, 
 
 μονομαχέω w. d. 
 come, έρχομαι, άφικνέο- 
 
 μαι ; = I have come, 
 
 am present, ήκω. 
 
 in or into, ε'ιςέρχο- 
 
 μαι, ειςειμι. 
 
 come into existence, γίγ- 
 
 νομαι. 
 — — together, συνέρχομαι. 
 
 to a knowledge of, 
 
 γιγνώσκω. 
 
 command (= office), ap- 
 XV, V- 
 
 command, to, κελεύω, 'επι~ 
 τάττω, προςτ. ; of gen- 
 erals, παραγγέλλω. 
 
 command, to be at one's, 
 πάρειμι. 
 
 commander, έπιτακτήρ, 
 -ήρος, δ; — & general, 
 στρατηγός, δ; to be a 
 commander, άρχω. 
 
 commend, επαινέω. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 331 
 
 common, κοινός 3. 
 common origin, av] 
 
 companion, εταίρος, ύ. 
 compare, ύμοιόω τινί τι, 
 
 εικάζω τινί τι. 
 comparison with, in, -αρά 
 
 w. a. 
 compassion upon, to have, 
 
 κατελεέω τινά. 
 competent, Ικανός 3. 
 complete, to, διατε?>έω. 
 compulsion, ανάγκη, ή. 
 comrade, εταίρος, ό. 
 conceal, άπο-, κατακρύπ- 
 
 τω, κενΰ-ω, 88. 
 concealed, κρυπτός 3. 
 concerns, it, μέλει. 
 concerned, to be, φροντί- 
 ζω w. g. 
 condemn, κρίνω ; to death, 
 
 ■&ανάτου. 
 confer blessings, ει» ποιέω 
 
 τινά, ενεργετέω τινά ; 
 
 great blessings, μεγάλα 
 
 ενεργ. τινά. 
 confide in, επιτρέπω, πε- 
 
 ποιΰέναι. 
 confidence, to have, in, 
 
 ■&αββέω. 
 confine (=shnt up), κα- 
 
 τακλείω, καΰείργω. 
 conformably to, μετά w. g. 
 confused noises, -Θόρυβοι, 
 
 οί. [w. d. 
 
 congratulate, συνήδομαι 
 conquer, νικάω, 88. 
 conscious, συνειδώς ; to be 
 
 conscious, συνοιδα. 
 consider, σκοπέω, νοέω, 
 
 133 ; be considered, νο- 
 μίζομαι. 
 considerate ( = moderate ), 
 
 μέτριος 3. 
 
 , to be, σωόρονέω. 
 consideration, λογισμός, ό. 
 constitutionally, νομίμως. 
 
 construction (building), 
 οίκοδόμησις, εως, ή. 
 
 consult an oracle, μαντεν- 
 ομαι. 
 
 consume, αναλίσκω. 
 
 contemplate, •&εωρέω, σκο- 
 πέ ω. 
 
 contend (fight), μάχομαι ; 
 as in music, with des- 
 tiny, etc., ερίζω w. d. 
 
 contentedly, very, ανταρ- 
 κέστατα. 
 
 contention, έρις, -ϊδος, ή. 
 
 contest, μάχη, η, άγων, 
 -ώνος, ό. 
 
 continue, διατε/.έω, διάγω. 
 
 continually, αεί, συνεχώς ; 
 also by διατε/ί,έω, with 
 the Part. 
 
 contrary to, παρά. 
 
 contrive, μηχανάομαι. 
 
 control, κυριεύω w. g., 
 κρατέω w. g. 
 
 conversation, διάλογος, ό ; 
 = instruction, ομιλία, η. 
 
 converse with, διαλέγομαι 
 τινι. 
 
 convict, to, ε?ιέγχω, εξε?>. 
 
 convince, πέίΰω w. a. 
 
 cooperation, with the, of, 
 συνεργοΰντός τίνος. 
 
 corn, σίτος, ό. [ό. 
 
 , ear of, στάχυς, -ϋος, 
 
 corpse, νέκυς, -ϋος, ό, νε- 
 κρός, ό. 
 
 correct (adj.), δρΰ-ός 3. 
 
 correctly, όρϋώς. 
 
 corrode, έσϋ-ίω. 
 
 corrupt, to, διαφθείρω. 
 
 Cotyora, Κοτύωρα, τά. 
 
 counsel, βουλή, η. 
 
 country, χώρα, γη, ή; one's 
 country, πατρίς, -ϊδος, ή. 
 
 , of the, belonging t ) 
 
 the, πάτριος 3. 
 
 , native, πατρίς, -ίδος, 
 
 ή- 
 
 courage, αρετή, ή, Θυμός, o u 
 courageously, ΰαρραλέως. 
 courier, άγγελος, ό, ήμε 
 
 ροδρόμος, ό. 
 course, δρόμος, ύ ; = jour 
 
 ney, οδός, ή. 
 court, -&ίψαι, αι. 
 of justice, δικαστή- 
 
 ριον, το. 
 cow, βοϋς, ή. 
 creature, ζώον, τό. 
 credit, to, πείϋομαι. 
 Crete, Κρήτη, ή. 
 crime ( = insolence ),νβρις, 
 
 -εως, ή. 
 Critias, Κριτίας, -ου, ό. 
 croak, κρώζω. 
 crocodile, κροκόδειλος, ό. 
 Croesus, Κροίσος, ό. 
 Crotonian, Κροτωνιατης, 
 
 -ου, ό. 
 crown, a, στέφανος, ό. 
 crush, ϋ-ραυω. 
 cry, a, κραυγή, ή. 
 cry out, κράζω, άνακ. ; to 
 
 cry out to, βοάω τινί. 
 cubit, πηχυς, -εως, δ. 
 culture (=education),7rai 
 
 δεία, ή, παίδευσις, ή. 
 cultivation, see culture, 
 cup, κύπε/Λον, τό. 
 custom, έ&ος, -ους, τό, 
 
 ?/•&ος, -ους, τό ; it is an 
 
 established custom, νο- 
 μίζεται. 
 Cyaxares, Κυαξάοης, -ους 
 
 (ace -ην), ό. [ό. 
 
 Cyclops, Κύπλωψ, -ωπος, 
 Cyrus, Κϋρος, ό 
 
 D. 
 
 dainty food, ό-φον, τό. 
 dance, to, χορεύω, όρχέο- 
 
 μαι. 
 danger, κίνδυνος, ό. 
 , to incur, or be in 
 
 danger of, κινδυνεύω. 
 
332 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 dare, τολμάω. 
 
 Darius, Δαρείος, b. 
 
 dark (= black), μέλας. 
 
 darkness, νύξ, νυκτός, ή. 
 
 daughter, θυγάτηρ, -τρός, 
 V- 
 
 day, ήμερα, ή. 
 
 daybreak, at, άμα ήμερα. 
 
 dead, άποτεθνηκώς, νεκρός 
 3; to be dead, τεθνη- 
 κέναι. 
 
 deal, a great deal of, πολύς. 
 
 dear, φίλος 3. 
 
 death, θάνατος, δ. 
 
 , to put to, άποκτείνω. 
 
 deceive, εξαπατάω, 47,108, 
 113. 
 
 decide, κρίνω, διακ., δια- 
 γιγνώσκω. 
 
 upon, βουλεύομαι. 
 
 declare, αποφαίνομαι, άπο- 
 δείκνΰμι. 
 
 decree, a, ψήφισμα, τό. 
 
 deed, πράγμα, τό, έργον, 
 τό. 
 
 deem, νομίζω ; to be deem- 
 ed worthy, άξιονμαι. 
 
 deep, βαθύς. 
 
 defeat, ήττα, ή. 
 
 defence (by speech), απο- 
 λογία, ή. 
 
 defend, φυλάττω ; to de- 
 fend oneself by speak- 
 ing, άπολογέομαι ; by 
 force, or fortress, αμύ- 
 νομαι. 
 
 άζϊο,η.&&τιί,άπολογού μένος. 
 
 deformed ( — disgraceful), 
 αισχρός 3. 
 
 degenerate, to, μεταβολήν 
 επι το κακόν λαμβάνω. 
 
 deity, θεΐον, τό, δαιμό- 
 νων, τό, θεός, ό. 
 
 delay, to, μέλλω. 
 
 deliberate, to, βουλεύομαι. 
 
 delight, to, ευφραίνω, τέρ- 
 πω. 
 
 delight ίτι.,τέρπομαι, άγάλ- 
 λομαι. 
 
 deliver, σωί 
 
 ιλλάτ- 
 
 τω; = to free from, 
 έλευθερόω. 
 
 up, παραδίδωμι. 
 
 delivered, to be (= to be 
 saved), σώζομαι. 
 
 deliverance (= safety), 
 σωτηρία, ή ; = freedom 
 from, άπόλϋσις, ή. 
 
 Delos, Δήλος, ή. 
 
 demand,to ( = ask), αίτέω. 
 
 demean oneself to one, 
 προςφέρομαί τινι ; kind- 
 ly to, φιλοφρόνως έχω 
 w. d. 
 
 Demeter (Ceres), Δημή- 
 τηρ, -τρος, ή. 
 
 Demosthenes, Δημοσθέ- 
 νης, -ους, ό. 
 
 deny, άρνεομαι. 
 
 depart, άπειμι, άπαλλάτ- 
 τομαι, απέρχομαι. 
 
 departed (=dead), άπο- 
 τεθνηκώς. 
 
 dependent, to be ( = be ru- 
 \&ά),άρχομαι,κρατέομαι. 
 
 deplore, κλαίω. 
 
 deposite, τίθημι ; in some- 
 thing, εν τινι. 
 
 deposited, a thing, παρα- 
 καταθήκη, ή. 
 
 deprive, στερέω, άφαιρέο- 
 μαι, 113. 
 
 derive ( = enjoy, e. g. ad- 
 vantages), απολαύω ; 
 derive gain, κερδαίνω. 
 
 descendant, έκγονος, ό, ή. 
 
 descended from, έκγονος, 
 ο, ή. 
 
 describe, συγγράφω. 
 
 desert, beyond one's, παρ' 
 άξίαν. 
 
 desert, to, καταλείπω, απο- 
 φεύγω. 
 
 deserter, φυγάς, -άδος, ό. 
 
 deserve, άξιος ειμί. 
 
 deserving, άξιος. 
 
 , to think, άξιόω. 
 
 desire, a, επιθυμία, ή, όρε- 
 ξις, -εως, ή. 
 
 desire, to, επιθυμέω ; = 
 νί'\ύ\,βούλομαι\ = pray, 
 εύχομαι. 
 
 desirable, αιρετός. 
 
 desirous, to be (=wish), 
 έθέλω. 
 
 despair, to, άπογιγνωσκω, 
 άθυμέω ; of oneself, 
 άπογιγνωσκω εμαυτόν. 
 
 despise, ατιμάζω, κατα- 
 φρονέω. 
 
 despised, to be, καταφρο- 
 νέομαι. 
 
 destiny, μοίρα, ή. 
 
 destroy, φθείρω, διαφ., κα- 
 ταλύω, όλλυμι ; = 
 overthrow, ανατρέπω. 
 
 determine (= resolve), 
 γιγνώσκω. 
 
 determined, it is, δοκει. 
 
 devote oneself to (=turn), 
 τρέπομαι. 
 
 Diana, Άρτεμις, -ίδος, ή. 
 
 die, to, θνήσκω, άποθ., 
 τελευτάω. 
 
 for, ύπεραποθνήσκω. 
 
 differ from, διαφέρω w. g. 
 
 different, διάφορος 2; to 
 run in different direc- 
 tions, διαδιδράσκω. 
 
 from, to be, διαφέρω. 
 
 difficult, βαρύς, -εϊα, -ύ, 
 δύσκο?„ος 2. 
 
 dignity (gravity), βάρος, 
 -ους, τό. 
 
 dig through, διορύττω 
 διασκάπτω. 
 
 diligence, σπουδή, ή. 
 
 diligent, σπουδαίος 3. 
 
 diligently, σπουδαίι >c. 
 
 Diodorus, Διόδωρε, ό. 
 
 Diogenes,A£oyei;?7c,-oui-,o 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 333 
 
 Diphridfis, Διφρίδας, -a, 6. 
 direct, to, ίδύνω ; = to- 
 wards something, κα- 
 τεν&ύνω ; oneself, τρέ- 
 πομαι ; = to manage, 
 οίκέω. 
 
 disappear, αφανίζομαι, w. 
 Aor. Pass. 
 
 disclose, έκκαλύπτω. 
 
 discourse, λόγος, ό. 
 
 discourse, to, διαλέγομαι. 
 
 discover (= show), φαίνω. 
 
 discreet, φρόνιμος 3, συνε- 
 τός 3. 
 
 disease, νόσος, ή. 
 
 disgrace, λύμη, ή. 
 
 disgraceful, αισχρός 3. 
 
 disgracefully, αίσχρώς. 
 
 dishonest, πονηρός 3. 
 
 dishonor, ατιμία, η. 
 
 dishonorable, αισχρός 3, 
 άεικής, -ες. 
 
 disorder, ταραχή, η ; to 
 throw into disorder, τα- 
 ράττω. 
 
 dispel, λύω. 
 
 dispirited, to be, ά&υμέω. 
 
 display, αποφαίνομαι, άπο- 
 δίίκννμι. 
 
 displease, απαρέσκω τινί. 
 
 displeased with, to be, άχ- 
 ■&ομαι. 
 
 dispose (= arrange), τεχ- 
 νάομαι. 
 
 disposed, kindly, εννους 2. 
 
 disposition ( = feeling), 
 γνώμη, ή, φρένες, αι. 
 
 dissension, διχοστασία, η. 
 
 dissipate (= scatter), σκε- 
 δάζω. 
 
 dissolute, άκρατης, -ες. 
 
 dissolve, καταλύω, διαλύω. 
 
 distance, at a, from, πρό- 
 σω&εν. 
 
 distant, to be, from, απέχω. 
 
 distinguish oneself, be dis- 
 tinguished for, διαφέρω. 
 
 distinguished for, επίση- 
 μος 2. 
 
 disturb, ταράττω, συγχέω. 
 
 disturbance, ταραχή, ή. 
 
 divide, μερίζω, νέμω, κα- 
 τανέμω. 
 
 divine, ϋεϊος 3. 
 
 divination, μαντική, ή. 
 
 do, πράττω, ποιέω, δράω. 
 
 do good to, εύποιέω τινά, 
 ενεργετέω τινά ; do 
 wrong, άδικέω, κακώς 
 ποιέω. 
 
 dogs κ νων, κννός, ό, ή. 
 
 domestic, ό οίκοι. 
 
 dominion, αρχή, ή, ηγεμο- 
 νία, ή. 
 
 door, •&νρα, ή, πύλη, ή. 
 
 double-apeaking, διχομϋ- 
 ■&ος 2. 
 
 doubtful, to be (= fear- 
 ful), φοβέομαι. 
 
 Draco, Αράκων, -οντος, ό. 
 
 draw, σύρω. 
 
 draw up (of an army), 
 τάττω ; (laws), συγ- 
 γράφω. 
 
 dress, στολή, ή, ίμάτιον, 
 τό. 
 
 dress in, άμφιένννμι. 
 
 dried up, έσκληκώς, -via, 
 -ός. 
 
 drink, to, πίνω. 
 
 out or up, εκπίνω. 
 
 drive, ε7,αύνω. 
 
 away, άπελαύνω, 
 
 άπωΰέω. [&έω. 
 
 in, ειςε?,αύνω, είςω- 
 
 out, εξελαύνω. 
 
 drunkenness, μέϋη, ή. 
 during, κατά, εν. 
 duty, δέον, τό, 167. 
 duty or part of any one, 
 
 it is, ειμί w. g. 
 dwell, οίκέω, ναίω ; = to 
 be, ειμί ; = be in, πρός- 
 ειμι ; = lie, κεϊμαι. 
 
 dwelling, οΙκία, ή, οίκος, 
 ό, οίκημα, τό. 
 
 Ε. 
 
 Each, έκαστος. 
 each other, αλλήλων. 
 eager to learn, φι?>ομα- 
 ■&ής, -ές. [2. 
 
 for honor, φιλότιμος 
 
 eagle, αετός, ό. 
 
 ear, ους, ώτός, τό. 
 
 earn, to (= work out), 
 
 εξεργάζομαι. 
 earth, the, γή, ή, χ&ών, 
 
 χ-&ονός, ή. 
 earthen, κεράμειος 3. 
 earthquake, σεισμός, ό. 
 ease, ησυχία, ή. 
 easily, βαδίως. 
 east, έως, -ω, ή. 
 easy, βάδιος 3. 
 eat, εσΜω. 
 
 echo, ηχώ, -οϋς, ή. [4.] 
 edge, έσχατος [§ 148, Rem. 
 educate,7rai(5et'6), διδάσκω. 
 education, παιδεία, ή, δι- 
 δασκαλία, ή. 
 educated, πεπαιδευμένος. 
 effect, to ( = accomplish), 
 
 εξεργάζομαι. 
 effeminate, ίο render, μα~ 
 
 λακίζω. 
 efforts (= by themselves), 
 
 καϋ-' εαυτούς. 
 Egypt, Αίγυπτος, ή. 
 Egyptian, Αιγύπτιος, δ. 
 either — or, ή — ή. 
 elder, see old. 
 elegance (= gracefulness), 
 
 χάρις, -ιτος, η. 
 elevate, ύ-ώόω. 
 eloquent, ?,όγιος 3. 
 else, everything, άλλοΓ, 
 
 λοιπός 3. 
 embassy, πρεσβεία, ή. 
 embrace, ασπάζομαι. 
 employ, χράομαι w. d. 
 
334 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 employed in, to be zeal- 
 ously, σπουδάζω. 
 
 empty itself (of a river), 
 εμβάλλω, έξίημι. 
 
 emulation, φιλοτιμία, ή. 
 
 encampment, στρατόπε- 
 δον, TO. 
 
 - , to break up an, άνα- 
 
 ζεύγνυμι. [w. d. 
 
 encounter, to, ύποστηναι 
 
 encourage,7rapa/ca^ea) 3 πα- 
 ραμυθέομαι. 
 
 end, τέλος, -ους, τό; end, 
 e. g. of war, κατάλϋσις, 
 -εως, ή. 
 
 end of life, τελευτη του 
 βίου. 
 
 endeavor, to, πεφάομαι, 
 Dep. Pass. 
 
 endure, φέρω, υποφέρω, 
 υπομένω. 
 
 enduring, very, καρτερι- 
 κός 3. 
 
 enemy, πολέμως, δ, εχ- 
 θρός, δ. 
 
 energy, δύναμις, -εως, η. 
 
 enfeeble, τείρω, κατάγνυμι. 
 
 engage with (of an army), 
 σνμμίγνυμι. 
 
 —— in a naval battle, 
 ναυμαχέω ; in single 
 combat, μονομαχέω. 
 
 enjoin upon, εντέλλω. 
 
 enjoy ( = taste), απολαύω 
 w. g., γεύομαι w. g.; 
 allow one to enjoy (par- 
 ticipate in) something, 
 μεταδίδωιιί τινί τίνος. 
 
 enlarge, πλατύνω. 
 
 enlist, συγγράφω : intrans., 
 στρατεύομαι. 
 
 enrich, πλουτίζω. 
 
 enslave, δουλόω. 
 
 enslaved, to be, δου?ί,εύω. 
 
 enter, ειςβάλ?\,ω ; = to 
 take a course or way, 
 τρέπομαι δδόν. 
 
 entreat, ικετεύω. 
 
 entreaty, δέησις, -εως, ή ; 
 to gain release by, εξαι- 
 τέομαι. 
 
 entrust to, επιτρέπω. 
 
 enumerate, καταριθμέω. 
 
 envy, φθόνος, δ. 
 
 , to, φθονέω ; envy 
 
 one something, or on 
 account of something, 
 φθονέω τινί τίνος. 
 
 Epaminondas, Έπαμινών- 
 δας, -ου, δ. 
 
 Ephesus, "Έφεσος, ή. . 
 
 epic poetry, ποίησις των 
 έπων, or τα έπη. 
 
 equal, Ισος 3. 
 
 , to make, έξισδω. 
 
 equivalent, to be, αντάξιος 
 είμι. 
 
 ere, πριν. 
 
 erect, to, δρθόω, έξορθόω ; 
 as a statue, άνατίθημι, 
 άνίστημι. [ό. 
 
 Eretrian, 'Έρετριεύς, -έως, 
 
 err, άμαρτάνω. 
 
 escape, to, αποφεύγω w. a. 
 
 especially, μάλιστα. 
 
 establish, καθίστημι. 
 
 established custom, it is, 
 νομίζεται. 
 
 esteem, to, τιμάω, θερα- 
 πεύω ; == value much, 
 ποιέομαι περί πολλού ; 
 = consider, think, νο- 
 μίζω. 
 
 happy, μακαρίζω, ζη- 
 
 λόω. 
 
 esteemed, τίμιος 3. 
 
 estimable, άξιος 3. [ό. 
 
 Euphrates, Ευφράτης, -ου, 
 
 Europe, Έύρώπη, η. 
 
 Euryalus, Έύρύαλος, δ. 
 
 Eurysthenes, Έύρυσθένης, 
 -ους, δ. 
 
 Eurystheus, Έύρνσθεύς, 
 -έως, δ. 
 
 Euxinus Pontus, Εύξεί• 
 
 νος Ιίόντος . 
 even, και. 
 — — — if, και έάν. 
 — ■ — now, και νυν. 
 
 though, καϊ 'εάν. 
 
 evening, δείλη, η. 
 event, συμφορά, η. 
 ever (= always), αεί. 
 every, πάς ; = quisque, 
 
 έκαστος. 
 everything, πάν. 
 everywhere, πανταχού. 
 evident^^-of 3, φανερός 3. 
 evidence, τεκμήριον, τό. 
 evil, κακός 3, πονηρός 3, 
 
 φαύλος. 
 evil, an, κακόν, τό, κακία, 
 
 ή. 
 evil-doer, κακούργος, δ. 
 exact from, to, άπαιτέω 
 
 τι τίνα, πράττω τι τίνα. 
 exalt, ύψόω. 
 
 examine, εξετάζω, ελέγχω. 
 examination, έλεγχος, τό ; 
 
 = deliberation, κρίσις, 
 
 -εως, η. 
 excellence, καλοκαγαθία, 
 
 η, αρετή, ή. 
 excellent, αγαθός. 
 except, πλην. 
 excess (= luxury), τρν- 
 
 φή, ή ; excess in any- 
 thing, ασέλγεια, ή. 
 •exchange, to, μεταλλάτ- 
 
 τω\ = to exchange 
 
 one thing for another» 
 
 άντικαταλλάττομαί τι 
 
 τίνος. 
 excite, εγείρω. 
 exclude, άπελαύνω. 
 execute (= accomplish), 
 
 έπιτελέω, διανύω. 
 exercise, to, γυμνάζω, άσ• 
 
 κέω ; = make trial of, 
 
 πειράομαι. 
 exercise, ασκτ σις, -εως, ff, 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 335 
 
 exhort, προτρέπω, παρα- 
 καλέω. [γίγνομαι. 
 
 existence, to come into, 
 
 expect (= hope), ελπίζω ; 
 = look for, ύποπτεύω, 
 προςδοκάω. 
 
 expedition, to make an, 
 στρατεύω. 
 
 experience, εμπειρία, ή. 
 
 exploit, πράγμα, τό. 
 
 exposed to, see stratagems. 
 
 express, to, φράζω, εκφαίνω, 
 άποφαίνω, 160. 
 
 extent, αριθμός, δ, πλή- 
 θος, -ους, τό. 
 
 exterior, σχήματα, τα. 
 
 extol, εις νψος έξαιρέω. 
 
 extraordinarily,cte£V6)c,100 
 
 eye, οφθαλμός, δ. 
 
 Face, πρόσωπον, τό, δψις, 
 
 -εως, ή. 
 fail, εκλείπω, προλ., κα- 
 
 ταλ., έπιλ. 
 fair (= beautiful ),καλός 3. 
 faithful, πιστός 3. 
 fall, to, πίπτω. 
 
 away, απο-, περφβέω. 
 
 back ( = retreat), 
 
 άποχωρέω. 
 
 upon, εμπίπτω. 
 
 into (of a river), είς- 
 
 βάλλω, εμβάλλω. 
 falsely, to swear, επιορκέω. 
 fame, εύκλεια, ή, κλέος, 
 
 -έονς, τό ; = report, 
 
 δόξα, ή. 
 famine, λιμός, δ. 
 famous, ενκλεής, -ες, φα- 
 νερός 3. 
 far (of distance), μακράν, 
 
 τηλοϋ ; with Οοτη.πολύ. 
 far, so far from, αντί. 
 fare, to, πράττω, w. adv., 
 
 e. g. εν, to fare well, 
 fast, to hold, έχομαι w. g. 
 
 fasten, κλείω. 
 
 fat, πίων, -όνος. 
 
 fate, μοίρα, η ; = fortune, 
 τύχη, ή. 
 
 fated, it is, είμαρται w. d. 
 
 father, πατήρ, -τρός, δ. 
 
 fault, αμαρτία, ή. 
 
 favor, χάρις, -ϊτος, ή. 
 
 , a, ευεργεσία, ή. 
 
 on, to confer a, do to, 
 
 εν ποιέω w. a., εύεργε- 
 τέω w. a. \?χω. 
 
 , to receive a, ευ πά- 
 
 fear, φόβος, δ, 54. 
 
 , to, φοβέομαι,δέόοικα. 
 
 fearful, δεινός 3 ; to be, 
 φοβέομαι. 
 
 feet, πόδες, οί. [χος, δ. 
 
 fellow-combatant, σύμμα- 
 
 fetter, a, πέδη, ή. 
 
 few, ολίγοι, -αι, -α. 
 
 field, αγρός, δ, γυία, ή. 
 
 fight, to, μάχομαι. 
 
 fill, πίμπλημι, έμπίπληιιι. 
 
 filled with, μεστός 3, πλή- 
 ρης, -ες. 
 
 find, ευρίσκω, 141. 
 
 fine (= beautiful), καλός 3. 
 
 fine, a, χρήματα, τά, ζημία, 
 ή ; to punish by a, ζη- 
 μιόω. 
 
 fir, πεύκη, ή. 
 
 fire, πϋρ, πυρός, τό. 
 
 , to set on, έμπίπρημι. 
 
 firm, βέβαιος 3; stand firm, 
 υπομένω. 
 
 firmness, καρτερία, ή. 
 
 first, πρώτος 3 ; adv. πρώ- 
 τον, πρώτα, τα. 
 
 first, at, εν apxy. 
 
 fish, a, ιχθύς, -ϋος, δ. 
 
 fit (proper), επιτήδειος, 
 ικανός 3. 
 
 fit, in a, of madness, 
 μαινόμενος, δαιμόνων. 
 
 fitted (= of such a na- 
 ture), ταηντος. 
 
 fix (= determine), ορίζω ; 
 
 = to make firm, πήγ- 
 
 νυμι. 
 flagon, χοευς, δ [§41]. 
 flatter, κολακεύω. 
 flatterer, κόλαξ, -ακος, δ. 
 flattery, κολακεία, ή. 
 flay, δέρω. 
 flee, φεύγω. 
 
 away, αποφεύγω w. a. 
 
 flesh, κρέας, -έως, τό, σαρξ, 
 
 -ρκός, ή. 
 fling, βίπτω. 
 
 flock (=herd), αγέλη, ή. 
 flourish, to, θάλλω. 
 flow, to, βέω. 
 
 by, παραβρέω. 
 
 flower, a, άνθος, -ους, τό, 
 
 ανθεμον, τό. 
 flute, αυλός, δ, σϋριγξ, 
 
 -ιγγος, ή. 
 fly away, αναθέτομαι, έκπ. 
 follow, έπομαι w. d-, άκο 
 
 λονθέω w. d. 
 folly (madness), uavia, ή. 
 fond of learning, φιλομα- 
 θής, -ές. 
 fond of vtsx, φιλοπόλεμος 2. 
 food, βρώμα, τό, βορά, ή. 
 fool, μώρος, δ. 
 foolish, μώρος 3. 
 foot of, at the, υπό. [γάρ. 
 for, πρό, υπέρ, επί ; (conj.), 
 forbid, απαγορεύω. 
 force, military, δύναμις 
 
 -εως, ή. 
 
 (violence), βία, ή. 
 
 , to employ, βιάζομαι. 
 
 forefathers, προγεγενημέ- 
 
 νοι, οί. 
 forehead, μέτωπον, τό. 
 foreign, αλλότριος 3. 
 foreign to (= besides), 
 
 πλην w. g., χωρίς w. g., 
 
 έξω w. g. 
 foreigner, ξένος, δ. 
 foresee, προοράω. 
 
336 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 forever, αεί ; to be for- 
 ever (= abide in), είμί, 
 διατρίβω. [w. g. 
 
 forget, λαν&άνομαι, επιλ. 
 
 former ( = old), παλαιός S. 
 
 forthwith, την ταχίστην, 
 ως τάχιστα. 
 
 fortify, τειχίζω. 
 
 fortune, τύχη, ή. 
 
 •■ , good, ευτυχία, η. 
 
 fortunate, ευδαίμων, -όνος, 
 ευτυχής, -ες. 
 
 — — — , to be, εύτνχέω, εύ- 
 δαιμονέω. 
 
 forward, to bring as a 
 charge, κατηγορέω. 
 
 found, to, κτίζω, ίδρύω. 
 
 foundation, κρηπίς, -ϊδος, 
 ή; metaphor., Φεμέλιον, 
 τό. 
 
 fountain, πηγή, η. 
 
 frankness, παρρησία, ή. 
 
 free, ελεύθερος. 
 
 , to, λύω, ελευΰερόω. 
 
 — from, απολύω. 
 
 freedom, ελευϋ-ερία, ή ; of 
 the state, αυτονομία, ή. 
 
 of ^^αΥι,παρβησία,ή. 
 
 freemen, έλεύΰεροι, οί. 
 
 friend, φίλος, δ, εραστής, 
 -ου, δ. 
 
 friendship, φιλία, ή. 
 
 frivolity, βαδιονργία, ή. 
 
 frog, βάτραχος, δ. 
 
 from, από, εκ, παρά. 
 
 fruit, καρπός, δ. 
 
 fruits, first, άπαρχαί, al. 
 
 fugitive, φνγάς, -αδος, δ. 
 
 fulfil, τελέω. 
 
 full, μεστός 3, πλήρης, -ες. 
 
 full power, εξουσία, ή. 
 
 furnish, έπαρκέω. 
 
 future, the, τό μέλλον. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gain, κέρδος, -ους, τό, κτη- 
 σις, -εως, ή. 
 
 gain, to (= acquire), κτά- 
 ομαι ; = get gain, κερ- 
 δαίνω ; to gain release, 
 εξαιτέομαι. 
 
 gallant and noble, καλός 
 καϊ άγαΰός ; γενναίος 3. 
 
 gape, κέχηνα, 130. 
 
 garden, κήπος, δ. 
 
 garland, στέφανος, δ. 
 
 garment, ίμάτιον, τό, στο- 
 λή, ή. 
 
 gate, πύλη, ή, •&ύρα, ή. 
 
 general (common), κοι- 
 νός 3. 
 
 general, a, στρατηγός, δ. 
 
 generation of men, γε- 
 νεά, ή. 
 
 generously, άφΰόνως. 
 
 get out of the way of, ει- 
 κω δδοϋ. 
 
 giant, γίγας, -αντος, δ. 
 
 gift, δώρον, τό. 
 
 give, δίδωμι, τίΰημι. 
 
 - — - a sign or signal, ση- 
 μαίνω. 
 
 one a share of any- 
 thing, μεταδίδωμί τινί 
 τίνος. 
 
 — — a response, χράω. 
 
 back, άποδίδωμι. 
 
 way, εν δίδω μι. 
 
 gladly, very ( == by all 
 means), πάντως. 
 
 go, βαίνω,πορεύομαι, πρός- 
 ειμι, 89. 
 
 — — about, περιβαίνω, έβ- 
 βω. 
 
 back, άναχωρέω. 
 
 away, άπειμι, απέρ- 
 χομαι, αποβαίνω, ο'Ίχο- 
 μαι. 
 
 down fas the sun), 
 
 καταδύομαι. 
 
 forward, προιέναι. 
 
 into, εισειμι ; as a 
 
 contest, etc., ενδύω. 
 
 , over (as to another 
 
 party), απέρχομαι, άπο* 
 βαίνω. 
 
 through, διέρχομαι. 
 
 round, περίειμι. 
 
 goal, τέρμα, -ατός, τό. 
 
 goat, αϊξ, -γός, δ, ή. 
 
 goblet, κύπελλον, τό. 
 
 God, a god, ϋεός, δ. 
 
 goddess, #εά, ή. [τό. 
 
 gold, χρυσός, δ, χρυσίον, 
 
 golden, χρυσέος, -ους 3. 
 
 gone, to be, οίχομαι. 
 
 good, αγαΰός, καλός ; οί 
 άγαΰοί, the good; τδ 
 άγα&όν, the good (ab- 
 stract). 
 
 good will, έννοια, ή. 
 
 govern, κρατέω w. g., άρ- 
 χω w. g. 
 
 government, πολιτεία, ή ; 
 = a governed province; 
 αρχή, ή. 
 
 governor's residence, ap- 
 χεϊον, τό. 
 
 graceful, χαρίεις, έπίχα- 
 ρις, -ΐτος. 
 
 gracefully, χαριέντως, έπί- 
 χαρίτως. 
 
 Graces, χάριτες, αι. 
 
 gracious, ίλεως [§ 30]. 
 
 grain, σΐτος, δ. 
 
 grant, to, δίδωμι, παρέχω. 
 
 gratify, χαρίζομαι. 
 
 gratitude, ευχαριστία, ή, 
 χάρις, -ϊτος, ή. 
 
 gravity, βάρος, -ους, τό. 
 
 great, μέγας. 
 
 greatly, μεγάλως, δεινώς. 
 
 great deal, πολύς. [τό. 
 
 greatness, μέγεΰος, -ους, 
 
 Grecian, Ελληνικός. 
 
 Greece, 'Ελλάς, -αδος, ή. 
 
 Greek, a, "Ελλην, -ηνος, δ. 
 
 grief, λύπη, ή. 
 
 grievous, χαλεπός 3. 
 
 grind, λεαίνω. [ή. 
 
 ground, the, χΰων, -ονόζ, 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 337 
 
 gross, μέγας. 
 
 growing old, not, ύγηρως, 
 -ων. 
 
 grow up, αυξάνομαι, with 
 Pass. Aor- 
 
 guard, the, φυ?Μκή, ή. 
 
 guard, to, φυ?ΜΤτω, διαφ. 
 
 , against, to be on 
 
 one's %χχΆτά.φυλάττομαι. 
 
 guardian, φύλαξ, -κος, ό. 
 
 guide, a, ήγεμών, -όνος, δ, 
 ηνίοχος, δ. 
 
 , to, Ιθύνω, κατευθύ- 
 νω, ήγέομαι. 
 
 guilty ( = wrong doer), 
 αδικών. 
 
 Gyges, Τύγης, -ου, δ. 
 
 gymnasium, παλαίστρα, η. 
 
 Hades, άδης, -ου, δ, 
 hair, θρίξ, τριχός, ή. 
 halcyon, άλκυων, -όνος, ή. 
 hand, χειρ, χειρός, ή. 
 happens, it, συμβαίνει,τυγ- 
 
 χάνει, συμπίπτει. 
 happiness, ευδαιμονία, ή. 
 happy, ευδαίμων. 
 , to be, ευδαιμονεω, 
 
 εϋτυχέο). 
 
 , to esteem, μακαρίζω. 
 
 harbor, λιμήν, -ένος, δ. 
 hard (difficult), χαλεπός 5. 
 hardship, πόνος, δ. 
 hare, λαγώς, -ώ, δ. 
 Harmodius, 'Αρμόδιος, δ. 
 harmony, ομόνοια, ή. 
 harp, όόρμιξ, -ιγγος, ή. 
 harp-playing, κιθαρωδία,ή. 
 haste, σπουδή, ή. 
 hasten, σπεύδω. 
 hastily, to flee, οίχομαι 
 
 ώεύγων [§ 175, 3]. 
 hate, to, μισέω, έχθαίρω. 
 hated, to be, απεχθάνομαι. 
 hateful, μισητός 3. 
 haughtiness, νβρις, -εως,ή. 
 
 haughty, ύπέρφρων, υπε- 
 ρήφανος 2. 
 
 have, έχω, κέκτημαι. 
 
 head, κεφαλή, ή. 
 
 heal, ίάομαι, άκέοααι. 
 
 health, ΰγίεια, ή. 
 
 ]χβΆΤ,άκούω.άκροάομαι w.g. 
 
 heart, καρδία, ή, κήρ, κή- 
 ρος, τό ; = feeling or 
 disposition, ψύχη, ή. 
 
 heat, θά/.πος, -ους, τό. 
 
 heaven, ουρανός, δ. 
 
 Hector, "Εκτωρ, -ορός, δ. 
 
 heed, to take, εν?\.αβέομαί 
 τι. 
 
 height, ϋψος, -ους, τό ; = 
 summit, άκρα, ή. 
 
 Helen, Ελένη, ή. 
 
 Hellas, Ελλάς, -αδνς, η. 
 
 Helte, Έλλη, ή. 
 
 Hellenes, "Έ,λ/^ηνες, oi. 
 
 Hellespont, Έλ?>ήςποντος : 
 δ. 
 
 help of, with the, συν. 
 
 Hera (Juno), "Ήρα, ή. 
 
 herald, κήρυξ, -ϋκος, ό. 
 
 Hercules/Kpa/c/U/Cj-eou^ci. 
 
 herd, άγέ?>η, ή. 
 
 herdsman, νομεύς, -έως, δ, 
 ποιμήν, -ένος, δ. 
 
 Hermes (Mercury), Έρ- 
 μης, -ου, ό. 
 
 hero, ηρως, -ωυς, δ. 
 
 hide, κρύπτω, άποκ. [2. 
 
 high-souled, μεγαλόψυχος 
 
 highly, very, και πάνυ. 
 
 highly, to esteem more, 
 περί μείζονος ποιέομαι ; 
 to reverence or prize 
 highly, περί πολ?χ>ϋ 
 ποιέομαι, 
 
 hill, γήλοφος, δ. 
 
 hinder, ειργω. [δ. 
 
 hired laborer, θής, θητός, 
 
 Hipparchus, "Ιππαρχος, δ. 
 
 his own (business, posses- 
 sions), τά έαυτοϋ. 
 
 29 
 
 historian, ιστοριογράφος, δ. 
 
 hold (have), έχω; hold 
 fast, έχομαι w. g. ; take 
 hold of (= touch, en- 
 gage in, effect), άπτο- 
 μαι w. g. 
 
 hold before, προβά?Λω. 
 
 nold out ( = sustain the 
 attack), ύποστήναι. 
 
 holy, ιερός 3. 
 
 home, οίκος, δ. 
 
 Homer, "Ομηρος, δ. 
 
 honor, to, τιμάω. 
 
 honor, τιμή, ή. 
 
 honor-loving, φιλότιμος 2. 
 
 honorable, εύδοξος 2, κα- 
 λός• 3, φανερός 3. 
 
 honored, τίμιος 3. 
 
 hoof, δπλή, ή. 
 
 hook, άγκιστρον, τό. 
 
 hope, έλπίς, -ίδος, ή. 
 
 hope, to, ελπίζω, έλπομαι. 
 
 horn, κέρας, τό [§ 39]. 
 
 horse, Ιππος, δ. 
 
 host, ξένος, δ. [3. 
 
 hostile, πολέμιος 3, εχθρός 
 
 house, οΐκος, ό, οικία, ή. 
 
 household, οίκος, δ. 
 
 how 1 πώς ; in an indi 
 rect question, όπως ; 
 how much, όσος 3. 
 
 human, ανθρώπινος 3 j 
 human race, τό γένος 
 ανθρώπων. 
 
 humane, φιλάνθρωπος 2. 
 
 hunger, λιμός, δ. 
 
 , to, be hungry, πει- 
 νάω. 
 
 hunt, to, θηρεύω. 
 
 hunter (huntsman), θη- 
 ρευτής, -οϋ, δ. 
 
 hurtful, βλαβερός 3. 
 
 husband, άνήρ, ανδρός, δ. 
 
 If, ει, έάν, ην, άν. 
 ignorant, αμαθής, -if. 
 
338 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 illness, νόσος, ή. insane, to be, μαίνομαι, jest, to, παίζω, σκάπτω. 
 
 ills, κακά, τά. όαιμονάω. journey, δρόμος, ό, οδός, η. 
 
 illustrious, λαμπρός 3. inscribe, γράφω. joy, χαρά, ή. 
 
 imitate, μιμέομαι ; = em- instead of, αντί, υπέρ. judge, a, κριτής, -οϋ, ό, 
 
 ulate, ζηλόω w. a. instil, έντίΰ-ημι. δικαστής, -ον, δ. 
 
 immediately, εύΰ-ύς, πάρα- instruct, παιδεύω, διδάσκω. , to, κρίνω, διακ. 
 
 χρήμα. instruction, παιδεία, ή, δι- judgment, to render, h- 
 
 immoderate, ακρατής, -ες. δασκαλία, ή, ομιλία, ή. κάζω ; in the, of, τρός 
 
 immortal, ά&άνατος 2. insufficient, to be, ενδεώς ■ w. g. 
 
 impel, προτρέπω. έχω. Jupiter, Ζευς, δ. 
 
 impiety, ασέβεια, ή. intellect, γνώμη, ή. [ή. just δίκαιος. 
 
 implant, εμφυτεύω. intelligence, σύνεσις, -εως, justice, δικαιοσύνη, η, δίκη, 
 
 implanted, έμφυτος 2. intelligent, συνετός 3, φρό- ή ; court of, δικαστή- 
 
 impose upon (enjoin), νιμος 3. ριον, τό. 
 
 προςτάττω,έντέλλω w.d. intemperate, άκρατης, -ές. justly, δικαίως. 
 
 impossible, αδύνατος 2, intend to, μέλλω ; also by 
 
 impostor, φέναξ, -άκος, δ. Put. Part. Κ. 
 
 imprudent, άνοος [§ 29, inter, &άπτω. Keep, έχω ; keep off, άλέ- 
 
 Rem.]. intercourse with, δμιλία ξομαι, αμύνομαι. 
 
 impure ακάθαρτος 2. w. d-, ή, κοινωνία, ή. oneself from, άπέχο- 
 
 in, εν. , to have, with, δμι- μαι w. g. 
 
 in order to, by Fut. Part., λέω w. d. watch, τηρέω. 
 
 or a final conjunction, intestines, τά εντός. key. κλείς, κλειδός, ή. 
 
 as Ίνα, ως. intimate (of friends), οι- kid, έριφος, δ. 
 
 ΧΏ.&ούγίίγ,άπραγμοσύνη, ή, κεϊος. kill, άποκτείνω ; = mar- 
 
 αργία, ή, βαστώνη, ή. into, εις. der, φονεύω. 
 incite, προτρέπω. intoxication, μέΰ-η, ή. kind, εύνους, -ουν. 
 increase, to, αυξάνομαι. intrust (commit), έπιτρέ- kindly, to demean one- 
 incur danger, κινδυνεύω. πω. self, φιλοφρόνως έχω. 
 indeed, μέν ; indeed — but, invent, ευρίσκω. kindly-disposed, εύνους, 
 
 μεν — δέ. invention, εϋρεσις, -εως, ή. -ουν. 
 
 indictment, γραφή, ή. inventor, εύρέτης, -ου, δ. kindness, ευεργεσία, ή ; 
 
 indolent, to be, οκνέω. invest a city, περικαΰέζο- = favor, χάρις, -ϊτος, ή. 
 
 industrious, σπουδαίος 3. μαι πόλιν. kindred, οικείος, δ. 
 
 inferiors, ταπεινότεροι, oi. invest with (= clothe), king, βασιλεύς, -έως, δ, 
 
 inglorious, άδοξος 2. άμφιέννυμί τινά τι. άναξ, -ακτος, δ. 
 
 inhabit, ο'ικέω. invincible, άμαχος 2. kingly nature, βασιλικόν 
 
 inimical, έχΰρός 3. Ionia, Ιωνία, ή. ήϋ-ος. 
 
 injure, κακώς ποιέω, βλάπ- irrational, άφρων, άνοος 2. know, γιγνώσκω, έπίστα- 
 
 τω w. a., άδικέω w. a. island, νήσος, ή. μαι, οϊδα. 
 
 injurious, βλαβερός 3. issue, τέλος, τό, κατάλϋ- know truly, επίσταμαι. 
 
 injury, βλάβη, ή, ζημία, ή. σις, -εως, ή. knowledge of, to come to 
 
 injustice, αδικία, ή. ivory, έλέφας, -αντος, δ. a, γιγνώσκω. 
 
 innate, έμφυτος 2. known, well-known, φανε- 
 
 innocent, ουκ αδικών. J. ρός 3, δήλος 8. 
 
 innumerable, άναρί-θ-μη- Javelin, άκων, -οι τος, δ, , to make, δηλόω. 
 
 τος 2. άκόντίίν, τό. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 ι 
 
 L. 
 
 Labor, πόνος, ό. 
 
 , lover of, φιλόπονος 2. 
 
 , to, (=work), εργά- 
 ζομαι ; with toil, πονέω ; 
 with the accompanying 
 idea of being weary, 
 κάμνω. [ό. 
 
 laborer, hired, θής, θητός, 
 
 laborious, πολύπονος 2. 
 
 Lacedaemonian, Λακεδαι- 
 μόνιος, ό. 
 
 lack, σπανίζω, δέω. 
 
 lake, λίμνη, ή. 
 
 land (region), χώρα, ή; 
 by or upon land, κατά 
 γήν ; native, πατρίς, 
 -ίδος, ή. 
 
 large sum, πολύς. 
 
 Larissa, Αάρισσα, ή. 
 
 lasting, έμπεδος 2. 
 
 late, όψιος, adv. όψέ ; la- 
 ter, ύστερον. 
 
 latter, ούτος. 
 
 law, νόμος, ό ; by law, κα- 
 τά νόμον or νομίμως ; 
 observant of, νόμιμος 3. 
 
 lawgiverjVcyzotfer^c, -ον, ό. 
 
 lawlessness, ανομία, ή. 
 
 lay (place), τίθημι ; lay 
 by or up, κατατίθημι. 
 
 waste, διαφθείρω, 
 
 τέμνω. 
 
 lazy, to be, βλακεύω. 
 
 lead, to, άγω, ήγέομαι. 
 
 away, απάγω. 
 
 round, περιάγω. 
 
 leader, ήγεμών, -όνος, ό. 
 
 leaf, φύλλον, τό. 
 
 lean, έσκληκώς. 
 
 learn, μανθάνω ; = ascer- 
 tain, ευρίσκω, πυνθά- 
 νομαι. 
 
 learning, fond of, φιλομα- 
 θής, -ες. 
 
 leave, εκλείπω, καταλείπω. 
 
 ■ behind, καταλείπω. 
 
 leave off, παύομαι. 
 
 unrewarded, έάω εί- 
 ναι άχάριστον. 
 
 leisure, σχολή, ή. 
 
 , to be at, to have, 
 
 σχολάζω. 
 
 length, μήκος, -ους, τό ; — 
 number, measure, αριθ- 
 μός, ό. 
 
 lenity, πραότης, -ητος, ή. 
 
 Leonidas, Λεωνίδας, -ον, δ. 
 
 Lesbos, Λέσβο, , ή. 
 
 lesson, μάθημα, -ατός, τό. 
 
 lest, after a word denoting 
 fear, μή ; = that not, by 
 Ινα, όπως or ώς μή. 
 
 let (permit), έάω. 
 
 letter, an alphabetical, 
 γράμμα, -ατός, τό. 
 
 letters, γράμματα, τά. 
 
 liar, ψεύστης, -ου, ό. 
 
 liberate, έλενθερόω. 
 
 licentiously, άκολάστως. 
 
 lie, a, ψεύδος, -ους, τό. 
 
 , to, ψεύδομαι. 
 
 (be situated), κεϊμαι. 
 
 in wait for, ενεδρεύω. 
 
 life, βίος, ό, ζωή, ή. 
 
 light, φως, φωτός, τό ; = 
 a light or lamp, λύκ- 
 νος, ό. 
 
 lightning, αστραπή, ή. 
 
 like, όμοιος 3, Ισος 3, πα- 
 ραπλήσιος ; = such as, 
 οίος. 
 
 likeness, όμοιότης, -ητος, 
 V- 
 
 lineage, γένος, -ους, τό. 
 
 listen to, άκροάομαι w. g. ; 
 = to obey, πείθομαι, 
 υπακούω. 
 
 literature, γράμματα, τά. 
 
 little, ολίγος 3 ; adv. μικ- 
 ρόν ; less, μείον. 
 
 live, βιόω, ζάω, βιοτεύω. 
 
 with, συγγίγνομαι 
 
 w. d., συνδιατρίβω w. d. 
 
 long, μακρός ; = mucli, 
 
 πολί'ο. [τω. 
 
 look after (guard), ^-υλάτ- 
 look at, βλέπω, προςβλέ- 
 
 πω, άντιβ. 
 loquacious, πο?^υ?ώγος 2, 
 
 κωτί?\.ος 3. 
 lord, κύριος, ό, δεσπότης, 
 
 -ου, ό. [βάλλω. 
 
 lose, to, άπόλλυμι, άπο- 
 loss, to be at a, άπορέω. 
 Loves, έρωτες, ο'ι. 
 love, έρως, -ωτος, ό. 
 
 of pleasure, φιληδο- 
 νία, ή. 
 
 , to, φιλέω, στέργα ; 
 
 = ardently, έράω. 
 lover, εραστής, -οΰ, ό 
 
 of labor, φιλόπονος 
 
 2. [2. 
 
 of wisdom, φύώσοφος 
 
 Lybia, Λιβύη, ή. 
 Lycian, Λύκιος. 
 Lycurgus, Λυκούργος, ό. 
 Lydian, Λύδιος. 
 lyre, λύρα, ή, κιθάρα, ή. 
 Lysias, Λυσίας, -ου, ό. 
 
 Μ. 
 
 Macedonia, Μακεδονία, ή. 
 
 Macedonian, a, Μακεδών, 
 -όνος, ό. 
 
 mad, to be, μαίνομαι. 
 
 madness, in a fit of, μαι- 
 νόμενος, δαιμόνων. 
 
 magistrate Ακαστ^ο,-οϋ,ό. 
 
 magistrates, άρχαί, αι. 
 
 magnificent, μεγαλοπρε- 
 πής, -ές. 
 
 magnificently, πολυτελώς . 
 
 maiden, κόρη, ή. 
 
 maintain (affirm), φημί. 
 
 majestic, μέγας. 
 
 make, ποιέω ; cause to 
 make or be made, make 
 for oneself, ποιέομαι ; 
 make one something, 
 
340 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 αποδείκνυμι ; == place, 
 τίϋ-ημι ; = take place, 
 γίγνομαί. [τεύω. 
 
 make an expedition, στρα- 
 
 make use of, χρίιομαί tlvl. 
 
 man, άν&ρωπος, δ, άνήρ, 
 ανδρός, δ. 
 
 , old, γέρων, -οντος, δ. 
 
 ια&τι-ΒβΥΙβν,άνδραποδιστής, 
 -οϋ, δ. 
 
 manage, δωικέω, πολι- 
 τεύω ; = arrange,, δια- 
 τίΰ-ημι. 
 
 manifest, φανερός 3, δήλος 
 3, σαφής, -ες. 
 
 , to (show), δηλόω. 
 
 manner, τρόπος, δ ; = 
 custom, ή&ος, τό, έΰος ; 
 τό. 
 
 , in like, ομοίως. 
 
 mantle, ίμάτιον, τό. 
 
 many, πολύς. 
 
 march, a, σταΰ-μός, ό. 
 
 , to, στρατεύομαι, πο- 
 ρεύομαι. 
 
 , to begin a, (march 
 
 off), εκστρατεύομαι. 
 
 mark (evidence), τεκμή- 
 ριον, τό. 
 
 marry, γαμέω [§124, 1]. 
 
 mass, red-hot, διάπϋρος 2. 
 
 master, κύριος, ό, δεσπό- 
 της, -ου, ό. 
 
 matter (work), έργον, τό. 
 
 maturity, ακμή, ή. 
 
 meadow, λειμών, -ώνος, ό. 
 
 mean (base), κακός 3, al- 
 σχρός. 
 
 means, by no, ουδαμώς, 
 ήκιστα. 
 
 Mede, a, Μήδος, δ. 
 
 Medea, Μήδεια, ή. 
 
 Media, Μηδία, ή. 
 
 Median, Μηδικός. 
 
 medical, ιατρικός. 
 meet, to, απαντάω ; = 
 fall in with, εντυγχάνω 
 
 συντυγχάνω w. d., προς- 
 πίπτω w. d. 
 
 meeting, a, συνουσία, ή. 
 
 Megarian, Μεγαρεύς, -έως, 
 ό. 
 
 Melitus, Μέ?ί,ητος, δ. 
 
 melt, τήκω, 133. 
 
 memorial, υπόμνημα, τό, 
 μνήμα, τό. 
 
 memory, μνήμη, ή. 
 
 Memphis, Μέμφις, -ιος and 
 -ϊδος, ή. [ό. 
 
 Menelaus, Μενέλεως, -εω, 
 
 Menon, Μένων, -ωνος, ό. 
 
 mention, λόγος, ό, μϋ-&ος, ό. 
 
 mentioning, worth, αξιό- 
 λογος 2. 
 
 mercenaries, ξένοι, οι. 
 
 merciful, Ιλεως. 
 
 mere, μόνος ; adv., μόνον. 
 
 message, αγγελία, ή. 
 
 messenger, άγγελος, ό, ή ; 
 = ambassador, πρεσ- 
 βευτής, -οϋ, ό ; plural, 
 πρέσβεις. 
 
 Messenian, Μεσσήνιος, ό. 
 
 middle, middle of, μέσος 3. 
 
 midnight, μέσαι νύκτες. 
 
 might, δύναμις, -εως, ή. 
 
 mild, πράος, -εϊα, -ον, 
 ήπιος. 
 
 military years, στρατεύσι- 
 μα έτη. 
 
 milk, γάλα, -ακτος, τό. 
 
 Milo, Μίλων, -ωνος, δ. 
 
 mina, μνά, ή. 
 
 mind, νους, δ, φρένες, αι. 
 
 , to call to, μνημο- 
 νεύω τι. [μαι. 
 
 mindful of, to be, μέμνη- 
 
 mingle with, μίσγω, κε- 
 ράννυμι. 
 
 Minos, Μίνως (Gen. Μί- 
 νωος and Μίνω), δ. 
 
 Minotaur, Μινώταυρος, δ. 
 
 mirror, κάτοπτρον, τό. 
 
 misfortune, a, ατυχία, ή, 
 
 κακόν, τό, συμφορά, ή % 
 
 τνχαι, αι. 
 mislead, παράγω, παρα- 
 
 πλάζω, εξαμαρτάνω. 
 mix, μίγνυμι, μισγέω, κε- 
 
 ράννυμι. 
 mob, δήμος, δ. 
 moderate, μέτριος 3; =» 
 
 abstinent, εγκρατής, -ες. 
 moderation, μέτρον, τό, 
 
 μεσάτης, -ητος, η. 
 modern, νέος, comp.deg. of. 
 modesty, αιδώς, -ους, ή, 
 
 σωφροσύνη, ή. 
 money, χρήματα, τά. 
 , travelling, εφόδων, 
 
 τό. 
 month, μήν, μηνός, δ. 
 monument, μνήμα, τό. 
 moon, σελήνη, ή. 
 morals, ήΰη, τά. 
 more, πλεΐον, πλέον, plus ; 
 
 μάλλον, magis (comp. 
 
 much), 
 mortal, θνητός 3. 
 most, πλείστος 3. 
 most of all (especially), 
 
 μάλιστα. 
 mother, μήτηρ, -τρός, ή. 
 motion, κίνησις, -εως, ή. 
 , to be in, κινέομαι 
 
 w. Pass. Aor. fw. a. 
 mount, to, αναβαίνω έπί 
 mountain or mount, δρος, 
 
 -ους, τό. 
 mourn, οδύρομαι, λυπέο- 
 
 μαι. 
 
 for, κλαίω, πεν&έω. 
 
 mournful, λυγρός 3, λυ- 
 πηρός 3 ; = plaintive. 
 
 γοώδης, -ες, 
 mouse, μυς, -ϋός, δ. 
 mouth, στόμα, -ατός, τό. 
 move, to, κινέομαι ; = 
 
 affect, κατακλάω τινά : 
 
 moved to pity, to be. 
 
 ελεαίρω, ο'ικτείρω. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 341 
 
 much, ireAvf. Nestor, Νέστωρ, -ορός, ό. obliged, to be (necessary), 
 
 multitude, πλ^ΰος, -ους, net, a, νεφέλη, ή. δει w. ace. and inf., 
 
 τό, oi πολλοί, never, οΰποτε, ουδέποτε, αναγκαίος ειμί. 
 
 murder, to, φονεύω. μήποτε, μηδέποτε, 112. oblivion, λήϋη, ή. 
 
 Muses. Μονσαι, al. nevertheless, όμως. obscure, αφανής, -ες. [3. 
 
 muse-leader, μουσηγέτ?/ς, news, αγγελία, ή. [ό. observant of law, νόμιμος 
 
 -ου, ό. Nicocles, Νικοκλής, -έους, observe (perceive), αίσ&ά- 
 
 music, μουσική, ή. night, ννξ, νυκτός, ή. νομαι w. g. or a. 
 
 must, δεί, χρή. Nile, Νείλος, ό. observe beforehand, προ- 
 
 Mysus, ~Μυσός, ό. [ος, ό. Nisus, Νϊσοο, ό. νοέω. 
 
 Mytilenaean, Μυτιληναί- no, no one, none, ουδείς, obtain, λαμβάνω, τυγχάνω 
 
 μηδείς ; by no means, w. g. 
 
 Ν. ουδαμώς, ήκιστα; no occasion (cause), αίτιος 3. 
 
 Naked, γυανός 3. longer, ούκέτι (μηκέτι). , to (bring), άγω. 
 
 name, ovoua, τό. noble, έσι^λόο 3, γενναίος odious, αισχρός. 
 
 , to, όνοαάζω, κα?.έω, 3, ευγενής, -ες ; = hon- , to be, απεχθάνομαι. 
 
 άττο-, ποοςαγορεύω. or-loving, φιλότιμος 2. CEnoe, Οινόη, ή. 
 
 nation, έθνος, -ους, τό. nobleness of mind, γεν- offend, άμαρτάνω. 
 
 native land or country, ναιότης, -ητος, η. offer (afford), παρέχω ; as 
 
 πατρίς, -ΐδος, η. nobly, γενναίως. [oi a gift to a divinity, άνα- 
 
 nature, φύσις, -εως, ή ; noises, confused, θόρυβοι, τίΰ-ημι ; = offer sacri- 
 
 kingly, βασώικόν ήθος. north, άρκτος, ή, βορ'ρ'άς, fice, θύω. 
 
 naval, to engage in a, bat- -a, ό. offering, to bring an, θν- 
 
 tle, νανμαχέω. north-wind, βορ'ρ'άς, -α, ό. σίαν ποιέομαι. [ή. 
 
 Naxian, Νάξιος, 6. nose, ρίς, ρινός, ή. office (in the State), αρχή. 
 
 near, παρά ; adj., π?.ησίος not, ov (ουκ, ούχ) ; with often, πολλάκις. 
 
 3 ; adv., εγγύς. the Imp., μη ; not only, often as, as, όταν, οπόταν 
 necessary, αναγκαίος 3. ου μόνον ; not less, ου- [see § 183, (b)]. 
 , to be, δε Ι, χρή w. δεν ήττον ; not even, oil, έλαιον, τό. 
 
 ace. and inf. ουδέ (μηδέ). old, πρέσβυς, -εια, -υ, γε- 
 
 necessity, ανάγκη, ή. nothing, ουδέν (μηδέν). ραιός 3 ; never growing 
 
 neck, δέρη, ή. nourish, τρέφω. old, άγηρως. 
 
 necklace, στρεπτός, ό. Numa, Νουμάς, -ά, ό. age, γήρας, τό. [ό. 
 
 need, to, δέομαι w. g., number, αριθμός, δ. man, γέρων, -οντος, 
 
 χρήζω w. g. nurture, to, τρέφω ; = Olympus, "Ολυμπος, ό. 
 
 neediness, σπάνις, -εως, ή. educate, παιδεύω. omit, παρα/,είπω. 
 
 neglect, to. άμελέω w. g. ; ' once, άπαξ ; = before, 
 
 = to esteem lightly, Ο. πρότερον ; = at a cer- 
 
 δλιγωρέω ; = overlook, that, είθε w. opt. tain time, ποτέ. 
 
 περιοράω ; = pass by, oath, όρκος, ό. one, any one, some one, 
 
 πάρειμι. [ή. , false, έπίορκον, τό. τις ; when contrasted 
 
 neighbor, γείτων, -όνος, ό, obedient, κατήκοος 2 w. d. with the other, by εϊς 
 
 neither, ουδέ ; neither — obey, πείθομαι w. d., ύπα- μέν or έτερος. 
 
 nor, ούτε — ούτε, μήτε κούω w. d. one another, of, αλλήλων. 
 
 — μήτε. object to (bring as a charge only, μόνον. 
 
 Neptune (Poseidon), Πο- against), έγκαλέω τι open, to be, άνέωγα. 
 
 σειδών, -ωνος, ό. τινι. opinion, an, γνώμη, ή. 
 29* 
 
342 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 opinion, to be of, νομίζω, 
 ηγέομαι. 
 
 , from the, νομίσαντες. 
 
 opposite, ενάντιος 3, Ετε- 
 ρος 3. 
 
 oppressive, χαλεπός 3. 
 
 oracle, χρησμός, b. 
 
 — — • , to consult an, μαν- 
 τεύομαι. 
 
 order, κόσμος, ό ; = a line, 
 τάξις, -εως, ή. 
 
 order that, in, Ινα, ως. 
 
 ——, good, εύκοσμία, 'η. 
 
 , to ( = to arrange), 
 
 τάττω, διατ. ; = com- 
 mand, κελεύω w. ace. 
 and inf., έντέλλω. 
 
 origin, common, συγγε- 
 νής, -ες. 
 
 ornament, κόσμος, ό. 
 
 Orthia, Όρθια, ή. 
 
 Osiris, Όσιρις, -ϊδος, ό. 
 
 Ossa, "Οσσα, η. 
 
 other, the ( = alter), έτε- 
 ρος 3 ; === alius, άλλος. 
 
 othei'wise (= another) 
 άλλος. 
 
 ought, δει, χρή, ωφελε. 
 
 out of, εκ. 
 
 over, υπέρ. 
 
 overhanging (over), υπέρ. 
 
 overturn, ανατρέπω, περιτ 
 
 owe, οφείλω. 
 
 own, Ιδιος 3 ; his own, τά 
 εαυτού. 
 
 οχ, βοϋς, βοός, ό. 
 
 Ρ. 
 
 Pain, άλγος, -ους, τό ; = 
 grief, λύπη, η ; = se- 
 vere, οδύνη, η. 
 
 painting, ζωγραφιά, η. 
 
 palace, royal, βασίλεια, τά. 
 
 pale, ωχρός 3. 
 
 parasang, παρασάγγης, 
 -ου, ό. 
 
 pardon, to, συγγιγνί σκω. 
 
 patent, γονεύς, -έως, ό. 
 
 Paris, Τίάρις, -ιδος, ό. 
 
 park, παράδεισος, ό. 
 
 part, a, μέρος, -ους, τό. 
 
 , to, μερίζω ; take part 
 
 in, μετέχω w. g. 
 
 participate in, μετέχω. 
 
 parties, both, άμφοϊν λόγος. 
 
 pass ( = go), πορεύομαι. 
 
 by, παραβαίνω. 
 
 — ; — , to (of life), διάγω ; 
 time in public, έν τω 
 φανερω είναι. 
 
 passage across, πάροδος, η. 
 
 passion, πάθος, -ους, τό ; 
 = evil desire, επιθυ- 
 μία, η. 
 
 past (what is past), παρε- 
 ληλυθώς, •υϊα, -ός. 
 
 path, οδός, ή. 
 
 pay, μισθός, ό. [δωμι. 
 
 , to, άποτίνω, άποδί- 
 
 peace, ειρήνη. 
 
 , to make, είρηνην 
 
 ποιέομαι. 
 
 peacock, ταώς, -ω, ό. 
 
 peep up or out, ανακύπτω. 
 
 Peleus, ΤΙηλεύς, -έως, ό. 
 
 Pelops, Τΐέλοψ, -οπός, ό. 
 
 Peloponnesian, ΤΙελοπον- 
 νησιακός. 
 
 Peloponnesus, Τίελοπόν- 
 νησος, η. 
 
 peltastae, πελτασταί, ol. 
 
 penetrate into, ειςπίπτω 
 εις τι. 
 
 people, δήμος, 6; = na- 
 tion, έθνος, τό ; = mul- 
 titude, πλήθος, τό. 
 
 perceive, αισθάνομαι, γιγ- 
 νώσκω. 
 
 perform, εργάζομαι, δια- 
 πράττομαι, άνύω ; = 
 display, άποδείκνυμι ; 
 = take place, γίγνομαι. 
 
 perfume, μϋρον, τό. 
 
 perhaps, Ισως. 
 
 ΤβΥΐ^δ,ΤΙερικλής,-έους, ό. 
 peril, κίνδυνος, ό. 
 period (time), χρόνος, ό. 
 perish, άπόλλυμαι. 
 permit, έάω, δίδωμι : it 18 
 
 permitted, έξεστι. 
 Persian, ΤΙέρσης, -ου, ό. 
 person (appearance), εί- 
 δος, -ους, τό ; =. body, 
 
 σώμα, τό. 
 persuade, πείθω w. a. 
 persuasiveness, πειθώ, 
 
 -ους, η. 
 perverted, σκόλιος 3. 
 Phaeacians, Φαίακες, ol. 
 Phanes, Φάνης, -ητος, ό. 
 Philip, Φίλιππος, ό. 
 philosopher, φιλόσοφος, ό. 
 philosophize, φιλοσοφέω. 
 philosophy, φιλοσοφία, ή. 
 Phoenicians, Φοίνικες, ol • 
 
 adj., Φοινίκειος. 
 Phorcys, Φόρκυς, -υος, 6. 
 Phryxus, Φρίξος, ό. 
 Phrygians, Φρύγες, ol. 
 physician, ιατρός, ό. 
 pieces, to tear iu, 6iafh 
 
 ρηγνυμι. 
 piety, ευσέβεια, η. 
 pillar, στήλη, ή. 
 pine, ελάτη, η. 
 pious, ευσεβής, -ες. 
 pity, ελεαίρω, οικτείρω ; 
 
 to have, on, κατελεέω 
 
 τινά. [αντί. 
 
 place, τόπος, δ ; in, οι, 
 — — , to, τίθημι. 
 plague, to, τείρω. 
 plaintiff, κατήγορος, ό. 
 plane-tree, πλάτανος, ή. 
 plant, to, εμφυτεύω. 
 Plataeans,n/laraia5y-E<yi>, 
 
 οι. 
 Plataea, ΤΙλάταια, τ}. 
 Plato, Τίλάτων, -ωνος. ό. 
 play, to, παίζω ; play at, 
 
 παίζω. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 o±3 
 
 plea, λό)ος, ύ. 
 pleasant, ηδύς, -εϊα, -v. 
 pleasantly, ήδέως. 
 please, αρέσκω w. d. 
 pleasure, ηδονή, ή. 
 plot, a, επιβουλή, ή. 
 against, to, έπιβου- 
 
 λεύω w. d. 
 plunge, όίπτω. 
 Pluto, ΤΙλούτων, -ωνος, δ. 
 poet, ποιητής, -ov, δ. 
 poetry, epic, ποίησις 'επών, 
 
 τά έπη. 
 political, πολιτικός 3. 
 pollute, μιαίνω. 
 Polycletus, Ί1ολύκ?^ειτος,ό. 
 Pontns Euxinus, ΤΙόντος 
 
 Εύξεινος, δ. 
 poor, πένης, -ητος, πενι- 
 χρός 3; =τα.βΆΏ.,φαϋλος. 
 , to be, πένομαι, πε- 
 
 νητεύω. 
 poorly (badly), κακώς. 
 Poseidon (Neptune), Πο- 
 
 σείδών, -ώνος, δ. 
 possess, έχω, κέκτημαι ; 
 
 oneself of, κρατέω w. g. 
 possession, κτήμα, τό, κτή- 
 
 σις, ή, ουσία, ή. 
 possible, δυνατός 3; as 
 
 quickly as, ως τάχιστα. 
 
 , to be, έξεστι. 
 
 poverty, πενία, ή. 
 power, δύναμις, -εως, ή; 
 
 = influence, εξουσία, η ; 
 
 to be in the, of, γίγνο- 
 
 μαι επί τινι. 
 — — , it is in one's (pos- 
 sible), έξεστι. 
 practice, άσκησις, η. 
 practise, to, μελετάω, άσ- 
 
 κέω, γυμνάζω ; the last 
 
 two, usually of athletic 
 
 exercises, 
 praise, έπαινος, δ. 
 , to, έπηινέω. 
 prater, άδολέσχη:, -ου, δ. 
 
 prating, άδολεσχία, ή. 
 pray, εύχομαι ; == entreat, 
 
 ικετεύω. 
 prayer, ευχή, η. 
 
 precaution, πρόνοια, ή. 
 prefer, αίρέομαι. 
 
 preparation, με?^έτη, ή. 
 
 prepare oneself, παρασ- 
 κευάζομαι ; for some- 
 thing, είς τι. 
 
 present, παρών, ένεστώς, 
 -υ'ια, -ως. [ρέχω. 
 
 (submit, afford), πα- 
 
 , to be, πάρειμι, ήκω. 
 
 presence, σώζω. 
 
 •ρκςίάβηί,προςτατής,-οϋ,ό. 
 
 press into, ειςπίπτω είς τι. 
 
 on, έγκειμαι. 
 
 pretence, πρόφάσις, -εως, ή. 
 
 pretend, προςποιέομαι, 
 φάσκω. 
 
 prevail (exist), ειμί ; (of 
 a usage), κεϊμαι. 
 
 prevent, είργω, απέχω. 
 
 pride, φρονήματα, τά ; = 
 arrogance, νβρις, -εως,ή. 
 
 oneself, to, γαυρόο- 
 
 μαι, άγάλλομαι επί τινι. 
 
 priest, ιερεύς, -έως, δ. 
 
 prison, δεσμωτήριον, τό. 
 
 prisoner, αιχμάλωτος, δ. 
 
 private capacity, ιδία. 
 
 prize, άϋ-?.ον, τό. 
 
 highly, to, ποιέομαι 
 
 περί πολικού. 
 
 proceed, βαίνω, προβαίνω. 
 
 proclamation, to make, 
 εκφαίνω. 
 
 procure (=fmd for), ευ- 
 ρίσκω. 
 
 prodigy, τέρας, -ατός, τό. 
 
 profess, επαγγέλλομαι. 
 
 proffer, παρέχω, επαρκέω. 
 
 proficiency, to make, in, 
 προκόπτω, έπιδίδωμι 
 προς or επί τι. 
 
 profit, to, ώφε?ιέω; what 
 
 does it proiit % τι συμ- 
 φέρει, [ficiency. 
 progress, to make, see pro- 
 prohibit, απαγορεύω, άπει- 
 
 πεϊν. 
 prominent, to be, above, 
 προέχω. 
 
 promise, to, ύπισχνέομαι, 
 επαγγέλλομαι. [ή. 
 
 promptitude,o£z;r?7c,-i7rof, 
 
 properly, άξιο?ώγως. 
 
 property, χρήματα, τά, ου- 
 σία, ή. 
 
 Proserpine, ΤΙερσεφόνη, ή. 
 
 prosper, to, ευ Φέρομαι. 
 
 prosperity, ευτυχία, ή. 
 
 prosperous, to be, ευτυ- 
 χέω, εύδαιμονέω. 
 
 proud of, to be, σεμνύνο- 
 μαι επί τινι, άγάλλομαι 
 επί τινι. 
 
 provide for, προςτ'ώημι. 
 
 for oneself in addi- 
 tion to, προςπορίζομαι. 
 
 provident, to be, προνοέο- 
 μαι w. g. 
 
 provided that, ε'ι, εάν. 
 
 provisions, επιτήδεια, τά. 
 
 prudence, σωφροσύνη, ή. 
 
 prudent, φρόνιμος 3; = 
 moderate, μέτριος 3. 
 
 public, δημόσιος 3; = 
 common, κοινός 3 ; in 
 a public capacity, δη- 
 μοσία ; to pass time in 
 public, kv τω φανερφ 
 είναι. 
 
 public square, άγοοά, ή. 
 
 punish, κολάζω, άποτίνο- 
 μαι ; to punish by a 
 fine, ζημώω. 
 
 punishment, τιμωρία, ή ; 
 as a fine, ζημία, ή. [μαι. 
 
 purchase, ώνέομαι, πρία- 
 
 pupil, μαϋητής, -ον, δ. 
 
 purple, πορφύρεος 3, φοι- 
 νίκεος 3 (see § 29). 
 
344 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 purpose, for any, εις τι. 
 pursue, διώκω, άκολον&έω. 
 put the hand to, επιχει- 
 
 ρέω w. d. 
 put on, άμφιέννυμι, άμπέ- 
 
 χομαι. 
 put to death, άποκτείνω ; 
 
 = murder, φονεύω. 
 Pyrrhus, Τΐύρβος, δ. 
 Pythia, ϊΐν&ία, rj. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quail, a, όρτυξ, -ϋγος, δ. 
 queen, βασίλεια, ή. 
 quick, ώκύς, -εϊα, -ν. [ψα. 
 quickly, ταχέως, τάχα, αΐ- 
 — ■ — as possible, ως τά- 
 χιστα. 
 quiet (adj.), ήσυχος 2. 
 
 Ε. 
 
 Eace, γένος, -ους, τό ; hu- 
 man, άν&ρώπων γένος. 
 
 rail at, σκώπτω. 
 
 rain, δμβρος, δ. 
 
 ram, κριός, δ. 
 
 rank, a, τάξις, -εως, ή. 
 
 rapacious, άρπαξ, -άγος. 
 
 rapidly, ταχέως, τάχα. 
 
 rather, μάλλον. 
 
 rational, σώφρων, -όνος. 
 
 ravage, δηόω. 
 
 raven, κόραξ, -άκος, δ. 
 
 reach, εφικνέομαι w. g. 
 
 ready, to be (willing), 
 
 • έ&έλω. 
 
 readiness, προθυμία, ή. 
 
 reality, in, άληΰώς. 
 
 reason, λόγος, δ ; with 
 reason, δικαίως. 
 
 receive, δέχομαι, λαμβάνω. 
 
 recently, άρτι, έναγχος. 
 
 recompense (favor}, χά- 
 ρις, -ϊτος, ή. 
 
 record together, συγγράφω. 
 
 rectify, εϋ&ύνω. 
 
 Red ΒΟ&,Έρυ&ρά&άλαττα. 
 
 reed, a, κάλαμος, δ, ρ"ιψ, 
 ριπός, ή. 
 
 reflect, διανοέομαι, λογί- 
 ζομαι. 
 
 reflection, λογισμός, δ. 
 
 refuge, καταφυγή, ή. 
 
 regal, βασιλέως. 
 
 regulate (= prepare), κα- 
 τασκευάζω. 
 
 reign over, βασιλεύω. 
 
 rejoice, χαίρω w. ά.,ήδομαι. 
 
 release, απολύω. 
 
 rely upon (trust), πιστεύω. 
 
 remain, μένω, διαμ. ; con- 
 cealed, διάλαν&άνω. 
 
 remember, μέμνημαι w. g. 
 
 remembrance, μνήμη, ή. 
 
 remote, most, έσχατος 3. 
 
 render effeminate, μαλα- 
 κίζω ; service to (be a 
 slave to), δουλεύω w. d. ; 
 aid to, βοηΰέω w. d. 
 
 renown, εϋκλεια, ή, δόξα, 
 ή, κλέος, -ους, τό. 
 
 repay, άποδίδωμι, αμεί- 
 βομαι τινά τινι ; some- 
 thing is repaid, τϊ άπο- 
 λαμβάνεται. 
 
 repel, άπωϋ-έω. 
 
 repent, μεταμέλομαι, or 
 impers. μεταμέλει τινί 
 τίνος. 
 
 report, a, λόγος, δ. 
 
 reproach, to, ψέγω,έλέγχω. 
 
 reputable, εύδοξος 2. 
 
 reputation, εϋκλεια, ή, 
 δόξα, ή. 
 
 , good, ευδοξία, ή. 
 
 request, to, αίτέω, δέομαι 
 w. g. [εύχν> V- 
 
 , a, δέησις, -εως, ή, 
 
 requite a favor, άποδίδω- 
 μι χάριν. 
 
 rescue, σώζω. 
 
 residence, governor's, αρ- 
 χείου, τό. 
 
 resolutely, προΰύμως. 
 
 resolution, a (decree),/?or> 
 λευμα, τό, ψήφισμα, τό. 
 
 resolve, γιγνώσκω, δοκεϊ 
 τινι. 
 
 respect, αιδώς, -οϋς, ή ; to 
 have, for, α'ιδέομαί τίνα ; 
 with respect to, περί. 
 
 respectable, αξιόλογος 2. 
 
 response, to give a, χράω ; 
 a, χρησμός, δ. 
 
 rest, the, άλλος ; = reli- 
 quus, λοιπός 3. 
 
 restore, άποδίδωμι. 
 
 restore, hard to, δυσεπα- 
 νόρ&ωτος 2. 
 
 restrain, εϊργω, απέχω. 
 
 retire, άναχωρέω. [^. 
 
 retreat, a, κατάβάσις, -εως, 
 
 , to, άναχωρέω. 
 
 return, άναχωρέω. 
 
 reveal, έκκαλύπτω ; itself, 
 δηλόομαι. 
 
 revenge oneself on, or up- 
 on, τιμωρέομαι w. a., 
 αμύνομαι w. a. 
 
 revenue, πρόςοδος, ή. 
 
 reverence, αιδώς, -ους, ή. 
 
 , to, α'ιδέομαί, σέβο- 
 μαι ; highly, περί πολ- 
 λού ποιέομαι. 
 
 revile, λοιδορέω w. a. 
 
 revolt, to cause to, άφίσ- 
 τημι ; Mid., to revolt. 
 
 reward, αϋ-λον, τό, γέρας, 
 -ως, τό. [τος, δ. 
 
 Ehampsinitus, Ύαμψίνι- 
 
 rich, πλούσιος 3, εύπορος 
 2; be or become rich, 
 πλουτέω. [τα, τά. 
 
 riches, πλούτος, δ, χρήαα- 
 
 ride by, παρελαύνω. 
 
 right (just), δίκαιος 3 j =* 
 dexter, δεξιός 3. 
 
 ring, δακτύλιος δ. 
 
 ripe, πέπων. 
 
 rise up, άνίσταμαι. 
 
 river, ποταμός, ό. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 845 
 
 road, οδός, ή. 
 
 rob, αρπάζω ; = deprive 
 
 of, άφαιρέομαι. 
 robber, λησι ής, -οϋ, ό. 
 robe, στολή, ή, ίμάτιον, τό. 
 rock, -πέτρα, ή. 
 Romans, 'Ρωμαίοι, ol. 
 room, άνώγεων, -ω, τό. 
 root, βίζα, ή. 
 rope, κάλως, -ω, δ. 
 rose, βόδον, τό. 
 rough, σκληρός 3. 
 royal, βασιλέως ; royal 
 
 dominion, βασιλεία, ή ; 
 
 royal palace, βασίλεια, 
 
 τα. 
 rugged, τραχός 3. 
 ruin, to, άπόλλνμι. 
 , to go to, at the same 
 
 time, σνναπόλλυμι. 
 rule, rule over, to, άρχω, 
 
 βασιλεύω. 
 ruler, άρχων, -οντος, ό. 
 run, τρέχω ; run to, προς- 
 
 τρέχω. 
 
 away, διδράσκω, άπο- 
 
 διδράσκω w. a. 
 
 past, παρατρέχω. 
 
 in different direc- 
 tions, διαδιδράσκω. 
 rush, to, ορμάω. 
 
 Sacred to, ιερός 3 w. g. 
 
 sacrifice, θυσία, ή ; to sac- 
 rifice or offer, θύω ; to 
 bring, θυσίαν ποιέομαι. 
 
 sadness, λύπη, ή. 
 
 safe, ασφαλής, -ες. 
 
 safely, ασφαλώς. 
 
 safety, σωτηρία, η. 
 
 sail, πλέω. 
 
 — — away, αποπλέω. 
 
 sake of, for the, ένεκα, περί. 
 
 Salamis, Σαλαμίς, -Ινος, ή. 
 
 same, the, ό αυτός. 
 
 Samian Σάμιος, ό. 
 
 Sardis, Σάρδεις, -εων, αι. 
 Sarpedon, Σαρπηδών, 
 
 -όνος, ό. 
 satisfaction, δίκη, ή ; to 
 
 give, δίδω μι. 
 say, λέγω, φημί, ειπείν. 
 scarcely, μικρόν ; scarcely 
 
 escape, μικρόν έκφεύγω. 
 scatter, σκεδάζω, σκεδάν- 
 
 νυμι, διασπείρω. 
 sceptre, σκήπτρον, τό. 
 school, see Thales. 
 science, επιστήμη, ή. 
 sciences, γράμματα, τά. 
 scourge, to, μαστιγόω. 
 scout, a, σκοπός, b. 
 scythe-bearing, δρεπανη- 
 
 φόρος 2. 
 Scythia, Σκν&ία, ή. 
 sea, θά?,αττα, ή ; by sea, 
 
 κατά θάλατταν. 
 sea-coast,7rapai?aAarria,57. 
 sea-bird, θαλαττία όρνις. 
 sea-fight, νανμακία, ή. 
 season, against (unsea- 
 sonably), παρά καιρόν. 
 secret, κρυπτός 3. 
 secretly, κρυφά, see § 175,3. 
 secure, ασφαλής, -ες; = 
 
 firm, βέβαιος 3. 
 securely, ασφαλώς. 
 sedentary trade, βαναυσι- 
 
 κή τέχνη. [μαι. 
 
 see, βλέπω, όράω, δέρκο- 
 
 to it, σκοπέ ω. 
 
 seek, seek for, ζητέω. 
 seem, δοκέω, φαίνομαι. 
 seen, not to be, αθέατος 2. 
 seize, συλλαμβάνω ; seize 
 
 quickly, άναρπάζω. 
 self, αυτός. [ή. 
 
 self-command, εγκράτεια, 
 self-control, εγκράτεια, ή. 
 self ίθΜ%\ίΙ,αϋτοδίδακτος 2. 
 Selinus, Σελινοΰς, -ovv- 
 
 τος, ό. [μαι. 
 
 sell, πιπράσκω, άποδίδο- 
 
 Semiramis, Σεμίραμις, 
 -ϊδος, ή. 
 
 8ΒΧΐά,πέμπω,στέλ?ιω,άποσ. 
 
 back, αποπέμπω. 
 
 ■ forth or οηί,έκπέμπω. 
 
 senseless, ασύνετος 2. 
 
 sensible, συνετός 3 ; to be, 
 σώφρον έω. 
 
 sentence (judicial), κρίσις, 
 -εως, ή, δίκη, ή. 
 
 separate, to, διίστημι, κρί- 
 νω ; (intrans.), δίχα γίγ- 
 νομαι, διακρίνομαι. 
 
 seriously, to speak, σπου- 
 δάζω. 
 
 serve (= be a slave), δου- 
 λεύω, w. d. ; == render 
 service, ύπηρετέω w. d. ; 
 = become, γίγνομαι. 
 
 oervice (benefit), θερα- 
 πεία, ή. 
 
 , to render, to, δου- 
 λεύω w. d., χαρίζομαι 
 w. d. 
 
 servitude, δουλεία, ή. 
 
 set (place), καθίζω. 
 
 set off (of a journey), πο- 
 ρεύομαι, [μι 
 
 set upon (place), έπιτίθη 
 
 sever, διίστημι. 
 
 shake, σείω. 
 
 shame, αιδώς, -ονς, ή. 
 
 shameful, αισχρός, άεικής, 
 -ές. 
 
 shave, ξυρέω. 
 
 sheep, πρόβάτον, τό, οϊς, 
 οίος, ό, ή. 
 
 shelter, στέγω. 
 
 shepherd, ποιμήν, -ένος, ό, 
 
 νομεύς, -έως, ό. 
 
 *Ί 
 
 shield, ασπίς, -ίδος, 
 
 small, πέλτη, ή. 
 shields man, παλταστης, 
 
 -ου, ό. 
 ship, ναϋς, νεώς, η. 
 shoe, υπόδημα, τό. 
 short, βραχύς, -εΐα, -ύ. 
 
346 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 shortly, εν βραχεί, 
 
 shoulder, ώμος, ό. 
 
 shouting, a (calling to), 
 παρακέλευσις, -εως, ή. 
 
 show, to, δείκνυμι,άποδείκ- 
 νυμι, φαίνω, άποφαίνω, 
 φανερόν ποιέω, δηλόω ; 
 = offer, παρέχω, [inf. 
 
 shrink from, κατοκνέω w. 
 
 shun, Φεύγω w. a. 
 
 shut, κλείω, κατακλείω. 
 
 in or up, κατακλείω, 
 
 καΰ-είργω. 
 
 Sicily, Σικελία, ή. 
 
 sick, άσΰενής, -ες. 
 
 sick, to be, νοσέω, άσΰενέω. 
 
 side, by the, of, παρά. 
 
 Sidon, Σιδών, -ωνος, ή. 
 
 Sidonian, Σιδώνιος. 
 
 sight, at sight of, Part, of 
 όράω. 
 
 signal, to give a, σημαίνω. 
 
 silent, to be, σιωπάω, σι- 
 γάω. 
 
 silver, άργυρος, ό. 
 
 simple, άπλόος, 29. 
 
 sin, to, άμαρτάνω. 
 
 since (because), ore, έπεί; 
 see also § 176, 1. 
 
 sing, to, άδω. 
 
 single (= any), in a nega- 
 tive sentence, ουδείς, 
 § 177, 6. 
 
 single combat, to engage 
 in. μονομαχέω. 
 
 sink into or under, κατα- 
 δύω ; sink away (fall), 
 πίπτω. 
 
 Sinope, Σινώπη, η. 
 
 sister, άλελφή, η. 
 
 sit on, εφιζάνω w. a. 
 
 slave, δούλος, ό. 
 
 , to be a, δουλεύω. 
 
 slave-labor, δουλεϊον έρ- 
 γον. 
 
 slavery, δουλεία, ή. 
 
 slay, άποκτείνω, φονεύω. 
 
 sleep, ύπνος, ό. 
 
 , to, εύδω, κα&εύδω, 
 
 δαρΰ-άνω. 
 small, μικρός 3, ολίγος 3. 
 smell, to, όσφραίνομαι. 
 
 of anything, όζω. 
 
 Smerdis, Σμέρδις, -ϊος, ό. 
 snare, παγίς, -ίδος, ή ; lay 
 
 snares for, ενεδρεύω. 
 snow, χιών, -όνος, η. 
 snow-storm, νιφετός, ό. 
 so, ούτως ; = this, τούτο. 
 so far from, αντί. 
 so that, ώςτε [§ 186]. 
 soar upward, άναπέτομαι. 
 sober-minded, σώφρων, 
 
 -όνος. [ό. 
 
 Socrates, Σωκράτης, -ους, 
 soldier, a, στρατιώτης, -ου, 
 
 ό. 
 solitude, έρημία, η. 
 some, ενιοι ; some one, 
 
 τις ; something, τϊ. 
 sometimes, ένιότε, ποτέ. 
 son, ν ιός, ό. [τό. 
 
 song, ώδη, η, μέλος, -ους, 
 soon, τάχα. 
 
 sooner, πρότερον ; = ra- 
 ther, μάλλον. 
 sophist, σοφιστής, -ού, ό. 
 Sophocles,2o$o/c/U7c,-eovc, 
 
 ό. 
 sorrow, λύπη, ή. 
 soul, ψνχή, ή. 
 sound, to the, of, see 
 
 § 167, 7. 
 sound-mindedness, σω- 
 
 φροσύΧη, ή. 
 source, πηγή, ή. 
 south, μεσημβρία, η. [ό. 
 sovereign, άρχων, -οντος, 
 sovereignty, αρχή, ή. 
 sow, to, σπείρω. 
 spacious, sufficiently ( = 
 
 sufficient), Ικανός 3. 
 sparing, to be, φείδομαι 
 
 w. g. 
 
 Sparta, Σπάρτη, η. 
 
 Spartan, a, Σπαρτιάτης, 
 -ου, 6. 
 
 speak, λέγω, φϋέγγομαι ; 
 speak seriously, σπου- 
 δάζω. 
 
 spear, δόρυ, τό [§ 39]. 
 
 spectator, -&εάτής, -ου, ό. 
 
 speech, λόγος, ό, μύ&ος, ό ; 
 freedom or boldness of 
 παββησία, ή. 
 
 speedily, τάχα, ταχέως. 
 
 Sphinx, Σφίγξ, -γγος, ή. 
 
 spirit, νους, νού, ο, φρήν, 
 -ένος, ή. 
 
 splendid, λαμπρός 3, πο- 
 λυτελής, -ές. [ό. 
 
 sportsman, ΰ-ηρευτής, -ου, 
 
 spread, διασπείρω. 
 
 spring, belonging to the, 
 εαρινός 3. 
 
 spring from ( = be, or 
 originate from), ειμί, 
 γίγνομαι. 
 
 square, public, αγορά, ή. 
 
 stadium, στάδιον, τό. 
 
 stag, έλάφος, δ, η. 
 
 stage, σκηνή, ή. 
 
 stand, to, στήναι, έστάναι. 
 
 firm, υπομένω. 
 
 state, a, πολιτεία, η, πό- 
 λις, -εως, ή. 
 
 , relating to the, πο- 
 λιτικός 3. 
 
 station, to, τίΰημι. [η. 
 
 statuary, άνδριαντοποιία, 
 
 statue, άνδριάς, -άντος, ό. 
 
 ζίβ&άΐ&βί,έστηκώς,-υϊα,-ός. 
 
 steal, κλέπτω ; steal away 
 αρπάζω. 
 
 steersman, κυβερνήτης., 
 -ου, ό. 
 
 Stesichorian, Στησιχόριος. 
 
 Stesichorus, Στησίχορος, υ. 
 
 still (yet), έτι. 
 
 stillness, ησυχία, η. 
 
 stir (move), to, κινέω. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 347 
 
 stolen, κλόπιμος 3. 
 
 stone (made of stone) ii- 
 ■&ινος 3. 
 
 — — , to, καταπετρόω. 
 
 stranger, ξένος, ύ. 
 
 stratagems, to be exposed 
 to, επιβουλεύομαι. 
 
 street, οδός, ή. 
 
 strength, βώμη, ή, αλκή, ή. 
 
 stripes, πληγαί, αι. 
 
 strive (= endeavor), πει- 
 ράομαι ; = seek, ζητέω. 
 
 for or after, ορέγο- 
 μαι w. g., διώκω w. a. 
 
 strong, ισχυρός 3 ; = firm, 
 βέβαιος 3, ασφαλής, -ές. 
 
 Brady, to, μαν&άνω. 
 
 Stupid, ασύνετος 2, τετυ- 
 φωμένος 3. 
 
 subject to, νποχυς 2. 
 
 subject, to, χειρόομαι w. a., 
 δουλόω w. a. ; subject to 
 oneself, καταστρέφομαι. 
 
 subjugate, χειρόομαι, δου- 
 λόω. 
 
 submissive, ταπεινός 3. 
 
 submit (present, afford), 
 παοέχω. 
 
 to (serve), δουλεύω. 
 
 subsistence, τροφή, ή. 
 
 subvert, ανατρέπω. 
 
 success, ευτυχία, ή ; — 
 riches, πλούτος, b, όλ- 
 βος, b. 
 
 succor, to, παραστήναι, 
 συμπονέω w. d. 
 
 such, τοιούτος 3 [§ 60]. 
 
 such as, οίος [§ 182, 7]. 
 
 suffer, πάσχω ; = permit, 
 περιοράω w. Part. 
 
 suffering, πόνος, b. 
 
 sufficient, ικανός 3 ; to be, 
 Ικανώς έχω. 
 
 sufficiently, ικανώς. 
 
 suitably to (conformably), 
 κατά. 
 
 sum, large (much), πολύς. 
 
 summer, -&έρος, -ους, τό. 
 sumptuousness, πολυτέ- 
 λεια, ή. 
 sun, ήλιος, ό. 
 superiors, οι κρείττονες. 
 supping, while, Part, of 
 
 δείπνω w. μεταξύ. 
 suppose, ήγέομαι, νομίζω. 
 supremacy, ηγεμονία, ή. 
 sure, ασφα?^ής, -ές, έμπε- 
 
 δος2. 
 surely, άτρεκέως ; by oh 
 
 μή (see § 177, 9). 
 surpass, νικάω τινά, νπερ- 
 
 βάλλομαί τίνα. [ρί. 
 surrounding (around), πε- 
 Susian, Σούσιος, ό. 
 swear, όμνϋμι. 
 
 falsely, έπιορκέω. 
 
 sweat, ίδρώς, -ώτος, ό. 
 sweet, ηδύς, γλυκύς, -εϊα, 
 
 -ν. [ρξύς. 
 
 swift, ταχύς, -εϊα, -ύ, ώκύς, 
 swiftly, τάχα. 
 swim, νέω. 
 sympathize, ελεαίρω. 
 sympathy, be moved to, 
 
 έ?^εαίρω. 
 Syracuse, Συράκουσαι, αί. 
 Syracusian,2vpa/coi»aioc,o. 
 Syrian, Σύριος, b. 
 
 Τ. 
 
 Take (receive), λαμβάνω ; 
 = capture, α'ιρέω. 
 
 care, έπιμέλομαι. 
 
 from, άφαιρέομαί τι- 
 νά τι. [τι. 
 
 heed to, εύλαβέομαί 
 
 hold of, άπτομαι w. g. 
 
 in charge, λαμβάνω. 
 
 place (be done), γίγ- 
 
 νομαι. 
 
 taken, to be, άλίσκομαι. 
 
 talk, to, λαλέω, κωτίλλω. 
 
 tame out, έξημερόω. 
 
 taste, to, γεύομαι w. g. 
 
 teach, διδάσκω τινά τι. 
 teacher, διδάσκαλος, b. 
 tear, a, δάκρϋον, τό. 
 tear, to, βήγνϋμι. 
 in pieces, διαββήγνϋ- 
 
 μι. [b. 
 
 Telamon, Ύελαμών, -ωνος, 
 tell, λέγω, φράζω. 
 Tempe, Τέμπη, -ων, τα. 
 temperate, εγκρατής, -ές. 
 temple, νεώς, -εω, ό. 
 temple-robber,i£j0<5ai>/loc,o 
 tend (feed), βόσκω. 
 tent, σκηνή, ή. 
 terrible, δεινός 3. 
 terrify, καταπλήττω, έκπ. 
 testimony, μαρτυρία, ή. 
 Teucer, Τεύκρος, ό. 
 Thales, Θαλής, b (G. θά* 
 
 λεω, D. -ή, Α. -fjv) , 
 
 Thales and his school, 
 
 οι άμφι θαλην. 
 Thamyris, Θάμυρις, -ως 
 
 and -ίδος, ή. 
 than, ή ; also by the rela 
 
 tion of the Gen. after a 
 
 comparative, 
 thank, to, χάριν ειδέναι. 
 that, in order, ως, δπως. 
 theatre, ΰ-έατρον, τό. 
 Theban, Θηβαίος, b. 
 Thebes, θήβαι, αί. 
 theft, κλοπή, η. 
 Themistocles, θεμιστο- 
 
 κ?\,ής, -έους, ό. [τος, b. 
 Theophrastus, θεόφρασ- 
 therefore, ονν. * 
 therewith, μετά τούτον. 
 Thermodon, θερμώδων ί 
 
 -οντος, ό. 
 Thermopylae, θερμοπν- 
 
 λαι, αί. 
 Thesprotia, Θεσπρωτία, ή. 
 Thessalian, θετταλός, ό. 
 thief, κλέπτης, -ου, ό, 
 
 κλώψ, -ωπός, b. 
 thievish, κλόπιμος 3. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 thing, χρήμα, τό, κτήμα, τό. 
 
 think, ήγέομαι, νομίζω, 
 δοκέω. 
 
 about, φροντίζω w. a. 
 
 thirst, δίψος, -ους, τό. 
 
 , to, or be thirsty, 
 
 διψάω. 
 
 thirsty, ανος. 
 
 thoroughly, to understand, 
 διαγιγνώσκω. 
 
 though, καϊ αν ; also by a 
 Part., see § 176, 1. 
 
 thought, νόημα, τό. 
 
 thoughtful, φρόνιμος 3. 
 
 Thracian, θρρξ. -άκός, δ. 
 
 throne, θρόνος, ό. 
 
 , to ascend, εις βασι- 
 
 λείαν καταστηναι. 
 
 through, δια. 
 
 throughout, ανά ; = whol- 
 ly, πάντως. 
 
 throw, βίπτω. 
 
 a bridge over, άνα- 
 
 ζενγννμι. 
 
 down, καθίημι. 
 
 into disorder, ταράτ- 
 
 τω. 
 
 — . — out ( as words ) φίπτω. 
 
 thus, οϋτω(ς). 
 
 thwart, εναντιόομαι w. d. 
 
 Tigranes, Τιγράνης, -ov, 6. 
 
 tile, πλίνϋος, ή. 
 
 till, έως, μέχρι. 
 
 time, χρόνος, δ ; right, 
 καιρός, δ ; life-time, 
 αΙών, -ώνος, δ ; at the 
 same time, αμα ; to pass 
 time in public, kv τ φ 
 φανερω είναι. 
 
 Tissaphernes, Τισσαφέρ- 
 νης, -ονς, δ. 
 
 to-day, τημερον. 
 
 together with, αμα w. d. 
 
 toil, to, μοχθέω. 
 
 to-morrow, ανριον. 
 
 tongue, γλώττα, ή. 
 
 too (also), και ; denoting 
 
 intensity, άγαν, or by 
 the comp. deg. 
 
 tooth, οδούς, -όντος, δ. 
 
 top, άκρος 3 [§148,Kem.9]. 
 
 touch, to, άπτομαι w. g., 
 θιγγάνω w. g. 
 
 towards, προς. 
 
 town, πόλις, -εως, η. 
 
 trade, a, τέχνη, η. 
 
 tradition, λόγος, δ. 
 
 traduce, διαβάλλω. 
 
 tragedy, τραγωδία, η. 
 
 train (exercise), to, άσκέω. 
 
 transition, μεταβολή, ή 
 (see degenerate). 
 
 travel, to, πορεύομαι. 
 
 abroad, άποδημέω. 
 
 travelling-money, εφόδων, 
 τό. 
 
 treason, προδοσία, η. 
 
 treasure, θησαυρός, δ. 
 
 treasures, χρήματα, τά. 
 
 treaty, συνθήκη, ή. 
 
 tree, δένδρον, τό. 
 
 triad, τριάς, -άδος, η. 
 
 trial, to make, of, πειράο- 
 μαι w. g. 
 
 tribute, φόροι, οι. 
 
 trivial, φαύλος, [η. 
 
 Troezene, Ύροιζήν, -ηνος, 
 
 trophy, τρόπαιον, τό. 
 
 trouble, πόνος, ό. 
 
 oneself about, φρον- 
 τίζω w. g. 
 
 troubled, to be, λυπέομαι. 
 
 troublesome, χαλεπός 3, 
 λυπηρός 3, άργαλέος 3. 
 
 Troy, Τροία, η. 
 
 true, αληθής, •ές, αληθι- 
 νός 3 ; = faithful, πισ- 
 τός 3. 
 
 truly (really), αληθώς ; to 
 know truly, έπίσταμαι. 
 
 ίΐχχτΩΐρ&,σάλπιγξ,-ιγγος,η. 
 
 trumpeter, σαλπιγκτής, 
 -ον, δ. [τενω. 
 
 trust, to, πείθαιαι, πιο- 
 
 truth, αλήθεια, η. 
 
 , to speak the, άλη* 
 
 θεύω. 
 
 turn, to, στρέφω (trans.) ; 
 = devote oneself to, 
 τρέπομαι. [τημι. 
 
 away, τρέπω, άφίσ- 
 
 to, προτρέπω. 
 
 tusk, οδούς, -όντος, δ. 
 
 twice, δίς. 
 
 tyrant, τύραννος, δ. 
 
 Tyrtaeus, Τυρταίος, δ. 
 
 U. 
 
 Ulcer, έλκος, -ους, δ. 
 
 Ulysses, Όδυσσεύς,-έως, δ 
 
 unacquainted with, άπει- 
 ρος 2 w. g. 
 
 unadvisedly, εική. [2. 
 
 unchanged, αμετάβλητος 
 
 uncle ( by the father's side ) 
 πάτρως, -ωος, δ. 
 
 under, υπό. [φέρω. 
 
 undergo, υπομένω τι, ύπο* 
 
 underneath, to be, ϋπειμι. 
 
 understand, έπίσταμαι, 
 οίδα. [νώσκω. 
 
 , thoroughly, διαγιγ- 
 
 understanding, νους, δ, 
 φρένες, αι. 
 
 undertaking, έργον, τό. 
 
 undone, άπρακτος 2. 
 
 uneasy,to render,raparr6> 
 
 uneducated, απαίδευτος 2 
 
 unexpected, παράδοξος 2, 
 ανέλπιστος 2. 
 
 unfortunate, ατυχής, -ες. 
 
 , to be, δυςτυχέω. 
 
 ungrateful, αχάριστος 2. 
 
 unhappy, ατυχής, -ές. 
 
 unharmed, άπήμων, -όνος. 
 
 unintelligent, άνοος, ασύ- 
 νετος 2. 
 
 united, to be, δμονοέω. 
 
 unjust, άδικος 2. 
 
 unknown, αφανής, -ές. 
 
 unrewarded, αχάριστος 2. 
 
ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 349 
 
 unseemly, αισχρός, άει- 
 κής, -ές. 
 
 until, μέχρι, πριν. 
 
 unvarying, διηνεκής, -ές. 
 
 up, ανά ; lay up, κατατί- 
 ϋημι. 
 
 upon, επί. [μαι. 
 
 upward, to soar, άναπέτο- 
 
 usage, νόμος, ό. 
 
 use, to, χράομαι. 
 
 — — , to be of, σνμφέρω. 
 
 , to make, of, χράο- 
 
 μαί τινι. 
 
 useful, χρήσιμος 2, ωφέλι- 
 μος 2. 
 
 , to be, ώφελέω. 
 
 using, χρήσις, -εως, ή. 
 
 utter, to, λέγω ; = emit 
 as a sound, προίημι. 
 
 V. 
 
 Valuable, πολυτελής, -ές, 
 τίμιος 3. 
 
 value more, or more high- 
 ly, περί μείζονος ποιέο- 
 μαι. 
 
 vehement, δεινός 3. 
 
 venture, to, το?.μάω. 
 
 verdant, to be, ϋάλλω. 
 
 versed in, άγαΰός, έμπει- 
 ρος 2. 
 
 very, λίαν, σφόδρα ; also 
 by the Comp. or Sup. 
 of the adjective. 
 
 vessel, πλοϊον, τό. 
 
 vice, κακία, ή, κακότης, 
 -ητος, ή. 
 
 victory, νίκη, ή. 
 
 village, κώμη, ή. 
 
 vine, άμπελος, ή. 
 
 violate (as a treaty), λύω. 
 
 violence, βία, ή. 
 
 violent, βίαιος 3, σφοδρός 
 3 ; = severe, ισχυρός 3. 
 
 violently, σφόδρα, λίαν, 
 Ισχυρώς. 
 
 virtue, αρετή, ή. 
 
 virtuous, άγαβ-ός 3, σπου- 
 δαίος 3. 
 visible, ορατός 3. 
 voluntarily, εκουσίως. 
 voluptuous, τρυφητής, -οϋ. 
 
 W. 
 
 Wage war with, πολεμέω 
 w. d. 
 
 wait, περιμένω. 
 
 walk, to, βαίνω. 
 
 wander about, περιπλα- 
 νάομαι. 
 
 want, to, δέω, δέομαι w. g. 
 
 , be in, σπανίζω w. g., 
 
 χρνζω w. g. 
 
 war, πόλεμος, ό. 
 
 , to canyon, πολεμέω. 
 
 warlike, πολεμικός 2. 
 
 warning, σωφρονισμός, ό. 
 
 warrior, στρατιώτης, -ου, ό. 
 
 war-song, παιάν, -άνος, ό. 
 
 wash, νίπτω, πλύνω. 
 
 wasp, ψήν, ψηνός, ό. 
 
 watch, to keep, τηρέω. 
 
 water, ύδωρ, ύδατος, τό. 
 
 way (road, journey), οδός, 
 ή ; = manner, τρόπος, ό. 
 
 wax, κηρός, ό. 
 
 weak, άσΰ-ενής, -ές. 
 
 weaken, ίο,τείρω, άμαυρόω. 
 
 weal, σωτηρία, ή. 
 
 wealth, πλοΰτοο, ό, χρή- 
 ματα, τα. 
 
 wear (have), έχω. 
 
 out, τείρω. 
 
 weary, to be, κάμνω. 
 
 weep, to, κλαίω. 
 
 welfare, σωτηρία, ή. 
 
 well, καλώς, ευ ; do well 
 to, ευ πράττω, ευ ποιέω, 
 εύεργετέω ; to be well, 
 ευ έχω. 
 
 well-disposed, εϋνοος. 
 
 well-known, δήλος 3, φα- 
 νερός 3. 
 
 well-ordered, εύτακτος 2. 
 
 30 
 
 west, έσπερος, ό. 
 
 what? τίς, τί. 
 
 whatever, υςτις, όςπερ 
 
 when, ότε, επεί. 
 
 whence, έξ ου. 
 
 whenever, όταν. [πή , 
 
 where, ου, όπου ; where ? 
 
 wherever, ου, όπου w. opt. 
 
 whether, πότερον. 
 
 while, expressed by tha 
 Part. [§ 176, I]. 
 
 whip, μάστιξ, -ΐγος, ή. 
 
 whither 1 πή ; \τίς. 
 
 who, which, ός ; interrog., 
 
 whoever, όςτις, όςπερ. 
 
 whole, πάς, συμπάς, δλοο 3. 
 
 wicked, κακός 3, πονηρός 3. 
 
 wife, γυνή, γυναικός, ή, 
 γαμετή, ή. 
 
 wild beast, -δηρίον, τό. 
 
 willing, εκών, -ούσα, -όν. 
 
 , to be, βούλομα^ 
 
 έ&έλω. 
 
 willingly, ή δ έως. 
 
 wind, άνεμος, ό. 
 
 wine, οίνος, ό. 
 
 wing, πετρόν, τό, πτέρνξ, 
 -γος, ή. \τό. 
 
 (of an army), κέρας, 
 
 winter, χειμών, -ώνος, ό. 
 
 wisdom, σοφία, ή, σωφρο- 
 σύνη, ή. 
 
 wise, σοφός 3. 
 
 wisely, σοφώς , = well, εν. 
 
 wish, to, β ούλο μαι, έ&έλω. 
 
 with, σύν, μετά w. g. 
 
 within, εντός w. g. 
 
 without, άνευ w. g. 
 
 witness, μάρτυς, -ϋρος, ό, ή. 
 
 wolf, λύκος, ό. 
 
 woman, γυνή, γυναικός, ή. 
 
 , old, γρανς, γράός, ή. 
 
 wonder, to, θαυμάζω. 
 
 wonderful, θαυμαστός 3. 
 
 wont, to be, έΰίζω. 
 
 word, λόγος, ό, έπος, -υνς, 
 τό, ρήμα, τό. 
 
350 
 
 ENGLISH AND GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 work, έργον, τό. 
 
 for, to, δουλεύω. 
 
 — — out, εξεργάζομαι. 
 ' - with, συμπονέω. 
 world, κόσμος, δ. 
 worship, to, προσκυνέω, 
 
 αίδέομαι. 
 worst, to, χειρόομαι. 
 worthy, άξιος 3 ; to think 
 
 worthy, άξιόω. 
 worthless, ανάξιος. 
 wound, to, τιτρωσκω ; = 
 
 strike, πλήττω. 
 write, γραφιά. 
 wrongdoer, άδϊκών. 
 
 wrong, to do, άδϊκέω, κα- 
 κώς ποιέω. 
 
 Xenophon, Βενοφών, -ών- 
 
 τος, δ. 
 Xerxes, Εέρξης, -ου, δ. 
 
 Υ. 
 
 Yarn, νήμα, τό. 
 
 year, έτος, -ους, τό, hiav- 
 
 τός, δ. 
 yet, έτι, πω. 
 
 yet even now, Ιτι καϊ νυν. 
 yield, εϊκω. 
 
 young, νέος 3. 
 
 young man, νεανίας, -ου, 
 
 ό, νέος, δ. 
 youth, νεότης, -ητος, ^, 
 
 ηβη, η. [δ. 
 , α,νεανΐας, -ου,ό,νέο^, 
 
 Ζ. 
 
 Zealous, σπουδαίος 3. 
 zealously, σπουδαίως; to 
 
 be zealously employed, 
 
 σπουδάζω. 
 Zeno, Ζήνων, -ωνος, δ. 
 Zeus, Ζευς, δ [§ 47, 3]. 
 Zeuxis, Ζεύξις, -ϊδθς> k 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 [The figures refer to the sections]. 
 
 Accent in contraction, 11, 2. 
 
 Accentuation, 10 — 16 ; of the first Dec, 
 26, 4 and 5 ; of the second Dec, 28, 
 Rem.2; of the Attic forms, 30, Rem.2; 
 of contracts, 29 and 1 1 , 2 ; of the third 
 Dec, 33 ; of adjectives of three end- 
 ings, in Gen. PI., 26, 4, (y) ; of con- 
 tracts, 29 ; of the verb, 84. 
 
 Accusative, Synt., 159 et seq.; double 
 Ace, 160; Ace with Inf., 172; Ace 
 with Part, 175, 2 ; Ace Abs., 176, 3. 
 
 Active verb, 71 ; with Put. Mid, 116, 1 
 and 144, c; Synt., 149, (a); with 
 trans, and intrans. sense, 150, 1 ; with 
 a causative sense, 150, Rem. 2. 
 
 Acute accent, 10, 2. 
 
 Adjective, 23 ; Declension of adjectives, 
 see Declension ; Comparison of. 49 
 et seq. 
 
 Adjective-sentences, 182. 
 
 Adverbial sentences of place and time, 
 183 ; denoting cause, 184 ; condition, 
 185; consequence or effect, 186, 1; 
 comparison, 186, 2 and 3. 
 
 Adverbs, 53 ; Comparison of, 54. 
 
 Agreement, 146 et seq. ; Masc. Adj. 
 with Neut. subst, 147. (a) ; PL verb 
 with Sing. Subj., 147. (a) ; Neut. Adj, 
 with Masc or Fem. Subst., 147, (b) 
 Sing, verb with PL Subj., 147, (d) 
 PL verb with Dual Subj., 147, (e). 
 
 Anomalies, see verbs and Dee 
 
 Answer to question, 187, Rem. 4. 
 
 Aorist, Synt, 152; Aor. second with 
 intrans. sense, 150, 2. 
 
 Apocope, 194, 6. 
 
 Apodosis, 185, 1. 
 
 Apostrophe, 6. 
 
 Apposition, 154, 2; with possessive 
 
 pronouns, 154, 3. 
 Arsis, 189, 2. 
 Article, Synt, 148. 
 Atonies, 13. 
 Attraction with prepositions, 167, Rem.; 
 
 with Inf., 172, 3 ; with Part, 175, 2; 
 
 in adjective sentences, 172, Rem. 1 ; 
 
 with the relative, 182, 6 and 7. 
 Attributives, 154. 
 Augment, 85 et seq. ; in composition, 
 
 90 et seq. 
 
 Barytones, 10, Rem. 2, and § 12. 
 Breathings, 5. 
 
 Caesura, 189, 3. 
 
 Cardinal numbers, 65, a, and 67. 
 Cases, 22; Synt, 156 et seq. 
 Characteristic of the verb, 77 ; of the 
 
 tenses, 79, (a) ; pure and impure 
 
 characteristic, 104. 
 Circumflex, 10, 3. 
 
 Classes of verbs, 70 et seq. and 149. 
 Comparative, construction with, 168, S. 
 Comparison of adjectives, 49 et seq. ; 
 
 of adverbs, 54. 
 Conditional adverbial sentences, 185. 
 Conjugation, 76 ; in -ω, 81 et seq. ; in 
 
 -μι, 127 et seq. 
 Consonants, 4 ; movable consonants 
 
 at the end of a word, 7, change 
 
 of, 8. 
 Coordinate sentences, 178. 
 
352 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Copula είναι, 145, 5. 
 
 Coronis, 6. 
 
 Correlatives, 63. 
 
 Crasis, 6; with the accent, 12, 2. 
 
 Dactyl, 189, 1. 
 
 Dative, 161; with Inf., 172, 3; with 
 Part, 175, Eem. 3. 
 
 Declension of substantives : first, 25 — 
 27; second, 28 — 30; contraction of 
 second, 29; Attic of second, 30; 
 third, 31—48; gender, accentuation 
 and quantity of third, 33 ; anomalies 
 of third, 47 ; Dec. of adjectives in 
 -ος, -η, -ov, 28. Kern. 3, and 26, Rem.; 
 in -ος, -ov, 28, Rem. 3 ; of contracts 
 in -οος, -6η, -oov, in -οος, -oov and 
 in -εος, -ία, -εον, 29 ; of those in -ως, 
 -ων, 30 ; in -ης and -ας, 27, Rem. 2 ; 
 in -ων, -ov, 35, Rem. 4 ; in -εις, -εσ- 
 σα, -εν, 40, Rem. ; in -νς , -εϊα, -ν, 
 46, Rem. 1 ; of the irregular adjec- 
 tive, 48; of pronouns, 56 et seq.; of 
 numerals, 68. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns, 60. 
 
 Deponents, 144 ; Synt., 150, Rem. 5. 
 
 Diaeresis, 3, Rem. 3; in verse, 189, 5, 
 and 194, 2. 
 
 Digamma, 193. 
 
 Diphthongs, 3. 
 
 Disjunctive coordination, 178, 8. 
 
 Division of consonants, 4. 
 
 Division of syllables, 17. 
 
 Division of vowels, 3. 
 
 Dual, Synt., 147, (e) and Rem. 3 and 4. 
 
 Dual subject with PI. verb, 147, (e)* 
 
 Elision, 6; accent in elision, 12, 3. 
 Ellipsis of the Subst. on which the Gen. 
 
 depends (εν φδον), 154, Rem. 2; of 
 
 the Subject, 145, Rem. 2. 
 Enclitics, 14—16. 
 
 Feminine substantives connected with 
 neuter adjectives, 147, (a) and (b) ; 
 in Dual with Masc. Adj., 147, Rem. 4. 
 
 Future, Attic in -ώ and -οϋμαι, 83; 
 
 Doric in -σονμαι, 116, 3; without σ, 
 111, 1 ; with the Mid. instead of Act, 
 116 and 144, c; Synt., 152, 6; Fut. 
 Perf., 152, 7. 
 
 Gender of substantives, 21 ; of third 
 
 declension, 33. 
 Genitive, 156 — 158; attributive Gen., 
 
 154; Gen. with Inf., 172, 3; Gen. 
 
 Abs., 176, 2, and Rem. 2 and 3; 
 
 Gen. Abs. with ως, 176, Rem. 3. 
 Grave accent, 10; grave instead of 
 
 acute, 12, 1. 
 
 Hiatus, 191. 
 
 Historical tenses, 72, 2, b ; Synt., 152,3. 
 
 Imperative, Synt., 153, 1, (c) ; with 
 μη, 153, Rem. 3. 
 
 Imperfect, Synt., 152, 9 and 10. 
 
 Impersonal construction changed into 
 the personal with the Part., 175, 
 Rem. 5 ; in substantive sentences 
 with ως and 'ότι, 180, Rem. 
 
 Inclination of the accent, 13 et seq. 
 
 Indicative, Synt., 153, 1, (a) ; of a past 
 tense in expressing a wish, 153, Rem. 
 1 ; of a past tense with av, 153, 
 2. 
 
 Infinitive, Synt., 170 et seq.; with av, 
 153, 2, d; with the article, 173; with 
 ωςτε, 186, 1, (a) ; with οίος and όσος, 
 186, Rem. 2 ; with εφ' ώτε, 186, Rem. 
 3; with ως, 186, Rem. 4. 
 
 Interrogative pronouns, 62. 
 
 Interrogative sentences, 187. 
 
 Intransitive verb, Synt., 149, (I), (/?); 
 in the Pass, (φϋ-ονονμαι), 150, 6. 
 
 Iota subscript, 3 ; with Crasis, 6, Rem 
 
 Masculine adjectives connected with 
 Neut. substantives, 147, (a). 
 
 Metathesis,ll7, 2. 
 
 Middle verb, Synt., 149, (2), 150- 
 
 Modes, Synt., 151 et seq.; sequence 
 of, 181, Rem. 
 
 Mode-vowel, 79, (b) et seq. and 129. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 353 
 
 Movable consonants at the end of a 
 word, 7. 
 
 Negative particles, 177. 
 
 Neuter adjectives connected with a 
 Masc. or Fern, substantive, 147, (b) ; 
 Neut. PI. with a verb in Sing., 147, (d); 
 Neut. PI. of verbal adjectives instead 
 of Sing., 1G8. 
 
 Nominative, Synt., 145, 4; two Nomi- 
 natives, 146, 2 ; with Pass, of intrans. 
 verbs which govern a Gen. or Dat. 
 (φϋονοϋμαι), 150, 6 ;-Nom. with Inf., 
 172, 1 and 2; with Part., 175, 2. 
 
 Number, 22 ; see also Agreement. 
 
 Numerals, 65 et seq. 
 
 Object, 155. 
 
 Objective construction, 155. 
 Oblique or indirect discourse, 188. 
 Optative mode, Synt., 153. 
 Oxytones, 10, Eem 2. 
 
 Paroxytones, 10, Eem. 2. 
 
 Participials, 74. 
 
 Participle, Synt., 174 et seq. ; difference 
 
 between Part, and Inf. with certain 
 
 verbs, 175, Eem. 4; with τυγχάνω, 
 
 etc., 175, 3 ; denoting time, cause, etc., 
 
 176, 1 ; with av, 153, 2, d. 
 Passive verb, Synt., 149, (3). 
 Perfect, Synt,, 152, 5 ; second Perf. 
 
 with intrans. sense, 150, 2. 
 Perispomena, 10, Eem. 2. 
 Person of the verb, Synt., 146 ; when 
 
 the subjects are of different persons, 
 
 147b, 2. 
 Personal endings of the verb in -ω, 
 
 79, (b) et seq. ; in -μι, 130. 
 Personal pronouns, 56. 
 Personal construction instead of the 
 
 impers. ; see impers. construction. 
 Pluperfect, Synt, 152, 11 and Eem. 6. 
 Plural Subj. with Sing, verb, 147, (a). 
 Position, syllable long by, 9, 3, and 
 
 190,4; short by, 190,3= 
 Possessive pronouns, 59. 
 
 Predicate, 145, 5, and 146. 
 Prepositions, 24; Synt, 162 et seq.; 
 
 attraction of, 167, Eem. 
 Present tense, Synt,, 152, 4. 
 Principal sentence, 179. 
 Principal tenses, 72, 2, a; Synt, 152, 2. 
 Proclitics, 13. 
 
 Pronouns, 55 et seq.; use of, 169. 
 Pronunciation of particular letters, 2. 
 Prop aroxy tones, 10, Eem. 2. 
 Properispomena, 10, Eem. 2. 
 Protasis, 185,1; omission of, 185, Eem.4. 
 Punctuation-marks, 18. 
 
 Quantity, 9 and 190 ; of third Dec, 33. 
 
 Eeciprocal pronoun, 58. 
 
 Eeciprocal verb, 149, Eem. 1, and 150, 
 
 Eem. 3. 
 Eeduplication, 77 and 88; Attic, 89; 
 
 in composition, 90. 
 Eeflexive verb, Synt, 149, (2). 
 Eeflexive pronoun, 57. 
 Eelative pronouns, 61. 
 Eelative sentence ; see Adj. sentence. 
 
 Sentence, 145. 
 
 Sentences denoting purpose, 181. 
 
 Singular Adj. connected with Masc. or 
 Pern. PL, 147, (b) ; Sing, verb with 
 Neut PI. Subject, 147, (d). 
 
 Spondee, 189, 1. 
 
 Stem of the verb, 77 ; pure and im- 
 pure stem, 100 ; strengthed stem, 
 101. 
 
 Subject, 145 ; when omitted, i45, Eem. 
 2, (a), (b), (c). 
 
 Subjunctive mode, Synt., 153. 
 
 Subordinate clause, 179. 
 
 Subordination, 179. 
 
 Substantive, 20 ; Gender of, 21 ; Num- 
 ber and Case, 22. 
 
 Substantive sentences with δτι, ως 
 (that), 180; with δπως, Ινα, ως (in 
 order that), 181. 
 
 Superlative, 49 et seq. 
 
 Syllables, 9 — 17 ; division of, 17. 
 
354 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 Syncope, 117, 1. 
 Synizesis, 194, 4. 
 
 Tenses, 72; formation of secondary 
 
 tenses, 103; Synt, 151 et seq. 
 Tense-characteristic, 79, (a). 
 Tense-endings, 79, (b). 
 Theme, 100, 3. 
 Thesis, 189, 2. 
 
 Transitive verb, Synt., 149, (I), (a). 
 Trochee, 189, 1. 
 
 Variations of the stem vowel, 102. 
 
 Verb, 70—114; pure, 93 et seq.; con- 
 tract, 96 et seq.; mute, 104—110; 
 liquid, 111 — 115; special peculiari- 
 ties in the formation of particular 
 verbs in -ω, 116; anomalous, 118 et 
 
 ' seq.; verbs in -μι, 127 — 143; verbs 
 in -ω analogous to those in -μι, 142 
 
 Verbal adjectives, 168. 
 
 Vowels, 3. 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 Άγασ&αι const. 158, E. 6. 
 άγγέλλείν w. part, and inf. 
 
 175, E. 4, (g). 
 αΐδείσϋαι w. part, and inf. 
 
 175, E. 4, (k). 
 αιδώς dec. 43. 
 αϊσχύνεσΰαι w. part, and 
 
 inf. 175, E. 3, (k). 
 άκονειν yj. part, and inf. 
 
 175, E. 4, (a). 
 άκρος w. art. 148, E. 9. 
 άλλα 178, 6. 
 άμφί prep. 167, 1. 
 άν 153, 2; omitted 185, 
 
 Ε. 3. 
 άν instead of εάν w. subj. 
 
 185,2.' 
 άνά prep. 165, 1. 
 άνευ w. gen. 163, E. 
 άνήρ dec. 36. 
 αντί prep. 163, 1. 
 άπλοϋς dec. 29, E. 
 άπό prep. 163, 3. 
 Απόλλων dec. 34, Eem. 1. 
 άποώαίνειν w. part, and 
 
 inf. 175, E. 4, (h). 
 άρα 178, 9. 
 άρα 187, 3, (2) and (3) 
 
 and (8). 
 
 Άρης dec. 42, E. 3. 
 αστήρ dec. 36, E. 
 άστυ dec. 46. [E. 5. 
 
 -αται instead of -νται 106, 
 άτε w. part. 176, E. 2. 
 -ατο instead of -ντο 106, 
 
 Ε. 5. 
 άττα and άττα 62. 
 αν 178, 6. 
 
 αυτάρκης accent. 42, Ε. 4. 
 αυτός, use of, 169, 3, 7, 8 
 
 and Ε. 1, 5, 6. 
 af ου 183, 2, b. 
 Βοϋς dec. 41. 
 Τάλα dec. 39. 
 γαρ 178, 9; in a question 
 
 187,3,(1); in the answer 
 
 187, E. 4, c. 
 γ αστή ρ dec. 36. 
 γέ with pronouns 64, a ; in 
 
 the answer 187, E. 4, c. 
 γέρας dec. 39, E. 
 γήρας dec. 39, E. 
 γιγνώσκειν w. part, and 
 
 inf. 175, E. 4, (d). 
 γόνν dec. 39. 
 γρανς dec. 41. 
 γυνή dec. 47, 2. 
 Δε, autem 178, 5. 
 
 δε, suffix 53, E. 3. 
 δεικννναι w. part, and in£ 
 
 175, Eem. 4, (h). 
 Δημήτηρ dec. 36. 
 διά prep. 166, 1. 
 διότι 184, (b). 
 δόρυ dec. 39. 
 δύω dec. 68. 
 'Εάν 185, 2. 
 έάντε — έάντε 178, 8. 
 έαυτοΰ Synt. 169, 4 — 6. 
 εγώ Synt. 169, 3. 
 ει, si 185, 2 and Ε. 2; in 
 
 expressing a wish 153, 
 
 1, (β) and E. 1; = 
 
 whether 187, 3, (9), b; 
 εΐ — ή 187, 3, 10. 
 εΐδέναι w. part, and inf. 
 
 175, E. 4, (b). [1. 
 
 εϊϋε 153, 1, b, (β) and E. 
 είκών dec. 35, E. 3. 
 είμι with the sense of the 
 
 Put. 152, E. 1. 
 ε /cprep. 165, 2. [(7). 
 
 είτα in a question 187, 3, 
 είτε — είτε 178, 8; 187, 
 
 3, (10). 
 έ /c prep. 163, 4. 
 εκεϊνος, use of, 169, Ε. Ϊ. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 355 
 
 έν prep. 164, 1. 
 
 iv φ 183, 2, a. 
 
 έξ δτον, εξ ου 183, 2, b. 
 
 k -εί 183, 2, b; 184, 1. 
 
 έπείύαν 183, 3, b. 
 
 επειδή, see έπεί. [3, (7). 
 
 έπειτα in a question 187, 
 
 επί prep. 167, 3. 
 
 έςτε, εςτ' άν 183. 2 and 3. 
 
 εστίν οι 182, R. 3. 
 
 έ£' φτε 186, R, 3. 
 
 εω£•, εως άν 183, 2 and 3. 
 
 Ζε, suffix 53, R, 3. 
 
 Ζευς dec. 47, 3. 
 
 Ή with the Com. 16S, 3; 
 
 in a question 1S7, (8); ή 
 
 — ή, aut — aut, 178, 8. 
 fj in a question 187, 3, (1). 
 ήκω with the sense of the 
 
 Peif. 152, R, 1. 
 ην (εάν) 185, 2. 
 ηνίκα, ήνίκ'άν 183,2 and 3. 
 θανμάζειν const. 158, R. 6. 
 &εν and #ί, suffix 53, R. 2. 
 #ρί£ dec. 47, 4. 
 Ίνα, in order that, 181; 
 
 where, 183, 1. 
 Καί; και — και 178, 3, 
 
 and R 1. 
 καίτοι 178, 6. 
 κατά prep. 166, 2. 
 κέραο dec. 39, R. 
 κλείς dec. 47, 5. 
 κλέος dec. 44. 
 κρέαΓ, dec 39, R. 
 κύων dec 47, 6. 
 Αάγως dec. 30. 
 λας dec. 47, 7. 
 Μάρτυς dec. 47, 8. 
 μέγας dec 48. 
 μέν — δέ 178, 5. 
 μέντοι 178, 6. 
 /ζέσοξ• w. art 148, R. 9. 
 μετά prep. 167, 4. 
 μέχρι, μέχρι άν 183,2 and 3. 
 ρ# 177,5; with the Imp. 
 
 Pres. or Subj. Aor. 153, 
 
 R. 3: pleonastic 177, 7 
 
 and R.; in a question 
 
 187, 3. (4) and (8) and 
 
 (9),c 
 μη ότι (όπως) — άλλα καί 
 
 (αλλά ουδέ) 178, 4. 
 μη ου w. inf. 177, 8. 
 μη δ εις dec 68, R. 1. 
 μήτε — μήτε 178, 7. 
 μόνος w. art. 148, R. 10. 
 μων 187, 3, (5j. 
 Ν εψελκ. 7, 1. 
 ναϋς dec 47, 9. 
 Οίος τ ε w. inf. 182, R. 3. 
 ο'ιχομαι with the sense of 
 
 thePerf. 152, R. 1 ; w. 
 
 part. 175, 3. 
 δμως 178, 6. 
 οπόταν 153, 2, b; 183. 
 
 3, (b). 
 όποτε 183, 2, a; 184. 
 όπως 181, 1. 
 δσω-τοσουτω 186, 3. 
 δταν 183, 3, (b). 
 δτε 183, 2, a; 184, 1. 
 δτι, that, 180; because, 
 
 184, b. 
 ov (ουκ, ουχ) 177, 3; 
 
 in a question 187, 3, 
 
 , {h )' 
 ου μη 177, 9. 
 
 ού μόνον — άλλα καί (αλ- 
 λά ουδέ) 178, 4. 
 
 ου, oi, i, use of, 169, R. 3. 
 
 ουδέ 178, 7. 
 
 oifcta'i• dec. 68, R. 1. 
 
 ονδείς δςτις οΰ 182, R. 4. 
 
 ονκοϋν in a question 187, 
 3, (6). 
 
 ουν 178, 9. 
 
 ους dec. 39. 
 
 σδτε — οϋτε 178, 7. 
 
 ουτοί•, use of, 169, R. 1. 
 
 ουχ δτι (όπως) — άλΡ,ά 
 κσί (άλλα ουδέ) 178, 4. 
 
 ΤΙαΐς dec 38, R. 1. 
 
 παρά prep. 167, 5. 
 
 πάς, πάσα, παν dec 40, R. ; 
 w. art. 148, 10, c 
 
 περί prep. 167, 2. 
 
 π-ολίί• dec. 48 ; compari- 
 son of, 52, 9. 
 
 Τίοσειδύν dec 34, R. 1. 
 
 πότερον (πότερα) — η 187, 
 3, (8) and (10). 
 
 π-ράος dec. 48. 
 
 πριν 183, 2, c, and R. 
 
 πρό prep. 163, 2. 
 
 προς prep. 167, 6. 
 
 Συν prep. 164, 2. 
 
 σ^είί-, use of, 169, R. 3. 
 
 σχήμα κα&' όλον και μέ- 
 ρος 147b, R. 2; 160, R. 6. 
 
 σωτηρ voc 34, R. 1. 
 
 Τέ; τέ — τέ ; τέ — καί 
 178,3. 
 
 τοίγαρ, τοίγαρτοι, τοιγα- 
 ροϋν, τοίνυν 178, 9. 
 
 τοωο(5ε, τοιούτος, τοσού- 
 τος w. art. 148, 10, (b). 
 
 τριήρης dec 42, (1); ac- 
 cent. 42, R. 4. 
 
 'Ύδωρ dec. 47, 10. 
 
 υπέρ prep. 1 66, 3. 
 
 υπό prep. 167, 7. 
 
 Φαίνεσϋ-αι w. inf. and part. 
 175, R. 4, (f). 
 
 φ&άνειν w. part. 175, 3. 
 
 Χείρ dec 35, R. 2. 
 
 ^ελίίών dec 35, R. 3. 
 
 χοευς dec 41. 
 
 Ώς -prep. 165, 3. 
 
 ως w. part. 176, R. 2; w. 
 inf. 186, R. 4. 
 
 ώς, that, 180, 2; in order 
 that, 181 ; as, when, 
 183, 2, a; because, 184, 
 (1); as, 1S6, 2. 
 
 ώς άν 181, 3. 
 
 ωςπερ 186, 2. 
 
 ώςτε 186. 
 
PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHLNNEY, NEW YORK. 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 SRflfl&Inug's &tim$Utt tettmuu Suits• 
 
 I. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD WITH 
 
 German, $1 60. 
 
 II. WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE WITH 
 
 German. 76 cents. 
 
 ILL KEY TO WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE. 
 
 60 cents. 
 
 IV. WOODBURY'S ELEMENTARY GERMAN 
 
 Reader. 75 cents. 
 
 V. WOODBURY'S ECLECTIC GERMAN 
 
 Reader. $1. 
 
 VI. WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND 
 
 English-German Reader. 25 cents. 
 
 VH. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD FOR GER- j 
 
 mans to Learn English ; or, Neue MetlWe zur Erlernung der j 
 Englischen Sprache. $1. j 
 
 ΥΠ!. ELWELL'S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A j 
 
 New and Complete American Dictionary of the English and \ 
 German Languages, with the Pronunciation and Accentuation j 
 according to the method of Webster and Heinsius. By Wm. I 
 Odell Elwell. New Stereo. Edition. $1 60. 
 
 t 
 
 ί The attention of those interested in the study of German is specially invited to the j 
 
 J several works composing this series. | 
 
 } They have been subjected to a rigid examination on the part of the most com- \ 
 
 * petent judges, and fully tested in the class-room by the most able teachers. Such, in- \ 
 
 ί deed, is the favor everywhere accorded to them by those fully conversant with the * 
 
 } German tongue, and such uniformly their efficiency in the hand of the student, as to * 
 
 i justify the utmost confidence in commending them as forming decidedly the best i 
 
 { German Course ever yet offered to the public. t 
 
 61 
 
*- — > 
 
 \ PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 
 
 I WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES. 
 
 I. WOODBUBY'S NEW METHOD WITH THE 
 
 German Language ; embracing both the Analytic and Syn- 
 thetic Modes of Instruction ; being a plain and practical way 
 of acquiring the art of Eeading, Speaking and Composing G er- 
 man ; containing likewise a choice selection both of Prose and 
 Poetry ; to which a complete Vocabulary is appended. By 
 W. H. Woodbury. $1 50. 
 
 NOTICES. 
 
 From the Watchman and Reflector, (Boston. 
 
 " Its plan is highly approved by competent judges, as simple and philosophical, as 
 leading to the knowledge of the science and the art of the language, thus making pro 
 gress thorough." 
 
 From W. H. Allen, President of Girard College. 
 
 "The New Method with German contains all that is necessary to make the acqui- 
 sition of German easy and delightful to the student. Its style is perspicuous, its ar- 
 rangement natural, and its method, combining as it does the practical with the 
 theoretic, is well adapted to all classes of learners. The ' Eclectic German Reader,' 
 and * Shorter Course with German,' I consider deserving unqualified praise." 
 
 From O. Faville, A.M., Principal of Ohio fVes. Female College. \ 
 
 " After a careful examination of Woodbury's Method with German, I am convinced \ 
 ts superiority over any other that I have seen on that subject." j 
 
 of its superiority over any 
 
 From Professor J. C. Picard, Illinois College. 
 
 " I have examined carefully Woodbury s Method, and have no hesitation 5n 
 pronouncing it decidedly superior to any other German grammar of which I have any 
 knowledge. It meets the wants which 1 have felt as student and as teacher." 
 
 From the Worcester (Mass.) Palladium. 
 
 "The plan of this book is philosophical and practical, more so than any other 
 which has been provided for learners of the German language. Beginning with the 
 elements of the study, it presents a plain and practical way of acquiring the art of 
 reading, speaking and" composing German." 
 
 From the National Magaiine. 
 
 " Mr. Woodbury's Text-Books have received general sanction ; they are fast dis- j 
 placing. others in our academic institutions. We will guarantco for the preference of * 
 any teacher who will test -them." i 
 
 From A. B. Hyde, A.M., Prof, of Languages in Oneida Con. Sem. 
 
 "I have carefully examined Woodbury's New Method with German, and am de- 
 lighted. It is far the best scheme of language-learning with which I have ever become 
 acquainted." 
 
 From A. S. Hutchens, A.M., Principal of JVorwalk (Ohio) Institute. 
 
 "It is with feelings of real pleasure that we greet Mr. Woodbury's New 
 Method w'.„h the German, as a valuable addition to our means of acquiring this 
 noble language. lie has struck out a new and independent course, and has hit 
 upon υ happy method of treating the language." 
 
 62 
 
FRENCH. 
 
 L FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. 
 
 $1 25.• 
 
 U. A KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN FAS- 
 
 quelle's French Course. 75 cents. 
 
 ΙΠ. FASQUELLE'S COLLOQUIAL FRENCH 
 
 Course. 75 cents. 
 
 IV. FASQUELLE'S TELEMAQUE. 62 1-2 cents. 
 
 V. NAPOLEON. BY ALEXANDER DUMAS. 
 
 With Notes, Ac. by Louis Fasquelle, LL.D. 75 cents. 
 
 VI. HOWARD'S AIDS TO FRENCH COMPOSI- 
 
 tion. Λ Companion to Fasquelle's French Course. $1. 
 
 VH. TALBOT'S FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 63 
 
 cents. 
 
 I. FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. 
 
 $1 25. 
 
 Fasquelle's French Course is on the plan of " Woodbury's Method with German." 
 It pursues the same gradual course, and comprehends the same wide scope of instruc- 
 tion. It is most eminently practical ; works admirably in the class-room. It will be 
 found everywhere equal alike to the wants of the teacher and the pupil, indicating in 
 the author a clear and profound knowledge of his native tongue, added to consummate 
 skill in the art of imparting it. 
 
 NOTICES. 
 
 From the New York Evangelist. 
 
 " It is a very copious and elaborate work, supplying the pupil with the material 
 for all his necessary elementary study, and going over the ground with great thorough- 
 ness." 
 
 From the New York Commercial advertiser. 
 
 "This grammar is designed to teach reading, speaking, and writing the French 
 language, upon the same system which Mr. Woodbury has so successfully applied 
 to German. Combining the analytic and synthetic principles of instruction, it will 
 perhaps be more generally useful than any other on the same subject." 
 
 From the Philadelphia Enquirer. 
 
 "Fasquelle's New French Course is evidently a work of more than ordinary ; 
 ability, and is the result of much labor and research." 
 
 55 
 
j PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. j 
 
 I — — • 
 
 | FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. j 
 
 -βφ-φ— «φί—Φ-φρ- 
 
 i « Urbana, April 13th, 1854. j 
 
 | " Messrs. Ivison and Phinney : i 
 
 J "Gentlemen,—! have taught many classes in the French Language, and during my f 
 
 J stay of several years in Europe, I spent one year in Paris for the sake, among other { 
 > things, of acquiring the language, and I do not hesitate to say, that ' Fasquelle's French J 
 •> Course,' on the plan of Woodbury's Method with the German, is superior to any other j 
 ' French grammar I have met with, for teaching French to those whose mother-tongue > 
 i is English. It combines, in an admirable manner, the excellences of th6 old, or classic, jl 
 J and the new, or Ollendorfian methods, avoiding the faults of both. ί 
 
 » " As 1 consider the rapid and thorough acquisition of this language of the ' noble j 
 
 t French nation,' whose history is emphatically the history of Europe, and of modern j 
 
 Ϊ civilization, as a most desirable accomplishment, I am gratified to forward every im- ' 
 provement in the means of acquiring it. I am glad, therefore, to promote, in every | 
 $ proper way, the circulation of ' Dr. Fasquelle's Course.' 
 
 ί 
 ί 
 
 Respectfully, yours, 
 
 JOSEPH WILLIAM JENKS, 
 
 $ Professor of Language in the New Church University 
 
 * at Urbana, Ohio. 
 
 ; 
 
 ί From Prof. Alphonse Brunner, of Cincinnati. 
 
 * "Having been a teacher of my vernacular tongue, the French, for ten years, both 
 \ in France and in this country, I consider it my duty to state, that I have used Dr. Fas- 
 , quelle's New French Grammar ever since its publication, and that, in my opinion, it is 
 J the best book yet prepared to facilitate the acquirement of the French language. _ It 
 I combines the practical or oral system, with a thorough grammatical course— two things 
 
 * indispensable in acquiring a living language. I recommend it, therefore, as superior 
 t to the old theoretical grammars, and to those works rejecting grammar altogether. 
 
 t " The Colloquial "Reader, and the edition of Telemaque, prepared by the same 
 
 5 author, will be found equally valuable." 
 
 Extract from a letter from the same gentleman. 
 
 ί "Je suis Francais, j'enseigne ma langue a Cincinnati ; quand votre grammaire 
 
 f parut, je m'empressai de l'adopter, car il y avait longteraps que je desirais un ouvrage 
 ' qui tout en conservant un caractere pratique, me permit de donner a mes eleves cette 
 # connaissance grammatical, sans laquelle on ne peut savoir une langue qu'impar- 
 | faitement." 
 
 | From Prof. Auguste DWuville, Philadelphia. 
 
 \ " Je cherchais depute longtemps un livre que put plaire aux eleves en les instrui- } 
 
 J eant, et faciliter en meme temps la tache du professeur. J'ai enfiu trouve ces diverses I 
 
 qualites portees a un tres haut degre de perfection dans le ' French Course de M. t 
 
 Fasquelle\ et des ce moment j'ai fait adopter ce livre dans toutes les Institutions ou J 
 
 je vais, et aussi par tous mes eleves particuliers. Je confesse franchement que de tons | 
 
 les livres qui me sont passes par les mains, c'est celui que j'ai trouve le plus par- j 
 
 faitement calcule et arrange pour faire acquerir a ceux qui veulent etudier la langue , 
 
 francaise, la connaissance a la fois theorique et pratique de cette langue. Je trouve , 
 
 chaquejourl'occasiondel'apprecierd'avantage. j 
 
 l ''Le ' French Reader' du meme auteur est aussi un livre excellent en ce que les j 
 
 ] morceaux dont il est compose sont tres bien choisis et sont de nature a mteressei• , 
 
 beaucoup les eleves; et de plus, son systeme d'exercices de conversation est tres bon 
 
 ' nour exercer la memoire des eleves et lea forcer a penser en francais, Ce qui cat le » 
 
 J SltaU 9 pius eTsentiel et le plus difficile a obtenir. Je l'ai aussi adopte pour t >utes j 
 
 | mes classes." > 
 
 m 
 
 run 
 

 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 ^ Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologie 
 
 "^ ^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATIO 
 1.11 Thomson Park Drive 
 Π Ο Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERV/ 
 
 1.1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
 ^KSS- 
 
 -V^ 
 
 <•>% 
 

 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 % -is. 
 
 
 Ο0• 
 
 
 ^ £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 %■<$ 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ^k 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 >■ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 - 
 
 *,